Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 2 PROJECT MANUAL F.Y. 2020 WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT BIOSOLIDS MODIFICATIONS CITY CONTRACT NO. 994 CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA VOLUME 2 OF 2 Prepared by: STRAND ASSOCIATES, INC.® 910 West Wingra Drive Madison, WI 53715 www.strand.com Issued for Bid December 16, 2019 STRAND CERTIFICATION PAGE F.Y. 2020 WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT BIOSOLIDS MODIFICATIONS CITY CONTRACT NO. 994 _ CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA — I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly ti��. st' �� licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of -,Y oi.,....•••• 4 70, Iowa. Z RANDSA•'p _FOR STRAND ASSOCIATES, INC.® =z: WIRT oa— - ,‘ r0 16137 wA, ITS -}.. E Signature Date ' -• ` Randall A. Wirtz: Ph.D., P.1., ENV. SP. '�/0, rrr�fi��+/OWP \‘‘‘ License Number 16137 I r � My license renewal date is December 31, 2021 !SEAL Specification sections covered by this seal: All sections unless otherwise noted. l hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly _ � ,�fp,`owiti � i�, licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of ,,.� E.3 S i p r,,,r Iowa. '`` qN- �%-r FOR STRAND ASSOCIATES, INC6 `'� ' SCOTT S. H€RKERT / /,,,./. _7 P24676 •m - : rr,�,' Signature Date �. Scott G. Heckert, P.E. License Number: P24676 4 x0 W IX Asa` i 2021 #'�, �- My license renewal date is December 31, •, :SEAL ��������� Specification sections covered by this seal: Divisions 02 through 13, 31, and 32. I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared byl me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly ,k,,,;�� ��SSI `x•,, licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of ,~R -- •p `!fr,, Iowa. ;' SHANE P .': a FOR STRAND ASSOCIATES, INC.° z ZENZ tI °Ici v s I = '••.,, •` ' Signature a Date r'-,* - .. .- '. t,` Shane P. Zenz, P.E. r -- r`'��• SOW�' �`•. License Number 21579 My license renewal date is December 31, 2020 SEAL Specification sections covered by this seal: Divisions 26, 23, and Section 40 70 00. SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS F.Y. 2020 WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT BIOSOLIDS MODIFICATIONS CITY CONTRACT NO. 994 CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA VOLUME 1 OF 2 Pages Through BIDDING REQUIREMENTS NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING NPH- 2 NOTICE TO BIDDERS NB- 5 INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS IB- 10 SRF REQUIRED FRONT—END SPECIFICATIONS WITH DAVIS BACON REQUIREMENTS (EXHIBIT 12A, INCLUDING ATTACHMENTS 1 THROUGH 9) SRF-33 FORM OF BID OR PROPOSAL BF- 8 INFORMATION NEEDED FOR IOWA CONSTRUCTION SALES TAX EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE STE- 1 BID BOND BB- 1 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVITS NCA- 2 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE EOC- 2 TITLE VI CIVIL RIGHTS CR- 1 BIDDER STATUS FORM RB- 2 CONTRACTOR'S OR SUBCONTRACTOR'S AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PROGRAM.... AA- 9 ITEMS OF POTENTIAL MBE/WBE PARTICIPATION .. M- 1 SUBCONTRACTOR'S BID REQUEST FORM .. M- 2 — LETTER TO BE USED WHEN SOLICITING FOR SUBCONTRACTOR QUOTES M- 3 LETTER OF INTENT TO BID M- 4 PRE-BID CONTACT INFORMATION FORM INSTRUCTIONS M- 5 PRE-BID CONTACT INFORMATION FORM M- 6 CERTIFIED MBE CONTRACTORS M- 8 CERTIFIED WBE CONTRACTORS M- 9 — STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS SQ- 2 EROSION CONTROL CERTIFICATION EC- 1 GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS GSP- 5 — SPECIAL PROVISIONS SP- 4 DIVISION 01—GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-11 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 01 29 00- 2 COORDINATION, FIELD ENGINEERING, AND MEETINGS 01 31 00- 3 SUBMITTALS 01 33 00-11 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00- 2 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01 42 00- 6 QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00- 2 Section 00 01 10-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued Pages Through TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00- 4 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS 01 52 13- 4 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 57 00- 3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01 60 00- 4 CUTTING, PATCHING, AND ALTERATIONS 01 73 29- 6 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00- 3 STARTING OF SYSTEMS 01 91 00- 8 PERMITS 2 FEDERAL WAGE RATES 18 DIVISION 02—SITE WORK DEMOLITION 02 41 00- 5 DIVISION 03—CONCRETE CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIR 03 01 30- 3 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 11 00- 4 _ CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00- 5 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-16 STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 03 41 00- 5 PRECAST CONCRETE HOLLOW CORE PLANKS 03 41 13- 5 DIVISION 04—MASONRY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04 01 20- 4 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT 04 05 13- 3 UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04 20 00- 8 DIVISION 05—METALS STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00- 7 METAL DECKING 05 30 00- 3 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00- 8 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05 52 00- 2 GRATING 05 53 00- 3 ANCHOR BOLTS AND POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS 05 56 00- 4 DIVISION 06—WOOD AND PLASTIC WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 06 11 10- 2 FIBERGLASS FABRICATIONS 06 60 00- 2 FIBERGLASS GRATING 06 61 10- 2 DIVISION 07—THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07 14 00- 3 BOARD INSULATION 07 21 12- 2 VAPOR AND AIR BARRIER 07 26 00- 1 Section 00 01 10-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 — TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued Pages Through PREFORMED METAL PANEL 07 42 13.13- 2 INSULATED WALL PANELS 07 42 13.19- 8 SINGLE-PLY ROOFING—FULLY ADHERED 07 53 23.16- 4 PREPARATION FOR REROOFING 07 56 00- 1 SHEET METAL ROOFING (BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 1) 07 61 00- 4 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 62 00- 3 MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07 71 00- 2 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS 07 71 23- 2 FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00- 3 CAULKING AND SEALANTS 07 90 00- 3 DIVISION 08—DOORS AND WINDOWS STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 00- 3 FIBERGLASS DOORS AND FRAMES 08 22 10- 3 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08 31 13- 2 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 33 23- 2 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08 36 13- 3 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 13- 2 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00- 3 GLAZING 08 81 00- 2 DIVISION 09—FINISHES PAINTING 09 91 00-10 CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATING 09 96 35- 2 DIVISION 10—SPECIALTIES MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10 00 20- 1 PLASTIC AND METAL SIGNS 10 14 00- 3 FIRST AID KIT 10 43 16- 1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10 44 43- 2 DIVISION 12—FURNISHINGS FLOOR MATS 12 48 43- 1 DIVISION 13—SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION FRP FLAT PANEL COVER SYSTEM (BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 3) 13 34 23.25- 7 DIVISION 20—COMMON FIRE SUPPRESSION, PLUMBING, AND HVAC REQUIREMENTS IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION, PLUMBING, AND HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 20 05 53- 5 EQUIPMENT INSULATION FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 20 07 16- 6 PIPING INSULATION FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 20 07 19- 7 — Section 00 01 10-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued Pages Through DIVISION 21—FIRE SUPPRESSION WATER-BASED FIRE PROTECTION (BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 2) 21 11 00-13 DIVISION 22—PLUMBING GENERAL PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 05 19- 4 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23- 3 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 22 11 00- 6 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 22 13 16- 5 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 19- 5 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 30 00- 2 COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 42 00- 2 DIVISION 23—HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23- 5 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 23 05 93- 5 DUCTWORK INSULATION FOR HEATING, AIR CONDITIONING, AND VENTILATION .. 23 07 13- 5 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19- 6 _ TEMPERATURE CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION 23 09 13- 5 FACILITY FUEL GAS PIPING 23 11 23- 9 HYDRONIC PIPING (BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 4) .. 23 21 13-12 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES (BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 4) 23 21 16- 3 HYDRONIC PUMPS (BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 4) 23 21 23- 4 REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00- 4 HVAC WATER TREATMENT (BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 4) 23 25 00- 3 DUCTWORK 23 31 00- 5 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00- 4 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 23 34 23- 5 — LOUVERS AND VENTS 23 37 08- 3 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 23 37 13- 3 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEY, AND STACKS 23 51 00- 4 FIRE TUBE BOILERS (BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 4) 23 52 39- 5 FUEL-FIRED DUCT HEATERS 23 55 13- 4 FUEL-FIRED UNIT HEATERS 23 55 33- 4 PACKAGED AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS 23 62 13- 4 FAN COIL UNITS 23 73 13- 6 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS 23 81 26- 5 AIR COILS 23 82 16- 3 UNIT HEATERS 23 82 39- 3 — Section 00 01 10-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued Pages Through VOLUME 2 OF 2 DIVISION 26-ELECTRICAL GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 05 00- 9 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE 26 05 13- 7 WIRE 26 05 19- 9 INSTRUMENT AND COMMUNICATION WIRE AND CABLE 26 05 23- 6 SECONDARY GROUNDING 26 05 26- 4 SUPPORTING DEVICES 26 05 29- 2 CONDUIT 26 05 33- 9 -- BOXES 26 05 35- 4 UNDERGROUND CONCRETE DUCT BANKS 26 05 43- 3 MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES 26 05 44- 2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 05 53- 5 SHORT-CIRCUIT, COORDINATION, AND ARC FLASH ASSESSMENT 26 05 73- 7 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION 26 09 00-59 _ CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION DRAWINGS 26 09 10- 3 SCADA SYSTEM I/O LISTING 26 09 90-21 LIQUID-FILLED TRANSFORMERS 26 12 19- 8 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE METAL-ENCLOSED SWITCHGEAR 26 13 23-10 LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS (GROUP-MOUNTED) 26 14 15-10 MOTOR CONTROL 26 24 19-13 HINGED-COVER ENCLOSURES 26 27 16- 2 -' WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26- 3 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 28 00- 3 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 28 16- 2 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD) 26 43 13- 4 LIGHTING 26 51 13- 7 SPARE PARTS 26 95 10- 2 DIVISION 28-ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 46 00-20 DIVISION 31-EARTHWORK SITE CLEARING AND STRIPPING 31 10 00- 2 EXCAVATION, FILL, BACKFILL, AND GRADING 31 23 00- 7 DEWATERING 31 23 19- 3 SLOPE PROTECTION AND EROSION CONTROL 31 25 00- 7 GEOTEXTILES 31 3219- 1 RIPRAP 31 37 00- 2 HELICAL PILE FOUNDATIONS 31 62 16.11-10 Section 00 01 10-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 -- TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued Pages Through DIVISION 32—EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS AGGREGATE BASE COURSE 32 11 23- 2 HOT MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 11 26- 4 SEEDING AND SODDING 32 92 19- 5 STONE MUCH AND EDGING 32 94 00- 2 DIVISION 33—UTILITIES BURIED PIPING INSULATION 33 07 19- 4 BURIED PIPING AND APPURTENANCES 33 30 10-17 DIVISION 40—PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS SLUICE GATES 40 05 59.20- 4 PIPING AND APPURTENANCES 40 23 10-26 MECHANICAL INSULATION 40 42 13- 5 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION EQUIPMENT 40 70 00-11 DIVISION 41—MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT SHAFTLESS SCREW CONVEYORS .. 41 12 13- 9 HOISTS AND CRANES 41 22 23- 6 DIVISION 43—PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION, AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT TRI-LOBE POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT BLOWERS 43 11 33- 8 -- PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS 43 23 57- 8 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS 43 25 10- 9 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC CHEMICAL TANKS 43 41 45- 4 DIVISION 46—WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT MACERATORS 46 24 13- 6 POLYMER FEED EQUIPMENT 46 33 33- 6 CHEMICAL PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL EQUIPMENT (BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 2) 46 33 42- 5 SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS 46 41 23- 6 COARSE BUBBLE DIFFUSERS 46 51 21- 4 DEWATERING CENTRIFUGE EQUIPMENT 46 76 33-19 DRAWINGS STANDARD DETAIL—PIPE GATE 01-975- 30A STANDARD DETAIL—STORM SEWER MANHOLES AND INLETS 01-975- 41A STANDARD DETAIL—SANITARY SEWER APPURTENANCES 01-975- 43A STANDARD DETAIL—CURB RAMP AND TRUNCATED DOMES 01-975- 85A -- STANDARD DETAIL—STORM SEWER OUTFALL 01-975-149A STANDARD DETAIL—PROJECT SIGN LAYOUT 01-975-158A Section 00 01 10-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued Pages Through CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS GS-14 SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS SGS- 5 FORM OF CONTRACT C- 4 PERFORMANCE BOND PFB- 2 PAYMENT BOND PB- 3 APPENDICES (NOT PART OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS) GEOTECHNICAL REPORT 61 DRAWINGS OF PHYSICAL CONDITIONS (PROVIDED ELECTRONICALLY) 1970 SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT IMPROVEMENTS PHASE IV .. 50 F.Y. 1989 WPCP PHASE I, CITY CONTRACT NO. 372 34 F.Y. 1990 WPCP SLUDGE DEWATERING IMPROVEMENTS, CITY CONTRACT NO. 388 23 F.Y. 1990 WPCP PHASE 1 - STEP 2 INTERMEDIATE CLARIFIER AND PUMP STATION, CITY CONTRACT NO. 387 34 F.Y. 1996 WATERLOO SATELLITE AND NEW ADMINISTRATION BUILDING WPCF, CITY CONTRACT NO. 486 224 F.Y. 1996 FLOW EQUALIZATION BASINS FOR WPCF, CITY CONTRACT NO. 499 40 F.Y. 1996 RAW WASTEWATER PUMP BUILDING FOR WPCF, CITY CONTRACT NO. 500 95 F.Y. 1996 BAR SCREEN BUILDING, CITY CONTRACT NO. 513 51 F.Y. 1998 EASTON AVENUE, CITY CONTRACT NO. 549 285 F.Y. 1998 ANAEROBIC DIGESTERS, CITY CONTRACT NO. 550 175 F.Y. 2007 ODOR CONTROL AND HVAC REPLACEMENT, CITY CONTRACT NO. 653 19 F.Y. 2011 DISINFECTION FACILITIES EASTON AVENUE, CITY CONTRACT NO. 817 66 F.Y. 2014 BELT FILTER PRESS ADDITION, CITY CONTRACT NO. 869 60 F.Y. 2016 FLOW EQUALIZATION FACILITY OVERFLOW CONNECTION TO SATELLITE WPCF, CITY CONTRACT NO. 880 15 F.Y. 2017 WPCF UPGRADE TO INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS SYSTEM, CITY CONTRACT NO. 929 8 END OF SECTION Section 00 01 10-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 26 05 00 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes general requirements for all electrical work. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern Work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70—National Electrical Code (NEC). B. ANSI/IEEE C2—National Electrical Safety Code. 1.03 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Any equipment roughed in improperly and/or not positioned on implied centerlines or as dictated by good practice shall be repositioned at no cost to CITY. B. The drawings are generally diagrammatic, and CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the Work so that interferences are avoided. Provide all offsets in conduit, fittings, etc., necessary to properly install the work.All offsets,fittings, etc., shall be provided without additional expense to CITY. C. Hazardous or classified locations, where referenced in the Specifications or on the Drawings, shall be as defined in the NEC. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Conform to ANSI/IEEE C2. C. The rules and regulations of the federal, state, local, and civil authorities and utility companies in force at the time of execution of the Contract shall become a part of this specification. D. Obtain electrical permits and inspections from authority having jurisdiction. Costs for permits and inspections shall be by CONTRACTOR. Section 26 05 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.05 CODES AND ORDINANCES A. CONTRACTOR is expected to know or to ascertain, in general and in detail, the requirements of all codes and ordinances applicable to the construction and operation of systems covered by this Contract. CONTRACTOR shall know or ascertain the rulings and interpretations of code requirements being made by all authorities having jurisdiction over the work to be performed by them. B. In preparing a Bid, CONTRACTOR shall include the cost of all items and procedures necessary to satisfy the requirements of all applicable codes, ordinances, and authorities, whether or not these are specifically covered by the drawings and specifications. All cases of serious conflict or omission between the drawings, specifications, and codes shall be brought to CONSULTANT's attention, as herein before specified. CONTRACTOR shall carry out work and complete construction as required by applicable codes and ordinances and in such a manner as to obtain approval of all authorities whose approval is required. C. When requested by CONSULTANT, CONTRACTOR shall provide written calculations to show compliance with applicable codes or the Contract Documents. This shall include, but not be limited to, conduit and wire sizing,junction and pull box fill and sizing, handhole sizing, conductor derating, and voltage drop. CONTRACTOR shall indicate calculation method used as well as compliance with applicable code, drawing, or specification. 1.06 EQUIPMENT PROVIDED UNDER OTHER DIVISIONS A. Included in this Contract are electrical connections to equipment provided under other divisions. CONTRACTOR shall refer to final shop drawings for equipment being furnished under other divisions, for exact location of electrical equipment, and the various connections required. 1.07 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM A. Provide a complete electrical distribution system consisting of components indicated on the drawings or specified herein including, but not limited to: 1. All miscellaneous equipment coordination and related appurtenances required by power company. 2. 480-volt, three-phase, 4-wire service entrance conductors. 3. Feeders, branch wiring, and electrical distribution equipment. 4. All control wiring. 5. Access panels and access doors for access to equipment installed by Division 26. 6. Wiring between system components if equipment is not prewired. 7. Lighting fixtures, lighting controls, and associated wiring. 8. Telephone raceway system. 9. Support system design and supports for electrical raceways. 10. Code-required disconnects. B. CONTRACTOR shall connect all equipment furnished by other Divisions consisting of components indicated on the drawings or specified herein. C. Provide balancing and adjusting of electrical loads. D. CONTRACTOR shall instruct CITY's representative in the operation and maintenance of all equipment. The instruction shall include a complete operating cycle on all apparatus. Section 26 05 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 E. Provide miscellaneous items for a complete and functioning system as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. F. A partial list of work not included in Division 26 is as follows: Painting (except as otherwise specified herein). 1.08 NOISE A. Eliminate any abnormal noises that are not considered by CONSULTANT to be an inherent part of the systems as designed. Abnormal buzzing in equipment components will not be acceptable. _ 1.09 DRAWINGS A. The drawings indicate approximate locations of the various items of the electrical systems. These items are shown approximately to scale and attempt to show how these items should be integrated with building construction. Locate all the various items by on-the-job measurements in conformance with Contract Documents and cooperatior with other trades. B. Prior to locating equipment, confer with CONSULTANT as to desired location in the various areas. In no case should equipment locations be determined by scaling drawings. Relocate — equipment and bear cost of redoing work or other trades' work necessitated by failure to comply with this requirement. C. In certain instances, receptacles, switches, light fixtures, or other electrical devices and equipment, etc., may be relocated. Where relocation is within 10 feet of location shown on the drawings, and when CONTRACTOR is informed of necessary relocation before work is begun on this portion of the job, the relocation shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense. D. The drawings are schematic in nature and are not intended to show exact locations of conduit, but rather to indicate distribution, circuitry, and control. 1.10 EXISTING UNDERGROUND UTILITIES — A. The drawings show approximate location of existing underground electrical based on CITY-provided record drawings. CONTRACTOR shall excavate and verify the location of all underground electrical prior to installing new electrical equipment and prior to making — modifications to existing electrical. This shall include, but not be limited to, feeders to structures and equipment, branch circuit wiring, phone and communication cabling, instrument wiring, and control wiring. CONTRACTOR shall temporarily relocate existing underground electrical to keep the existing facility in operation and for any new construction, and all costs for relocating existing electrical shall be included in the Bid. 1.11 SUBMITTALS A. CONTRACTOR shall submit to CONSULTANT for approval prior to beginning work, shop drawings on the equipment and materials proposed to be furnished and installed. See Section 01 33 00—Submittals for requirements. Section 26 05 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. CONTRACTOR shall, in addition, submit drawings and/or diagrams for review and for job coordination in all cases where deviation from the Contract drawings are contemplated because of job conditions, interference or substitution of equipment, or when requested by CONSULTANT for purposes of clarification of CONTRACTOR's intent. CONTRACTOR shall also submit detailed drawings, rough-in sheets, etc., for all special or custom-built items or equipment. Drawings and details under this section shall include, but not be limited to, the following, where applicable to this project: 1. Electrical interconnection wiring diagrams; see Section 26 24 19—Motor Control and Section 26 09 00—Controls and Instrumentation. 2. Major feeder routing in plan and elevation, including service entrance raceways and cable. 3. Equipment room layouts showing exact locations and arrangements of equipment, conduit, wiring, etc., and clearances. C. These drawings and diagrams shall show applicable electrical switch and breaker sizes as well as the manufacturer's name and catalog number for each piece of equipment used. D. Equipment and material submittals must show sufficient data to indicate complete compliance with Contract Documents as follows: 1. Proper sizes and capacities. 2. That the item will fit in the available space in the manner that will allow proper service. 3. Construction materials and finishes. E. When the manufacturer's reference numbers are different from those specified, provide correct cross-reference number for each item. The shop drawings shall be clearly marked and noted accordingly. F. When equipment and items specified include accessories, parts, and additional items under one designation, shop drawings shall be complete and include all components. G. See additional requirements of shop drawings under Division 01—General Requirements. - PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 STANDARD PRODUCTS A. All equipment and products shall be of new manufacture per applicable specifications. B. All equipment shall be UL and NEMA approved. C. Unless specified otherwise, major distribution equipment such as panelboards, switchboards, motor control centers, motor starters, VFDs, SPD, transformers, etc., shall each be by the same manufacturer. D. All equipment and wiring shall be selected and installed for conditions in which it will perform (e.g., general purpose, weatherproof, raintight, explosionproof, dustproof, or any other special type). Section 26 05 00-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.02 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. While it is not the intention of CITY to discriminate against any manufacturer of equipment which may be equivalent to specified equipment, a strict interpretation of such equivalency will be exercised in considering any equipment offered as a substitute for specified equipment. CONTRACTOR shall submit with each request for approval of substitute material or equipment sufficient data to show conclusively that it is equivalent to that specified in the following respects: 1. Performance: a. Capacity at conditions and operating speeds scheduled shall be equal to or greater than that of the specified equipment. b. Energy consumption at the point of rating shall not exceed that of the specified equipment. c. Vibration and noise production at the point of rating shall not exceed that of the specified equipment. 2. Materials of construction. 3. Gauges, weights, and sizes of all portions and component parts. 4. Design arrangements, methods of construction, and workmanship. 5. Coatings, finishes, and durability of wearing parts. 6. National reputation of the manufacturer as a producer of first quality equipment of the type under consideration. 7. Availability of prompt, reliable, and efficient service facilities franchised by or affiliated — with the equipment manufacturer. This shall include the maintenance of local stocks of critical replacement parts equal to those maintained for the specified equipment. B. Requests for substitution shall include CONTRACTOR's reason for the request. C. If CONSULTANT does not consider the items equivalent to those specified, CONTRACTOR shall provide those specified. D. See General Conditions for additional requirements. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE A. CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain continuous services (power. controls, alarms, etc.) during the entire construction period. B. No service shall be interrupted or changed without permission from CITY. Written permission shall be obtained before any work is started. C. When interruption of service is required, all persons concerned shall be notified and a prearranged time agreed upon. Notice shall be a minimum of 72 tours prior to the interruption. 3.02 CLEANUP AND REMOVAL OF RUBBISH A. All lighting and appliance panelboards, switchboards, MCCs, VFD enclosures, motor starter and disconnect switch enclosures, junction boxes, and pullboxes shall be cleaned of debris and wires neatly arranged with surplus length cut off before installation of covers. �- Section 26 05 00-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Where louvers are provided in MCCs or transformer enclosures, louvers shall be vacuumed free of all dust and dirt. Where air filters are provided in equipment such as control panels, motor control centers and transformers, CONTRACTOR shall replace all filters with new at the time of final completion. C. All lighting fixture lenses and lamps (interior and exterior fixtures) shall be cleaned at the time of installation, and all lens exteriors shall be cleaned just prior to final inspection. D. Equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned of all stains, paint spots, dirt, and dust.All temporary labels not used for instruction or operation shall be removed. 3.03 CONCRETE WORK A. All cast-in-place concrete for new electrical equipment bases shown on the drawings shall be provided by CONTRACTOR, except where specifically noted to be provided by others. All new equipment shall be set on 3 1/2-inch minimum leveling slabs including MCCs, free-standing enclosures, etc. Pads shall be 3 inches larger than equipment being supported. B. Concrete shall comply with Section 03 30 00—Cast-In-Place Concrete. C. Provide all anchor bolts, metal shapes, and templates to be cast in concrete or used to form concrete for support of electrical equipment. 3.04 PAINTING A. All painting of electrical equipment shall be done by CONTRACTOR unless equipment is specified to be furnished with factory-applied finish coats. B. All electrical equipment shall be provided with factory-applied prime finish, unless otherwise specified. C. If the factory finish on any equipment furnished by CONTRACTOR is damaged in shipment or during construction, the equipment shall be refinished by CONTRACTOR. D. One can of touch-up paint shall be provided for each different color factory finish which is to be the final finished surface of the product. 3.05 CAULKING A. Caulk with a caulking sealant where indicated on the electrical drawings or hereinafter specified. B. Caulking sealant shall be silicone construction sealant as manufactured by General Electric or two-part polysulfide conforming to the requirements and bearing the seal of the Thiokol Chemical Corporation. C. Caulking sealant shall contain no acid or ingredients that will stain stone, corrode metal, or have injurious effect on painting. It shall be colored to match adjacent surroundings. D. Caulking shall be performed by craftsman skilled at such work. Section 26 05 00-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.06 BUILDING ACCESS A. CONTRACTOR shall arrange for the necessary openings in the building to allow for admittance of all apparatus. B. When the installation requires openings and access through existing construction and the openings are not provided, CONTRACTOR shall provide the necessary openings. 3.07 COORDINATION A. Provide wiring for all motors and all electrically powered or electrically controlled equipment. B. All starters, VFDs, disconnects, relays, wire, conduit, push buttons, pilot lights, and other devices for the power and control of motors or electrical equipment shall be provided by CONTRACTOR except as specifically noted elsewhere in these specifications or on the drawings. C. Where starters, VFDs, or other devices are provided by others, they shall be connected and wired by CONTRACTOR. D. CONTRACTOR's drawings and specifications shall show number and horsepower rating of all motors furnished, together with their actuating devices. Should any change in size, horsepower rating, or means of control be made to any motor or other electrical equipment after the Contract is awarded, any additional costs because of these changes shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR. E. All motors shall be provided for starting in accordance with local utility requirements and shall be compatible with starters or VFDs as specified herein or under the various trades' sections of these specifications. F. CONTRACTOR shall provide all line voltage power and control wiring (100 volts and above), including temperature control wiring for operation, control, and supervision of all motorized equipment, including wiring between motor starters, VFDs, and control devices as specified herein and as shown on the drawings. Low-voltage control wiring (below 100 volts) shall be provided by CONTRACTOR supplying the equipment that has low-voltage wiring, unless otherwise noted. CONTRACTOR shall provide raceways for all low-voltage wiring. — G. CONTRACTOR shall connect and wire all apparatus according to approved wiring diagrams furnished by the various trades. H. Motors 1/2 hp and larger shall be NEMA rated 460 volts, three-phase, 60 Hz, unless otherwise shown. Motors 1/3 hp and below shall be 115 volts, single-phase, 60 Hz, unless otherwise shown. 3.08 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Backfilling of all trenches beneath concrete floor and stair slabs within building shall be accomplished with gravel fill and shall be specially compacted to same density as surrounding area. Backfill of exterior trenches shall be compacted granular fill, unless otherwise noted. Compaction shall meet the requirements of Section 31 23 00—Excavation, Section 26 05 00-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 Fill, Backfill, and Grading. Refer to Section 26 05 33—Conduit for additional requirements associated with PVC conduit installed in earth. B. Lines passing under foundation walls shall have a minimum of 1 1/2-inch clearance. C. Care shall be taken so that there is no disturbance of bearing soil under foundations. D. CONTRACTOR shall follow underground pipe runs where possible to avoid additional rock excavation. See Division 31 for rock excavation requirements. 3.09 EQUIPMENT ACCESS AND LOCATION A. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate work of this division with that of other divisions so that all systems, equipment, and other components of the building will be installed at the proper time, will fit the available space, and will allow proper service access to those items requiring maintenance. This means adequate access to all equipment not just that installed under this division. Any components for the electrical systems that are installed without regard to the above shall be removed and relocated as required to provide adequate access at CONTRACTOR's expense. B. Where various items of equipment and materials are specified and scheduled, the purpose is to define the general type and quality level, not to set forth the exact trim to fit the various types of ceiling, wall, or floor finishes. Provide materials that will fit properly the types of finishes actually installed. C. All equipment, junction and pull boxes, and accessories shall be installed to permit access to equipment for maintenance. Any relocation of conduits, equipment, or accessories to provide maintenance access shall be accomplished by CONTRACTOR at no additional cost. D. Electrical equipment, devices, instruments, hardware, etc., shall be installed with ample space allowed for removal, repair, calibration or changes to the equipment. Ready accessibility to equipment and wiring shall be provided without moving other equipment that is to be installed or that is already in place. E. Locate electrical outlets and equipment to fit the details, panels, decorating, or finish of the space. CONSULTANT shall reserve the right to make minor position changes of the outlets before the work has been installed. Verify door swings before installing room lighting switch boxes, and install boxes on the latch side of door unless noted otherwise. 3.10 WORKMANSHIP A. All work shall be performed in compliance with the NEC. B. Install work using procedures defined in NECA Standard of Installation. C. Location of process equipment as shown on the drawings is approximate. D. Utilization equipment and control devices required under these specifications shall be mounted in a code-approved manner. Section 26 05 00-8 4463.004/City Contract No.994 E. Locations of utilization equipment and control devices as shown on the drawings are within 10 feet of actual positions. Any mounting of this equipment within this 10-foot distance shall be performed at no additional cost to CITY. F. Unless otherwise noted, conduit shall be fastened to building structure or equipment framework and not placed on the floor. G. Where materials, equipment apparatus, or other products are specified by manufacturer, brand name, and type or catalog number, such designation is to establish standards of desired quality and style and shall be the basis of the Bid. H. Materials and equipment of the types for which there are National Board of Fire Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listings shall be so labeled and shall be used by CONTRACTOR. 3.11 AREA CLASSIFICATION A. As noted on the drawings. 3.12 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING CONSTRUCTION A. Alterations: 1. Alter, extend, and reconnect conduits as necessary. 2. Reconnect existing conduits that were reused, cut, or exposed because of construction as quickly as possible. 3. Where wiring is involved, new wires shall be "pulled in" between the nearest available accessible reused outlets to the extent allowed by the governing code. 4. Provide new conduits for wires if they cannot be "pulled in" to existing conduits. 5. All new conduits, wiring, and electrical items shall be connected to the existing systems so as to function as a complete unit. 6. Where existing electrical equipment, devices, fixtures, electrically operated items, etc., interfere with any remodeling work, they shall be removed and reinstalled in another location to avoid such interferences.All existing and relocated equipment shall be left in good operating condition. B. CONTRACTOR shall remove all electrical equipment, conduit, and wiring associated with the structures, equipment, and control systems specified herein andror shown on the Drawings to be removed. -� C. Include in Bid removal of existing electrical material and equipment as specified hereinafter, as noted on the drawings, or as needed by field conditions. D. Provide stainless steel cover plates for all existing recessed outlet and junction boxes not being reused. Seal or cap all existing conduit penetrations not being reused. END OF SECTION Section 26 05 00-9 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 26 05 13 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Medium voltage cable and medium voltage cable installation. 2. Medium voltage cable terminations and devices for termination of medium voltage cables, including provision for electrical stress relief and cable sealing. 3. Terminating equipment for cabling above 600 volts. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer shall be a company specializing in the manufacture of medium voltage cable and/or accessories with minimum 10 years documented experience in producing cable and/or accessories similar to those specified below. B. The cable materials and manufacture shall meet or exceed all applicable requirements of .� the latest editions of ICEA Standard S-68-516, AEIC and NEMA standards. C. The cable shall be manufactured using the triple tandem extrusion process in which all layers from the conductor to and including the tape shield jacket, are installed at essentially the same time without an intervening storage period on reels or other storage devices. D. CONTRACTOR shall be a company specializing in installation of medium voltage cable and accessories with a minimum of 10 years documented experience in installation of the type of cable and accessories described below. E. Splicing and termination equipment for cabling above 600 volts shall be UL labeled. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under the provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Submit manufacturer's certificate stating the factory test voltage (at least 80 kV DC for 15 kV-rated cable). C. Submit manufacturer's certificate stating approval for very low frequency (VLF) partial discharge field acceptance testing per IEEE 400 standards (19 kV RMS AC for 15 kV-rated cable). D. Submit written approval from cable manufacturer on each completed field acceptance test. Section 26 05 13-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Provide factory-wrapped, waterproof, flexible barrier material for covering cable on wood reels, where applicable; and weather-resistant fiberboard containers for factory-packaging of cable, connectors, etc., to protect against physical damage in transit. Do not install damaged cable or other material. Remove from project site. B. Store cable and other material in factory-installed coverings in a clean, dry, indoor space which provides protection against the weather and ambient air temperature above 40°F. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All cable shall be new, delivered to the site, and be less than 2 years since manufacture from manufacturer's stock, not suppliers' warehouse stock. Manufacturer's certification of factory test values shall be submitted for all cable furnished. All specified dimensions are nominal. B. Provide a 600-volt insulated copper ground conductor in all conduits with medium-voltage cable. See Section 26 05 26 for additional grounding requirements. — 2.02 CABLE (601 VOLTS AND ABOVE) A. This specification describes single-conductor, copper, XLP (thermosetting cross-linked polyethylene) insulated, shielded power cables for use in grounded neutral circuits not exceeding 15,000 volts phase-to-phase at conductor temperatures of 90°C for continuous normal operation, 130°C for emergency overload conditions, and 250°C for short-circuit conditions. Cables are intended for general purpose applications in wet or dry locations. Provide 133%, 220 mils nominal insulation thickness for 15 kV cables. B. The following standard shall be a part of this specification: ICEA Publication No. S-93-639 for "Cross-linked—Thermosetting—Polyethylene—Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy," Class B stranded annealed coated or uncoated copper in accordance with Part 2 of ICEA. C. Conductors shall be covered with a layer of extruded conducting cross-linked polyethylene compound with a minimum thickness of 15 mils. The extruded layer shall be firmly bonded to the cable insulation and shall meet the resistivity requirements of Section 3 of ICEA. Directly over the conductor shielding shall be applied a homogeneous wall of XLP insulation. The average thickness of insulation shall be 220 mils for 15 kV cables. Minimum thickness at any point shall not be less than 90% of the specified thickness. Physical and electrical properties of the insulation shall be in accordance with Section 4.3.1 of ICEA and UL 1072. .� D. An extruded layer of conducting polyethylene shield shall be applied over the insulation. It shall be in intimate contact with the outer surface of the insulation and shall be free-stripping, leaving no conducting particles or other residue on the insulation surface. This layer shall be legibly identified as being conducting. The average thickness of this layer shall be not less than 30 mils and the minimum thickness at any point shall not be less than 90% of the average thickness. The polyshield layer shall meet the resistivity requirements of paragraph 4.1.1 of ICEA. There shall be a helically-applied 4 mil copper shielding tape with a minimum 10% overlap directly over the polyshield layer. The tape shall meet the requirements of ICEA Section 26 05 13-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 paragraph 4.1.1.1. A polyvinylchloride jacket shall be applied overall. This jacket shall meet the requirements of Section 7 of ICEA. The average thickness of the jacket shall be as specified in UL 1072. The minimum thickness at any point shall not be less than 80% of that specified. E. All cable shall have surface identification showing manufacturer's name, insulation type, conductor size and voltage rating. F. Cable shall be tested in accordance with ICEA S-93-639 and UL Standard 1072. Certified Test Reports shall be furnished prior to production of the cable. G. Cable shall be shipped to permit testing on the reels prior to installation. H. Cables with EPR insulation, CPE jacketing, or Unishield-type shielding may be quoted from acceptable manufacturers. I. Aluminum substitution is not acceptable. 2.03 JUMPER CABLE A. Usage: This cable may only be used between equipment in the same vicinity such as between the primary switch and the transformer where adequate through-air clearance can be achieved between the conductors. It is not designed for, and shall not be used in metallic raceways. B. Cable: Single conductor, flexible, unshielded, insulated cable rated 15 kV, ungrounded. Sizes as indicated on the drawings. C. Conductor: Soft annealed copper, uncoated, concentric stranded, having nominal direct-current resistance equal to or less than that required in section 2.5.2 and Table 2-12 of ICEA S-68-516. D. Conductor Shield: Extruded semiconductor with resistivity requirements of section 2.4 of ICEA S-68-516. Material shall be clean stripping from the conductor and firmly bonded to the overlying insulation. E. Insulation: Extruded EPR (ethylene propylene rubber), rated at 15 kV, minimum thickness of 0.175 inches. F. Cable Rating: Continuous-duty at 90°C dry locations. 2.04 CABLE TERMINATIONS A. Outdoor (i.e., anything not within a building): 1. Description: Preformed elastomer stress cone contained within a skirted porcelain housing and compressed to form a void-free unit. 2. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Raychem HVT, or equal (purchase cable terminations for the specific high-voltage cable being supplied). b. Substitutions in accordance with the General Conditions. Section 26 05 13-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.05 CABLE LABELING A. Cable labels shall be engraved, laminated plastic plates suitable for use from -40°F to 150°F, and shall be resistant to oil, water, and solvents. Nameplate shall be minimum size 1 1/2 inches by 4 inches. Face shall be white and the letters shall be black. Fasten label to cable with nylon tie wraps. See paragraphs below for information type and label locations. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 CABLE PULLING A. Pump all water out of the manholes prior to beginning work. B. Prior to pulling cable, a mandrel/swab 1/4 inch smaller than the duct diameter shall be pulled through duct run to ensure adequate opening of duct run. Thoroughly swab conduits to remove foreign material before pulling cables. C. Cables shall not be pulled from an outdoor(exterior) location when the outdoor(exterior) air temperature is below 40°F. D. Cable pulling shall be done in accordance with cable manufacturer's recommendations, except as modified herein, and ANSI/IEEE C2 standards. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be a part of the cable submittal. Recommended pulling tensions shall not be exceeded. Pulling bending radius shall not be less than that determined by the manufacturer or the — NEC. Restrictions of pulling bending radius dimensions shall be strictly observed. Training bending radius shall not be less than 12 times cable diameter. Any cable bent or kinked to radius less than recommended dimension shall be replaced with new cable. E. Conductors shall be pulled into conduits utilizing a tugger with a built-in tension meter. Motorized machines of any type are NOT ALLOWED for any wire pulling. Pulling tensions shall be continuously monitored and permanently recorded in a log and submitted to CONSULTANT at the completion of cable pulling. Pulling lubricant shall be used to ease pulling tensions. Lubricant shall be of a type which is noninjurious to the cable material used. Lubricant shall not harden or become adhesive with age. F. Where cables are left in manhole or switchgear overnight or more than 8 hours prior to termination, the cable ends shall be sealed with paraffin or shrink wrap caps, and supported — in a manner which will prevent entrance of moisture into the cable. Cable shall be terminated and energized as soon as possible. 3.02 CABLE ROUTING IN MANHOLES AND SWITCHGEAR A. Manholes as indicated on the drawings, shall have the cable looped around the walls, which shall circle the manhole at least 540 degrees. Where manholes are not to be looped, cable shall be routed on the walls with the longest distance between points of entry and exit. Cables shall be arranged to avoid interference with duct entrances into manhole. Section 26 05 13-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. All new and existing cable in manholes shall be secured to racks on manhole walls. Cables shall be secured to racks with split porcelain insulators and clamps, or mounted on a heavy-duty nonmetallic cable rack system as manufactured by Underground Devices, Inc. Insulators shall be of adequate size to contain all three phases and the ground of a given circuit. Fastening cables directly to support channel with wire or plastic is not acceptable. C. Cables within switchgear shall be routed in a manner that will allow adequate room for bending and terminating cables. Cables must be secured in a manner which will not result in cable weight being placed on the termination electrical joint. Cable support shall be made in a manner that does not force cable against grounded metal or which compresses cable diameter. Cable bending radius shall be at least 12 times cable diameter. Any cable bent to a radius less than recommended dimension will not be accepted. D. Jumper cable shall be routed in a manner that prevents it from contacting any adjacent cable phase or any metallic surface. 3.03 TERMINATIONS INSTALLATION A. Clean, white, lint-free gloves shall be used to handle end of cable during tape-wrapping procedures. B. Termination of the copper conductors (both power and ground conductors) shall be made only with tool-applied compression (swaged)fittings. C. Ground system connections for cable to bus shall be compression cable fitting bolted to bus with lock washers under nut. Ground system connections for cable to ground rod shall be approved bolted fitting with backing plate between cable and rod. Ground cable shield at each termination and splice. D. Termination failure upon high potential acceptance test will require complete reconstruction of the joint to manufacturer's specifications. Provide enough free cable at each termination for two more terminations to be performed. E. Scotch No. 70 tape shall be installed for antitracking on all exposed terminations. F. All terminations shall be tagged using embossed plastic tags with plastic attachment devices indicating date termination was made, name of contractor installing cable, feeder number and circuit to and from data. G. Lugs shall be bolted to termination pads in equipment using corrosion resistant bolts, nuts, and washers. Provide lock washers for bolting copper to copper or as recommended by equipment manufacturer. Washers shall be on the lug side. Torque to manufacturer's recommendations. 3.04 FIREPROOFING OF MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES A. Exposed cables in manholes shall be fireproofed as specified below. Additionally, cables shall be fireproofed in pull boxes, troughs, switchgear pull sections, bases, and pulling pits containing two or more sets of cable. Entire installation shall conform to manufacturer's recommendations. Section 26 05 13-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Arc proofing material shall be Scotch No. 77 electrical arc and fireproofing tape, or approved equal. C. Fireproofing shall be provided on cables noted above, as follows: 1. Provide tightly-applied fireproofing tape approximately 1/16 inch thick by 1 1/2 inches wide minimum, around each feeder spirally in one-half lapped wrapping. 2. Provide tape with coated side towards cable and extend not less than 1 inch into each duct. 3. Provide random wrappings of Scotch No. 69 glass cloth tape around installed fireproofing tape per manufacturer's instructions to prevent unraveling. 3.05 CABLE FIELD ACCEPTANCE TESTS A. Inspection and testing services shall be provided by employees of the third-party firm who are regularly engaged in the testing of electrical cables and who are independent of the manufacturers, suppliers, and installers of cables being evaluated. The firm performing the study shall demonstrate capability and experience to provide assistance during cable installation and termination. B. VLF Partial Discharge and VLF Tan Delta field acceptance tests shall be performed as follows: 1. Perform off-line very low frequency tan delta (VLF TD) testing of each conductor in - accordance with the applicable NETA Specifications and IEEE 400. Where VLF Tan Delta testing results are marginal, Partial Discharge testing with mapping is required. 2. VLF Tan Delta Test: Include very low frequency (VLF) tan delta testing on medium voltage cables. Perform insulation tests on medium voltage cables in accordance with IEEE 400, ICEA and NETA standards for the specified cable, and with equipment of sufficient voltage and frequency ranges to perform proper testing. 3. Partial Discharge Test: Include very low frequency (VLF) partial discharge testing on medium voltage cables, terminations and splices in accordance with NETA and IEEE 400.2 Standards. Submit discharge maps showing discharge activity along the length of each cable tested, complete with a written analysis describing and interpreting each discharge map and indicating the location of any detected discharges and recommendations for corrective action. Perform insulation tests on medium voltage cables in accordance with ICEA, NETA, and IEEE 400.2 standards for the cable specified, and with equipment of sufficient kVA capacity to maintain the test voltage. C. Field acceptance tests shall be performed on all cable after installation and prior to energization. All terminations shall be completed and tested as part of the field acceptance test. D. In the event that test results are not satisfactory, CONTRACTOR shall make repairs and replace components as necessary to correct faults. Following correcticns, tests shall be repeated to the extent required to prove the deficiencies are corrected. 3.06 CABLE IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING A. Provide the following information on cable identification label: 1. Feeder description. 2. Volts/amps. -- Section 26 05 13-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3. Origination and termination points: EXAMPLE: a. FEEDER: Solids Processing Building. b. VOLTS/AMPS: 5 kV/200 A. c. TO: Solids Processing Building. d. FROM: Unit Substation No. 1. B. Install cable labels on each conductor at each cable termination, in each manhole and in each pullbox. Additionally, at these locations, provide 1-inch colored vinyl plastic electrical tape wrap identification, (Scotch 35, or equal), around each conductor and cable as follows: 1. 15 kV individual conductor system: a. A-phase: One red wrap. b. B-phase: Two red wraps with 1/2-inch space between wraps. c. C-phase: Three red wraps with 1/2-inch space between wraps, 2. 15 kV multiconductor cable system: Three red wraps with no space between wraps. C. During entire cable installation, phasing of conductors shall be maintained and identified. Where final connections to equipment are made, phasing shall be verified and proper phase rotation determined prior to connection. D. All junction boxes and pull boxes for conductors operating above 600 volts shall be painted red and stenciled with 4-inch by 2-inch white letters: HIGH VOLTAGE 13,800 VOLTS. END OF SECTION Section 26 05 13-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 26 05 19 WIRE PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Wire. 2. Terminal blocks and accessories. 3. Wiring connections and terminations. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers of Wire: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of electrical wire products of the types and ratings needed whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer: A firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical wiring installation work similar to that in this project. C. Code Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) and any and all local codes as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring devices, material, and equipment herein specified. D. UL Labels: Provide electrical raceways, wire, connectors, outlets, switches, etc., which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories. E. NECA Standard: Comply with applicable portions of National Elec-rical Contractor's Association's "Standard of Installation." 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under the provisions of Section 01 33 00— Submittals. B. Submit shop drawings for wiring system including layout of distribution devices, branch circuit conduit and cables, circuiting arrangement, and outlet devices. C. Submit manufacturer's instructions. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide factory-wrapped, waterproof, flexible-barrier material for covering wire on wood reels, where applicable, and weather-resistant fiberboard containers for factory-packaging of wire, connectors, outlets, boxes, lamps, fuses, etc., to protect against physical damage in transit. Do not install damaged wire or other material; remove from project site. --- Section 26 05 19-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Store wire and other material in factory-installed coverings in a clean, dry, indoor space which provides protection against the weather. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRE A. All wire for permanent installation shall be new stranded copper delivered to project in unopened cartons or reels, except where specifically noted and be UL listed for the use intended. No wire smaller than 12 AWG shall be used unless specifically noted. The use of multiconductor cable is not allowed. B. Motor circuit branch wiring and associated control wiring: 1. Insulation type shall be THHN (indoors, nonVFD application). 2. Minimum size for motor control wiring shall be 14 AWG. 3. Control wiring for supervisory equipment shall be shielded, sized per equipment manufacturer's recommendations, or as shown on drawings. C. All power wiring to motors utilizing Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs) shall be type XHHW-2. D. All wiring within control panels, supervisory control centers, and motor control centers that does not extend outside of the enclosure or the motor control center bucket shall be insulation-type MTW, minimum size 16 AWG. E. Wiring in dry locations shall be THHN. Wiring in damp and wet locations shall be XHHW-2. Damp and wet locations shall include, but not be limited to, washdown areas, unconditioned spaces, exterior buried conduits, wet wells, and exterior locations. F. Refer to Section 26 05 53—Electrical Identification for required wire insulation color coding and conductor labeling requirements. Initial phase color shall be used throughout the run, even for switch legs. Colors must meet code requirements for each class voltage. Do not duplicate colors, including neutral, on different voltages. G. All wiring for intrinsically safe circuits shall be light blue. Refer to Section 26 09 00—Controls and Instrumentation for additional wire color requirements. H. Branch circuit wiring for exit lights, emergency lights, and exterior lights in excess of 75 feet shall be minimum 10 AWG. Circuits 150 feet or over shall be sized for a maximum 2% voltage drop. 2.02 LOW-VOLTAGE WIRING (LESS THAN 100 VOLTS) A. Low-voltage wiring specified in this section shall be applicable to all systems installed that utilize low-voltage wiring where such wiring is not specified in other technical sections. B. All wiring shall have copper conductors with 300-volt insulation rating and meet the requirements of NEC Article 725. C. All conductors must be suitable for the application intended. Conductors 16 AWG and larger shall be stranded. Conductors 18 AWG and smaller may be solid or stranded. Section 26 05 19-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 D. Control Cable for Class 1 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Individual conductors twisted together, shielded, and covered with an overall PVC jacket. Cable shall be UL listed, temperature rated, and plenum or nonplenum rated for the application as required in the National Electrical Code. E. Control Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and Signal Circuits wall be constructed, UL listed, temperature rated, and plenum or nonplenum rated for the application as required in the NEC Article 725. 2.03 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS A. Provide crimp type UL or ETL listed terminations for 6 AWG and smaller stranded conductor connections to electrical devices and equipment such as receptacles, switches, and terminal strips. Crimp devices shall be Sta-kon, or equal. B. Provide insulated, silicone-filled spring wire connectors with plastic caps for 8 AWG conductors and smaller. Connectors shall be King Silicone-Filled Safety Connectors, or equal. Spring wire connectors shall only be allowed in junction, outlet. or switch boxes. Spring wire connectors are not allowed for terminating motor conductors. C. All feeder cable connections to motor leads up to 600 volts shall be insulated and sealed with factory-engineered kits. Motor connection kits shall consist of one-hole copper compression lugs for 6 AWG and larger, split-bolt connector for 8 AWG and smaller, and motor-lead pigtail splice kit. Individual components shall be as follows: 1. Split-bolt connectors shall be for use with copper conductors only. 2. One-hole copper compression lugs shall be as manufactured by 3M, or equal, 30000 series. Lug size shall be selected based on motor and feeder wire sizes installed. 3. Pigtail splice kit shall consist of one-hole lug cover, silicone grease, and mastic sealing strip. Pigtail splice kit shall have locking pins for conductors 2 AWG and larger. Kit shall be as manufactured by 3M, or equal, 5300 series, and be selected based on motor, feeder, and lug sizes installed. D. No splices will be allowed unless reviewed by CONSULTANT. Where allowed, provide in-line splices for all conductor connections, 6 AWG and larger. Splice crimp component shall be Burndy UGSKIT2 or equal. Splice shall be made with crimp tool by manufacturer that allows expanded conductor ranges. Splice insulation component shall be Raychem heavy-wall, low-voltage tubing, type WCSM, or equal. 2.04 TERMINAL BLOCKS AND ACCESSORIES A. Terminal Blocks: ANSI/NEMA ICS 4: UL listed or UL recognized under UL 467, UL 486E, UL1059, and UL 1953 (power terminals only). B. Power Terminal Blocks: Unit construction type, closed-back type, tin-plated copper, with tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 600 volts as manufactured by Allen-Bradley 1492-PDL, or equal. Section 26 05 19-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Signal and Control Terminal Blocks: 1. General-Purpose Terminal Blocks: a. Terminal blocks shall be rated up to 600 volts AC/DC. b. Terminal blocks shall accept center-mounted jumper bars without increasing the installed space. c. Terminal blocks shall be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 1492-J, or equal. d. Terminal block color shall be gray. 2. Grounding Terminal Blocks: a. Terminal blocks shall be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 1492-JG, or equal. b. Terminal block color shall be green/yellow. 3. Disconnect-type Terminal Blocks (300-Volt Class): a. Terminal blocks shall be feed-through type with a knife-blade disconnect. b. Terminal blocks shall be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 1492-JKD, or equal, depending on the application. c. Terminal block color shall be gray. 4. Fuse-type Terminal Blocks with Indicator (300-Volt Class): a. Terminal blocks for applications from 100 to 300 volts AC shall be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 1492-H4, or equal, with neon blown-fuse indicator. b. Terminal blocks for applications from 10 to 50 volts AC/DC shall be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 1492-H5, or equal, with LED blown-fuse indicator. c. Terminal block color shall be black. 5. Fuse-type Terminal Blocks with Indicator (600-Volt Class): a. Terminal blocks shall be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 1492-J3P, or equal, with associated indicating-type fuse plug. b. Terminal block color shall be gray. 6. Terminal Blocks for Power Meters and Current Transformers: Provide test-disconnect terminal blocks for disconnecting, shorting, and testing current transformers and for disconnecting and testing voltage sensing inputs. Provide test-disconnect terminals for individual current transformer or voltage sensing installations, and provide a group of terminals for all current transformer and voltage sensing inputs for each power meter installation. �- a. Provide a pair of terminal blocks for each current transformer including one feed-through terminal block, one sliding disconnect terminal block with a cross-connection short-circuit slider. The pair of terminal blocks shall include the following: (1) Feed-through terminal block shall be Weidmuller Model WTD 6/1 EN, or equal. (2) Sliding disconnect terminal block shall be Weidmuller Model WTL 6/1 EN, or equal. (3) Short-circuit slider shall be Weidmuller Model WKS 2/2, or equal. The short-circuit slider shall cover the terminal block conductor screws on the meter-side of the terminal blocks when in the non-shorting position, and expose the terminal block conductor screws when slid into the shorting position. (4) Provide two cross-connection sliders Weidmuller Model STB, or equal, with connecting sleeves Weidmuller Model VH, or equal. Provide one slider fixing screw Weidmuller Model BS, or equal. Connecting sleeves and fixing screws shall be color coded for each current transformer. b. Provide disconnecting terminal blocks for each voltage sensing and neutral connection. The terminal blocks shall include the following: (1) Sliding disconnect terminal block shall be Weidmuller Model WTL 6/1 EN, or equal. Section 26 05 19-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 (2) Provide one cross-connection slider Weidmuller Model STB, or equal, with connecting sleeve Weidmuller Model VH, or equal, for each voltage sensing and neutral connection terminal block. Provide one slider fixing screw Weidmuller Model BS, or equal. The neutral connecting sleeve shall be a different color than the voltage sensing connecting sleeves. c. Terminal block colors shall be gray. Provide end plates and end brackets as required to complete the test-disconnect terminal block assembly. 7. Terminal blocks shall have self-locking screw compression clamps rated for the size of conductors being terminated and upstream overcurrent protection for each application. 8. The same manufacturer and style of terminal block shall be used throughout the entire project for all applications. 9. Terminal blocks shall have tin-plated copper current bars and tin-plated steel screws. Terminal housings shall be completely finger safe from all live circuits and be constructed of self-extinguishing material with minimum UL 94-VO flammability rating. 10. Terminal blocks shall accept pre-printed, snap-in labeling cards on both sides without increasing the installed space. Provide terminal block manufacturer's end barriers and screw-type retainers for all terminal block groupings. 11. Terminal blocks shall mount on standard DIN rail and shall be able to be removed without removing adjacent terminal blocks. 12. Multi-level terminal blocks and stacked, single-level terminal block installations are not acceptable. D. Refer to Section 26 05 53—Electrical Identification for terminal block labeling requirements. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION _ A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the work is to be irstalled and notify CONTRACTOR of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 GENERAL WIRING METHODS A. Install electrical wire and connectors in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of the NEC, the National Electrical Contractors Association's "Standard of Installation," and in accordance with recognized industry practices so that products serve the intended functions. Use appropriate wiring methods and materials for the equipment or environment. B. Stranded conductors shall be terminated using crimp-type devices specified herein. Conductors may not be wrapped around a terminal screw. C. Place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in same raceway. D. Torque conductor connections and terminations with calibrated torque wrench to manufacturer's recommended values. Provide permanent marking on lug, bolt, nut, or connection for conductors larger than 4 AWG. Section 26 05 19-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 E. Splice only in junction or outlet boxes. Splicing is not allowed in disconnects, manholes, motor control centers, panelboards, control panels, equipment, etc. Avoid splices between terminals of interconnecting power and control wiring. F. Spring wire connectors shall only be used in junction, outlet, or switch boxes. Equipment wireways (e.g., motor control centers, panelboards, disconnects, etc.), and control panels shall not have any spring-wire connectors installed; all terminations shall be on terminal strips. G. Neatly train, lace, and tie wrap all wiring inside boxes, equipment, control panels, MCCs, and panelboards. H. Make conductor lengths for parallel circuits equal. I. The same color shall be used for each numbered wire throughout its entire length.J. Terminate all wiring on terminal blocks in control panels, VFD enclosures, starter cubicles, and similar equipment. This shall include all spare or unused wires. K. Provide a dedicated neutral for each branch circuit or feeder requiring a neutral. Ampacity of neutral conductor shall match that of the branch circuit or feeder. L. Do not use a pulling means that can damage the raceway. M. Signal wiring (below 100 volts) and intrinsically safe wiring must be in a conduit separate from power and/or control wiring (over 100 volts). Signal wire shall include, but not be limited to, loop-powered devices and communication wiring (i.e., DeviceNet, RS-232, etc.). Analog wiring shall be in a conduit separate from all other wiring. Intrinsically safe wiring shall be separated and identified in accordance with Article 504 of the NEC. N. Control wiring (e.g., internal thermal overloads, lockout stops, etc.) to motors utilizing VFDs shall be in a conduit separate from motor power wiring. O. Provide junction or pull boxes to facilitate the "pulling in" of wires or to make necessary connections. All raceways and apparatus shall be thoroughly blown out and cleaned of foreign matter prior to pulling in wires. P. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors. Q. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full capacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise. R. Terminate spare conductors within equipment, MCCs, control panels, etc., on terminal strips and label as "SPARE." Spare wiring in pull or junction boxes may be terminated with electrical tape and labeled as "SPARE." All spare conductor labels shall indicate where the conductors terminate. Refer to Section 26 05 53—Electrical Identification, for additional requirements.S. Feeder connections to motors shall be installed within the motor junction box utilizing factory engineered kits as specified herein. Spring wire connectors are not allowed for connections to motors. Section 26 05 19-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.03 GENERAL LOW-VOLTAGE WIRING METHODS (LESS THAN 100 VOLTS) A. Low-voltage wiring installation requirements specified herein shall be applicable to all systems installed that utilize low-voltage wiring where such wiring installation is not specified in other technical sections. B. Low-voltage wiring shall be installed in conduit. Unless noted in other specification sections, low-voltage wiring located in office buildings above suspended ceilings shall be allowed to be installed free air, as specified herein if the cable meets NEC requirements for the application. C. Control wiring for HVAC and lighting equipment connected to emergency power shall be installed in conduit. D. Do not use wire smaller than 14 AWG for control wiring greater than 60 volts, or 18 AWG for voltages less than 60 volts. All sizes subject to NEC 725 requirements. E. Low-voltage cable splices shall only be allowed in junction boxes. 3.04 WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS A. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use UL-listed wire-pulling lubricant for pulling 4 AWG and larger wires. Wax-based pulling lubricant is not allowed unless it includes a Teflon additive. B. Install wire in raceway after interior of building is enclosed, watertight and dry, and all mechanical work likely to injure conductors has been completed. C. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors. D. Conductors No. 6 AWG and larger shall be pulled into conduits by hand or by utilizing a tugger with built-in tension meter. Other motorized machines of any type are not allowed for any wire pulling. CONTRACTOR shall provide a report to CONSULTANT for each pull indicating maximum tension reached during the pull along with manufacturer's maximum pulling tension. E. Conductors shall be installed in conduit system in such a manner that insulation is not damaged, conductors are not overstressed in pulling, and walls are not damaged. No splices are permitted except in junction boxes or outlet boxes. F. CONTRACTOR shall observe code limitation on the number and size of wires in an outlet box. CONTRACTOR shall either lay out work so that the wires do not exceed the particular box limitation or provide larger boxes approved for additional capacity. G. Panel riser feeder conductors shall be identified with colored tape at panel lugs. The same phase relation shall be maintained throughout. H. Circuiting is indicated diagrammatically on the drawings. - Section 26 05 19-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.05 TERMINAL BLOCK INSTALLATION A. A maximum of one conductor shall be installed on the field-wired side of each terminal block. If rated to accept more than one conductor, a maximum of two conductors shall be installed on the enclosure-wired side of each terminal block. Provide additional terminal blocks and shorting jumpers as required. B. Provide a separate ground-type terminal block for each shielded-cable drain conductor. C. Provide ten percent spare terminal blocks for each type of connected terminal block, minimum five spare terminal blocks total. For each grouping of terminal blocks, provide 25% spare DIN rail space. Refer to Section 26 95 10—Spare Parts for additional spare terminal block requirements. D. Maintain a minimum of 1 1/2 inches between terminal blocks and adjacent devices and enclosure wireways. E. For current transformer shorting terminal blocks, the short-circuit slider shall cover the terminal block conductor screws on the meter-side of the terminal blocks when in the non-shorting position, and expose the terminal block conductor screws when slid into the shorting position. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect wire for physical damage and proper connection. B. Prior to energizing, check conduit, raceways, outlet boxes, and wire for continuity of circuitry and for short circuits. Correct malfunction when detected. C. Subsequent to wire hookups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functionality in accordance with these specifications. D. Perform continuity test on all power and equipment branch circuit conductors. Verify proper phasing connections. E. Perform field inspection and testing according to provisions of this section. 3.07 ACCEPTANCE TESTS A. CONTRACTOR shall furnish all materials, labor, and equipment necessary for the acceptance tests specified herein. Acceptance tests shall be performed in the presence of CITY or CITY's representative and must be passed before final acceptance of the work. B. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for powered tests of each field-installed device unless specifically noted otherwise. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for device operation as powered from its power source and signals as received at the I/O modules. C. Operation Test: By operational testing, CITY will give final acceptance of the wiring system when all of the wiring is considered a complete system. All equipment shall function and operate in the proper manner as indicated in the details of the specifications and on the drawings. All motors shall be properly connected to protective devices, and motor rotation shall be in the correct direction. Section 26 05 19-8 4463.004/City Contract No.994 D. At the request of CITY's representative, demonstrate by test the compliance of the installation with these specifications and drawings, the National Electrical Code, and the accepted standards of good workmanship.These tests shall include operation of equipment, continuity of the conduit system, grounding resistance and insulation resistance. E. Individually test 600-volt cables for insulation resistance between phases and from each phase to ground. Test with a Megger whose rating is suitable for the tested circuit after cables are installed and before they are put into service. Tests shall meet the applicable specifications of ICEA S-95-658 and NEMA WC70. Tests shall be witnessed by CONSULTANT. The insulation resistance for any given conductor shall not be less than the value recommended by the ICEA, or a minimum of one megohm for 600-volt and less _ service, if not ICEA listed. Any cable not conforming to the recommender: value or that fails when tested under full load conditions, shall be replaced with a new cable for the full length. The following 600-volt cables shall be tested: 1. Cable from 170PMT-A to 170-SWBD-1. 2. Cable from 170PMT-B to 170-SWBD-1. 3. Cable from 180MCC-1A to 190MCC-1A. 4. Cable from 180MCC-1 B to 190MCC-1 B. 5. Cable from 325PMT-A to 325MCC-1A. 6. Cable from 325PMT-B to 325MCC-1 B. 7. Cable from PMT-1 to 330MCC-1. F. A written record of performance tests on electrical and control and instrumentation systems and equipment shall be supplied to CITY. Such tests shall show compliance with governing codes. G. The transformer, feeder, and subfeeds to the lighting panels shall be completely phased out as to sequence and rotation. Phase sequence shall be A-B-C as follows: 1. Front-to-rear, top-to-bottom, or left-to-right when facing equipment. 2. Phasing shall be accomplished by using distinctive colors for the various phases. The same color or variation of it shall be used for a particular phase throughout the building and project. 3.08 WIRE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Install all wiring in raceways except as otherwise noted. This includes all low-voltage wiring such as temperature control, instruments, network, phone, fiber optic, etc. END OF SECTION -- Section 26 05 19-9 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 26 05 23 INSTRUMENT AND COMMUNICATION WIRE AND CABLE PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: This specification contains the requirements for instrument wire and cable as opposed to electrical power wire and cable. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with standards specified in this section as listed in Division 01. B. Qualifications of Installers: Skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts, and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work. 1.03 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Instrument cable shall be furnished in lengths as necessary. B. Reels, coils, or package rolls of instrument cable shall be identified with the project name and other tagging identification as called for. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Submit an electronic copy of the fiber optic cable testing report. C. Furnish three hard copies and one electronic copy of the final approved fiber optic cable test report to CITY. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. CONTRACTOR shall have at least four years of experience in the installation of similar systems. CONTRACTOR shall provide documentation upon request to certify that all assigned staff have attended training courses corresponding to the type of cabling and equipment specified herein. B. CONTRACTOR shall currently be licensed to install low voltage electronic cabling systems in the state of the project. Section 26 05 23-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. CONTRACTOR shall currently meet all manufacturer's requirements for the provision and installation of all equipment specified herein. D. CONTRACTOR shall utilize and have technicians trained in the utilization of fiber optic cable certification equipment. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 SHIELDED PAIR CABLING FOR ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTS A. Shielded pair cabling shall have stranded, tinned-copper conductors, Nc. 16 AWG, twisted with 2-inch lay. B. Insulation of conductors shall be 15 mil, 90°C minimum PVC, rated for 300 volts. Materials shall equal or exceed UL 13 requirements for physical properties. C. Color coding shall be manufacturer's standard or as stated. D. The outer jacket shall be flame-retardant and weather- and ultraviolet-resistant PVC, 35 mils thick, and 80°C minimum rating. The outer jacket shall contain a ripcord and shall equal or exceed the requirements of UL 1277. Cable shall be UL labeled as power-limited circuit cable. E. A 100% coverage shield shall be applied over the insulated conductors. The shield shall consist of a 0.85 mil minimum thickness aluminum mylar tape. A stranded, tinned-copper drain wire shall be furnished in continuous electrical contact with the shield. F. Single-pair shielded cables shall be Belden 9316, or equal. 2.02 CABLING FOR CURRENT TRANSFORMERS A. Provide a No. 14 AWG copper conductor as specified in Section 26 05 19—Wire for wiring between current transformer shorting terminal blocks and metering devices that use loop-through current sensors (i.e., no current input terminals at the metering device). The conductor shall be uniformly twisted between the metering device and the current transformer shorting terminal blocks. 2.03 SHIELDED MULTICONDUCTOR CABLING FOR ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTS A. All multiconductor cables for instruments shall be in accordance with tiis section unless there are unusual requirements by the instrument vendor. B. Multiconductor cables shall have No. 20 AWG, stranded tinned-copper conductors, arranged .. in pairs or triples, twisted with 1 1/2 inches to 2 1/2 inches staggered lay. C. Insulation of conductors shall be 15 mil, 90°C minimum PVC rated for 31)0 volts. Materials shall equal or exceed UL 13 requirements for physical properties. Pairs or triples shall be numbered consecutively. D. Color coding shall be manufacturer's standard or as stated. Section 26 05 23-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 E. An overall 100% coverage shield consisting of 2.35 mil aluminum mylar tape shall cover the conductors with a No. 20 AWG, 7-strand, tinned copper drain wire in continuous electrical contact with the shield. F. The outer jacket shall be flame-retardant and ultraviolet-resistant PVC, 50 mils minimum thickness and 80°C minimum rating. The outer jacket shall contain a ripcord and shall equal or exceed the physical characteristics of UL 1277. Cable shall be UL labeled as power-limited cable. 2.04 INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET CABLE A. 600-Volt Rated Shielded Cable: 1. For communication with plant SCADA Systems and equipment in supervisory control centers, motor control centers, switchboards, control panels, etc., over 300 volts, and other areas or raceways with power wiring over 300 volts, provide 600-volt-rated, 4-pair, shielded (F/UTP), twisted-pair cables. Transmission characteristics of the cables shall meet full Category 6 performance criteria as defined by the ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 standard. 2. Cable conductors shall be minimum 23 AWG with PVC jacket and aluminum foil shield with 100% coverage. The cable outer jacket shall be industrial-grade PVC with a maximum overall cable diameter of 0.34 inches. Cable shall be CMR rated, UL listed, 600 V UL AWM rated, and be Belden 7953A or equal. 3. Cable jacket color shall be red. 4. Provide a shielded RJ45 connector on one end of each cable and an unshielded RJ45 connector on the other end of each cable. B. 300-Volt Rated Unshielded Cable: 1. For communication with plant SCADA Systems and equipment, supervisory control centers, and control panels without VFDs, etc., under 300 volts, and other areas or raceways with power wiring under 300 volts, provide 300-volt-rated, 4-pair, unshielded (U/UTP), twisted-pair cables. Transmission characteristics of the cables shall meet full Category 6 performance criteria as defined by the ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 standard. 2. Industrial Ethernet cable shall be minimum 23 AWG with PVC jacket. The cable outer jacket shall be industrial-grade PVC with a maximum overall cable diameter of 0.24 inches. Cable shall be CMR rated, UL listed, and shall be Systimax Solutions 1071E, or equal. 3. Cable jacket color shall be light blue. 4. Provide unshielded RJ45 connectors on both ends of each cable. C. Patch cables shall be provided premanufactured by the cable manufacturer or connector manufacturer in sufficient length to connect the associated equipment to any port on the equipment, patch panel, or switch. Field-attached plugs shall be insulation displacement type and shall be by the same manufacturer as the cable. 2.05 FIBER OPTIC PATCH CABLES A. Fiber optic patch cables shall be multimode 50/125 microns and shall meet UL 1666 (OFNR) flame ratings for standard compliant safety as required by the installation environment. All fiber patch cables shall be pre-terminated and tested for insertion loss. Cable performance shall meet or exceed requirements of the TIA/EIA-568.3-D standard for 0M3 fiber optic cables. Factory certification test information shall be provided with each cable. B. Fiber patch cable insulation color shall be aqua for 0M3 cables. Section 26 05 23-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Fiber connectors shall be LC-type, FOCIS compliant or compatible, and shall exceed the requirements of TIA/EIA-455-21A for 500 mating cycles. Field-coordinate connector types for cables interfacing with existing equipment and existing patch panels. The insertion loss for each connector shall not exceed 0.35 dB for multimode cables. D. Fiber connector and strain-relief color shall be aqua for 0M3 cables per the TIA/EIA-568.3-D standard. Strain-relief color shall match connector color. 2.06 FIBER OPTIC CABLE CONNECTORS A. Fiber connectors shall be LC-type, FOCIS compliant or compatible, and shall exceed the requirements of TIA/EIA-455-21A for 500 mating cycles. Field-coordinate connector types for cables interfacing with existing equipment and existing patch panels. The insertion loss for each connector shall not exceed 0.35 dB for multimode cables. B. Fiber connector and strain-relief color shall be aqua for OM3 cables per the TIA/EIA-568.3-D standard. Strain-relief color shall match connector color. C. Fiber patch panels or termination enclosures shall be provided as specified under — Section 26 09 00—Controls and Instrumentation. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS AND SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Shielded pair, industrial Ethernet, and fiber optic cabling specified in this section shall be installed in conduit and may not be run free-air or in nonmetallic tubing such as innerduct. 3.02 FIBER OPTIC CABLE INSTALLATION A. Use cable tie tool to install cable ties to manage cable slack. Cable tie tool shall apply appropriate pressure to the cable bundles so not to damage cable and provide a smooth cut of excess cable tie. Cable ties MUST be able to be turned freely around the bundle of cable. Cable bundles shall be limited to 3-inch diameter. B. Use Velcro bands to secure cable bundles within interior pull boxes and fiber patch panels. — C. Avoid excessive and sharp bends. See that manufacturer's recommended bend radius and pulling tensions are not exceeded. D. Fittings or connections are allowed only at the input and output of devices Splicing shall not be accepted in any cable run. The entire cable run shall be replaced in all such instances. E. All cable shall be installed in conduit. F. Conduit, raceways, and outlet boxes shall be provided as required. G. All fiber optic cables installed through and within process areas shall be installed in conduit. H. Cable slack shall be provided at end of the fiber optic cable. This slack is exclusive of the length of fiber that is required to accommodate termination requirements and is intended to provide for cable repair and/or equipment relocation. The cable slack snail be stored in a Section 26 05 23-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 fashion as to protect it from damage and be secured in the termination enclosure or a separate enclosure designated for this purpose. Multiple cables may share a common enclosure. A minimum of 15 feet of slack cable shall be coiled and secured at each end of the fiber optic cable. Exact cable termination locations shall be field verified with CITY and CONSULTANT. I. Fiber optic cables shall be pulled into conduits utilizing a tugger with built-in tension meter. CONTRACTOR shall provide a report to CONSULTANT for each pull indicating maximum tension reached during the pull along with manufacturer's maximum pulling tension. Motorized machines of any type are not allowed for any fiber optic cable pulling. J. All spare fibers shall be terminated on spare fiber patch panel ports with protective plugs. 3.03 GROUNDING A. The shielded connection for shielded network cabling shall be connected at the network switch or patch panel and not at the field device connection. Ground patch panels and network switches accepting shielded network cables. B. Shielded cabling shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to minimize electrical noise and interference to associated instruments. Refer to instrument manufacturer's instructions for additional requirements. C. Ends of signal wires shall be sealed to prevent the migration of moisture into the cable and to prevent unintentional grounding of the shield at the open end. Seal signal wires using a minimum 1-inch piece of heat-shrink tubing installed over PVC jacket and individual wires, and heat-shrink to a watertight fit. D. All shields must be grounded. E. Shields shall be grounded at one point only. Shielded cabling shall be isolated and left open at the instrument. F. Cable shield grounds shall be isolated from control system signal grounds, except at instrument system grounding electrodes. G. The control room instrument ground shall be separate and isolated from the electrical power grounding system.3.04 FIBER OPTIC TESTING A. The fibers utilized in the installed cable shall be traceable to the manufacturer. Upon request by CITY, CONTRACTOR shall provide cable manufacturer's test report for each reel of cable provided. These test reports shall include (1) manufacturers on reel attenuation test results at the specified wavelengths for each optical fiber of each reel prior to shipment from the manufacture and, (2) on-the-reel bandwidth performance as tested at the factory. B. Prior to installation, CONTRACTOR shall perform tests deemed necessary by CONTRACTOR to demonstrate integrity of all optical fiber. Tests may range from a simple "flashlight test" to an OTDR of each optical fiber of each cable reel prior to installation. Section 26 05 23-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Upon completion of cable installation and termination, the fiber optic cabling shall be tested to include: 1. Optical Attenuation ("Insertion Loss" Method). 2. Verification of Link Integrity (OTDR) if the cable has been spliced. D. Optical Attenuation shall be measured on all terminated optical fibers in both directions of -- transmission using the "Insertion Loss" method. Measurement shall be inclusive of the optical connectors and couplings installed at the system endpoints.Access jumpers shall be used at both the transmit and receive ends so that an accurate measurement of connector losses is made. Fibers shall be tested in accordance with the IEC 61280-4-1 standard, utilizing 1, 2, or 3 reference cables, as needed. E. Attenuation of optical fibers shall not exceed the values calcu ated as follows: Attenuation (max.) = 2*C+L*F+S dB, where C is the maximum allowable connector loss (in dB), L is the length of the run (in kilometers), and F is the maximum allowable fiber loss (in dB/km). S is the total splice loss (number of splices* max. attenuation per splice). F. Fiber runs that contain splices shall be tested for Verification of Link Integrity (OTDR). All fibers, even those that are left unterminated, shall be documented in one direction of transmission using an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer. Multimode fibers shall be tested at 850 nm (nominal). The OTDR(s) shall incorporate high-resolution optics optimized for viewing of short cable sections. Access jumpers of adequate length to allow viewing of the entire length of the cable, including the connectors at the launch and receive end, shall be used. G. OTDR traces revealing a point discontinuity greater than 0.2 dB in a multimode fiber, or 0.1 dB in a single mode fiber (if applicable), at any of the tested wavelengths, or any discontinuity showing a reflection at that point shall be a valid basis for rejection of that fiber by CITY. The installation of that cable shall be reviewed in an effort to remove any external stress that may be causing the fault. If such efforts do not remove the fault, that cable and the associated terminations shall be replaced at the expense of CONTRACTOR. H. Upon completion of the installation, CONTRACTOR shall provide three complete test reports to CONSULTANT for review. Documentation shall include the following items: 1. Test results submitted in hard copy or in electronic form (preferred). Where documentation provided in electronic form requires unique software for viewing test results, CONTRACTOR shall provide one licensed copy of the software along with the above documentation. -� 2. Insertion loss test data, including a record of test wavelengths, cable type, fiber and cable (or Outlet) I.D., measurement direction, test equipment type. model and serial number, date, reference setup, and crew member name(s). 3. OTDR traces (where applicable), including individual optical fiber"signatures" obtained as specified above. Trace files shall be so named as to identify each individual fiber by location in the cable system and fiber number or color. Where paper copy documentation of OTDR traces are provided, the vertical and horizontal scales shall be set so as to maximize the detail in each backscatter trace. The portion of the trace which depicts the fiber under test shall extend a minimum of 50% of the display area. END OF SECTION Section 26 05 23-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 26 05 26 SECONDARY GROUNDING PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Power system grounding. 2. Electrical equipment and raceway grounding and bonding.B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Indicate location of system grounding electrode connections and routing of grounding electrode conductor. B. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Ground Rods: Copper-bonded, 5/8-inch diameter; minimum length 10 feet. B. Ground Connections Below Grade: Exothermic type by Cadweld, compression type by Thomas & Betts, or equal. Compression connectors shall be prefilled with an oxide inhibitor. C. Ground Fittings: O-Z/Gedney, Type ABG, CG, TG, KG, GBL, or equal. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Compression-type connectors shall be installed with the manufacturer recommended tools. Compression dies shall emboss index on the connector when installed correctly.An indenter crimp shall be made on ground rods prior to connection of grounding conductor. B. Provide a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor for each feeder and branch circuit. Provide a dedicated neutral conductor sized to match the circuit or feeder conductors for each feeder or branch circuit requiring a neutral. Terminate each end on a grounding lug, bus, or bushing. C. Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposed noncurrent carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground connectors, and cold water plumbing systems. Section 26 05 26-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 D. Connect grounding electrode conductors to metal water piping, metal frame of building or structure, structural reinforcing bars, and lightning protection system ground conductors using suitable ground clamps. Make connections to flanged piping at a point ahead of meter or service shutoff valve. Provide jumper connection across meter or service shutoff valve. E. Ground system, transformer neutrals, and equipment as required by code and local ordinances. F. All feeder neutrals shall be connected to neutral at only one point in the MCC or switchboard. G. All bare copper conductors installed outdoors shall be buried a minimum of 2 feet below grade. H. Water system grounds and a minimum of three ground rods at 15-foot separations near service or feeder entrance of each building shall be provided and ground wires must attach to point ahead of meter or service shutoff valve. These shall be connected to ground bus by conductors sized to code requirements. The above are minimum requirements. I. All grounding electrode conductors shall be installed in PVC conduit. All conduit bends shall - be made using sweep elbows. Conduit bodies and 90-degree bends are lot allowed. J. Include ground for grounded receptacles, light fixtures, telephone system, motors, and equipment items shown on the drawings. K. Flexible connections do not qualify for ground. All flexible connections must have separate green ground wire from motor base, lighting fixture, or equipment frame to conduit system. L. Provide a separate grounding conductor system for the grounding of all lighting fixtures and devices installed in the same conduit as the branch circuit conductors. Ground conductors shall be individually connected at each fixture or device. M. All equipment in NEMA 4X areas that are fed from circuits in PVC conduit shall be provided with a separate green ground wire that is terminated at the metallic condhit system and the equipment. N. Separately derived systems as defined by the National Electrical Code shall be grounded as such. This shall include, but not be limited to, 4-wire transformers. O. Refer to Section 26 05 23—Instrument and Communication Wire and Cable for additional grounding requirements. 3.02 MEDIUM VOLTAGE SYSTEM GROUNDING A. Provide full-size 600 V copper THHN/THWN or XHHW-2 grounding conductor in each conduit, raceway, or enclosure that contains high-voltage conductors. Terminate at ground bus of equipment containing high-voltage terminations. Connect to ground rod and grounding conductor in manhole. _ Section 26 05 26-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Bond all conduits containing high-voltage conductors or secondary-service conductors to penetrated enclosures using grounding bushing and 4 AWG copper conductor. Attach to penetrated enclosure using compression lug on stud or bolt and Belleville washers. C. Bond all conduits carrying individual grounding or grounding electrode conductors with grounding bushing and separate No. 4 copper grounding conductor to ground bus. D. Provide 10 AWG stranded wire from each termination shield drain wire to ground bus within enclosure. Connect to nearest grounded conductor if ground bus is not within 24 inches. Route shield drains away from energized parts. Make connections with "Sta-Kon"-type terminals or tool-applied tap connectors. 3.03 TESTING A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. B. Provide ground system resistance test report for each ground grid. Test reports shall document ground system resistance following the three-point "Fall-of-Potential" test. The test results shall include a graph of the results plus a diagram of the testing layout. The remote current probe (C2) shall be placed a minimum of 100 feet from the ground system potential/current probe (P1/C1) or as required to provide sufficient spacing to demonstrate a resistance plateau on the graph. The ground resistance shall be tested with the potential probe (P2) between the P1/C1 probe and the C2 probe at 10% intervals starting at 0% and ending at 100% of the distance between P1/C1 and C2, 11 points total. A single point of measurement is not acceptable, and the two-point method of ground system testing shall only be used where there is no or insufficient "open earth" area to use the three-point Fall-of-Potential method. Resistance at any point in the grounding system shall not exceed 5 ohms. All ground system tests shall be witnessed by CONSULTANT or CITY. CONSULTANT shall be notified a minimum of 72 hours in advance of all ground system testing. C. The test meter shall be Associated Research Vibroground test set with null balance, James A. Biddle Megger Earth-Tester-Null Balance, or equal. All ground system tests shall be performed in accordance with the procedures outlined in the instruction manuals of the ground system test report. D. Ground resistance testing shall be performed with all rods connected and shall be isolated from all metallic connections, such as from the ground rod to other grounded structures and electrical system neutrals. E. Multiple ground rod grids shall be isolated from all metallic connections such as from grid under test to other grounded structures and electrical system neutrals. F. Provide test report using the attached Form 26 05 26. Each ground grid, including service entrance transformers, switchboards, etc., shall have a form submitted. END OF SECTION Section 26 05 26-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 FORM 26 05 26 GROUND ROD RESISTANCE TO EARTH TEST RECORD 1. DATE — 2. PROJECT NAME 3. LOCATION OF TEST 4. GROUND ROD TYPE DIAMETER LENGTH 5. TEST METHOD INSTRUMENT TYPE SERIAL NO. 6. REQUIRED MAXIMUM RESISTANCE TO EARTH 7. MEASURED RESISTANCE TO EARTH GROUND ROD SYSTEM Ground System Resistance Test 16 15 ` 14 -- 13 — 12 � 11 10 i 1 9 . I E 8 7 O 6I 5 4 3 = - ' - - 2 1 ' --1 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 Feet _ TEST PERFORMED BY: Signature TEST WITNESSED BY: Signature Section 26 05 26-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 26 05 29 SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Conduit and equipment support members. 2. Fastening hardware. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Support systems shall be adequate for weight of equipment and conduit, including wiring, which they carry. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A. Support Members: 1. 316 stainless steel in exterior locations and NEMA 4X areas. PVC-coated steel in Class I locations and where used with PVC-coated conduit. 2. Hot-dipped galvanized steel in all other areas. B. Hardware: 1. Stainless steel in exterior locations, NEMA 4X areas, and Class I locations. 2. Hot-dipped galvanized steel in all other areas. C. Manufacturers: Unistrut P-1000, B-line, Superstrut, or equal. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All supporting devices and support structures shall be constructed such that the structure adequately supports the load of the equipment installed on it including any wind and/or snow loads. Provide additional support members to those shown on the Drawings to adequately support load. Section 26 05 29-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet and junction boxes to builcng structure using expansion anchors or support members. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps. Provide standoffs supports as specified in other technical sections. C. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls; expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls; and self- - drilling anchors or expansion anchors on concrete surfaces. D. Where support members are used for conduit, cutoff ends shall be groLnd smooth. Cutoff PVC-coated support members shall be ground smooth and touched up with PVC coating material from the manufacturer. E. Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit. F. Do not use powder-actuated anchors. G. Do not drill structural steel members. H. Fabricate supports with welded end caps and all welds and surfaces ground smooth for neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with steel spring-lock washers under all nuts. I. In wet locations, install free-standing electrical equipment on concrete pads. Anchor all equipment to adjacent walls with standoffs and caulk. J. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with a minimum of fou- anchors. K. Do not use chain, wire rope, or perforated strap hangers. L. All welds shall be continuous and ground smooth. END OF SECTION Section 26 05 29-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 26 05 33 CONDUIT PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Rigid metal conduit and fittings. 2. Rigid aluminum conduit. 3. PVC externally and internally coated galvanized rigid metal conduit. 4. Polyvinyl chloride conduit and fittings. 5. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit and fittings. 6. Conduit seals and special fittings. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI C80.1—Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC). B. ANSI C80.5—Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit (ERAC). C. ANSI/NEMA FB 1—Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable. D. NEMA RN 1—Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers of Raceways: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of electrical raceways of the types and capacities required whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer: A firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical wiring installation work similar to that for the project. C. Code Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) and any and all local codes as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring devices, material, and equipment herein specified. D. UL Labels: Provide electrical cable, raceways, wire, connectors, outlets, switches, etc., which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories. E. Prior to shipment to the site, all conduit provided shall be new, unused material, and shall not have been stored outdoors or exposed to weather. F. NECA Standard: Comply with applicable portions of National Electrical Contractor's Association's "Standard of Installation." Section 26 05 33-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Provide color-coded thread protectors on the exposed threads of threaded rigid metal conduit. B. Handle conduit carefully to prevent end damage and to avoid scoring the finish. C. Store conduit inside and protect from weather. When necessary to store outdoors, elevate well above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 RIGID METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1 and UL6. Heavy wall seamless tubing with hot-dipped galvanized coating. B. Conduit bodies for rigid steel conduit shall be as manufactured by Appleton, Form 35, or equal, and be constructed of stamped steel for sizes 2 inches and under, and cast malleable iron for sizes over 2 inches. Conduit bodies shall have built-in pulling rollers, domed gasketed covers, and stainless steel screws. Covers for conduit bodies must have bolts that thread into the conduit body. Snaptight and wedgenut covers are not allowed. CONTRACTOR shall select body style and size according to application. C. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.5 and UL6. Heavy wall. D. Conduit bodies for rigid aluminum conduit shall be as manufactured by Appleton, Form 85, or equal, and be constructed of pressure-cast, copper-free aluminum for sizes 2 inches and under, and sand-cast, copper-free aluminum for sizes over 2 inches. Conduit bodies shall have built-in pulling rollers, domed gasketed covers, and stainless steel screws. Covers for conduit bodies must have bolts that thread into the conduit body. Snaptight and wedgenut covers are not allowed. CONTRACTOR shall select body style and size per application. E. PVC-coated conduit and fittings shall be internally and externally hot dipped galvanized rigid metal conduit with hot dipped galvanized threads and PVC coating. PVC coating shall be UL listed with rigid metal conduit as the primary means of corrosion protection for the conduit, and PVC coating shall have an external 40 mil thickness with an internal 2 mil urethane coating. Acceptable manufacturers shall be Plasti-bond RedH2OT by Robroy Industries, Ocal-Blue by Thomas & Betts, or equal. PVC-coated conduit and fittings shall meet the following listings and manufacturing standards, without exception. All installers shall be field-certified from the factory for installation and shall provide proof of certification: 1. ANSI C80.1. -` 2. UL6. 3. NEMA RN1. Section 26 05 33-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 F. Conduit bodies for PVC-coated rigid conduit shall be as manufactured by Plasti-bond RedH2OT by Robroy Industries, Ocal-Blue by Thomas & Betts, or equal, and have a 40 mil PVC exterior coating and 2 mil red urethane interior coating. Conduit bodies shall be Form 8 style or pulling elbow and include domed, gasketed covers and stainless steel screws. Covers for conduit bodies must have bolts that thread into the conduit body. Snaptight and wedgenut covers are not allowed. CONTRACTOR shall select body style and size according to application. G. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B; threaded-type material to match conduit. For hazardous locations, fittings and conduit bodies shall meet the requirements of UL 886. Split couplings are not allowed. H. Supports: One-hole straps with conduit clamps and backspacers shall be used for surface-mounted conduit. Where standoffs are required, provide conduit clamps and supporting devices as specified in Section 26 05 29—Supporting Devices. Support material shall match that of the conduit type provided. 2.02 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE CONDUIT (PVC)AND FITTINGS A. Conduit: Heavy wall rigid, Schedule 40, Schedule 80 where noted, UL listed for underground, encased, and aboveground applications. PVC conduit installed in exterior locations shall be UV resistant. B. Conduit bodies for PVC conduit shall be as manufactured by Carlon, or equal, and be suitable for use with Schedule 40 or Schedule 80 PVC conduit. Conduit bodies shall have smooth hubs, textured lids, and foam-in-place gaskets. CONTRACTOR shall select body style and size per application. C. Supports: Two-hole nonmetallic clamps or conduit support straps shall be used for surface-mounted conduit. Where standoffs are required, provide pipe straps and supporting devices as specified in Section 26 05 29—Supporting Devices. Support material shall match that of the conduit type being provided. 2.03 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: 1. Conduit: Spiral-wound, electrogalvanized, single-strip steel with integral grounding conductor continuously enclosed within the entire length of the convolutions. The flexible PVC jacket shall be sunlight-resistant, flame-retardant, and resistant to damage from mild acids. Conduit shall be UL Listed and be rated for installation in Class I, Division 2, Groups C and D locations. Conduit shall be Liquatite Type LA, or equal. 2. Fittings: UL listed with thermoplastic elastomer sealing gasket. a. Provide stainless-steel fittings outdoors and in NEMA 4X locations, unless noted otherwise. b. Provide electro-zinc plated steel fittings in all other areas, unless noted otherwise. B. Liquidtight Flexible Non-Metallic Conduit:1. Conduit: Helically-wound, Type B, PVC construction with a continuous spiral of rigid PVC embedded within the PVC wall. The flexible PVC wall shall be sunlight-resistant, flame-retardant, and resistant to damage from mild acids. Conduit shall be UL Listed and be rated for installation in Class I, Division 2, Groups C and D locations. Conduit shall be Liquatite Type NM, or equal. Section 26 05 33-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 — 2. Fittings: UL listed with thermoplastic elastomer sealing gasket. Fittings shall be non-metallic nylon and rated for use with Type B liquidtight non-metallic conduit. 2.04 CONDUIT SEALS AND SPECIAL FITTINGS A. Conduit seal-offs for Class I Locations: Robroy Industries Plasti-Bond Red H2OT Series EYS seal fittings and Crouse Hinds "Chico A" sealing compound, Arrow-Hart, or equal. B. Conduit Seals: Duct sealing compound, OZ Gedney Type DUX, or equa C. Expansion Fittings: Crouse Hinds or Robroy type XJG, or equal, for rigid, IMC, or PVC-coated rigid conduit. Carlon E945 Series, or equal for PVC conduit. D. Expansion Deflection Fittings: O-Z type "DX," Crouse Hinds, type XD (PVC conduit only), or Appleton. E. Ground Bushings: Crouse Hinds Model GLL, or equal. F. Mechanical Seals: 316 stainless steel, Link Seal, or equal. Link seals shall be provided with 316 stainless steel bolts, nuts, and fasteners. G. Watertight Hubs: Diecast, insulated and gasketed, rated for wet or dry locations indoors or outdoors. Watertight hubs shall be Appleton HUBXXXDN, Crouse-Hincs Myers Hubs, or equal. H. Conduit Plugs: Kwik N Sure pipe plug as manufactured by Cherne Industries, or equal. Plug shall include natural rubber 0-ring with galvanized wing nut and hex nut. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUIT SIZING, ARRANGEMENT, AND SUPPORT A. Size conduits for branch circuit conductors, control wires, and instrumentation cables so as to have not less than 25% spare capacity after installation; 3/4 inch minimum size. Minimum size for liquidtight flexible metal conduit is 1/2 inch. B. Maintain at least 1 inch of separation between conduit sizes to 1 1/2 inches and 2 inches between conduits 1 1/2 inches or larger. Maintain 1 foot of separation between signal conduits (below 100 volts) and power conduits (100 volts and above). C. All conduit shall be supported in accordance with the NEC and as specified herein. This shall apply to all conduit types, including flexible conduit. D. Provide for the proper application, installation, and location of inserts, supports, and anchor bolts for a satisfactory raceway system. Where any component of the raceway system is damaged, replace or provide new raceway system. E. Run conduits concealed to avoid adverse conditions such as heat and moisture, to permit drainage, and to avoid all materials and equipment of other trades. Maintain a minimum clearance of 6 inches from all hot water pipes, flues, or any high-temperature piping or ductwork. -- Section 26 05 33-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 F. Conduits shall be attached to building surfaces and not suspended unless installed in a Unistrut-type conduit rack as specified herein. Individual conduits shall not be suspended. Clevis hangers are not allowed. G. Center conduit in structural slabs (other than topping), clear of reinforcing steel and spaced on centers equal to or exceeding three times the conduit diameter. Outside diameter of conduit shall not exceed one-third the slab thickness for each run of conduit 1 1/4 inches or larger. Provide shop drawings when it will be installed in structural slabs. Conduits shall not be run in slabs-on-grade or structural topping slabs. H. Independently support or attach the raceway system to structural parts of construction in accordance with good industry practice. Conduits through roofs shall be rigid metal conduit and be equipped with pitch pockets. I. Conduit attached to building surfaces that may be damp shall be spaced out to avoid rust and/or corrosion using fittings approved for the use. Use back straps on all conduit in damp or wet locations, or mount conduit with Unistrut straps, or equal. Watertight hubs shall be used in all damp locations. Damp locations shall include, but not be limited to, all basement areas, washdown areas, garage areas, all wet wells and dry wells, all areas below grade, and exterior locations. J. Conduits shall be securely fastened to building structure at intervals not exceeding 8 feet or closer, if necessary. Where hangers are necessary, 3/8-inch rod/eyelets/rings/or trapeze type in Unistrut channel and pipe clamps shall be used. Wire or perforated strap iron is not acceptable. PVC conduit shall be securely fastened to building structure at intervals not exceeding 3 feet. K. Vertical conduit runs 1 1/4 inches and larger passing through floors shall be supported at each floor with conduit riser grips. 3.02 GENERAL CONDUIT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Interior conduit shall be run concealed in walls, building cavities, chases, attic spaces, and buried below floor slabs. Exterior conduit shall be buried below grade and concealed in structure walls. Exposed conduit runs shall be avoided. Conduit may be run exposed only where it is impossible to conceal. B. Conduit may be run exposed on the underside of precast or poured concrete floor slabs or in basements. Run exposed conduit grouped and parallel or perpendicular to construction. Do not route exposed conduits over boilers or other high-temperature machinery nor in contact with such equipment. All conduit shall be run exposed in structures below grade. C. All conduit installed below grade shall be buried a minimum of 2 feet 0 inches. All conduit installed below floor slabs shall be buried a minimum of 1 foot below slab. D. PVC conduit installed in earth (interior and exterior) shall be bedded in compacted sand with a minimum of 6-inch cover on all sides. E. In all PVC conduit runs below grade 200 feet and longer, PVC coated rigid steel conduit shall be used for all 90 degree bends. Section 26 05 33-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 F. Ream conduit smooth at ends, cap upon installation, rigidly attach to structural parts of the building, and securely fasten to all outlet boxes, panel cabinets, junction boxes, pull boxes, splicing chambers, safety switches, and all other components of the raceway system. G. Where conduits installed through roofs serve heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment, conduits shall not be routed through ductwork or chases; conduits shall penetrate the roof and be equipped with pitch pockets. H. Conduits installed for future equipment or electrical work shall be cut off and capped flush _ with finished floor. Conduit ends shall have threaded fittings to accommodate future conduit installation. I. Provide all empty raceways 2 1/2 inches and over with No. 10 galvanized fishwire, and nylon cord for conduits smaller than 2 1/2 inches. Empty raceways and fishwire/nylon cord shall be identified with permanent label, and label shall include conduit termination point.All empty conduits shall be threaded, capped and flush with finished floor or wall. Exposed conduits shall be threaded and capped. J. Provide conduit raceway for exposed cables that are not UV resistant. This shall include, but not be limited to, instrument wiring, motor terminators, pump cables, float cables, etc. K. Conduit seals shall be provided for intrinsically safe circuits, where conduits pass from the interior to exterior of the building, where conduits enter a room which at any time is a low or high temperature room, any conduit entering a wet location, and any conduit entering a NEMA 4X area. L. Liquidtight flexible conduit shall be installed in such a manner that liquids tend to run off the surfaces and not drain toward the fittings. M. All runs of flexible conduit and flexible conduit couplings to equipment and devices shall be as short as practicable, of the same size as the conduit it extends, and with enough slack to reduce the effects of vibration to a minimum.A minimum of 18 inches of flexible conduit shall be installed for each motor. N. Provide conduit expansion-deflection fittings as specified herein in all conduit runs where _ movement perpendicular to axis of conduit may be encountered. O. Conduits shall be pitched so that drainage is towards manholes and ha idholes and away from all structures. P. Conduit bends for PVC conduit shall be made using a hot box, heat blanket, or glycol bender. Open flame or point heat sources of any type are not allowed. Q. The PVC-coated rigid conduit manufacturer's touch-up compound shall be used on all conduit interior and exterior bare steel exposed because of nicks, cuts, abrasions, thread cutting, and reaming; minimum six coats. R. Where below-grade PVC conduit is connected to rigid metal conduit, ':he length of PVC conduit shall be a minimum of 10 feet. For short, below-grade conduit runs where required lengths of rigid metal conduit limit the length of PVC conduit to less than 10 feet, rigid metal conduit shall be used for the entire run. Section 26 05 33-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 S. Conduit bodies shall not be used for fiber optic cable routing. Provide pull boxes sized as required for fiber optic cable bending radius. T. Routing of conduits on exterior of buildings shall be reviewed with CONSULTANT prior to installation. 3.03 CONDUIT PENETRATIONS AND TERMINATIONS A. Where fittings are brought into an enclosure with a knockout, a gasket assembly consisting of an 0-ring and retainer shall be installed on the outside. Fittings shall be insulated throat type. B. Conduit penetrations for control panels or enclosures containing electronic equipment shall utilize watertight hubs and, if entering the top of the enclosure, shall be located at the front of the enclosure and not over any electronic equipment (e.g., PLC, power supplies, etc.). C. Conduit penetrations for all exterior enclosures (e.g., disconnects, junction boxes, control panels) shall utilize watertight hubs and enter the sides or bottom of the enclosure. Conduits m. shall not penetrate the top of the enclosure. D. Provide conduit expansion fittings as specified herein in all conduit runs that cross a structural expansion joint and for conduits protruding from earth. E. Provide firestopping for all conduits penetrating fire barriers as specified in Section 07 84 00—Firestopping. F. All conduits that protrude from poured concrete shall be PVC-coated rigid conduit. Conduit shall extend continuously (i.e., no joints) a minimum of 4 feet beyond the poured concrete (both sides). Where an underground conduit joint or coupling is located within 4 feet of the face of the penetration, the conduit shall be provided with reinforced concrete encasement doweled into the structure wall and continuing a minimum of 1 foot past the connection. The encasement construction shall conform with the encasements indicated for duct banks. PVC-coated rigid conduit 4-foot minimum projection requirement shall begin at, and extend from, the end of the encasement. The intent of this paragraph is to permit CONTRACTOR to use couplings at the inside face of the formwork. G. Conduits passing through masonry, concrete, or similar construction shall be cast in place using PVC-coated rigid conduit extending completely through the construction. H. Where above-grade conduits pass through cores in existing structures or through masonry walls, grout openings between conduit and walls or floors with sand cement mortar. I. Where wall penetrations through existing walls are below grade, cored openings shall be sealed with waterproof mechanical seals. Cores shall be pitched slightly such that conduit slopes away from building. Sleeve diameter shall be provided and mechanical seals installed as recommended by the manufacturer. Conduit shall extend continuously (i.e., no joints) a minimum of 4 feet beyond the wall (exterior). J. All spare conduits that terminate in a building or structure below grade shall be plugged with conduit plugs as specified herein. Section 26 05 33-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.04 CONDUIT INSTALLATION IN HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS A. All conduits installed in or passing through "hazardous locations" as defined by the NEC, NFPA, or as noted on the drawings, shall be installed with seal-offs as specified herein. B. All conduits in hazardous locations shall be installed in accordance with the NEC. C. Conduits for intrinsically-safe circuits shall be dedicated to intrinsically-safe wiring. Conduits shall be installed and identified by labeling or color coding in accordance with Article 504 of the NEC. 3.05 CONDUIT INSTALLATION FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING AND POWER CIRCUITS A. All emergency egress lighting and power circuits shall be installed in ded cated conduits. B. Conduits for emergency egress lighting and power circuits shall be installed and permanently marked in accordance with the NEC. 3.06 CONDUIT INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. The following schedule lists specific conduit types allowed in designated areas. Those areas not listed under a specific conduit type shall not have that type of conduit installed: 1. Rigid steel: a. Structural slabs. b. Interior locations requiring mechanical protection. c. All exposed interior locations. d. All concealed interior locations. e. Class I, Division 2 locations. 2. Rigid aluminum: a. All exposed interior locations. b. Interior locations requiring mechanical protection. _ c. Exterior locations (except in earth) and locations exposed to weather. d. Class I, Division 2 locations. e. All locations where attached to aluminum railings or aluminum structural members. f. Where noted on the drawings. 3. PVC-coated rigid steel: a. Class I, Division 1 locations. b. Conduits protruding from concrete. c. Interior and exterior locations requiring mechanical protection. d. Earth. e. Exterior locations and locations exposed to weather. f. Within 6 feet of building or structure footing, wall, or manhole/hardhole. g. Conduits within manholes. 4. PVC: a. Earth, except within 6 feet of a building or structure footing, wall, or manhole/handhole. PVC conduit under pavement or roadways shall be Schedule 80. b. NEMA 4X areas (indoors only). c. Service entrance ground conductors. d. Buried below slabs on grade. e. Concrete encased duct banks (Schedule 40 or Schedule 80). -- Section 26 05 33-8 4463.004/City Contract No.994 5. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit not over 3 feet in length for final connections to: a. Equipment in wet locations. _ b. Equipment with sliding bases or flexible positioning. c. Equipment with vibration isolation mounting. d. Equipment housing ferromagnetic cores or with integral moving components _ capable of generating noise or vibrations, including transformers and motors. e. All pumps and associated equipment. END OF SECTION Section 26 05 33-9 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 26 05 35 BOXES PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Switch, outlet, and small junction boxes. 2. Pull and junction boxes. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern Work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NEMA OS 2—Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, anc Box Supports. B. NEMA 250—Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). — 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers of switches, outlets, boxes, lamps, fuses, lugs, etc.: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of these products, of the types and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer: A firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical wiring installation Work similar to that in this project. C. Code Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) and any and all local codes as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring dev ces, material, and equipment herein specified. D. UL Labels: Provide electrical cable, boxes, raceways, wire, connectors, outlets, switches, etc., which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories. E. NECA Standard: Comply with applicable portions of National Electrical Contractor's Association's "Standard of Installation." 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. Section 26 05 35-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 SWITCH, OUTLET, AND SMALL JUNCTION BOXES A. Masonry and Partition Boxes: Galvanized steel, nongangable. Thomas & Betts, MB Series, or equal. Provide number of gangs for devices shown on the drawings. B. Cast Boxes: Aluminum or cast feraloy, deep-type, gasketed cover, threaded hubs, Eaton FD Series, or equal. C. PVC-Coated Cast Boxes: Boxes shall be deep type and be by the same manufacturer as the conduit. D. NEMA 4X Boxes: PVC or FRP, Carlon NS Series, or equal, with proper cover and gasket. 316 stainless steel, Eaton FD Series, or equal, where specified herein. E. Covers for switch and outlet boxes used as junction boxes shall have covers that match box type. 2.02 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Cast Boxes: NEMA250; Type 4, surface-mounted junction box, UL-listed as watertight. Cast aluminum or feraloy box and cover with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws, Crouse-Hinds WCB Series, or equal. B. PVC-Coated Cast Boxes: Provide PVC-coated cast boxes in areas where PVC-coated conduit is used. Boxes shall be by the same manufacturer as the conduit. C. NEMA 4X Boxes: PVC or FRP, Carlon HS Series, or equal with proper cover and gasket. 316 stainless steel, Saginaw Control and Engineering SCE Series, or equal, where specified herein. D. NEMA 12 Boxes: Painted steel with continuously-hinged cover, recessed quarter-turn latches, and gasket. Boxes shall be Hoffman Bulletin CW 1, or equal. E. Boxes Larger Than 12 inches in Any Dimension: Hinged enclosure in accordance with Section 26 27 16-Hinged-Cover Enclosures. F. Boxes specified in this section are not allowed to have knockouts and are not allowed to be used as enclosures for control panels. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION OF BOX LOCATIONS A. Provide electrical boxes as shown on the drawings and as necessary for splices, taps, wire -. pulling, cable bending radii, equipment connections, and code compliance. B. Electrical box locations shown on the drawings are approximate. Verify location and size of outlet boxes in all work areas prior to rough-in. Section 26 05 35-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Where dedicated raceways are provided for different voltage systems or ,viring, (e.g., motor power wiring and motor space heaters), separate boxes shall also be provided unless acceptable to CONSULTANT. Where acceptable to CONSULTANT, combined boxes shall be physically divided to separate the wiring. D. Locate and install boxes to allow access. Where installation is inaccessible, coordinate locations and sizes of access doors. E. Locate and install to maintain headroom and to present a neat appearance. F. All boxes attached to building surfaces that may be damp shall be spaced to avoid rust and/or corrosion.All boxes in damp locations shall be on 1/2-inch standoffs. Damp locations shall include, but not be limited to, all basement areas, exterior locations garage areas, all wet wells and dry wells, all areas below grade, and any washdown areas 3.02 SWITCH, OUTLET, AND SMALL JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION A. Locate boxes in masonry walls for cutting of masonry unit corners only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat openings for boxes. B. Provide knockout closures for unused openings. C. Support boxes independently of conduit. D. Use multiple gang boxes where more than one device is mounted together; do not use sectional boxes. Provide barriers to separate wiring of different voltage stems. E. Install boxes in walls without damaging wall insulation. F. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets. G. Switch and outlet boxes provided for branch circuits and feeders shall not contain control wiring. Control wiring, wiring for emergency egress lighting, and intrinsically safe wiring shall each have dedicated pull and junction boxes provided. Wiring for different voltage systems (e.g., 24 V, 120 V, 480 V) shall have dedicated pull and junction boxes for each voltage. H. Align wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. I. In plaster or concrete walls, single receptacle, single- or double-switch outlets, use 4-inch-square masonry boxes fitted with raised plaster covers. In poured concrete walls belowgrade, use cast boxes. J. In unplastered brick or block walls, use masonry boxes. K. For weatherproof switches, devices, and exterior fixtures, use cast boxes with proper cover and gasket. L. All interior exposed wall and ceiling outlet boxes shall be cast boxes, unless otherwise noted. M. Knockout punches or saws shall be used for holes; boxes with prepuncned holes are not acceptable. -- Section 26 05 35-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 N. Boxes shall be of a depth to accommodate wires and splices and shall be equipped with both fixture hanging studs and tapped fixture ears. Boxes shall be installed so that they will support the weight of the fixture. Conduit will not be considered as adequate supports. O. Cast boxes with 3/4-inch hubs and aluminum fittings and enclosures may be used with all conduit types. P. Provide PVC-coated cast boxes in all areas where PVC-coated conduit is used. Boxes in hazardous locations shall be rated for Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D locations. Boxes shall be by the same manufacturer as the PVC-coated conduit. 3.03 PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION A. Locate pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings or in unfinished areas. B. Support pull and junction boxes independent of conduit. C. Knockout punches or saws shall be used for holes; boxes with prepunched holes are not acceptable. D. Refer to Section 26 05 53—Electrical Identification for junction box labeling requirements. E. All interior exposed junction and pull boxes shall be NEMA 12, unless noted otherwise. F. All exterior junction and pull boxes shall be NEMA 4X and shall be stainless steel. G. Boxes in hazardous locations shall be rated for Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D locations. Boxes shall be by the same manufacturer as the PVC-coated conduit. END OF SECTION Section 26 05 35-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 26 05 43 UNDERGROUND CONCRETE DUCT BANKS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION -- A. Work Included: Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown on the drawings, specified and required to furnish and install underground concrete duct banks. B. Coordination: Duct bank routing on the drawings is diagrammatic. Coo-dinate installation with piping and other underground systems and structures and locate clear of interferences. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown on the drawings or specified. 1. National Electrical Code/NFPA 70. 2. National Electrical Safety Code, (NESC). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Layouts showing the proposed routing of duct banks and the locations of manholes and areas of reinforcement. 2. Cross sections of each unique duct bank segment with all conduits identified. 3. Installation procedures. C. Record Drawings: Include the actual routing of underground duct runs on record drawings in accordance with Section 01 77 00—Contract Closeout. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Duct: Schedule 40 PVC conduit and fittings in accordance with Section 26 05 33—Conduit. B. Warning Ribbon: Provide Brady "Identoline," Services and Materials "Buried Underground Tape," or Somerset (Thomas & Betts) "Protect-A-Line." Provide tape with nominal dimension of 6 inches wide, 4 mil thickness, permanently imprinted with "CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW" for installation above, and centered on direct-buried cables, electrical duct banks, and conduits without duct bank encasement. C. Backfill: Refer to Section 26 05 00—General Electric Requirements. D. Reinforcement: In accordance with Section 03 20 00—Concrete Reinforcement. — Section 26 05 43-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 E. Concrete: In accordance with Section 03 30 00—Cast-In-Place Concrete. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide excavation and backfilling required for duct bank installation. B. Make duct bank installations and penetrations through foundation walls watertight. C. Top of duct banks shall be a minimum of 24 inches below grade. D. Assemble duct banks using nonmagnetic saddles, spacers and separators. Position separators to provide 3-inch minimum concrete separation between the outer surfaces of the ducts. Provide side forms for each duct bank. E. Provide a 3-inch minimum concrete covering on both sides, top and bottom of concrete envelopes around conduits. Concrete covering size shall be as shown on the drawings. Add red dye on top of concrete for easy identification during subsequent excavation. Red dye shall be applied to the top of the concrete after being poured. F. Firmly fix ducts in place during placing of concrete. Carefully place and vibrate the concrete to fill all spaces between ducts. G. Make bends with sweeps of not less than 48-inch radius or 5 degree angle couplings. H. Make a transition from nonmetallic to PVC-coated rigid steel conduit where duct banks terminate and conduits continue to run exposed. Transition shall be within concrete encasement and be a minimum of 5 feet from encasement termination. I. Reinforce all duct banks. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, reinforce with No. 4 longitudinal steel bars placed at each corner and along each face at a maximum parallel spacing of 18 inches on centers, and No. 3 closed ties transversely placed at 18-inch maximum longitudinal intervals. Maintain a minimum clearance of 2 inches from bars to the edge of the concrete encasement. J. Where ducts enter structures such as manholes, handholes, pullboxes, transformer and switchboard compartments or buildings, terminate the ducts in suitable end bells, insulated bushings or couplings on PVC-coated rigid steel conduits. K. Duct banks abutting new or existing concrete structures shall be tied into structure. All No. 4 longitudinal bars shall be adhesive anchored into concrete structure a minimum of 6-inch embedment. L. Do not backfill with material containing large rock, paving materials, cinders, large or sharply angular substances, corrosive material, or other materials which can damage or contribute to corrosion of ducts or cables or prevent adequate compaction of backfill. M. Slope duct runs for drainage toward manholes and away from buildings with a slope of approximately 3 inches per 100 feet. Section 26 05 43-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 N. After completion of the duct bank and prior to pulling cable, pull a mandrel not less than 12 inches long and with a cross section approximately 1/4 inch less than the inside cross section of the duct through each duct. Then, pull a rag, swab or sponge through to make certain that no particles of earth, sand, or gravel have been left in the duct. O. Install a warning ribbon as specified herein, approximately 12 inches below finished grade over all underground duct banks carrying cables of 120 volts and higher. P. Plug and seal empty spare ducts entering buildings and structures. Seal watertight all ducts in use entering buildings and structures with O-Z/Gedney Type DUX duct sealing compound, or equal. Q. Reused Existing Ducts: 1. Pull rag or swab through duct to remove water and to clean duct prior to installing new cable. 2. Repeat swabbing until all foreign material is removed. 3. Pull mandrel through duct if necessary to remove obstructions. R. Provide survey points including northing, easting and elevation every 50 feet, including changes in elevation or direction. Update record drawings to reflect survey information. Submit both redlines and electronic data to CONSULTANT weekly. S. Wherever duct banks cross roadways, driveways, parking areas, and any paved areas, provide brass medallion over location of duct bank crossing. Medallion shall indicate "Electrical duct bank crossing." END OF SECTION Section 26 05 43-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 26 05 44 MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Precast polymer concrete handholes. B. Related Sections: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI/SCTE 77—Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Shop drawing submittals shall include the following: 1. Interior elevations of each wall of all handholes provided under this Contract. Each conduit shall be identified as to what it serves. 2. Product Data (Handholes): Manufacturer's technical information for handholes and accessories proposed for use. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 PRECAST POLYMER CONCRETE HANDHOLES A. Material and Construction: 1. Precast polymer concrete. 2. Duct entrances sized and located to suit duct banks. 3. Enclosures, boxes and covers are required to conform to test provisions of ANSI/SCTE 77 for Tier 22 applications. 4. Handholes shall be a minimum of 30 inches deep. Handholes shall be sized in accordance with the NEC. 5. All covers are required to have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50 in accordance with ASTM C1028. 6. Covers shall have the following stamped logo: "ELECTRICAL" 7. Handholes shall be Hubbel, Quazite, PG-Style, or equal. Section 26 05 44-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND COORDINATION A. Examine conditions under which the Work is to be installed and notify CONSULTANT in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Coordinate handhole installation with piping, sheeting, and other underground systems and structures, and locate clear of interferences. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install handholes where shown and verify locations in field. Perform excavation and backfilling required for installation. Excavation and backfilling shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00—General Electrical Requirements. B. Install handholes on a 3/4-inch crushed stone foundation 1 foot under all handholes, and within 2 feet of exterior of handholes. Handhole bases shall be set at the proper grade and carefully leveled and aligned. C. All conduits must enter the sides of handholes. Conduits entering the oottom will not be permitted. Conduits shall enter handholes a minimum of 6 inches above bottom of handhole. Provide handhole depth as required. Conduit burial depth shall be 24 inches as specified. D. Handholes shall be considered wet locations for purposes of equipment selection. E. All conduits shall be pitched so that drainage is towards handholes G nd away from all structures. 3.03 GRADING AT HANDHOLES A. Handholes in unpaved areas shall be built as shown to a rim elevation higher than the original ground. The ground surface shall be graded to drain away from the handhole. Fill shall be placed around handholes to the level of the upper rim of the handhole frame, and the surface evenly graded on a one (vertical)to five (horizontal)slope to surrounding ground, unless otherwise shown. B. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for proper height of handholes necessary to reach final grade. CONSULTANT's review of shop drawings for handhole components is general in nature, and CONTRACTOR shall provide random length precast handhole riser sections to adjust handholes to meet field conditions for final grading. END OF SECTION -- Section 26 05 44-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 26 05 53 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Nameplates. 2. Labeling tags. 3. Wire markers. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Provide schedule for nameplates and labeling tags with shop drawings. Reference drawings for type used. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 NAMEPLATES A. Type "A": 1. Use: a. Motor starters. b. Each separately mounted circuit breaker or disconnect switch. c. Each device in main distribution panels. d. Each device in switchboards. e. Each device in motor control centers. f. SPD. g. Each device on Supervisory Control Center exterior. h. Cabinets, enclosures, pull, and junction boxes. 2. Size: 2-inch by 3-inch. 3. Material: 2-layer laminated Micarta. 4. Background Color: Black. 5. Character Color: White. 6. Character Size: 1/4-inch. 7. Engraving: See MCC schedule, one-line, and I/O list for labels, or as requested by CONSULTANT. Label shall include equipment number and description (i.e., SCAL-60-01, Fluoride Scale). 8. Mounting Location: Front exterior. B. Type "B": 1. Use: a. Motor Control Centers. b. Switchboards. Section 26 05 53-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 c. Supervisory Control Centers. d. Panelboards. e. Transformers. 2. Size: 4-inch by 4-inch. 3. Material: 2-layer laminated Micarta. 4. Background Color: Black. 5. Character Color: White. 6. Character Size: 2 1/4-inch. 7. Engraving: Label shall include equipment number and description (i e., LP-10-01, First Floor Power). 8. Mounting Location: Equipment: Top wire way. C. Type "C": 1. Use: Control stations, thermostats, etc. 2. Size: 3/8-inch by 2-inch. 3. Material: 2-layer laminated Micarta. 4. Background Color: Black. 5. Character Color: White. 6. Character Size: 1/8-inch. 7. Engraving: Control station number and equipment description (e.g., T-15-01, Chlorine Room). 8. Mounting Location: Device front at top. D. Type "D": 1. Use: a. Electrical Distribution System Equipment not previously specified b. Fire Alarm System. c. Closed Circuit Television System. 2. Size: As necessary. 3. Material: 2-layer laminated Micarta. 4. Background Color: Yellow. 5. Character Color: Black. 6. Character Size: 3/16-inch. 7. Engraving and Mounting Location: As requested by CONSULTANT. E. Type "E": 1. Use: Operator instructions. 2. Size: As necessary. 3. Material: 2-layer laminated Micarta. 4. Background Color: Yellow. 5. Character Color: Black. 6. Character Size: 3/16-inch. 7. Engraving and Mounting Location:As requested by CONSULTANT. 2.02 LABELING TAGS A. Use: Field-Mounted Devices (Valves, Limit Switches, Level Transmitters, Flow Transmitters, etc.). 1. Size: 2-inch diameter round. 2. Material: 2-layer laminated Micarta. 3. Character Size: 1/8-inch. 4. Engraving: As requested by CONSULTANT. Section 26 05 53-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.03 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS A. Wire and cable markers shall be permanently-attached, heat-shrink type labels. 1. Sleeve: Permanent, PVC, white, with legible machine-printed black markings. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Raychem Model D-SCE or ZH-SCE, Brady Model 3PS, or equal. 3. Grounding Conductor: Provide green wire marker; minimum 2 inches wide. B. Wire or cable numbering preprinted on the conductor or cable insulation, flag-type labels, and individual wraparound numbers (such as Brady preprinted markers) are not acceptable. All wire markers shall be the same throughout the project. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates. B. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines. C. Affix nameplates with weatherproof, UV-resistant adhesive in outdoor locations and sticky _.. back adhesive in indoor locations. D. Affix labeling tags with stainless steel leaders; vinyl locking wire ties are not acceptable. Provide 3/8-inch hole to accommodate wire tie. E. Prepare and install neatly-typed directions in all panels, including existing panels where Work is done under this Contract. 3.02 WIRE IDENTIFICATION A. Provide wire markers on each conductor, including neutral and spare conductors, in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and at load connection. Neutral conductor labels shall include the associated branch circuit number. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits, and with control wire number as indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams for control wiring. Spare conductors shall have control wire number or shall indicate termination point of wire. B. Conductors in pull boxes, motor control centers, supervisory control panels, control panels, cabinets, and panelboards shall be grouped as to circuits and arranged in a neat manner. All conductors of a feeder or branch circuit shall be grouped, bound together with nylon ties, and identified. Phase identification shall be consistent throughout the system. All wiring labels shall be able to be read without removing wire management(i.e., wiring trough covers, spiral windings, etc.) or twisting the wire/cable. C. Power Conductor Insulation Color Code: 1. 6 AWG and Larger: Provide general-purpose, flame-retardant, permanent tape at each termination and at accessible locations such as manholes, handholes,junction and pull boxes, panelboards, motor control centers, switchboards, etc. Apply tape with at least six full, overlapping wraps; minimum 2 inches wide. 2. 8 AWG and Smaller: Provide conductors with color-coded insulation. Section 26 05 53-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3. Colors: System Conductor Color All Systems Equipment Grounding Green 120/240 Volts Grounded Neutral White* Single-Phase, Three Wire One Hot Leg Black Other Hot Leg Red 120/208 Volts Grounded Neutral White* Three-Phase, Four Wire Phase A Black Phase B Red Phase C Blue 277/480 Volts Grounded Neutral White* Three-Phase, Four Wire Phase A Brown Phase B Orange Phase C Yellow Note: Phase A, B, C implies direction of positive phase rotation. * When installed as part of a 120-volt or 277-volt branch circuit, provide a color-coded stripe on the white neutral conductor insulation matching the branch circuit insulation. D. Control Panel and Field-Installed Control Conductor Insulation Color Code: 1. All conductors shall have color-coded insulation. 2. Colors: System Conductor _ Color Supply Voltage Ungrounded Circuit Conductors Black Neutral White Discrete 120-volt AC Control Circuit Conductor Red Input/Output Neutral White Discrete 12/24-volt DC Control Circuit Conductor Blue Input/Output Common White with Blue Stripe Conductors energized Control Circuit Conductor Orange when the main disconnect AC Neutral White is in the "off" position (e.g. DC Common White with Blue Stripe foreign supply voltages) Ground Green Intrinsically Safe Control Circuit Conductor Light Blue DC Common White with Two Light Blue Stripes E. Circuit Identification: 1. Identify power, instrumentation, and control conductors at each termination and at accessible locations such as manholes, handholes, junction and pull boxes, panelboards, motor control centers, switchboards, etc. 2. Conductors for panelboard circuits shall identify circuit matching the circuit directory designations, including the neutral conductor. 3. Control conductor identification shall match the associated terminal block label. 4. Circuits Not Listed in Circuit Directories: a. Assign circuit name based on unique device or equipment at load end of circuit. b. Where unique device or equipment names are not available or apparent, add a unique number or letter modifier to each otherwise identical circuit name. Section 26 05 53-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.03 DATA/VOICE CABLE AND COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Individual labels shall be placed on all patch panels and both ends of all cables. B. Refer to Section 26 05 23—Instrument and Communication Wire and Cable for cable insulation color requirements. 3.04 JUNCTION BOX IDENTIFICATION A. All junction boxes shall be labeled with permanent labels. Labels shall indicate circuit or load served, as well as the power source and highest voltage present on any conductor. 3.05 CONDUIT FITTINGS IDENTIFICATION A. All conduit fittings that contain splices of any kind shall be labeled with permanent nameplates indicating "splice within." Nameplates shall be clearly visible at location installed. 3.06 TERMINAL BLOCK IDENTIFICATION A. Terminal blocks shall be labeled on both sides of each terminal block. Terminal block numbering shall match the numbers shown on the project-specific wiring diagrams. B. Fused terminal blocks labels shall be located on top of the terminal blocks and include the fuse voltage and ampere rating. 3.07 COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION A. All components (e.g., relays, timers, power supplies, transformers, etc.) shall be labeled on the back panel adjacent to the device. Labels may not be placed on the device itself, wireway covers, or any other removable devices. Labels shall be included on the as-built drawings. 3.08 LABELING FONT REQUIREMENTS A. The font for all conductor, cable, and device labels shall be Arial with black characters on white background, and minimum font size 12. B. The text for all conductor, cable, and device labels shall be machine printed. Handwritten labels are not acceptable. END OF SECTION Section 26 05 53-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 26 05 73 SHORT-CIRCUIT, COORDINATION, AND ARC FLASH ASSESSMENT PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work included: CONTRACTOR shall retain the services of an independent third-party firm to perform a Short-Circuit, Coordination, and Arc Flash Assessment, as specified herein. The studies shall be submitted to CONSULTANT prior to receiving final approval of the equipment shop drawings and prior to release of equipment for manufacture. See Section 1.04 Submittals for additional requirements. B. The analysis and inspection shall include all portions of the new and existing electrical distribution system. This shall include, but not be limited to, the following items. Equipment not specifically noted below that is part of the distribution shall also be included. 1. Existing utility service entrance including primary switching and fusing. 2. Existing medium voltage service entrance switchgear. 3. Existing and new medium voltage pad-mounted switches. 4. Existing and new pad-mounted exterior transformers. 5. New switchboards. 6. Motor control centers. 7. OEM-provided control panels with electrical supply over 100 amperes at 480 volts. 8. Existing and new motor control panels. 9. Existing and new power panels. 10. Existing and new lighting panels. 11. Disconnect switches for motors 50 hp or larger. 12. Existing and new 480V junction boxes and enclosures where terminations and splices are being made. 13. Existing main overcurrent protective devices (e.g., circuit breaker, fuses, etc.)of existing motor control centers, motor control panels, power panels, and lighting panels. 14. All new and existing motors 50 hp and larger. C. Normal system connections and those which result in maximum fault conditions shall be adequately covered in the study. Alternative scenarios shall be included to illustrate each power source and the relative effects on the distribution system. This shall include scenarios where dual source contributions may be present, such as with paralleling switchgear. D. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in -- this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NFPA70—National Electrical Code. B. NFPA70E—Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace, Latest Edition. C. IEEE Standard 1584—IEEE Guide for Performing Arc Flash Hazard Calcu ations. D. OSHA 29 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Part 1910, Subpart S. Section 26 05 73-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 E. ANSI/IEEE Standards C37, 242, and 399. F. UL 489-Underwriters Laboratories. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The firm shall be currently involved in high- and low-voltage power system evaluation. The study shall be performed, stamped, and signed by a registered professional engineer (electrical) in the State where the project is located. Credentials of the individual(s) performing the study and background of the firm shall be submitted to CONSULTANT for review prior to start of the work. A minimum of 5 years' experience in power system analysis shall be required for the project manager. B. The firm performing the study shall demonstrate capability and experience to provide assistance during start-up, as required. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. The following submittal process shall be followed and be coordinated with the suppliers of equipment specified in Divisions 08, 21, 22, 23, 41, 43, and 46, along with other Division 26 sections. In general, the report specified below shall be completed prior to equipment shop drawings being approved and prior to equipment being released for manufacture, such that equipment changes may be made during shop drawing review if changes are recommended by the report. If completion of the report may cause delay in equipment manufacture, partial approval from CONSULTANT may be obtained if the preliminary submittal includes data sufficient to determine that the selection of device ratings, settings, and characteristics will be satisfactory. B. The following submittals shall be provided for review by CONSULTANT. 1. Statement of Qualifications: Prior to equipment shop drawings being submitted, the third party testing firm shall submit a statement of qualifications including resumes of individuals who will perform the work, specific software and analysis tools that will be used, and at least three example reports that were completed for projects similar in size and nature. 2. Final Report: At the time of, or prior to equipment shop drawings being submitted, the finalized report shall be submitted for formal review by CONSULTANT. The report shall include all new equipment being provided based on shop drawing submittals, existing equipment based on information collected during site visits, and estimated cable lengths. The report shall also include a written document from the Utility Company indicating three-phase short circuit contribution and single-phase short circuit contribution, and X/R ratios for each utility service. This submittal shall be a completed, finalized report that will be updated with actual cable lengths once installed. 3. Report Update: Once all equipment is operating based on its design intent, the specified device settings, and thermographic surveys shall be completed. The third party testing firm shall visit the site to confirm that the new equipment matches the shop drawings. Additionally, the previously submitted final report shall be updated with actual installed cable lengths, device settings, the thermographic survey, and changes made during construction. This item and the above items shall be completed prior to substantial completion. Section 26 05 73-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. The final report shall meet the following requirements: 1. Submit six bound copies of the final report. Provide two compact discs with the final report, in PDF format, burned on each disc. The two CDs shall also include all report files in Word format, one-line diagrams in PDF format, and all power analysis software files and associated libraries. 2. Organize and submit the report with the following sections. Below are minimum — requirements, and the report shall be tailored to meet specific projec'. requirements and equipment: a. Part I: Overview. b. Part II: Short-Circuit Study: (1) Purpose. (2) Explanation of data. (3) Assumptions. (4) General and specific procedures followed. (5) Analysis of results. (6) Recommendations. (7) Fault Analysis Input Report. c. Part III—Coordination Study: (1) Purpose. (2) Explanation of data. (3) Assumptions. (4) General and specific procedures followed. (5) Analysis of results. (6) Recommendations, including trip curves and device settings for project-specific equipment. (7) Spreadsheet or report showing the range of all de' ice settings and recommended settings. d. Part IV—Arc Flash Study: (1) Purpose. (2) Explanation of Data. (3) Assumptions. (4) Analysis of results, including all items in Motor Control Centers, Switchgear, Switchboards, control panels, disconnects, etc. (5) General and specific procedures followed. (6) Recommendations, including system modifications that may reduce arc flash hazard based on analysis of results. (7) Arc flash evaluation report including sample labels for major distribution equipment. e. Part V—Thermographic Survey: (1) Purpose, description, and scope. (2) General and specific procedures followed, including equiprr ent load at time of survey. (3) Equipment used, along with calibration maintenance recorcs. (4) Analysis of results, including thermal images, digital photos, charts, and graphical data. (5) Conclusions and recommendations. f. Appendices: (1) One-line diagrams of the system in similar format as the Contract Documents from the power analysis software showing project-specific equipment, wire and cable types and lengths, fault currents, and recommended device settings. (2) Protective device summaries generated by the power analysis software. Section 26 05 73-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 (3) Reference data. (4) Paper copy of warning labels to be provided for the project. D. Refer to Part 3—Execution for additional requirements and specific analyses to be performed. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 POWER ANALYSIS SOFTWARE A. The study and assessment shall be performed based on SKM PowerTools software utilizing Dapper, Captor, Arc Fault, and Arc Flash evaluation modules. Equivalent or alternative software packages may be used, but shall be submitted for review by CONSULTANT as part of the preliminary submittal. 2.02 ARC FLASH HAZARD LABELS A. Labels shall be provided for existing and new equipment shown on the one-line diagrams on the drawings and specified in all Division 26 technical sections, as well as for equipment provided in Divisions 08, 21, 22, 23, 41, 43, and 46 where an arc flash hazard may exist. This shall include junction boxes and motors 50 hp and larger. A separate label shall be installed on each MCC bucket, switchboard section, switchgear cubicle, panel board, motor junction box, etc. For switchgear, switchboards, and MCCs with a main circuit breaker, a minimum of two labels shall be provided (one for main circuit breaker section and one for remaining sections in the equipment lineup). Provide labels as manufactured by Conney Safety Products, or equal, and meet the following minimum requirements: 1. Self-adhesive, vinyl, 6 inches by 4 inches minimum. 2. Equipment identification corresponding to the Contract Documents. _. 3. Study date. 4. Arc-flash boundary. 5. Incident Energy Working Distance. 6. Nominal system voltage. 7. Shock-hazard boundaries (limited approach and restricted approach). 8. Site specific Personal Protective Equipment(PPE) level (Coordinate with CITY to define PPE level). 9. Available incident energy. 10. Bolted fault current. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 DATA COLLECTION A. CONTRACTOR and testing firm shall gather the required data from shop drawings and existing equipment for preparation of the studies. Firm performing the system studies shall visit the site as needed to properly carry out the work and meet the requirements of these specifications. Section 26 05 73-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. CONTRACTOR and testing firm shall expedite collection of the data to cc mplete the studies defined above. The following minimum information shall be collected and used: 1. Available fault current from the local utility company. 2. If applicable, existing equipment ratings including bus bracing, interrupting device ratings, and age/condition. 3. Installed cable or busway lengths, along with the specific rating, type and manufacturer. 3.02 SHORT-CIRCUIT AND COORDINATION STUDY A. Include in the appropriate report sections noted above, calculation methods and assumptions, base per unit quantities selected, one-line diagrams, source impedance data including power company system characteristics, typical calculations, and recommendations. Calculations shall be provided for multiple distribution system scenarios when source equipment can provide multiple power feeds to downstream equipment (i.e., Main-Tie-Main equipment, Kirk-key interlocked breakers, etc.). B. Calculate short-circuit interrupting and momentary (when applicable) duties for an assumed three-phase bolted fault at each bus (each change of impedance), at each supply switchgear lineup (existing), transformer primary and secondary terminals (new and existing), switchboard (new), Motor Control Center, as well as other significant locations throughout the system, including all three phase motors 50 hp or larger. Provide a ground fault current study for the same system areas (new and existing), including the associated zero sequence impedance data. Include in tabulations, fault impedance, X to R ratios, asymmetry factors, motor contribution, short-circuit kVA, and symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents. C. In the Protective Device Coordination Study, provide time-current curves graphically for new and existing distribution equipment, indicating the coordination proposed for the system, centered on conventional, full-size, log-log forms. Include with each curve sheet a complete title and one-line diagram with legend identifying the specific portion of the system covered by that particular curve sheet. Include a detailed description of each protective device identifying its type, function, manufacturer, and time-current characteristics. Tabulate recommended device tap, time dial, pickup, instantaneous, and time-delay settings. D. Include on the curve sheets power company relay and fuse characteristics, system medium voltage, equipment relay and fuse characteristics, low voltage equipment circuit breaker trip device characteristics, pertinent transformer characteristics, and characteristics of other system load protective devices such as protective relaying equipment and multifunction relays. Include at least all devices down to largest three-feeder circuit breakers in each new switchboard. E. Include all adjustable settings for new and existing ground fault protective devices. Include manufacturing tolerance and damage bands in plotted circuit breaker characteristics. Show transformer full load and 150, 400, or 600% currents, transformer magnetizing inrush, ANSI transformer withstand parameters, and significant symmetrical and asymmetrical fault _ currents. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting the maximum symmetrical or asymmetrical fault current to which the device is exposed. F. Select each primary protective device required for a Delta-Wye connected transformer so that its characteristic or operating band is within the transformer characteristics, including a point equal to 58% of the ANSI withstand point to provide secondary line-to-ground fault protection. Where the primary device characteristic is not within the transformer characteristics, show a transformer damage curve. Separate transformer primary protective Section 26 05 73-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 device characteristic curves from associated secondary device characteristics by a 16% current margin to provide proper coordination and protection in the event of secondary line-to-line faults. G. Include complete fault calculations as specified herein for each proposed and ultimate source combination for both new and existing equipment. Note that source combinations may include present and future supply circuits, or large motors noted on one-lines. H. Utilize equipment load data for the study obtained by CONTRACTOR from Contract Documents, including Contract addendums issued prior to Bid opening. I. Include fault contribution of all motors in the study. Notify CONSULTANT in writing of circuit protective devices not properly rated for fault conditions. Provide recommended settings for motor starters and note any system inadequacies or potentially hazardous conditions. Show each MCC full-load current plus symmetrical and asymmetrical of the largest motor-starting current so that protective devices will not trip major or group operation. 3.03 ARC FLASH HAZARD STUDY A. As part of the Short-Circuit and Coordination Study, the Arc Flash Hazard Study shall be included. Include in the appropriate report sections noted above, the following minimum requirements: 1. Determine and document all possible utility sources and scenarios that are capable of being connected to each piece of electrical gear. Calculations shall be based on highest possible source connection. 2. Arc flash values for two normal cases to define the highest values (low short-circuit and high short-circuit). 3. Arc flash values for two maintenance cases which define the arc flash values available at the equipment, which would be available if the instantaneous trip of the upstream circuit breaker is set at a minimum value. This is recommended for personnel working on live equipment. 4. Recommendations to reduce the arc flash incident energy in all areas that require 8 cal/cm2 and higher PPE. 5. Calculations to conform to National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70E calculation standards.All incident energy units shall be calculated in calories per square centimeter. B. Furnish and install labeling as specified herein based upon the results of the Arc Flash Hazard Study. 3.04 FIELD SETTINGS A. CONTRACTOR shall perform field adjustments of the new and existing protective devices as required to place the equipment in final operating condition. The settings shall be in accordance with the updated final version of the Short-Circuit Study, Coordination Study, and Arc Flash Hazard Study. B. Necessary field settings of devices and adjustments and minor modifications to equipment to accomplish conformance with the final version of the Short-Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Study shall be carried out by CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to CITY. Section 26 05 73-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.05 THERMOGRAPHIC SURVEY A. Prior to project substantial completion, perform a thermographic survey of all electrical equipment indicated below. Survey shall be performed with load applied to the equipment. 1. New three-phase disconnect switches. 2. New overcurrent protective devices. 3. New panelboards. 4. New transient voltage surge suppression equipment operating at a nominal voltage of 460, or higher. 5. New splices (where allowed), lugs, or taps for conductors larger than 6 AWG. This shall include all junction boxes, pull boxes, manholes, and handholes. 6. New motor junction boxes. 7. New motor control centers and new motor starter buckets. B. Covers shall be removed to provide thermographic inspection. Covers unable to be removed shall be noted in the report, along with restriction for cover removal. C. A report shall be provided listing each item surveyed along with the observed temperature. Temperature shall be listed for each phase. Any hot spots encountered shall include thermographic photo of the area along with the temperature reading, the issue causing the hot spot condition, and proposed actions to correct the condition. Once the hot spot condition has been corrected, a new survey shall be taken and the results provides. END OF SECTION Section 26 05 73-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 26 09 00 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Related Sections and Divisions: 1. Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 2. Section 26 09 10-Controls and Instrumentation Drawings. 3. All other sections of Division 26. PART 1-GENERAL 1 1.01 SUMMARY 1 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 2 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE 2 1.04 SUBMITTALS 3 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 3 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HOLDING 4 1.07 DESCRIPTION OF THE WATERLOO WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT 4 1.08 CONTRACTOR AND SYSTEM SUPPLIER GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 5 1.09 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTING, SYSTEM STARTUP, AND SUPPORT SERVICES 6 1.10 EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES 9 1.11 COMMON REQUIREMENTS ALL EQUIPMENT 10 1.12 GENERAL CONTROL ALGORITHMS 11 1.13 SPARE PARTS 14 1.14 WARRANTY 14 PART 2-PRODUCTS 14 2.01 HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CONFIGURATION 14 2.02 INDUSTRIAL CONTROL RELAYS AND CONTACTORS 17 2.03 PLC TELEMETRY SYSTEMS 19 2.04 FLANGE-MOUNTED LIQUID LEVEL TRANSMITTER 25 2.05 FLOAT SWITCHES 26 2.06 PRESSURE SWITCHES 26 2.07 MAGNETIC FLOW METERS 26 2.08 SUBMERSIBLE LEVEL TRANSMITTERS 28 2.09 ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTERS 28 2.10 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR CONTROL PANELS AND INSTRUMENTATION EQUIPMENT 29 2.11 INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIERS 30 2.12 PATCH PANELS 30 2.13 INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET SWITCHES 30 2.14 EMERGENCY ALARM NOTIFICATION DEVICES 30 2.15 AIR FLOW SWITCH AND VENTILATION MONITORING SYSTEMS 31 PART 3-EXECUTION 32 3.01 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER (170MCC-1A) NOTES: 32 3.02 WAS BUILDING BLOWER VFD ENCLOSURES 34 _. 3.03 THICKENER BUILDING VFD ENCLOSURES 35 3.04 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER (190MCC-1 A AND 190MCC-1 B) NOTES 36 Section 26 09 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.05 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER (325MCC-1A & 325MCC-1B) NOTES 37 3.06 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER (330MCC-1A) NOTES 38 3.07 SUPERVISORY CONTROL CENTER-GENERAL 43 3.08 SUPERVISORY CONTROL CENTER 170 (170-PLC-1) 44 3.09 SUPERVISORY CONTROL CENTER 180 (PLC-180-2) 47 3.10 SUPERVISORY CONTROL CENTER 190 (190-PLC-1) 49 3.11 SUPERVISORY CONTROL CENTER 325 (325-PLC-1) 52 3.12 SUPERVISORY CONTROL CENTER 330 (330PLC-1) 53 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The work includes furnishing, delivering, installing all items furnishei, and placing in operation the Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) Sysern for the Waterloo Wastewater Treatment Plant. B. System Supplier shall be defined as the fabricator, assembler, and supplier of all system components. This shall include, but not be limited to, all instrumentation as specified, all PLC cabinets and required interface hardware and internal wiring, the SCADA System computers, hardware, system drawings, system software, new MCCs at the wastewater treatment plant, and MCC modification drawings as necessary. See parag'aph 1.08 for other System Supplier requirements. C. System Supplier shall be responsible for development and modifications to the existing SCADA system computer HMI graphics as specified herein. D. CONTRACTOR shall inspect all work. The Bid shall include everything necessary to obtain a complete installation operating in accordance with these specifications and the Bidder's proposal, whether necessary items and equipment are contained in, or are remote from the enclosures furnished under this Contract.All responsibility for this system ultimately lies with CONTRACTOR. E. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the placing of circuits and making of electrical and hydraulic connections in accordance with System Supplier-furnished drawings, instructions, and field supervision to provide proper connection. CONTRACTOR shall include the services of a System Supplier factory engineer to supervise making of connections to power supplies, motor leads, communication circuits, existing control equipment, and any other connections external to the new control equipment; adjust the equipment; initiate and check operation; instruct CITY's electrician on operation and maintenance of the equipment; and place the equipment in operation in an acceptable manner. This shall include on-site review of software/hardware controls from the central control point. F. Any auxiliary interface relays and controls needed for completion of tnis project, if not specifically called for, shall be by System Supplier. All switches and control and indicating lights associated with the control panels shall be new and installed in the starter panels. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. System Suppliers: Firms regularly engaged in the design and manufacture of SCADA systems of the size and complexity specified herein, and whose systems have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years. Section 26 09 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Installer: A firm with at least 10 years of successful installation experience on projects with SCADA System design and installation work similar to that required for the project. C. Code Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) and any and all local codes as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring devices, material, and equipment herein specified. D. UL Labels: Provide control panels, power supplies, controllers, relays, wire, and connectors that have been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories. E. NECA Standards: Comply with applicable portions of National Electrical Contractor's Association's Standard of Installation. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's data, specifications, and installation recommendations for each item specified herein. B. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. C. Provide product data on all equipment and devices specified herein as well as wiring schematics for all systems. D. Shop drawing submittals shall be assembled in phases. 1. The first submittal shall include the following: a. Detailed catalog information, descriptive literature, and specifications of hardware and software. All items being provided must be specifically noted on this literature, including all field devices and instruments. b. Project implementation plan, including information on project organization, project management, engineering, programming, configuration, training, startup, and maintenance services. Plan shall include key personnel on project, point of contact, and communication protocol. c. Overall network schematic showing all controllers and hardware addresses applicable to the system. d. Wiring diagrams for all control panels and MCCs, including modification drawings for existing equipment. Modification drawings shall be completed using electronic CAD software. Handwritten or PDF markups of any kind will not be allowed. 2. Subsequent submittals shall include the following: a. Control narratives. b. HMI graphic displays (graphics shall be submitted with adequate time for review and addressing of review comments prior to factory acceptance testing: minimum of four weeks). 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provision of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Include spare parts data listing, source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies, and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. Section 26 09 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with Division 01. The following additional information shall apply: 1. Manuals shall contain, but not be limited to, the following: a. System Hardware. b. System Software. 2. Hardware section shall include: a. Safety precautions, physical description, functional description, operating procedures, theory of operation, maintenance instructions, checkout procedures, troubleshooting procedures, servicing, and removal and replacement procedures. b. Wiring schematic and logic diagrams, parts list, and point-to-point wiring. c. Listing of all hardware timers installed in MCCs and SCCs, as well as the ranges set on each timer. Listing shall also include actual timer setting after completion of startup. 3. Software section shall include: a. Software manual shall describe system techniques, general philosophies, list, and description of all standard software. System techniques description shall include a detailed screen-by-screen description explaining where the various signals originate, how to change equipment setpoints and control modes, how alarms are acknowledged, and how to go from screen to screen. All menu selections and their functions shall also be described in detail. b. Program documentation (i.e., PLCs, OIPs) shall include programs, documentation files, database and configuration as installed. Provide two copies of backup disks of — this information. Usernames and passwords for all programmable devices (i.e., PLCs, OIPs) shall be turned over to CITY at the time of final completion. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HOLDING A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris and traffic. B. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to SCC components, enclosure, and finish. 1.07 DESCRIPTION OF THE WATERLOO WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT A. System Supplier shall be responsible for the development of all required process control functions based on the algorithms described in this specification. Many systems encompass several algorithms for system components. A listing of major process areas that will need software development for operation is as follows. The SCC location for these areas as affected by the algorithm is included: 1. WAS Pumping and Storage (170-PLC-1). 2. Thickening System (180-PLC-1). 3. Digester Feed System (190-PLC-1). 4. Chemical Pumping and Storage (190-PLC-1). 5. Sludge Pumping and Storage (325-PLC-1). 6. Sludge Dewatering and Conveyance (330-PLC-1). B. All process equipment shall be monitored and alarmed as described herein and listed in the I/O tables shown in Section 26 09 90—SCADA System I/O Listing. All analog and process equipment shall be monitored, totalized, indicated, recorded, and stored for reports and historical data. Section 26 09 00-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. The individual station SCCs and the listing of control and monitoring functions are shown in the I/O Listing in Section 26 09 90—SCADA System I/O Listing. With the exception of the items listed as existing, all equipment shall be provided in this Contract. D. Shop drawings of the existing control system will be made available on site to the successful Bidder for development of the required loop drawings, interface requirements, and wiring requirements. 1.08 CONTRACTOR AND SYSTEM SUPPLIER GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. This specification, along with the Contract drawings, defines the requirements of a PLC-baled process monitoring and control system. System Supplier shall construct a process monitoring and control system specifically for the demanding requirements of a real-time municipal wastewater treatment plant. B. It is the intent of this specification to define a fully integrated open-type process monitoring and control system, factory-tested, delivered to the site, ready to function upon connection of power source and field instrument wiring. Components, peripherals, interconnections, cabling, power supplies, software, and services necessary to form a complete, integrated system shall be identified and provided by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for reviewing the wiring diagrams and control sequences for equipment provided under other divisions of these specifications and coordinating all interface requirements. CONTRACTOR shall submit to CONSULTANT, in writing, any deficiencies noted during this review. Any changes required by CONTRACTOR because of failure to complete this review shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR, at no increase in cost to CITY. C. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for complete coordination in providing all equipment, sensors, and meters supplied with input and output signals, and contacts that are compatible with the systems as specified herein. CONTRACTOR shall also be responsible for complete coordination with manufacturers of other systems specified in other divisions of these specifications with which an interface is required. The Contract drawings and I/O Listing are symbolic representatives of the required work. It is not intended that the drawings show all appurtenances. CONTRACTOR shall provide a complete and working system according to the true intent and meaning of the drawings, specifications, and standard industry practices. D. To provide a complete and totally integrated system, a single manufacturer who has experience in furnishing similar networked PLC-based monitoring and control systems of the same complexity and size for municipal wastewater treatment facilities shall provide the specified equipment and services. The system proposed to meet this specification shall be of field-proven design, incorporating manufacturer's standard equipment and software. Service of all peripheral devices shall be provided by the manufacturer of the process monitoring and control system. E. Design and specification of devices and completed system shall conform to applicable �- portions of the latest edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC). F. Control panels shall bear a serialized UL label indicating that it is UL approved as an assembled unit. Panels that have individual components that are UL labeled, but do not have UL approval as an assembled unit are not acceptable. Section 26 09 00-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 G. Training Program: 1. Submit training plan including course syllabus, personnel who will oe conducting the training, and schedule. 2. Provide materials, instructors, and workbooks to complete the training. 3. Training courses shall include: a. Operator training. Course length minimum 8 hours. Training shall utilize equipment specified herein following installation and field testing. (Two 4-hour sessions shall be provided at the WWTP. Training sessions shall occur at a minimum of two-week intervals.) b. Maintenance training. Course length minimum 8 hours. Two 4-hour sessions shall be provided at the WWTP. Training sessions shall occur at a minimum of two-week intervals. 4. Manufacturer's training shall be directed to system and equ pment operation, maintenance, troubleshooting, and equipment and system-related areas other than the process itself. H. System Supplier shall meet the following minimum requirements: 1. System Supplier shall have a full-time staff of qualified programmers who are knowledgeable in the configuration of networked computer systems and the PLCs being provided. 2. System Supplier shall have a minimum of one Microsoft-certified engineer. 3. System Supplier shall have training capabilities and shall have conducted training courses in programming and maintenance. 4. System Supplier shall have an adequate inventory of spare parts. 5. System Supplier shall have a full-time staff of qualified service technicians. 6. System Supplier shall be responsible for the programming and documentation of the system. 7. System Supplier shall be responsible for all details that may be necessary to properly install, wire, adjust, and place in operation a complete and working system. 8. System Supplier shall be responsible for all coordination between the system and the field devices, instrumentation equipment, motor control centers, and equipment furnished with other divisions of this specification. This shall include interface with existing equipment. 9. System Supplier shall have a UL panel shop located inside the System Supplier's own facilities. I. All components shall be standard make acceptable to CITY, with one manufacturer to provide all similar components. The Base Bid System Supplier shall be Automatic Systems (651) 631-9005, Integrated Process Solutions (608) 849-4375, or Wunderlich-Malec (952) 933-3222. See General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions regarding substitutions to the Base Bid system suppliers. 1.09 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTING, SYSTEM STARTUP, AND SUPPORT SERVICES A. Permit CONSULTANT and CITY to observe vendor's staging records or other quality assurance records relating to system(s) supplied. System Supplier shall assemble the system components for 330PLC-1 as a complete process monitoring and control system and demonstrate that the system is operational before shipment from System Supplier factory to the job site. This testing shall be as an integrated assembly by simulating each of the specified I/O points and all specified algorithms. This test shall be witnessed by CITY and CONSULTANT (two personnel). System Supplier shall provide lodging, meals, and transportation for three days and two nights as a minimum for this witness test in the Bid.All problems, errors, insufficiencies, and failures identified during testing shall be resolved Section 26 09 00-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 before shipment. In the event the equipment does not operate in accordance with the specifications, programming of controllers/computers is incomplete, or setup of equipment is incomplete, there shall be deducted from payments due CONTRACTOR the amount of $1,500 per day for CONSULTANT's time plus travel and expenses, for all additional factory acceptance testing and office time spent by CONSULTANT. B. On-Site Functional Acceptance Testing: 1. After all equipment has been installed and is placed in full-time operation or after all equipment associated with the group of equipment scheduled for on-site functional acceptance testing has been installed and placed in full-time operation, CONTRACTOR and System Supplier shall demonstrate that all equipment and controls operate in compliance with the Contract Documents. For each piece of equipment being tested, all systems associated with the operation of the equipment (e.g., controls, supply/discharge piping, etc.) shall be installed and be in full operating condition so that all equipment functions are able to be completely tested without delay using real-time �- process I/O. 2. All control wiring, hardwired interlocks, HMI screens, control programming, etc., shall be checked out and functionally tested by System Supplier prior to CONSULTANT's on-site functional acceptance testing. All functional errors shall be corrected prior to CONSULTANT's on-site functional acceptance testing. 3. CONTRACTOR shall submit updated versions of all HMI screens developed and modified by this System Supplier and HMI screens provided by Division 46 to CONSULTANT for review at least 1 month prior to the functional acceptance testing of equipment controlled through the associated HMI screens. 4. Coordination Meetings and Teleconferences: a. CONTRACTOR shall schedule and conduct an initial functional acceptance testing coordination teleconference at least two months prior to the anticipated functional acceptance testing. Meeting shall include CONTRACTOR, System Supplier, Division 26 contractor, CITY, and CONSULTANT, and all other parties responsible for the equipment and controls scheduled for functional acceptance testing. b. CONTRACTOR shall schedule and conduct additional functional acceptance testing coordination teleconferences one month prior to the date for functional acceptance testing of each group of equipment to confirm status of equipment installation and System Supplier checkouts, and updates to the functional acceptance testing schedule, after which CONSULTANT will finalize reservations for travel and accommodations. All parties shall agree on a date for functional acceptance testing of the next group of equipment at this teleconference or schedule an additional teleconference to establish a testing date one month prior to the delayed testing date. If the functional acceptance testing is rescheduled within one month of the agreed upon date, there will be deducted from payments due to CONTRACTOR the amount of penalties paid by CONSULTANT for travel and accommodation cancellations. CITY will deduct the amount of these charges from payments made to CONTRACTOR. c. CONTRACTOR shall provide the following information in written form at each teleconference. All information shall be updated prior to each teleconference. (1) Equipment installation and manufacturer's startup schedule. (2) Status of all power and control system wiring for the equipment scheduled for functional acceptance testing. (3) Schedule and status of System Supplier's on-site checkout and functional testing. (4) Anticipated delays and the cause of each delay. (5) Conflicts with CITY's operation of the facility. (6) Proposed dates for acceptance testing of all equipment and controls. Section 26 09 00-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 (7) Proposed dates for future acceptance testing coordination teleconferences. 5. After being notified by CONTRACTOR that the equipment has been installed and is in full operating condition and ready for CONSULTANT's functional acceptance testing, CONSULTANT will make one 5-day trip to check operation. CONTRACTOR and System Supplier shall be on-site during testing to adjust equipment, correct erroneous wiring, and make modifications to control system and HMI programming, as necessary. If the equipment and controls do not operate according to the Contract Documents, or if CONTRACTOR and System Supplier are not present during the scheduled testing, there will be deducted from payments due to CONTRACTOR the amount of $1,500 a day for CONSULTANT's time plus travel and expenses, and for all additional field and office time spent by CONSULTANT checking equipment. CITY will deduct the amount of these charges from payments made to CONTRACTOR. 6. System Supplier shall provide functional acceptance testing support through one or more on-site field service engineers and the project control system programmer. Time for the on-site field service engineers and programmer scheduled for functional acceptance testing shall be dedicated to the functional acceptance testing process and shall not be interrupted for other construction-related activities. C. Final acceptance and payment will not be made until the system has operated satisfactorily for a minimum of 30 consecutive days. CONTRACTOR shall include in Bid field follow-up to provide proper adjustments and operation during the first year following project final completion. Prior to beginning the 30-day test, the following criteria shall be met: 1. Satisfactory operation of I/O control loops. 2. Satisfactory operation of software. 3. Satisfactory operation of control program. 4. Satisfactory operation of peripheral equipment. 5. The necessary debugging programs have been performed. 6. Data output is reliable. 7. Control loops are operational. 8. Checking and calibrating of systems have been completed. 9. Reports are operational and give correct data. D. CONTRACTOR, through System Supplier, shall provide the following support services: 1. Field Service Engineer: Field service engineer shall be responsible for programming of system PLCs in the factory and at the site. Field service engineer shall be present at the factory acceptance test and be present for startup of all systems and available throughout the entire construction process until final completion. Service technicians sent for system startup will not be acceptable. Support shall include on-site time. Services shall include, but not be limited to: a. Commissioning, installation, startup, and testing of equipment. b. Revising or rewriting manuals to incorporate an installed and accepted system. c. On-site training. d. Software modifications. 2. In-factory support shall include consultation following the acceptance testing and shipment. Services shall include, but not be limited to: a. Researching and answering questions related to the s'/stem operation, documentation, and system use and functions. b. Program modifications. c. Revising or rewriting manuals. 3. Post-startup support shall include follow-up services during the 1-year period following final acceptance. Service shall include follow-up recalibration and replacement of defective equipment, as well as additional training, software modifications, and control configurations as requested by CITY. This shall include 40 hours for work on-site other Section 26 09 00-8 4463.004/City Contract No.994 than warranty repair or replacement of defective equipment. This time shall be used for software enhancements and modifications to improve the operation of the system. It shall be assumed that these 40 hours include two trips to the site. 1.10 EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES A. New enclosures shall be front access only, minimum No. 14 gauge steel, and hinged doors, rotating lockable handle, 3-point latch on each supervisory equipment compartment door (not screws or bolts), with top and bottom bolts actuated by one rotating handle on large doors. Provide door stop kit for all panel doors, data pockets for wiring diagrams, and minimum 15-inch, bolt-on, LED light and door switch. Panels over 48 inches wide shall have two lights. Painting shall include phosphate treatment, zinc chromate iron oxide primer, baked rust-inhibiting enamel, white interior, and CITY-selected exterior color. All doors and panels shall be gasketed. All louvers shall be filtered with forced-air cooling as necessary by the supplier for conditions where installed. New enclosures shall be a minimum of 24 inches wide, 20 inches deep, and 90 inches high and shall be as manufactured by Hoffman or Saginaw. MCC structures are not acceptable. Where installed next to motor control centers, enclosure painting shall match that of the MCC. B. Indicating devices shall be at eye level, minimum 48 inches, maximum 60 inches, from floor to bottom of device. C. Plastic wiring troughs shall have removable covers. Maximum fill for wiring troughs shall be 60%. All wiring in supervisory enclosures and control panels not in wiring troughs shall be bound with continuous-type spiral windings. Terminal strips located adjacent to wiring troughs shall have a minimum of 1 1/2 inches between terminal strip and wiring trough. All wiring labels shall be able to be read without removing wiring trough covers. D. Tubing and instruments containing water shall be in separate compartments located and constructed so that leakage or spray at 100 psi pressure cannot touch electrical conductors or devices. Leakage shall be conducted to the floor in duct or pipe. E. All wiring for new panels shall be done in the factory, Class II, Type C with master terminal strips for exterior connections. Terminal strips shall be located either at the bottom or on the side of the enclosure, depending on where the I/O conduits penetrate the enclosure. Wiring troughs shall be provided for all field wiring. Splices are not allowed within enclosures or wireways. All enclosures must pass through doors to point of installation, and if enclosures are shipped in sections, all wiring and connections between sections shall be done by CONTRACTOR. All wiring shall be labeled at each end with corresponding numbers. This numbering shall be shown on the shop and record drawings. F. All door-mounted devices shall be furnished flush-mounted, and an exterior-engraved phenolic nameplate worded by CITY (upon receipt of shop drawings) shall be provided for each compartment, device, and light.All components within the enclosures shall be identified with interior-mounted engraved labels. Labels shall be installed on the enclosure back panel and not on the device or wireway. Devices shall be grouped for each device or unit being controlled. G. All panels with DIN rail-mounted equipment shall include a minimum of 25% spare DIN rail space. Section 26 09 00-9 4463.004/City Contract No.994 H. In addition to spare I/O specified herein, provide a minimum of 25% spare hot and neutral terminals wired to terminal strips. Spares shall be provided for all voltage sources within the panel (e.g., 120 V, 24 V). I. Enclosures that include motor controllers shall have a main disconnect for the enclosure. 1.11 COMMON REQUIREMENTS ALL EQUIPMENT A. All indicating and recording devices shall be electric or electronic. B. All indicating and control devices mounted on control panel, standalone VFD, and MCC enclosure doors (e.g., meters, gauges, electronic indicators, pilot lights, selector switches, VFD HIMs, OIPs, etc.) shall be located at eye level, minimum 48 inches, maximum 60 inches,from floor to bottom of device. Indicating devices on MCC enclosure doors located in the bottom half of an MCC section shall be mounted as high as possible. C. All motor control power shall be 120 volts with suitable circuit protection (fuses or breakers). Fuse holders shall be provided with integral LEDs to indicate when the fuse is blown. D. Devices powered at 120 volts from supervisory control panels shall be fused. This shall include, but not be limited to, solenoid valves, motor-operated valves, mororized ball valves, flowmeters, scales, and transducers. E. Provide lightning protection, isolation transformers, and fused disconnects at each end of each power circuit, supervisory circuit, and local supervisory circuit with transformers and relays, if necessary, to obtain supervisory power. 120-volt power shall be available at all control points. Lightning protection shall be completely solid-state and self-healing and shall not require the use of fuses. Provide a single switch with an indicating light to deenergize the control power for each location. Each panel shall have a GFI, duplex, 20 ampere, 120-volt receptacle. F. If enclosure and panel space is needed for future installation of devices and lights, the enclosure and panel shall be constructed for such installation. Supports shall be provided for future equipment, and panel openings shall be made and covered with neat cover plates matching the panel. G. Where equipment is necessary to perform a function as called for in one part of this specification, it shall be provided, even though the detailed enumeration at various control points may omit listing that equipment. H. Where a certain accuracy of sensing and transmitting levels or flows and controlling operations are called for, means must be provided to read or determine that the levels or flows are within the limits or accuracy specified of the sensing, transmitting, and controlling devices. Where no accuracy is specified, but a knowledge of levels is necessary to set operating points, an indicating device of accuracy consistent with the operation of the system is required. I. All control and auxiliary relays shall have indicating LEDs. All timing relays shall have On and timing Out LEDs. J. An anti-condensation heater shall be provided in all control panels located outdoors. The anti-condensation heater shall be as manufactured by Hoffman Model DAHX001, or equal, sized based on control panel and exterior temperature. Section 26 09 00-10 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.12 GENERAL CONTROL ALGORITHMS A. In general, the following is a definition of I/O at each MCC: 1. Run from MCC or auxiliary starter contact (dry contact). 2. Fail from MCC or starter auxiliary O.L. contact (dry contact). 3. Command Run Maintained start or as required (dry contact). 4. Hand-Auto from MCC or Controller Selector Switch (dry contact), feedback to SCADA. 5. Any command to operate shall be acted upon within 5 seconds, and any status feedback signals shall be received within 5 seconds. B. Programming algorithms described herein and in Part 3—Execution shall reside within the PLC associated with that equipment and not in the master PLC. C. All alarm contacts or system changes following a command must exist or not change for 0 to 5 seconds to activate an alarm at the SCADA System. D. All analog and digital inputs shall be monitored and totalized in the PLC. This shall include, but not be limited to,flows (water, etc.), pressures, electrical values, and levels.The following analog signals shall have minimum, maximum, and running average calculated values: all flows, kilowatts, and levels. Instantaneous values, totals, maximum, minimum, and average values shall be read by the HMI software and be reset on a daily basis as described below. Minimum, maximum, and average values shall be stored in the PLC for the current day and previous day. E. PLCs shall calculate equipment runtimes and number of starts for all equipment where run signals are monitored. Runtimes and number of starts shall be read by the HMI software and be reset on a daily basis as described below. — F. Totalized flow values, chemical usage, electrical values (kilowatt-hours), and equipment runtimes as described above shall be stored in the PLC for a period of 7 days. This data -- shall be available for use by the HMI software. The PLC shall indicate the specific date for each of the 7 previous days. G. Calculations for chemical usages shall be programmed so that tank filling cycles do not affect the usage totals. The totalizer shall only accumulate chemical usage when any pumps served by the tank are running. Provide a hardcoded tank-filling deadband to determine when the tank is being filled. When the tank level increases more than the deadband (i.e., the tank is being filled), chemical usage totalizing shall be suspended until the tank level stops rising for a hardcoded time delay (i.e., the tank is no longer being filled). The daily usage total shall be reset with the daily flow and runtime totals. Coordinate the hardcoded buffer and time delay values described above with OWNER during startup. H. Daily flow totals, chemical usage, runtimes, number of starts, electrical values — (kilowatt-hours), and number of cycles as described above shall be reset on a daily basis. This reset shall occur based on a time (hour and minute) setpoint stored in the PLC through the HMI software. The operator shall set the time when the daily reset will occur. Once this time setpoint matches the current time of the processor clock, the Master PLC shall send a reset signal to all remote PLCs to clear any totals that have accumulated locally. I. In addition to the totalizers described above, the PLC shall also calculate cumulative totals for all runtimes, number of starts, flows, electrical values (kilowatt-hours), and chemical usage. Maximum, minimum, and running average for all analog inputs shall also be included Section 26 09 00-11 4463.004/City Contract No.994 as part of the cumulative total algorithm. Cumulative totals shall totalize L,ntil manually reset by the operator. There shall be a manual reset for each signal. The PL;; shall display the date of the last cumulative totalizer reset for each signal. J. System Supplier shall provide addressing for all hardcoded time delays and PLC settings that are not operator adjustable. This shall include, but not be limited to, time delays for float switches, call-to-run fails, level alarms, flow alarms, temperature alarms, and data fail alarms. Indication of time remaining for all timers (hardcoded and operator adjustable) within PLCs shall be made available for indication at the SCADA System. K. Float switches shall include time delays to prevent intermittent starting and stopping and/or alarming because of bouncing floats (including hardwired relay logic). L. Solenoid valves that are not provided with position indication (e.g., ope ned, closed) shall include hardcoded time delays on the open and close signals to alloy, operation of the solenoid valve. M. System Supplier shall provide addressing for all PLC fault codes so tha: the error number and associated description can be displayed at the SCADA System. N. All analog signals shall be scaled to engineering units in the PLC with implied decimal to allow storage in integer registers. System Supplier shall provide all analog ranges, PLC register values, and associated scaling factors to CONSULTANT for use with the HMI software. This shall include upper and lower limits of PLC registers (i.e., -32768 to 32767 or 0 to 65535), as well as upper and lower limits for the associated device (i.e., 0 to 150 psi). Analog values specified to be displayed with decimal points shall be scaled by the HMI software. O. For level sensing devices, provide a Transducer Fail alarm at the SCADA System for each transducer. Transducer fail shall be defined as the signal from the transducer being out of range. An out-of-range signal shall initiate a transducer fail alarm regardless of the alarm delay setpoint for an unchanging value. When the alarm delay setpoint for an unchanging value is set to zero minutes, an unchanging value shall be disabled from initiating a transducer alarm. P. Provide "Out of Service" indication for each piece of equipment when that equipment's MCC or SCADA H-O-A is not in the Auto position. J Q. The following analog signals shall have associated high and low setpoinr s and alarms: all levels and amps. Alarms shall be tied in to the existing dialer system spec ified herein. R. PLCs shall be set up so that the ranges of all analog input signals to the PLC I/O cards can be configured from the HMI software. Provide two operator-adjustable setpoints for each analog input, one corresponding to 4 mA and the other corresponding to 20 mA. These setpoints are applicable to devices attached to the PLCs. This feature is intended to be used for startup and calibration purposes. S. All equipment controlled automatically from the SCADA System shall have "Call-to-Run" signals generated from their associated PLCs. These signals shall be displayed at the SCADA System through the HMI software. Each associated PLC shall also generate a Call-to-Run Fail if the equipment is called-to-run but does not start within a specific time period. The Call-to-Run signal shall be generated within the PLC software and may not be combined with other fail signals such as hardwired motor fails, and overtemperature. Section 26 09 00-12 4463.004/City Contract No.994 T. All valves/gates controlled automatically from the SCADA System shall have "Call-to-Open/Close" signals (as applicable) generated from their associated PLCs. These signals shall be displayed at the SCADA System through the HMI software. Each associated PLC shall also generate a Call-to-Open/Close Fail if the valve/gate is called-to-open/close, but does not open/close within a specific time period. The Call-to-Open/Close Fail signal shall be generated within the PLC software and may not be combined with other fail signals such as hardwired motor fails and overtemperature. U. In cases where the automatic alternation of equipment is provided by the PLC, indication of the lead, lag, and lag-lag pumps (where applicable) shall be provided and displayed at the SCADA System. V. All controlled equipment as described herein shall have the capability of manual control from the HMI software through the manipulation of analog or digital variables. This shall be through the use of a "SCADA H-O-A" switch or by forcing a single I/O point as a manual start command.All analog and digital outputs shall be capable of being manually set from the HMI software. _ W. Where a manual reset is required at the SCADA System(i.e., level lockout), the HMI software shall be configured to set a discrete reset bit. Once the PLC receives the bit and the alarm condition has cleared, the PLC shall clear the alarm and place the associated equipment back in service. X. Provide an analog PLC tag for each piece of equipment with a SCADA H-O-A switch. Tag shall be used for color animation associated with that equipment's HMI graphic object. Analog tag value shall be as follows: 0 = Off/Out of Service, 1 = In Auto at MCC, 2 = PLC Call-to-Run, 3 = Running, 4 = Failed (Call-to-Run, Starter Overload, etc.). Precedence shall be given to the higher number conditions; for example, if a pump is In Auto but has failed, the tag value shall be 4. Y. The SCADA System shall allow the operator to change all setpoints and operating parameters within the PLCs as described herein. All control algorithms and alarms for equipment shall be programmed in the associated PLC and not in the master. There shall be no control algorithms or alarms in the computers. Control of each piece of equipment shall be accomplished as described herein and in Part 3—Execution of this section. Z. Each PLC shall monitor its own Ethernet Module Fault Code and toggle a bit used to indicate CIP messaging errors and too many CIP connections at the SCADA System. AA. Each alarm shall have a discrete PLC tag that is able to be toggled at the SCADA System HMI to enable or disable the associated alarm from being activated. BB. All alarms shall be tied to the existing software dialer as well as the existing common alarms wired to the hardwired dialer. The assignment of all alarms to the existing hardwired and existing software dialer shall be done through the SCADA System and be flexible for operation. The operator shall be able to assign any alarm to two channels on the existing alarm dialer. In the event of an alarm, the existing software dialer shall inform the operator as to what station or piece of equipment is in alarm. Provide a bit for each alarm that can be manipulated at the SCADA System allowing the operator to enable or disable the alarm from being sent to the existing hardwired and existing software dialer. Regardless of the state of the bit, the alarm shall be displayed at the SCADA System. An alarm silence/acknowledge Section 26 09 00-13 4463.004/City Contract No.994 bit shall also be provided to silence the alarm horn and disable all active alarms from being sent to the existing hardwired and existing software dialer. CC. The existing software alarm dialer and existing backup hardwired dialers shall both be monitored and annunciated from the master PLC and the SCADA System. The existing software dialer shall be the primary means of alarm call-out, and the backup dialers shall only be activated when the PLC loses communication with the existing software dialer or if any active alarms have not been acknowledged for 1 hour. The PLC shall communicate with the existing software dialer through the HMI software utilizing an internal PLC register that is constantly being written to by the existing software dialer through the HMI software. DD. Battery status of each new PLC shall be monitored by the SCADA Systeri. In the event of a low battery condition, an alarm shall be generated at the SCADA System EE. Alarm functions shall be capable of being printed out listing both time and date of their occurrence, as well as acknowledgment, the operator that acknowledged the alarm, and the current state of the alarm. Any change in alarm state shall also be capable of being printed. These alarms shall list both station and type of alarm that has occurred. Again, based on demand, a log or record of 24-hour/30-day records shall be kept and stored both by hard copy as well as hard disk, CD, or tape backup. All alarm points shown on the I/O list, as well as those developed in PLC software, shall each be indicated individually at the SCADA System (i.e., no common alarms). 1.13 SPARE PARTS A. System Supplier shall furnish spare parts for equipment specified herein as listed in Section 26 95 10—Spare Parts. 1.14 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substantial Completion of the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CONFIGURATION A. System Supplier shall include the development of the existing Ignition version 7.9.9 HMI Software. HMI configuration shall include the following features: a process database that allows the computer system to monitor the addressable contents of the various PLCs using the fiber-optic data highway; an integral security system that limits access to various system features to only those users who have proper security clearance; a graphical user interface to allow the operators to view process information and modify system setpoints; and an alarm system to notify the users of abnormal process conditions and archive the pertinent data. B. System Supplier shall include the following as a part of the HMI Configuration: 1. Meetings at initiation, 25%, 50%, 75%, and 90% completion of the HMI with System Supplier's Programmer, CITY, and CONSULTANT to review graphical user interface layouts, alarm configuration, and security information.The graphic displays shall be sent Section 26 09 00-14 4463.004/City Contract No.994 to CONSULTANT on disk at least 1 week prior to each meeting.All meetings will be held at CONSULTANT's office in Madison,Wisconsin and shall be assumed to be a minimum of 8 hours in duration. Meetings may be attended by any parties associated with the Contract. At a minimum, one representative of System Supplier capable of making binding decisions related to this scope of work shall attend. 2. An allowance of 40 hours of programming time for software enhancements and modifications to improve operation of the system. This is over and above the programming time required to configure the system to meet these specifications. 3. Operator training for ten operators. Course length shall be a minimum of 2 days. Two 1-day sessions shall be provided at CITY's facilities. Training sessions shall occur at a minimum of 1-month intervals. C. The process database shall be configured to access all necessary data from any of the networked PLCs to meet the requirements of the control descriptions in this specification, I/O listings, and descriptions below: 1. The process data shall be collected from the PLC. The system shall be set up so that data is monitored by that PLC. 2. The process information on the system shall be organized into tags that contain not only the specific process data but also system data such as point description, alarm setpoints, and sampling frequency. The tags shall be available for assignment to or control from the symbols on the graphical user interface screens. The values of the tags shall be used for numerical display, color changes, and so on. The following tag types shall be available for configuration as needed to meet the requirements of the control descriptions and the graphical user interface: a. Analog input: Reading analog values from PLC and scaling to accommodate implied decimal. b. Analog output: Allows writing to PLC registers. c. Digital input: Monitors state changes in PLC registers. d. Digital output: Allows writing state changes to PLC registers. e. Calculated value: Uses input tags to calculate a derived value. f. Trend buffer: Accepts analog inputs to a FIFO buffer for use in displaying real-time trends. g. Timer: Count down or count up to monitor runtimes of all process equipment. 3. All analog inputs to the system (including PLC calculated totals) shall be historically archived to the SCADA Server's fixed disk using ODBC transfer to database table each day. 4. All equipment runtimes from timer blocks shall be historically archived to the SCADA Server's fixed disk. Historical data collection for timers shall be configured to be on an exception basis similar to analog values. 5. The system shall be capable of two-way transfer of data between the process database and other Windows 2000 software. The transfer shall take place using SQL calls (to Microsoft ODBC compliant software). 6. The process database information shall be exported to or imported from ASCII text files that have delimited formats. An operator with sufficient security clearance shall be able to generate text reports of the database information. D. The system is configured with security levels to restrict access to portions of the system from individual or groups of operators. Existing security shall be maintained and fully functional with new and modified screens. E. The HMI shall allow the user to view process information and modify the equipment parameters described in the control descriptions for the various PLCs. Standard Windows graphical elements such as push buttons, radio buttons, check boxes, list boxes, and Section 26 09 00-15 4463.004/City Contract No.994 scalable text shall be used in the configuration of the graphical representation of the processes. All networked computers shall be able to view all system information: 1. At all times during the viewing of the graphical user interface, the screen shall display the Windows standard title bar and menu bar at the top of each screen. Access to the functions in those areas shall be determined by the security clearance of the operator who is logged into the system. A row of buttons along the side shall allow system navigation to the overview screens, system information screen, historical trend screen, and alarm screen. The report system shall be linked to the graphical interface screens using a pushbutton or action script. If the operator closes the reporting software, the operator should be back in the graphical screens. A four-line alarm summary with the most current alarms shall be displayed at the bottom of all screens at all times. The remainder of the monitor area shall be reserved for the "full-size" screens described below. 2. The following screens, as a minimum, are required to be configured for the user interface as full-size windows. These screens shall show symbols of all related equipment that are monitored. These symbols shall be labeled and shall be dynamically colored to represent their current states. Instantaneous and totalized flows associated with the process areas shall also be labeled and shown on these screens. Levels shall be labeled and shown and symbols representing fill levels shall be shown: a. WWTP layout with flows (with ability to move to any major process area from this screen). b. Sludge pumping system (WAS). c. Sludge transfer system (TWAS). d. Truck loading. e. Sludge thickening system (GBT). f. Sludge thickening system (belt press). g. Sludge thickening system (centrifuge). h. Chemical storage and pumping. i. Sludge storage and pumping. j. Centrate equalization. k. Polymer feed system. I. In addition to the drawings listed, the Bid shall include a minimum of 10 additional full-size graphics screens of similar complexity to those listed above. 3. The HMI described above shall be configured so that control modifications and/or setpoint adjustments may be made by selecting (clicking on) that piece of equipment with the computer mouse. This shall bring up a small window that overlays the full-size process screen and contains all control parameters and status indications for the piece of equipment selected. Whenever a request is made to change a setpoint or make a control change, a log of that action shall be created that includes the time and date of occurrence, the description of the point, the new value, and the operator who was logged in when the change was made. These windows shall be considered separate from the graphic screens required above and are required for each piece of controlled equipment and each analog that has associated setpoints for the operator to adjust. 4. All screens listed above shall be configured to allow the operator to open a small window that overlays the full-size process window with a real-time trend chart of the analog signals displayed on the screen versus time. The real-time chart shall be 4 hours in duration and shall display the contents of the trend buffer described above. Each analog variable shall display on the screen in a different color. In addition, the configuration of four additional real-time trend charts with four variables each shall be included in the Bid and shall have variables and time durations determined by CITY. 5. Provide real-time trending of historical data over time on individual graphic screens. Analog tags to be trended shall be as selected by CITY, and a minimum of 50 trend screens shall be included in the Base Bid. Specific layout of each trend screen shall be Section 26 09 00-16 4463.004/City Contract No.994 approved by CITY, and trend screens shall include two, three or four separate trends per screen. The user shall be allowed to select four fixed chart durations (8-hour, _. 24-hour, 7-day, and 30-day) for each screen, and each trend shall be able to display a maximum of eight analog tags. Trend screens shall have the capability of zooming in to an operator-specified timespan and, using a real-time legend, shall show time and analog value for pens associated with that trend. 6. Provide a full-size screen that summarizes system information made available by the software. F. Configure the existing software to provide alarm monitoring for informing the operators of current alarm conditions throughout the system and logging alarms to the printer and disk for archival storage. Alarm information (including alarm acknowledgment) shall be globally available to all nodes on the network. 1. The alarms that shall be included in the system include the following: All digital inputs to the system that indicate a fail state fora piece of process equipment (e.g., pump fails, -- power fails); all digital inputs that indicate a level, pressure, or temperature alarm state (e.g., HWL, building low temperature); analog inputs that exceed alarm limits within the process database; and system alarms generated by the HMI software (e.g., communication failure). 2. Alarms shall be grouped into two priority levels, and CITY shall select which alarms are to be assigned to each level. The high priority alarms shall sound the internal computer horn on the SCADA Server until the alarm is acknowledged or cleared from the system. 3. At the onset of each alarm condition, a log shall be created that indicates the time and date of occurrence, the description of the point in alarm, and the current state or value. 4. CITY shall decide which alarms require acknowledgment by an operator prior to being cleared from the system. Those alarms that do not require acknowledgment will be cleared from the alarm system when the state returns to normal condition. Those requiring acknowledgment shall be cleared from the system only after an operator with �- sufficient security clearance has acknowledged the alarm through the operator interface and the state returns to the normal condition. Whenever an alarm is cleared from the system, a log shall be printed with the time and date of occurrence, description of the point in alarm, the current state or value, and the logged-in operator who acknowledged the alarm (when applicable).Acknowledgment of an alarm shall affect alarm summaries systemwide. 5. Each process alarm condition shall be capable of being taken out of service by the operator if that operator has security clearance allowing alarm acknowledgment. A log indicating time and date of occurrence, point description, and user name shall be created when an alarm is removed from service. 6. The system shall generate a file containing all system alarms for each day and shall store those files for 30 days on the fixed disk of the SCADA Server. This file may be accessed by the operator and printed to the report printer. 2.02 INDUSTRIAL CONTROL RELAYS AND CONTACTORS A. Industrial control and power relays shall be installed in motor control centers, pump control panels, and motor starter enclosures where required by System Supplier. Relays used to interface with PLC I/O, motor control circuits, hard-wired control logic, and for loads less than 8 amps shall be terminal style, interposing/isolation relays. Relays for inductive loads, alarm lights, alarm horns, field wiring, or loads up to 15 amps shall be industrial, general purpose square base relays. Relays for monitoring the output voltage of uninterruptable power supplies shall be UPS voltage monitoring relays. Contactors for lighting circuits, branch circuits, or loads greater than 15 amps shall be industrial, electrically-held lighting Section 26 09 00-17 4463.004/City Contract No.994 contactors. Contactors for motor power control shall be industrial, electrically-held power contactors. B. Relays shall meet the following requirements: 1. Interposing/isolation relays: a. Configuration: SPDT or DPDT as required by System Supplier. b. Mounting: DIN rail with screw terminal base socket. c. Voltage: 120 Vac, or as required by System Supplier. d. Contact rating: 8 A(DPDT), 16 A(SPDT). e. Operating life: 10 million cycles. f. Status: On-Off flag-type or LED indicator. g. UL listed. h. Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley, 700-HK, or equal. 2. General purpose relays: a. Configuration: DPDT or 3PDT as required by System Supplier. b. Mounting: DIN rail with screw terminal base socket. c. Voltage: 120 Vac. d. Contact rating: 15 A, minimum; 3/4 hp. e. Operating life: 10 million cycles. f. Status: On-Off flag-type or LED indicator. g. UL listed. h. Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley, 700-HB, or equal. 3. UPS voltage monitoring relays: a. Configuration: SPOT. b. Mounting: DIN rail. c. Voltage: 120 Vac. d. Contact rating: 15 A. e. Operating life: 10 million cycles. f. Over-voltage range: 80 to 150 Vac, adjustable. g. Under-voltage range: 30 to 95% of pickup, adjustable. h. Drop-out time delay: 0.1 to 10 seconds, adjustable. i. UL listed. j. Manufacturer: Macromatic, VWKE120A, or equal. 4. Power contactors: a. Configuration: Electrically-held, 3 poles. b. Mounting: DIN rail. c. Voltage: 120 Vac. d. Minimum contact rating: 20 A continuous, 1 hp. e. Operating life: 1.3 million cycles. f. UL listed. g. NEMA rated. h. Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley, Bulletin 300, or equal. 5. Duplex alternation relays: a. Configuration: DPDT or DPDT cross wired. b. Mounting: DIN rail with screw terminal base socket. c. Voltage: 120 Vac. d. Contact Rating: 10 A, minimum; 1/8 hp. e. Operating Life: 10 million mechanical operations and 100,000 electrical operations. f. Status: Output position indicating LEDs. g. Control: Three-position toggle switch permitting selection of normal duplexing action, locking in the A-B sequence, or locking in the B-A sequence.Alternation shall be able to be toggled every time a 120 Vac control signal is removed. h. Manufacturer: Diversified Electronics, ARA, or equal. Section 26 09 00-18 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.03 PLC TELEMETRY SYSTEMS A. The Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs) shall be a modular design with separate expandable I/O modules. The available expansion shall be local I/O modules or distributed (remote) I/O connected through a network. 1. A single local chassis shall house a CPU, memory and communications interface options.A separate power supply shall supply necessary power to the chassis. 2. The PLC shall be DIN rail or panel mounted. 3. All system modules and the chassis shall be designed to operate in: a. An industrial environment with an ambient temperature of 0° to 60°C (32° to 140°F), and with a relative humidity range of 5% to 95%, noncondensing. b. A free airflow environment (convection cooling only, no fans or other air moving devices shall be required). c. Conformal coating of the PLC shall be offered as an option for use in corrosive/hazardous applications. 4. All system modules and local and remote chassis shall be designed and tested to operate in high electrical noise environments. B. The system shall support a minimum of eight local I/O expansion modules in up to three banks, along with remote I/O expansion via the Ethernet network. 1. Local expansion modules shall be installed in the local bank or in bank(s) vertically or horizontally adjacent to the local bank. 2. The local expansion modules shall mechanically lock together by means of a tongue and groove design and have an integrated communication bus that is connected from module to module by a movable bus connector. 3. Each module shall have a built-in removable terminal block behind a door at the front of the module with a finger-safe cover. I/O wiring shall be routed from beneath the module to I/O sensors and actuators. 4. The manufacturer shall have available a variety of I/O modules, including AC digital, DC digital, contact output, analog, RTD, thermocouple and high-speed counter. 5. Each bank in the system shall have its own power supply. 6. Each bank in multiple-bank installations shall be able to be interconnected over an Ethernet network without the use of special cabling. 7. Discrete I/O cards shall be 16 point maximum. 8. Isolated discrete I/O cards shall be 8 point maximum. Isolated discrete cards shall be used if there are multiple or external power sources associated with the signals, if wiring leaves the building, or if the card is driving a load (i.e. solenoids, etc.). 9. Analog input cards shall be 8 point. 10. Analog output cards shall be 4 point isolated type. C. Central Processing Unit (CPU): 1. The CPU shall be a self-contained unit, and shall be capable of providing control program execution, supporting remote and local programming, controlling all I/O scanning and inter-controller and peripheral communication and diagnostic functions as follows: a. 32 tasks (100 programs per task): -- (1) Continuous—one allowed. (2) Periodic—Run via an interrupt at a user-defined interval in 1 ps increments from 1 ms to 2000 s. (3) Event—Triggered by consumed tag or EVENT instruction. b. 256 controller connections. Section 26 09 00-19 4463.004/City Contract No.994 c. Network connections: (1) Up to 256 Ethernet/IP. (2) Up to 120 TCP/IP. 2. The PLC shall organize user applications as tasks, which can be specified as continuous, periodic, or event based. Tasks shall be triggered by input point or instruction. 3. Programming instructions shall include the following: a. Relay-type (bit). b. High-speed counter. c. Counter and timer. d. Data comparison (for example: equal, greater than or equal, less than or equal). e. Data manipulation (for example: copy, move). f. Logical (for example: and, not, or). g. Integer and floating point math (for example: add, subtract, multiply, log 10). h. Advanced math and trigonometric functions (for example sine, cosine, tangent). i. Statistical. j. Matrix and array (for example: COP, CSP, FIFO). k. BCD conversion. I. Program flow control (for example: jump, subroutine). m. Application specific (for example: sequencer). n. Diagnostic. o. Communication. p. Recipe. q. Proportional Integral and Derivative (PID). r. Block read and write. s. Immediate I/O and communication update. 4. The system must be capable of storing the following data: a. External output status. b. External input status. c. Timer values. d. Counter values. e. Boolean values (0 or 1). f. Short integer numbers (-128 to 127). g. Integer numbers (-32,768 to 32,767). h. Double integer numbers (-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647). i. Floating point numbers to eight significant digits (for 8+ digits, conversion to exponential form from ±1.1754944 E -38 to ±3.402823 E +38). j. Long Integer Numbers (-9,223,372,036,854,775,808 to 9,223,372,036,854,775,807). k. Internal processor status information. 5. The CPU shall have a real-time clock. 6. When the main power supply is removed, the CPU shall have: a. The ability to back up user program and all data, or b. A nonenergy storage option. 7. The front of the CPU shall have a USB port. 8. The front of the CPU shall have an integrated latching mechanism for securing the secure digital (SD) memory card. The PLC shall operate with the memory card removed. 9. The processor module shall have LED indicators to indicate CPU status. 10. The processor module shall have a mode switch. D. Memory: 1. The PLC shall have a minimum of 1 MB of user memory. 2. The program storage medium shall be solid-state, nonvolatile type. Section 26 09 00-20 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3. The PLC shall include a 1 GB SD memory card to store the user program and the firmware of all modules residing in the same chassis to protect against memory loss. The card shall be rated for use in SIL 2 applications. a. When memory is restored, a user-selectable option to restore in Run mode or Program mode shall be provided. b. The PLC shall be able to be configured for automatic download from the card on power-up. c. The PLC shall be able to be manually triggered to save to or load from the card. E. Programming Environment: 1. Programming shall be through the USB 2.0 port or through the Ethernet/IP network. 2. The programming software shall run on the latest version of Windows (Professional) and Windows Server 2016 operating system environments, and the programming methods shall be: a. IEC 61131-3 compliant ladder diagram (LD). b. Structured text (ST). c. Function block diagram (FBD). d. Sequential function chart (SFC). F. Communication: 1. The PLC shall have at a minimum: a. USB 2.0 port to support upload and download, online edits, firmware updates, and bridging to other modules at full speed (12 Mbps). b. Ethernet/IP switch and dual 10/100 Mbps Ethernet/IP ports with 1 IP address. The interface shall support: (1) IEEE 802.3 Physical and Data Link Standard. (2) Common Industrial Protocol (CIP), the protocol that provides real-time I/O messaging and information/peer-to-peer messaging. (3) Standard TCP/IP and UDP/IP communication. (4) 10/100 Mbps auto sensing and auto switching. (5) Standard Ethernet media. (6) Subnet masking. (7) BOOTP and DHCP support. (8) Manual configuration using specified software. (9) Programmable Logic Controller messaging to peer controllers and workstations. (10) I/O data, real-time interlocking and information. (11) Full or half-duplex communication. (12) Built-in web access to diagnostics. (13) I/O control. (14) Precision Time Protocol (CIP Sync, IEEE 1588). c. Access to DeviceNet networks for communications and backup via a DeviceNet scanner module. 2. The manufacturer shall have available for serial communications connection: a. Module for an ASCII interface to RS-232, RS-422 and RS-485 devices. b. Module for a Modbus RTU interface. G. Power Supply: 1. The PLC shall operate on 85 to 265 VAC (120 to 220 VAC nominal), single phase, in the frequency range from 47 to 63 Hz. 2. A single, main power supply shall be capable of supplying all necessary power to the local bank housing the CPU and local I/O modules. Additional power supplies shall provide power to other local and remote banks. Section 26 09 00-21 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3. The power supply shall be capable of converting AC standard low voltage line power to the DC power required to operate the PLC system. 4. The power supply shall include an easily viewed indicator to show status of the DC power applied to the backplane. 5. The power supply shall provide electronic protection: a. At the time of power-up, the power supply shall inhibit operation of the controller and I/O modules until the DC voltages are within specifications. b. The power supply shall automatically shut down the PLC whe its output power exceeds 125% of its rated power. c. The power supply shall provide surge protection, isolation and outage carry-over of up to 6 cycles of the AC line (120-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz) or 40 ms at 24 VDC. d. The power supply shall be fused. H. PLCs shall be CompactLogix, 5370 L3 family, as manufactured by Rockwell Automation, or equal. I. PLC Systems: 1. System Supplier shall provide all the equipment necessary for data gathering, monitoring, and control as required to meet this specification and in accordance with the drawings. The PLC system equipment shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: a. PLC consisting of CPUs with adequate memory and instructions, local and remote I/O mounting racks, power supplies, I/O modules, communications modules and hardware, and all other components required to make the PLCs perform all the functions required in this specification. The PLCs shall be mounted in NEMA 12 or NEMA 4X enclosures as specified herein or as shown on the drawings; see Equipment Enclosures. The new PLC enclosures shall be completely assembled, prewired, and tested at System Supplier's factory. b. Telemetry system (where required) as specified herein. c. Fiber-optic data highway cable system terminated to interconnecting hardware such as station connectors at the various SCC system locations. d. PLC Data Highway interface cards for each computer connected to the data highway as shown on the drawings. 2. Each PLC and remote I/O enclosure shall include, but not be limited to, the following equipment: a. Main PLC processor and remote I/O driver or remote I/O receiver. b. Main power supply. c. I/O modules and housing. d. Computer-grade transient and spike suppressor. e. Rail mounted terminal blocks for field wiring terminations. f. Plastic wiring ducts. g. General purpose duplex GFCI receptacle. h. 15 A, 120/240 Vac, branch circuit breakers to feed to the main PLC controller and the I/O controlled field devices. i. Other accessories required to provide a complete and working PLC system. j. UPS backup for the SCC. k. Fiber-optic patch panel. I. Network switch. m. Front panel-mounted programming port with RJ-45 jack and 120-volt receptacle. 3. The main PLC processor and remote I/O receivers shall receive power from their individual power supplies, which shall be fed from dedicated 15 ampere circuit breakers through voltage transient and spike suppressors. Section 26 09 00-22 4463.004/City Contract No.994 4. PLC Programming and PLC Software: System Supplier shall provide all the PLC programming and PLC software required to meet this specification and shall be in accordance with the system configuration. The software shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: a. PLC logic programs to be written by System Supplier for the PLC systems to accomplish the monitoring and control functions as specified herein. The System Supplier shall document and annotate the programs, update them as required after startup, and then turn the programs over to CITY in the form of compact disks; two copies are required. b. System Supplier shall provide a commercially available PLC programming and documentation software package as developed by the system manufacturer for documenting and modifying the PLC programs. Modifications shall be accomplished from the Main SCADA server or the laptop. c. System Supplier shall coordinate the I/O database in each PLC with the Programmer of the HMI Software. All I/O addressing that is to be viewed or m. manipulated by the HMI Software shall be organized into contiguous blocks of integer tags for discrete bits and floating point tags for all other values to facilitate block data transfer between computers and PLCs.The I/O addressing shall be made available to CITY during shop drawing review (see item 2.01-SCADA System Computers and Software). 5. Engineering: a. System Supplier shall provide all engineering necessary to accomplish and document the requirements of this specification and in accordance with the system configuration. The engineering to be performed by System Supplier on this project shall include, but not be limited to, the following categories: (1) PLC system layouts. (2) Panel layouts. (3) I/O configuration and wiring drawings. (4) PLC programming. (5) Fiber-optics communication layout. (6) Network layout. b. Submittals: In addition to submittals previously described provide: (1) Shop drawing and product data. (2) PLC logic programs. (3) Recommended spare parts lists. c. Installation: CONTRACTOR shall install all the system equipment including PLCs and local I/O enclosures, remote I/O enclosures, and interconnecting cabling as required. This work shall include all interconnection wiring from new and existing equipment as required for the completion of the system. The PLC shall be a microprocessor-based controller. d. It shall be the responsibility of System Supplier to ascertain that all field devices are compatible and consistent with the new system design. This includes reviewing drawings and data to ascertain the compatibility and consistency of the system with the field devices on such considerations as: (1) Power levels. (2) Power sources. (3) Logic schemes. (4) Signal types and levels. (5) Interface devices where required. (6) All other aspects of field devices impacting on the design of the system. 6. The entire system shall be designed to accommodate all inputs and outputs in the I/O list plus 25% spare for each type of input and output signal at each location or as indicated, whichever is greater.All spare and unused I/O shall be wired to terminal strips. Section 26 09 00-23 4463.004/City Contract No.994 This wiring shall include all auxiliary devices and components to complete the installation (e.g., interposing relays, wireways). 7. The system shall be programmed to implement the control sequen ;es and to provide the monitoring according to this specification. It shall be the responsibility of System Supplier to include all the inputs and outputs required to meet all aspects of this specification, regardless of whether they are specifically included in the I/O listing in this specification. J. System Supplier shall provide a complete list of spare parts required and where they may be obtained for operating the system for 3 years from startup. K. The equipment mounted within the enclosures shall be mounted on the enclosure back panel, neatly organized, and shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 1. All wiring within the enclosure shall be through the plastic wiring ducts with maximum 60% fill. All wiring not in ducts shall be in plastic spiral bindings. All I/O devices shall be wired to rail mounted terminal blocks. 2. All field wiring shall terminate at the rail mounted terminal blocks that shall be mounted either at the bottom or on the side of the enclosure back panel depending on where the I/O conduits penetrate the enclosure. 3. The field wiring terminals shall be clearly identified as to which I/O terminals they are wired. 4. Jumpers between adjacent terminal blocks shall be copper jumper bars supplied by the terminal block manufacturer. L. Refer to Section 26 05 53—Electrical Identification for the control panel and field wiring color code. M. 24 VDC power supplies shall be provided in the enclosures to power all locp-powered analog input signals where required. N. Current-to-current isolators shall be provided for isolating all existing analog input signals. O. NEMA ratings of enclosures shall be as required for the area where installed, unless specified otherwise. P. Manufacturer of Accessories: 1. The plastic wiring duct shall be Electrovert "Electro-Duct," Panduit, or equal. — 2. Terminal blocks shall meet the requirements of Section 26 05 19—Wire. 3. Wire markers shall meet the requirements of Section 26 05 53—Electrical Identification. 4. Circuit breakers shall be Square D Type QO with mounting bases or equal. Circuit breakers can be rail-mounted type, Square D, Class 9080, Type GCB-150, or equal. 5. Power supplies shall be Sola, DIN rail mount, SPD or SDN Series, or equal. 6. Signal conditioners shall be Action Instruments, DIN rail mount, or ec jal. Q. System Supplier shall provide the design and layout of the fiber-optic communication system between the SCCs being provided. Spare runs of fiber-optic cable shall have connectors provided and be run to each terminating location. The fiber-optic network shall be setup in a self-healing ring-type configuration. Daisy chaining of the SCCs communication system is not acceptable. R. System Supplier shall provide the necessary communication modules within the systems to allow the systems to communicate with the fiber-optic cabling. Section 26 09 00-24 4463.004/City Contract No.994 S. System Supplier shall provide the necessary fiber-optic cable, fiber-optic termination units, connector kits, and terminator sets, as specified herein, to provide complete and working communication between the SCCs. The installation of the fiber-optic cable shall be by CONTRACTOR, with supervision by System Supplier. T. Provide a 120-volt AC true on-line UPS backup in each SCC that will provide continuous communication between all SCCs for at least 30 minutes following a power failure. 1. UPS power shall be provided, at a minimum, to the following equipment: a. PLCs and I/O cards, controllers, and OIPs. b. Radios, network switches, signal converters, and other communication devices. c. Power fail and communication indicating lights and alarm devices. d. Power supplies for loop-powered instruments. e. Automatic alarm dialers. f. Intrinsic safety barriers. g. Hazardous location detection and alarming instrumentation and notification devices. h. Intrusion detection system devices and video surveillance camera power supplies. 2. The UPS shall be plug connected inside the SCC with a dedicated receptacle and • overcurrent protection device. All UPS-powered devices shall be continuously powered through the UPS under normal operating conditions. Provide UPS voltage monitoring relays to automatically bypass the UPS when the UPS output rises 110% above or falls 90% below the nominal supply voltage. 3. Each UPS shall be provided with a relay card that provides a dry contact output to the SCADA System in the event that the UPS batteries need replacement. 4. UPS shall be APC with relay I/O module, Liebert GXT4 with relay card, or Eaton 9SX. Provide a stand or shelf within each SCC panel for the UPS so that the UPS does not sit on the bottom of the enclosure. 2.04 FLANGE-MOUNTED LIQUID LEVEL TRANSMITTER A. Flange-mounted liquid level indicating transmitters shall be of the piezoresistive silicon type with a process-isolated diaphragm with silicone oil fill, microprocessor-based "smart" electronics, and a field adjustable rangeablility of 100:1 input range. Span and zero shall be continuously adjustable externally over the entire range. Transmitters shall be NEMA 4X construction with low-copper aluminum body and 316 stainless steel process wetted parts. Accuracy, including nonlinearity, hysteresis and repeatability errors shall be ±0.075 percent of calibrated span, zero based. The maximum zero elevation and maximum zero suppression shall be adjustable to anywhere within sensor limits. Output shall be linear isolated 4-20 mA at 24 VDC. B. The piezoresistive silicon pressure sensor shall be mechanically, electrically, and thermally isolated from the process and the environment. The sensor shall include an integral temperature compensation sensor and shall provide a digital signal to the transmitter's electronics for further processing. Factory set correction coefficients shall be stored in the sensor's non-volatile memory for correction and linearization of the sensor output in the electronics section. The electronics section shall correct the digital signal from the sensor and convert it into a 4-20 mA analog signal for remote indication. The electronics section shall contain configuration parameters and diagnostic data in non-volatile EEPROM memory and shall be capable of communicating, via a digital signal superimposed on the 4-20 mA output signal, with a remote interface device. Output signal damping shall be provided, with an adjustable time constant of 0 to 36 seconds. Total long-term stability (frequency of calibration) shall be no less than 0.125% for 2 years. Section 26 09 00-25 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Transmitter shall include a 4-digit LCD indicator capable of displaying engineering units, percent of output, and/or milliamps. Provide mounting hardware as required. Transmitter shall also have local pushbuttons capable of full configuration of the transmitter without the need for a secondary device. D. The flange-mounted sensor shall consist of a flushing ring with dual 1/4-inch NPT flushing -- ports, to allow pressurized water to clear debris from the sensor. Flushing ring shall be as manufactured by Rosemont, or equal. E. All mounting flanges, diaphragms, 0-rings and materials used in construction shall be non-corroding, compatible with each other, and compatible with the liquic being measured. F. Flange-mounted liquid level transmitters shall be as manufactures. by Rosemount, Model 2051L, or equal. 2.05 FLOAT SWITCHES A. Float switches when specified herein, shown on the drawings, or necessary to complete an operating system shall be as follows: — 1. The float switches shall be mercury free and consist of a 304 stainless steel housing 5 1/2-inch diameter, stainless steel mounting clamp, a flexible two-conductor cable with a CPE jacket, and a potted SPST magnetic reed switch. Provide switch configuration (NO or NC) as required. The electrical load for the switch contacts shall be 100 VA at up to 250 volts. Float switches shall include a two-conductor cable 16 AWG with fine strands made for heavy flexing service and underwater use. Cable length shall be 50 feet minimum for a continuous run to the terminating control panel. A green grounding wire shall connect internally to the float housing. Floats shall be Siemens Model 9G-EF, Anchor Scientific Model SSTNM, or equal. _ 2. Weight and buoyancy shall be such that contaminants will not result in the float switch changing operating level more than 1-inch. 3. Operating temperature range shall be -31° to 194°F. B. Floats shall be mounted on a stainless steel cable with PVC-covered ar chor according to manufacturer's instructions.All mounting hardware shall be stainless steel and provided with the floats. C. Provide stainless steel kellum grips for each float cable. — D. All floats indicated on the drawings or specified herein to be intrinsically safe in design shall be as such. Provide intrinsically safe barriers as specified herein. E. Building flooding alarms where called for shall be Siemens 101 G, float sv itches, or equal. 2.06 PRESSURE SWITCHES A. Pressure switches where called for shall be Square D, Type GAW for pressures as applicable. Dual-stage pressure switches, where required, shall be Square D, Type GKW, for pressures as applicable. 2.07 MAGNETIC FLOW METERS A. The magnetic flow meters shall be suitable for measuring sludge flows in the range indicated in the table below. The magnetic flow meters shall consist of a flanged sensor with grounding Section 26 09 00-26 4463.004/City Contract No.994 rings. FIT-10-3-1, FIT-10-3-2, FIT-10-3-3, FIT-10-3-15-1, and FIT-15-2-1 shall have remote electronics. FIT-10-29-1 and FIT-10-29-2 shall have integral electronics. The tube shall be of 304 stainless steel with hard rubber liner. Flanges shall be carbon steel and conform to ANSI B16.1, Class 150. The meter shall be NEMA 4X construction. B. The meters shall utilize bipolar DC coil excitation or other means to automatically rezero. Meters shall be provided with grounding rings made of material compatible with electrode material. Electrodes shall be bullet nose, 316 stainless steel suitable for sludge applications with up to 10% solids. C. Power consumption shall not exceed 20 watts. The meter shall incorporate design features to minimize the effect of greasy (nonconductive) coatings or incorporate a means to automatically clean the electrodes during continuous operation. Meter accuracy shall not be affected by greasy coatings, and cleaning of the meter manually shall not be required. D. Meter accuracy shall be ±0.5% of rate from 1.0 to 30.0 ft/sec and 0.1% of scale below 1.0 ft/sec when installed with the appropriate upstream and downstream pipe diameters.The meters shall be wet-calibrated in a primary flow laboratory traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology. Transmitters and flow tubes shall be interchangeable. E. The meter shall be designed to operate on 120 Vac, 60 Hz. Connections at the flow tube shall be factory-potted to provide NEMA 4 as installed ratings. Outputs shall be 4-20 mA into 800 ohms maximum and 24 Vdc scaled pulse, 0 to 2 Hz maximum, 150 ohms minimum, suitable for driving a solid-state counter. Pulse width and volume of flow per pulse shall be widely adjustable before or after installation to allow interface with PLC input cards and other devices. F. Outputs shall be field-adjustable for range changes. Response time or damping shall be adjustable from 0.8 to 8.0 seconds. The meters shall be operable in all liquids with 5.0 umhos/cm or more conductivity. G. The meters shall include empty pipe detection. Flow meter FIT-15-2-1 shall meet the requirements of IP68 rated for submergence. Meters shall be capable of reading forward and reverse flow with dedicated analog outputs and totalizers. H. The magnetic flow meters shall be Endress and Hauser ProMag 400, or Krohne Enviromag. Meters shall be sized to match the nominal pipe diameter in which they are installed. Provide cable, length as required, to reach the remote-mounted signal converter; CONTRACTOR shall coordinate. Flow meter shall be: Tag No. Size (Inches) Maximum Scale FIT-10-3-1 4 650 FIT-10-3-2 4 650 FIT-10-3-3 4 650 FIT-3-15-1 4 250 FIT-10-29-1 4 250 FIT-10-29-2 4 250 FIT-15-2-1 4 400 I. Provide each flow meter FIT-10-3-1, FIT-10-3-2, FIT-10-3-3, FIT-10-3-15-1, and FIT-15-2-1 with a remote signal converter, Endress and Hauser ProMag W400 transmitter, or Krohne IFC 300 converter. Signal converter shall be FM approved and CSA certified. Remote Section 26 09 00-27 4463.004/City Contract No.994 electronics shall include back-lit display and push buttons or other means for local operation and maintenance. Display shall include instantaneous flow totalizer and it dication of present faults. J. For all remote transmitters located outdoors, the transmitter shall be installed in a fiberglass, hinged-cover, NEMA 4X enclosure with window and front door-mounted, rotating handle, Hoffman Model Ultrx, or equal. Enclosures with side clamps or hasps are not allowed. Enclosure shall include a main circuit breaker disconnect, surge protection devices specified herein, anti-condensation heater, Hoffman DAH Series, or equal, with temperature control switch model ATEM. Mount the transmitter off the enclosure back panel so the display is visible at the enclosure window. Provide sun shield for all transmitters located outdoors. 2.08 SUBMERSIBLE LEVEL TRANSMITTERS A. Where indicated on the drawings, levels shall be sensed by a submersible pressure transmitter. The transmitter shall be a Siemens Bulletin A1000i, KPSI Model 750, or equal loop powered submersible pressure transmitter, with an intrinsically safe wiring barrier. The transmitter shall be of the head-pressure sensing type, suitable for continuous submergence and operation and shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The bottom diaphragm face of the sensor shall be installed 6 inches above the floor. The sensor shall be mounted using a self-supporting cable system; location shall be determined in the field. Cable shall be vented, reinforced, and rated for full weight of transmitter. A separate support cable or anchor shall not be required. Provide stainless steel Kellum grip at suspension point, Hubbell, or equal. B. If necessary, for the installation/application, transmitter shall include a terminal connection box Siemens part no. 6012910002, or KPSI part no. 845. Moisture protection shall be provided for all units through an aneroid bellows. C. The transducer shall sense water level (pressure) variations and transform these variations directly into a standard process signal of 4-20 mA over the desired level range (span). The _ transducer shall be completely solid-state, with no mechanical linkages or moving parts. Supply voltage shall be as required by CONTRACTOR. Accuracy shall be ±0.25% of full scale. Transmitter shall be backed by a minimum 2-year warranty. D. The transducer shall incorporate a variable-capacitance transducer element to convert the sensed pressure to a corresponding electrical value. The sensed media shall exert its pressure against a Teflon coated Buna-N or elastomeric diaphragm that flexes minutely so as to vary its proximity to a ceramic substrate to vary the capacitance of an electrical field created between the two surfaces. A stable, hybrid, operational amplifier assembly shall be incorporated in the transducer to excite and demodulate the sensing mechanism. The -- transducer shall incorporate laser-trimmed, temperature compensation and high quality components and construction to provide a precise, reliable, stable output signal directly proportional to the sensed pressure over a factory-calibrated range. Operating pressure range of the transducer shall be approximately 0 to 15 psig. 2.09 ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTERS A. Ultrasonic level transmitters shall utilize an ultrasonic, noncontacting method to measure level with an accuracy of±0.25% of measurement. Level calculation shall be selectable from a "standard" exponent for the given tank type but shall allow field entry of user-selected exponents. A four-digit local display shall allow operator-selected display of level, and level shall be field-programmed for units of feet, inches, etc. All adjustments shall be by digital Section 26 09 00-28 4463.004/City Contract No.994 values in EEPROM, providing memory storage through power failures without requiring battery backup. Levels shall be stored to EEPROM to minimize lost data during a power outage. Field adjustments shall include zero, span, blanking, and dampening. Programming shall be performed by a removable, portable keypad module, maintaining NEMA 4X enclosure integrity during programming or when removed from the enclosure. Output shall be 4-20 mAdc into a 350-ohm load and a pulse output. B. Transducers in non-rated locations shall be FM approved and have an operating range of -40°F to 200°F. C. Transducers in Class I locations shall be FM approved as being suitable for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and D locations and shall have an operating range of -40°F to 200°F. D. The transducer radiating surface shall be self-cleaning and shall operate without problems in moisture, dust, and frost. It shall be suited for continuous submergence, with the interconnecting cable splice made above flood level. The transducer shall be designed to amplify acoustic output 54 times over normal outputs. Transducer beam angle shall be 6 degrees. Where differential level measurement is required, two transducers shall be provided. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate transducer mounting height with maximum water level to be monitored. E. The interconnecting cable between transducer and the transmitter shall be provided with the instrument, limited to 1,200 feet, and be run in a conduit separate from other wires or cables. The transmitter shall be temperature compensated through an internal temperature sensor within the transducer. Provide a 120-volt AC power source for the amplifier. F. The transmitter enclosure shall house the amplifier and digital indicator in a NEMA 4 enclosure suitable for indoor or outdoor installation. G. For all transmitters located outdoors, the transmitter shall be installed in a fiberglass, hinged-cover, NEMA 4X enclosure with window and front door-mounted, rotating handle, Hoffman Model Ultrx, or equal. Enclosures with side clamps or hasps are not allowed. Enclosure shall include a main circuit breaker disconnect, surge protection devices specified herein, anti-condensation heater, Hoffman DAH Series, or equal, with temperature control switch model ATEM. Mount the transmitter off the enclosure backpanel so the display is visible at the enclosure window. Provide sun shield for all transmitters to be located outdoors. H. The level transmitters shall be Siemens, HydroRanger, or equal. 2.10 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR CONTROL PANELS AND INSTRUMENTATION EQUIPMENT A. The incoming power supply of each control panel supervisory control center shall be protected with a surge protective device (SPD). SPD unit shall be as manufactured by Citel Model DS240, or equal. Surge protection shall be provided for all phases and neutral. B. Each analog signal entering or leaving a supervisory control panel and leaving a building shall be provided with a DIN-rail mounted surge protection device as manufactured by Citel, Model DLA-24D3, or equal. Each transmitter shall be provided with a surge protection device -- as manufactured by Citel Model TSP15M, or equal, on the output and Citel Model DS240, or equal, on the power supply. Surge protection shall be provided for all phases and neutral. Section 26 09 00-29 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.11 INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIERS A. Instrumentation equipment located in hazardous areas as noted on the drawings shall be wired to intrinsic safety barriers. Safety barriers for discrete devices shal include indicating LED and be DIN-rail mounted, as manufactured by Phoenix Contact, Model MACX MCR-EX-SL-2NAM, (voltage as required), PR Electronics, Model 5202B2, or equal. Safety barriers for analog devices shall be DIN-rail mounted, as manufactured by Phoenix, Model MACX MCR-EX-SL-RPSSI, PR Electronics, Model 5104B, or equal. 2.12 PATCH PANELS A. Fiber-optic patch panels shall be installed where shown on the drawings and shall be used to terminate incoming fiber-optic cable serving its associated structure. Patch panels shall be as manufactured by Siemon Company, or equal, model MINI-SWIC3. Each patch panel shall include the following. 1. Wall-mounting enclosure with 6- to 48-fiber port terminations. 2. Fiber port designation labels with removable pocket. 3. Dust-proofing grommets, strain relief hardware, cable ties, and mour ting hardware. 4. Thumb turn enclosure latch. 5. Bend radius guides to provide proper storage of fiber slack. 6. Adapter plates with the appropriate fiber terminating connectors. Adapters shall be universal to accept multimode or single-mode fiber. 7. Minimum of 25% spare ports available for future fiber terminations. 2.13 INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET SWITCHES A. Managed Switches—Full Gigabit: Provide full Gigabit, managed Ethernet network switches where shown on the Drawings. Network switches shall be N-Tron NT24K-DR series to match CITY's existing network. Each switch shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Selectable Gigabit Ethernet star or ring topology with redundant fail-over. Switches shall be configured for a ring topology, unless noted otherwise. 2. DIN rail mounting and redundant 24-volt DC power supply inputs. Provide redundant power supplies, Hirschmann Model RPS series, or equal. 3. Command line interface, DHCP, and store and forward switching. 4. SNTP real time clock. 5. IP and MAC port security and SNMPv3. 6. Compliance with the following IEEE Standards: 802.1 D, 802.1 p QcS, 802.3, 802.3u, 802.3x flow control, 802.1w RSTP, and 802.1 Q VLAN. -- 7. SNMP with web browsing for switch configuration, diagnostics, and monitoring. 8. Dry contact alarm output for indication that the primary fiber loop or switch has failed. 9. Up to 4 combo SFP ports and 4 copper ports. Provide SFP transceiver modules as required for the connections shown on the Drawings. SFP transceiver LEDs shall operate on the 850 nm wavelength for 1000BASE-SX communications over multi-mode fiber optic cable using LC-type connectors. 2.14 EMERGENCY ALARM NOTIFICATION DEVICES A. Warning Lights and Strobes: Nonhazardous and NEMA 4X locations: 1. General: The light shall provide a visual warning in the area where a potential hazard may occur in nonrated spaces and NEMA 4X locations. 2. Required Features: a. Beacon light: LED, field-selectable between steady-on mode (green and amber) and flashing mode (red), field-set to 65 flashes per minute. Section 26 09 00-30 4463.004/City Contract No.994 b. LED colors: Red, green, and amber. LED colors shall be capable of being individually controlled by a remote device. c. Lens color: Clear. d. Enclosure: UL listed; NEMA 4X. e. Power: 120 VAC. _. 3. Product and Manufacturer: Model 105XBRiRGA120A as manufactured by Edwards Signaling, or equal. 4. Provide Model 105BX outlet box attachment and 105BM mounting bracket as manufactured by Edwards Signaling, or equal, for wall mounting the lights. B. Alarm Horns: 1. General: The horn shall provide an audible warning in the area where a potential hazard may occur. 2. Required Features: a. Decibel output: Minimum 100 dB at 10 feet. b. Enclosure: Cast aluminum/epoxy-coated corrosion-resistant housing. c. Horn diaphragm: Stainless steel. d. Power: 120 VAC. 3. Product and manufacturer: Series 876-N5 in nonrated and NEMA 4X locations, as manufactured by Edwards Signaling, or equal. 4. Provide a silence pushbutton control station adjacent to each interior horn/strobe location for silencing the alarm horn(s). The silence pushbuttons shall be momentary-type, heavy-duty pushbuttons in a NEMA 4X control station, Allen-Bradley Bulletin 800H. C. Danger Signs: 1. General: Provide a danger sign next to each set of warning lights, strobes, and horns. 2. Required features: a. Material: High impact polystyrene or fiberglass. b. Sign size: Minimum 14 inches wide by 10 inches high. c. Color: White background with red and black lettering. d. Text shall be determined by CITY. 3. Provide stainless steel mounting hardware as required. 2.15 AIR FLOW SWITCH AND VENTILATION MONITORING SYSTEMS A. This system shall continuously monitor the ventilation system for the presence of air flow and shall include air flow switches, mounting hardware, flexible tubing, and alarm devices as specified herein. B. Air Flow Switch: 1. Air flow switch shall be RTD type as manufactured by Kobold, model KAL-L, or equal. Air flow switch shall have two RTDs, one to sense flow and the other to detect ambient temperature. 2. Switch shall operate based on air flow within the ductwork system. The switch shall be SPDT snap-acting switch with NO and NC contacts rated for 4A at 250 volts AC. 3. The NO and NC contacts shall have an adjustable switching range from 3.3 to 66 feet per second. 4. Provide DIN rail mount 24-volt power supplies as required to power air flow switch. C. Provide emergency alarm notification devices for the system as specified herein and shown on the Drawings. Section 26 09 00-31 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER (170MCC-1A) NOTES: A. GBT Feed Pumps (P-10-4-1, P-10-4-2, P-10-4-3, and P-10-4-4): 1. H-O-A Selector Switch: a. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Hand" position, the motor shall start and run at the speed set on the drive HIM bypassing all controls, unless noted otherwise. b. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Off' position, the motor shall be inoperable. c. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Auto" position, the motor shall be controlled from the SCADA System as described under 170-PLC-1. 2. Motor has internal thermal overloads that shall shut down the motor in the event of overtemperature (Hand and Auto modes). Manual reset shall be required to restart the motor. Internal thermal overloads shall be wired such that momentary power interruptions do not shut down the motor. 3. The pump has an internal RTD that shall shut down the motor in the event of overtemperature resulting from a loss of sludge (Hand and Auto Modes). Manual reset shall be required to restart the motor. There is an RTD protection relay furnished as specified in Division 43 for run dry protection that shall be installed on the MCC starter bucket door by CONTRACTOR. The RTD protection relay shall be wired such that momentary power interruptions do not shut down the motor. 4. There is a high discharge pressure switch on the discharge of the pump that shall shut down the pump in the event of a high discharge pressure condition (Hand and Auto modes). Provide an adjustable hardwired time delay (0 to 15 seconds) on the pressure switch signal to avoid nuisance tripping resulting from pressure spikes during pump starting. Manual reset shall be required to restart the motor. 5. In the event the WAS Transfer Tank level falls below the low level float switch (LSL-10-2-1) the pump shall be shut down. The pump shall not restart until the level rises above the low level float. 6. In the event either WAS Storage Tank No. 1 or No. 2 level falls below the associated storage tank low level float switch (LSL-10-7-1 or LSL-10-7-2) the pL,mps shall be shut down. The pumps shall not restart until the level rises above both the low level floats. 7. Motor disconnect has an auxiliary contact that shall be wired to the MCC starter bucket such that control power is disconnected when the disconnect is in the "Off' position. 8. All the above controls shall be hardwired and not through the PLC. 9. Control and status signals noted in Section 26 09 00 - SCADA System I/O Listing shall be wired to the VFD and be communicated with the PLC via the SCADA System -- Ethernet/IP network. B. [Bid Alternative No. 3] Primary Sludge Transfer Pumps (P-3-15-1 and P-3--15-2): 1. H-O-A Selector Switch: a. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Hand" position, the motor shall start and run at the speed set on the drive HIM bypassing all controls, unless noted otherwise. b. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Off' position, the motor shall be inoperable. c. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Auto" position, the motor shall be controlled from the SCADA System as described under 170-PLC-1. 2. Motor has internal thermal overloads that shall shut down the motor in the event of overtemperature (Hand and Auto modes). Manual reset shall be required to restart the motor. Internal thermal overloads shall be wired such that momentary power interruptions do not shut down the motor. 3. The pump has an internal RTD that shall shut down the moto- in the event of overtemperature resulting from a loss of sludge (Hand and Auto Mocies). Manual reset Section 26 09 00-32 4463.004/City Contract No.994 shall be required to restart the motor. There is an RTD protection relay furnished as specified in Division 43 for run dry protection that shall be installed on the MCC starter bucket door by CONTRACTOR. The RTD protection relay shall be wired such that momentary power interruptions do not shut down the motor. 4. There is a high discharge pressure switch on the discharge of the pump that shall shut down the pump in the event of a high discharge pressure condition (Hand and Auto modes). Provide an adjustable hardwired time delay (0 to 15 seconds) on the pressure switch signal to avoid nuisance tripping resulting from pressure spikes during pump starting. Manual reset shall be required to restart the motor. 5. In the event the Primary Sludge Transfer Tank No. 1 or No. 2 level falls below the low level float switches (LSL-10-2-2 or LSL-10-2-3)the pump shall be shut down. The pump shall not restart until the level rises above the low level floats. 6. Motor disconnect has an auxiliary contact that shall be wired to the MCC starter bucket such that control power is disconnected when the disconnect is in the "Off' position. 7. All of the above controls shall be hardwired and not through the PLC. -� 8. Control and status signals noted in Section 26 09 00 - SCADA System I/O Listing shall be wired to the VFD and be communicated with the PLC via the SCADA System Ethernet/IP network. C. WAS Transfer Pumps (P-10-8-1 and P-10-8-2): 1. H-O-A Selector Switch: a. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Hand" position, the pump shall start and run continuously bypassing all controls, unless noted otherwise. The pump shall be allowed to pump down below the "Low Water Level" float switch in the "Hand" position. b. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Off' position, the motor shall be inoperable. c. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Auto" position, the motor shall be controlled from the SCADA System and hardwired backup float logic as described under 170-PLC-1. 2. Motor has internal thermal overloads which shall shut down the motor in the event of overtemperature (Hand and Auto modes). Manual reset shall be required to restart the motor. Internal thermal overloads shall be wired so that momentary power interruptions do not shut down the motor. Motor also has internal moisture detection that shall be for indication at the MCC and SCADA system only. This shall not shut down the motor. �. There is a 120 VAC control module (Mini-CAS) furnished as specified in Division 43 for thermal and moisture detection which shall be installed in the MCC starter bucket by CONTRACTOR. 3. In the event the WAS Transfer Tank level rises above the high level float switch (LS-10-2-1) the pumps shall be shut down. The pumps shall not restart until the level falls below the high level float. 4. In the event either WAS Storage Tank No. 1 or No. 2 level falls below the associated storage tank low level float switch (LSL-10-7-1 or LSL-10-7-2) the pumps shall be shut down. The pumps shall not restart until the level rises above both the low level floats. 5. Float switches (LSL-10-7-1, LSL-10-7-2, LSH-10-2-1, LSH-10-8-1, LS-10-8-1 through LS-10-8-3, and LSL-10-8-1) shall be hardwired to the motor control circuit via intrinsic safety barriers in 170-PLC-1. 6. Motor disconnect has an auxiliary contact that shall be wired to the associated starter bucket such that control power is disconnected when the disconnect is in the "Off" position. 7. All of the above controls shall be hardwired and not through the PLC. Section 26 09 00-33 4463.004/City Contract No.994 D. First Floor Exhaust Fan (170-EF-1): 1. H-O-A Selector Switch: a. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Hand" position, the motor shall start and run continuously. b. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Off' position, the motor shall be inoperable. c. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Auto" position, the fan shall be interlocked with 170-HVU-1 such that 170-EF-1 runs whenever 170-HVU-1 is running. Provide interface relays as required. d. All of the above controls shall be hardwired and not through the PLC. E. Blower Room Exhaust Fans (170-EF-2 and 170-EF-3): 1. H-O-A Selector Switch: a. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Hand" position, the motor shall start and run continuously bypassing all controls, unless noted otherwise. b. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Off' position, the motor shall be inoperable. c. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Auto" position, the motor shall be controlled from a single stage cooling thermostat such that when the room temperature rises above the thermostat setting, the motor shall start and run continuously. When the room temperature falls below the thermostat setting, the motor shall be shut down. 2. Provide extra capacity control power transformer for 120-volt power to associated damper. When the exhaust fan is called to run, the associated damper shall open. Provide an auxiliary run contact for interface with the damper control junction box. 3. All of the above controls shall be hardwired and not through the PLC 3.02 WAS BUILDING BLOWER VFD ENCLOSURES A. WAS Blowers (M-10-1-1 and M-10-1-2): 1. H-O-A Selector Switch: a. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Hand" position, the motor shall start and run at the speed set on the drive HIM bypassing all controls, unless noted otherwise. b. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Off' position, the motor shall be inoperable. c. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Auto" position, the motor shall be controlled from the SCADA System as described under 170-PLC-1. 2. The blower is supplied with a thermistor motor protection relay that shall be installed in the starter bucket by CONTRACTOR. Motor has internal winding thermistors that shall shut down the blower in the event of high motor winding temperature (Hand and Auto modes). Manual reset shall be required to restart the motor. Thermistor motor protection shall be wired such that momentary power interruptions do not shut down the motor. 3. There is a high discharge temperature switch on the discharge of the blower that shall shut down the associated blower (Hand and Auto modes) in the event of high discharge temperature. Manual reset shall be required to restart the motor. 4. Provide a 120-volt control power transformer, sized as required, to power the associated blower cooling fan. Blower cooling fan shall start and run when the blower is running. When the blower is shut down, the cooling fans shall remain running for an operator adjustable time (0 to 60 minutes). Once the timer expires, the cooling fan shall be shut down. 5. VFD enclosure shall be a NEMA 1 gasketed floor mounted enclosure, be a minimum of 48 inches wide by 24 inches deep by 72 inches high and be located in WAS Building where shown on the Drawings. 6. Unit shall be provided with a fused disconnect with through-the-door handle. Provide fuses with blown fuse indicator. The handle shall be interlocked with the unit door to prevent opening the door with the switch in the "On" position. A defeater shall be provided to bypass this interlock. Padlocking facilities shall be provided to positively lock — Section 26 09 00-34 4463.004/City Contract No.994 the disconnect in either the "On" or"Off' position with one to three padlocks whether the door is open or closed. 7. VFD enclosure interrupting rating shall be a minimum of 42,000 A. 8. Motor disconnect has an auxiliary contact that shall be wired to the VFD enclosure such that control power is disconnected when the disconnect is in the "Off' position. 9. All of the above controls shall be hardwired and not through the PLC. 10. Control and status signals noted in Section 26 09 00 - SCADA System I/O Listing shall be wired to the VFD and be communicated with the PLC via the SCADA System Ethernet/IP network. 3.03 THICKENER BUILDING VFD ENCLOSURES A. TWAS Pumps (P-10-14-1, P-10-14-2, and P-10-14-3): 1. H-O-A selector switch: a. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Hand" position, the motor shall start and run at the speed set on the drive HIM bypassing all controls, unless noted otherwise. b. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Off' position, the motor shall be inoperable. c. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Auto" position, the motor shall be controlled from the SCADA System as described under PLC-180-2. 2. Motor has internal thermal overloads that shall shut down the motor in the event of overtemperature (Hand and Auto modes). Manual reset shall be required to restart the motor. Internal thermal overloads shall be wired such that momentary power interruptions do not shut down the motor. 3. The pump has an internal RTD that shall shut down the motor in the event of overtemperature resulting from a loss of sludge (Hand and Auto Modes). Manual reset shall be required to restart the motor. There is an RTD protection relay furnished as specified in Division 43 for run dry protection that shall be installed on the MCC starter bucket door by CONTRACTOR. The RTD protection relay shall be wired such that momentary power interruptions do not shut down the motor. 4. There is a high discharge pressure switch on the discharge of the pump that shall shut down the pump in the event of a high discharge pressure condition (Hand and Auto modes). Provide an adjustable hardwired time delay (0 to 15 seconds) on the pressure switch signal to avoid nuisance tripping resulting from pressure spikes during pump starting. Manual reset shall be required to restart the motor. 5. VFD enclosure shall be a NEMA 1 gasketed wall mounted enclosure, be a maximum of 20 inches wide by 20 inches deep by 90 inches high and be located in Thickener Building where shown on the Drawings. 6. Unit shall be provided with a fused disconnect with through-the-door handle. Provide fuses with blown fuse indicator. The handle shall be interlocked with the unit door to prevent opening the door with the switch in the "On" position. A defeater shall be provided to bypass this interlock. Padlocking facilities shall be provided to positively lock the disconnect in either the "On" or"Off' position with one to three padlocks whether the door is open or closed. 7. VFD enclosure interrupting rating shall be a minimum of 42,000 A. 8. Motor disconnect has an auxiliary contact that shall be wired to the VFD enclosure such that control power is disconnected when the disconnect is in the "Off' position. 9. All the above controls shall be hardwired and not through the PLC.10. Control and status signals noted in Section 26 09 00 - SCADA System I/O Listing shall be wired to the VFD and be communicated with the PLC via the SCADA System Ethernet/IP network. Section 26 09 00-35 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.04 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER (190MCC-1AAND 190MCC-1 B) NOTES A. Digester Feed Pumps (P-10-26-1, P-10-26-2, and P-10-26-3): 1. H-O-A Selector Switch: a. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Hand" position, the motor shall start and run at the speed set on the drive HIM bypassing all controls, unless noted otherwise. b. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Off' position, the motor shall be inoperable. c. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Auto" position, the motor shall be controlled from the SCADA System as described under 190-PLC-1. 2. Motor has internal thermal overloads that shall shut down the motor in the event of overtemperature (Hand and Auto modes). Manual reset shall be required to restart the motor. Internal thermal overloads shall be wired such that momentary power interruptions do not shut down the motor. 3. The pump has an internal RTD that shall shut down the motor in the event of overtemperature resulting from a loss of sludge (Hand and Auto Modes). Manual reset shall be required to restart the motor. There is an RTD protection relay furnished as specified in Division 43 for run dry protection that shall be installed on the MCC starter bucket door by CONTRACTOR. The RTD protection relay shall be wired such that momentary power interruptions do not shut down the motor. 4. There is a high discharge pressure switch on the discharge of the pump that shall shut down the pump in the event of a high discharge pressure conditio-i (Hand and Auto modes). Provide an adjustable hardwired time delay (0 to 15 seconds) on the pressure switch signal to avoid nuisance tripping resulting from pressure sr Res during pump starting. Manual reset shall be required to restart the motor. 5. In the event Blended Sludge Storage Tank No. 1, Blended Sludge Storage Tank No. 2, or Blended Sludge Storage Tank No. 3 level falls below the associated storage tank low level float switch (LSL-10-24-1, LSL-10-24-2, or LSL-10-24-3) the pumps shall be shut down. The pumps shall not restart until the level rises above all the low level floats. 6. Float switches (LSL-10-24-1, LSL-10-24-2, and LSL-10-24-3) shall be hardwired to the motor control circuit via intrinsic safety barriers in 190-PLC-1. 7. All the above controls shall be hardwired and not through the PLC. 8. Control and status signals noted in Section 26 09 00 - SCADA System I/O Listing shall be wired to the VFD and be communicated with the PLC via the SCADA System Ethernet/IP network. B. Blended Sludge Mixers (M-10-24-1, M-10-24-2, and M-10-24-3): 1. H-O-A Selector Switch: a. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Hand" position, the motor shall start and run continuously bypassing all controls, unless noted otherwise. b. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Off' position, the motor shall be inoperable. c. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Auto" position, the motor 'shall be controlled from the SCADA System as described under 190-PLC-1. 2. Motor has internal thermal overloads which shall shut down the motor in the event of overtemperature (Hand and Auto modes). Manual reset shall be required to restart the motor. Internal thermal overloads shall be wired so that momentary power interruptions do not shut down the motor. Motor also has internal moisture detection that shall be for indication at the MCC and SCADA system only. This shall not shut down the motor. There is a 120 VAC control module (Mini-CAS) furnished as specified in Division 46 for thermal and moisture detection which shall be installed in the MCC starter bucket by CONTRACTOR. 3. Motor disconnect has an auxiliary contact that shall be wired to the MCC starter bucket such that control power is disconnected when the disconnect is in the "Off position. 4. All of the above controls shall be hardwired and not through the PLC Section 26 09 00-36 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.05 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER (325MCC-1A& 325MCC-1 B) NOTES A. Sludge Storage Pump Building Exhaust Fan (325-EF-1): 1. H-L-O-A Selector Switch: a. With the H-L-O-A selector switch in the "High" position, the motor shall start and run continuously at high speed. b. With the H-L-O-A selector switch in the "Low" position, the motor shall start and run continuously at low speed. c. With the H-L-O-A selector switch in the "Off' position, the motor shall be inoperable. d. With the H-L-O-A selector switch in the "Auto" position, the fan shall be interlocked with 325-HVU-1 such that 325-EF-1 runs at high speed whenever 325-HVU-1 is running. Provide interface relays as required. 2. Provide extra capacity control power transformer for 120-volt power to associated damper. When the exhaust fan is called to run, the associated damper shall open. 3. All of the above controls shall be hardwired and not through the PLC. B. Sludge Storage Mixers (P-12-2-1 and P-12-2-2): 1. Existing On-Off-Remote Selector Switch (at unit): a. With the On-Off-Remote selector switch in the "On" position, the mixer shall start and run continuously bypassing all controls, unless noted otherwise. b. With the On-Off-Remote selector switch in the "Off' position, the mixer shall be inoperable. c. With the On-Off-Remote selector switch in the "Remote" position, the motor shall be controlled from the SCADA System as described under 325-PLC-1. 2. All of the above controls shall be hardwired and not through the PLC. C. Dewatering Feed Pumps (P-12-1-1, P-12-1-2, and P-12-1-3):1. H-O-A Selector Switch: a. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Hand" position, the motor shall start and run at the speed set on the drive HIM bypassing all controls, unless noted otherwise. b. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Off' position, the motor shall be inoperable. c. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Auto" position, the motor shall be controlled from the SCADA System as described under 325-PLC-1. 2. Motor has internal thermal overloads that shall shut down the motor in the event of overtemperature (Hand and Auto modes). Manual reset shall be required to restart the motor. Internal thermal overloads shall be wired such that momentary power interruptions do not shut down the motor. 3. The pump has an internal RTD that shall shut down the motor in the event of overtemperature resulting from a loss of sludge (Hand and Auto Modes). Manual reset shall be required to restart the motor. There is an RTD protection relay furnished as specified in Division 43 for run dry protection that shall be installed on the MCC starter bucket door by CONTRACTOR. The RTD protection relay shall be wired such that momentary power interruptions do not shut down the motor. 4. There is a high discharge pressure switch on the discharge of the pump that shall shut down the pump in the event of a high discharge pressure condition (Hand and Auto modes). Provide an adjustable hardwired time delay (0 to 15 seconds) on the pressure _. switch signal to avoid nuisance tripping resulting from pressure spikes during pump starting. Manual reset shall be required to restart the motor. 5. In the event either Sludge Storage Tank No. 1 or No. 2 level falls below the associated storage tank low level float switch (LSL-12-5-1 or LSL-12-5-2) the pumps shall be shut down. The pumps shall not restart until the level rises above the low level float. Section 26 09 00-37 4463.004/City Contract No.994 _ 6. Float switches (LSL-12-5-1 and LSL-12-5-2) shall be hardwired tc the motor control circuit via intrinsic safety barriers in 325PLC-1. 7. Motor disconnect has an auxiliary contact that shall be wired to the MCC starter bucket such that control power is disconnected when the disconnect is in the "Off' position. 8. All the above controls shall be hardwired and not through the PLC. 9. Control and status signals noted in Section 26 09 00 - SCADA System I/O Listing shall be wired to the VFD and be communicated with the PLC via the SCADA System Ethernet/IP network. D. Sludge Storage Building Heating and Ventilating Unit (325-HVU-1): 1. O-A Selector Switch: a. With the O-A selector switch in the "Off" position, the motor shall be inoperable. b. With the O-A selector switch in the "Auto" position, the motor shall be controlled by 325-TCP-1 "Start/Stop" signal. Provide interface relays as required. c. Provide aux run contact for unit for interface with 325-TCP-1. 2. All the above controls shall be hardwired and not through the PLC. 3.06 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER (330MCC-1A) NOTES A. Centrifuge Biosolids Conveyors (M-14-15-1 and M-14-15-2): 1. H-O-A Selector Switch (at the unit): a. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Hand" position the motor shall be controlled from the F-O-R selector switch at the unit. b. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Off' position, the motor shall be inoperable. c. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Auto" position, the motor shall be controlled from the SCADA System as described under 330PLC-1. 2. F-O-R Selector Switch (at the unit): a. With the F-O-R selector switch in the "Forward" position, the motor shall operate in the forward direction bypassing all controls, unless noted otherwise. b. With the F-O-R selector switch in the "Off' position, the motor shall be inoperable. c. With the F-O-R selector switch in the "Reverse" position, the motor shall operate in the reverse direction. Reverse position shall be spring-return to the Off position. There shall be an adjustable timer (0.0 to 5.0 seconds) to limit the amount of time the unit can operate in the reverse direction. Once the timer expires, the unit shall shut down, even if the selector switch is held in the reverse position, To restart the unit in the reverse direction, the selector switch shall first be returned to the "Off' position. 3. Motor has internal thermal overloads that shall shut down the motor in the event of overtemperature (Hand and Auto modes). Manual reset from the control station at the unit shall be required to restart the motor. Internal thermal overloads shall be wired such that momentary power interruptions do not shut down the motor. 4. There is a maintained emergency stop switch and an emergency stop pull cord at the unit and both shall be interlocked with the unit such that when either the switch or pull cord is activated, the unit shall shut down (Hand and Auto modes) and an alarm shall be indicated at the SCADA System. The unit shall be reset by resetti ig the emergency stop switch and/or emergency stop pull cord. 5. There is a 120-volt overcurrent sensing relay furnished with the unit that shall be installed in the starter bucket by this CONTRACTOR. When an overcurrent condition is detected, the motor shall shut down (Hand and Auto modes) and an alarm shall be activated at the SCADA System. Manual reset at the unit shall be required to restart the motor once it has been shut down on an overcurrent condition. 6. There is a 120-volt motion failure alarm unit furnished with the unit. V\,hen a zero speed condition is detected, the motor shall shut down (Hand and Auto modes) and an alarm Section 26 09 00-38 4463.004/City Contract No.994 shall be activated at the SCADA System. Manual reset from the control station at the unit shall be required to restart the motor once it has been shut down on a zero speed condition. Provide extra capacity control power transformer for 120-volt power to the associated motion alarm unit. 7. Motor disconnect has an auxiliary contact that shall be wired to the MCC such that control power is disconnected when the disconnect is in the "Off' position. 8. All the above controls shall be hardwired and not through the PLC. System Supplier shall provide the equipment manufacturer with a copy of wiring diagrams for control of this unit for their review and approval prior to submitting controls shop drawings to CO N S U LTANT. B. Belt Filter Press Biosolids Conveyors (M-14-15-3 and M-14-15-4): 1. H-O-A Selector Switch (at the unit): a. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Hand" position the motor shall be controlled from the F-O-R selector switch at the unit. b. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Off position, the motor shall be inoperable. c. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Auto" position, the motor shall be controlled from the SCADA System as described under 330PLC-1. 2. F-O-R Selector Switch (at the unit): a. With the F-O-R selector switch in the "Forward" position, the motor shall operate in the forward direction bypassing all controls, unless noted otherwise. b. With the F-O-R selector switch in the "Off position, the motor shall be inoperable. c. With the F-O-R selector switch in the "Reverse" position, the motor shall operate in the reverse direction. Reverse position shall be spring-return to the Off position. There shall be an adjustable timer (0.0 to 5.0 seconds) to limit the amount of time the unit can operate in the reverse direction. Once the timer expires, the unit shall shut down, even if the selector switch is held in the reverse position, To restart the unit in the reverse direction, the selector switch shall first be returned to the "Off' position. 3. Motor has internal thermal overloads that shall shut down the motor in the event of overtemperature (Hand and Auto modes). Manual reset from the control station at the unit shall be required to restart the motor. Internal thermal overloads shall be wired such that momentary power interruptions do not shut down the motor. 4. There is a maintained emergency stop switch and an emergency stop pull cord at the unit and both shall be interlocked with the unit such that when either the switch or pull cord is activated, the unit shall shut down (Hand and Auto modes) and an alarm shall be indicated at the SCADA System. The unit shall be reset by resetting the emergency stop switch and/or emergency stop pull cord. 5. There is a 120-volt overcurrent sensing relay furnished with the unit that shall be installed in the starter bucket by this CONTRACTOR. When an overcurrent condition is detected, the motor shall shut down (Hand and Auto modes) and an alarm shall be activated at the SCADA System. Manual reset at the unit shall be required to restart the motor once it has been shut down on an overcurrent condition. 6. There is a 120-volt motion failure alarm unit furnished with the unit. When a zero speed condition is detected, the motor shall shut down (Hand and Auto modes) and an alarm shall be activated at the SCADA System. Manual reset from the control station at the unit shall be required to restart the motor once it has been shut down on a zero speed condition. Provide extra capacity control power transformer for 120-volt power to the associated motion alarm unit. 7. Motor disconnect has an auxiliary contact that shall be wired to the MCC such that control power is disconnected when the disconnect is in the "Off position. 8. All the above controls shall be hardwired and not through the PLC. System Supplier shall provide the equipment manufacturer with a copy of wiring diagrams for control of Section 26 09 00-39 4463.004/City Contract No.994 this unit for their review and approval prior to submitting controls shop drawings to CONSULTANT. C. Main Conveyors (M-14-15-5 and M-14-15-6): 1. H-O-A Selector Switch (at the unit): a. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Hand" position the motor shall be controlled -- from the F-O-R selector switch at the unit. b. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Off' position, the motor shall be inoperable. c. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Auto" position, the motor shall be controlled from the SCADA System as described under 330PLC-1. 2. F-O-R Selector Switch (at the unit): a. With the F-O-R selector switch in the "Forward" position, the motor shall operate in the forward direction bypassing all controls, unless noted otherwise. b. With the F-O-R selector switch in the "Off' position, the motor shall be inoperable. c. With the F-O-R selector switch in the "Reverse" position, the motor shall operate in the reverse direction. Reverse position shall be spring-return to the Off position. There shall be an adjustable timer (0.0 to 5.0 seconds) to limit the amount of time the unit can operate in the reverse direction. Once the timer expires, the unit shall shut down, even if the selector switch is held in the reverse position, To restart the unit in the reverse direction, the selector switch shall first be returned to the "Off' position. 3. Motor has internal thermal overloads that shall shut down the motor in the event of overtemperature (Hand and Auto modes). Manual reset from the control station at the unit shall be required to restart the motor. Internal thermal overloads shall be wired such that momentary power interruptions do not shut down the motor. 4. There is a maintained emergency stop switch and an emergency stop pull cord at the unit and both shall be interlocked with the unit such that when either the switch or pull cord is activated, the unit shall shut down (Hand and Auto modes) and an alarm shall be indicated at the SCADA System. The unit shall be reset by resettilg the emergency stop switch and/or emergency stop pull cord. 5. There is a 120-volt overcurrent sensing relay furnished with the unit that shall be installed in the starter bucket by this CONTRACTOR. When an overcurrent condition is detected, the motor shall shut down (Hand and Auto modes) and an alarm shall be activated at the SCADA System. Manual reset at the unit shall be required to restart the motor once it has been shut down on an overcurrent condition. 6. There is a 120-volt motion failure alarm unit furnished with the unit. When a zero speed condition is detected, the motor shall shut down (Hand and Auto modes) and an alarm shall be activated at the SCADA System. Manual reset from the control station at the unit shall be required to restart the motor once it has been shut down on a zero speed condition. Provide extra capacity control power transformer for 120-volt power to the associated motion alarm unit. 7. Motor disconnect has an auxiliary contact that shall be wired to the MCC such that control power is disconnected when the disconnect is in the "Off' position. 8. All the above controls shall be hardwired and not through the PLC System Supplier shall provide the equipment manufacturer with a copy of wiring diagrams for control of this unit for their review and approval prior to submitting controls shop drawings to CONSULTANT. D. Truck Bay Conveyors (M-14-15-7, M-14-15-8, and M-14-15-9): 1. H-O-A Selector Switch (at the unit): a. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Hand" position the motor shall be controlled from the F-O-R selector switch at the unit. b. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Off position, the motor shell be inoperable. Section 26 09 00-40 4463.004/City Contract No.994 c. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Auto" position, the motor shall be controlled from the SCADA System as described under 330PLC-1.2. F-O-R Selector Switch (at the unit): a. With the F-O-R selector switch in the "Forward" position, the motor shall operate in the forward direction bypassing all controls, unless noted otherwise. b. With the F-O-R selector switch in the "Off' position, the motor shall be inoperable. c. With the F-O-R selector switch in the "Reverse" position, the motor shall operate in the reverse direction. Reverse position shall be spring-return to the Off position. There shall be an adjustable timer (0.0 to 5.0 seconds) to limit the amount of time the unit can operate in the reverse direction. Once the timer expires, the unit shall shut down, even if the selector switch is held in the reverse position, To restart the unit in the reverse direction, the selector switch shall first be returned to the "Off' position. 3. Motor has internal thermal overloads that shall shut down the motor in the event of overtemperature (Hand and Auto modes). Manual reset from the control station at the unit shall be required to restart the motor. Internal thermal overloads shall be wired such that momentary power interruptions do not shut down the motor. 4. There is a maintained emergency stop switch and an emergency stop pull cord at the unit and both shall be interlocked with the unit such that when either the switch or pull cord is activated, the unit shall shut down (Hand and Auto modes) and an alarm shall be indicated at the SCADA System. The unit shall be reset by resetting the emergency stop switch and/or emergency stop pull cord. 5. There is a 120-volt overcurrent sensing relay furnished with the unit that shall be installed in the starter bucket by this CONTRACTOR. When an overcurrent condition is detected, the motor shall shut down (Hand and Auto modes) and an alarm shall be activated at the SCADA System. Manual reset at the unit shall be required to restart the motor once it has been shut down on an overcurrent condition. 6. There is a 120-volt motion failure alarm unit furnished with the unit. When a zero speed condition is detected, the motor shall shut down (Hand and Auto modes) and an alarm shall be activated at the SCADA System. Manual reset from the control station at the unit shall be required to restart the motor once it has been shut down on a zero speed -- condition. Provide extra capacity control power transformer for 120-volt power to the associated motion alarm unit. 7. Motor disconnect has an auxiliary contact that shall be wired to the MCC such that control power is disconnected when the disconnect is in the "Off' position. 8. All the above controls shall be hardwired and not through the PLC. System Supplier shall provide the equipment manufacturer with a copy of wiring diagrams for control of this unit for their review and approval prior to submitting controls shop drawings to CONSULTANT. E. Dewatering Building Exhaust Fans (330-EF-1, 330-EF-2, 330-EF-3, 330-EF-4, 330-EF-5, and 330-EF-6): 1. 0-0 Selector Switch: a. With the 0-0 selector switch in the "On" position, the motor shall start and run continuously. b. With the 0-0 selector switch in the "Off" position, the motor shall be inoperable. 2. Provide extra capacity control power transformer for 120-volt power to associated damper. Damper shall open when fan is running. 3. For 330-EF-3, 330-EF-4, and 330-EF-5 only, provide an aux run contact for each fan for interface with damper relay box. 4. All of the above controls shall be hardwired and not through the PLC. Section 26 09 00-41 4463.004/City Contract No.994 F. Centrate Mixers (M-15-1-1 and M-15-1-2): 1. H-O-A selector switch: a. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Hand" position, the mixer shall start and run continuously bypassing all controls, unless noted otherwise. b. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Off' position, the mixer shall be inoperable. c. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Auto" position, the motor shall be controlled — from the SCADA System as described under 330PLC-1. 2. Motor has internal thermal overloads which shall shut down the motor in the event of overtemperature (Hand and Auto modes). Manual reset shall be required to restart the motor. Internal thermal overloads shall be wired so that momentary power interruptions do not shut down the motor. Motor also has internal moisture detection that shall be for indication at the MCC and SCADA system only. This shall not shut down the motor. There is a 120 VAC control module (Mini-CAS) furnished as specified in Division 46 for thermal and moisture detection which shall be installed in the MCC starter bucket by this CONTRACTOR. 3. Motor disconnect has an auxiliary contact that shall be wired to the MCC starter bucket such that control power is disconnected when the disconnect is in the "Off' position. 4. All of the above controls shall be hardwired and not through the PLC. G. Centrate Pumps (P-15-2-1 and P-15-2-2): 1. H-O-A Selector Switch: a. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Hand" position, the motor shall start and run at the speed set on the drive HIM bypassing all controls, unless noted otherwise. b. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Off' position, the motor shall be inoperable. c. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Auto" position, the motor shall be controlled from the SCADA System as described under 330PLC-1. 2. Motor has internal thermal overloads which shall shut down the motor in the event of overtemperature (Hand and Auto modes). Manual reset shall be required to restart the motor. Internal thermal overloads shall be wired so that momentary power interruptions do not shut down the motor. Motor also has internal moisture detection that shall be for indication at the MCC and SCADA system only. This shall not shut down the motor. There is a 120 VAC control module (Mini-CAS) furnished as specified in Division 43 for thermal and moisture detection which shall be installed in the MCC starter bucket by this CONTRACTOR. 3. In the event the Centrate Wet Well Level falls below the low level float switch (LSL-15- _ 2-1) the pumps shall be shut down. The pumps shall not restart ultil the level rises above the restore level float (LS-15-2-1). 4. Float switches (LSL-15-2-1 and LS-15-2-1) shall be hardwired to the motor control circuit via intrinsic safety barriers in 330PLC-1. 5. Motor disconnect has an auxiliary contact that shall be wired to the MCC starter bucket such that control power is disconnected when the disconnect is in the "Off" position. 6. All of the above controls shall be hardwired and not through the PLC 7. Control and status signals noted in Section 26 09 00 - SCADA System I/O Listing shall be wired to the VFD and be communicated with the PLC via thE= SCADA System Ethernet/IP network. H. Belt Press Drive No. 3 (M-1-2-3): 1. H-O-A Selector Switch: a. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Hand" position, the motor shall start and run at the speed set on the drive HIM bypassing all controls, unless noted otherwise. b. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Off' position, the motor shall be inoperable. c. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Auto" position, the motor shall be controlled from the SCADA System as described under 330PLC-1. Section 26 09 00-42 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2. Motor has internal thermal overloads that shall shut down the motor in the event of overtemperature (Hand and Auto modes). Manual reset shall be required to restart the motor. Internal thermal overloads shall be wired such that momentary power interruptions do not shut down the motor. 3. There is a maintained emergency stop switch at the unit and shall be interlocked with the unit such that when the switch is activated, the unit shall shut down (Hand and Auto modes) and an alarm shall be indicated at the SCADA System. The unit shall be reset by resetting the emergency stop switch. 4. Motor disconnect has an auxiliary contact that shall be wired to the MCC starter bucket such that control power is disconnected when the disconnect is in the "Off' position. 5. All of the above controls shall be hardwired and not through the PLC. 6. Control and status signals noted in Section 26 09 00 - SCADA System I/O Listing shall be wired to the VFD and be communicated with the PLC via the SCADA System Ethernet/IP network. I. Belt Press No. 3 Hydraulic Power Pack (M-1-4-3): 1. H-O-A selector switch: a. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Hand" position, the motor shall start and run continuously bypassing all controls, unless noted otherwise. b. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Off' position, the motor shall be inoperable. c. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Auto" position, the motor shall be controlled from the SCADA System as described under 330PLC-1. 2. All of the above controls shall be hardwired and not through the PLC. J. Dewatering Building Supply Fan (330-SF-1): 1. 0-0 Selector Switch: a. With the 0-0 selector switch in the "On" position, the motor shall start and run continuously. b. With the 0-0 selector switch in the "Off" position, the motor shall be inoperable. 2. Provide extra capacity control power transformer for 120-volt power to associated damper. When the supply fan is called to run, the associated damper shall open. 3. All of the above controls shall be hardwired and not through the PLC. 3.07 SUPERVISORY CONTROL CENTER-GENERAL _. A. Control descriptions described herein are specific in nature to equipment associated with the SCCs. CONTRACTOR shall refer to Section 1.12-General Control Algorithms for additional programming requirements. Control descriptions herein shall reside in the local PLC and not in the master. B. Signals listed in Section 26 09 00-SCADA System I/O Listing as "signals being replaced with new signals" shall meet the programming requirements of Section 1.12-General Control Algorithms. C. In the event of a power failure at Structures 170, 180, 190, 300, 310, 325, or 330, when power is restored, the associated PLC shall automatically stagger the restart of any controlled equipment that is being called to run by the PLC. The stagger time shall be �- adjustable from 0 to 300 seconds via the SCADA System. D. Provide a new power fail relay in each of the following supervisory control centers: 170-PLC- 1, PLC-180-2, 190-PLC-1, 325-PLC-1, and 330PLC-1. The new power fail relay shall be used for control power fail alarm as well as indication that operation is from the UPS. Control power fail wiring shall be hard-wired and not through the PLC. Section 26 09 00-43 4463.004/City Contract No.994 E. There is a configurable network switch fail contact available for each of the following supervisory control center managed network switches: 170-PLC-1, PLC-180-2, 190-PLC-1, 325-PLC-1, and 330PLC-1. This fail contact shall be wired to a relay, which shall be wired to the respective PLC for indication that its associated primary fiber loop has failed. Each new and existing network switch shall be configured by System Supplier (via software) to — provide this alarm. 3.08 SUPERVISORY CONTROL CENTER 170 (170-PLC-1) A. CONTRACTOR shall provide new SCC panel drawings in electronic fornrat (e.g. AutoCAD) that incorporate all existing components and wiring as well as all changeE described herein. Existing SCC drawings are available from the Owner for reference. B. The GBT Feed Pumps (P-10-4-1, P-10-4-2, P-10-4-3, and P-10-4-4)shall each be controlled from this PLC with a SCADA Hand-Off-Auto selector switch as follows: 1. In SCADA"Hand", the pump shall start and run at an operator-adjustable speed setpoint (0 to 100%). 2. In SCADA"Auto", the operator shall be able to select a GBT Feed Pump to be assigned to each gravity belt thickener (M-10-12-1, M-10-12-2, or M-10-12-3). Only one pump shall be allowed to be interlocked with each gravity belt thickener. The operator shall also be able to select WAS Storage Tank No.1, WAS Storage Tank No. 2, or WAS Transfer Tank level to be interlocked with the pump. a. Flow meter FIT-10-3-1 is dedicated to Gravity Belt Thickener No. ` (M-10-12-1), FIT- 10-3-2 is dedicated to Gravity Belt Thickener No. 2 (M-10-12-2), and FIT-10-3-3 is dedicated to Gravity Belt Thickener No. 3 (M-10-12-3). If a "GBT Feed Pump Required" signal is received from a gravity belt thickener unit, the associated pump shall be started. The pump speed shall be controlled to maintain an operator- adjustable sludge flow rate setpoint (0 to 600 gpm) through the associated flow meter to the GBT. b. If WAS Storage Tank No. 1 is assigned to the pump, MOV-10-4-1 shall open when the pump is called-to-run. Once MOV-10-4-1 is open, the pump shall start and run. MOV-10-4-1 shall close after the pump is shut down. There shall be operator- adjustable WAS Storage Tank No. 1 low level shut down (0.0 to 10.5 feet) and restore level (0.0 to 10.5 feet) setpoints based on the level in WAS Storage Tank No. 1 (LIT-10-7-1). In the event the level in WAS Storage Tank No. 1 falls below the low level shut down setpoint, the pump shall be shut down. When the level in WAS Storage Tank No. 1 rises above the restore level setpoint the pump shall resume control as described above. c. If WAS Storage Tank No. 2 is assigned to the pump, MOV-10-4-2 shall open when the pump is called-to-run. Once MOV-10-4-2 is open, the pump shall start and run. MOV-10-4-2 shall close after the pump is shut down. There shall be operator- adjustable WAS Storage Tank No. 2 low level shut down (0.0 to 10.5 feet) and restore level (0.0 to 10.5 feet) setpoints based on the level in WAS Storage Tank No. 2 (LIT-10-7-2). In the event the level in WAS Storage Tank No. 2 falls below the low level shut down setpoint, the pump shall be shut down. When the level in WAS Storage Tank No. 2 rises above the restore level setpoint the pump shall resume control as described above. d. If WAS Transfer Tank is assigned to the pump, MOV-10-4-3 shall open when the pump is called-to-run. Once MOV-10-4-3 is open, the pump shall start and run. MOV-10-4-3 shall close after the pump is shut down. There shall be operator- - adjustable WAS Transfer Tank low level shut down (0.0 to 10.5 feet) and restore level (0.0 to 10.5 feet) setpoints based on the level in WAS Transfer Tank (LIT-10-2- Section 26 09 00-44 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1). In the event the level in WAS Transfer Tank falls below the low level shut down setpoint, the pump shall be shut down. When the level in WAS Transfer Tank rises above the restore level setpoint the pump shall resume control as described above. 3. The PLC-180-2 PLC shall provide a "GBT Feed Pump Common Failed" signal to the associated pumps gravity belt thickener control panel if the GBT feed pump is shut down due to "VFD Fault", "Motor Overtemp." "Loss of Sludge." "High Discharge Pressure," "Call-to-Run Fail," "WAS Transfer Tank Low Level," "WAS Storage Tank No. 1 Low Level," "WAS Storage Tank No. 2 Low Level," or"MCC or SCADA H-O-A not in Auto." C. [Bid Alternative No. 3] The Primary Sludge Transfer Pumps (P-3-15-1 and P-3-15-2) shall each be controlled from this PLC with a SCADA Hand-Off-Auto selector switch as follows: 1. In SCADA"Hand,"the pump shall start and run at an operator-adjustable speed setpoint (0 to 100%). 2. In SCADA"Auto," the pump shall be controlled as follows: a. The operator shall be able to select the level in Primary Sludge Transfer Tank No. 1 (LIT-10-2-2) or Primary Sludge Transfer Tank No. 2 (LIT-10-2-3) to be assigned to the pump. The PLC shall prevent more than one pump from being interlocked with a primary sludge tank and prevent more than one tank from being interlocked with a pump. b. The operator shall also be able to select the level in Blended Sludge Tank No. 1 (LIT-10-24-1), Blended Sludge Tank No. 2 (LIT-10-24-2), or Blended Sludge Tank No. 3 (LIT-10-24-3) to be assigned to the pump. The PLC shall prevent more than one pump from being interlocked with a blended sludge tank. Multiple tanks are allowed to be assigned to a pump. c. There shall be operator-adjustable primary sludge transfer tank start level (0.0 to 10.5 feet) and stop level (0.0 to 10.5 feet) setpoints for each pump based on the level in the assigned Primary Sludge Transfer Tank. In the event the level in the assigned primary sludge transfer tank rises above the start level setpoint, the pump shall start and run at an operator-adjustable speed (0 to 100%). Once the level in the assigned primary sludge transfer tank falls below the stop level setpoint, the pump shall be shut down. d. There shall be operator-adjustable blended sludge tank high level shut down (0.0 to 17.5 feet) and restore level (0.0 to 17.5 feet) setpoints for each pump. In the event the level in the assigned blended sludge tank rises above the high level shut down setpoint, the pump shall be shut down. Once the level in the assigned blended sludge tank fall below the restore level setpoint the pump shall resume being controlled as described above. D. The WAS Transfer Pumps (P-10-8-1 and P-10-8-2) shall each be controlled from this PLC with a SCADA Hand-Off-Auto selector switch as follows: 1. In SCADA "Hand," the pump shall start and run continuously bypassing all controls unless noted otherwise. 2. In SCADA"Auto," the pumps shall be interlocked with the WAS Transfer Tank such that if a GBT Feed Pump is assigned to the WAS Transfer Tank, the pumps shall be controlled based on the level in the wet well (LT-10-8-1) and from the backup floats as described below. If the WAS Transfer Tank does not have a GBT Feed Pump assigned to it, the pumps shall be inoperable. a. The operator shall be able to select either a fixed pump sequence or auto alternation for the two pumps. In the fixed mode, the operator shall be able to select one of the two pumps to be the lead pump with the unselected pump automatically becoming the lag pump. In the automatic alternation mode, there shall be an automatic alternator within this PLC that shall automatically alternate the pumps. In the event Section 26 09 00-45 4463.004/City Contract No.994 that a pump has failed or is out of service (H-O-A switch at MCC or SCADA not in Auto) the lag pump shall be rotated into lead position. b. There shall be operator-adjustable "Lead Pump Start," "Lag Pump Start," and "Common Pumps Off' level setpoints (0.0 to 20.0 feet)for control of the pumps. c. When the level in the wet well rises above the "Lead Pump Start" setpoint, the associated lead pump MOV shall open (MOV-10-8-1 for P-10-8-1 and MOV-10-8-2 for P-10-8-2). Once the lead pump MOV is open, the lead pump shall start and run. If the level in the wet well continues to rise above the "Lag Pump Start" setpoint, the associated lag pump MOV shall open. Once the lag pump MOV is open, the lag pump shall start and run. When the wet well level falls below the "Common Pumps Off setpoint both pumps shall be shut down. Once both pumps shut down, both MOVs shall close. 3. Provide a Transducer-Auto-Backup Floats selector switch on the front of this SCC to allow the operator to select either the level transducer or the backup floats for control of the pumps. a. In the "Transducer" mode, the pumps shall be controlled as described above and the backup float controls shall be disabled. b. In the "Auto" mode, the pumps shall normally be controlled from the transducer as described above and the backup float mode shall be enabled as follows: (1) The backup floats shall be enabled when the level transducer in the wet well fails, when the low water level float switch (LSL-10-8-1) is activated, or when the high water level float switch (LSH-10-8-1) is activated A "Backup Floats Mode Active" alarm shall be activated at the SCADA System to indicate that the system is in the "Backup Floats" mode. Once the "Backup Floats" mode has been engaged by a level transducer fail, the low water level float switch, or the high water level float switch, the pumps shall continue to be controlled from the wet well floats until the system is manually reset by the operator using a reset pushbutton on the front door of this SCC or a reset pushbutton at the SCADA System. (2) The "Transducer" and "Backup Floats" modes shall both be able to be manually set at the SCADA System. _ c. In the "Backup Floats" mode, the pumps shall be controlled as follows: (1) The five backup floats in the wet well (LSL-10-8-1, LS-10-8-1, LS-10-8-2, LS- 10-8-3, and LSH-10-8-1) shall control the pumps as follows: (2) When the level transducer in the wet well fails or when the high water level float switch (LSH-10-8-1) is activated the lead and lag pumps shall both start. Provide an adjustable time delay so that the pumps do not start simultaneously. Once started, the pumps shall continue to run until the level in the wet well falls below the common pumps off float switch (LS-10-8-3). The pumps shall then be controlled from the lead pump start(LS-10-8-2), lag pump start (LS-10-8-1), and the common pumps off float switches. If the level falls -- below the low level alarm float switch (LSL-10-8-1), all running pumps shall shut down and an alarm shall be activated at the SCADA System. Based on the status of the float switches, a hardwired start/stop signal shall be sent to the associated starter in the MCC. d. Provide an amber pilot light on the front of this SCC to indicate that the system is in the "Backup Floats" mode. The selector switch and amber pilot light shall be hardwired and not through the PLC. E. The WAS Blowers (M-10-1-1 and M-10-1-2) shall each be controlled from this PLC with a SCADA Hand-Off-Auto selector switch as follows: 1. In SCADA"Hand," the blower shall run continuously at an operator-adjustable speed (0 to 100%). Section 26 09 00-46 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2. In SCADA"Auto," the blower shall be controlled by a time-of-day time clock within this PLC. There shall be six time-of-day setpoints (three start and three stop)for the blowers that are operator-adjustable from the SCADA System. When a time-of-day start setpoint is reached, the blower shall start and run continuously at an operator-adjustable speed (0 to 100%) until the next time-of-day stop setpoint is reached at which time the blower shall shut down. F. The Ventilation System Failure alarm horns and strobes shall be controlled from this SCC as follows: 1. Provide relays in this SCC as required to provide audible and visual indication of a ventilation system failure for Structure 170 Pump Room B101 and First Floor 101 via horn and strobe devices. Ventilation system failure shall be provided through the associated air flow switch signal (FS-1) as described below. A signal shall be provided to the PLC from logic in this SCC when the associated flow switch is inactive. 2. Provide independent, hard-wired Ventilation System Failure horn and strobe control circuits for the areas described above. All horns and strobes within the space shall be energized when the associated air flow switch signal is inactive and shall remain energized until the signal is active. There shall be a momentary "Silence" pushbutton control station adjacent to each Ventilation System Failure horn and strobe location. When the "Silence" pushbutton is pressed, the horns shall be silenced. The strobes shall remain active until the associated air flow switch signal is active. 3. There is a combination green/red entrance strobe light at each entrance to the monitored space. The green light shall be energized when the associated air flow switch is active. When the associated air flow switch is inactive, the strobe's green light shall be de-energized and the strobe's red light shall be energized. 4. Provide a maintained-type "Test" pushbutton on the front of this SCC to test the associated horns and strobes. When the "Test" pushbutton is pressed, all associated horn, strobe, and entrance strobe light devices shall be energized to simulate an active Ventilation System Failure alarm signal as described above. The associated horns and strobes shall remain active until the "Test" pushbutton is reset. 5. The associated horn and strobes shall be powered from this SCC. Power to the horn and strobes shall be fused. 6. Provide a 24VDC power supply for power to flow switch FS-1. 7. All of the above controls shall be hardwired for fail-safe operation and not through the ,. PLC. G. Provide dedicated Enable-Disable selector switches for WAS Storage Tank No. 1, WAS Storage Tank No. 2, Primary Sludge Transfer Tank No. 1, Primary Sludge Transfer Tank No. 2, and WAS Transfer Tank on the front of this SCC (five total) which shall disable the associated tank's low level float and high level float. When the tank low level float and high level float are disabled, signals from the associated float switch shall be disabled, including alarms and hardwired pump shut down interlocks associated with each float. 3.09 SUPERVISORY CONTROL CENTER 180 (PLC-180-2) A. Provide additional I/O cards and power supply as required within the existing SCC enclosure. Provide distributed I/O Ethernet communication module, Allen-Bradley model 1769-AENTR, for distributed I/O connection to the existing PLC. B. CONTRACTOR shall provide new SCC panel drawings in electronic format (e.g. AutoCAD) that incorporate all existing components and wiring as well as all changes described herein. Existing SCC drawings are available from the Owner for reference. Section 26 09 00-47 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. The TWAS Pumps (P-10-14-1, P-10-14-2, and P-10-14-3) shall each be ,ontrolled from this PLC with a SCADA Hand-Off-Auto selector switch as follows: 1. In SCADA "Hand," the pump shall run continuously at an operator-adjustable speed (0 to 100%). 2. In SCADA"Auto", the pump shall be controlled as follows: a. When a "TWAS Pump Required" command signal is active from the pumps associated gravity belt thickener control panel (180-LCP-10-7 for P-10-14-1, 180-LCP-10-12 for P-10-14-2, and 180-LCP-10-22 for P-10-14-3), the pump shall start and run at an operator-adjustable speed setpoint(0 to 100%).When the "TWAS Pump Required" command signal is deactivated from the associated gravity belt thickener control panel, the pump shall shut down. 3. This PLC shall provide a "TWAS Pump Common Failed" signal for each pump to the pumps associated gravity belt thickener control panel if the TWAS ump is shut down due to "VFD Fault", "Motor Overtemp," "Loss of Sludge," "High Di ,charge Pressure," "MCC or SCADA H-O-A not in Auto," or"Call-to-Run Fail". D. The Gravity Belt Thickener Polymer Feed Systems (M-10-20-1, M-10-20-2 and M-10-20-3) shall each be controlled from this PLC with a SCADA Off-Auto switch as follows: 1. In SCADA Auto, the pumps shall be controlled as follows: a. The operator shall assign a Gravity Belt Thickener Polymer Feed System to operate with each of the Gravity Belt Thickeners (M-10-12-1, M-10-12-2 , and M-10-12-3). This PLC shall prevent more than one polymer feed system from being assigned to a Gravity Belt Thickener. If a gravity belt thickener does not ha✓e a polymer feed system selected, a "Polymer System Not Assigned" alarm shall oe activated at the SCADA system and a "Polymer Feed System Common Alarm" signal sent to the associated Gravity Belt Thickener control panel (180-LCP-10-7, 180-LCP-10-12, and 180-LCP-10-22). This fail signal shall be part of the "Polymer Feed System Common Alarm" signal described below. b. When this PLC receives a "Polymer Feed Required" signal from the Gravity Belt Thickener control panel, the associated polymer feed system shall start and run as described below. c. The Polymer Feed System Fail signals listed in the I/O list as well as any software generated fail signals as specified herein shall generate a "Polymer Feed System Common Alarm" signal for each system. This fail signal shall be sent to the Gravity Belt Thickener control panel that it is interlocked with. E. The Polymer Feed Pumps (M-10-20-1, M-10-20-2, and M-10-20-3) have a Local-Remote switch on the face of each pump. With the switch in the Local position, the pump speed will be operator-adjustable at the pump. With the switch in the Remote position, the pump shall be controlled with a SCADA Hand-Off-Auto selector switch from this PLC as follows: 1. In SCADA "Hand," the pump shall run at an operator-adjustable speed setpoint (0 to 100%). 2. In SCADA "Auto," the operator shall be able to select whether the pump shall be controlled based on the sludge flow to gravity belt thickener no. " (FIT-10-3-1), the sludge flow to gravity belt thickener no. 2 (FIT-10-3-2), or the sludge flow to the gravity belt thickener no. 3 (FIT-10-3-3). The operator shall be able to enter parameters into the equation below to calculate pump speed: Pump Speed* = (Qfp X Cdose)/(Cbulk.chem. X Qmax,pump) Qfp = Sludge flow in gallons per hour. CdOSe = Desired Dosage in mg/L; Operator Entered. Cbulk,chem = Bulk Chemical Concentration in mg/L; Operator Ente red. Section 26 09 00-48 4463.004/City Contract No.994 Qmax,pump = Maximum Pump Flow in gallons per hour; Operator Entered. *Note: Qfp and Qmax, pump must have the same units to properly calculate Pump Speed. F. The Ventilation System Failure alarm horns and strobes shall be controlled from this SCC as follows: 1. Provide relays in this SCC as required to provide audible and visual indication of a ventilation system failure for Structure 180 Thickener Room 101 via horn and strobe devices. Ventilation system failure shall be provided through the associated air flow switch signal (FS-1) as described below.A signal shall be provided to the PLC from logic in this SCC when the associated flow switch is inactive. 2. Provide independent, hard-wired Ventilation System Failure horn and strobe control circuits for the areas described above. All horns and strobes within the space shall be energized when the associated air flow switch signal is inactive and shall remain energized until the signal is active. There shall be a momentary "Silence" pushbutton control station adjacent to each Ventilation System Failure horn and strobe location. When the "Silence" pushbutton is pressed, the horns shall be silenced. The strobes shall remain active until the associated air flow switch signal is active. 3. There is a combination green/red entrance strobe light at each entrance to the monitored space. The green light shall be energized when the associated air flow switch is active. When the associated air flow switch is inactive, the strobe's green light shall be de-energized and the strobe's red light shall be energized. 4. Provide a maintained-type "Test" pushbutton on the front of this SCC to test the associated horns and strobes. When the "Test" pushbutton is pressed, all associated horn, strobe, and entrance strobe light devices shall be energized to simulate an active Ventilation System Failure alarm signal as described above. The associated horns and strobes shall remain active until the "Test" pushbutton is reset. 5. The associated horn and strobes shall be powered from this SCC. Power to the horn and strobes shall be fused. 6. Provide a 24VDC power supply for power to flow switch FS-1. 7. All of the above controls shall be hardwired for fail-safe operation and not through the PLC. 3.10 SUPERVISORY CONTROL CENTER 190 (190-PLC-1) A. CONTRACTOR shall provide new SCC panel drawings in electronic format (e.g. AutoCAD) that incorporate all existing components and wiring as well as all changes described herein. Existing SCC drawings are available from the Owner for reference. B. Existing programming for control of the Digester Feed Pumps (P-10-26-1, P-10-26-2, and P-10-26-3) shall be maintained. This System Supplier shall be responsible for coordinating all Digester Feed Pump signals required to maintain the existing functionality of the Digester System. Modify the existing PLC logic such that Digester Feed Pump shall be shut down if the associated Macerator (M-10-27-1 for P-10-26-1, M-10-27-2 for P-10-26-2, and M-10-27-3 for P-10-26-3) is not "Running Forward" or "Running Reverse". Provide a time delay on this shut down for macerator "Running Forward" or "Running Reverse" confirmation. C. The Blended Sludge Mixers (M-10-24-1, M-10-24-2, and M-10-24-3)shall each be controlled from this PLC with a SCADA Hand-Off-Auto switch as follows: �. 1. In SCADA"Hand," the mixer shall run continuously bypassing all controls unless noted otherwise. Section 26 09 00-49 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2. In SCADA "Auto," the operator shall be able to select either a Time-of-Day mode or Level mode for control of the mixer as follows: a. In the Time-of-Day mode, the mixer shall be controlled by a time-of-day time clock within this PLC. There shall be six time-of-day setpoints (three start and three stop) for the mixer that are operator adjustable from the SCADA System. When a time-of- day start setpoint is reached, the mixer shall start and run continuously until the next — time-of-day stop setpoint is reached at which time the mixer shall be shut down. If the level in the associated Blended Sludge Tank (LIT-10-24-1, LIT-10-24-2, or LIT-10-24-3) falls below an operator-adjustable stop level setpoint, the mixer shall be shut down. b. In the Level mode, the mixer shall be controlled based on the level in the associated Blended Sludge Tank (LIT-10-24-1, LIT-10-24-2, or LIT-10-24-3). There shall be operator adjustable start and stop level setpoints (0.0 to 17.5 feet) within this PLC such that when the associated Blended Sludge Tank level rises above the start setpoint, the mixer shall start and run continuously until the associated Blended Sludge Tank level falls below the mixer stop setpoint at which time the mixer shall be shut down. D. The Macerators (M-10-27-1, M-10-27-2, and M-10-27-3) shall be controlled from a SCADA Hand-Off-Auto selector switch from this PLC as follows: 1. In SCADA"Hand," the macerator shall run continuously. 2. In SCADA "Auto," when the associated Digester Feed Pump is runn ng (M-10-27-1 for P-10-26-1, M-10-27-2 for P-10-26-2, and M-10-27-3 for P-10-26-3) the PLC shall send a "Macerator Required" signal to the macerator control panel. When the associated Digester Feed Pump is shut down, the PLC shall stop sending a "Macerator Required" signal to the macerator control panel. E. [Bid Alternative No. 2] The Chemical Feed Pumps (P-10-41-1 and P-10-41-2) shall be _ controlled with a SCADA Hand-Off-Auto selector switch from this PLC as follows: 1. In SCADA "Hand," the pump shall run at an operator-adjustable speed setpoint (0 to 100%). 2. In SCADA "Auto," the operator shall be able to select whether the pump shall be controlled based on the sludge flow to digester no. 3 (FIT-10-29-2), the sludge flow to digester no. 6 (FIT-10-29-1), or the total combined sludge flow to digester no. 3 and 6 (sum of FIT-10-29-1 and FIT-10-29-2). The operator shall be able to enter parameters into the equation below to calculate pump speed: Pump Speed* = (Qfp X Cdose)/(Cbuik.chem. X Qmax,pump) Qfp = Sludge flow in gallons per hour. Cdose = Desired Dosage in mg/L; Operator Entered. Cbulk,chem = Bulk Chemical Concentration in mg/L; Operator Entered. Qmax,pump = Maximum Pump Flow in gallons per hour; Operator Entered. *Note: Qfp and Qmax, pump must have the same units to properly calculate Pump _.� Speed. F. The Ventilation System Failure alarm horns and strobes shall be control ed from this SCC as follows: 1. Provide relays in this SCC as required to provide audible and visual indication of a ventilation system failure for Structure 190 Pump Room 101 via horn and strobe devices. Ventilation system failure shall be provided through the associated air flow switch signal (FS-1) as described below.A signal shall be provided to the PLC from logic in this SCC when the associated flow switch is inactive. Section 26 09 00-50 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2. Provide relays in this SCC as required to provide audible and visual indication of a ventilation system failure for Structure 190 Pump Room 102 via horn and strobe devices. Ventilation system failure shall be provided through the associated air flow switch signal (FS-2)as described below.A signal shall be provided to the PLC from logic in this SCC when the associated flow switch is inactive. 3. Provide independent, hard-wired Ventilation System Failure horn and strobe control circuits for the areas described above. All horns and strobes within the space shall be energized when the associated air flow switch signal is inactive and shall remain energized until the signal is active. There shall be a momentary "Silence" pushbutton control station adjacent to each Ventilation System Failure horn and strobe location. When the "Silence" pushbutton is pressed, the horns shall be silenced. The strobes shall remain active until the associated air flow switch signal is active. 4. There is a combination green/red entrance strobe light at each entrance to each monitored space. The green light shall be energized when the associated air flow switch is active. When the associated air flow switch is inactive, the strobe's green light shall be de-energized and the strobe's red light shall be energized. 5. Provide a maintained-type "Test" pushbutton on the front of this SCC for each control circuit to test the associated horns and strobes. When the "Test" pushbutton is pressed, all associated horn, strobe, and entrance strobe light devices shall be energized to simulate an active Ventilation System Failure alarm signal as described above. The associated horns and strobes shall remain active until the "Test" pushbutton is reset. 6. The associated horn and strobes shall be powered from this SCC. Power to the horn and strobes shall be fused. 7. Provide a 24VDC power supply for power to flow switch FS-1 and FS-2. 8. All of the above controls shall be hardwired for fail-safe operation and not through the PLC. G. [Bid Alternative No. 2] Activation of the Chemical Tank (T-10-40-1 or T-10-40-2) high level -- alarm lights shall be controlled from this SCC based on the level signal from the associated tank level transducer (LIT-10-41-1 for T-10-40-1 and LIT-10-41-2 for T-10-40-2). Once the level in the tank rises above a dedicated operator-adjustable "Full Level" setpoint (0 to 11.0 feet), the exterior alarm light for the tank shall be activated. The light shall be deactivated when acknowledged at the SCADA System or from the associated control station (CS-10-41-1 for T-10-40-1 and CS-10-41-2 for T-10-40-2) at the light. Provide an interface relay in this SCC to interface with the light. The high level alarm lights shall be powered from this SCC and shall be fused. 1. There shall be a dedicated operator-adjustable "Reorder" level setpoint. In the event the T level falls below the "Reorder" level setpoint, an alarm shall be activated at the SCADA System. 2. The amount of chemical used shall be totalized in this PLC for indication at the SCADA System. When the chemical tank is filled, the PLC shall store the amount of chemical used up to that point and then begin to accumulate a new total. The PLC shall account for partial filling of the tank. H. Provide dedicated Enable-Disable selector switches for Blended Sludge Storage Tank No. 1, Blended Sludge Storage Tank No. 2, and Blended Sludge Storage Tank No. 3 on the front of this SCC (three total) which shall disable the associated tank's low level float and high level float. When the tank low level float and high level float are disabled, signals from the associated float switch shall be disabled, including alarms and hardwired pump shut down interlocks associated with each float shall be disabled. Section 26 09 00-51 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.11 SUPERVISORY CONTROL CENTER 325 (325-PLC-1) A. CONTRACTOR shall provide new SCC panel drawings in electronic forn at (e.g. AutoCAD) that incorporate all existing components and wiring as well as all changer described herein. Existing SCC drawings are available from the Owner for reference. B. Existing programming for control of the Sludge Storage Mixers (P-12-2-1 and P-12-2-2)shall remain as existing. C. The Dewatering Feed Pumps (P-12-1-1, P-12-1-2, and P-12-1-3) shall each be controlled from this PLC with a SCADA Hand-Off-Auto selector switch as follows: 1. In SCADA"Hand," the pump shall run continuously at an operator-a ijustable speed (0 to 100%). 2. In SCADA "Auto," The operator shall be able to select either Centrifuge No. 1 (M-14-2-1), Centrifuge No. 2 (M-14-2-2), or Belt Filter Press (M-14-2-3) to be assigned to the pump. Only one pump shall be allowed to be interlocked with each piece of dewatering equipment. The PLC shall prevent more than one pump from being interlocked with each piece of dewatering equipment. 3. The Centrifuge Control Panels (two total) will provide a "Feed Pump Start/Stop" signal. There shall be an operator-adjustable "Centrifuge Flow Rate" setpoint (0 to 400 gpm) for each centrifuge.When a "Feed Pump Start/Stop" signal is received from the selected Centrifuge Control Panel, the assigned dewatering feed pump shall start and run and vary its speed to maintain the "Centrifuge Flow Rate" setpoint through the associated existing centrifuge flow meter (FIT-12-1-1 for Centrifuge No. 1 and FIT-12-1-2 for Centrifuge No. 2). In the event the "Feed Pump Start/Stop" signal is lost, the associated dewatering feed pump shall shut down. 4. There shall be an operator-adjustable "Belt Press Flow Rate" setpoint (0 to 400 gpm) for the existing Belt Press. When a "Feed Pump Required" signal is generated from this PLC the assigned dewatering feed pump shall start and run and vary its speed to maintain the "Belt Press Flow Rate" setpoint through the associated existing Belt Press flow meter (FIT-12-1-3). In the event the "Feed Pump Required" signal is lost the associated dewatering feed pump shall shut down. 5. Dewatering Feed Pump fail and shut down signals listed in the I/O ,ist as well as any software generated fail signals as specified herein shall generate a "Common Dewatering Feed Pump Fail" signal for each feed pump. The common fail signals shall also be sent to a piece of dewatering equipment when it does not have a feed pump assigned to it or when the assigned feed pump is out of service (MCC or SCADA H-O- A not in Auto). The fail signal shall be sent to the centrifuge or belt press that the feed pump is interlocked with. 6. Statuses for Dewatering Feed Pumps shall only be sent to the associated centrifuge or belt press. Running, common fail, and operating speed for each pump shall be sent to the associated centrifuge or belt press via Ethernet/IP over the plant fiber optic SCADA Network. 7. The flow for each piece of dewatering equipment (FIT-12-1-1: Centrifuge No. 1, FIT-12-1-2: Centrifuge No. 2, FIT-12-1-3: Belt Press No. 3) shall be sent to the associated dewatering equipment control panel PLC via Ethernet/IP over the plant fiber optic SCADA network. 8. There shall be a low level (0 to 300 inches) and restore level (0 to 300 inches) setpoint for each existing sludge storage tank wet well (existing LIT-12-3-1 and existing LIT-12-3-2). The operator shall be able to interlock each dewatering feed pump with either of the sludge storage tank wet wells. In the event the interlocked sludge storage tank wet well level falls below the low level setpoint, the dewatering feed pump shall shut down and be disabled from running. In the event the interlocked sludge storage Section 26 09 00-52 4463.004/City Contract No.994 tank wet well level rises above the restore level setpoint, the dewatering feed pump shall be enabled to run. D. The Ventilation System Failure alarm horns and strobes shall be controlled from this SCC as follows: 1. Provide relays in this SCC as required to provide audible and visual indication of a ventilation system failure for Structure 325 Pump Room B101 and Mezzanine 101 via horn and strobe devices. Ventilation system failure shall be provided through the associated air flow switch signal (FS-1) as described below. A signal shall be provided to the PLC from logic in this SCC when the associated flow switch is inactive. 2. Provide independent, hard-wired Ventilation System Failure horn and strobe control circuits for the areas described above. All horns and strobes within the space shall be energized when the associated air flow switch signal is inactive and shall remain energized until the signal is active. There shall be a momentary "Silence" pushbutton control station adjacent to each Ventilation System Failure horn and strobe location. When the "Silence" pushbutton is pressed, the horns shall be silenced. The strobes shall remain active until the associated air flow switch signal is active. 3. There is a combination green/red entrance strobe light at each entrance to the monitored space. The green light shall be energized when the associated air flow switch is active. When the associated air flow switch is inactive, the strobe's green light shall be de-energized and the strobe's red light shall be energized. 4. Provide a maintained-type "Test" pushbutton on the front of this SCC to test the associated horns and strobes. When the "Test" pushbutton is pressed, all associated horn, strobe, and entrance strobe light devices shall be energized to simulate an active Ventilation System Failure alarm signal as described above. The associated horns and strobes shall remain active until the "Test" pushbutton is reset. 5. The associated horn and strobes shall be powered from this SCC. Power to the horn and strobes shall be fused. 6. Provide a 24VDC power supply for power to flow switch FS-1. 7. All of the above controls shall be hardwired for fail-safe operation and not through the PLC. E. Provide dedicated Enable-Disable selector switches for sludge Storage Tank No. 1 and Sludge Storage Tank No. 2 on the front of this SCC (two total) which shall disable the associated tank's low level float and high level float. When the tank low level float and high level float are disabled, signals from the associated float switch shall be disabled, including alarms and hardwired pump shut down interlocks associated with each float shall be disabled. 3.12 SUPERVISORY CONTROL CENTER 330 (330PLC-1) A. This control panel shall be a maximum of 48 inches wide by 20 inches deep by 90 inches high and be located in the Dewatering Building, where shown on the Drawings. This panel shall be used as a termination point for all transmitting and receiving equipment associated with 330MCC-1 A. All control algorithms and alarms described herein shall be programmed into this PLC. Refer to the Section 26 09 90 - SCADA System I/O Listing for all required I/O that shall interface with this SCC.A minimum of 25% spares shall be provided for each type of input and output used. B. Provide a new UPS in supervisory control center 330PLC-1. UPS shall be provided as specified herein with a relay 10 module that provides a dry contact output to the PLC to indicate a common UPS failure alarm. The common failure alarm shall include the condition Section 26 09 00-53 4463.004/City Contract No.994 where the UPS batteries need replacement. Indication of "Common l PS Fail" shall be provided at the SCADA System. C. There shall be two 120-volt circuits wired to this SCC as indicated on the Drawings. One circuit shall be used for ventilation monitoring equipment and associated annunciation devices powered from this control panel, and the other circuit (Main UPS circuit) shall be used for all other control panel power. D. This System Supplier shall be responsible for all coordination with the Section 46 76 33- Dewatering Centrifuge Equipment System Supplier to ensure that all signals required in that Section, as well as those in Section 26 09 90-SCADA System I/O Listing are provided and are compatible with the SCADA System being provided as part of this Se ton. This System Supplier shall be responsible for having reviewed Division 46 for the signals required. E. The Centrate Mixers (M-15-1-1 and M-15-1-2) shall each be controlled frc m this PLC with a SCADA Hand-Off-Auto selector switch as follows: 1. In SCADA"Hand," the mixer shall run continuously bypassing all controls, unless noted otherwise. 2. In SCADA "Auto," the operator shall be able to select either a Time-of-Day mode or Level mode for control of the mixer as follows: a. In the Time-of-Day mode, the mixer shall be controlled by a time-of-day time clock within this PLC. There shall be six time-of-day setpoints (three start and three stop) for the mixer that are operator-adjustable from the SCADA System. When a time-of- day start setpoint is reached, the mixer shall start and run continuously. When the level in the associated Centrate Equalization Tank (LIT-15-1-1 or LIT-15-1-2) falls below an operator-adjustable stop level setpoint (0.0 to 20.0 feet), the mixer shall be shut down. When the level in the associated Centrate Equalization Tank rises above an operator-adjustable restore level setpoint (0.0 to 20.0 feet), the mixer shall start and run. When a time-of-day stop setpoint is reached, the mixer shall be shut down. b. In the Level mode, the mixer shall be controlled based on the level in the associated Centrate Equalization Tank (LIT-15-1-1 or LIT-15-1-2). There shall be operator adjustable mixer start and stop level setpoints within this PLC such that when the Centrate Equalization Tank level is above the start setpoint, the mixer shall start and run continuously until the Centrate Equalization Tank level falls below the mixer stop setpoint. F. The Centrate Pumps (P-15-2-1 and P-15-2-2) shall each be controlled from this PLC with a SCADA Hand-Off-Auto selector switch as follows: 1. In SCADA "Hand," the pump shall run continuously at an operator-adjustable speed (0 to 100%). 2. In SCADA "Auto," the pump shall be controlled from a Time-of-Day time clock, an operator-adjustable "Centrate Flow Rate" setpoint (0 to 150 gpm), and a PLC based alternator as follows: a. The operator shall be able to select either a fixed pump sequence or auto alternation of the two pumps. In the fixed mode, the operator shall be able to select one of the two pumps to be the lead pump with the unselected pump automatically becoming the lag pump. In the automatic alternation mode, the pump sequence selected in the fixed mode shall be used for the first run cycle, but the pumps shall alternate after each run cycle of the lead pump thereafter. In the event that a pump has failed or is out of service (H-O-A switch at MCC or SCADA not in Auto) the lag pump shall be rotated into the lead position. Section 26 09 00-54 4463.004/City Contract No.994 b. The pumps shall be controlled by a Time-of-Day time clock within this PLC. There shall be four time-of-day setpoints (two start and two stop) for the pumps that are operator-adjustable from the SCADA System. When a time-of-day start setpoint is reached, the lead pump shall start and ramp to full speed. After ramping to full speed, the PLC shall vary the speed of the lead pump to maintain an operator- adjustable"Centrate Flow Rate" setpoint based on the flow through the centrate flow meter (FIT-15-2-1). If the flow through the centrate flow meter does not meet the "Centrate Flow Rate" setpoint and the lead pump is operating at full speed for an operator-adjustable time delay(0 to 300 seconds), the lag pump shall start and ramp to full speed. The lead pump shall maintain full speed and the lag pump speed shall vary to maintain the desired centrate flow rate. If the centrate flow rate exceeds the "Centrate Flow Rate" setpoint and when the last pump called to operate has ramped to minimum speed for an operator-adjustable time delay (0 to 300 seconds), the pump shall be shut down. This sequence shall continue until both pumps are shut down. c. There shall be operator-adjustable centrate wet well low level (0.0 to 23.0 feet) and restore level (0.0 to 23.0 feet) setpoints. In the event the level in the centrate wet well falls below the low level setpoint, the pumps shall be shut down and shall be .. disabled from running until the level in centrate wet well rises above the restore level setpoint. G. The Polymer Feed Pumps (M-14-8-1, M-14-8-2, and M-14-8-3) have a Local-Remote switch on the face of each pump. With the switch in the Local position, the pump speed will be operator-adjustable at the pump. With the switch in the Remote position, the pump shall be controlled with a SCADA Hand-Off-Auto selector switch from this PLC as follows: 1. In SCADA "Hand," the pump shall run at an operator-adjustable speed setpoint (0 to 100%). 2. In SCADA "Auto," the operator shall be able assign the pump that shall be controlled based on the sludge flow to centrifuge no. 1 (FIT-12-1-1), the sludge flow to centrifuge no. 2 (FIT-12-1-2), or the sludge flow to belt filter press no. 3 (FIT-12-1-3). More than one polymer system shall not be able to be assigned to the same centrifuge or belt filter press. The operator shall be able to enter parameters into the equation below to calculate pump speed: Pump Speed* = (Qfp X Cdose)/(Cbulk.chem. X Qmax,pump) Qfp = Sludge flow in gallons per hour. Cdose = Desired Dosage in mg/L; Operator Entered. Cbulk,chem = Bulk Chemical Concentration in mg/L; Operator Entered. Qmax,pump = Maximum Pump Flow in gallons per hour; Operator Entered. *Note: Qfp and Qmax, pump must have the same units to properly calculate Pump Speed. 3. If the polymer feed pump is selected to be controlled based on the sludge flow to centrifuge no. 1 or sludge flow to centrifuge no. 2, when a "Polymer Pump Required" signal is received from the associated Centrifuge Control Panel, the polymer pump shall start and run at the speed calculated as noted above. If the polymer feed pump is selected to be controlled based on the sludge flow to belt filter press no. 3, the polymer feed pump shall start and run at the speed calculated as noted above when a "Polymer Pump Required" signal is generated from this PLC. In the event the "Polymer Pump Required" signal is lost, the associated polymer feed pump shall shut down. Section 26 09 00-55 4463.004/City Contract No.994 H. Belt Press Drive No. 3 (M-1-2-3) and Belt Press No. 3 Hydraulic Power Pack (M-1-4-3) was controlled from an existing MicroLogix 1400 PLC. Migrate the existing RSLogix 500 PLC program to the CompactLogix programming environment to maintain existing functionality. Test all new and existing I/O and PLC logic to verify an accurate conversion of the existing PLC logic. Map existing I/O wiring to the new I/O card terminations. I. Biosolids Conveyors (M-14-15-1, M-14-15-2, M-14-15-3, and M-14-15-4 Main Conveyors (M-14-15-5 and M-14-5-6), and Truck Bay Conveyors (M-14-15-7 M-14-15-8, and M-14-15-9) shall each be controlled from this PLC with a SCADA H-O-A switch as follows: 1. In SCADA "Hand," the conveyor shall run continuously in the forward direction bypassing all controls, unless noted otherwise. 2. In SCADA "Auto," the operator shall be able to select to convey dewatered sludge to either Truck Bay No. 1 or Truck Bay No. 2 for control of the conveyors as follows: a. If Truck Bay No. 1 is selected, conveyor M-14-15-9 shall be inoperable and the remaining conveyors shall operate as follows: (1) Once a Centrifuge No. 1 "Conveyor Run Request" is received from the Centrifuge No. 1 Control Panel, biosolids conveyor M-14-1 5,-1, main conveyor M-14-15-5, inclined conveyor M-15-15-6, and Truck Bay Conveyors M-14-15-7 and M-14-15-8 shall start and run in the forward direction in descending sequential order (M-14-15-8, M-14-15-7, M-14-15-6, etc.). Operation of each conveyor shall be interlocked with operation of the conveyor downstream of it (if in service) such that the upstream conveyor cannot start until the downstream conveyor has started and is running for an operator- adjustable conveyor start delay (0 to 60 seconds). A "Centrifuge Run Command" signal shall be sent to Centrifuge No. 1 Control Panel once all - conveyors are running and the last conveyor start delay timer has expired. (a) Once the "Centrifuge Run Command" signal has been sent to the Centrifuge No. 1 Control Panel, operation of the biosolids conveyor (M-14-15-1) shall be based on the "Biosolids Conveyor Run Forward Command" and "Biosolids Conveyor Run Reverse Command" signals from the Centrifuge No. 1 Control Panel such that the biosolids conveyor starts and runs in the commanded direction (forward or reverse) until the associated command signal is cleared. (b) Once the "Biosolids Conveyor Run Forward Command" and "Biosolids Conveyor Run Reverse Command" signals from the Centrifuge No. 1 Control Panel are deactivated, the "Centrifuge Run Request" signal from the centrifuge control panel is deactivated, the biosolids conveyor has stopped, the main, inclined, and truck bay conveyors shall stop in ascending sequential order (M-14-15-5, M-14-15-6, M-14-15-7, etc.). Each conveyor shall run for an operator-adjustable shut down time delay (0 to 60 seconds) after the upstream conveyor has stopped. -- (2) Once a Centrifuge No. 2 "Conveyor Run Request" signal is received from the Centrifuge No. 2 control panel, biosolids conveyor M-14-15•-2, main conveyor M-14-15-5, inclined conveyor M-15-15-6, and Truck Bay Conveyors M-14-15-7 and M-14-15-8 shall start and run in the forward direction in descending sequential order (M-14-15-8, M-14-15-7, M-14-15-6, etc.). Operation of each conveyor shall be the same as noted above for Centrifuge No. 1, but M-14-15-2 shall be the active biosolids conveyor. (3) Once a Belt Press No. 3"Conveyor Run Request" signal is received from logic within this PLC, biosolids conveyors M-14-15-3 and M-14-15-4, main conveyor M-14-15-5, inclined conveyor M-15-15-6, and Truck Bay Conveyors M-14-15-7 and M-14-15-8 shall start and run in the forward direction in descending sequential order (M-14-15-8, M-14-15-7, M-14-15-6, etc.). Section 26 09 00-56 4463.004/City Contract No.994 Operation of each conveyor shall be the same as noted above for Centrifuge No. 1, but M-14-15-3 and M-14-15-4 shall be the active biosolids conveyors. b. If Truck Bay No. 2 is selected, conveyor M-14-15-8 shall be inoperable and the remaining conveyors shall operate as follows: (1) Once a Centrifuge No. 1 "Conveyor Run Request" signal is received from the Centrifuge No. 1 Control Panel, biosolids conveyor M-14-15-1, main conveyor M-14-15-5, inclined conveyor M-15-15-6, and Truck Bay Conveyors M-14-15-7 and M-14-15-9 shall start and run in the forward direction in descending sequential order (M-14-15-9, M-14-15-7, M-14-15-6, etc.). Operation of each conveyor shall be interlocked with operation of the conveyor downstream of it (if in service) such that the upstream conveyor cannot start until the downstream conveyor has started and is running for an operator- adjustable conveyor start delay (0 to 60 seconds). A "Centrifuge Run Command" signal shall be sent to Centrifuge No. 1 Control Panel once all conveyors are running and the last conveyor start delay timer has expired. (a) Once the"Centrifuge Run Command"signal has been sent to Centrifuge No. 1 Control Panel, operation of the biosolids conveyor (M-15-15-1) shall be based on the "Biosolids Conveyor Run Forward Command" and "Biosolids Conveyor Run Reverse Command" signals from the Centrifuge No. 1 Control Panel such that the biosolids conveyor starts and runs in the commanded direction until the associated command signal is cleared. "Biosolids Conveyor Running Forward" and "Biosolids Conveyor Running Reverse" signals shall be sent to the centrifuge control panel. (b) Once the "Biosolids Conveyor Run Forward Command" and "Biosolids Conveyor Run Reverse Command" signals from Centrifuge No. 1 Control Panel are deactivated, the "Centrifuge Run Request" signal from the centrifuge control panel is deactivated, and the biosolids conveyor has stopped, the main, inclined, and truck bay conveyors shall stop in ascending sequential order (M-14-15-5, M-14-15-6, M-14-15-7, etc.). Each conveyor shall run for an operator-adjustable shut down time delay (0 to 60 seconds) after the upstream conveyor has stopped. (2) Once a Centrifuge No. 2 "Conveyor Run Request" signal is received from the Centrifuge No. 2 Control Panel, biosolids conveyor M-14-15-2, main conveyor M-14-15-5, inclined conveyor M-15-15-6, and Truck Bay Conveyors M-14-15-7 and M-14-15-9 shall start and run in the forward direction in descending sequential order (M-14-15-9, M-14-15-7, M-14-15-6, etc.). Operation of each conveyor shall be the same as noted above for Centrifuge No. 1, but M-14-15-2 shall be the active biosolids conveyor. (3) Once a Belt Press No. 3"Conveyor Run Request" signal is received from logic within this PLC, biosolids conveyors M-14-15-3 and M-14-15-4, main conveyor M-14-15-5, inclined conveyor M-15-15-6, and Truck Bay Conveyors M-14-15-7 and M-14-15-9 shall start and run in the forward direction in descending sequential order (M-14-15-9, M-14-15-7, M-14-15-6, etc.). Operation of each conveyor shall be the same as noted above for Centrifuge No. 1, but M-14-15-3 and M-14-15-4 shall be the active biosolids conveyors. c. Conveyor failed signals being sent to the Centrifuge Control Panels listed in the I/O list shall consist of any motor fault (overload, overcurrent, etc.) and when the conveyor is out of service (MCC or SCADA H-O-A not in Auto). When a conveyor fails, all conveyors upstream of the failed conveyor shall shut down immediately and downstream conveyors shall be shut down using the time delay sequence for each conveyor to sequentially shut down in an ascending order, as described above, Section 26 09 00-57 4463.004/City Contract No.994 when the "Centrifuge/Belt Filter Press Run Request" signal frc m the associated equipment is deactivated. J. Loading Station Truck Bay Conveyor Slide Gates (M-14-15-7a through M-14-15-7c, M-14- 15-8a through M-14-15-8e, and M-14-15-9a through M-14-15-9e) shall De controlled from this PLC with a SCADA Open-Close-Auto switch as follows: 1. In SCADA"Auto," the operator shall be able to select Truckbay No. 1 or Truckbay No. 2. The slide gates shall be controlled as follows: a. If Truckbay No. 1 is selected, slide gate M-14-15-8e shall open whenever conveyor M-14-15-8 is running and slide gate M-14-15-7a shall open whenever conveyor M- 14-15-7 is running. There shall be a matrix and automatic alternator for control of slide gates M-14-15-8a through M-14-15-8e associated with conveyor M-14-15-8. The matrix shall allow the operator to select any combination of the remaining gates as well as an "all closed" selection. The PLC shall then open (or close all gates if"all closed" is selected) each gate selected in order for an operator-adjustable time delay (in minutes) before alternating to the next gate. The next gate in the sequence must be open before closing the previous gate. In the event a gate is called to open/close and an open/close indication is not seen at this PLC within an operator-adjustable time delay (0 to 10 seconds), the conveyor shall shut down and a slide gate fail alarm shall be indicated at the SCADA System. This cycle shall repeat as long as M-14-15-8 is running. b. If Truckbay No. 2 is selected, slide gate M-14-15-9e shall open whenever conveyor M-14-15-9 is running and slide gate M-14-15-7b shall open whenever conveyor M- 14-15-7 is running. Slide gates M-14-15-9a through M-14-15-9e shall be controlled the same as noted above. 2. Each slide gate is furnished with a control station with an Open-Close-Auto selector switch furnished by Division 41 and wired to this SCC by Division 26. Provide hardwired relay logic within this SCC such that the slide gates are controlled by the local control station as follows: a. 0-C-A Selector Switch: (1) With the 0-C-A selector switch in the "Open" position, the slide gate shall open. Open position shall be hardwired and not through the PLC. (2) With the 0-C-A selector switch in the "Close" position, the slide gate shall close. Close position shall be hardwired and not through the PLC. (3) With the 0-C-A selector switch in the "Auto" position, the slide gate shall be controlled from the SCADA System as described above. K. The Ventilation System Failure alarm horns and strobes shall be controlled from this SCC as follows: 1. Provide relays in this SCC as required to provide audible and visual indication of a ventilation system failure for Structure 330 Dewatering Room 33001 and Truck Bays 33007 via horn and strobe devices. Ventilation system failure shall be provided through the associated air flow switch signal (FS-1) as described below. A signal shall be provided to the PLC from logic in this SCC when the associated flow switch is inactive. 2. Provide independent, hard-wired Ventilation System Failure horn and strobe control circuits for the areas described above. All horns and strobes within the space shall be energized when the associated air flow switch signal is inactive and shall remain energized until the signal is active. There shall be a momentary "Silence" pushbutton control station adjacent to each Ventilation System Failure horn and strobe location. When the "Silence" pushbutton is pressed, the horns shall be silenced. The strobes shall remain active until the associated air flow switch signal is active. 3. There is a combination green/red entrance strobe light at eachentrance to the monitored space. The green light shall be energized when the associated air flow switch Section 26 09 00-58 4463.004/City Contract No.994 is active. When the associated air flow switch is inactive, the strobe's green light shall be de-energized and the strobe's red light shall be energized. 4. Provide a maintained-type "Test" pushbutton on the front of this SCC to test the associated horns and strobes. When the "Test" pushbutton is pressed, all associated horn, strobe, and entrance strobe light devices shall be energized to simulate an active Ventilation System Failure alarm signal as described above. The associated horns and strobes shall remain active until the "Test" pushbutton is reset. 5. The associated horns and strobes shall be powered from this SCC. Power to the horn and strobes shall be fused. 6. Provide a 24VDC power supply for power to flow switch FS-1. 7. All of the above controls shall be hardwired for fail-safe operation and not through the PLC. L. Activation of the Polymer Storage Tank (T-14-8-1, T-14-8-2, or T-14-8-3) high level alarm lights shall be controlled from this PLC based on the level signal from the associated tank level transmitter (LIT-14-8-1 for T-14-8-1, LIT-14-8-2 for T-14-8-2, and LIT-14-8-3 for T-14-8-3). Once the level in the tank rises above a dedicated operator-adjustable"Full Level" setpoint (0 to 13.5 feet), the exterior alarm light for the tank shall be activated. The light shall be deactivated when acknowledged at the SCADA System or from the associated control station (CS-14-8-1 for T-14-8-1, CS-14-8-2 for T-14-8-2, and CS-14-8-3 for T-14-8-3) at the light. Provide interface relay in this SCC to interface with each light. The high level alarm lights shall be powered from this SCC and shall be fused. 1. There shall be a dedicated operator-adjustable "Reorder" level setpoint. In the event the level falls below the "Reorder" level setpoint, an alarm shall be activated at the SCADA System. The alarm shall automatically clear when the tank level rises one foot above the reorder chemical level setpoint. END OF SECTION Section 26 09 00-59 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 26 09 10 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION DRAWINGS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit drawings in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. 1.03 COORDINATION A. The requirements set forth in this section are intended to apply to the drawings provided as specified in Section 26 24 19—Motor Control and Section 26 09 00—Controls and Instrumentation. - PART 2-PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All drawings shall have the following information: — 1. Project information, including name of CITY and specific project nary e. 2. Drawing title, accurately representing what is on the drawing. 3. Unique drawing identifier, consisting of a unique drawing number cr drawing number with individual sheet number. If sheet numbers are used, total number of sheets must be identified on each sheet. 4. System Supplier company name, address, and phone number. 5. Original design information, including person responsible for design, date of original design, person responsible for checking of design, and date of design check. 6. Revision block indicating revision number, date, description of re\ision, and person responsible for revision. B. All drawings shall have line numbers that can be uniquely referenced from other drawings. C. All drawings showing wiring shall include unique wire numbers assigned to wiring that is installed between devices in the panel. The wire number shall be shown on the drawings. D. All drawings showing relays shall include reference to the drawings where the relay contacts are shown. Spare relay contacts that are not used shall be identified. Section 26 09 10-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.02 DRAWINGS REQUIRED A. Index of Drawings: Index of Drawings shall list drawing number, sheet number (if applicable), and drawing title for each drawing in drawing package. B. Symbol Sheet: Symbol Sheet shall include: 1. Explanation of all symbols used on the drawings, including, but not limited to, normally open/normally closed contacts, flow switches, limit switches, pressure switches, selector switches, pushbuttons, timers, control relays, solenoids, fuses, circuit breakers, terminal blocks, and contactors. Symbol sheet does not need to be specific to project, but must contain explanation of all symbols used on the drawings (i.e., special symbols used for a particular project must be added to standard symbol sheets). 2. List of abbreviations used on the drawings. 3. Explanation of continuation method for circuits that cannot be shown on a single sheet. C. Exterior Enclosure Layout Drawing: Exterior layout drawing shall show location of all externally-mounted equipment. Exterior layout drawing shall include: 1. Enclosure dimensions, enclosure NEMA rating (i.e., NEMA 1, NEMA 4X stainless steel, NEMA 4X nonmetallic, etc.), and enclosure color or finish. 2. Location and actual depiction of panel latches, hinges, mounting holes and lifting eyes. 3. Location and accurate representation of equipment mounted on enclosure (i.e., switches should look like actual switches being installed; indicating lights should look like actual lights being installed). 4. Equipment nameplate location. 5. Description for each piece of equipment or unique identifier and parts list, or bill of materials. 6. Nameplate list including nameplate wording, size, construction (i.e., lamicoid with Black background and White letters), and mounting method (i.e., stainless steel screws). Label size must include size in inches or reference to standard sizes included on symbol sheet, or elsewhere in drawing package. 7. Identification of area reserved for equipment located inside enclosure, but not actually mounted on enclosure back panel, such as UPSs, fiber optic patch panels, and lighting packages. D. Interior Enclosure Layout Drawing: Interior layout drawing shall show location of all internally-mounted equipment. Interior layout drawing shall include: 1. Back panel dimensions and finish. 2. Location and accurate representation of equipment(i.e., terminal blocks should look like actual terminal blocks; receptacle should look like actual receptacle, etc.). 3. Dimensions of internally-mounted equipment are not necessary, but equipment should be drawn to scale such that an accurate representation of the way equipment will be mounted is shown on the drawing. 4. Description for each piece of equipment or unique identifier and parts list, or bill of materials. E. Interconnection Diagram, Network Diagram or Block Diagram: Interconnection Diagram, Network Diagram or Block Diagram shall show all cabling between system components and identify any station addressing or node numbers that are assigned to equipment. All cables shall be identified by cable type, including specific manufacturer and model/part number. Party responsible for furnishing and installing cable shall also be included. Some examples . of cables that must be shown are: Section 26 09 10-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1. Communications cables between system components (fiber anc'or copper). This includes fiber optic jumpers between fiber patch panels and equipn ent, and Ethernet patch cables between switches and devices. 2. Communications cables (fiber and/or copper) between PLCs, controllers, and operator interface equipment that are not shown on the elementary schematics. F. Elementary Schematic: Elementary schematics shall be developed for each motor or supplied equipment and shall include: 1. Nominal voltage, AC or DC designation, number of phases (if AC). and frequency in hertz (if AC) for each source of electrical supply to the enclosure. 2. Prospective short-circuit current available at the point of electric:al supply to the enclosure. 3. Type of power supply system grounding (e.g., wye phase midpoint grounded, delta phases corner grounded, wye phases midpoint grounded, delta phases ungrounded, etc.). 4. Complete documentation of electrical circuit from supply to motor or supplied equipment. Documentation shall include disconnecting means, main overcurrent protection (when supplied), branch overcurrent protection (when supplied), control circuit and special purpose control protection, motor control, overload protection, local disconnect (when supplied) and motor horsepower, and full load amps from nameplate or supplied equipment full load amps. 5. Documentation of PLC or controller inputs and outputs. 6. Documentation of all circuit breaker/motor protector ratings, fuse si,:•es, control power transformer VA ratings, dip switch settings, etc. G. Wiring Diagram: Wiring diagrams shall show all terminations for all cables external to the enclosure. Terminations may be shown on the elementary schematics as long as the termination information is concise and easily understood by the personnel installing the field wiring. Termination information shall be shown for all devices, including devices that are not part of System Supplier's scope of supply. A box with two dots or continuation arrows indicating continuation to a piece of equipment are not acceptable. H. Calculations Summary: Calculations summary shall include calculations performed to: 1. Determine size of UPS. 2. Determine air conditioning equipment requirement. 3. Determine control power transformer sizing. Control power transformer sizing calculations may be generic based on typical circuits. I. Functional Testing Recommendations: Testing recommendations shall include description of functional tests that must be performed by operators. Functional test description shall be included for UPS, indicating lights, and other devices whose condition can only be determined by testing. 3.03 SAMPLE DRAWINGS A. Sample drawings showing an acceptable format are included in the appe idix. The samples included in the appendix do not represent the only acceptable methcd of showing the required information. END OF SECTION Section 26 09 10-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 J J w w > W J J U 0 z Z 0 - -co J 0 N N J CDm 00 < Z Z < 0 < Z Z < 0 U J Y Y C C J Y Y - � OW ZZ � U) D zz ' C U) = o QQ J = HHJ N H OH z Q o W W Qm m 0 QQW Z QQWH < < < < < < < < H H= CCCC W ZH01- UUVUUUoow Z 0 - . o Q OONO 2 } - 2 Z 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H H H H O cc H H H O � � > c o 22222222Cn cncn 00 ON- o0000000 � W <00 < W W u) cnZw 0 UU 0U Z ti ti ti ti ti ti ti 0 Q Q Z 2 0 Q Q Z 2 00 HH zzzzzzzzz � � QH � � QH z � � w ° cc m z 0 0 = = H Z 0 = = H z O O O z z ° UD c f:cf H HHUJO H I- I- W O U U - - H w W w W w w W W = 0 CC CC O 0 D D O = 2 U 2 1- H ° W - � a HHHF- HHHHU 0 00 < 1 cn 00 < i UzU zz azz ,- E wwWwwW WwH < zzU < t� cnU ! - 2ZDD a0 H 22222222 § zzO ~ zz0 ~ 5 = z ° cnu) 0z Wm - � � � � fcto = cc - - H � = c - - F- 5 ow - WQQ zCQ � 0 wwwwwwww > i1-<< 1- HOO � � 0 < H < ZZ �, o0 0 � oOQ I- OOQ o < - aZz OX = ti les 00000000J 0 - JJ O o - JJ O . H F- - - Z own- - d d d d 0 o a u z , IL IL 5 H fD w LL 5, F- m o o Q 00000 000000000 0 < 0002z222 0 < 000J 00 222 000 wwwww wwwwwwwww WHwwwV) W HLLwwv) LWHlLww I 0 0 w d- c1- d HHHHHHHHd CC � cl-ct CC/� d- d- d- d- dd- � v � 2 cc z z 4 W W W w W W w W 4 I1 4 �L 4 4 4 4 4 4 r 4 7747km ttt � t zzzzzzzz � = zzz = zzz tz / ztt U NNNNN WWWWWWWWN cc NNN NNNNNN J J a O O Q> 0 0 O O O 010 O o O 00 O O O O 1O O O O "0 O O O O O O 010 0 m z 0 3 > r- Q O m 0 0 , O z wzZOZ Q 0000�O X�XXXX'X'XXO oOO - o'oo 000000 M t U d U = 0 o O H < W J i , co 0 uz H0 0 o0000 000"000000 0 000 0 000 oor- 000 N U Q 2 z 0 c U oQ wW +' - < > O } O'0 O�0 O oOo - O - - - O r- - - ... - �-t0 -'- - O _ O HHU ~ U) W cyi (J U Q co Q U H a 7 NNN U) W , ti 5, m 0 00 0 � � o0 H_ H 00 N0 Z , w ,J _I J� J J JI a N } w O cc w O 0 ow z 20 u_ a z cc J r W cv w � � QUI" " a ° m a m _I - - zzw w 0 wz < z Q 0 Q ,ILlw < 26 7 z W1 - Y - Qa " = cezww ‹ cl < F- z 0 z 0 0 92 W r o w a H w a w a '- N Q W < W z W Q w � � � Z � > > HO 0cw m w m < w , Z ayaz � a ¢ 0 < gzQ wwZ wwZ N 00 > J H z 11 o > Q > Z JYa ' _ ,-0 w � � �0 - W Wwcn ce > > W < Oco 0Q OW QW = W >� Q J JJH 0J -jJH � O - HH m 10w5'cow- w0 > ooa1N > 350 ' > o > 0 I < z < < 0 owptip. g > 0 > � ° 1- 1- DWaJ = ° W ow = ° U- o _ rY00 0 w OZ ,- , - a > Z U o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J I- N N N N- N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N- N N N a .- .- . . . . . . . ,- ,- f .- ,- ,- ,- .- ,- .- ., . . . . . . . J 0 0 0 w w w O O w = = m J J J 2 0 > c.) OOO w J J J J J Q Q Q Q J J w w w w w O U 2 2 2 z z z 2 cw J �? 2 ) U w w w Q Q Q w m H H H H H C/) Cn U 88 2 2 2 J J 7 W W w w w - - w m w Q Q Q w W w Q 2 m w � � � � � � � cn cncn c>nc>nc>n ¢ Q ¢ c>n H0 > cccccccc � R wwwwwzz = _ _ m w w w w w H Q Q Q > > > Q 0 Q 0 = 00000UUz_ zz � � � c/30 (/) c' u o 11 > H 0 zzzzz0C� zz zQQQz HJU > z J Q g g g Q O O U U U - - - - Q m 0 0 0 w w HHHHHJJO UU >> >wwwZZz > 0z (n > O Q Q Q Q Q W w O O O Q Q Q w w w Q Y Y I- 0 H 22 > > > J J J > Z Z w 0 Q 0 w � � � � � � w LULU 0000QQo < < 0 H > z z z z z &) En i- H I- w w w > > > w H H H z U w = _ _ _ = H H >- > Q Q Q o o W Q w w Z 0 0 w 00000 < QU '1 � ccrfcc1- 1- F- � LULU , U cc cn HHHf- H00H HE- ww w < < < w c° 00 - 0 UUUL Q 0 Qzw > U UUU �m 00 000wwwO7 O H w H H H H H D D LU w w 0 0 0 0 0 0 0mmm > H H H wzouzzzLA � U ¢ QQQQY `1a a a OOOw ( OH OW ¢ - 22 - - - � >Q D 0 0 0 0 0 Q Q Y Y Y 0 0 0 O O O 0 < < 0 O " z Z ° ° D O Z Q > w w w w w m m U U U 2 2 2 H H H 2 Q _ _ > 0 0 > > > 2 0w 2z2222222Q QQ 2220002w 221_ 22LULU2222 Q 2 O ¢ O O O O O O O m m m 0 0 0 2 0 2 0 0 - 0 0 > > 0 0 0 0 0 LUHWLULULLLULULUH HI- LULU w H H H L U) w w 0 w w H H w LU w w I 0 0 0 ± 44444444 44 4 4 V' '� 4- 4 4- 44 1- 1- 1- 1- 1- 1- 1- 1- w ? r r r r r t T/ ? ? Ti '4 ? r t LULULULULULULULUw O 0 zzZzzZZZ ; NNNNNNNN NN NNNNNNN NN WWWWWWWW J J d o QO 0 © 0 00000000 00 00000000 00 000Xo00'O m zoWs < m moo . N o wQz00Z Q o - o0000000 00 op 00000 0 00 '0000XoX0' ° Zt Q J H J H m 2 w = co O o w H Q O_ 0 - 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 0 0 0 - - - o c�) 00 ~0 O X O o 0'0 0' N 0 Q 2 z0 2 0 c o H U LU w O < Lij fY ~ O - L) O O 00 r ,- 0 0 0 ,- �' r- r- �X X o 0 0 X 0 X N O _ O HHU ~ 0 co M U) cc UQ co Q Q s c0n r N r ao c I H N 7 00 i N M O O O c' (n W I 00 p CO 00 Ci o ,- O Q m O = O O O r- I I i 2 o - _ - - - J O O J O 0 ' O ) N Z d J J J J J 2 2 J a N 0 H Q w O J LU W J m N Q ,_ N a zH w w W0 Z m J 0 J wee --ww >� > w O a � oW Q < J z c � w 02 00w w m a U H ww0 0 w O O J J Y o ? w 2o00 � � p Z JO 2 w zww U QQ2 UU = w = H o 0 0 - Q > W O HHZ Z J I- w Q www 2 UJ � QQQ Zcnd QIx m w � Q H woo g w < H.' d H U w LL. J w H w z J J H = _ LLw 00 H Q z w > Q z > 0 Q 000 Q Z > W m 0 , z - Z J >O w Q LU H H O w Z 0 w w 0 0 0 0 0 0 cn O z 0 U - 0 LU < 2JQU ( as 2LLHHHH < JH (5HZH005cn0 = F- � = 0 � ct < Z YY = W oul_ W UJJJJ = H Q = D CtW W 5 mcn C0QwOOzZ � QQcez OJJJ < H OO mzDi- mwoaO � J Q Q Q Q D y O J � o H a d LU2 0 U o < > 2JJUJ H mmo _ ODUUUw N < Jw Z _ cccncr� cn > Q2 U o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o O O O o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o p o 0 0 0 0 0 o O J I- ti ti N N N N N N ti N N N N N- N ti ti ti N N N N N ti N N N ti ti ti N N ti M M M O U O U O w Z w U Z w 0 Z w a WI- mcnwH mow 2 2 D > 0 Qcn >_ 0 Qcn >_ D D QLJL wH < LJi_ wHQ ❑ 0 0 Z NwO p w Z Z p ZZ Z ❑ ❑ - ; ti <J Z ZJ 5 5 5 z Q U m > o co m ❑ Cr ❑ a ❑HHH1w U n 2 Q _ m mm > 2 < <w H a 5 LLc c = wcc I = Ll_ > m Z ❑ 2 z Ow w H O w w H O Q U ❑ 2 Z Z w 2 > m � z zOOCz zO - > > w w w QQ a � = ate = av < a < H H U U = 2 a H H ° Q H H 12 Q 2 H V = 2 2 off 00 O5 ❑ 0 0 > 0 0 0 ° 1 0 W ❑ ❑ o w ❑ pow _ 22 0 0 w J ❑ D D IMD Df: C( L w T r 2w7 0 M M OCi) CI) HHOCi) CnOHO f>-> �..) UUU = ❑ w7 0 0 H = O O re >- U IY >- >- U re > 2 0 0 2 2 H d ❑ Lo H H 000 w , al cW a � ccwa cn UU ctH 1 w w Q65 - - - z HF- HQ QW F„ Q QwH Q22ZZZOQ , M Z Z ❑ W Cl. CL a (� LL LL z �_ Cn Z _� Cn z ' ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ H ❑ W 0 0 0 H /) C!) C/) Q Cn Cn W CZ' CZ' W CL' CL' W O, w Z Z LL LL LL O H Cr 0 Q Q Z w Q Q Q 2 Q Q 2 a = w 2 w = m _1 2 _ > ❑ ❑ > > > 2 w Q 2 2 0 22www 22wwa2F`_J2ma2122ma221-1- 1-L222222w 2222 H O O 2 2 2 O O 2 2 ❑ O - O Q ❑ O - O Q ❑ O O > > O O O O O O 2 0000 � c < QQ ccOa < O = sc Occ5cc O � ccOOcccoaaa rO ( O LL LL o C/) Cn LL 2 o Cn W LL ) LL ❑ W LL ) LL ❑ W LL w H H LL LL LL LL w LL C!) LL LL CY 1 0 __ 0 W HH .r v HHHHHHHHHH -r 2 W W T Tt* *� N N W W W W W W w w w W d *zz WW N N N N zzzzzzzzzz WWWWWWWWWW N U J J Z O < 0 O 0 0 X X X O O O O O O O o 0 0 X o 0 0 0 0 o X O 0 rn - m0O , cn o w ti Q z OO z Q 0 0 X X X O O O O O O O O o 0 o X o X o 0 o X - O C) Q J H J H I m ` 5morOI- Qw0 coo cnz - HO O OOXXX o 00 O O O 0 OOXOOO.00100X ' O O N 0 Q Z Z - 0 C ❑ H 0 LL LLu 0 0 cri- 0 >_ ❑ XXXXX - - XX"oo"o >H �OXXXX "o - Cn 00 oi Q 5 o o w N M , r. H (L rM ) N N �jN r Cl) W NC? M '2 - - O O O T - - , -IC. M T M ❑ w Cn - - - H M M ON Z H O d Q Q LL LL LL J J m H O CL LL O N ,- N ci Z _ LL Z r N a a N M O O m m 00 z z a a Y Y ww _, Z Z z z w W as < Q w w c _ _ Tt W W z Lu Z z Maa0 w LLI w w < _ ce Li- w H ❑ ❑ z m m w ccu_ LLE Z Q Z Q 0 Li pO mHH = cn ce - ❑ Z d a ❑ .i i wwmmm ~ ❑ H ❑ m J O 2 W W = LL W (DO (DO ❑ W J W J N OE WOOw W D m" < � QWWWO OOc1 m 0 m � Q H� � Q � 0O Z U) UZZHLL oo JL < -Iw O a O0 H > n0a � Q o Z w W W m e- LL N M y > 0 > O Cn U ❑ O w C1) ia m i_ LL W O ❑ 000 >' J � J � ZH ❑ ❑ Q cO ❑ 2 >- Z J a o = = = = z � zzQ P Qa = Z � w � � cr) = Q �5 OC7ce > > HO HH2O J 20 OJ H QDH � aU2OO _ N 2z O O -J = OOOmH mmyJ LL 2J LL Q _ Qcncncn > < J = w 12 _ H w z cn cn 0 c9 C7 a a w a 0 0000000 O O O O O 00 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 0 J N- I- ti ti (` I` I` I` N- I- N N N- N 1- N N- N N N N N N N N N N N N N w 2 2 ct 0 0 0 p a, o a 0 0 0 CL 0 2 > 0 O_ O_ a. a a U- ❑ < Z CD 0 0 D D m 0 > Q z z z 0 0 Cl- Q Q C LL -1 _1 _1 Z Z Z J 5 = 5 5 5 ❑ ❑ ❑ 5 W (J) 2 CO m m J J J m D O ~ Q < < CO CO CO Q z cn 0 0 _ co OJ W W z z z Z W 0 T T 0 T T f W W W z z z w O 2 W 0 0 J - > — J T O T T T 0 O CC CC > > > J J J T T C.) O z0CC000HO_ ❑ 0 ❑ > > > ❑W U U O LJL O 0 LL LL LL W < < < ❑ 0 ❑ I— CJ U W W w 22 = HJJHHH = H O_ O_ O_ H H H T T CC 7 U U) LL LL co co co W W W W W < < Q W d ZzrT HCCHHCCCCCCi0 7 O_ a. O_ Cr i CC a. 00 CC = Li LL LL U) U) LL LL u_ H - 0 0 0 w W w 0 T 7 W W W W co— � a z � zzzcc < O CC O_ CL cc > > H H o o O W LL- 0 0 0 0 = 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 < <CC CC ~ -- p ❑ z Z ❑ ❑ ❑ H H H H CC H co HHC/) U) LLOOu.. LLLLO — U) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 U) U) Z (AU) < < 2 > pp > > > 2oo < 2 2 2 H H H 2 QQ_ 0 2 2 w w 22 w w 2 2 2 2 2 L W 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 2 2 w w H 0 0 2 2 0 0 > > 0 0 0 0 0 2 0000002 0022 CCCCQ ¢ Crcc00cccccCCCUQa ccOccOCC00 0 0 QO < < W WC!) U) WLLHHLLLLLL WLL > U) LLCCWCL_ u_ CCH H H W C/) C) 0 0 W dr H H H H H H H H H d- V' 2 cc 44 WWWWWWWWW 4 4 Tt 4 4 4 o T tt zzzzzzzzz t t t z 2 t t U N N W W W W W W W W W N N N N N N N J —1 0 m- (.5U) O_< o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o X 0 0 0 0 0 X o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o rn Z O a Q cm m rn 0 . Z w Z z O Z o 0 0 0 0 0 0 o X o X O o X o 0 0 0 0 0 o O o U a) '-r U a. 0 u ¢ O c OH < WJ CO 0 0 z i- H 0 O o 0 0 0 0 o X o 0 0 0 0 o X o 0 o T T T 0 CO M O N N Q Z p C ❑ H0W w O 0 f cc H 0 E T T N N X X o C o X C X X X T T T o 0 0.. T � - LU N o ) HUUU cri c0 W p m- H Q 5 co T N co W 4 I i H CC r N� M� T N O' O O QW LL N- r r N- 2 O CO LIJ W W O O O O O � O 0 0 � T oN z .- r 2 2 2 0 N } Li N T- (.4 M z z rx W Z Z Z Z ❑ W LL. CCQ Q > Q c) c) dw > ZY M 2 a z z Z La XX HW < Ce ~ C7 Np W z 0 M Q 0 - Z ❑ Q LW y IWi a 200 � J0 zW NN ZU) z z 2 X w � Wz C < § CC cis Z uW) 0_ reQ < W > w c a Z O D _ Ix - 0 0 H re H ce 0 ?� W W I- Op -I I- U WNI- O U (Hi) < U) z 0ZWO0 � OZcn0Z � O � < O ❑ a O 0 0 � a u) w W — H J J D H Z H ❑ ❑ Q i ❑ 0 .. 2 W W H H H H re > J LLZCCm m m < Z CCW WOO_ = = m = W W 00 J J J _I W2 H 5 U) ¢ tncjU) Z ❑ 1¢ Lij Li]— O_ O_ L2U_ U_' NCeZ CL Q Q Q Q ZD 2 O IX CC W < < _ CCUJU) U) > < II < 0 _ O 0 0 0 U LL W O W Li W Z U CO : O o O o 0 0 0 O o 0 0 0 o O o 0 0 0 0 C. 0 o O o. 0 0 0 J I- I` I` ti I— I"- ti I\ N- N- I` N- N- N- N- ti I's I` I` N- N- N- r I` I"- N- a. T T T T T T T T T r T T T r r T T T r T T r T T T r U_ Z 0 w w a. J () H < H w z < r < 2 < w g ° J ° 0_ H J L.L LJL = w Ur w 0 T T C N N - z CO < H I-110 Ow o Ow o U) Z = z z p Z Z p y O H z z c z z f m • w cn < H0_ H Ha < - H 0 H Ci) r U) z < zg 0 w w < w wQ z w z 0 <L LJL CO W Z w CO Z U CC 0O W Z Z 1- 1 5 < ct 5 W U w H < W COU I— HJ w w C 2 r = 0 z 0 0_ 0 0 a < w w O < O H D = O H 0 N LL w D cc = Z co D w m z ch z co U) J H J w —J H _ILLB LJL r .- O Q _<ci cc cc m >• w � o_ O > "' > 0_ Z H O O W H w H < J < > < z <CC CC 5 � Z H H Q CI) I— 202WH 2Q2wI 0 ILL zO > a. o_ 2 Z o H a_ 2 Z 2 Q Q Z 2 2 Z 2 1_ w 2 cc W 2 1_ w 2 2 w w 0 w 0 < 0 22 H cccccc cc cc CCwCC5J CO < < 0 _w LL H LL LL 2 w w < w J LL U) < w CC (/) (/) w w 0 O w § ± `- ± `r ± v cC o C� Z N N N 0J 0 V 0 < o 0 —� o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o rn z 0 rn - Q w rn m o o i z 1.0 o w Z Z O z °z T o T o T o r r T co 0) z Q ¢ f- oH ¢ a 0, 2 J w COw1- Q0 0 `-0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Q o N O Z 0 Z'O w O 2 C U Q � � U *' z < 01 cc a) 't } >_ ccCLI- E O — o T O T O O O co 8 Cl) CV0 < CD LU ❑ —< Q U z 5 U) 0 T N M H CC1 N N N M N N M w w 0 N O N O N M O c� c? Q co z O — O — O T O O O - / C �/�7 T r T r r 0 M n H H 0H H H H N Z X J J J J J J Li Li Li w N ❑ Li w 0 Q , N J a O 0 w z z w z z m Q Q J H H J Q w w = LL LL y co Q OJ Z Z I— H co O Z 0 w J J m J J J J O w 0 0 Z 61-V1w w Jw w Jw w LLZ � � LZL.I > Zw w -, w w , w w � H NM Cn pJrJ J J —' WJ J 0 < OO Q _ a_ J H Z I < z I < Z I Z H Z Z H 0 N 0 000 w < H = a H = a H _ m z m m __ 1- - 0 00 000 0 00 0 00 00 J N N N N N N NI--- N N N N N a_ r r r r T T T T r r r r r 0 w > Q 0 > w ww o 0 0 < ? J z z J Li. 5 0Z0- az oo U › N NNNW 0 < - J < J J 0 O < O O o o Ct 0 J 0- 0 0 � i i r r r s- w U o 0 002 Lugo .02220 > w OHHO a000 = p cc O O O O Q O H0 0 w w H O O O U > Z zO U U z0 Z Z 0 Z p J 0 0 J J J w r r M M m -.J0c i 000 = m U U z Z 0 W U f J J 0 w 2 r p p _ J J 2 >- ~ w W Z0 ZZZc JO0 O22O CL' cc 0 U 0 0 H H 0 0 0 0 H z W w z Hi- 0 w w U z z 0 0 0 H z < 2 H H 2 zz 0 ( Y = > 11 0 0 _1 _1 � Q w = w w w w 00 wpz zU ] J< 00 UUU01w � UU) CnCj 00 , _ ° EQ < CTEE2 § >- 00 >- do Owo UHUUHHHo- cry ww zzc) c W H 0 c7 E 0 U O w r c- 0 0 r - i J Ur § w U U J J J - a f - V W C� �' W N N W U (.: O z w w w W w w = , i W W W W O O z z J Q z w w z z z p Q 00 w w r Y Y i co a zoo 0Ozz000 �' ow a � 2JJ222 00 - 0 OX t w - - www ° H2' U ) > 00 >- U) 22U (/ z UW w 2 > op > > > 20CL < < Jd0J < < HH < < 0 2 2 w w 2 2 2 2 2 2 w w 0 2 2 0 w w 2 2 w w H 000 0 0 > > 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 m 0 0 m 2 2 0 0 2 2 cc cc cc cc 0 O cC oc cc ct a Q Q O t a 0 < < o o < < U WWU w w H H w w W w w w Cn Cn H w w H ) U w w Cn C/) LI E O w HHHHHHHHHH ,r ,r , 2 = w w w w w w w w w w T 0 4- N i t t ZZZZZZZZZZ i t i it o N N N WWWWWWWWWW NNN N N J CO 0 rnd0 QU 0 oo0 ooOX000000 XX 000r o0 o c. cn C) ZO › w Q CA - m o 0 , (9 o � zz0Z Q ,00,0 o,CCCXo > 000 XX 000000 00 o c 0 5 Q J H J H m ` O H < W J C) O O ZZ E 1- p p o"o o goo > O o ono o 0 o X X r o o o r r o 0 o c O N 0 H 0 Q � O � o0 Q U w j Qw >- ,_ �j E r'rr XXoCoXCXXX XX o - roNN '- � N C_. LO 4) o U U Q CO W• In . i d. Q U ti - N 0 - o 66 r r r cc r 4 4 N M o N M i i i H W 4 � - � � O N O O 0- 0 a Q m r D 6 - r N N U U Li "` 2 r O - - (Do - - o O J J i Z w - W d) r r V) O O C o �H0 dam ; Kr � � O co x N 1 r r r O N 2 Li w H m >- N 0 - 0 J J J W - W w J W W Q 0 cc _ ,- cc N c) a w o a a. wcV Z 0 Z Z cem J > - W 0c412 w LLHwOH H Q � � z m aQi- m WUJZCU � Z Z O O 0- c w = r z J p 2 W W 2 a W J � >- 0 U 0 0 w eewV 2 a Op w00 m 00ww ,. 0 c� m < - 0 m a 1- U WmQ vaiaw � c W W O W O C z p � a pz - J = Q WOW = z W Wzwo- z z Za N ce 0 U H 0 Z H p U U N W H H 0 W w re ct o m rx z JYW < OzUU - � 0Ocn aceUO 20 Wwww u, 0 2 w0 W I- DZwwwU- C/ OUI wi- Eww02ow22w > w w w < 0 Y H < Z < wu00 HUO 1_ 1- ?- Qa0w >_ >_ Y I- p zpo JwzDI- mmw2 0 - zw JHz - a. J Jo0mo C) p o oW = aa - www > aJ = wwow - m000 'imoE _ H w UZI- ww 0 a- aat- H H 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o c. J c0 co 0o co co co co co moo coca coca co co co co co co co Co co co co c0 cc cc 0_ r ,- = . . . . . ♦-- . . . . . . . r = r r . . . . . J J J i- • W W W O' 0 Z Z Z r r- r- r- r- ti 0- riI- o_ 0000000_ LU 0 0 � ri � a. riJ 0 0 Q 0 0 0 00 0 0 00 o N H H H J J J J J J CO I I I I 1 r W Z Z Z 0 0 0 0 0 CDco 00 c0 c0 c0 c0 J c/) 0 0 0 W M 0 0 0 J J J J J J Z W W W W W W < z < 0 0 0 Q Q ¢ Q Q Q o_ J w z z z z o_ o_ a o_ o_ o_ 0 2 g 2 2 2 J J J J J J 2 ix W W W 0 0 0 0 0 0 H CC CC = CC Ct Z U ~ } >- } z z z z z z OU W cocncr) 000000 - Q 0 0 0 00 0 00 0 ON.- ti N N w W W z o o w W W 0 0 0 0 0 0 z W LL LL O f t , o N Z Z Z Z Z Z W U U O W W W O O' CC CC CC CC CC CC Z J J w 2 2 2 - r W W W W W W W ' ' I- > > > , Z z Z Z Z Z Y 000-5 < J J J .2 a W W W W W Ill0 Y Y Y Y Y Y — ZO E. 0_ d a. < < 0 0 0 ( 0 0 H < < H w 0 0 0 2 2 H H H H H H 0 2 2 < H cc a a < < 0 0 0 O O O a < < 0 W LL w W U) C1) H H H H H H Li. U) (/) I Q= 0 § � � Q: � � � � � � •cl- cc Q * * o_ 4444 44 o > N N N N N N N N N J CO y (.5 co >> U 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 rn Z 0 > n Q W O - m 0 0 , z r- o wzZz z ' ' a) ZO Q oo � � � 00000000 o c� UCLU � cn 0 0 c H < WJ >O 0 0 U) Z O 0 0 o0000 .— .— ,- 1- 1— roc0 CO CON 0 oH0 - o -- Z < › 0H - w — — OCNN Oo0000r- �- aY o cno_ UUc W 0 Q 1- H Q Ca.) Z ti ,— N cn o 0 0 W N .- N C7 T r 0 O O O 0_ o_ o_ H W N N N U .- .- ,- () U j 2 Z O O O J O O O J J z X � 22 - iid � co 00 O w N 0 w Li 0 2 J Q a. J w < o J O Z 0 W J J CO < z 2 Q w o < < _IN `) aD 0 u- 0 z w a a a0 OOwCCOOZZOrYJ J N Z z z O 2 2 z O Z 2 5 0 0 2 22wZ2z2Oce N aw a I- H H z 2 = 0 w I- I QH HHzcncn = ODU = z z zN zUUO >- >- co ,_ _ r- O O Oy- >- V � � 0 0 W 0c[ 100r- 00aa000N cl " 0 < < 0 0 W W 2 2 Z z z Z (0W JU W WZLWiLLIEEf LI- . a. a. z Z H ZIiU' zz W WQ= cr00000w ec Z W OWZODW W Z 2 2 W Wo_ a a Z Z J 0 J Z 2 w Y J J H H < < < Y Y 1-- 5 O JmOa. JJ000mco o o 0 0 W0c" u) oO = o_ o_ 00 _ _ 1,7 w = a aa1- 1- f- H 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O o 0 0 0 0 0 J CO CO CO 00 CO O CO CO CO 00 CO CO CO CO CO CO 0_ Y Y Z Z - ¢ ¢ H H W W 0 0 < < U Z Z - CC CC 0 0 U 00 0 0 I H OW 5 ' 5 W W Ci) = 00 m CO N 0 0 H Z W W W CDC) 0 0 -- H I = ¢ m ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ mmmmmmmm < < < 00 co co z z H U U I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 w - H U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U 2 > - 2 2 00000000 00000000 H H H r r w w 2 > oo 22222222 22222222 up 0C wm 0 0 O ww ) °) 00000000 00000000 -I J --I22 z z Y o) 0) o) 0) w00) 0) rnrnrnrnrnrnmm ¢ ¢ ¢ DD W w 0 � fxZZ U U U ma. M CO W p - zzzzzzzz zzzzzzzz - 2 Z z 500 occct � � � � � � � � f � � w w w - - H H - H H H wwwwwwww wwwwwwww I I I T = Ow - H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H U 2 U 2 U 2 U 0 0 m z z z wwwwwwww wwwwwwww Z p z p z p "- H z z O p 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 o_ p I p d 0 z z rxZww rccr=cct c � CcC � � � � U � U � UIXcncn - - H H 0 0 wwwwwwww wwwwwwww ¢ J ¢ J ¢ J > < < U) z C ¢ ¢ > > > > > > > > w ¢ LL ¢ LL ¢ z Ox = = 00000000 00000000 0 Uwwd dmdwwa. d � do_ o_ a o_ o_ mm 00000000 o c,, ,� i u 0 E_ 2222 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 22222222 21621521322 2 T 2 ¢ 0000 00000000 00000000 OwOwOwOO 0 0 L.L LUWLUW wwwwwwww WLLLUWWWLLW w W w W w W L w w Z iL Z E O w ct t H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H v v v v T T T T wwwwwwww wwwwwwww T T T T T T �o � > 2 2 2 2 zzzzzzzz zzzzzzzz t 2 i 2 2 i 2 WWWWWWWW WWWWWWWW N N N N N N N J J - do • ¢ O p 0000 oo'000000 UUUUUUUU 0 0 0 Do 0 0 ZO o °' < rn o H m - o QQUOZ Q ,0000 XX.XXX'XXX XXX,XXXX >< 0 0 0 ) 0 0 0 M Z Uo- < `" p ca O H H W 0 Q LUp < O 00 '0000 oo'000000' 0000000o 0 0 0 'Do 0 o N 0 O H >- WL 05 ¢Z W H O H }' • a' U �� 0 T'T T'T O O'o O'O O O o� O O O O O O O O T T T T a O HI- ~ v) cc L., ‹ W p H ¢ . . . 0 , 5. 0 T T C') CO a. N N QO O 5 D T i O Z w0 N = _II N O .') U) U) U) o i CY) LL J _I N W J J as ► LI- w w O z _ N N >- >- z w to Q J Z Z H w O O w z Q J J J W H a J J ce J Q Q Q W W W W W W -J F- H 0 Q � tL U 2 0 0 200 0 Z Z I' W W W = W W W CC CC W C W I- WW > > W W F W > o w 0 0 W 0 0 0 Z 0 0 0 Q Q >- 0 O Q ¢ >- U U 0 r r J ONaaa -- 0 < a ------ U ¢ O J '� w > Z JYQmQ0Z w ., , mOz w oW _I 5 OOow w w O � � ¢ w � Wj.� � ¢ w D >^Qm 2 00 J J � OUV V � wQ LU 00O � c 011i -.�.J = w WWO _ 5 z 2220D > soii2op > secomiw ° < = 22wo 0 O OWoc, m > 0YYLLa. HHg > 0YYWdHH WH < 0DD J = J W Uzrrr r U iLO. m 0 O o 0 0 0 o O o O o O O O o 0 0 0 0 0 0 o O o 0 0 0 0000 0 J CA 0) CS) CA O) C)) CA 0) 0) 0) C)) 0) CA 0) CS) 6) d) d) O) 0) 0) 0) CA 0) CS) CA 6) O) 0) 0) C)) 0_ T T T T . . . . . T T T T T T . , T T T T T T T T T f T T T T Y 0 Z Z 0 Y Y 0 WO J Cn ~ ~ J 0 H H J C/) m 0 U' U' m 0 w w MO W I CC CC H a a w H W LL 0 0 N wCC CCM w Z O U) C) O }- 0 0 O H a. J J Z z UI w z W W zz O Z Z z 0 0 z LY O O z r r a a W a H LL Ll z W I W I 0co W I O O O W 0 > w OH 'LLJ LU OH 0 0 OH of _, a z 0 0 a Z W W < Z Z Z O J ww 5 O HOO W w OHO= z z H0 0 OOT U 00 OOOZzz U U U) m m wo -J J U) 2 UU 2LYLYOmm 2 W >- w >- m m W - Z 2 2 z O O 0 J J W O > 2 I 05 O U o z z p H H � p p z 0 W 0U H H ow H Ocn 0 0 - - p00 � � 0 J r Z Z D c D 0 D f M O I-- H = 2 2 H H H I OZZ � .- U 0H 0 0 '" O 00 00 '1- > - 2 - DD44 Hzz200r` � go mc.) Z Z 00 Z Z 00 5 = z = 00 1 5c � z (-) UNN 52 Y � - <0J H H 0J H H 0J aHHUU cHH ZW < < Zw < < Zw Y L i YLY 00 a� � � aF n Wn 0 0 wn 0 0 wn paazz O O 0 LLJ 0 m J w LL m J L_ LL co _, IUQC/) 22aa OUoQ22aa I > H 221- 222ww 222 !-" 22W W 22 a O a O O o a 0 0 0 ‹ 0 0 ° 0 0 0 2 2 0 0 0 ° 0 0 2 2 00 U LY ° LYOOLY � LYOCro � _ LY � OwYaa LYLYLYoLYaa ccc E. w0 wzLLzw0 U- ZWZ LO LLLLHW LLUUU UUU — UWC/) U LLw E 0 w v v v v H H 0 U t z i t i i z t z z t z t z t c z z z N N N N N N N NNNNNN NNNNNN W W J J 0 d z � � � 0 o I o �o o ' o 0 0 00000000 000 :p0000 0o rn - m rn O , a a) o O O Q 000Z Q o o 0 0 .o 0 0 00000000 000 :p0000 0o O) z CD EL3 O H H W J O UzzHO I Cp o w W 0 a - 0 o O 0 O 0 O 0 00 - 0 0 0 ,- - 0 0 0 -- O O .- r O O N Q 2• yL U > w 0 C •- O ZwHO H U• LU >_ Q — - r - - - - - e- r r r L) L r r T ) LC LCxxW� oH >- LY - a co w 0 1- wCV N c� M W ' .4. ' H m N N N N N c7 •- N C7 a 2 O O O O N N N N N N N D c' 0 0 0 0 00 o z I J I J - - N 0 U) U) 0 , , , , N IJ J J ,J d LL N M Q a _ N z z Y Y z Z r- NM1- a a cc cc a 0000 H I- W W M z w z z z W w X - p ce Ha o o m � < _1 Q _1 w W Z O� > O O a m LY m LY m C0 0w � U � � Q < 0 < 0 < m 0 ? x w 0 s a W w w E co E Ln E J a0. JU ( W D o_ OOW CI) 22 m a < 00 O < < LL w W W g w H 2 2 ce Q m p m p m w w e w p Q rY > Z Q Q w z < Q J J < Q J J < Q d > W Q Q W Ow z > w W w Z J w w Z J w w Z Z 00 > z J w w w 0 o w W H w 0 > > w0 > > W OZ 1 �HOJ yZ N OZ OZ a W LHL LHL 0 I_ 0 QWJ r WJ r JO OJmW � 1. 0L1WW „ zY 2QI` WZZJ „ , d 02 a QI ao HaZaaHaH ZZ � JWyNHazO zo 0 z0 0 W WI OJ LJL WI 0J U- oZccocOcw = wCU' zD � - W Cw9CW90ZO w0 m m z U) ma QQz U 0 00 0 0 00 0 0 000000000000000000000 J O O C) O C) O CA O m CA C)) ) C) O C)) C) O O O CA C) C)) C) O CA C)) C) CA O O N N W Ct O Cn Z W 0 Z Q < < Q w w Q I-- z wU 0 0 'J C.) 0 p H U w H Nw w w U w Q 2 z Q > Z W = 0 = Za,U U U W U U Q W w U = 0 0 w z Z Z U Z 0 H J Z 0 D Z J r- — _ w > U ❑ W w _ 0 ❑ z z z z z U co m it cnmzma a a_ O Oa z H U 2 < O R ¢ C z w ? > > a M D _ w ❑ 0 W > a w0 wQUwo � rywWa a a D Da 5 p � ¢ Q � � a � � w =J000a > < < a � > co 0 Q > w p J H J ❑ Q w Q 0 O 0 < < 0 02 0 U 1 Q > W U m 0 J O Q w w W 0 OW o 0 2 - � Oo w _lw = QQUcjwcr) cn cn w wcn popoccoccDo � UUUw1: 1-. w7 -7 wa, N > ZzzOcnwvzzczozco = Z7wU 000InwcoaD U o0 ❑ acjJU00 ❑ 0 ❑ 0 ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ O ❑ � C� — U U 2 2 2 Q' c- D 0 0 w Z ,2 a (n J J J 0 ce = J = J 2 J w o u z z z w 0 C e m w w a a 5 a - a 5 0 ❑ 0 a ❑ o — _ OQ zoH1- mQQHO = 1-cnmcnmcnm = m = cnm . ❑ cn zz000H0wa0 0Jwz �- WUUz0z0 O O a a0 0JU z - - www0Ha ( ( Q50 W J Opcn W= w = w = Wcnwcn = wcn ❑ C� _ 0 > > > 2 o < Q 2 m Q 2 = w w U - Q 2 a Q a Q a 0 0 0 p a Q m z 1 ww222222ww 2 ❑ wa2w = = 2wwa22cc22 = 2 = 22w2E Q > > 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 O w 2 m 0 0 U U 0 E— 2 5 0 0 0 O O O a 0 a 0 0 2 0 =' U 00cCcCE:Coc. o < Q Ww < O cCHOw = X <CaccH = HcCI— 01— OccHQw = 1 HH W W W wwwcncn wwcnw wenE— Owwcnwwcnwcnwcnl— u) l— wv) v) wm L 0 W HHHHHHHH ± N Tr Tt Tr v • - C ± f WWWWWWWW Tr Tt d 4 4 d d 4 Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z 0 0 WWWWWWWW N N N N N N :N N J -J U O < 8 0 o X 0 0 0 0 0 o X X o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D .- o .- 0 rn Z C) - m ,r0 � O w H rn 0 o QQ H-IzU O - Q o o X o X O o o X X O o — o o — 0 0 O D O N- .- 0 0) Z H H W J 0 O o cnzzH0 ._ Qw 0 < \ 0❑ X O o 0 0 0 0 o X X o O O - o - 0 0 0 00 - 0 N T ❑ w w = Z < HOI- ❑ ~ CCU > Ei O OOrXr0XXX X X �.- O O D 00 ) - 0 o Cn = U Q C/) Cei CID W ❑ Tr QQ 1 r r r Tr Wco W N — r c j m Cfl CO N c O O-) r 7 N r ` 2 N N ` D O O N N O O O O Z r 0 0 O O 476 O H d d d w w J U 0 m J N r r r r w Z_ N 0 NM O O 0 00 NZ zu_ Z z = 2 2 d H Z s _Z w m = Y w Y a a ❑ Cnaa Z w Z J JJ fxliiLu❑ ❑ cc l_ a am J z 0 w w W w 0 O W 2 2 w p z >p w QZ W Q Q W OP w2 ct i— ❑ ccwww M wLIJ cc < m azv . > , 0 < 1-z em ❑ w -12WWO p _1 _1 n wW W N ❑ a zv cn �0 ❑ ❑ Cnp > 0WWz0Z ) > > ~ 0 1. 0 Z WoQOo0Ewj JIn LU oI-,w Ho waJ J J Q = 2 ~ maQ 2QwwcoOm = = = Q jVW = = UawZf / ww U ❑ Nc ww0 0 CnCn (n > Q0 = ❑ ORI- t', w J = = w0Z r < CID C" 0w a WZ ❑ ❑ v 0aMI U o 0 0 0 0 O o 0 0 0 O O coo 0 0 0 0 o O o 0 o O O O J 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O O 0 0 O) O) O O) O m CA O O 0 0 CA O J Q w U N U Lu 6coW I a Z z z o u LL. LU LU Z Q Z - O < H < O N W 0 W H w U Q tY Q Z w J H - C� - O - < Li CU!) Z w 0in cn w Un H 2 re o Q 0 Q op Q w o I- I- - - 0 I- I- -IJ cn J J H w O O w w o W cf) w 2 O Z Ur U) o f Z J o f 2 ,_ O Z Z w p Hi W p w D rn J W m W J W U a. N Q 5 W = = W D ID Zw Z L m H H O Z O H O p cn w LL < 1 0 Li] go mo UQ - ZWU w W � Q z z z o U 0 H w 0 < ¢ CC ¢ IY w < L ALL_ U) w LLLL LLLL LULL LLWcn O W § ± ± ± cc Q 0- a. 0_ a_ o U c\/ Z ± ± ± ± J J 0 cn (n m Cn a. Cj O0 < o 0 �o N N o 0 0 0 co0 ? m � oa' ¢ w , rn rn — z cn _ 6, C� o 1 Z Qgo °OJZ Q o d- a ,- - - N- LO CD 0 Ua. � t (j) o O W J • � �- W O C cnZZI- O 0 c4W Q O - 0 0 o O o 0 0 0 0 0 CO U U 5 2 0 2 o 1 } u_ w w U Z W - O H Ce 0 0 U ~ E (0 LLI o 0 0 0 0 0 CD 0 cn � UQ § U) (cri .0 w H Q ' J Z w N c7 N co No w N u) a) j m Z O O O O O Z LNI O >7 J J J LL LL N W ?- 0 LL w U O ,- N M 0 Z Z Z M w Y Y CD m H < H Z_ a W W W J m a JO O O � O CW7 a Z c~n c i ccnn OI-L 0 LU a w 0w w W L LJ � LL < 0 H N 00 00 CD 0 W p• w M Z H V Z_ J J cn J O Z d z J = cn 30 0 o cc ¢ cc in LIJ vQ H _1ow ow oW UQ U 5 WW OH OWW Ww WW wZ w O _I _I -I0 - 0 I- wU C W : = CO CO m m m : H U o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) O) 0) w N W J J Z Q z < U) Cl)Y U z -f U z , _.. C.) (!) Q W C/) - J (!) (/) W C/) W (/) cn H c < Z H < Z H = ZQ �p o CCWLL CCww cn H < < < < < < < < m m m m m m m m w 0 0 N O w } 1 U U UUUUUUUU U O O U 0 U U o Z cn w oz o w ZZ 0 22 CO U U U U U U U U U U U U U U o Y f D Y r 2 g N N 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 W M CO LC) Ln Lc) Ls) in Ls-) Ln Ln Ln Li-) in Ln Ln in in in N 1- 0 U ZQ w Q LL NNNNNNNN N N N N N N N N W Z J W J W U C z Z CO M C") M M M M C") M M M M M CO C) C") D C/) H = Cl) H = W 0 ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ z HZ z CCCC o H o z I- H H W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W = = W w z Z H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H 0 U H ° O = ° O = J z o o W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W H I- CC H U H O 0 O R s 22222222 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ¢ N §. 0 H (n H Z W W 2' CC CC CC CC CC Et CC CC CC CY CY Cr CC Cr) (!7 () N W (n W zWww wwwwwwww f a Qo HoCi) Qa � � � � � � � � � � 8 Oc o = � oDc o = = 00000000 00000000J i > C/) JJO JJO Z U W d d d d d d d d CL d d 0_ CL d d CL d 0_ LL_ 0 CC < W C/) H W CO H 0 w 2 2 w 2 2 w 7 0000 00000000 000000000 0 0 2 0 0 J 0 0 J U cc tY cc cc cC cC cc cC c LL cC cC cc cC cC cc cC c LL cc cC cC r < cc F w cc cc L L W mod' t HHHHHHHH HHHHHHHH � ' A' � � O �_ w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w wTtTt i ? ? t z z z Z z Z z z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z z ? ? ? t ? t t Q - - N N N N W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W N NN NN NN _ U J J 0 CI- 0 rn Z O N ¢ o 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 o O O O O O o 0 0 0 0 0 o c> o D O O O N CA L_ Z H Z Z Z Q C) O < ¢ H H QOQQ XX XXXXXX X X X X X X X X o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O H Q J o 0 U (AZH _ CV 00 Q 2 z0 2 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 coo o 0 0 o © o c U < UJ > } 0 U O H H U � - - - .- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O o 0 0 0 0 0 0 - N ,- .- r 000 OM C/) CC W a Q U cc W m 4 Lc, H 7 N i Q N N CN z N N N ch r N J J cn o LL d JLI) J N 0 N W t- N 0 O o W Z Z Z IX IX Z w w < X > r- N W W w aw W Z W Z W JJJJW ^w I- � WQ < z CO z CO Qu_ U. U. 200 2 UJ 00 zw0 ce pI- C/)E < (n `L = cecereQQ ccQQ aHH 1- W W W W E CC W C "" f r Cn C/) C/) W W W W 2 III I- 0H w > 0H � ,1' W WQ m < m Z §- 000QQ > U o > Q � U mN0 0Ce Q Ce a o aaa ---- 0 < 0. ,_„...-- 0 < Zo p0 -Iz O -' z I- EL0a00awH ZLL omW H ZLL ag . p > I- > W 1- > W J Y r ,- r Z W f � r 0 Z W o 1- J J col- O W CJ) col- W C/)W O � QW � w > _ Q W � w > �OaCn ClJWJH WJH d i000JCC < w500C� JDQ W500Q. pI- Hp 0 p 0 0' 0 W � � ►4 > U Y Y LL w H H N > U Y � � � � = W O ' O J -i W J J U W OZMMM eh d > Z Cr) Cl) CO 0 Ln LC) LC) Ln Ln Ln LC) Ln Ln LC) LC) Ln Ln Ln Ln Ln Ln Ln LO LO LO LO LO LO LC) •n Ln Ln Ln Ln J N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NNN CNNN N "N N NNN d M M C") M M M M M C") C") M M C") C") C") M MM) M COMM COMM CO "7 C") M M M Q 0 1- W w > 2 Q Q ❑ 5 V) > U w Q U n 0 0 > a J> U =w Z Q 2 >> E 2 U Lo O Q Q w U2 > H = I- a U z co U U O 22 Q - I z cc c- cn WI - ._. ~ UUU z w= _ TT 0 Qcc VUC U U C G C H TT ( Q Z 2 2 Z Z Z 0 Q 0 , 7 I- U Q � O ❑ zz ❑ ❑ ❑ o ❑ waa Q c�ncO- _ z = > ❑ ❑ >> > . c < < Z- ccUn < O 2 W W 2 2 2 2 2 2 w wIx 2 > w I O O > > 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 w O "" 2 Q ccOOccccccc IYQQ I- ccOQ 0 W W 1- 1 W W W W W W Cr) U) w U- 1 CO I i Ire ❑0 w HHHHHHHHHH � � W W W W W W W W W W J T `- 2 - z z z z z z z z z z Q Q - > W W W W W W W III W W Z N N • U _0 0 rn Z O O � c ¢ 000X000000XX o w o00 o CO cm m p� Z N- O W ~ oU 1 1 0 pp Z Ei z z z Q Q p 5' Q ¢ H 0 0 0 o X o X o 0 o X X o 0 0 0 0 0 p VaUcn w O OQ J _ O wr0 0❑ ' 0 CV Q 2 ZO w o o X o 0 0 0 0 0 o X X o w o T T N O Q WU :«� 4 } H 0 cc cl) © ix r:H 1 O 0 X X o O o X o X X X X X § T O T N (n co co 0 i , , , , -J Q U z r W cn tY w N C� T T T c 7 `i N - G 07 N Q i N N , Z N N Z N .- N N I-- N N O W '^ ^T ^T U) /T -^, �.,, , , , 1- LL L.L Q R 1 1 o w N 0 >- w U- U N -I M W ' N O Z w Z Z Z Z a ja °ow w 2 a X = oa QE 0 W w 0 0 w w w Q Q CL u_ z Cl- wZa a � 0 J O 2 W w - O Z O O W z OE w ( owZ C90 U 2 QQ E- ❑ 1- 2 v) w w Z W d H U W J = Q w ('9 (7 0_ (� �' O _ZO 00❑ I- > Cn w < Ozc? ° Z rY � . p ' c) > JzU) in w w1— Z1— ❑ ❑ WcnO ❑ rem Q 0Nz ~ N Q o = rww cn = w = � _ =U' QZcc~ncancan > Q2 -J = Ww O u- pDu) 0 O w w o t = Z U) H U LO LU Ln LO LO LO LC) L0 LC) LO LO LO LU LO Li") LO LC) J NNNNNNNNNNNN N N N N N d COCO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO co co co co r- 0 O J J J J J J J J J J J J J J ) CM W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W Z J Z Z J J Z ZZZZ ZZZZZZZ 0 0 ELZ - 0_ ZZ0_ 000CL CLIZa. Il0_ CI- CL (/) 0 J Q J J Q Q J J J J J J J J J J J (n0 C 00- 00 W M0 0000 0000000 Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Z Z Z Z c Z ZZZZ ZZZZZZZ Z Z - C.) = OHOOHHO 0000 0000000 W - _ U U UUUU U U U w O Z O O Z Z O U U U U U UUUU 0 0 >- H = 2 U U U 00000 H — 0 — —— 0 0 — l- N- r 2 H 22222222Q UUU 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O _ 0 0 _ _ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 „, — _ co(n _ M �rj M M M M M M M W Z , Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z C) r Z M M M M M M M M W Z _ _ 0 W O W w O O W W W W W W W W W W W W Uc ZZZZZZZZZ 0z00zzO 0000 0000000 D W D D W W D D D D D D D D D D D D H� wwwwwwww = WOWWCDCDW WWWW WWWWWWW 0 pH H H H H H H H U E _ IE E _ _ E CC CC EC CC Ce 1Y IY CC CC CC CC w CC Y Q W W W W W W W W H H u- H H W W H H H H H I- H H H F- H I- O U = 2 22222222 W H W W H H W zzzz zzzzzzz CC } O W w w w w w w w w U z 00 z Z U 0 0 0 0 U U U U U U U H W H H W w H H H H H H H H H H H H Z ¢ F-- Q 0 (nC (n (n0U (n (n (n (ncn (ncn (ncn (n (nCr) O w W = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J Q H Q Q H H Q < < < < < < < < < < < cn 0rz0_ CL CL CL 0_ CL CL O O w w (0W W (n (nW W W W W wwwwwww z ¢ 2 2 ¢ ¢ 2 2 2 2 2 2222222 0 0000 000000000 O w O O w w O 0000 0000000 �- cc = cccc ccIrc:ccc = ccc _ = cc0rcc00c cccccc rt:c cc � 0 u.. W Li... W Li_ W W W W W W W W W H W W H H W W W W W W W W W W W W E p w ,r 1- H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H 0 r t t 2 z, W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W _J.J W W W W W W 2 j Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z i ZZZZZZZ ZZZZ ZZZZZZZ NNNN WWWWWWWWN W W W W W W W W W W W ii W w W W w W Cl) 0 U Hi 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000 :D"000000 0) 0 0 ¢ rn ZOc) 5, m O m rn O _ ' z W Z 0 O Z Q o 0 0 o X X X X X X X X o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 00 X o 0 0 O r, C) 0 H Q W J 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o X 00 X X o O J 0 0 0000 U 0ZrHO p N >, O W H ¢ = C — ¢ 2 z0 2 O CQUW o Z O p — ,- - - O O o o O O O o XOXXOOX XXXO yCXXOXXX zw } H 1- H U W U Q 1- 5 0 w w H m _ cn 5 Cch Z U- co) .. N 0 N cn } W Q m H Y CI 2 Z J H m 2 _ - 02 cn wtY000 J Z w H m U Z � Z_ W cc r W Wi < UZgw z z ¢ C� � Z Jw oF- � mQZZ H� 0 OWZW QE W W g0C� ` ›.o= = ° 00 ° w EU 2C¢j2C u_ E Q W z w = z w — W w — W c z _ W W ¢ z w = O HO > Ho w w � � � � w � O � � j (n � OUw (=n � ? wz � wZwwCC ¢ N — 0 0 > Q } H Q w Q W W W W W H > 0 ❑ H > O H H Q Z OM � aaQ� UQ Caw - QUCD0000W0JOWC) 0J0wcn (/) Z a YaaOZ W Wa ATzzcnzl�il 1-LI-L- wwZQ � � - ZQ � � (�j) � w w z w 0 0 z w 0 w z 2 ceC 0001- = � =U' w > �~ > c.) HHHHH = 0000o0coom � 5 z a g 2 2 0 > > $ O = = o N O 0 w w w w w Q = > 2 > > > 2 > J J W O O M w M M > U Y Y W m H E- w M Q U U U U U U U E I W 0 M Z M M ❑ M W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0 000 0 D O 00 O 00 J CO CO CO CO CO M CO CO M CO CO CO CO C1) CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO M M CO ..7 M CO CO CO CO CO 0- M M M M M M M M M C'M M c) M CM C'7 M CM C') C) M CM M M C') M M C') M "7 M M M M M M J J _J _J J _J J J _J _J J J J __J I LU W W W W W W W W W W W W LU Z zzzzzz J J Z ,__J J J Z Z Z Z Z J Z J J J < a Q- M W W ° W W W 0- 0- 0- 0- Q- Z < W W W J _J J J J J J < < J < < < J J J J J < J < < < O 000000 0- O00- 0- 0- 0000 0a. 0 3- 0_ 0- CC CC 1Y CC CC CC J J CC J J J CC CC IY CC J CC J J J 0 H HHHHHH 00H0 OOHHHH HOH 000 H Z zzzzzz 3 3 Z 3 Et a Z Z Z Z Z o Z c' cC cC z 0 000000 HHOH HI- 0000 OHO 1-- F- H W U UUUUUU Z z U z ZZUUUU U Z U zzz 2 00 ,- 0 00 ,- TT = TO - 000 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 U U o U 0 0 0 0 0 0 O U O U U U O z zzzzzz zO zzzz zz w w wwww w O O w O O W w W W W O W 000 0 000000 z z 0 z z z O O D U ( Z ( zzz > DDDDDD w W D W w W » » > w D w w w LL w w w LL w w 0 0 U- 0 CJ CJ W W U- w W 0 u- 0 CD CD H H H H H W LL H W LL LL H H H H H LL H LL LL LL I I 1 I 1 Z ZZZZZZ FE E Z E E E Z Z Z Z z E Z E EE ELc) W W W W W W W H H W H H H W W W W W H W H H H -U UUUUUU zZUZ ZZUUUU OZO Z Z - - - - H H H H H H H W W H W W W H I-- H H H W H W W W (nCnCnU) CnU) UU (!) U OOv) cnU) cn cnUv) 0002 2 222 Z < W W W W W W H H W H H H W W W W W H w H H H Cf) Co U) u) op co Cn Cn Cn Q < Q Q Q < < 2 < < < 2 2 2 2 2 < 2 < < < w W will W 0 0 000000 w W 0 w w w 0 0 0 0 0 W 0 W W W 2 2 222 H CC cCCCoCcCCCcC 00CC0 00CCr rY cCO OOO < < < < < U W LLU- UW U_ W HHLLH HHLLL WLL LLH W HHHCn C/) (rCI) Cr) I O w H H H H H H H H H H H H HH H H H H H H H H H oc_ w W WWWW W w w w w w wwww w w w w w w w 2 z zzzzzz zzzz zzzzzz zzz z z z w wwwwww wwww wwwwww www www p U � _1 X 0 'o 'o"o o'0 0 0 0'0 o' o'o o'0 0 0 o X o '0 0 0 :D o o'0 0 4. rn U Cn Q O z Li rn 5 0., o WH Q 0 0000�00 0000 000000 �O'oo' 0010 ) 0 000 a) Z QQ � O � 0) ca o Hi a U J o OHQwJ 0 0 0000000 XX00 �XX0'000 oo'0 XXX >< X X'>GX CID U CnZHO 0 CV >, H Q - 2 g 0 U z w } 0 c j p X X X X,>< >< X o o X o 'o'o X XXX >< o X 000 ") 0 000 0 0 O ~ CO v) U Q - LU p H cc 7 ,- r � Lc) (.0 ti c0 0) W H LU7 Ln Ln Ln Ln Ln Ln c.nCO N IL Z LL O , N 0 N >: I pW c Li 0 2 ~ C� C�I I 2 p > pw ❑ z z Z °O c) _ = a a w O J v) J a O cc p 0 V � Oco Oz ZCn I I ❑ m w c z ❑ 0 0 0 w a 3- 0 v O O w w ,, IX Z = _ ❑ O W w p H _ z > O W w Z H W W m J z W W ww O LLILU Z LU W d J Z Li_ J W O Z O Z > N _ Q 0 Cn (n LLW Uw > jz OW rZ CC 2 2 mci0z LU w � CCCDC� 1 > � CO � QO � JO > j •� j `7 � 0 YaQ � = = C70 W � pO dJ > Ocr) Qp LL Opw � O � Umm = < Q UUZZ = J ❑ 0W a 0LL = UO > LLlL — ZWD OZO wY LL. Z Q -1OOJJ ❑ 0 co HLLI H) 0 J JwOHCe00 zwz i- VO H H 0 0 w z W Z O ,—I J -I w 0 z O z z R O Z > I- Lij W Zd � � � � W W UZJ � Uz _J W JQ � � C� � U WZZ � F- LLlF- O � � W [L W � } Cn [� � m J � Q ¢ � J � QHZ � pW � � ZtjZ � � Q < Z �et � � NNH 5 LL H 2 2 > > J .J W Cr U- CO CC) W CC w Cr) O O } 3- CC J W < O CC U- LU 0 w 0 0 w < V) 0 Cl) Cl) Om = O ¢ cnUwo nO ❑ zCO wW w — U o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .D 0 0 0 0 0 J CO C') C) C7 C) C) C') C) C) C) C') C) C) C) C) (.) C') Cr) C') C) C) C) C7 M cO cO '7 C7 C) C7 M cO 0_ CO CO CO C'') CO C) C`") CO CO CO CO CO CO C) CO CO C) CO C) CO M C) CO C) CO CO ") CO C) CO C'') C) J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J W W W w W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W Z J Z Z J J Z zzzz zzzzzzzz zzzzzz J J Z J J J Z W W W 0_ 0_ 0_ 0_ 0_ 0_ 0_ 0_ 0_ 0_ 0_ 0_ 0_ 0_ 0_ 0_ 0_ W 0_ 0_ 0_ 0_ w W ° W W W Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z J Q J J Q Q J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J < Q J Q < Q J 00- 000_ 0_ 0 0000 00000000 000000 0_ 0_ 00_ C1. 0- 0 CC J l = J J = = 1 = = Ct = CC CC IY CC CC CC CC fY FY CC CC J J IY J J J CC H0HHp0H f- II- I- HI- II- III- H HHHH - H 001- 0 00H C) zr zz = = Z ZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ c = Zrx c0Z H O H O O H H O 0000 00000000 000000 H H O H H H O w U z O U z z U 0000 00000000 000000 z z U z z z U 2 N O N N O O N NNNN NNNNNNNN NNNNNN O O N O O O N 00 0 00 2 O N O O N. N O O O O O O O O O O O O O 0 0 0 0 0 0 N N O N N N O 0 z . z z , z zzzz zzzzzzzz zzzzzz z . Z U wOWwOOw wwww wwwwwwww wwwwww OOwO OOW OZOOZZO 0000 00000000 000000 ZZOZ Z Z O = w » w w = » » » » » » » » D D w w D w w w D w0LL Li_ ppw Li_ w Li_ w wwwwwwww ww Li_ www 00LL J 00LL E n 0_ 0' » 0_ 0' 0' 0' 0_ c 0' cc cc 0' 0' f 0' 0_ = 0_ 0' 0_ 0' » E n D D 0' H w H H w w H HHHH HHHHHHHH HHHHHH w w H w w w H zzzz zzzz zzzzzzzz zzzzzz E E z E E E z wHWwHHw wwww wwwwwwww wwwwww HHwH HHW O z o o z z O UUUU 00000000 000000 z z U z z z O I- WI- I- W WI- I-- - HI- I- HHHI- I- HH I- I- I- I- I- I-- WW1- W W WH U U CO C) U U CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO U CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO U 0 CO U U U CO W H w W H H W w w w w w wwwwww w w wwww w H H W H H H W W 0W CC/ ( ( ( � w W W 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 w w 2 W w w 2 2 2 2 0 0 -' 00 -' -' 0 0000 00000000 000000 -.' .--- 0 .-" -' 0 H O' 00. 0. 00 = o- cco: o' cc = = = = == cc = = = = = = 00 = 0 00 = Q w H w w H H w w w w w w wwwwwLi_ w w Li_ wwLi_ w H H U- H H H w U 7_ p w H H H H H H H 1- 1- 1- H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H ,- H H H HI- H O 0' W w w w W W w w w w w w W W w W w w w w w w w w w w w w W W W z z z z z z z zzzz zzzzzzzz zzzzzz zzzz z z z wwwwwww wwww wwwwwwww wwwwww Jwww www 0 O ' 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0'0'0 'o o'oIX o n o a) rn UU ,rQM < o , z O m co O — COrnp , , . , O z wFOOz Q 0000000 000 )l 000 ) oo'oo 000000 J000 000 Mt Z L Q Q - 0_ 0 E 0 D_ U o H < UJ 0 o > O o > X o 0 0 0 0 o C O O o o o o o'o 000 o r< X o'o X X o 00 OZ = Ho p CV >, Q . O 2 00 4 z > o p XoXXoo > XXXo� XXXC�XXtXX �X�XXXXX ) OXo 'oo'X' 0 o HHU1— o co _ C/) U Q I i I , I d. Lu 5 CO w 0' I- CD - U CD Q 2 5 = z co • I i N co N 0_ _ w W U— H =o ii i a g Z 00 0 0_ 2 _ _ = a 0_ 2 Q � 2 H 00 � � W a Hm < 0z ZZ = _ u_ wccQUz ¢ z zQOc7E win w w w Z Q Q U W 0_ H = � 0O0U2 0_ o a < ozc0m cc') c=r) = 2 > W YCe Q 2CCH W 20 2UJD012 (/) C/) Ww W W W z 2 W D Z ry W - W W - w c Z Z W W = = I- J H Um W = 00 = D H > HO ww 12[ C[ 00 = Q Q >_ cn H U w cn 0' ? w Z w Z 22 = 0_ 0_ _ = C� p J o_ < = Q w w w w w H > 0 H > L H H < < U U z z = j ci p W a 0 H Qp = » = = > p = O LU W UU = OW � � � � » � � J =' � `� CnwoO U z Hzwwwww zQo_ o_ wzQo_ 0_ v) v) � � HHOOwz wz W 0_ 0_ 0_ 0' ,ozw00 <zwOcnwwzz0_ goEQQW W tz f intz ct 22ZZZZZ = WOWoWOu- = = w >- } mmDm -I < I- � W � J ¢ 5 OOW WwwW QCC > 2 > >_ CC > 2 > JJwwH = = » JJuj U_ COCnWO_ w (n O 0000000E I co v) W U O O O o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000000 0 :J 0 000000 J c') M co C) cY) C'') M c0 cY) M c'0) c," M M M CO c0 c0) (0) CO cr) c0) c,) ("I c") cr) cr) c,) 7, CO C) M (C) c) M C) 0_ ('7 M M M M M co M M M cC) M M M M M M M cM M M c') c'') M (C) M M cr) c') M cr) M co M M M U U J J J J J 2 W W W W W F- Z Z Z Z J Z J J J Z a a < < w a w W W 2 Z Z Z Z 000 O o- 0 MMM I— Q CC CC CC IY J = J J J p Z Cn Z ZZ Z = Z cr = 0 UU — H 000 OHO F- F- f— H UUUU Z 0 0 0 U Z U Z Z Z < J U 2 W N N N N O N 0 0 0 2 -I2 z 1— 2 Odd ON0 NNN H n- � >- p 0 zzz z z 0 www w O w odd 000 OzO zzz WOO UQ0 = a_ U � � C� � 000 0U0 022E- O EEE � 22UU2 � rzcn Hi— apa 222 U W Zr r H H H H W H W W W N N U U Z ZZ zEz EEEL) in LnLnLc) Jzz22z � = ctWLn Ln www wHw HHH � waa: zZCCU) H '7 7 O U0 UZU ZZZ4 4 444 0H � � a_ crUO � W OW WOW 000 � � � � ¢ < wW = OOOwI= � www www HHHU U cnow 0 � � � � Qv) O > Ocn cn v) Cr) w www < Q QQQ iwo < < ow . 0 < < < z 0 00 00 � � � 2 2 222 000c" 000002 2 2 7 a' a- � cCoa' 000 < < < < < a' a- a- 00a- a' aza: < < < Q W W W WHW H1-- 1-- cn co cncncn wu. wHi-- wwwwwcn up cn U LI p w HI- 1- HI- H HHH 4- 4- 444- 4- 4v -44- r r r r r r r r r O 5 zzz zzz ZZZ ** W W W W W W W W W NNNNNNNNNN Cn •- p f 1- J J 0 O O O o X o O O O O O o 0 0 O O O O O O O O _) 00 O O CM n_ cn U u) Q M ¢ ti z O m c') c— O m rn O . Z 0 Q o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0'0 0 0 0 0 0' o o'o 0 O'0'0'0 .0 0'0 o '0 M y w z Z 0-z E gQ ~ O0 0 a_ C.)UGHQwJ O 000 000 XXXX �X X >< >< �oo0rr000�-.DON N N N U N >, QW ~ - 0 Z 00 ZQU0H0 N o p X xX x0X o0�00 0 coo rr"r0'C� r�rr <- rco goo co 0 co H H U ~ U NI- Q 0 N N N N LC) CD r. 0 o r U w 7 LC) Ln LC) LC) LC) LC) U') Ln L(7 r Ln Lc) Li) On r r r r r r r r r i r r r Q 24444 4 4 4 4 V r V 4 ILr r r r r r r r r r O i r r Z W U ; N O N ❑ >' 0 w 0 W 0 >- is- -I ❑ W U 0 > 0 co Z z Zcoo, co o O -1 U = Q 0 ix p ci � p 0 co Z U_ > 0J 0 2 0 OZZJ -J L11U0 a_ ❑ � 00 O wW 0 f- c 0 Z > OOu)i O (/) w z i- w w m 2 -j 0 W W 0 m m 0 J W W 2 O Ci Z O Z > m p H N eh m a_ (� O p C� Z w ch > CD Z O c W Q u 2 2 Q 0 O p w Q p n z z O 2 > J w 0 a_ 0 0 o0 ZcC W N Z J > OwQW � OOw - O• a C� oomC9 - = w � fa' QwV jNW c U) � LL < W 200 > ° wCLZWa' ZZZ � v1L. 0 Owa_ a_ > � wwpw0a0W0 aU) 0 > w0ZW00 a _ � oo2z WcooOU » woz _ zaz 1- O m U W m W W WpoO_ WI-`-" U >- zZpwwOw 0O6" WZa 00c"nLIJ OCLZOW0Ja aWD0` a w 1- w � i— WO0OOZZ -- �- UJ U) w00pp00w00 > Ja' z � ❑ � � > ZZ < > a W2Hi- C WD '''- i � 0000C� w = wmw 5 00 > mc iww0 � ct � WOWOO a1- za » a ¢ ¢ oow nzetznz O U m20000 0 ot� ozo wQO ? ccncncnW2NwO00w0 W wo Co z o U U o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J CO M c'') M M M M 01010101 CO M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M CO CO a_ CO M M 01010101 M M M M CO M M M M M C') M M M C) M M M M M CO CO < < < 0 w w w m < < Q Q Q 0 H 1— 0 0 0 I- 0 0 c 0 c < Q LL w w � J m a 1— o o (I) co U Cl) gJ J ti Q ctcn 0 0 0 0 r z z z 0 00 0 cc cc } z z > Cl) z0 0 O O O a > > > w O w w z z z I- 2 z z z 0 0 0 w 0 0 0 0 >- >- Q 2 a m m m 5 Q Q Y Y Y < Y co C M C co w r r r r r H (, (..� fY CC EY t` N- r t` t j N t j N N- u') Li) Un Un U5 m > �n LA 0 Li) Ur) Lc) to I,n A r r r r r J CC CC Z Z Z r r Z r r r r r r 4 4 4 4 4 — H O O 0 4 4 w 4 4 4 4 4 4 r r r r r i_ Z z C G G r r > r r r r r r th th th th th z O tz O 0C 2 CC 2 cC 2cC 2 2 H 2 2 2 2 2 2 U U) U) CnCn 02020000000U 0 Q0 0 0 Cn U 0 cn < < Q Q Q O 2 Q 2 Q U Q U Q O Q Q Q Z Q < < < < Q z w w www g0D0D2D2D2 ) w w w w w w w w w 0 2 2 2 2 2 0 U 1— U 1— 0 1— 0 i— 0 i— 2 2 H 2 2 2 2 2 2 E Q < QQ ¢ (xOUOUroo0cco < Q w a < < Q < U m c) cn cn cn w h— ¢ H— Q W Q w ' W Q co cn < co cn U) cn U) cn I p w O cc 2 fn r O U J —J 0 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 'O O O C)C Z0O5co o — m O 0 I ,_ __. ... _ ' Z cn p Q O O O O o O O O O O O o 0 o O O O O O � v LZz0Z CO C.) D - O O °- O CID 0 H < w —I0 N N N N N O r r O O O N N N N N N N N U N cU) Z HO C Q � Z � � o 0 • ZQ U G H El c0 c0 c0 CO C0 r O O r N— r V' N' d' V' ., d' C1' o O ~ ci) co U W U Q U co U CO .0 U "a Cl) CO U) t2 Ln co N a0 O t! C t` CO c0 c0 CO CO O 1 I I I I I 1 1 I I 1 I I 1 Lw L. Ln in LU L Ln Ln A A An An I.n Ln u) m I 1 I I I 1 I I I I I I I 1 r r r r r r r r r r r r r r I 1 1 I I I I 1 I I I I I 1 o Z o cc w w w w w w 0 w Z 0 0 0 < 0 CD 0 CD 0 "- >• O cJn UJ) co 0 0 0 0 0 w 0 w J J J J J J co N co co co Z Z ZQZ z z co o0 co co co a) 2 z o cc O z z O O O ce Z Z Z z Z z O2 Z >>- O p > > > O 0 0 0 0 0 Z Wz Z Z w w w w w L' w 0• Z O > v 0 0 2 2 } 0 0 >- >- >- 0 0 0 0 0 0 w 0 0 m U 0 m m < 0 0 0 0 U U • 0 0 0a > 0 a < < < < < m CO CO CO CO m _., Z z z � � � � 0 0 0 13 LLJ• H H 01- H0QD m Dz co z 0 0m0UI- I- 1- I- H H 5 `r 2ccnnN2HZn- O 1-11 0- 0 Q 2H2Hv~i c~n ccnn v~i Cl) co O Luau! O w Q O Q — 0 U O U w O Q O Q w w w w w Q w 0Z0co0 w00 000) 0 Q m U 0 wwQ 0 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O o O O O J CO C`') c`') c0 C) C) c0 C) c) CO CO C) CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO 0 CO CO C) cO CO CO CO cO CO cO cO cO cO cO CO CO cO cO cO CO xxxx 0000 CO 00 CO m x ZZZZO O 0 0 0 m ,t Z Z > U- z z z H I H H z O Q > D D D D U J 0 -) -, -, z O 5 j% J J - J 2 > U QQaQ --) -- (� 000U J Z w < 2 0E Fc Fc Fc V J 2 0 Z c) 0 w w w w H J U H Q U U OU 0 i- Q 2 w w W w w 0 kJ 2 22 M M M M J O CO CO CO CO 0 U O U Z Z O O M , O U H ~ ~ C) U U H U W Z U Z C/) (/) Cn (n o 0 Z U Z Z Z LC) Ls!) LC) Ln U U U U = 2 cn cn cn cn z cn H � cczcC wwLWU � > CCzc cncn v 4 4 v � � UU � � w � � U) W w O' CCCCCC � W cnL wee Z U U z z Z H H 0_ 0_ 0_ 0_ W H a - 2 2 - - P HO Q cc w cc H H H H Q cc w cc .U U O O z z o n Cn o Q H Q J J J J a o 0 Q H Q Z z cn cn cn cn , Li. , w0 , HH W WLLH0 , H fH - - (n < < < < I > 00 > > W > 2 2 (nQcn co co coon Jm 2cnQ (n22 Z LU W W W 22 w LL 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 H 2 2 2 2 2 W 2 2 2 H 2 2 0 2 2 2 2 O O > > 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ° 0 O O O O m o 0 0 u) 0 0 0 i= < < < Q cccc00 cccccccc cccc00' cc cc0cc cccc0cccccc O V) V) Cr) V) WLHHLLwwww U- WHU ILLLLLU- Hil WU- HW W LL Li p W HHHI- IHI- HH •4- � � v � � vv Q% cr v- vvd- vv O cc W W W W w W W W W zzzzzzzzz *r— r- r Tt 0_ ._- 4r— r— 4r— e— * * *� *k t t t t t t i z z t z t t z t e- W W W W W W W W W N N N N v v N N d N N N N N N o U , J J Q O O O O 0 0 Ox 0 0 0 0 0 O O O O O O O O'r- D 0 •0 0 0 0 0 CD p CD Q CA z_ O cf.) s M O c06) 0 , • , , 1 0 O z wH d 0 z Q O co o O O O o o x O o x O o 0 0 0 000000" 000000 o QgI- _icj O c 0_ U U 0 H Q LU J 0 N N N N O O x10 0 0 0 0'0 O O r- O O O O O O _) O O e- 0 0 0 � ( Z = O 0 N n H >+ Q2z � 2 oP 0 •- - z <1- 0 O ; 0 v v v v > X000x > Olx e- e- 0 .- N Ne-Ir- O r- e- Or- e- e- O H H O H U) 0 cn cc w U < 1 I-- < Lr) Q 0 Cl_a -0 Q) .- Cf) N M 0') 0) d) O , M , W w LC) LC) Ln LC) C M C? N M N M a 7 co r- - r- - N N N N - COC v vr- ev vr- r- .4- - J — - , - CnU) U), U) > 2 �2 0 Z 2 N (n20- ILM2 N W W W W p I- I- I- I- N Q < < Q Y ?- (.7 C7 0 0 U U LU W W W a O O CI 0 a J J J J re U) U) U) U) W C) C) C) C) 0 Z O O O O a z z z z < O O O O m 0 ;7z >- >- >- >-W W W W 0., w Z Z W O 00 H 0 z 111 X 0 Y 2 QD Z o ~ 0_0 0 O O Z Z 2 U 0 W J 0 0 ) Ce w O M J M O LLI>" } — H Z QU1- 0_ I,TcLij• � Q < Q ce 0 O > = LiJ 0 Zm m CO m 0 0- wC.) � W Z 0 > ZJwpUW 2w CL > W Y v) OZ OH0 > N 00N YUn _ H 00 >HU C U C) U CDHUzJQ 0cn 0HccvvOQw > aZOHCCQ_ - Z > > > > WOz � - � 1WOz � wW - O � CL Oz � wQ Y Ce W Ce wH - H00QO O2H - H H w onO0 W VH - HH LL J _ F- 2 � � � OJ H I- I— F- F- QZQW WDmQZQQH � O Z HCL 0QU - (nCACn > w Q 2Z _ JC Z 2WWW n Cn CIO W lJ fn Cnfn wW CO C) Cl W m m m m Z 0 O C O O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J CO CO CO CO M M cr) C) CO M C) M C') C') C') C') C') C) cr) C) M (Y) cr) ') Cr) M M M M M C'') M M 0 M M CO CO C'') cr) C') c'') M M M M C'7 c'7 M C7 C', C') M M M CO M ('') M C) M C'') M M M M M U U z z ww _ 0 0 J J J J J J J (/) (n O O W J W W W II J Z Z J ZZZ Z Z W Q Q W Q Q Q F— F- J QQ ZWa- Z WWW J J LU 22 Q J J Q J J J D > > 0- 000_ 000 N J F— F— J CC CC J CC CC �' Q Q O F- t- O F- F- l— b O U t:cc c z z = Z z Z z z Z HI- HOOH 000 Y Y 0 JJ ❑ ZZ zU ..) Z GOO Un Z Z U) J _1 ,L 00 ww 0 - - 0 w w > W w 00 0 U Z H HQ >> z Z Z Z Z O O LLJ O O � ww 5 > > ww __, zz www OU < < W- WW 2 00 W W w � � w () () C~/) Q < QQ Z ZZ > 7> U0Cn (j CnU) Cn r 0 - - > O t OfX w> zz = F- F- 00 U ❑ ❑ � ❑ ❑ ❑ W W W W > ww 0 Z Z LJLW ❑ ww ❑ W W W W O W 0 W U U ~ U U U U ❑ ❑ U _U LLI W o6 ap `, ~ ❑ ~ ❑ ~ Zz (32UU222 � � cv _ F- LLwwW win W `�' � (/) mw crY - - (n UU QQ - Ww cc22 � 222 � � Hz Hz F- QQ QZ22ZZZUv � .e z Q z < z U 0 0 00 z Z000222 00 2 _J � 2 0 0 0 U (n wCC w w � JJ • LL - - LLLLLL - - (/) QQ >_ 00 } 000 (n0) (/) < O H O H 00 LL LL m > ❑ ❑ > > > 2 2 Q 22 J a O J do_ d Q Q o z W 2 w 2 w 2 z 2 2 2 2 w W 2 2 2 2 2 w 22 0220 2 2 2 W w 0 2 0 > 0 > 0 0 0 0 O O > > 0 0 0 0 0 2 00 m O O w 00022 1- < cw cw rIrctr c � OOri:ctYcc < fl:c O ( tYO fir < Q Q (/) W J Li_ J W F— W LL W LL H H LL LL LL LL LL C/) LL W H LL LL H LL LL LL C/) CO 0 L p W CZ 1± ± F- F- F- H F- F- F- H F- ± 't IY 't cC d � LUUJUJUJWLULULUUJ d ,— .— .— "- 0_ d 2 _ _ _ 1 *1 zzzzzzzzz = * * * _ * *$ _ 00 (n Cn N N W W W W W W W W W (n N N N .I (n N N ▪ J 0 O O O 0 0 O O O O X O'O O O O XI O O 010 J ,— 0 0 0 .I O Q cn Z g 00p� O ,co ON o r Z i r I , (/j H O Q 0 - - co O O O O X O X O O X s- O ' p coO O ) O O 0' r-- MI5. W Z z 0 Z p Q J ~ O p O C.)0HQ ,LJ O e- 0 0 •0 00 00X00000CDX 00, � o _D0 0'00 � . N U Cn z F- 0 0 T .‹ Z 2 • o U U O ZQU0H E in 0 0 0 r .— XX'00'0XOXX'X' 01,- - '0vd- N o ACC ~ }_ } ri F- ~ U ~ C Nr w U o 1 (JWN N N N ` D0 N 7W N rNL N 0bF— CC .- ) L Ln fN N !) 4 Z 2 J J J J J d w l 22 O - r r •1 • 1 r N O N Z LL. w 0 cc ❑ H N D ,_,-, Q O O oct) w U Z Z L c Z Y Y NZ Z r N aWO 0Nc+i O � O O O c� z WOO zZ Z z z z ( 2 (o_ zz X Q < J ❑ d n OJ H O cI 2 W W � N N Ij d Jp w W (n >- ❑ U � � � >- 2 HQ < _Jul 01 m cn c ❑ mow cc Q Q w w Ce a 1- < w Ce _I L W O 2 w ¢ W w w ZZ W W W W z OHO ❑ J 0 - zWQ _iLiHH -JIY �LL ¢ rLLLL z VF- F- F- WUOZ (nUZ ❑ 0Q WHZLL � C,nOOw0zOLU Q J Q J Q J J O H — H ❑ ❑ Q W Q J W F— 2 � 2 — 2 W W _ re al re w tY W H _ ❑ Z IY W W W 1_ J = ce N Q 2 cx W m Z >- 2 2 > > zw zw zw Oweezp ¢ o_ dw2 CL OW mZZO _, Hz = 00D00 _1 _1 O ow -1 WJ WJ J � p - ccn (nCn > Q2 (nOW - F- pcn - = mUU °- 00 w mu C) U z u) v a a a - 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J cO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO cO CO cO cO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO cO cO CO cO cO 0_ CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO cO cO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO cO CO CO Ch CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO 2 O cc E 0 _ J LU z U W O Z Li I 0 (211 _ U I- Cn Z 2CD d cC J r-- W H U) O z zz W Z Z < 0 Z Z LLI Z J r 5 H H 2 cc w Q m w w > J p CD OU H -I CDQ Z Q Q ZZ - LrlY > tr-tE0 W OH HO 00 j 0 0 U Z �° () > WW zZ c� J w 0o 1 z p o >- >- W W w W w w w w E C__ ,L J J w H O O O H H 0 0 0 0 0 0 J 2HZc Q lL QQccOMCMMMM U) = -I0 - QQ QQ : QQQ Z 2 (C0LU 2tL.L.Jui 22wwwwww O 0 oo a 0 O H 2 2 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 i= cCco0I-L X < < as < < < < < < Q LL co H O LL w CO CO LL LL Cn (n C/) CO Cn U) U L o in ± - O lY 0_ * Tt 4 4 = N N N N Cr) CA CI 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 rn Z 0 rn co N o - m rn p i . z H U Q - O © 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 © 0 cn v wzz0z r a Oco aH 0 d U O NU01- QWJ0 0 0 r .- 00000000 COM U) Z HO 0 `' >, zQ � p ' 2 p C.)ZU< O H Q 0 0 v- r .- N N N N N N N C H } � () ri H H CI)_ UH) C 0< 1- w 0 < w W ao cO N c? I Ln co H m �' LL Li LL LL w LL LL CO w WLW WwU) I- ) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Z J U CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO 0 N 0 N r } LL z z Q Q LL LL Z Z CA u) LIL Q zD Z Z Q _, H LL r- N M LL LL U. = _ U) -IX X a Z H ZZ � .- <nWWaQ. H w N m 2 D -- Z 0 co z z ¢ < = Z Z W y 1` J 1- Hx mxWIYuj0Z W W LLI C7WWp0 - 2 Q lit Q «< cCQ - � 3ao co Z 0 < < rectm 0 Li j Li j 0 00 v >> v o p 2 Z > > N N n Ur c M Q N N d Z w W J -I -I W W 1- - H '- W W W W W J Z 2 � 221- H Q CL >- > i 0 >- >- 1- ZQHF- HI- Na H 5 J W J _L n H cc V) IY m O a O J m m O O O c U O W O O O W 417 w a aav) z zu) mo U 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J CO M CO Co Co M M M M M M CM CO M M 0_ Co M co co Co co M M M M M M M CM M SECTION 26 12 19 LIQUID FILLED TRANSFORMERS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: CONTRACTOR shall provide the liquid filled pad-mounted transformers and their associated auxiliary equipment as specified herein and as shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The liquid filled pad-mounted transformers and all components sr all be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards of NEMA and ANSI. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of electrical equipment, cable, and wire products of the types and ratings necessary, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer: A firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical wiring installation work similar to that in this project. — C. Code Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) as applicable to construction and installation of electrical equipment, cable, wire, and connectors. D. UL Labels: All electrical equipment and material shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories, except where UL does not include the equipment in their listing procedures. E. NEMA/ANSI Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Manufacturers Association, American National Standards Institute and other standards pertaining to material, construction and testing, where applicable. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Shop drawings shall include the following: 1. Front view elevation or outline drawing and weight, including oil capacity. 2. Nameplate diagram. 3. Conduit entry/exit locations. Section 26 12 19-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 4. Ratings (on nameplate) including: a. kVA. b. Primary and secondary voltage. c. Taps. d. Continuous current (FLA). e. Basic Impulse level. f. Impedance ratings and characteristics. g. Sound level. h. Efficiency at 25%, 50%, 75%, and 100% rated load. i. Insulation system type. j. Rated temperature rise. 5. Product data sheets. C. Where applicable, the following additional information shall be submitted: Specified accessories. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. O&M manuals for the transformer shall be submitted on compact disk (CD) as well as hardbound copies as specified in Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes: 1. Final as-built drawings and information for items listed in paragraph 1.04. 2. Wiring diagrams. 3. Production test reports. 4. Installation information. C. The final (as-built) drawings shall include the same drawings as the construction drawings and shall incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing process. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01 60 00—Materials and Equipment. B. Transformers shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substantial Completion of the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Liquid filled pad-mounted transformers shall be as manufactured by Eaton Cooper, ABB, T_ Howard, or equal, as approved by CONSULTANT and in accordance with substitutions under provisions of the General Conditions. Section 26 12 19-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. The drawings and specifications were prepared based on Eaton Cooper. CONTRACTOR shall include in the Bid and shall be responsible for the cost of any changes to accommodate other equipment including, but not limited to, structural, mechanical, and electrical work. CONTRACTOR shall also pay additional costs necessary for revision of drawings and/or specifications by CONSULTANT. 2.02 RATINGS A. The ratings of the transformers shall be as follows or as shown on the drawings: kVA As shown on the drawings Phase 3 Frequency 60 Hz Primary Voltage 13.8 kV (Delta) 95 kV BIL Taps 6 (2-2.5% FC, AN) (4-2.5% FC, BN) Secondary Voltage 277/480 V (Wye) 30 kV BIL Impedance 5.75% Windings Copper Temperature Rise 55°/65° Coolant FR3 or Bio Temp biodegradable dielectric fluid 2.03 CONSTRUCTION A. The unit shall be FR3 or Bio Temp biodegradable dielectric fluid filled and shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the NEC. B. The transformer and fill fluid shall be FM and UL approved. C. The dielectric coolant shall be listed less-flammable fluid meeting the requirements of National Electrical Code Section 450 and the requirements of the National Electrical Safety Code (IEEE C2-2002), Section 15. The dielectric coolant shall be nontoxic, — non-bio-accumulating and be readily and completely biodegradable per EPA OPPTS 835.3100. The base fluid shall be 100% derived from edible seed oils and food-grade performance-enhancing additives. The fluid shall not require genetically altered seeds for its base oil. The fluid shall be certified to comply with the US EPA Environmental Technology Verification (ETV) requirements, and tested for compatibility with transformer components. The fluid shall be Factory Mutual Approved, UL Classified Dielectric Medium (UL-EOUV), and UL Classified Transformer Fluid (UL-EOVK), Envirotemp' FR3 or Bio Temp fluid. D. The transformer shall carry its continuous rating with average winding temperature rise by resistance that shall not exceed 55°C based on average ambient of 30°C over 24 hours with a maximum of 40°C. The insulation system shall allow an additional 12% kVA output at 65°C average winding temperature rise by resistance on a continuous basis without any decrease in normal transformer life. E. The transformer shall be designed to meet the sound level standards for liquid transformers as defined in NEMA and ANSI. -- Section 26 12 19-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 F. All high voltage windings shall have nomex wrapped insulation for copper windings prior to winding the coils. Insulation between layers of the windings shall be by Insuldur paper, or . equal. G. The main transformer tank and attached components shall be designed to withstand pressures 25% greater than the required operating design value without permanent deformation. Construction shall consist of carbon steel plate reinforced with external sidewall braces. All seams and joints shall be continuously welded. H. Each radiator assembly shall be individually welded and receive a quality control pressurized check for leaks. The entire tank assembly shall receive a similar leak test before tanking. A final 6-hour leak test shall be performed. I. The transformers shall be compartmental-type, self-cooled, tamper-resistant, and weather-protected for mounting on a pad and meet ANSI C57.12.28. The unit shall restrict the entry of water (other than floodwater) into the compartments so as not to impair its operation. There shall be no exposed screws, bolts, or other fastening devices which are externally removable. J. The transformers shall consist of a transformer tank and full-height, bolt-on high- and low-voltage cable terminating compartments located side-by-side separated by a rigid metal barrier. Each compartment shall have separate doors designed to provide access to the high-voltage compartment only after the low-voltage has been opened. The high- and low-voltage compartments shall be sized to provide adequate depth for the high- and low-voltage termination method described below. There shall be at least one additional fastening device accessible only after the low-voltage door has been opened, which must be removed to open the high-voltage door. Doors shall be mounted flush with the cabinet frame. The low-voltage door shall have a handle-operated, three-point latching mechanism designed to be secured with a single padlock. A hex-head bolt shall be incorporated into the low-voltage door latching mechanism. Both high- and low-voltage doors shall be incorporated into the low-voltage door latching mechanism. Both high- and low-voltage doors shall be equipped with liftoff-type stainless steel hinges and door stops to secure them in the open position. K. Compartment sills, doors, and covers shall be removable to facilitate cable pulling and installation. The high-voltage door shall be on the left with the low-voltage door on the right. Compartments shall be designed for cable entry from below and shall be sized to the minimum dimensions of ANSI C57.12.26. L. Transformers shall be supplied with a welded main tank cover and be of a sealed-tank construction designed to withstand a pressure of 7 psig without permanent distortion. The tank cover shall be domed to shed water and be supplied with a tamper-resistant access handhole sized to allow access to internal bushing and switch connections. Transformers supplied with "less flammable" fluids, (High-Molecular-Weight Hydrocarbon (HMWH or Silicone), shall be manufactured to withstand 12 psig without rupture. The transformer shall remain effectively sealed for a top-oil temperature of -5°C to 105°C. When necessary to meet the temperature rise rating specified above, flat cooling panels of the common header type shall be provided. Section 26 12 19-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 M. The transformer manufacturer shall certify that the transformer is non-PCB containing no detectable PCBs. Do not provide nonflammable transformer liquids inc uding askarel and insulating liquids containing tetrachloroethylene, perchloroethylene, chlorine compounds, or halogenated compounds. N. High-voltage full-capacity taps shall be provided with a tap-changing mechanism designed for deenergized operation. The tap changer operator shall be located within one of the compartments. O. The coil windings shall be of the two winding type designed to reduce losses and manufactured with the conductor material as specified above. The windings shall incorporate a secondary sheet conductor to maximize short-circuit strength.All insulating materials shall be rated 65°C rise, 80°C hot-spot operation. P. The core material shall be high-grade, grain-oriented, nonaging silicon core steel with high magnetic permeability, low hysteresis, and eddy current losses. Magnetic flux densities shall be kept well below saturation to allow for a minimum of 10% overvoltage excitation. The cores shall be properly annealed to reduce stresses induced during the manufacturing processes and reduce core losses. Q. The core frame shall be designed to provide maximum support of the core and coil assembly. The core frame shall be welded or bolted to ensure maximum short-circu t strength. R. The core and coil assembly shall be designed and manufactured to meet the short-circuit requirements of ANSI C57.12.90. The core and coil assembly shall be baked in an oven prior to tanking to "set" the epoxy coating on the Kraft paper and remove moisture from the insulation prior to vacuum filing. S. Transformer shall be vacuum-filled with the appropriate fluid as indicated above. The process shall be of sufficient vacuum and duration to ensure that the core and coil assembly is free of moisture prior to filling the tank. T. For each transformer, provide three MOV-type, elbow-style lightning arresters mounted in the high-voltage compartment for surge protection. Arresters shall be mounted to the additional bushings provided. Arrester rating shall be 8.4 kV MCOV. U. Provide an oil sampling compartment that is not within the LV or HV compartments. Such compartment shall be completely enclosed, weather- and vandalism-protected, with a hinged, padlockable door. V. Provide 240 Vac, 10 A inductive-rated dry contacts on all alarm switches wired to terminal blocks in the low-voltage compartment. 2.04 FINISH A. Units shall be protected against corrosion with a red oxide primer, baked-on and a finish coat of a two-component modified polyurethane. Color shall be Munsell 7GY3.29/1.5 green. The cabinet interior and front plate shall be painted gray. Section 26 12 19-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Transformer features and accessories shall include: 1. One-inch drain valve with sampling device. 2. Pressure relief device (self-resealing with indicator). 3. Non-PCB label. 4. One-inch upper filter press and filling plug. 5. Lightning arresters as specified. 6. Nameplate in low voltage compartment. 7. Liquid level indication (pipe plug at 25% oil level with auxiliary contacts for remote indication of low level). 8. Dial-type thermometer gauge with auxiliary contacts for high temperature. 9. Pressure vacuum gauge with auxiliary contacts for low pressure. 10. Warning signs. B. Provide a NEMA 4X terminal box mounted on the exterior of the transformer enclosure for housing all instruments and alarm contacts specified above. 2.06 PRIMARY CONNECTIONS A. The primary connections and equipment shall be dead front and conform to ANSI C57.12.34 requirements. High-voltage bushings shall be 15 kV 200 A bushing wells with bushing well inserts installed to accommodate elbow-style connectors. The bushings shall be externally removable and be supplied with a removable stud. Provide six bushings for each transformer. One set of bushings shall be provided for radial feed and the other set of bushings shall be provided with MOV-type arresters as specified herein. B. Provide load break elbows for conductor size indicated on the Drawings. Coordinate conductor type with CONTRACTOR. 2.07 SECONDARY BUSHINGS A. The secondary bushings shall be molded epoxy and provided with blade-type spade terminals with NEMA standard hole spacing arranged for vertical takeoff. The secondary neutral shall be an insulated bushing not grounded to the transformer tank. Neutral shall be grounded at one point in the main switchboard only. B. Secondary bushing spades shall be capable of terminating quantity of cables shown on the drawings, plus one future cable. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 FACTORY TESTING -` A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of ANSI and NEMA standards. 1. Resistance measurements of all windings on the rated voltage connection of each unit and at the tap extremes of one unit only of a given rating on this project. 2. Ratio tests on the rated voltage connection and on all tap connections. 3. Polarity and phase-relation tests on the rated voltage connections. Section 26 12 19-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 4. No-load loss at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection. 5. Exciting current at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection. 6. Impedance and load loss at rated current on the rated voltage connection of each unit and on the tap extremes of one unit only of a given rating on this protect. 7. Applied potential test. 8. Induced potential tests. B. The following special factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this section.All tests shall be in accordance with the latest revision of ANSI and NEMAstandards. 1. Temperature test(s) shall be made on all units. Tests shall not be required when there is available a record of a temperature test on an essentially duplicate unit. When a transformer is supplied with auxiliary cooling equipment to provide more than one rating, temperature tests as listed above shall be made on the lowest kVA OA or AA rating, and the highest kVA FA rating. 2. Basic impulse test on all windings. C. The manufacturer shall provide three certified copies of factory test reports. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. CONTRACTOR shall install all equipment according to the manufacturer's recommendations and the Contract drawings. B. All necessary hardware to secure the assembly in place shall be provided by CONTRACTOR. C. Cables shall be supported at each termination by using cable supports in each compartment. In no case shall the cable be supported by the termination. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide the services of a qualified factory-trained manufacturer's representative to assist CONTRACTOR in installation and start-up of the equipment specified under this section. The manufacturer's representative shall provide technical direction and assistance to CONTRACTOR in general assembly of the equipment, connections and adjustments, and testing of the assembly and components contained herein. B. CONTRACTOR shall provide three copies of the manufacturer's field start-up report. 3.04 FIELD MEASUREMENT AND ADJUSTMENTS A. Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments. 3.05 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION A. A qualified, factory-trained manufacturer's representative shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted, and tested in accordance with tie manufacturer's recommendations. B. CONTRACTOR shall provide three copies of the manufacturer's representative's certification before final payment is made. Section 26 12 19-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.06 TRAINING A. CONTRACTOR shall provide training for CITY's personnel at the job site location. B. The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer's qualified representative. The training program shall consist of the instruction on the operation and maintenance of the transformer as well as explanation of major components within the assembly. END OF SECTION Section 26 12 19-8 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 26 13 23 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE METAL-ENCLOSED SWITCHGEAR PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install the equipment as specified herein and as shown on the Contract Drawings. The exterior metal-enclosed, pad-mounted switchgear assemblies shall consist of one or more self-supporting modules, containing interrupter switches and power fuses, with the necessary accessory components, all completely factory-assembled and operationally checked. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The medium-voltage metal-enclosed switchgear and all components snail be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards as follows: 1. ANSI C37.20.3. 2. ANSI C57.12.28. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of electrical equipment, cable and wire products of the types and ratings necessary, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9000, or 9002 certified. B. Installer: A firm with at least 10 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical wiring installation work similar to that in this project. C. Code Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) as applicable to construction and installation of electrical equipment, cable, wire, and connectors. — D. UL Labels: All electrical equipment and material shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories, except where UL does not include the equipment in their listing procedures. E. NEMA/ANSI Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Manufacturers Association, American National Standards Institute and other standards pertaining to material, construction, and testing where applicable. Section 26 13 23-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Include outline and support point dimensions of enclosures and accessories, unit weight, voltage, short-circuit rating, continuous current, basic impulse level, cable terminal sizes, available space for cable terminations, a single line diagram, and wiring diagrams. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01 60 00—Materials and Equipment. B. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substantial Completion of the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Medium-voltage, pad-mounted, exterior metal-enclosed switchgear shall be manufactured by S&C Electric, PMH-9 style, no equal, to match CITY's existing equipment. 2.02 RATINGS A. The switchgear assembly ratings shall be as follows: 1. Overall Characteristics: a. Nominal system voltage: 14.4 kV, three-phase, 3-wire. b. System grounding: Solid. c. Maximum design voltage: 17.0 kV. d. BIL rating: 95 kV. 2. Short-Circuit: a. Peak withstand current, amperes, peak: 32.5 kA. b. One-second short-time withstand current, amperes, RMS, symmetrical: 12.5 kA. c. MVA, three-phase symmetrical at rated nominal voltage: 310 MVA. 3. Main Bus: Continuous current: 600 A. 4. Three-pole interrupter switches: a. Continuous current: 600 A. b. Load-dropping current: 600 A. c. Peak withstand current, amperes, peak: 36.4 kA. d. One-second short-time withstand current, amperes, RMS, symmetrical: 14.0 kA. e. Three-time duty cycle fault-closing current, amperes, RMS, symmetrical: 14.0 kA. 5. Fuses: Maximum rating shall be 200-amp with fuses supplied as shown on the drawings. Section 26 13 23-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. The short-circuit and three-time duty-cycle fault closing ratings of switches, short-circuit ratings of bus, interrupting ratings of fuses, and duty-cycle fault-closing capabilities of fuses with integral load interrupters shall equal or exceed the short-circuit ratings of the metal-enclosed switchgear. C. The manufacturer shall furnish, upon request, certification of ratings of the basic switch and fuse components and/or the integrated metal-enclosed switchgear assembly consisting of the switch and fuse components in combination with the enclosure. D. The integrated switchgear assembly shall have a BIL rating established by test on switchgear of the type and kind to be furnished under this specificaton. Certified test abstracts establishing such ratings shall be furnished upon request. E. Lugs shall be rated for copper and aluminum conductors. F. The integrated switchgear assembly shall be UL listed. 2.03 ENCLOSURE A. The pad-mounted gear enclosure shall be of unitized monocoque construction to maximize strength, minimize weight, and inhibit corrosion. B. The material for all external sides of the enclosure shall be 11-gauge not-rolled, pickled and oiled steel sheet. C. All structural joints and butt joints shall be welded and the external seams shall be ground flush and smooth. D. The base shall consist of continuous 90-degree flanges, turned inward ,end welded at the corners, for bolting to the concrete pad. E. To guard against unauthorized or inadvertent entry, there shall be no access to high voltage through side sheets of the metal-enclosed switchgear assembly. F. To guard against corrosion, all hardware (including door fittings, fasteners, etc.), all operating-mechanism parts, and other parts subject to abrasive action from mechanical motion shall be of either nonferrous materials, or galvanized or zinc-nickel-plated ferrous materials. Cadmium-plated ferrous parts shall not be used. G. Externally accessible hardware shall not be used for support of high-voltage components or switch-operating mechanisms within the pad-mounted gear. H. Enclosure top side edges shall overlap with roof side edges to create a mechanical maze which shall allow ventilation to help keep the enclosure interior dry v,hile discouraging tampering or insertion of foreign objects. I. Compartmentalized units shall have full-width barriers separating front and back compartments. Section 26 13 23-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 J. Lifting tabs shall be removable. Sockets for the lifting-tab bolts shall be blind-tapped. A resilient material shall be placed between the lifting tabs and the enclosure to help prevent corrosion by protecting the finish against scratching by the tabs. To further preclude corrosion, this material shall be closed-cell to prevent moisture from being absorbed and held between the tabs and the enclosure in the event that lifting tabs are not removed. K. Access control shall be provided as follows: Doors and hinged-bolted panels providing access to high-voltage components shall be provided with flush-mounted key-operated snap locks and shall have provisions for padlocking. In addition, the hinged-bolted panels shall be secured by a pentahead bolt provided with a padlock shackle and protective hood, midway between the top and bottom of the panel. Hex bolts shall be provided to secure the door near the top and bottom. L. Doors: 1. Doors shall be constructed of 11-gauge hot-rolled, pickled and oiled steel sheet.2. Door-edge flanges shall overlap with door-opening flanges to discourage tampering or insertion of foreign objects. 3. Doors shall have a minimum of two extruded-aluminum hinges with stainless-steel hinge pins, and interlocking extruded-aluminum hinge supports for the full length of the door to provide strength, security, and corrosion resistance. Mounting hardware shall be stainless steel or zinc-nickel-plated steel, and shall not be externally accessible to guard against tampering. 4. Doors shall be hinged at the sides to swing open with minimum effort. Doors hinged at the top requiring significant effort to lift open shall not be allowed. 5. In consideration of controlled access and tamper resistance, each door (or set of double doors) shall be equipped with an automatic three-point latching mechanism. a. The latching mechanism shall be spring-loaded, and shall latch automatically when the door is closed. All latch points shall latch at the same time to preclude partial latching. b. A pentahead socket wrench or tool shall be required to actuate the mechanism to unlatch the door and, in the same motion, recharge the spring for the next closing operation. c. The latching mechanism shall have provisions for padlocking that incorporate a means to protect the padlock shackle from tampering and that shall be coordinated with the latches such that: (1) It shall not be possible to unlatch the mechanism until the padlock is removed. (2) It shall not be possible to insert the padlock until the mechanism is completely latched closed. 6. Doors providing access to solid-material power fuses shall have provisions to store spare fuse units or refill units. 7. Each door shall be provided with a zinc-nickel-plated steel door holder located above the door opening. The holder shall be hidden from view when the door is closed, and it shall not be possible for the holder to swing inside the enclosure. M. Roof: 1. The roof shall be constructed of 11-gauge hot-rolled, pickled and oiled steel sheet. 2. Roof sections over high-voltage compartments shall be bolted to the enclosure with no exposed fasteners. Section 26 13 23-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.04 INSULATORS A. The interrupter-switch and fuse-mounting insulators shall be of a cycloali;Jhatic epoxy resin system with characteristics and restrictions as follows: 1. Operating experience of at least 25 years under similar conditions. 2. Adequate leakage distance established by test per IEC Publication 507, "Artificial — Pollution Test on High Voltage Insulators to be Used on AC Systems " 3. Adequate strength for short-circuit stress established by test. 4. Conformance with applicable ANSI standards. 5. Homogeneity of the cycloaliphatic epoxy resin throughout each insulator to provide maximum resistance to power arcs. Ablation due to high temperatures from power arcs shall continuously expose more material of the same composition and properties so that no change in mechanical or electrical characteristics takes place because of arc-induced ablation. Any surface damage to insulators during installation or maintenance of switchgear shall expose material of the same composition and properties so that insulators with minor surface damage need not be replaced. 2.05 BUS A. Bus and interconnections shall consist of aluminum bar of a min mum 56% IACS conductivity. B. Bus supports, bus, and interconnections shall withstand the stresses associated with short-circuit currents up through the maximum rating of the pad-mounted gear. C. Before installation of the bus, all electrical contact surfaces shall first be prepared by machine-abrading to remove any aluminum-oxide film. Immediately after this operation, the electrical contact surfaces shall be coated with a uniform coating of an oxide inhibitor and sealant. D. Bolted aluminum-to-aluminum connections shall be made with a suitable number of galvanized steel bolts, with two Belleville spring washers per bolt, one under the bolt head and one under the nut. These bolts shall be tightened to 50 foot-pounds torque. 2.06 GROUNDING A. A ground-connection pad shall be provided in each termination compartment of the pad-mounted gear. B. The ground-connection pad shall be constructed of no less than 3/16 in.-thick steel. It shall be nickel plated and welded to the enclosure, and shall have a short-circuit rating equal to that of the pad-mounted gear. C. Ground-connection pads shall be coated with a uniform coating of an cxide inhibitor and sealant prior to shipment. 2.07 FINISH AND FEATURES A. The enclosure finish shall be olive green, Munsell 7GY3.29/1.5. B. Full coverage at joints and blind areas shall be achieved by processing enclosures independently of components such as doors and roofs before assembly into the unitized structures.All exterior seams shall be filled and sanded smooth. Section 26 13 23-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. To remove oils and dirt, to form a chemically and anodically neutral conversion coating to improve the finish-to-metal bond, and to retard underfilm propagation of corrosion, all surfaces shall undergo a thorough pretreatment process comprised of a fully automated system of cleaning, rinsing, phosphatizing, sealing, drying, and cooling before any protective coatings are applied. D. After pretreatment, protective coatings shall be applied that shall help resist corrosion and protect the steel enclosure. To establish the capability to resist corrosion and protect the enclosure, representative test specimens coated by the enclosure manufacturer's finishing system shall satisfactorily pass the following tests: 1. 4000 hours of exposure to salt-spray testing per ASTM B 117 with: a. Underfilm corrosion not to extend more than 1/32 in. from the scribe, as evaluated per ASTM D 1654, Procedure A, Method 2 (scraping); and b. Loss of adhesion from bare metal not to extend more than 1/8 in. from the scribe. 2. 1000 hours of humidity testing per ASTM D 4585, with no blistering as evaluated per ASTM D 714. 3. 500 hours of ultraviolet-accelerated weathering testing per ASTM G 53 using lamp UVB-313, with no chalking as evaluated per ASTM D 659, and no more than a 10% reduction of gloss as evaluated per ASTM D 523. 4. Crosshatch-adhesion testing per ASTM D 3359 Method B, with no loss of finish. 5. 160-inch-pound impact, followed by adhesion testing per ASTM D 2794, with no paint chipping or cracking. 6. 3000 cycles of abrasion testing per ASTM 4060, with no penetration to the substrate. 7. Certified test abstracts substantiating the above capabilities shall be furnished upon request. 8. A heavy coat of insulating "no-drip" compound shall be applied to the inside surface of the roof structure to prevent condensation of moisture thereon. 9. After the enclosures are completely assembled and the components (switches, fuses, bus, etc.) are installed, the finish shall be observed for scuffs and scratches. Blemishes shall be touched up to restore the protective integrity of the finish. -� 10. Touch-up materials—with complete instructions—shall be included with each shipment of metal-enclosed switchgear, for touch-up in the field. E. After the finishing system has been properly applied and cured, welds along the enclosure bottom flange shall be coated with a wax-based anticorrosion moisture barrier to give these areas added corrosion resistance. F. A resilient closed-cell material, such as PVC gasket, shall be applied to the entire underside of the enclosure bottom flange to protect the finish on this surface from scratching during handling and installation. This material shall isolate the bottom flange from the alkalinity of a concrete foundation to help protect against corrosive attack. 2.08 INTERRUPTER SWITCHES A. Interrupter switches shall have a three-time duty-cycle fault-closing rating equal to or exceeding the short-circuit rating of the pad-mounted gear. Tests substantiating these 9- ratings shall be performed at maximum voltage with current applied for at least 10 cycles. Certified test abstracts establishing such ratings shall be furnished upon request. Section 26 13 23-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Interrupter switches shall utilize a quick-make quick-break mechanism installed by the switch manufacturer. The mechanism shall swiftly and positively open and close the interrupter switch independent of the switch-handle or switch-operator operating speed. The quick-make quick-break mechanism shall be integrally mounted to the switch frame. C. Interrupter switches shall be completely assembled and adjusted by the switch manufacturer on a single rigid mounting frame. The frame shall be of welded steel construction such that the frame intercepts the leakage path which parallels the open gap of the interrupter switch, to positively isolate the load circuit when the interrupter switch is in the open position. D. Interrupter switch contacts shall be backed up by stainless-steel springs to provide constant high contact pressure. E. Interrupter switches shall be provided with a single blade per phase for circuit closing, including fault closing, continuous current carrying, and circuit interrupting. Spring-loaded auxiliary blades shall not be permitted. F. Interrupter switch blade supports shall be permanently molded in place in a unified insulated shaft constructed of the same cycloaliphatic epoxy resin as the insulators. G. Circuit interruption shall be accomplished by use of an interrupter, which is positively and inherently sequenced with the blade position. It shall not be possible for the blade and interrupter to get out of sequence. Circuit interruption shall take place completely within the interrupter, with no external arc or flame. Any exhaust shall be vented in a controlled manner through a deionizing vent. H. Interrupter switches shall have a visible open gap when in the open position to allow positive verification of switch position. I. Ground studs shall be provided at all switch terminals. Ground studs sha also be provided on the ground pad in each interrupter switch compartment and on the terminals and ground pad in any bus compartment. The momentary rating of the ground studs shall equal or exceed the short-circuit rating of the pad-mounted gear. J. Interrupter switches shall be operated by means of an externally accessible 3/4-inch hex switch-operating hub. The switch-operating hub shall be located within a recessed stainless-steel pocket mounted on the side of the pad-mounted gear enclosure and shall accommodate a 3/4-inch deep-socket wrench or a 3/4-inch shallow-socket wrench with extension. The switch-operating-hub pocket shall include a padlockable stainless-steel access cover that shall incorporate a hood to protect the padlock shackle from tampering. Stops shall be provided on the switch-operating hub to prevent overtravel and thereby guard against damage to the interrupter switch quick-make quick-break mechanism. Labels to indicate switch position shall be provided in the switch-operating-hub pocket. K. Each interrupter switch shall be provided with a folding switch-operating handle. The switch-operating handle shall be secured to the inside of the switch-operating-hub pocket by a brass chain. The folded handle shall be stored behind the closed switch-operating-hub access cover. Section 26 13 23-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.09 FUSES A. Solid-material power fuses shall utilize refill-unit-and-holder or fuse-unit-and-end-fitting construction. The refill unit or fuse unit shall be readily replaceable. B. Mountings for solid-material power fuses shall be disconnect style. C. Fusible elements shall be non-aging and non-damageable, so it is unnecessary to replace unblown companion fuses following a fuse operation. D. Fusible elements for refill units or fuse units, rated 10 amperes or larger, shall be helically coiled to avoid mechanical damage due to stresses from current surges. E. Fusible elements that carry continuous current shall be supported in air to help prevent damage from current surges. F. Refill units and fuse units shall have a single fusible element to eliminate the possibility of unequal current sharing in parallel current paths. �. G. Solid-material power fuses shall have melting time-current characteristics that are permanently accurate with a maximum total tolerance of 10% in terms of current. Time-current characteristics shall be available which permit coordination with protective relays, automatic circuit reclosers, and other fuses. H. Solid-material power fuses shall be capable of detecting and interrupting all faults, whether large, medium, or small (down to minimum melting current); under all realistic conditions of circuitry; and with line-to-line or line-to-ground voltage across the power fuses. Fuses shall be capable of handling the full range of transient recovery voltage severity associated with these faults. I. All arcing accompanying solid-material power fuse operation shall be contained within the fuse, and any arc products and gases evolved during fuse operation shall be vented through exhaust control devices that shall effectively control or contain fuse exhaust. J. Solid-material power fuses shall be equipped with a blown-fuse indicator that shall provide visible evidence of fuse operation while installed in the fuse mounting. K. Fuses shall be as manufactured by S&C, SM-20, or equal. 2.10 LABELING A. All external doors shall be provided with "Warning—Keep Out—Hazardous Voltage Inside—Can Shock, Burn, or Cause Death" signs. B. The inside of each door shall be provided with a "Danger—Hazardous Voltage—Failure to Follow These Instructions Will Likely Cause Shock, Burns, or Death" sign. The text shall further indicate that operating personnel must know and obey the employer's work rules, know the hazards involved, and use proper protective equipment and tools to work on this equipment. C. Interrupter switch compartments shall be provided with "Danger" signs indicating that "Switches May Be Energized by Backfeed." Section 26 13 23-8 4463.004/City Contract No.994 — D. Barriers used to prevent access to energized live parts shall re provided with "Danger-Keep Away—Hazardous Voltage—Will Shock, Burn, or Cause Death" signs. E. Fuse compartments shall be provided with "Danger" signs indicating th.it "Fuses May Be Energized By Backfeed." 2.11 NAMEPLATES, RATINGS LABELS, AND CONNECTION DIAGRAMS A. The outside of each set of double doors providing access to high voltage shall be provided with a nameplate indicating the manufacturer's name, catalog number, model number, date of manufacture, and serial number. B. The inside of each set of double doors shall be provided with a ratings label indicating the following: 1. Overall Pad-Mounted Gear Ratings: nominal voltage, kV; maximum voltage, kV; BIL voltage, kV; power frequency, Hz; short-circuit peak withstand current, amperes, peak; short-circuit one-second short-time withstand current, amperes, RMS, symmetrical; and short-circuit MVA, three-phase symmetrical, at rated nominal voltage. 2. Main Bus Ratings: Continuous current, amperes; peak withstand current, amperes, peak; and one-second short-time withstand current, amperes, RMS symmetrical. 3. Switch Ratings: Continuous current, amperes; load splitting current, amperes; load dropping current, amperes; peak withstand current, amperes, peak; :)ne-second short- - time withstand current, amperes, RMS, symmetrical; and three-tim duty-cycle fault- closing current, amperes, RMS symmetrical. 4. Fuse Type and Integral Load Interrupter Ratings and Capabilities: Maximum current, amperes; load splitting current, amperes; load dropping current, amperes; and duty- cycle fault-closing current, amperes, RMS symmetrical or asymmetrical. C. A three-line connection diagram showing interrupter switches, fuses with integral load interrupters, and bus, along with the manufacturer's model number, shall be provided on the inside of each door (or set of double doors), and on the inside, of each switch- operating-hub access cover. 2.12 BOX PAD A. Manufacturer shall assist CONTRACTOR in selecting box pad for switch installation as shown on the drawings. CONTRACTOR shall provide a Fibercrete Box Pad, as manufactured by Concast, or equal. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. CONTRACTOR shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and the Contract drawings. 3.02 FIELD START-UP AND COMMISSIONING A. Provide the services of a qualified factory-trained manufacturer's representative to assist CONTRACTOR in installation and operation of the equipment specified in.i this section. The manufacturer's representative shall provide technical direction ar d assistance to Section 26 13 23-9 4463.004/City Contract No.994 CONTRACTOR in general operation of the equipment, connections and adjustments, and testing of the assembly and components contained therein. B. The manufacturer's representative shall provide inspection of the final installation. The manufacturer's representative shall perform site start-up and functional checkout of the equipment. Upon completion of the manufacturer's start-up and checkout, the manufacturer shall generate a site start-up and functional checkout report, documenting all systems checked as well as any incomplete work remaining and operational deficiencies. C. CONTRACTOR shall provide three copies of the manufacturer's site start-up and functional checkout report to CONSULTANT for review. Once CONSULTANT has reviewed the report and all equipment is operating in accordance with the specifications, CONSULTANT will make one site visit to check operation of the equipment. If the equipment is not ready or does not operate as specified, CITY shall deduct payment to CONTRACTOR and make payment to CONSULTANT for additional travel, expenses, and site visits until the equipment operates as specified. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all costs required to check operation of the system. 3.03 TRAINING A. Upon successful completion of checkout by CONSULTANT, a manufacturer's representative shall provide a demonstration of the sequences of operation. After this demonstration and acceptance by CITY, the manufacturer shall provide 2 hours of "hands-on" training for CITY's operating personnel which shall cover the following topics: 1. Overall system description and theory of operation. 2. Manual operation. 3. Safeties and protective devices. 4. Recommended system check lists and log sheets. 5. Recommended preventative maintenance. END OF SECTION Section 26 13 23-10 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 26 14 15 LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS (GROUP-MOUNTED) PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: CONTRACTOR shall provide, where shown on the drawings, a free-standing, dead-front type, low-voltage distribution switchboard utilizing group-mounted circuit-protective devices as specified herein and as shown on the drawings. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The low-voltage distribution switchboard and all components shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards of the following: 1. NEMA PB-2. 2. UL Standard 891. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of electrical equipment, cable, and wire products of the types and ratings necessary, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9000, 9001, or 9002 certified. B. Installer: A firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical wiring installation work similar to that in this project. C. Code Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) as applicable to construction and installation of electrical equipment, cable, wire, and connectors. D. UL Labels: All electrical equipment and material shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories, except where UL does not include the equipment in their listing procedures. E. NEMA/ANSI Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Manufacturers Association, American National Standards Institute, and other standards pertaining to material, — construction, and testing, where applicable. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. The following information shall be submitted: 1. Master drawing index. 2. Front view elevation. 3. Floor plan. Section 26 14 15-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 4. Top view. 5. Single line. 6. Schematic diagram. 7. Nameplate schedule. 8. Component list. 9. Conduit entry/exit locations. 10. Assembly ratings including: a. Short-circuit rating. b. Voltage. c. Continuous current. 11. Major component ratings including: a. Voltage. b. Continuous current. c. Interrupting ratings. d. Circuit breaker trip curves. 12. Cable terminal sizes. 13. Product data sheets. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. The low-voltage switchboard shall be UL labeled. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01 60 00—Materials and Equipment. B. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substantial Completion of the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Low-voltage distribution switchboards shall be manufactured by Eaton, Pow R Line C, or equal, as approved by CONSULTANT and in accordance with the substitutions under provisions of the General Conditions.All equipment specified in this section and provided by CONTRACTOR shall be by the same manufacturer. B. The drawings and specifications were prepared based on Eaton. CONTRACTOR shall include in the Bid and shall be responsible for the cost of any changes to accommodate other equipment including, but not limited to, structural, mechanical, and electrical work. CONTRACTOR shall also pay additional costs necessary for revisions of drawings and/or specifications by CONSULTANT. Section 26 14 15-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.02 RATINGS A. The assembly shall be rated to withstand mechanical forces exerted curing short-circuit conditions when connected directly to a power source having availab e fault current of 35,000 amperes symmetrical at rated voltage as shown on the drawings. B. Voltage rating shall be as indicated on the drawings. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION A. Switchboard shall consist of the required number of vertical sections bolted together to form a rigid assembly. The sides and rear shall be covered with removable volt-on covers. All edges of front covers or hinged front panels shall be formed. Provide acequate ventilation within the enclosure. B. All sections of the switchboard shall be front and rear-aligned with depth as required. All protective devices shall be group mounted. Devices shall be front removable and load connections front accessible enabling switchboard to be mounted against a wall. C. The assembly shall be provided with adequate lifting means. D. The switchboard shall be suitable for use as service entrance equipment and be labeled in accordance with UL requirements. E. An insulating flash shield shall be mounted above each circuit breaker to prevent flashover from the arc chutes to ground. F. Provide a metal barrier full height and depth between adjacent vertical structures in the cable compartment. G. Small wiring and necessary fuse blocks and terminal blocks within the switchboard shall be furnished as required. Control components mounted within the assembly shall be suitably marked for identification corresponding to the appropriate designations on manufacturer's wiring diagrams. H. Provide a front accessible, isolated vertical wireway for routing of factory and field wiring. Factory provisions shall be made for securing field wiring without the need for adhesive wire anchors. I. Front access to all circuit breaker load connection points shall be provided for ease of troubleshooting and connection to external field connections without the need for removing the circuit breaker for access. J. Provide Seismic Tested Equipment as follows: The equipment and major components shall be suitable for and certified to meet Seismic Design Category B all applicable seismic requirements of the International Building Code (IBC). Guidelines for the installation consistent with these requirements shall be provided by the switchboard manufacturer and be based upon testing of representative equipment. Section 26 14 15-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.04 BUS A. All bus bars shall be tin-plated copper. Main horizontal bus bars shall be mounted with all three phases arranged in the same vertical plane. Bus sizing shall be based on NEMA standard temperature rise criteria of 65°C over a 40°C ambient (outside the enclosure). In addition to full UL air clearances, the phase bus shall be insulated. All bus joints shall be silver-plated. Removable boots shall be provided to give access to all bus joints for inspection and maintenance. The bus shall be arranged to permit future additions. B. Provide a full-capacity neutral bus where a neutral bus is indicated on the drawings. If neutral bus is not required, provide neutral landing lugs. C. A copper ground bus (minimum 1/4-inch by 2-inch) shall be furnished firmly secured to each vertical section structure and shall extend the entire length of the switchboard. D. All hardware used on conductors shall be high-tensile strength and zinc plated. All bus joints shall be provided with conical spring-type washers. 2.05 WIRING/TERMINATIONS A. Small wiring, necessary fuse blocks, and terminal blocks within the switchboard shall be provided as required. Control components mounted within the assembly, such as fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, switches, etc., shall be suitably marked for identification corresponding to appropriate designations on manufacturer's wiring diagrams. Identification shall be on the backpanel and not on the components themselves. B. Mechanical-type terminals shall be provided for all line and load terminations suitable for copper or aluminum cable rated for 75°C of the size as indicated on the drawings. C. Lugs shall be provided in the incoming line section for connection of the main grounding conductor.Additional lugs for connection of other grounding conductors shall be provided as indicated on the drawings. D. All control wire shall be Type SIS, bundled and secured with nylon ties. Insulated locking spade terminals shall be provided for all control connections, except where saddle-type terminals are provided integral to a device. All current transformer secondary leads shall first be connected to conveniently accessible short-circuit terminal blocks before connecting to any other device. All groups of control wires leaving the switchboard shall be provided with terminals blocks with suitable numbering strips.Wire markers shall be permanently attached wrap-around adhesive, sleeve or heat shrink-type labels. Wire numbering preprinted on the conductor, flag-type labels, and individual wraparound numbers (such as Brady preprinted markers) are not acceptable. 2.06 LOW-VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Main protective devices shall be fixed-mounted insulated case low-voltage power circuit breakers, Eaton Type "SB," or equal. Frame ratings shall be 1,200 amperes. All breakers shall be UL listed for application in their intended enclosures for 100% of their continuous ampere rating. B. Breakers shall be mechanically operated (MO). Section 26 14 15-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. All insulated case circuit breakers shall have a minimum symmetrical interrupting capacity of 35,000 amperes. To provide a selective system, all circuit breakers snail have 30-cycle short-time withstand ratings equal to 18 times their frame ratings. Insulated case circuit breakers without an instantaneous trip element adjustment shall be equipped with a fixed internal instantaneous override set at that level. — D. All insulated case circuit breakers shall be constructed and tested in accordance with UL 1066. The circuit breakers shall carry a UL label. E. Main insulated case circuit breakers shall be provided with trip units as specified in Paragraph 2.07 below. F. To facilitate lifting, the insulated case circuit breaker shall have integral handles on the side of the breaker. The insulated case circuit breaker shall have a closing time of not more than three cycles. The primary contacts shall have an easily accessible wear indicator to indicate contact erosion. G. The insulated case circuit breaker shall have three windows in the front cover to clearly indicate any electrical accessories that are mounted in the breaker. The accessory shall have a label that will indicate its function and voltage. The accessories shall be plug and lock type and UL listed for easy field installation. They shall be modular in design and shall be common to all frame sizes and ratings. H. The breaker control interface shall have color-coded visual indicators to indicate contact open or closed positions as well as mechanism charged and discharged positions. Manual control pushbuttons on the breaker face shall be provided for opening and closing the breaker. The power circuit breaker shall have a "Positive On" feature. The breaker flag shall read "Closed" if the contacts are welded and the breaker is attempted to be tripped or opened. I. The current sensors shall have a back cover window that will permit v ewing the sensor rating on the back of the breaker. A rating plug shall offer indication of the rating on the front of the trip unit. J. Each insulated case circuit breaker shall offer 60 front-mounted dedicated secondary wiring points. Each wiring point shall have finger-safe contacts which will accommodate No. 10 AWG maximum field connections with ring tongue or spade terminals or bare wire. 2.07 TRIP UNITS FOR LOW-VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Each low-voltage power circuit breaker shall be equipped with a solid-state tripping system consisting of three current sensors, microprocessor-based trip device and flux transfer shunt trip. Current sensors shall provide operation and signal function. The trip unit shall use microprocessor-based technology to provide the basic adjustable time current protection functions. True RMS sensing circuit protection shall be achieved by analyzing the secondary current signals received from the circuit breaker current sensors and initiating trip signals to the circuit breaker trip actuators when predetermined trip levels and time delay settings are reached. Interchangeable rating plugs shall establish the continuous trip ratings of each circuit breaker. Trip units shall be Eaton, type Digitrip RMS (520MC), or equal. Section 26 14 15-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. The trip shall have an information system that utilizes battery backed-up LEDs to indicate mode of trip following an automatic trip operation. The indication of the mode of trip shall be retained after an automatic trip. A red trip reset button shall be provided to turn off the LED indication after an automatic trip.A test pushbutton shall energize an LED to indicate battery status. C. The trip unit shall be provided with a display panel, including a representation of the time/current curve that will indicate the protection functions. The unit shall be continuously self-checking and provide a visual indication that the internal circuitry is being monitored and is fully operational. D. The trip unit shall be provided with a making current release circuit.The circuit shall be armed for approximately 2 cycles after breaker closing, and shall operate for all peak fault levels above 25 times the ampere value of the rating plug. E. Trip unit shall have thermal memory for enhanced circuit protection. F. Trip unit shall have arc flash reduction maintenance mode feature. Provide a selector switch on the front of the switchboard to toggle trip unit into arc flash reduction maintenance mode. Provide an auxiliary maintenance mode enabled contact rated for 5 amps at 120-volt AC on the selector switch for monitoring at the plant SCADA system. G. The trip unit shall have provisions for a single test kit to test each of the trip functions. H. The trip unit shall provide zone interlocking for the short-time delay and ground fault delay trip functions for improved system coordination. The zone interlocking system shall restrain the tripping of an upstream breaker and allow the breaker closest to the fault to trip with no intentional time delay. In the event that the downstream breaker does not trip, the upstream breaker shall trip after the preset time delay. I. The trip unit shall include a power/relay module which shall supply control power to the readout display. Following an automatic trip operation of the circuit breaker, the trip unit shall maintain the cause of trip history and the mode of trip LED indication as long as its internal power supply is available. An internal relay shall be programmable to provide contacts for remote ground alarm indication. J. The trip unit shall include a voltage transformer module suitable for operation up to 600 volts, 50/60 Hz. The primary of the power relay module shall be connected internally to the line side of the circuit breaker through a dielectric test disconnect plug. K. System coordination shall be provided by the following microprocessor-based programmable time current curve-shaping adjustments. The short-time pickup adjustment shall be dependent on the long delay setting. 1. Programmable long-time setting. 2. Programmable long-time delay with selectable 12t. 3. Programmable short-time setting. 4. Programmable short-time delay with selectable flat or 12t curve-shaping and zone-selective interlocking. 5. Programmable instantaneous setting. 6. Programmable ground fault setting trip or ground fault setting alarm. 7. Programmable ground fault delay with selectable flat or 12t curve-shaping and zone-selective interlocking. Section 26 14 15-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.08 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Feeder-protective devices shall be molded-case circuit breakers with inverse time and instantaneous tripping characteristics, and shall be Eaton, or equal. - B. Circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle and shall have a quick-make, quick-break, over-center switching mechanism that is mechanically trip-free. Automatic tripping of the breaker shall be clearly indicated by the handle position. Contacts shall be nonwelding silver alloy, and arc extinction shall be accomplished by means of DE-ION arc chutes. A push-to-trip button on the front of the circuit breaker shall provide a local manual means to exercise the trip mechanism. C. Circuit breakers shall have a minimum symmetrical interrupting capacity cf 35,000 amperes RMS at rated voltage. D. Circuit breakers 250 amperes frame and below shall be Eaton with thermal magnetic trip units and inverse time-current characteristics. E. Circuit breakers 250 amperes through 800 amperes frame shall be Eaton with microprocessor-based RMS sensing trip units. 1. Each molded case circuit breaker microprocessor-based tripping system shall consist of three current sensors, a trip unit, and a flux transfer shunt trip. The trip unit shall use microprocessor-based technology to provide the adjustable time-current protection functions. True RMS sensing circuit protection shall be achieved by analyzing the secondary current signals received from the circuit breaker current sensors and initiating trip signals to the circuit breaker trip actuators when predetermined trip levels and time-delay settings are reached. 2. An adjustable trip setting dial mounted on the front of the trip unit or interchangeable rating plugs shall establish the continuous trip ratings of each circuit breaker. Rating plugs shall be adjustable. Rating plugs shall be interlocked so they are not interchangeable between frames, and interlocked so that a breaker cannot be closed and latched with the rating plug removed. 3. The microprocessor-based trip unit shall have both powered and unpowered thermal memory to provide protection against cumulative overheating should a number of overload conditions occur in quick succession. 4. When the adjustable instantaneous setting is omitted, the trip unit shall be provided with an instantaneous override. 5. Breakers shall have built-in test points for testing the long time delay, instantaneous and ground fault functions of the breaker by means of a test set. Provide one test set capable of testing all breakers 225 amperes frame and above. ._ 6. System coordination shall be provided by the following microprocessor-based, time-current, curve-shaping adjustments: a. Adjustable long-time setting. b. Adjustable short-time setting and delay with selective curve shap ng. c. Adjustable instantaneous setting. d. Adjustable ground fault setting and delay. 7. Trip units shall be microprocessor-based RMS-sensing type Digitrip RMS 310+. -- Section 26 14 15-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 F. Ground fault protection shall be provided where indicated and for all breakers 1000 amps and larger. 2.09 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES A. Key interlocks shall be provided as indicated on the drawings. B. Control power transformers with primary and secondary protection shall be provided as required for proper operation of the equipment. C. All control power within the switchboard assembly shall be 120 volts and shall be provided from control power transformers integral to the switchboard. D. Provide handle extensions for all molded case circuit breakers 400 amperes and larger. 2.10 ENCLOSURES A. Indoor NEMA 1 gasketed enclosure. 2.11 NAMEPLATES A. A nameplate shall be mounted on the front door of each vertical section in accordance with Section 26 05 53—Electrical Identification. B. Control components mounted within the assembly such as fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, switches, etc., shall be suitably marked for identification corresponding to appropriate designations on manufacturer's wiring diagrams. Identification shall be on the back panel and not on the components themselves.2.12 FINISH A. All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the switchboard shall be properly cleaned and provided with a rust-inhibiting phosphatized coating. Color and finish of the switchboard shall be ANSI 61 light gray. _. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 FACTORY TESTING A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of ANSI and NEMA standards. The switchboard shall be completely assembled, wired, adjusted, and tested at the factory. After assembly, the complete switchboard shall be tested for operation under simulated service conditions to check the accuracy of the wiring and the functioning of all equipment. The main circuits shall be given a dielectric test of 2,200 volts for 1 minute between live parts, and ground and between opposite polarities. The wiring and control circuits shall be given a dielectric test of 1,500 volts for 1 minute between live parts and ground. Section 26 14 15-8 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. The manufacturer shall provide three certified copies of factory test repors. 3.02 FIELD ADJUSTMENTS A. CONTRACTOR shall perform field adjustments of the protective devices as required to place the equipment in final operating condition. The settings shall be in accordance with the final version of the Short-Circuit Study and Protective Device Coordination Study. B. Necessary field settings of devices, adjustments, and minor modifications to equipment to accomplish conformance with the final version of the Short-Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Study shall be carried out by CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to CITY. 3.03 FIELD START-UP AND COMMISSIONING A. Provide the services of a qualified factory-trained manufacturer's representative to assist CONTRACTOR in installation and start-up of the equipment specified in this section. The manufacturer's representative shall provide technical direction and assistance to CONTRACTOR in general operation of the equipment, connections and adjustments, and testing of the assembly and components contained therein. B. The manufacturer's representative shall provide inspection of the fina installation. The manufacturer's representative shall perform site start-up and functional checkout of the equipment. Upon completion of the manufacturer's start-up and checkout, the manufacturer shall generate a site start-up and functional checkout report, documenting all systems checked, as well as any incomplete work remaining and operational deficiencies. C. CONTRACTOR shall provide three copies of the manufacturer's site start-up and functional checkout report to CONSULTANT for review. Once CONSULTANT has reviewed the report and all equipment is operating in accordance with the specifications, CONSULTANT will make one site visit to check operation of the equipment. If the equipment is not ready or does not operate as specified, CITY shall deduct payment to CONTRACTOR and make payment to CONSULTANT for additional travel, expenses, and site visits until the equipment operates as specified. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all costs required to check operation of the system. 3.04 TRAINING A. Upon successful completion of checkout by CONSULTANT, a manufacturer's representative shall provide a demonstration of the sequences of operation. After this demonstration and acceptance by CITY, the manufacturer shall provide 4 hours of"hands-on"training for CITY's operating personnel which shall cover the following topics: 1. Overall System Description and Theory of Operation. 2. Manual Operation. 3. Safeties and Protective Devices. 4. Recommended System Check Lists and Log Sheets. 5. Recommended Preventative Maintenance. - Section 26 14 15-9 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. One 4-hour training session for two operators shall be provided. The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer's qualified representative. Training program shall include instructions on the assembly, controls, protective devices, and other major components. Travel time and expenses to the jobsite shall be over and above the time required to perform the training and shall be included in the Bid. END OF SECTION Section 26 14 15-10 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 26 24 19 MOTOR CONTROL PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Motor control devices, accessories, and general requirements. 2. Manual motor starters. 3. Magnetic motor starters. 4. Variable frequency drives. 5. Motor control centers. B. Related Sections and Divisions: 1. Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 2. All other sections of Division 26. PART 1—GENERAL 1 1.01 SUMMARY 1 1.02 REFERENCES 1 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE 2 1.04 SUBMITTALS 2 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 2 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HOLDING 2 1.07 SPARE PARTS 2 1.08 COORDINATION 2 1.09 WARRANTY 3 PART 2—PRODUCTS 3 _ 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 3 2.02 MOTOR CONTROL DEVICES, ACCESSORIES, AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 3 2.03 MANUAL MOTOR CONTROLLERS 5 2.04 MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS 5 2.05 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 6 2.06 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS 9 -- PART 3—EXECUTION 12 3.01 INSTALLATION 12 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NEMA ICS 6—Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. B. NEMA AB 1—Molded Case Circuit Breakers. C. NEMA ICS 2—Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. D. NEMA ICS-18—Motor Control Centers. E. NEMA KS 1—Enclosed Switches. Section 26 24 19-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 F. NEMA PB 1—Panelboards. G. NEMA PB 1.1—Instruction for Safe Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers of Motor Control Equipment: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of motor control equipment of the types and capacities required whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years. B. UL Labels: Provide motor control devices, manual motor controllers, magnetic motor starters, solid-state starters, variable frequency drives, combination motor starters, motor control centers, etc., which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Provide product data on motor starters, VFDs, relays, pilot devices, and switching and overcurrent protective devices. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Include spare parts data listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HOLDING A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. B. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to motor control center components, enclosure, and finish. 1.07 SPARE PARTS A. Furnish spare parts for equipment specified herein as listed in Section 26 95 10—Spare — Parts. 1.08 COORDINATION A. To provide proper coordination between Section 26 09 00—Controls and Instrumentation, and equipment specified herein, all equipment specified in this section shall be supplied as part of the Controls and Instrumentation package described in Section 26 09 00. This shall include, but not be limited to, equipment such as MCCs, stand-alone VFDs, stand-alone Section 26 24 19-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 motor controllers, combination starters, and control stations. Drawings for MCCs, combination starters, motor controllers, and motor control equipment shall be provided by the Section 26 09 00 System Supplier. Drawings from equipment manufacturers will not be accepted as shop drawings or O&M documents. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substantial Completion of the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Motor control devices, motor starters, variable frequency drives, and mo:or control centers shall be as manufactured by Allen-Bradley, or equal, as approved by CONSULTANT and in accordance with substitutions under provisions of the General Conditicns. All equipment specified in this section and provided by CONTRACTOR shall Le by the same manufacturer. B. The drawings and specifications were prepared based on Allen-Bradle/. CONTRACTOR shall include in the Bid and shall be responsible for the cost of any changes to accommodate other equipment including, but not limited to, structural, mechanical, and electrical work. CONTRACTOR shall also pay additional costs necessa'y for revisions of drawings and/or specifications by CONSULTANT. 2.02 MOTOR CONTROL DEVICES, ACCESSORIES, AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2; two field convertible contacts minimum, in addition to seal-in contact, or as necessary. B. Push buttons: NEMA ICS 2; heavy-duty, oiltight (30 mm) as shown on the drawings. Pushbuttons in exposed, outdoor locations shall be rated NEMA 4X. C. Indicating Lights: NEMA ICS 2; heavy-duty, oiltight (30 mm), LED, push-to-test type as shown on the drawings. Indicating lights in exposed, outdoor locations shall be rated NEMA 4X. D. Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2; heavy-duty, oiltight, (30 mm) as showr on the drawings. Selector switches in exposed, outdoor locations shall be rated NEMA 4X. E. Timing Relays: UL listed with On and Timing-Out LEDs. F. Contactors: NEMA ICS 2. All contactors for starters specified herein shall be NEMA rated. IEC contactors are not allowed. Contactors shall be Allen-Bradley, Bulletin 509, or equal. G. Control Power Transformers: 240/120-volt secondary. Each motor starter shall have a dedicated control power transformer. Section 26 24 19-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 H. Elapsed Time Meters: Redington/Engler 722 series, or equal, 3 inches round, flush door mounted, capable of reading up to 99,999.9 hours, nonreset type. I. Industrial control and power relays shall be installed in motor control centers, pump control panels, and motor starter enclosures where required by System Supplier. Relays used to interface with PLC I/O, motor control circuits, hard-wired control logic, and for loads less than 8 amps shall be terminal style, interposing/isolation relays. Relays for inductive loads, alarm lights, alarm horns, field wiring, or loads up to 15 amps shall be industrial, general purpose square base relays. Relays for loads greater than 15 amps shall be industrial, electrically held power relays. Relays shall meet the following requirements: 1. Interposing/isolation relays: a. Configuration: SPDT or DPDT as required by System Supplier. — b. Mounting: DIN rail with screw terminal base socket. c. Voltage: 120 VAC, or as required by System Supplier. d. Contact rating: 8A(DPDT), 16 A(SPDT). e. Operating life: 10 million cycles. f. Status: On-Off flag-type or LED indicator. g. UL listed. —. h. Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley, 700 HK, or equal. 2. General purpose relays: a. Configuration: DPDT or 3 PDT as required by system supplier. b. Mounting: DIN rail with screw terminal base socket. c. Voltage: 120 Vac. d. Contact rating: 15 A, minimum; 3/4 hp. e. Operating life: 10 million cycles. f. Status: On-Off flag type or LED indicator. g. UL listed. h. Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley, 700-HB, or equal. 3. Power relays. a. Configuration: Electrically-held, 2-12 poles. b. Mounting: DIN rail, square base.c. Voltage: 120 Vac. d. Contact rating: 20 A continuous; 1 hp. e. Operating life: 10 million cycles. f. UL listed. g. NEMA rated. h. Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley, 700-PK, or equal. 4. All timing relays shall have On and timing Out LEDs. J. Manufacturer of Accessories: 1. Terminal blocks shall meet the equipment of Section 26 05 19—Wire. 2. Wire markers shall meet the requirements of Section 26 05 53—Electrical Identification. K. All motor control power shall be 120 volts with suitable protection (fuses or breakers). Fuse holders shall be provided with integral LEDs to indicate when the fuse is blown. L. All starters shall be equipped with the auxiliary devices to meet the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. Each starter operating at other than 120-volt, single-phase shall be equipped with a control transformer providing 120-volt secondary for control power. Transformer shall have fused primary and secondary connections and shall be sized per manufacturer's recommendations. Coils and pilot lights in all starters shall be 120 volts. Section 26 24 19-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 M. Enclosures for Stand-Alone Controllers, Starters, and Control Devices: 1. Enclosures in indoor dry locations shall be NEMA 1 gasketed. 2. Enclosures in indoor damp or wet locations, outdoor locations, or locations below grade shall be NEMA 4X, stainless steel. 3. Starters and disconnect devices for motors shall be installed in common enclosures, — combination type, with all accessories such as terminal blocks, push-to-test pilot lights, and H-O-A switches. 4. All wiring within starter enclosures shall be landed on terminal blocks. This shall include internal control wiring, field wiring, and any spare or unused wiring. 5. Control stations shall include devices as shown on the Drawings and specified in Section 26 09 00—Controls and Instrumentation. N. Hardwired Motor Controls: 1. Equipment and wiring specified to be hardwired shall be physically wired independent _ of controllers, programmable relays, and communication systems to allow manual operation in the event of an emergency. 2. Motor control wiring and logic shall be set up such that in the event ref a power failure, equipment shall automatically restart if previously running, or rema n off if previously off. A manual reset shall not be required to restart equipment following a power failure. 2.03 MANUAL MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. Where noted on the drawings, controllers for motors rated 2 hp or les >, for operation at 120 V or 240 V single-phase, shall be specification grade wall switches as specified in Section 26 27 26—Wiring Devices. 2.04 MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS A. Magnetic Motor Starters: NEMA ICS 2; AC general-purpose Class A magnetic controller for induction motors rated in horsepower. Each magnetic starter shall be equipped with a solid-state overload relay, Allen-Bradley El Plus, Bulletin 592-EE, or equal. Starters for submersible pumps, mixers, and motors installed outdoors shall include ground fault protection. B. Full-Voltage Starting: Reversing or nonreversing type as shown on the drawings. C. Coil Operating Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hz. D. Size: NEMA ICS 2; size as shown on the drawings. Contactors shall be Allen-Bradley, Bulletin 505 (Reversing), or Bulletin 509 (Nonreversing), or equal. E. Overload relays shall have the following features: 1. Self-powered, solid-state. 2. Up to 5:1 adjustment range. 3. DIP switch settings for trip class and reset mode. 4. Current transformers (no heaters). 5. Thermal memory. 6. Ambient temperature compensation. 7. Visible trip indicators. 8. Phase loss protection. 9. Low energy consumption. -- Section 26 24 19-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 10. Ground fault protection as specified herein. F. Magnetic motor starters in motor control centers shall be combined with magnetic only molded case circuit breakers. Magnetic motor starters in control panels shall be combined with thermal-magnetic molded case circuit breakers. G. Through-the-door overload reset pushbuttons shall be provided for all magnetic starters installed in motor control centers. 2.05 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES A. A variable frequency drive (VFD) system consists of enclosed inverter, motor starter, motor, and any additional system control as specified. VFDs shall be provided to match the load type (constant or variable torque) of the specification application, as well as the full load amps of the motor furnished for the project. B. System Operating Conditions: 1. 480 Vac ±10%. -. 2. Three-phase, 3-wire, any phase sequence. 3. 60 Hz ±2%. 4. Storage temperature -25°C to +55°C. 5. Operating temperature 0 to 40°C. 6. Altitude: 3,300 feet above sea level maximum. 7. Humidity: 95% noncondensing maximum. C. Variable Frequency Unit: 1. Conform to NEMA and NEC standards. 2. CSA and ETL approved and/or UL approved. -" 3. Overall VFD efficiency shall be a minimum of 96.5%, ±1%, at 100% speed and motor load at nominal line voltage. Efficiency rating shall include control power supplies, control circuits, and all cooling fans. 4. Input: a. Withstand without component failure line voltage transients up to 3,000 volts per ANSI C37. b. Design shall include DC bus chokes (two) used in conjunction with one or more capacitors. The DC bus chokes shall be incorporated in the design to minimize line-side harmonics. Magnetic-only designs shall include line filters to limit harmonics to a value no greater than in a system using dual DC bus chokes. c. Include MOV line-side protection. d. Inverter input for six pulse VFDs shall have a true power factor of 0.95 or better at rated load and nominal line voltage throughout the entire speed range. e. Units shall be capable of operating attached to the same power bus without affecting each other's operations. If operational problems occur, an isolation transformer shall be added to each drive at no additional Contract cost. f. Three percent line reactors (drives smaller than 100 hp). g. Drives larger than 40 hp shall include fuses on the drive input. Fuses shall be provided with indicating-type fuse blocks. 5. Inverter Output: a. Inverter shall utilize latest generation IGBTs, be microprocessor based, and isolated from power circuits. b. Match motor specified. c. Three-phase, three-wire. Section 26 24 19-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 d. Pulse width modulated wave form with selectable Sensorless V actor, Flux Vector, Volts/Hertz, and adjustable voltage control modes. e. Maximum output 460 volts. f. Frequency 2 to 650 Hz. g. Frequency accuracy ±1% of setting at any point in the specified speed range in a 24-hour period. h. Full load output current shall be rated in excess of the AC motor :elected. i. Motor performance: (1) 3% regulation in the manual speed control mode. (2) Normal duty overload rating: 110% continuous current for 1 minute; 150% for 3 seconds. (3) Heavy-duty overload rating: 150% continuous current for 1 minute; 180% for 3 seconds. (4) 110% starting torque minimum. 6. AC drive features: a. Embedded I/O for discrete and analog signals. Analog signals shall include 4-20 mA circuitry mounted on separate printed circuit board to include offset, slope, minimum clamp, and separate acceleration and deceleration adjustments from 0 to 3600 seconds. An internal manual speed potentiometer is to be provided for simulating the 4-20 mA input for start-up and maintenance. The circuit is to be designed to accept either a positive or negative signal, grounded or ungrounded. b. Embedded 100BASE-TX Ethernet port supporting the Ethernet/IP protocol. c. Slot-based architecture for expansion control and communication cards including Ethernet/IP, ControlNet, DeviceNet, Modbus TCP, discrete I/O, and analog I/O. d. Real-time clock with battery for date/time stamping of events. e. Integral thermostat control of door-mounted cooling fans. f. Current limit circuitry: 20% to 160% of drive-rated amps. g. Additional features for constant torque units shall include: (1) IR compensation to provide automatic voltage boost or recjction to optimize both starting torque and system input kW. (2) Slip compensation to provide 0.5% regulation with a 100% oad change. (3) Inner current loop regulator. 7. Enclosures: a. The VFD system shall be furnished with NEMA-rated (as previously specified) wall-mounting enclosure, as shown on the drawings, or floor-mounting MCC structure or structures. MCC structures shall be 91 1/2 inches high by 20 inches deep with a width to accept the unit specified. MCC structure shall incorporate bus where field wiring can be reduced. b. Items to be mounted in the VFD structure or structures: (1) Inverter. (2) Incoming door interlocked, magnetic, molded-case circuit breaker. c. NEMA 4/13 items to be door-mounted on the MCC structure or portion of the structure or enclosure: (1) Control devices, pilot lights, selector switches, etc., as shown on the drawings and specified herein. (2) Interface to the drive shall be via a removable Human Interface Module (HIM) with integral display. This unit shall be a 7-line by 21-character backlit LCD display with graphics capability. HIM shall be used to display drive-operating conditions, fault/alarm indications, and programming information with full text support in multiple languages. The LCD HIM shall be rated IP20/Type 1 and may also be used as a handheld terminal by connecting via a separate cable. The HIM keypad shall include programming -- Section 26 24 19-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 keys, drive operating keys (Start, Stop, Direction, Jog, and Speed Control), numeric keys for direct entry and an ALT (alternate function) key to allow drive programming or operating functions to be accessed directly without knowledge of programming structure. The HIM unit shall be mounted on the front of the enclosure door so the operator does not have to open the enclosure to access the HIM. (3) Control devices, pilot lights, selector switches, etc., as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 8. Interlocks: a. Fault contact to terminals. b. VFD run contact to terminals. 9. VFD protection: a. Adjustable current limit of 20 to 160% minimum. b. Instantaneous overcurrent trip. c. Electronic ground fault and short-circuit protection to shut down the drive without fuse or component failure. Electronic ground- and short-circuit protection to be functional with an input line of 480 Vac ±10%. The drive manufacturer is to be prepared to demonstrate ground fault and short-circuit protection without the use ,.. of an isolation transformer at drive start-up. d. Input thermal-magnetic ambient compensated circuit breaker with a through-the-door interlocked operator. e. Shut down on loss of any input phase for longer than 3 cycles. f. Output phase sequence to be independent of input phase sequence. g. High- or low-sustained voltage. h. 120 Vac grounded control circuits. —' i. Electrically and/or optically isolated low voltage logic. j. Corrosion protection: (1) Gold-plated plugs (male and female section) on all printed circuit boards. — (2) Protective board coating (conformal coating). k. MOV converter protection. I. DC bus chokes to minimize line side current harmonics. -- m. Additional features for constant torque units: (1) I2T protection to provide 150% current for one minute. (2) Regenerative override protection. _ 10. VFD adjustments: a. Maximum speed: 50 to 100%. b. Minimum speed: 0 to 70%. c. Current limit: 20 to 110%, 160% on constant torque units. d. Linear acceleration 0 to 3,600 seconds. e. Linear deceleration 0 to 3,600 seconds. f. Output volts/Hz trim.g. Voltage boosts. h. Additional features for constant torque units: (1) Slip compensation. — (2) IR compensation. i. All drives shall attempt to restart three times prior to indicating failure. 11. Inverter digital or LED diagnostic features: — a. Current limit signal. b. Regenerative override signal. c. External fault (e.g., motor overload). d. Low line voltage. e. High line voltage. Section 26 24 19-8 4463.004/City Contract No.994 f. Current overload. g. High DC bus voltage. h. Current trip. — i. Short-circuit. 12. Inverter construction: a. Modular construction for ease of maintenance. — 13. Mount modules on enclosure subpanel: a. Easily accessible from front. b. Interconnect with plugs. c. Construct boards of fire-retardant materials in accordance with NEMA grade FR4 specifications. D. Inverter Quality Control: 1. Test all power devices at rated temperature and current for dv,dt, tq, TRR, and leakage. 2. Test integrated circuits for programmed parameters at rated temperature. 3. Treat printed circuit boards for corrosion resistance (conformal coating). 4. Provide gold-plated connections at all points where plugs are used. 5. Thermal cycle all printed circuit boards for 10 cycles between 0` to 65°C prior to installation in inverter. 6. All units to be tested at a rated load and temperature after assembly. E. The variable speed drives shall be Allen-Bradley, or equal, Powerflex 7; 5. All drives shall be by the same manufacturer. F. Minimum, maximum, and harmonic skip speed setpoints shall be programmed into each VFD. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate these setpoints with the manufacturer of the equipment served. CONTRACTOR shall provide a table listing the minimum, maximum, and skip setpoints programmed into each VFD on the project to CONSULTANT and CITY. G. Provide expansion I/O cards, quantity as required, so that signals noted in the I/O list are transmitted/received to/from the plant SCADA System via the Ethernet network. H. Provide manufacturer certified start-up and warranty service for each FD. Service shall be for 2 years and include all travel and expenses. Warranty service snail commence at the date of substantial completion. 2.06 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS A. Starters and disconnect devices for motors shall be installed in MCCs ex ;ept where shown to be remote-mounted at the motor location. Starters and disconnect devices shall be NEMA rated, sized according to application as specified. The MCC and NEMA Class IIB drawings shall be supplied as part of the Controls and Instrumentation package described in Section 26 09 00—Controls and Instrumentation. MCC drawings provided by the MCC manufacturer or through any contractor will not be accepted as shop drawing submittals or O&M documents. System supplier described in Section 26 09 00—Controls and Instrumentation shall wire and test all MCCs for the functions described herein in its shop prior to shipment to the site. Provide one copy of the test report to CONSULTANT. B. It shall be assumed that colors will be selected by CITY and shall be n anstandard. Color shall match that specified for control enclosures specified in Section 26 09 00—Controls and Instrumentation. Section 26 24 19-9 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Auxiliary contacts shall be of quantity necessary for equipment functions. D. MCC design shall be in accordance with latest applicable NEMA standards, shall have been tested to prove adequate mechanical and electrical capabilities, and all major components shall have been individually tested. E. Structures shall be totally enclosed, dead front, free-standing vertical sections, 90 inches high and not less than 20 inches deep for front-mounted units and not more than 40 inches deep for units mounted back-to-back. Each vertical section shall have side panels extending the full height of the section to minimize fault-propagation to adjacent sections. F. Each structure shall contain a main horizontal bus continuously braced within each section, with rating as specified, and vertical bus feeding unit compartments with a minimum rating of 300 amperes, or as necessary for load and feeder breakers. All horizontal and vertical bus of all MCC sections shall be powered regardless of location of transfer switch, unless otherwise noted. All motor control centers shall include a 1/4-inch by 2-inch ground bus. All bus shall be tin-plated copper and braced to withstand short-circuit currents as indicated. G. Structures shall contain a horizontal wireway at the top, isolated from the horizontal bus, and shall be readily accessible by removal of its cover plate. Adequate space for conduit and wiring to enter the top or bottom shall be provided without structural interference and accessible without disrupting service. H. A vertical wireway with a minimum of 28 square inches of cross-sectional area shall be adjacent to each vertical unit compartment and shall be covered by its own door. These vertical wireways shall be free of all live parts and shall contain vertical wireway tie bars. Exceptions to this are as shown on the drawings. I. All units shall be provided with a mechanical interlock with the unit door to prevent access unless the disconnect is in the off position. A defeater shall be provided to bypass this interlock. With the door open, an interlock shall be provided to prevent inadvertent closing of the disconnect. J. Padlocking facilities shall be provided to positively lock the disconnect in either the on or off position with from one to three padlocks whether the door is open or closed. K. All disconnect operating handles located higher than 6 feet 7 inches above finished floor in the on position (including the MCC pad height) shall be provided with handle extensions. All disconnect operating handles above this height must operate in the vertical direction. L. All unit heights shall be of modular dimensions to allow for unit layout, in any combination, without structural interference. Drawout units shall have a tin-plated stab assembly for connection to the vertical bus; no wiring to these stabs shall extend into the bus compartments. All bus access openings shall be provided with automatic shutters that close when the unit (e.g., starter, breaker) is withdrawn. M. Terminal blocks for NEMA Type B assemblies shall be mounted within the unit and shall be factory-wired. Provide a minimum of 25% spare terminals for all terminal blocks furnished. N. Control centers shall be NEMA Class II. Section 26 24 19-10 4463.004/City Contract No.994 O. Wiring in control centers shall be Type B. All conductors supplying pov;er from the MCC bus to frame-mounted equipment shall have the phases identifiec as specified in Section 26 05 53—Electrical Identification. P. Provide neutral landing lugs for all MCCs accepting service-entrance conductors. Neutral landing lugs shall be bonded to the ground bus at the service entrance unless otherwise noted. Q. Control centers shall include NEMA 1 gasketed enclosures, unless otherwise noted. R. Remote-mounted controls shall be heavy-duty, oiltight (30 mm) of same quality and type furnished in starters and as shown on the drawings. Equipment controls that require a manual reset shall be accomplished through a reset push button on the ,enclosure or MCC bucket for the associated piece of equipment. All reset buttons shall be appropriately labeled, including mechanical type. S. MCC enclosures must be in accordance with area designations shown or the drawings. T. All lighting and small power transformers shall be dry type, Class H insulation, DOE 2016 Efficiency rated, 115°C rise (kVA as indicated on drawings). Coil windings shall be copper, glass-taped, dipped in silicone varnish, with two taps 2 1/2% above and below, 480-volt primary, Delta with 120/208-volt, three-phase, 4-wire secondary, unless indicated otherwise. Circuit breakers that feed lighting panel transformers shall be provided with electronic sensing, timing, and tripping circuits for adjustable current settings. Provide adjustable long-time pickup, long-time delay, short-time pickup, short-time delay, and instantaneous pickup settings. U. All lighting panelboards shall be Eaton Pow R-Line 1 a, or equal, with 10,000 amps interrupting capacity, at 120/208-volt, three-phase, 4-wire with branch breakers as shown on the drawings, unless indicated otherwise. Branch-mounted main circuit breakers will not be allowed. Minimum size shall be 20 inches wide by 5 3/4 inches deep. All bus shall be aluminum. Provide laminated, typewritten panel schedule for all panelboards at project final completion. V. All motor control centers shall be factory-assembled, wired, and tested. All internal wiring shall be numbered, and each wire shall be terminated on terminal strips, including internal spares, field wiring, and spare field wires. Schematic and wiring layout drawings following JIC Standards which show all connections to external devices, a complete bill of materials, and a detailed description of operation, shall be submitted for each piece of equipment. W. Arrangement and physical locations of all equipment within each motor control center shall be subject to shop drawing approval. X. All components shall be properly identified with laminated engraved nameplates with 3/8-inch-high letters (white or black). Nameplates located outdoors shall be stainless steel screw on type. Nameplates located indoors shall be adhesive type. Y. Unless otherwise indicated, all conduit entrances shall be through the bottom only. Z. MCC interrupting rating shall be as shown on the drawings, minimum 42,_)00 A. Section 26 24 19-11 4463.004/City Contract No.994 AA. The main breaker or main lugs of each MCC shall be provided with a surge protection device and a three-phase monitor. This surge protection device shall be on the load side of the main and be as specified in Section 26 43 13—Surge Protective Devices. The three-phase monitor shall be on the load side of the main and be Timemark *269, or equal. CONTRACTOR shall select voltage to match electrical service. BB. Each MCC shall be provided with a power meter and appropriately sized metering-class current transformers (CTs) installed on the load side of the MCC main breaker. Power meter shall be Allen-Bradley PowerMonitor 5000, Bulletin 1426-M5E, or equal. CTs shall be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 1411-180-XXX or 1411-8SHT-XXX as required for monitoring parallel phase conductors, or equal, and shall be rated for ANSI/IEEE C57.13 metering Class 0.3 or 0.6 accuracy. Provide CT cabling as specified in Section 26 05 23—Instrument and Communication Wire and Cable, for the specified CT accuracy class, minimum 14 AWG. Power meter shall be provided with an Ethernet/IP communications module matching the SCADA System communication protocol so that all readings can be monitored at the SCADA System HMI. Power meter shall be installed in a dedicated MCC bucket as shown on the Drawings with a remote display mounted on the MCC bucket door. The MCC bucket shall be provided with a control power transformer, fused disconnects for the control power circuit and voltage sensing lines, and CT shorting blocks as specified in Section 26 05 19—Wire. CC. Main Breaker: Molded case circuit breaker, three-pole, amperes as shown on the drawings with lugs for 480-volt, three-phase, 4-wire, 60-cycle entrance. Breakers noted on the drawings shall be GFI and 100% rated. When main breaker is the disconnecting means for a structure, breaker shall be service entrance rated. DD. Main, tie, and feeder circuit breakers shall be provided in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 26 28 00—Overcurrent Protective Devices. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide motor control equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and drawings. B. Motor Starter Panelboard Installation: In conformance with NEMA PB 1.1. C. Overloads shall be selected on the basis of nameplate horsepower and service factor. Selection of overloads based on horsepower shown on the drawings is not acceptable. �. Where power factor correction capacitors are provided, overload protection shall be compensated for the lower motor running current because of improved power factor. D. All motor control wiring shall be installed in accordance with control wiring diagrams furnished. E. Wireways in MCCs shall be used only for routing of conductors. Splices are not allowed within wireways. Section 26 24 19-12 4463.004/City Contract No.994 F. All wiring within MCCs shall be landed on terminals inside buckets or equipment compartments and not left unterminated within wireways. This shall include all internal MCC wiring and external field wiring, including spare wires. G. Motor Data: Provide neatly typed label inside each motor starter enclosure identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full-load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating. H. Control wiring and field wiring (120 V and below) within MCCs shall be separated from power wiring (277 V and above). Where possible, route control and field wiring in separate raceways or wireways. Provide a minimum of 2 inches separation between control wiring, field wiring, and power wiring. I. All motors will be provided by other divisions, ready for connections. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for electrical connections for power and control circuit wiring, proper phase relationships, and correct motor rotation. J. Provide motor circuit wiring for each motor from the source of supply to the terminal box on the motor including all intermediate connections at devices such as motor starters, disconnect switches, etc. K. All feeder cable connections to motor leads up to 600 volts shall be insulated and sealed with factory-engineered kits, as specified in Section 26 05 19—Wire. L. Provide motor starters as specified for all motors, unless shown or specif ed that starters or control equipment will be furnished by others. M. Provide motor circuit disconnect devices for all motors, unless shown or specified that disconnect devices or starters are furnished with other equipment. N. Minimize the length of current transformer cables to maintain current transformer burden below the specified accuracy burden limits. END OF SECTION -- Section 26 24 19-13 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 26 27 16 HINGED-COVER ENCLOSURES PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Hinged cover enclosures. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern Work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NEMA 250—Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). B. ANSI/NEMA ICS 1—Industrial Control and Systems. C. ANSI/NEMA ICS 6—Enclosures for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES A. Construction: NEMA 250, larger than 12 inches in any dimension. Acceptable manufacturers: Hoffman, B-Line, or equal. B. Covers: Continuous hinge, applicable NEMA rating with hasp and staple for padlock. C. Back Panel for Mounting Terminal Blocks or Electrical Components: 14 gauge steel, white enamel finish. D. All enclosures with double doors or that are free-standing shall have a 3-point latch. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Shop-assembled enclosures housing terminal blocks or electrical components in accordance with ANSI/NEMA ICS 6. B. Provide conduit hubs on all enclosures. C. Provide protective pockets inside front cover with schematic diagram, connection diagram, and layout drawing of control wiring and components within enclosure. Section 26 27 16-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 D. Provide gasketed surfaces for all enclosure doors and covers. 2.03 ENCLOSURE RATING A. Enclosures shall be rated as listed below, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings: 1. Indoor dry locations: NEMA 12, steel. — 2. Outdoor, corrosive, or wet locations: NEMA 4X, stainless steel. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install enclosures plumb. Anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each corner minimum. B. Refer to Section 26 05 53—Electrical Identification for enclosure labeling requirements. C. Provide accessory feet for free-standing equipment enclosures. D. All enclosures attached to building surfaces which may be damp shall be spaced out to avoid rust and/or corrosion.All enclosures in damp locations shall be on 1/2-inch standoffs. Damp locations shall include, but not be limited to, all basement areas, tunnel areas, washdown areas, garage areas, all wet wells and dry wells, all areas below grade, and exterior locations. END OF SECTION -- Section 26 27 16-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Wall switches. 2. Receptacles. 3. Cover plates. 4. Thermostats. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NEMA WD 1—General-Color Requirements for Wiring Devices. B. NEMA WD 5—Specific-Purpose Wiring Devices. C. Drawings—Bill of Materials. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers of switches, outlets, boxes, lamps, fuses, lugs, etc.: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of these products, of the types and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer: A firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical wiring installation work similar to that in this project. C. Code Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) and any and all local codes as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring devices, material, and equipment herein specified. D. UL Labels: Provide electrical cable, raceways, wire, connectors, outlets, switches, etc., which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories. E. NECA Standard: Comply with applicable portions of National Electrical Contractor's Association's "Standard of Installation." 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Provide product data showing configurations, finishes, dimensions, and manufacturer's instructions. Section 26 27 26-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 WALL SWITCHES A. A-C general use Industrial specification grade, snap switch, 20 amperes, 277 volts, one of the following: Cooper 222*, Leviton 122*, or Pass and Seymour PS2OAC*. B. Provide ivory-colored handles. C. Manual motor switches or manual motor controllers for 120 V or 240 V motors on circuits 20 amps or less shall be specification grade snap switch as specified above. Manual motor switches or manual motor controllers for 120 volt, 208 volt, or 240 volt motors and single-pole or two-pole switches for other equipment up to 277 volts on circuits 30 amps or less shall be Cooper 303*, Leviton 303*, or Pass and Seymour PS3OAC*. Manual motor switches for three-phase motors 30 amps or less shall be as specified in Section 26 28 16—Disconnect Switches. *Complete catalog number for pole arrangement necessary. 2.02 RECEPTACLES A. Twenty ampere, 125-volt, NEMA 5-20R, Industrial specification grade, strAight blade, 3-wire duplex grounded outlets, one of the following: Cooper 5362, Levitor 5362, Pass and Seymour 5362. Provide ivory color. B. GFCI Receptacle: GFCI receptacles shall be UL 943 listed, Pass and Seymour 2097, Cooper TRVGF20 receptacle with integral ground fault current interrupter. Provide ivory color. C. Provide spare receptacles as described in Section 26 95 10—Spare Parts 2.03 COVER PLATES A. Each and every flush box shall be provided with standard 302 series stainless steel plates, blank, receptacle, switch, or cord as designated by outlet symbol. Surface boxes shall have plates to match Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, or equal, cast boxes. B. NEMA4X and weatherproof switch covers shall be Thomas and Betts, Industrial Gray, toggle switch cover, Model E98TSCN-CAR, or equal. C. While in use, receptacle covers for exterior use shall be Leviton M5979, or equal. Receptacle covers for NEMA 4X locations shall be Leviton 5980, or equal. D. Cover plates for manual motor switches, manual motor controllers, c nd NEC required equipment disconnects shall have provisions for locking the switch in the On or Off position. — Section 26 27 26-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.04 THERMOSTATS A. Line voltage thermostats for single-stage heating or single-stage cooling, and for high- and low-temperature alarms shall be PECO Model TF115-001, or equal. Thermostats shall be rated NEMA 4X with a 40°F to 110°F temperature range and fixed 3°F deadband. B. Thermostats shown on the drawings shall be single-stage unless otherwise noted. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All receptacles shall be mounted vertically. B. GFCI receptacles shall not be series wired. C. Install wall switches 48 inches above floor (top of box), "Off' position down, except as otherwise noted. D. Install convenience receptacles shown to be "above furniture" 36 inches above floor(bottom of box), grounding pole on bottom except as otherwise noted. E. Install convenience receptacles 15 inches above floor (bottom of box), grounding pole on bottom except as otherwise noted. F. Install specific-use receptacles above furniture, countertops, or at heights shown on the Drawings. m. G. Install thermostats 48 inches above floor (top of box). H. Convenience Receptacles: Specification grade self-grounding. I. Install devices and cover plates flush and level. J. Back wiring is not allowed for switches and receptacles. Wires shall be terminated with the device screw terminal. K. Individual labels shall be placed on the back of all switch faceplates and receptacle faceplates indicating the lighting panel and circuit from which the switch or receptacle is fed. Labels shall be White background with Black lettering no smaller than 12-point font. Provide permanently attached self-adhesive type, machine fed, and self-laminating labels, or equal. All labels must be by the same manufacturer, same size, and same font. Handwritten labels are not acceptable. END OF SECTION Section 26 27 26-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 26 28 00 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Provide overcurrent protective devices as shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop Drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals, including electrical ratings, physical size, interrupt ratings, trip curves, I2t curves, and manufacturer's detailed specifications. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the following requirements: 1 . NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. Local codes and ordinances. 3. Provide overcurrent protective devices by same manufacturer for each type of device. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01 60 00—Materials and Equipment. — B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris and traffic. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. General: 1. Comply with UL 489 requirements. 2. Provide thermal and magnetic protection unless noted otherwise. B. Main and Tie Breakers: 1. Circuit breakers shall have a short-circuit interrupting rating as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide solid-state circuit breakers with electronic sensing, timing, aid tripping circuits for adjustable current settings. Provide ground fault trip with integral adjustable ground fault pickup and delay settings, adjustable long-time pickup, long-tim, delay, short-time pickup, short-time delay, and instantaneous pickup settings. Section 26 28 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3. Circuit breakers shall be UL listed for 100% continuous current where indicated on the Drawings. C. Feeder Breakers: 1. Circuit breakers shall have a short-circuit interrupting rating as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Solid-state Circuit Breakers: a. Circuit breakers with frame sizes 400 amperes and larger shall be provided with electronic sensing, timing, and tripping circuits for adjustable current settings. Provide adjustable long-time pickup, long-time delay, short-time pickup, short-time delay, and instantaneous pickup settings. b. Circuit breakers in motor control centers and switchboards that feed lighting panel transformers shall be provided with electronic sensing, timing, and tripping circuits for adjustable current settings. Provide adjustable long-time pickup, long-time delay, short-time pickup, short-time delay, and instantaneous pickup settings. 3. Field-Adjustable Thermal-Magnetic Trip Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB1. Provide circuit breakers with frame sizes less than 400 amperes with mechanism for adjusting instantaneous pickup setting for automatic operation. Range of adjustment shall be three to ten times the trip rating. 4. Field-Changeable Magnetic-Only Ampere Rating Circuit Breakers/Motor Circuit Protectors: UL 489. Provide circuit breakers with frame sizes 200 amperes and larger with changeable trip units. 5. Ground Fault Protection: Ground fault pickup and delay shall be provided for circuit breakers with frame sizes 1,000 amperes and larger and for all feeders serving equipment outdoors or in wet locations. 6. Circuit breakers shall be UL listed for 100% continuous current where indicated on the Drawings. D. All lugs shall be rated to accept copper conductors. 2.02 ENCLOSURES A. Circuit breakers shall be installed within switchboard, MCC, panelboard, etc. as shown on the Drawings. B. Provide circuit breaker with enclosures where required as listed below, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings: 1. Indoor: NEMA 12, steel. 2. Outdoor, corrosive, or wet location: NEMA 4X, stainless steel. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Provide accessories as listed below: 1. Handle lock: Include provisions for padlocking. 2. Provide mechanical trip device. Section 26 28 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install overcurrent protective devices in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.02 ADJUSTMENT A. Set and record adjustable settings on circuit breakers to provide selective coordination and proper operation. END OF SECTION Section 26 28 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 26 28 16 DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Disconnect switches. 2. Fractional hp motor switches. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NEMA KS 1—Enclosed Switches. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Include outline drawings with dimensions and equipment ratings for voltage, capacity, horsepower, and short-circuit. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Disconnect Switches: Square D Class 3110 or Cutler Hammer Type DH. B. Manual Motor Switches: Square D Class 2510 Type K or Cutler Hammer B330. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of the General Conditions. 2.02 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Nonfusible Disconnect Switches: NEMA KS 1; heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally-operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in "On" position. A defeater shall be provided to bypass this interlock. Handle lockable in "Off position. Provide auxiliary contacts to remove control power associated with field devices or instruments interlocked with equipment served. Auxiliary contacts shall be by the disconnect manufacturer. �- Section 26 28 16-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Manual Motor Switches: Where noted on the drawings, manual motor switches shall be provided for three-phase motors with circuit rating of 30 amps, or less. Manual motor switches shall have toggle operator without overload protection or indicator light. Provide cover plate for all switches to meet the finish or classification of the space Cover plate shall have provisions for locking the switch in the "On" or "Off' position. 2.03 SINGLE-PHASE MOTOR SWITCHES (2 HP OR LESS) A. Where noted on the drawings, motors rated 2 hp or less, for operation cn 120 V or 240 V, — single-phase, shall be provided with a specification-grade wall switch as disconnecting means. See Section 26 27 26—Wiring Devices for additional information. 2.04 ENCLOSURES A. Provide disconnect switch enclosures as listed below, unless noted :Dtherwise on the _ drawings: 1. Indoor dry locations: NEMA 12, steel. 2. Outdoor, corrosive, or wet locations: NEMA 4X, stainless steel. B. Provide manual motor switch enclosures as listed below, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. Indoor dry, outdoor, or wet locations: NEMA 4, die cast zinc. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide disconnect switches where indicated on the drawings. Maximum mounting height shall be 42 inches above finished floor unless noted otherwise, or acceptable to CONSULTANT based on field conditions. B. Provide wall switch for each single-phase fractional horsepower motor \A here indicated on the drawings. C. Disconnect enclosures that house wiring powered from a source separate from the motor power wiring (e.g., MAS units, space heaters) shall have a nameplate in .tailed on the front of the disconnect indicating that power may be present at the motor wher the disconnect is in the "Off position. D. Wiring within disconnects shall only be for loads or equipment served by that disconnect. Foreign wiring within disconnect enclosures is not allowed. All wiring within disconnect enclosures shall be landed on lugs or terminals provided by the disconnect manufacturer, or on dedicated terminal strips for instrumentation equipment or field devices. Splices and spring wire connectors are not allowed within disconnect enclosures. E. Manual motor switches shall not be installed in corrosive and NEMA 4X ocations. Provide disconnect switches. END OF SECTION Section 26 28 16-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD) PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Service entrance devices. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and C62.45. B. NFPA 70, and 75. C. UL 1449, most recent issue. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers of surge protective devices. Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of these products of the types and ratings whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer: A firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical wiring installation work similar to that in this project. C. Code Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) and any and all local codes as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring devices, material, and equipment herein specified. D. UL Labels: Provide surge protective devices which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories. E. NECA Standard: Comply with applicable portions of National Electrical Contractor's Association's "Standard of Installation." 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Shop Drawings for Equipment Panels: Include wiring schematic diagram, wiring diagram, outline drawing, and construction diagram as described in ANSI/NEMA ICS 1. Test reports certified by the manufacturer shall be provided to CONSULTANT upon request for each model submitted. Section 26 43 13-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.05 WARRANTIES A. Manufacturer shall provide a minimum 20-year warranty from the date of substantial completion to cover repair or replacement of the device. This warranty shall include the field replaceable plug-in modules and coordinated fuses. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The drawings and specifications were prepared based on MCG. CONTRACTOR shall include in the Bid and shall be responsible for the cost of any changes to accommodate other equipment including, but not limited to, upsizing overcurrent protective devices to meet manufacturer recommendations. CONTRACTOR shall also pay additional costs necessary for revisions of drawings and/or specifications by CONSULTANT. 2.02 GENERAL - A. These specifications describe the electrical and mechanical requirements for high energy transient voltage (service entrance) surge suppressors. The specifiec surge protective device shall provide effective energy surge diversion for application in ANSI/IEEE C62.41-2002 location Category C3 (service entrance). Testing shall be per ANSI/IEEE C62.45-2002 using ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C3 waveforms and amplitudes. B. The system individual units shall be UL listed under UL1449, latest edition, Standard for Surge Protective Devices (SPD). Surge ratings shall be permanently affixed to the SPD. C. Operating Temperature: Operating temperature range shall be -40 to +5E'C (-40 to 131°F). D. Storage Temperature: Storage temperature range shall be -40 to +85°C. E. Relative Humidity: Operation shall be reliable in an environment with 0% to 95% noncondensing relative humidity. F. Operating Altitude: The system shall be capable of operation up to an altitide of 13,000 feet above sea level. G. Design Life: >15 years. H. Operating Voltage: Maximum continuous operating voltage shall be no ess than 115% of - the nominal rated line voltage. I. Power Frequency: SPD power frequency shall be rated for use on 50 ar d 60 Hertz power systems. J. All SPDs shall be MOV type. Noise filtering capabilities shall be provide_I as an option for the devices specified herein. K. SPD shall be suitable for use in Type 2 locations. Section 26 43 13-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 L. Unit shall provide maximum ANSI/UL 1449 VPRs for 480Y/277-volt systems. 1. L-N = 1500 V. 2. L-G = 1500 V. 3. N-G = 1200 V. 4. L-L = 2500 V. 2.03 SERVICE ENTRANCE DEVICES A. The maximum surge current capacity of the specified system, based on the standard IEEE 8/20 microsecond waveform, shall be at least 160 kA per phase. The surge life (8/20) shall be at least 6 kA for 10,000 occurrences or 10 kA at 20 kV for 16,000 occurrences. The transient suppression capability shall be bidirectional and suppress both positive and negative impulses. SPD shall have a nominal discharge rating (In) of 10 kA. B. The SPD shall have a minimum Short Circuit Rating (SCCR) of 100 KAIC. The interrupt capability must be confirmed and documented by a recognized independent testing laboratory. C. The suppressor shall be designed so as to minimize the internal surge path impedance. Direct point-to-point internal wiring is inherently inductive and not acceptable. Connection to the power service shall be constructed as shown in the manufacturer's installation notes for best performance. D. The system shall be constructed using field replaceable plug-in modules. The module shall consist of multiple fuse protected metal oxide varistors. The status of each module shall be locally monitored with a red LED that will illuminate if the module protection is reduced. Protector shall provide redundant protection within each phase module with multiple surge rated fuses per module or one fuse per MOV. E. Red and green solid-state LED indicators shall be provided on the hinged front cover to indicate protection status. An illuminated green LED indicates power is present at the protector on all phases, and an illuminated red LED shall indicate that one or more of the modules have reduced protection. Both front panel and internal LEDs are required to provide power and fault indications. Relay operation shall be in a failsafe operating mode, i.e., continuously energized so that power failure, reduced protection, or a break in the remote monitoring line will cause a fault indication at the remote monitor. Neon indicators are not permitted. F. Relay alarm contacts shall be provided for remote alarm monitoring capability of unit status. Surge protected normally open and normally closed contacts shall be provided. G. The system shall be equipped with an audible alarm which shall be activated when any one or more of the modules has a reduced protection condition. A mute switch shall be provided for the audible alarm. H. A 14 gauge, NEMA Type 4, steel enclosure, with corrosion-resistant hardware shall be provided for the unit. I. Service entrance devices shall be as manufactured by MCG, 160M Series, Liebert 560 Series, or equal. Section 26 43 13-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The installation and testing of the system shall be in full accordance with the manufacturer's installation and maintenance instructions and all national and local codes B. Each installed device shall be fed by an appropriately sized circuit breaker, per the manufacturer's installation notes, in the protected panel. No SPD shall be installed without an upstream overcurrent device. C. Units shall be installed as close as practical to the electrical panel. Low impedance cabling furnished by the manufacturer shall be utilized for installations with lead lengths greater than, or equal to, 5 feet. Low impedance cabling furnished by the manufacturer or appropriately-sized standard cable, if acceptable to CONSULTANT, may be utilized for installations with lead lengths less than 5 feet. SPD leads shall be as short as possible for — best performance. D. Manufacturer shall provide protection modules and coordinated fuses under a no-cost lifetime replacement warranty. - END OF SECTION Section 26 43 13-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 26 51 13 LIGHTING PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes a complete functional lighting system. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Underwriters Laboratories: Lighting fixtures shall be manufactured in accordance with the standards of the Underwriters Testing Laboratories and shall bear the UL label where practicable. In all cases the lighting fixtures shall be constructed with UL listed components. B. Applicable Codes: Fixtures shall be made and installed in accordance with the current version of the National Electrical Code, the Uniform Building Code,the Federal Occupational Safety & Health Act, and other applicable regulations. C. Code Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) as applicable to construction and installation of electrical equipment, cable, wire, and connectors. D. NEMA/ANSI Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Manufacturers Association, American National Standards Institute, and other standards pertaining to material and construction and testing where applicable. E. Lighting Standards: 1. LM-79-08 or latest—IES Approved Method for the Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products. 2. LM-80-08 or latest—IES Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources. 3. NEMA SSL 1-2016 or latest—Electronic Drivers for LED Devices, Arrays, or Systems. F. Fire Codes: Where necessary to meet Code requirements, enclosure housings shall be constructed to provide a 1-hour fire rating. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Intent: It is the intent of these specifications to obtain a completed lighting fixture and lighting controls installation by CONTRACTOR. Completed means lamped, cleaned, adjusted, tested, and ready for occupancy and operation in accordance with the above-indexed paragraphs and in accordance with the other sections of these Contract Documents. It is the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to point out discrepancies, errors, and other problems. Section 26 51 13-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. All lighting fixtures are to be provided complete with all necessary accessories for a proper installation. Catalog numbers shown are basic fixture types, and additional features, accessories, and options specified, scheduled or required, are to be included for all fixtures provided. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Manufacturer's dimensioned scale drawings showing in complete detail the fabrication of all lighting fixtures including overall and detail dimensions, finishes. prefinishes, metal thickness, fabrication methods, support method, ballasts, drivers, sockets, type of shielding, reflectors, wiring sizes and insulation types, lenses, provisions for relamping, and all other information to show compliance with the Contract Documents. Manufacturers' catalog cut sheets will not be acceptable. 2. Installation instructions. 3. Certified photometric test data and reports. 4. Shop drawings shall not only clearly indicate the assigned fixture type, but also the equipment location. 5. Submittal should include, but not be limited to, wattage, lurren output, color temperature, and CRI value. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE — A. Standards: Materials, equipment, and parts, as well as workmanship provided under this section, shall conform to the highest commercial standard as specified and as indicated on drawings. Fixture parts and components not specifically identified or indicated shall use materials most appropriate to their intended use or function and as such be resistant to corrosion and thermal mechanical stresses encountered in the normal application and function of the fixtures. B. Measuring and Testing Equipment: CONTRACTOR shall have available at all times, instruments for the measurement of voltage, luminaire temperature, lighting level, and fixture brightness level. C. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of lighting fixtures of the types and ratings for the project, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service — for not less than 5 years. D. Installer: A firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical wiring installation work similar to that in this project. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Luminaires and lighting equipment shall be delivered to the project complete, including mounting devices and components necessary for the proper operation of the equipment. B. Marking: All equipment must be clearly and boldly identified as to the fixtu,e type and, where practicable, the fixture location. Section 26 51 13-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Timely Purchasing: Luminaires and other appurtenances shall be ordered in a timely fashion and securely stored to be available to meet the project schedule. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substantial Completion of the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 LED LUMINAIRES A. LED Luminaires shall meet the following technical requirements: 1. Light output of the LED system shall be measured using the absolute photometry method following IES LM-79 and IES LM-80 requirements and guidelines. 2. Luminaire efficacy shall match or exceed that of the fixture model numbers shown in the fixture schedule on the Drawings. 3. Luminaire Color Rendering Index (CRI) shall match or exceed that of the fixture model numbers shown in the fixture schedule on the Drawings; a minimum of 80 for interior luminaires and a minimum of 70 for exterior luminaires. 4. Luminaire shall maintain 70% lumen output (L70) for a minimum of 50,000 hours. 5. Luminaire lumen output shall match or exceed that of the fixture model numbers shown in the fixture schedule on the Drawings. 6. Wattage shall be as shown in the fixture schedule on the Drawings. 7. Luminaire color temperature shall match that of the fixture model numbers shown in the fixture schedule on the Drawings. B. Luminaire shall be mercury-free, lead-free, and RoHS compliant. C. Luminaire shall comply with FCC 47 CFR part 15 non-consumer RFI/EMI standards. D. Lumen output shall not depreciate more than 20% after 10,000 hours of use. E. Luminaire and driver shall be provided from a single manufacturer to promote compatibility. F. Luminaire shall operate normally for input voltage fluctuations of plus or minus 10%. G. Luminaire shall have a maximum Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)of<20°/0 at full input power and across specified voltage range. 2.02 WIRING A. All wiring within lighting fixtures or from the splice with the building wiring shall be as specified in Section 26 05 19—Wire. B. Wiring within fixture construction shall be concealed, except where the fixture design or mounting dictates otherwise. Section 26 51 13-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Wiring channels and wireways shall be free from projections and rougn or sharp edges throughout and all points or edges over which conductors must pass and may be subject to injury or wear. D. Insulated bushings shall be installed at points of entrance and exit of flexible wiring. 2.03 LED DRIVERS A. General: 1. Provide driver type (non-dimmed, step-dimmed, continuous-dimming etc.) as indicated in the model numbers in the fixture schedule shown on the Drawings 2. Driver shall have a minimum rated life of 50,000 hours. 3. Driver shall have a minimum power factor of 0.9 and a maximum crest factor of 1.5 at full input power and across the specified voltage range. 4. Driver shall operate normally for input voltage fluctuations of plus or minus 10 percent. 5. Driver shall have a maximum Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of20% at full input power and across specified voltage range. 6. Wiring connections to LED drivers shall utilize polarized quick-disconnects for field maintenance. 7. Fuse Protection: All luminaires shall have built-in fuse protection. All power supply outputs shall be either fuse protected or be Polymeric Positive TempLLTature Coefficient (PTC)-protected per Class 2 UL listing. 8. All fixtures located outdoors shall be provided with surge protection. 2.04 MARKING OF FIXTURES A. Voltage Identification: Fixtures designed for voltages other than 110-to 125-volt circuits shall be clearly marked. 2.05 FIXTURE TRIMS A. Trim Details: Provide trim details as shown on the drawings or as specified. The trim finish and dimensions are subject to the shop drawing approval of CONSULTANT. Mitered corners shall be smoothed before shop finish is applied. No lapping of trim metal fog all flush-mounted ceiling trims for rectangular or square recessed fixtures. 2.06 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES (UPS) A. UPS input shall be 120/277 Vac, 60 Hz, three-wire (Switched Hot, Common, Unswitched Hot) plus ground. Input shall be protected by PCB-mounted, fast-acting fuses sized for UPS load. B. UPS output shall be 120/277 Vac, 60 Hz, two-wire plus ground, suitable for use with fluorescent, LED, and incandescent fixtures. C. UPS battery shall be sealed lead calcium. Battery shall be sized appropriately to provide 90 minutes of run time for 91% of rated output lumens. D. Provide sonic audible alarm option. E. UPS shall be rated for use in ambient conditions of 68°F to 86°F. Section 26 51 13-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 F. UPS output rating shall be minimum 250 watts. G. UPS shall be equipped with self-diagnostic circuitry. Circuitry shall check different operating parameters during initial start-up, normal standby, and diagnostic stages. If a fault is detected, the fault indicator shall flash to alert maintenance personnel. H. UPS shall automatically initiate a diagnostic cycle every 28 days to test emergency operation. The self-diagnostic circuitry shall not utilize the lighting load (i.e., the emergency fixture(s)) to cycle and test the unit battery. Instead, a built-in resistive load shall be used, thereby eliminating emergency fixture illumination during diagnostic testing. I. UPS shall monitor the reference voltage from the line (unswitched)side of the control device. �.. In the event the reference voltage is lost the UPS shall power the emergency fixture(s) regardless of control device position. J. UPS shall be capable of being mounted a maximum of 1000 FT from the emergency fixtures. K. UPS shall be UL 924 listed. L. Inverter module and battery module shall be housed in a NEMA 1 enclosure. M. Three-year warranty on all UPS components shall be included (except batteries). N. UPS shall be Mini Inverter Model IMI-25-LC-VI-AA, as manufactured by Isolite, or equal. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures, lenses, etc., after building is enclosed, weathertight, and environmental �- conditions are nominally the same as expected for the complete spaces. All glassware, reflectors, and refractors shall be clean and free of chips, cracks, and scratches. B. All wall-mounted fixtures and all ceiling-mounted surface fixtures including exit lights, shall be fed through a fixture Stud/Hickey/Nipple assembly and with provisions to prevent fixture turning. C. All exterior wall-mounted fixtures shown over doorways shall be mounted centered, 6-inches above doorway, unless otherwise noted. D. All fixtures shall be securely and adequately supported and installed. Recessed lighting fixtures in suspended ceilings or in plaster ceilings shall have channel and supports provided by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall provide plaster frames. Fixture shall be supported from structure and not from ceiling. E. Surface-or pendant-mounted fixtures shall be attached to and supported from structural part of the building in a manner acceptable to CONSULTANT. Fixtures shall be supported by not fewer than two supports for each fixture. Where fixtures are to be suspended, they shall be mounted on steel channel with the channel supported directly from the structure by a minimum of 3/8-inch rod inside rigid conduit stems.Any fixture which has an individual fixture weight of greater than 25 pounds shall have safety cable installed, in addition to other Section 26 51 13-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 support means. Cable shall be 3/16-inch airplane cable. All fittings and connectors shall be compression type. Cables must be secured to the building structure and to a point or points on the fixture to protect against falling parts. F. Industrial-type fixtures in unfinished areas which are near obstructions such as ducts and pipes shall be suspended so that the bottom of the fixture is no higher than the bottom of the obstruction. All fixtures in each room shall be located at the height of the lowest fixture, but not lower than 8 feet 0 inches above the finished floor. Fixtures shall not be located until the locations of these obstructions are determined, and fixtures shall be accessible after the installation of other equipment. G. Provide inscription for exit and area of rescue assistance signs to conforr 1 to codes. H. Metal decking shall not be pierced for fixture support. I. All fixture whips shall be constructed of minimum No. 12 AWG conductors. 3.02 SUPPORTS A. Mounting Frames: Provide mounting frames (plaster frames for example) as necessary, for installation and as required under other sections. Frames shall be finished matte white baked enamel unless otherwise noted. B. Mounting Accessories: Provide bars, angles, or other supporting devices for all recessed fixtures. Fixtures shall be securely attached to prevent movement up, down, or sideways. Fixtures shall be mounted to permit access to wiring. Fastening devices shall be of a positive, locking type, and shall not require the use of special tools to apply or remove. Tie wires shall not be used in place of fastening devices. C. CONTRACTOR Responsibility: CONTRACTOR shall verify all ceiling conditions from the Drawings and provide appropriate mounting accessories for each lighting fixture. D. Pendant Mounting: Provide pendant- or surface-mounted fixtures with required mounting accessories, including hickeys, stud extensions, ball aligners, canopies, and stems. Coordinate locations of fixtures in mechanical areas. Provide mounting stems on pendant fixtures of the correct length to uniformly maintain the fixture heights shown on the drawings, or established in the field. E. Adequate rigid, sturdy support shall be provided to prevent the possibility of fixture falling. Surface and pendant fixtures must be supported with two supports per 4-foot section, except that continuous 8-foot sections shall have three supports. All pendants must have swivel aligners located at the top ends; pendants shall be minimum 3/8-inch threaded rod inside 3/4-inch rigid steel conduit, unless specifically indicated otherwise on the Drawings, pendant supports shall be painted on jobsite. Support surface-mounted fixtures from structural members other than ceiling tees by providing Unistrut members spanning main ceiling tees or by mounting directly to structure. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT A. Focusing/Adjustment: After the installation of lighting fixtures is completed, fixtures so requiring (both interior and exterior units), shall be adjusted after dark under the observation of CITY. Section 26 51 13-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.04 CLEANING A. Installation Sequence: Lighting fixture mounting frames, etc., shall be installed prior to the finishing assembly which shall not be installed until the Project is at Final Completion. When the fixture location or construction prevents sequential installation, CONTRACTOR shall carefully protect all reflectors, lenses, flanges, and other visible surfaces. B. Cleaning: Before final acceptance by CITY, all protective (strippable) coatings, dust, finger marks, paint spots, and any other materials deleterious to the appearance or functioning of the lighting fixtures must be removed. Abrasive cleaners are not permitted. 3.05 FINAL INSPECTION A. Upon completion of the installation, lighting equipment must be in first-class operating order and free from defects in condition and finish: 1. Fixtures shall be completely clean and free from finger marks, dust, plaster, or paint spots. 2. Any reflectors, lenses, diffusers, side panels, or other parts damaged prior to the final inspection, shall be replaced at no expense to CITY. 3. Housing shall be rigidly installed and adjusted to a neat flush fit with the ceiling. END OF SECTION Section 26 51 13-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 26 95 10 SPARE PARTS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Spare parts for applicable sections of Division 26 as noted below. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Labels: All electrical equipment and material shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories, except where UL does not include the equipment in their listing procedures. B. NEMA/ANSI Compliance: Comply with National Electrical ManufactL rer's Association, American National Standards Institute, and other standards pertaining to material, construction, and testing where applicable. 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All electrical equipment and material shall be received and stored with the factory winter-proof wrapping intact. Provide factory-wrapped waterproof flexible barrier metal for factory packaging of equipment and material to protect against physical damage in transit. When applicable, equipment stored shall be in factory coverings in a clean, dry, indoor space which provides protection against the weather. B. All spare parts shall be suitably boxed or wrapped to prevent deterioration and shall be completely identified on the outside. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Spare parts specified herein shall be provided by the same manufacturer as the equipment provided on the project. 2.02 PANELBOARDS A. Furnish four 20/1 branch circuit breakers. 2.03 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS A. The following shall be furnished: 1. Two spare fuses for each type of control and current-limiting fuse prc✓ided. 2. One set of fuses for each VFD size (horsepower) provided. 3. One replacement relay for each type of relay provided, including time--delay relays. Section 26 95 10-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.04 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. CONTRACTOR shall provide spare parts totaling 10% of automatic detectors/bases and 1% of the other devices, with a minimum of one each. 2.05 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION A. The following shall be furnished. 1. 10% of PLC communication cards, minimum of one each. This shall include remote I/O scanner and adapter cards, and PC cards as required. 2. One PLC processor and PLC power supply for each type provided. 3. 10% of PLC input/output cards for each type provided (analog and discrete), minimum one each. 4. Two transient/spike suppressors. 5. One network switch. PART 3—EXECUTION NOT APPLICABLE END OF SECTION Section 26 95 10-2 4463.004/CIty Contract No.994 SECTION 28 46 00 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes the providing of all labor, equipment, materials, and performance of all operations associated with the installation of the Fire Alarm System as shown on the drawings and as specified herein to meet the requirements of a complete Fire Alarm System. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NFPA 72, the National Fire Alarm Code. B. ADA. C. Underwriters Laboratories. D. ASME 17.1. E. NFPA 90. F. IBC/IFC. 1.03 SCOPE A. Provide a complete Fire Alarm System to be wired, connected, and left in fist class operating condition. The system shall be UL listed, cross-listed, and compatible for use with individual zone supervision, individual NAC supervision, and incoming and standby p ower supervision. The project includes furnishing a system which includes manual stations, smoke detectors, audible/visual devices, all wiring, connections to devices, outlet boxes, junction boxes, and all other necessary material for a complete operating system. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE -- A. System Supplier shall be a nationally-recognized company specializing in smoke detection and fire alarm systems. This organization shall employ factory-trained and NICET-certified technicians, and shall maintain a service organization within 100 miles of this project location. The System Supplier and service organization shall have a minimum of 10 years' experience in the fire protective signaling systems industry. B. The System Supplier shall supply the final checkout, contractual service, and testing. C. The complete installation is to conform to the applicable sections of NFPA-72, NFPA-101 Local Code Requirements and National Electrical Code with particular attention to Article 760. Section 28 46 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 D. Each and all items of the complete Fire Alarm System shall be listed as a product of a single fire alarm system manufacturer unless the primary equipment provider or manufacturer provides written documentation of compatibility, and assumes responsibility for compatibility with the control equipment. E. Each and all items of the complete Fire Alarm System shall be listed under the appropriate category by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and shall bear the UL label. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data sheets in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Submittals shall be sent to and approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction prior to submitting to CONSULTANT. Include copy of approval letters in submittal to CONSULTANT. C. Provide wiring diagrams, equipment ratings, dimensions, and finishes for all proposed devices and equipment. D. Provide battery calculations to indicate both the Standby and Alarm loads because of various field devices and panel components/module. Battery calculations shall illustrate the minimum battery capacity required and the capacity actually provided. Battery shall contain date of installation and not the manufactured date. E. Provide a complete Fire Alarm System riser diagram including: Point of origin of each circuit (usually a Panel, or a Module within a panel), circuit type and labeling, area served by each circuit, wire/cable type and size, locations of panelboards where primary system power is obtained and the device type circuit(s) to which device is connected, and locations of any End-Of-Line Resistor for each field device. F. Provide "worst-case" notification appliance circuit voltage drop calculation. 1.06 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record drawings shall include the location of all Fire Alarm System devices with their respective labels and the location of all end-of-line device locations. B. Upon completion of the work, and final acceptance by the local authority, CONTRACTOR shall submit record drawings to CITY and CONSULTANT under the provisions of Division 01. C. CONTRACTOR shall submit a copy of the Fire Alarm System; Record of Completion documentation to CITY, CONSULTANT, and AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. Included with the Record of Completion documentation shall be a copy of final acceptance testing results. D. Record drawings shall be provided to CITY on a DVD. Site-specific fire alarm system program shall be included on DVD. Section 28 46 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit Manufacturer data sheets for all equipment installed. B. Include operating, installation, and routine maintenance instructions. — C. Submit a record copy of site-specific computer software for software-based Fire Alarm Systems. D. Include manufacturer letter stating the date of installation on which the system is operational. E. Operating instructions shall be mounted in a frame next to the FACP. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacturer shall warrant — the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substantial Completion of the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Fire Alarm System: Provide a complete, supervised, power-limited, ire detection and evacuation system. B. System Supervision: The fire protective signaling system shall be an elect~ically-supervised, power-limited system which shall monitor the integrity of circuit cond Jctors and power supplies. Fire alarm system shall be remotely supervised by a CITY desinated recognized agency. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with CITY to establish a monitoring agency. C. Equipment of another manufacturer may be submitted as an alternate, however, CONTRACTOR must provide a complete system. 2.02 ENCLOSURES A. All panels and peripheral devices shall be the standard product of a single manufacturer and shall display the manufacturer's name on each component. B. Provide cabinets of sufficient size to accommodate the aforementioned equipment. C. Cabinet shall be equipped with locks and transparent door panel providing tamperproof enclosure, yet allowing full view of the various lights and controls as required. 2.03 INTELLIGENT FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP) A. Intelligent fire alarm systems shall be installed where shown on the drawings. B. FACP shall be UL 864, latest edition, manufactured by Fire-Lite, Gamewe I, Silent Knight, or equal. Section 28 46 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. The FACP shall allow for loading or editing special instructions and operating sequences as required. The system is to be capable of on-site programming to accommodate facility expansion, building parameter changes, or changes as required by local codes.All software operations are to be stored in a nonvolatile, programmable memory resident within the FACP. Loss of power shall not erase the instructions stored in memory. D. The ability for selective input/output control functions based on ANDing, ORing, NOTing, and special coded operations is to also be incorporated in the resident software programming of the system. E. To accommodate and facilitate jobsite changes, initiation circuits shall be individually configurable on-site to provide either alarm/trouble operation, alarm only, trouble only, current limited alarm, no alarm, normally closed device monitoring, a nonlatching circuit, or an alarm verification circuit. F. FACP shall be modular, expandable with solid-state, microprocessor-based electronics. It shall display through the front viewing window only those primary controls and displays essential to operation during a fire alarm condition. G. The FACP shall provide the following features as standards: 1. Support intelligent detection devices. 2. The number of initiating device loops required for the specified quantity of initiating devices, plus one spare loop for each five active loops. Each active loop shall include 5% spare capacity. 3. The number of indicating appliance (speakers)circuits required for the specified quantity speakers, plus one spare circuit for each ten active circuits. Each active circuit shall include 25% spare capacity. 4. The number of indicating appliance (strobe) circuits required for the specified quantity of strobes, plus one spare circuit for each ten active circuits. Each active circuit shall include 25% spare capacity. 5. 80-character liquid crystal display. 6. Printer interface. 7. History log file with a minimum of 1,000 events. 8. Field programmable. 9. Drift compensation. 10. Sensitivity display in percent. 11. Sensitivity adjustment. 12. Day/night sensitivity adjustment. 13. Auto detector test to meet NFPA 72. 14. Alarm verification with tally counter. 15. Silent walk test. 16. Maintenance alerts. 17. AC fail delay. 18. Other features as described below. H. The FACP shall provide the ability to recall alarms and trouble conditions in chronological order for the purpose of recreating an event history. Section 28 46 00-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 I. The FACP LCD shall have the capability of displaying the following information relative to the abnormal condition of a point in the system prior to acknowledgement: 1. 40 characters for: a. Point address and loop number (i.e., 555-L5). b. Type of device (i.e., smoke, pull station, water flow). c. Point status (i.e., alarm, trouble). 2. 40 characters for: Custom location label (i.e., 4th Floor—Room 444). J. FACP keyboards or keypads shall not be required to operate the system during fire alarm conditions. K. FACP shall have the following software functions: 1. Setting of time and date. 2. LED testing. 3. Alarm, trouble, and abnormal condition listing. 4. Enabling and disabling of each monitor point separately. 5. Activation and deactivation of each control point separately. 6. Changing operator access levels. 7. Walk Test enable. 8. Running diagnostic functions. 9. Displaying historical logs. 10. Point listing. L. FACP shall have the following hardware functions: 1. Acknowledge alarm or trouble. 2. Silence alarm or trouble. 3. Reset system after alarm. 4. Connect/disconnect fire department tie. 5. Provide manual evacuation (drill). 6. Supervise system. 7. Allow computer interface. M. FACP shall have the following Status Indicators and Displays: 1. Local audible device shall sound during Alarm, Trouble or Supervisory conditions. This audible device shall also sound during each key-press to provide ar audible feedback when the key has been pressed properly. The visual display shall distinguish between alarm, trouble and supervisory conditions. 2. The following indicators and displays shall be visible through the fror: viewing window: a. One red system alarm LED. b. One yellow supervisory service LED. c. One yellow trouble LED. d. Green "power on" LED. e. Eighty-character liquid crystal display. 3. The 2-line by 40-character liquid crystal display shall be backlit for enhanced readability. So as to conserve battery standby power, it shall not be lit during an AC power failure unless an alarm condition occurs or there is keypad activity. 4. The display shall support both upper and lowercase letters. Lowercase letters shall be used for soft-key titles and prompting the user. Uppercase letters shall be used for system status information. A cursor shall be visible when entering information. Section 28 46 00-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 5. Scrolling through menu options or lists shall be accomplished in a self-directing manner in which prompting messages shall direct the user. These controls shall be located behind an access door. The following status data shall be available on this display: a. Initiating device circuits. b. Indicating appliance circuits. c. Auxiliary relays. d. Feedback points. e. Primary state of point. f. Zone information. g. Class "A" status. h. Current priority of outputs. i. Disable/Enable status. j. Verification tallies of initiating devices. k. Automatic/Manual control status of output points. I. Acknowledge status. N. Controls: 1. The following controls (one switch per function per system) shall be visible through the front viewing window: a. Alarm Acknowledge key. b. Trouble Acknowledge key. c. Alarm Silence key. d. System Reset key. 2. The following controls shall be accessible with the front door open, though not visible, through the front viewing window: a. Supervising Station disconnect/switch. b. Manual evacuation (drill). c. Fan shutdown override/bypass switches. d. Key pad for data input and microprocessor control. O. FACP shall have the capability of supervising all slave modules LEDs for burnout or disarrangement. P. Acknowledgement: 1. All events shall have a global acknowledgement. 2. Acknowledge one event at a time from an unacknowledged list of events. 3. Pressing the appropriate acknowledge button shall display the first unacknowledged condition in the appropriate list (either alarm, supervisory, or trouble) and require another acknowledge button. Press to acknowledge only the displayed point. 4. After all points have been acknowledged, the LEDs shall glow steadily and the Sonalert will be silenced. The total number of alarms, supervisory, and trouble conditions shall be displayed along with a prompt to review each list chronologically. The end of the list shall be indicated by an end of list message "END of LIST." 5. Systems not capable of password-protected manual command operations shall provide key-operated switches for these functions. Function key switches shall be keyed differently from any other keyed switches or locks used within the system. 6. All acknowledge functions shall be behind locked door or pass-code protected. In pass-code protection, if the user has insufficient privilege to acknowledge such conditions, a message shall indicate insufficient privilege, but allow the user to view the points without acknowledging them. Should the user have sufficient privilege to acknowledge, a message will be displayed informing the user that the condition has been acknowledged. Section 28 46 00-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 Q. Silencing: 1. If an alarm condition exists and the "Alarm Silence" button is pressed, all alarm signals shall cease operation. The strobes shall remain active until the system is reset. 2. If trouble conditions exist in the system and the "Trouble Silence" button has been pressed, the audible trouble signal shall cease, but shall resound at time intervals to act as a reminder that the fire alarm system is not in a normal operating mode. Both the time interval and the trouble reminder signal shall be programmable to suit CITY's application. 3. Panel shall be equipped with an alarm silence inhibit function. R. Reset: 1. The SYSTEM RESET button shall be used to return the system to its normal state after an alarm condition has been remedied. The display shall step the user-through the reset process with simple English language messages. Messages shal provide operator assurance of sequential steps (i.e., "IN PROGRESS," RESET COMPLETED," and "SYSTEM NORMAL") as they occur, should all alarms conditions be cleared. 2. Should an alarm condition continue to exist, the system shall provide indications that resetting cannot be completed and shall remain in an abnormal state The Sonalert and the Alarm LED shall remain activated. The display shall indicate the total number of alarms and troubles present in the system along with a prompt to use the ACK keys to review the points. These points shall not require acknowledgment if they were previously acknowledged. S. Access Levels: 1. There shall be three access levels with Level 4 being the highest level. Level 1 actions shall not require a passcode. Passcodes shall consist of up to five digits. Changes to passcodes shall only be made by authorized personnel. 2. In order to maintain security when entering a passcode, the digits entered shall not be displayed, but a cursor shall move along filling the position with an X to indicate that the digit has been accepted. All key presses shall be acknowledged by a local audible sound. 3. When a correct passcode is entered, the system shall indicate "Access Granted" to the operator. The new access level shall be in effect until the operator manually logs out or the keypad has been inactive for 5 minutes. 4. Operator entering an invalid code shall be notified with the message "Incorrect Pass-Code" and shall be allowed up to three chances to enter a valid code. After three unsuccessful tries, the message "Access Denied" shall be displayed. The level shall not be altered, and the operator shall no longer be in the menu option. 5. Access to a level shall allow the operator to perform all actions withir that level plus all actions of lower levels but no actions of higher levels. 6. The following keys/switches shall have access levels associated with them: a. Alarm Silence. b. System Reset. c. Set Time/Date. d. Manual Control. e. On/Off/Auto Control. f. Disable/Enable. g. Programming functions. h. Clear Historical Alarm Log. i. Clear Historical Trouble Log. j. Walk Test. Section 28 46 00-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 k. Change Alarm Verification. 7. Acknowledge keys shall also require privileged access to acknowledge points. If the - operator presses an ACK key with insufficient access, an error message shall be displayed. The points shall scroll with ACK key presses to view the points on the list, but the points shall not get acknowledged in the database. T. For maintenance purposes, the following lists shall be available from the point lists menu: 1. All points list by address. 2. Monitor point list. 3. Signal/speaker list. 4. Auxiliary control list. 5. Feedback point list. U. History Logging: 1. The system shall be capable of logging and storing the last 400 events (alarm and trouble) in a history log. These events shall be stored in a battery-protected random access memory. Each recorded event shall include the time and date of that event's occurrence. Systems not having discrete alarm and trouble logging memory shall include an alternative supervised (e.g., USB drive, compact disk) historic recording method with battery backup. Real time and date shall accompany all history event recording. 2. History logs shall be capable of being viewed separately or shall be selectable for viewing as a combined history log that displays both alarm and trouble events in chronological order. 3. The following historical alarm log events shall be stored: a. Alarms. b. Alarm Acknowledgment. c. Alarm Silence. d. System Reset. e. Alarm Historical log cleared. 4. The following historical trouble log events shall be stored: a. Trouble conditions. b. Supervisory alarms. c. Trouble acknowledgment. d. Supervisory acknowledgment. e. Alarm Verification tallies. f. Walk Test results. g. Trouble Historical log cleared. V. FACP shall have Silent Walk Test Function With History Logging: 1. The system shall be capable of being tested by one person. 2. The panel shall have the capability of dividing the system into distinctive walk test groups, a minimum of 8 groups. 3. Should an alarm condition occur from an active point, not in walk test mode, it shall perform operations described above. 4. After testing is considered complete, testing data may be retrieved from the system in chronological order to verify device/circuit activation. 5. Suppliers of systems not having this feature as functionally specified above shall include a testing agreement meeting the requirements of NFPA-72 in their Base Bid quotation. As a minimum, 2 years of scheduled testing shall be included. Section 28 46 00-8 4463.004/City Contract No.994 W. Field Programming: 1. The system shall be fully programmable, configurable, and expai dable in the field without the need for special tools or PROM programmers and shall not require replacement of memory ICs. All programming may be accomplished through the standard control panel keyboard, or a keyboard at the printer, or the use of a PC. All programs shall be stored in nonvolatile memory. 2. All programming or reprogramming shall be done by the supplier at no charge until the system is accepted by CITY. X. Intelligent Network: 1. The system must provide communications with intelligent initiating and control devices individually. These devices shall be individually annunciated at "he control panel. Annunciation shall include the following conditions for each point: a. Alarm. b. Trouble. c. Open. d. Short. e. Device missing/failed. 2. All intelligent devices shall have the capability of being disabled or enabled individually. 3. There shall be no limit to the number of detectors, stations, or addressable modules which may be activated or "in alarm" simultaneously. 4. Multiple intelligent devices shall be connected to a single pair of wires. Systems that require factory preprogramming to add or delete devices are unacceptable. 5. The communication format must be a completely digital poll/response protocol to allow T-tapping of the circuit wiring. A high degree of communication reliability must be obtained by using parity data bit error checking routines for address codes and check sum routines for the data transmission portion of the protocol. System-;that do not utilize full digital transmission protocol are not acceptable. Y. The FACP shall provide a minimum of 6 amps for notification appliar ces and auxiliary devices. Provisions shall be available to provide additional signal expans Dn. 2.04 INTELLIGENT PERIPHERAL DEVICES A. All devices shall be supervised for trouble conditions. The system control panel shall be capable of displaying the type of trouble condition (open, short, device missing/failed). Failure of a device shall not hinder the operation of other system devices. 2.05 DEVICE IDENTIFICATION A. Each intelligent device shall be uniquely identified by an address code entered on each device at time of installation. The use of jumpers to set address shall not b acceptable. This address, along with the loop number, shall be indicated and be visible fr )m the ground on the device in the field using machine-generated marking. B. Location of the end-of-line (EOL) device shall be indicated on the fire alarm system device containing the EOL device. C. Device identification schemes that do not use uniquely set addresses, bLt rely on electrical position along the communication channel are unacceptable. These systems cannot accommodate T-tapping, and the addition of an intelligent device between existing devices requires reprogramming all existing devices beyond added device. - Section 28 46 00-9 4463.004/City Contract No.994 D. The system must verify that proper type device is in place and matches the desired software configuration. 2.06 INTELLIGENT DETECTOR BASES A. Either the base or the head shall contain electronic circuits that communicate the detector's status (normal, alarm, sensitivity status, trouble, etc.) to the control panel over two wires. The same two wires shall also provide power to the base and detector. B. The base shall be lockable. The locking feature must be field-removable when not required. C. Upon removal of the detector's head, a trouble signal shall be transmitted to the control panel. D. The detector base shall be sealed against rear airflow entry. E. Each detector's base or head shall contain LED(s) which shall flash when the detector is being scanned by the control panel. The LED(s) shall turn on steady when the detector is in an alarm condition. F. Each base shall provide means to allow for function testing of the detector at the detector's location. G. The base shall be compatible with other intelligent detectors, addressable manual stations, �. and addressable modules on the same circuit. 2.07 INTELLIGENT DETECTORS—GENERAL A. All detectors must be approved by the State Engineer prior to installation. B. The detectors shall be plugin units which mount to a common base, and shall be UL 268 approved. C. The detector shall be a 24 Vdc type, which is compatible with the fire alarm panel and obtains its operating power from the supervisory current in the fire alarm detection loop. The 24 Vdc detector shall be reset by actuating the control panel reset switch. D. To minimize false alarms, voltage and RF transient suppression techniques shall be employed. E. Detectors shall be installed on circuits with alarm verification modules. F. Detectors shall include an insect screen. G. If field conditions so require, the detection devices shall not be installed until construction is completed. Section 28 46 00-10 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.08 INTELLIGENT PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE DETECTORS A. The detectors shall contain no radioactive material. B. Detectors shall be of the solid-state photoelectric type and shall operate on the light-scattering photodiode principle using a pulsed infrared LED light. C. Smoke detectors shall be listed for sensitivity testing from the control panel. Sensitivity test results shall be logged. D. Smoke detectors shall communicate the actual smoke chamber values to ':he system control panel. E. Smoke detectors shall be smoke density measuring devices having no SE f-contained alarm setpoint (fixed threshold). The alarm decision for each detector shall be _determined by the control panel. The control panel shall determine the condition of each detE ctor by comparing the detector's value to the stored value. 2.09 INTELLIGENT DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS A. Duct detectors shall be of the photoelectric smoke or photoelectric smoke telescoping sampling tube type. It shall be possible to alarm the duct detector by using; a remote or local test switch. B. For maintenance purposes, it shall be possible to clean the duct housing sampling tubes by accessing them through the duct housings front cover. C. Detector shall include auxiliary SPDT relays and remote keyed test swit,.h and alarm LED indicator. D. Alarm LED indicators for duct detectors shall be labeled with the detectors loop and address. 2.10 PULL STATIONS A. Pull stations shall contain circuits that communicate the station's status (alarm, normal) to the control panel over two wires, which also provide power to the pull station. The address shall be field programmable at the station. B. Manual stations shall be double-action, constructed of high-impact red Lexan with raised white lettering, and a smooth high-gloss finish. — C. Station shall mechanically latch upon operation and remain so until manually reset by a master key common to all system locks. Stations which use Allen wrenches or special tools to reset will not be accepted. D. The manual station shall be fitted with screw terminals for field wire attacHment. Section 28 46 00-1 1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.11 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE MODULES—GENERAL A. Addressable Interface Modules shall receive their 24 Vdc power from a separate two-wire circuit provided by an appropriate power supply. B. The module shall be available in either a Class B or Class A supervision version. C. In the Class B version, the wiring shall be supervised by an end-of-line device. D. In the Class A version, the wiring shall be looped back and connected to the module to allow continual operation of the controlled devices even if the wiring sustains a single break. E. The interface modules shall be supervised and uniquely identified by the control panel. Device identification shall be transmitted to the control panel for processing according to the program instructions.F. Should the interface modules become nonoperational, tampered with, or removed, a discrete trouble signal unique to the device shall be transmitted to and annunciated at the control panel. G. The interface modules shall be capable of being programmed for its "address" location on the intelligent device initiating circuit. The interface modules shall be compatible with addressable manual stations and intelligent detectors on the same intelligent initiating circuit. 2.12 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE MODULES—SUPERVISED CONTROL A. Interface Modules shall be suited for control of indicating appliances and AHU systems. B. For signals, speakers, firefighter phone jacks, and other device control with Class B or Class A wiring supervision, the interface module shall provide double-pole/double-throw relay switching that can be used to connect any of the following through easily replaceable 2-amp fuses: 1. A zone of signals to a power source. 2. Speakers to an audio source. _. 3. Firefighter phone jacks to a communications channel. 4. A variety of controlled devices to the appropriate controlling circuits. C. These interface modules shall communicate the supervised wiring status (normal, trouble) to the fire alarm control panel and shall receive from the fire alarm control panel a command to transfer the relay. 2.13 HORN/STROBE UNITS A. Horns shall have Lexan housing with field-adjustable output taps, three taps minimum. Sound pressure level output shall be 87 dB at 10 feet. Horns shall have vandal-resistant Lexan grills and sealed backs to protect the phenolic impregnated cone. B. The unit shall be complete with a tamper-resistant Lexan lens with "FIRE" lettering visible from a 180 degree field of view. Strobes installed in open areas such as hallways, open office spaces, and assembly areas shall have an adjustable candela rating range from 15-75 candela. Strobes installed in mechanical areas shall have a peak candela rating of 110 candela. All strobes shall be in compliance with ADA requirements. Section 28 46 00-12 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Strobe devices installed in NEMA 4X areas shall be installed in a clear Lexan enclosure. Enclosure shall be Model STI 1221A4X as manufactured by Safety Techn )logy International Inc., or equal. D. Horn devices installed in NEMA 4X areas shall be rated at 110 dBA at 10 feet. Horn device shall be model 304GCX as manufactured by Federal Signal Corporation. Horn device shall be powered through the FAS. Provide addressable relay modules and supervisory relays to activate this device from the FACP. E. A common horn/strobe device installed in NEMA 4X areas manufactured by System Sensor, or equal, is acceptable. 2.14 SPARE PARTS A. CONTRACTOR shall provide spare parts as described in Section 26 95 0 for all fire alarm system components. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CONFIGURATION A. The FACP in the Chemical Storage Building (Structure 300) shall function as the main panel for the entire site. All alarms and supervisory messages for the ertire site shall be annunciated through this panel. Notification of alarms to off-site monitorir g agency shall be through this panel. 3.02 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM OPERATION A. FACP: 1. Under normal condition, the front panel shall display a "SYSTEM NORMAL" message with current time and date. 2. Should an abnormal condition be detected, the appropriate LED (Alarm, Supervisory, or Trouble) shall flash. The panel audible signal shall pulse for alarm conditions and sound steadily for trouble and supervisory conditions. 3. In the event of an abnormal condition, the following three characteristics relative to the condition shall be displayed simultaneously in alphanumeric format. Systems not capable of such a display on the panel faceplate shall include a CRT display meeting the above requirements and must provide a secondary power supply to maintain CRT operation for the duration of the standby requirements of the panel Information shall include: a. Custom location label (40 characters minimum). b. Type of device (i.e., smoke, heat, pull station). c. Status (i.e., alarm, trouble). 4. Pressing the appropriate acknowledge button shall acknowledge th,3 alarm or trouble condition. 5. After all points in alarm have been acknowledged, associated LEDs shall glow steady and the panel audible signal shall be silenced. The total number of alarms, supervisory, and trouble conditions shall be displayed along with a prompt to review each list chronologically. The end of the list shall be indicated. The first 10 fire alarm zones shall be displayed simultaneously in chronological order. Section 28 46 00-13 4463.004/City Contract No.994 6. Alarm Silencing: a. Pressing the "Alarm Silence" button shall cause all notification appliances programmed for "On-Until-Silenced" to be deactivated. A separate panel-mounted yellow LED shall illuminate to indicate the alarm silenced mode. b. All NACs programmed for "On-Until-Reset" shall remain activated until the system is Reset. 7. System Reset: a. The "System Reset" button shall be used to return the system to its normal state after an alarm condition has been remedied. b. In the event an alarm condition continues to exist following system reset, the system shall remain in an abnormal state. System control relays shall not reset. The panel audible signal and the Alarm LED shall remain on. The display shall indicate the total number of alarms and troubles present in the system along with a prompting to review the points. These points shall not require acknowledgment if they were previously acknowledged. c. In the event the Alarm Silence inhibit function is active, the system shall ignore all Key presses. An indication of enabling and disabling the inhibit stator shall be provided as a feedback to the operation. �. 8. Walk Test System Testing: a. While in the test mode, the system shall display a trouble condition. (1) While in the walk test mode, the activation of an initiating device shall be silently logged as an alarm in the historical log. The panel shall automatically reset after logging the alarm. (2) The momentary disconnection of an initiating device or notification appliance shall be silently logged as a trouble condition in the historical log. The panel shall automatically reset itself after logging of the trouble condition. (3) Integrity of the installation conductors of IDCs and NACs shall be verified by momentarily opening any circuit. (4) Walk Test of ground fault circuit testing shall be verified by operating the Notification Appliances for 4 seconds. b. As an option, the Walk Test sequence shall have the capability of activating NACs to signal with a code associated with the alarmed zone. If this option is selected, any momentary opening of initiating or NAC wiring shall cause the notification appliances to sound for 4 seconds to indicate the trouble condition. The Walk Test feature shall automatically revert to the normal operating mode after 8 hours if it is not manually activated. 9. LED Supervision: All slave module LEDs shall be supervised for burnout or disarrangement. Should a problem occur, the panel shall display the module and the LED location numbers to facilitate location of that LED. 10. Active Status Reminder: Should any Alarm, Supervisory, or Trouble condition be present within the system and the audible signal silenced, the local tone alert shall resound every 8 hours as a reminder that the fire alarm system is not 100% operational. 11. Access Levels: a. There shall be a minimum of four access levels. Passcodes shall consist of up to four digits. Changes to passcodes shall be only by authorized personnel. Systems not capable of password-protected manual command operations shall provide key-operated switches for these functions. Function-key switches shall be keyed differently from any other keyed switches or locks used within the system. b. In order to maintain security when entering a passcode, the entered digits shall not be displayed. Section 28 46 00-14 4463.004/City Contract No.994 c. When a correct passcode is entered, a message indicating acceptance shall be displayed. The new access level shall be in effect until the operator manually logs out or leaves the keypad inactive for 10 minutes. d. When an incorrect passcode is entered, a message shall be d splayed indicating that the passcode was invalid. e. Access to a level shall only allow the operator to perform all actions within that level and all actions of lower levels, not higher levels. f. The following keys/switches shall have access levels associated with them: Alarm Acknowledge—Supervisory Acknowledge—Trouble Acknowledge—Alarm Silence- - System Reset. B. Smoke Detection Operation: 1. The activation of any system smoke detector shall initiate an alarm verification operation whereby the FACP will reset the activated detector and wait for a second alarm activation. If after 20 seconds and within 1 minute after resetting a second alarm is reported from the same or any other smoke detector, the system shall process the alarm as described previously. If no second alarm occurs within 1 minute, the system shall resume normal operation. The alarm verification shall operate only on single smoke detector alarm. Other activated initiating devices or multiple smoke detector alarms shall be processed and reported immediately. The alarm verification operation shall be selectable by device or zone. 2. The intelligent system shall have the capability of displaying the number of times (tally) a detector has gone into a verification mode. 3. The FACP shall maintain a moving average of the detector's smoke chamber value to automatically compensate (move the threshold) for dust and dirty conditions that could affect detection operations. The system shall automatically maintain a constant smoke obscuration sensitivity for each detector(via the floating threshold) by compensating for environmental factors. Photoelectric detector's smoke obscuration sensitivity shall be adjustable to within 0.3% of either limit of the UL window (0.5% to 4.0%)to compensate for any environment. 4. The system shall automatically indicate when an individual detector needs cleaning. When a detector's average value reaches a predetermined level, a trouble MESSAGE shall be audibly and visibly indicated at the FACP for the individual detector.Additionally, the LED on the detector base shall glow steady giving a visible indication at the detector's location. If the trouble condition is left unattended and the detector's average value increases to a second predetermined value, another trouble MESSAGE shall be indicated at the FACP for the individual detector. To prevent false alarms, these TROUBLE conditions shall in no way decrease the amount of smoke obscuration necessary for system activation. For scheduling of maintenance, the control panel shall be able to generate a MESSAGE indication for any detector approaching a trouble condition because of dirt or contamination. 3.03 ALARM SEQUENCE A. The system alarm operation subsequent to the alarm activation of any manual station or automatic detection device shall be as follows: 1. All audible alarm notification appliances shall sound with the followi ig characteristics: Temporal code pattern until silenced by the alarm silence switch at the FACP. 2. All visible alarm notification appliances: Xenon Strobes shall display a continuous (synchronized where indicated on the drawings) pattern until system is reset. Strobe intensities are indicated on the plans for adherence with ADA. 3. Alarm horns and strobes shall be wired and operate independently. -- Section 28 46 00-15 4463.004/City Contract No.994 4. A supervised signal to notify the central station is to be activated. B. The FACP shall have a dedicated supervisory service LED and a dedicated supervisory service acknowledge switch. C. Activation of an auxiliary bypass means shall override the automatic functions either selectively or throughout the system. D. The system shall have an alarm list means that shall allow the operator to display all alarms, troubles, and supervisory service conditions with the time of occurrence. This shall allow for the determination of the most recent alarm and may also indicate the path that the fire is taking. 3.04 POWER REQUIREMENTS A. The FACP shall receive 120 Vac (as noted on the drawings) from a dedicated circuits. This branch circuit shall have a "breaker lock" to prevent accidentally deenergizing of the power to the fire alarm panel. Circuit breakers shall be painted red and labeled "FIRE ALARM." B. The FACP shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system upon loss of normal AC main's power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of 24 hours with 5 minutes of alarm operation at the end of this period. The system shall automatically transfer to the standby batteries upon power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall be automatic. C. The FACP shall include a disconnect switch for the AC power inside an enclosure near the panel or within the panel itself. This switch shall be labeled "Fire Alarm Power Disconnect." 3.05 SUPERVISION A. The system shall contain independently supervised initiating device circuits. The alarm activation of any initiation circuit shall not prevent the subsequent alarm operation of any other initiation circuit. B. There shall be supervisory service initiation device circuits for connection of all sprinkler flow and tamper switches. Device activation shall be appropriately annunciated at the FACP. C. Auxiliary manual controls shall be supervised so that an "off normal" position of any switch . shall cause an "off normal" system trouble. D. Auxiliary circuits for addressable relays shall be supervised so that a blown fuse or an open in the circuit shall be visibly and audibly annunciated. E. Each independently supervised circuit shall include a discrete visible amber "Trouble" LED to indicate disarrangement conditions per circuit. F. The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure must be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel.A green "power on" LED shall be displayed continuously while incoming power is present. G. The system's batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery condition or disconnection of any battery shall be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel. Section 28 46 00-16 4463.004/City Contract No.994 H. The System Modules shall be electrically supervised for module play;ement. Should a module become disconnected, the system trouble indicator shall illumina:e and the audible trouble signal shall sound. I. The system shall have provisions for disabling and enabling all circuits individually for maintenance or testing purposes. 3.06 INSTALLATION A. The complete installation shall be done in a neat, workmanlike manner in accordance with the applicable requirements of NFPA 70—Article 760 and th manufacturer's recommendations. B. If field conditions require, cover all smoke detection devices with plastic bags immediately after installation to maintain cleanliness. C. Class B circuiting shall be used. 3.07 RACEWAYS A. All wiring shall be in a conduit system separate from all other building wiring. Conduit and boxes shall be painted red. See Section 26 05 33—Conduit for specifications. B. All wiring shall be installed in minimum 3/4-inch conduit. C. There shall be no sharp edges with installed materials. 3.08 CONDUCTORS A. All cable shall be installed according to NEC Article 760. B. All cables and wires shall be No. 14 AWG and larger and shall be stranded. C. All wiring shall be completely supervised. In the event of a primary power failure, disconnected standby battery, disarrangement of any components, any open circuits or grounds in the system, an audible and visual trouble signal shall be activated until the system is restored to normal. D. All conductors shall be color-coded. Coding shall be consistent throughour the facility. Green wire shall be used only for equipment ground. E. FACP shall be connected to separate dedicated branch circuit from t le building panel, maximum 20 amperes. Circuit shall be labeled as "FIRE ALARM." F. Power wiring for FACP shall be No. 12 AWG. G. FACP shall have No. 12 AWG green equipment ground wire. H. Leave 8-inch wire tails at each device box and 36-inch wire tails at the FRCP. — Section 28 46 00-17 4463.004/City Contract No.994 I. Cable for Intelligent Detector Loops shall be 18 to 12 AWG twisted pair with a shield jacket installed in 3/4-inch conduit. Shield continuity must be maintained and connected to earth ground only at the control panel. Intelligent detector wiring must not be in the same conduit with 120/240 Vac power wiring or other high current circuits. T-taps or branch circuit connections are allowed for all class B intelligent loop circuits. J. Wiring of alarm horn circuits and alarm strobe circuits shall be No. 14 AWG minimum. K. Fire alarm cables shall be held in place at the device box by means of a two-screw connector (do not use squeeze- or crimp-type connectors). L. All splices or connections shall be made within approved junction boxes and with approved fittings. Boxes shall be red and/or labeled "FIRE ALARM SYSTEM" by decal or other approved markings. M. Speaker and strobe circuits shall have separate conductors and shall operate independently of each other. N. Speaker wiring shall be 18 AWG twisted shielded cable or as recommend by manufacturer. O. Strobe wiring shall be 14 AWG minimum or as recommend by manufacturer. P. Tray cable is not acceptable for use as fire alarm systems wiring. 3.09 DEVICE MOUNTING A. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, the recommended mounting heights and requirements are as follows: 1. FACP: Mount control panels so all visual indicators and controls are at 60 inches above floor level. Cabinet shall be grounded to either a cold water pipe or grounding rod. 2. Audio-Visual Devices: a. Install flush, semiflush, or surface mount at 6 inches below finished ceiling or at 80 inches from the bottom of the device to the highest level of the finished floor. No devices protruding 4 inches or more shall be installed lower than 80 inches. b. All audio/visual devices shall be installed at the same height throughout the facility. c. For surface mounting, use manufacturer-supplied back boxes and trim plates. Mark each device with its circuit number. 3. Manual Stations: a. The operable part of the manual stations shall be installed not less than 3 1/2 feet (42 inches) and not more than 4 1/2 feet (54 inches) above finished floor.All Manual Stations shall be in unobstructed locations. Mark the unit's address on the inside and outside of housing. For surface mounting, use manufacturer-supplied backboxes and trim plates b. All pull stations shall be installed at the same height throughout the facility.4. Smoke Detectors: a. The location of detectors shown on the drawings is schematic only. The detectors must be located according to code requirements. b. Surface mounted detectors shall be installed using backboxes equal to the base's size. Standard octagon and square boxes are not acceptable. c. Detectors shall be located on the highest part of a smooth ceiling so that the edge of the detector is no closer than 4 inches from a sidewall. Ceilings with beams,joists, Section 28 46 00-18 4463.004/City Contract No.994 or soffits that exceed 8 inches in depth require special planning and closer spacing. Verify with manufacturer. d. If it is necessary to mount a detector upon a sidewall, the top of the detector shall be located no closer than 4 inches from the ceiling and no `urther away than 12 inches. e. Smoke detectors shall be installed to favor the air flow towards return openings and not located closer than 3 feet from air supply diffusers which could dilute smoke before it reaches the detector. No detectors shall be installed in direct airflow. f. Ideally, smoke detectors should be located near the center of the open area which they are protecting, thus providing coverage generally for 15-foot radius for smoke detectors. Verify location with CONSULTANT. g. Mark the address and loop number on each detector's base. 5. Identification: All junction boxes shall be painted red and labeled "Fire Alarm." 3.10 FIELD START-UP AND COMMISSIONING A. Provide the services of a manufacturer's qualified NICET-certified technician to assist CONTRACTOR in installation and start-up of the equipment specified in this section. The manufacturer's representative shall provide technical direction and assistance to CONTRACTOR in general operation of the equipment, connections and adjustments, and testing of the assembly and components contained therein. B. The manufacturer's representative shall provide inspection of the fine installation. The manufacturer's representative shall perform site start-up and functionE l checkout of the equipment. Upon completion of the manufacturer's start-up and checkout, the manufacturer shall generate a site start-up and functional checkout report, documenting all systems checked as well as any incomplete work remaining and operational deficiencies. CONTRACTOR shall provide three copies of the manufacturer's site start-up and functional checkout report to CONSULTANT for review. C. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all costs required to check operation of the system. D. The completed fire alarm system shall be fully tested by the manufacturer in accordance with the Iowa Building Code, and all applicable local building codes in the presence of CITY's representative and the local Fire Marshal. Upon completion of a successful test, a certification shall be issued in writing to CITY and CONTRACTOR. E. CONTRACTOR shall ensure fire alarm control panel is communicating properly between FACP and monitoring agency. 3.11 TRAINING A. Upon successful completion of checkout by CONSULTANT, a manufacturer's representative shall provide a demonstration of the automated sequences of operation. After this demonstration and acceptance by CITY, the manufacturer shall provide 4 hours of "hands-on" training for CITY's operating personnel which shall cover the Following topics: 1. Overall System Description and Theory of Operation. 2. Automatic Operation. 3. Manual Operation and Testing of System Devices. 4. Recommended System Check Lists and Log Sheets. 5. Recommended Preventative Maintenance. Section 28 46 00-19 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Two 4-hour training session for four operators shall be provided. The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer's qualified representative. Training program shall include instructions on the assembly, controls, protective devices, and other major components. Travel time and expenses to the jobsite shall be over and above the time required to perform the training and shall be included in the Bid. 3.12 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE COLOR CODE A. Provide fire alarm circuit conductors with color-coded insulation or other permanent identification at each conductor termination and in each junction box. All fire alarm wiring must be in conduit. END OF SECTION Section 28 46 00-20 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING AND STRIPPING PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Removal of surface debris. 2. Removal of paving, curbs, and sidewalks. 3. Removal of trees, shrubs, and other plant life. 4. Strip and stockpile topsoil. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. PART 2—PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. CONTRACTOR shall identify existing plant life to remain and shall tag ac,ordingly. 3.02 PROTECTION A. CONTRACTOR shall protect from damage utilities and structures that ail- to remain. B. CONTRACTOR shall protect trees, plant growth, and features designatec to remain as final landscaping. C. See Division 01 for protection of survey monumentation. 3.03 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Clearing and grubbing shall consist of cutting and disposing of trees, brush, windfalls, logs, and other vegetation, and the removing and disposing of roots, stumps, stubs, grubs, logs, and other timber from within the clearing limits as defined on the drawings, designated to be removed on the drawings or in the specifications, or fall within the excavation, embankment, or improved areas of the site. B. All roots and stumps shall be removed to a depth of not less than 12 inches below the original ground surface in embankment areas. In cut areas, such material shal be removed to a depth of not less than 12 inches below the subgrade. — Section 31 10 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.04 REMOVALS A. CONTRACTOR shall remove from the site all trees, brush, and other vegetation, debris, and rocks that fall within the excavation and grading limits, as well as any paving, curb and gutter, and sidewalks shown on the drawings to be removed. B. All obstructions, including asphaltic concrete pavement, shall be removed in proper sequence for maintenance of traffic, drainage, and continued use of related facilities. Obstructions shall be removed to the neat lines shown on the Drawings by sawcutting or other means necessary so as not to reduce the quality or function of the remaining material. Holes remaining after removal of all obstructions shall be backfilled with acceptable material, compacted, and the ground shall be restored to approximately its original contour. 3.05 STRIPPING A. Excavate topsoil from areas to be built upon, cut or filled, or to have surface improvements, including roadways and walks. B. Stockpile topsoil on-site and protect from erosion. CONTRACTOR shall provide additional topsoil as required. C. CITY maintains ownership of any excess topsoil. END OF SECTION Section 31 10 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 31 23 00 EXCAVATION, FILL, BACKFILL, AND GRADING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Excavating, filling, backfilling, and grading for this work includes, but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Excavating for footings, foundations, roads, and utilities. 2. Placing and compacting all fill and backfill. - 3. Placement of vapor barrier and granular cushion below interior slabs on grade. 4. Placement of crushed stone mat below tank slabs and manhole/vau t slabs, basement floors, or other structures where required. _ 5. Rough and finish grading prior to paving, seeding, etc. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. C. Allowances: 1. CONTRACTOR shall INCLUDE in the Bid the cost of replacing 1,500 cubic yards of unsuitable foundation material for structures and roads as defined in this section. The unit price shall include the cost of dewatering and slope stabilization and other incidental items associated with this work. Payment to CONTRACTOR for unsuitable foundation material for structures and roads will be adjusted, add or deduct, based upon the actual unsuitable material excavated (more or less than 1,500 cubic yards) and the unit price for replacing unsuitable foundation material. Volume shall be as measured in the ground. Extra payment will not be made for specified undercutting and filling or gravel bedding material required for placing concrete above water level as required under the concrete specifications. The Bid shall include any removal and replacement of excavated material so indicated on the drawings or specified herein. 2. CONTRACTOR shall INCLUDE in the Bid the cost of replacing 500 cubic yards of unsuitable foundation material for utility trenches as defined in this section. The unit - price shall include the cost of dewatering and slope stabilization and other incidental items associated with this work. Payment to CONTRACTOR for unsuitable foundation material for utility trenches will be adjusted, add or deduct, based upon the actual unsuitable material excavated (more or less than 500 cubic yards) and the unit price for replacing unsuitable foundation material. Volume shall be as measured in the ground. Extra payment will not be made for specified undercutting, filling, or bedding. The Bid shall include any removal and replacement of excavated material s:. indicated on the drawings or specified herein. D. Payment: 1. General excavation shall include all excavation specified, undercutting, fill, backfill and grading, except rock excavation and unsuitable foundation mater al, as hereinafter described. 2. All general excavation shall be included in the Lump Sum Bid. Charges which require additions to or deductions from the excavation will be adjusted on the basis of the unit price for changes contained in the Contract. -- Section 31 23 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM C33—Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. B. ASTM D698—Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-Ibf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)). C. ASTM D1557—Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)). D. Standard Specifications: Unless otherwise indicated, Standard Specifications within this section shall refer to the State of Iowa Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction, current edition, including all issued supplemental specifications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. CONTRACTOR shall submit samples of materials proposed for use as fill to soils testing laboratory for analysis of their suitability and for recommendations on moisture content during compaction, compaction methods, or other appropriate information. B. CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient samples of each different type or classification of soil to obtain representative values. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. The elevations shown for existing work and ground are reasonably correct, but are not guaranteed to be absolutely accurate. No extras will be allowed because of variations between drawings and actual grades. B. Soil borings were made and the soils information is included in an appendix to these Specifications. The information contained is not guaranteed to be indicative of conditions to be encountered during construction. It is CONTRACTOR's responsibility to make its own investigations to determine physical conditions at the site, which may affect the work. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPACTED FILL A. All fill and backfill material designated to be compacted fill shall be granular with no stones larger than 4 inches and shall be reasonably well-graded throughout the particle size range. A minimum 65% of the material shall pass the 3/4-inch sieve, and the material shall be capable of being compaction tested in accordance with ASTM D698, as determined by the Project Soils Engineer. Of that portion of the material passing the No. 4 sieve, not more than 25% shall pass the No. 200 sieve, and material shall have less than 5% clay content. When placing fill during wet weather or in wet areas, this requirement shall be modified to not more than 5% passing the No. 200 sieve. Adequately dewatered areas are not defined as wet areas. Section 31 23 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Native material may be used as compacted fill if it meets the above specification. CONTRACTOR shall determine whether native material meets the above specification. CONTRACTOR shall provide all needed fill material whether from on-site or off-site at no additional cost to CITY. 2.02 CRUSHED STONE MAT A. Crushed stone mat below tank slabs, manholes, vault slabs and basement floors shall be 3/4-inch clear crushed stone and shall meet all requirements of ASTM C:33 size No. 67. 2.03 GRANULAR CUSHION A. Granular cushion beneath floor slabs-on-grade shall meet requirements )f Section 4121 of the Standard Specifications for Crushed Stone Base Material Gradation No.12. 2.04 EMBANKMENT FILL A. Embankment fill shall contain no stumps, brush, rubbish, or other perishable material. The top 12 inches of the earth embankment shall be earthy material free from large stones. 2.05 CONCRETE FILL - A. Concrete fill shall be Class X concrete as defined in Section 03 30 .)0 Cast—In—Place Concrete or flowable fill as defined in this section. 2.06 CLAY FILL A. Clay fill shall contain at least 25% clay minerals (material finer than 0.002 mm). 2.07 FLOWABLE FILL A. Flowable fill shall be a self-compacting, self-leveling, material consisting of a mixture of fine aggregate and filler (as needed), water, and cementitious materials (Portland cement, fly ash, granulated blast furnace slag)that is in a flowable state at the time of placement meeting the requirements of the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association Guide Specification for Controlled Low Strength Materials (CLSM). The flowable fill shall be proportioned by the ready mixed concrete supplier on the basis of field experience and/or laboratory trial mixtures to produce a cohesive and nonsegregating mixture which has the following properties: Maximum compressive strength: 150 psi. B. CONTRACTOR shall submit the following information well in advance c f fill placement to avoid any delay in construction: 1. Gradation of fine aggregate. 2. Design mix. 3. Previous test results with 7- and 28-day compressive strengths. 4. Certified mill test results for cement identifying brand, type, and chen iistry of cement to be used. 5. Brand, type, principle ingredient, and amount of each admixture if us-ad. Section 31 23 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Prior to all excavating, CONTRACTOR shall become thoroughly familiar with the site and site conditions. 3.02 PROTECTION A. CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary sheeting, shoring, or other soil retention systems including all labor, material, equipment, and tools required, or as necessary to maintain the excavation in a condition to provide safe working conditions, to permit the safe and efficient installation of all items of Contract work, and to protect adjacent property. CONTRACTOR shall be held liable for any damage which may result to property from excavation or construction operations. Sheeting, shoring, and other soil retainage systems shall be withdrawn or removed in a manner so as to prevent subsequent settlement of structures, utilities, and other improvements. B. Design of sheet piling and other soil retaining systems shall be the sole responsibility of CONTRACTOR. Where such systems are shown on the drawings, no parameters such as embedment depth, section profile, presence or lack of whalers, etc., nor system type or suitability shall be inferred. CONTRACTOR is responsible for designing and providing a fully functional system compatible with construction and site requirements. C. Nothing in this specification shall be deemed to allow the use of protective systems less effective than those required by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) and other applicable code requirements. 3.03 UTILITIES A. Before starting excavations, CONTRACTOR shall locate existing underground utilities in all areas of the work. B. If utilities are to remain in place, CONTRACTOR shall provide adequate means of protection during earthwork operations. C. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility owner immediately for directions. D. Cooperate with CITY and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation, and repair any damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. E. CONTRACTOR shall not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by CITY or others except when permitted in writing by CITY. — F. CONTRACTOR shall accurately locate and record abandoned and active utility lines rerouted or extended on project record drawings. -� 3.04 FINISH ELEVATIONS AND LINES A. CONTRACTOR is responsible for setting and establishing finish elevations and lines. Section 31 23 00-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.05 EXCAVATION A. After the site has been cleared and stripped, the site shall be cut and fillod to the indicated subgrade as shown or specified. B. All excavated material that does not meet the specification for compacted fill or embankment fill or meets the specification but is not required for backfill or fill shall be classified as excess material and shall be removed from the site and disposed of at CONTRACTOR's expense. C. All material other than suitable bearing soil or bedrock, as determined by the Project Soils Engineer, shall be removed from under concrete to be poured on ground D. Excavation for all footings, foundation walls, pits, etc., shall be large E-nough to provide adequate clearance for the proper execution for the work within them. E. Excavations scheduled to extend below groundwater shall not be started until the area has been dewatered. See Section 31 23 19—Dewatering. F. No footings or slabs shall bear on the top 2 feet of existing soil. Where planned subgrade is within 2 feet of existing grade, remove soils to 2 feet below existing grade and backfill with compacted fill up to subgrade elevation. G. When excavations reach subgrade elevations as shown on the drawings or as specified herein, the Project Soils Engineer will observe the bottom material. Where, in the opinion of the Project Soils Engineer, unsuitable foundation material is found at the level of the subgrade, original material below the excavation necessary for construction according to grades shown or specified, shall be removed and replaced with material and placing methods as specified under compacted fill and backfill. H. Excavations that are undercut beneath the foundation shall extend beyond the perimeter of the foundation 1 foot plus a distance at least equal to the depth of undercut below footing grade. I. CONTRACTOR shall backfill and compact all overexcavated areas. 3.06 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE A. After the site has been cleared, stripped, and excavated to subgrade, thoroughly compact subgrade to the requirements specified for compacted fill below. Scarify and moisture condition the subgrade as recommended by the Project Soils Engineer. B. Remove all ruts, hummocks, and other uneven surfaces by surfacE grading prior to placement of fill. C. All slab-on-grade and road subgrades shall be proofrolled with a heavy rubber-tired construction vehicle (such as a fully loaded tandem-axle dump truck) in the presence of the Project Soils Engineer. Section 31 23 00-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.07 COMPACTED FILL AND BACKFILL A. All fill and backfill, except as otherwise specified, shall be compacted fill placed to within 4 inches of the bottom of the topsoil or to the bottom of the structure or other improvement. B. Unless otherwise noted, structures with a top slab shall not be backfilled until the slab is in place and has reached its specified 28-day strength. C. In fill areas above existing grade around structures, compacted fill shall be placed within a minimum of 10 feet from the structure. D. No fill shall be placed under water or over unsuitable subgrade conditions. E. All fill and backfill, except embankment fill and clay fill, shall be compacted as follows: 1. Class 1 Compaction: This class of compaction shall apply to all fill areas under buildings, structures, piping, roadway pavement and parking areas, curb and gutter, sidewalk, and backfill within 10 feet of structure walls. All compacted material shall be placed in uniform layers not exceeding 8 inches in loose thickness when heavy, self- propelled compaction equipment is used, or 4 inches in loose thickness when hand- guided equipment is used prior to compaction. Each layer shall be uniformly compacted to a dry density at least 98% of the maximum dry density as determined by a laboratory compaction test at the optimum moisture content (ASTM Test Designation D698). Compaction shall be obtained by compaction equipment appropriate for the conditions. 2. Class 2 Compaction: This class of compaction shall be used in excavated areas beyond 10 feet of structures without any piping or adjacent foundations. Material for backfill shall be granular material as specified above. The material shall be deposited, spread, and leveled in layers generally not exceeding 12 inches in thickness before compaction. Each layer of the fill shall be compacted to at least 95% of the maximum dry density (testing same as Class 1). Compaction shall be obtained by compaction equipment appropriate for the conditions. F. No frozen material shall be placed nor shall any material be placed on frozen ground. G. Four inches of clay fill shall be placed and compacted to at least a firm consistency in areas to be seeded or sodded prior to placement of topsoil. 3.08 EMBANKMENT FILL A. Embankment fill may be placed in fill areas to be seeded or sodded if no piping exists in the fill and the areas are at least 10 feet from any structure. B. Embankment fill shall be deposited, spread, and leveled in layers generally not exceeding 12 inches in thickness before compaction. Each layer shall be compacted to the degree that no further appreciable consolidation is evidenced under the action of the compaction equipment. The required compaction shall be obtained for each layer before any material for a succeeding layer is placed thereon. Compaction shall be obtained using the hauling and leveling equipment, and in addition, tamping rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, vibratory rollers, or other types of equipment required to produce the desired results. Section 31 23 00-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.09 CONCRETE FILL A. In areas where there is inadequate room for compaction equipment anc in other areas as shown or specified, flowable fill shall be used as fill material. 3.10 GRADING A. CONTRACTOR shall perform all rough and finish grading required to again the elevations shown on the drawings. B. Grading Tolerances: 1. Rough Grade: Buildings, parking areas, and sidewalks—±0.1 feet. 2. Finish Grade: Granular cushion or crushed stone mat under concrete slabs-±0.03 feet. 3. Lawn areas away from buildings, parking areas, and sidewalks—±0.25 feet. 3.11 PLACING GRANULAR CUSHION AND VAPOR BARRIER A. When subgrade is prepared for slab-on-grade areas, CONTRACTOR shall place the vapor barrier and granular cushion. B. Specific location of vapor barrier (whether directly under slab or under granular cushion) shall be as shown on the drawings. 3.12 PLACING CRUSHED STONE AND GEOTEXTILE FABRIC A. The same day that the subgrade is exposed, place geotextile fabric on subgrade, and place 12 inches of crushed stone mat below tank slabs, manholes, vault slabs, and basement floors. Compact in place. B. Geotechnical fabric shall extend up the side edge of the stone mat and extend across the top of the stone to a minimum of 12 inches past the edge of base slab. 3.13 COMPACTION TESTING A. Compaction tests shall be done by the Project Soils Engineer. Location ar d frequency of the tests shall be as recommended by the Project Soils Engineer and paid fo by CITY. END OF SECTION Section 31 23 00-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 31 23 19 DEWATERING PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Removal of groundwater to allow belowgrade construction. 2. Site grading to prevent surface water from entering the excavation. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. C. Payment: 1. The expense for making all extra excavations necessary to prevent water from interfering with the proper construction of the work and for forming all dams or diversions, digging of sumps or pump wells, bailing, and installation and pumping of wells shall be borne by CONTRACTOR. _. 2. The cost for removal of groundwater and surface water shall be included in the prices bid for the work. No separate payment will be made for dewatering whether accomplished by use of sumps and pumps, well point systems, deep wells, or any other method. 1.02 REFERENCES A. See Division 01, Regulatory Requirements for permit requirements and water, erosion, and sediment control. 1.03 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. CONTRACTOR shall, at its own expense, keep the excavation clear of water while �. structures, mains, and appurtenances are being built, utilities are being installed, and fill and backfill are being compacted. Under no conditions shall the work be laid in or under water. No water shall flow over the work until the joints are complete or the concrete has set. . B. Dewatering shall be sufficient to lower the piezometric level to at least 2 feet below the bottom of the excavation. Additional lowering shall be provided as necessary to create a stable subgrade. C. In areas where rock is encountered, the water level shall be kept at or below top of rock, but at least 6 inches below bottom of concrete. Additional rock shall be removed as needed to provide clearances. D. The control of groundwater shall be such that softening or heaving of the bottom of excavations or formation of"quick" conditions or "boils" shall be prevented. E. Dewatering systems shall be designed and operated so as to prevent the migration or removal of soils. Section 31 23 19-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All dewatering shall be done in accordance with applicable federal, sta:e, and local code requirements. PART 2—PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 DEWATERING A. Dewatering shall be started, and the water level shall be lowered as specified herein prior to beginning excavation and shall be continued until structure, main, or appurtenance has been completed and fill has been placed and compacted to final grade. B. CONTRACTOR shall provide at least two groundwater observation wells near each area to be excavated to aid CONTRACTOR in determining whether the minimum specified requirements have been met prior to excavation. The observation well shall be a minimum 2-inch-diameter slotted PVC pipe. The observation well shall be installed and backfilled in such a way as to allow an accurate determination of actual groundwater levels. The observation well shall be properly abandoned after use unless specified otherwise. C. CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary materials and equipment to keep the excavation free from water during construction. CONTRACTOR shall at all times have on hand sufficient pumping equipment and machinery in good working condition for all ordinary emergencies, including power outages, and shall have available at all times competent workers for the operation of the pumping equipment. The dewatering systems shall not be shut down between shifts, on holidays or weekends, or during the work stoppages. D. The release of groundwater to its static level shall be performed in sucl a manner as to maintain the undisturbed state of the natural foundation soils, prevelt disturbance of compacted fill or backfill, and prevent floatation or movement of all structL-es and pipelines. 3.02 PROTECTION A. CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions during the dewatering operation to protect adjacent structures against subsidence, flooding, or other damage. The dewatering system shall be installed and operated so that the groundwater level outside the excavation is not reduced to the extent that would damage or endanger adjacent structures or property. Any such facilities and structures damaged shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of their owner. B. Prior to dewatering, CONTRACTOR shall take into account the effect of its proposed dewatering operation on existing private water supply systems and shall m-ike arrangements with property owners for protecting their supplies or providing alternative -neans of supply. Section 31 23 19-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. In the event that CONTRACTOR's dewatering operation adversely affects private water supply systems, CONTRACTOR shall provide property owners with alternative potable and nonpotable supplies until dewatering operations are ceased and groundwater levels return to normal. If the water in private water supply wells is contaminated, through no fault of CONTRACTOR after restoration of original groundwater levels, CITY will provide measures mm to restore water potability. CONTRACTOR is responsible for restoration of the water supply, not its potability after restoration. D. In areas where continuous operation of dewatering pumps is required, CONTRACTOR shall avoid noise disturbance to nearby residences to the greatest extent possible by using electric-driven pumps, or intake and exhaust silencers or housing to minimize noise from engine-driven generators or engine-driven pumps. END OF SECTION Section 31 23 19-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 31 25 00 SLOPE PROTECTION AND EROSION CONTROL PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Erosion control devices. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 PAYMENT A. All costs associated with slope protection and erosion control shall be included in CONTRACTOR's Bid. This work shall include, but is not limited to, erecting fence, excavation, placing posts, backfilling, attaching woven wire and geotextile fabric; placing ditch checks; installing sediment traps; removing the fence at completion of project; cleaning and repairing; removing or spreading accumulated sediment to form a surface suitable for seeding; replacing silt fence and damages caused by overloading of sediment material or - ponding of water adjacent to silt fence; and furnishing labor, tools equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete the work in accordance with the Contract. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Iowa Department of Natural Resources—Iowa Construction Site Erosio-i Control Manual (ECM). B. Iowa Statewide Urban Design and Specifications (SUDAS) www.iowasudas.orq. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Land disturbance greater than one acre and CITY obtains NOI. 1. CITY has prepared a Storm Water Management and Erosion Control Flan in conjunction with the development of the Contract Documents and will submit a "Notice of Intent" (NOI) for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Land Disturbing Activities. CONTRACTOR as designated operator of activities at the construction site shall be responsible for compliance with all permit conditions. This includes but is not limited to the following: a. Implement erosion and sediment control practices necessary to meet federal, state, and local performance standards. b. Receive required approvals from CITY and regulatory a jencies for any modifications to the erosion control plan necessitated by site conditions or CONTRACTOR's operations. c. Provide a "qualified" inspector to inspect erosion control and sediment controls. Inspector shall have prior experience with and knowledge of installation and maintenance of erosion and sediment controls. Inspector shall be identified to CITY. d. Perform all inspection, maintenance, and record keeping activities required by the permit. This shall include inspecting erosion and sediment control facilities weekly -- Section 31 25 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 and within 24 hours after a precipitation event of 0.5 inches or greater. CONTRACTOR shall maintain weekly written reports of all inspections. e. CONTRACTOR shall respond within 24 hours to all corrective measures noted on the inspection report to address pollution issues. f. CONTRACTOR shall submit to CITY a written notice stating the times, dates and actions taken to rectify the defective pollution and erosion controls. g. Pay any fines or other fees resulting from failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with the permit requirements. h. Submit a "Notice of Termination" (NOT) to DNR at end of the Project. B. CONTRACTOR and its subcontractors shall execute and sign the following certification: "I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the General Pollutant Discharge Elimination System Permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activities from the construction site and as may be detailed in the Contract Documents. I agree to indemnify and hold CITY harmless from any claims, demands, suits, causes of action, settlements, fines, or judgments and the costs of litigation, including, but not limited to, reasonable attorneys fees and costs of investigation and arising from a condition, obligation or requirement assumed or to be performed by CONTRACTOR for storm water pollution and erosion control." C. CONTRACTOR shall pay any fines or other fees resulting from failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with the permit requirements. 1.05 QUALITY CONTROL A. Construct and maintain erosion sediment control measures in accordance with the Conservation Practice Standards. B. Check facilities weekly and after any rainfall event, and make needed repairs within 24 hours. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 EROSION CONTROL PRODUCTS A. Erosion control products shall meet the requirements of SUDAS Standard Specifications. 2.02 EROSION MATS A. Erosion mat products shall be selected in conformance with criteria specified in SUDAS Standard Specifications Section 9040.2.05. B. A 300 mm by 300 mm sample of a product proposed for erosion mat may be required to verify that it is prequalified. When a sample is required, it shall be accompanied by the manufacturer's literature for the proposed product. Section 31 25 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.03 SILT FENCE A. Silt fence shall conform to SUDAS Standard Specifications Section 9040 2.13. B. Furnish wrapping on each roll of fabric to protect the fabric from ultraviolet -adiation and from abrasion during shipping and handling. Keep geotextile dry until installed 2.04 COMPOST BLANKET A. Compost blanket shall comply with SUDAS Section 9010.2.07.0 for material requirements and conform to SUDAS Standard Specifications Section 9040.2.02. _ 2.05 INLET PROTECTION A. Inlet protection shall conform to SUDAS Standard Specifications Section 9040.2.18. Manufactured bags shall conform to Section 9040.2.18. 2.06 STONE TRACKING PADS AND TIRE WASHING STATION A. Stone tracking pads and tire washing stations shall conform to SUDAS Standard Specification Section 9040.2.14. 2.07 DITCH CHECKS A. Ditch checks shall conform to SUDAS Standard Specifications Section 9(.:40.2.07. B. Engineering fabric shall conform to SUDAS Standard Specification Sectic:n 9040.2.20. 2.08 MULCHING A. Mulching for construction sites shall conform to SUDAS Standa-d Specifications Section 9040.2.16. 2.09 VEGETATIVE BUFFER FOR CONSTRUCTION SITES — A. Vegetative buffer shall conform to Construction Site ECM 2.8 Strip Filter. 2.10 TEMPORARY SEEDING A. Temporary seeding for construction site erosion control shall conform to SUDAS Standard Specifications Section 9010—Part 2. 2.11 BEDDING DIKE A. Where shown on the Drawings or requested by CONSULTANT in the field, CONTRACTOR shall install clay bedding dikes to prevent groundwater from flowing continuously through the bedding material installed for the sanitary sewer. Bedding dikes shall be 4 feet long and shall extend from the bottom of the trench excavation to within 2 feet of the ground surface and 1 foot beyond the normal trench width on both sides of the trench. Section 31 25 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.12 TURF REINFORCED MAT A. Turf reinforcement mats shall be Type 4 (TRM) and shall conform to SUDAS Standard Specifications Section 9040.2.17. 2.13 RIPRAP A. See Section 31 37 00—Riprap. 2.14 DUST CONTROL A. Dust control products shall conform to SUDAS Standard Specifications Section 9040.2.15.PART 3—EXECUTION — 3.01 GENERAL A. Install devices before construction activities begin. B. Proceed carefully with construction adjacent to stream channels to avoid washing, sloughing, or deposition of materials into the stream. If possible, the work area should be diked off and the volume and velocity of water that crosses disturbed areas be reduced by means of planned engineering works (diversion, detention basins, berms). C. Unless noted on drawings, do not remove trees and surface vegetation. D. Expose the smallest practical area of soil at any given time through construction scheduling. Make the duration of such exposure before application of temporary erosion control measures or final revegetation as short as practicable. E. CONTRACTOR shall provide a "qualified" inspector to inspect erosion control and sediment controls once in place. Inspector shall have prior experience with and knowledge of installation and maintenance of erosion and pollution controls. Unless stricter requirements are mandated by DNR or by any local permits, project site erosion control inspection shall be conducted every seven days and after each one-half-inch rainfall or greater. CONTRACTOR shall maintain hard copies of the inspection reports for the duration of the Project. F. Any necessary repairs to erosion and sediment control facilities shall be provided within 24 hours to all corrective measures noted on the inspection reports to address pollution issues. CONTRACTOR shall submit to CITY a written notice stating the times, dates and actions taken to rectify the defective erosion and sediment controls. G. CONTRACTOR shall also make any necessary additions for erosion and sediment control as may result from on-site conditions or the progress of the Work or as may be required by DNR or CITY. —. H. Disturbed areas shall be stabilized with temporary or permanent measures within 14 calendar days of the soil disturbance or redisturbance. Section 31 25 00-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 I. All temporary erosion and sediment control measures shall be removed within 30 days after final stabilization is achieved or after the temporary measures are no longer needed. All sediment accumulated in temporary and permanent facilities shall be removed and properly disposed of and the area restored. 3.02 EROSION MAT A. Erosion mats shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's requirements and with SUDAS Standard Specifications Section 9040.3.08. B. Place erosion mats immediately after seeding operations have been completed. Before mat placement, remove all material or clods over 1 1/2 inches in diameter and all organic material or other foreign material which may interfere with the mat bearing completely on the soil. C. Any small stones or clods which prevent contact of the mat with the soil shall be pressed in the soil with a small lawn—type roller or by other means. The mat shall he ve its lateral edge so impressed in the soil so as to permit runoff water to flow over it. D. The matting strips shall be rolled on or laid in direction of flow. Spread mat evenly and smoothly in a natural position without stretching and with all parts bearing on soil. Place blanket with netting on top. Overlap adjacent strips at least 4 inches. Overlap strip ends at least 10 inches. Make overlaps with upgrade section on top. E. Bury upgrade end of each strip of fabric or blanket at least 6 inches in a vertical slot cut in the soil and press soil firmly against the imbedded fabric or blanket. F. Anchor mats in place with vertically driven staples, driven until their tops are flush with the soil. Space staples on 3-foot centers along mat edges and stagger space at 3-foot centers through the center. Place staples at 10-inch centers at end or junction slots. G. Reseed areas damaged or destroyed during erosion mat placing operations as specified for original seeding. H. Dispose of surplus excavated materials during erosion mat placing operation as specified for original seeding. I. Following mat placement, uniformly apply water to the area to moisten seed bed to 2-inch depth and in a manner to avoid erosion. J. Maintain erosion mat and make satisfactory repairs of damage from erosi:)n, traffic, fires, or other causes until Work is accepted. 3.03 SILT FENCE A. Silt fence shall be constructed in conformance with the criteria specified in SUDAS Standard Specifications Section 9040.3.18. 3.04 COMPOST BLANKET A. Compost blanket shall be applied in accordance with SUDAS Standard Specifications Section 9040.3.05 and Figure 9040.101. Section 31 25 00-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.05 INLET PROTECTION A. All storm drains that are or will be functioning during construction shall be provided with inlet protection. Inlet protection shall be provided in conformance with the criteria specified in Construction Site ECM 3.9 and SUDAS Standard Specifications Section 9040.3.24. 3.06 STONE TRACKING PADS AND TIRE WASHING A. Tracking pads (tire washing stations as required) shall be installed in accordance with the criteria in SUDAS Standard Specifications Section 9040-3.19. B. Surface water must be prevented from passing through tracking pads. Flows shall be diverted away from tracking pads and conveyed under and around them such as with culverts. C. Any sediment tracked onto a road shall be removed before the end of each day. Flushing sediment shall not be allowed. 3.07 DITCH CHECKS A. Ditch checks shall be provided in conformance with the criteria specified in SUDAS Standard Specifications Section 9040.3.10. 3.08 MULCHING A. Mulching shall be provided in conformance with the criteria specified in SUDAS Standard Specifications Section 9040.3.21. 3.09 VEGETATIVE BUFFER A. Vegetative buffer shall be provided in conformance with the criteria specified in Construction Site ECM 2.8—Vegetative Filter Strips. 3.10 SEEDING FOR EROSION CONTROL A. Temporary seeding for erosion control shall be provided in conformance with the criteria specified in SUDAS Standard Specifications Section 9010—Part 3. 3.11 SEDIMENT TRAPS AND SEDIMENT BASINS A. Sediment traps for erosion and sedimentation control during interim construction stages shall be installed in accordance with the criteria in SUDAS Standard Specifications Section 9040.3.17 and sediment basins with the criteria in SUDAS Standard Specifications Figures 9040.113.115 and Section 9040.3.15, and Construction Site ECM 3.17-Sedimentation Basin. They shall be constructed prior to any disturbances and shall be placed so they function during all phases of the Work. 3.12 TURF REINFORCED MAT A. Turf reinforced mat shall be provided in conformance with the criteria specified in SUDAS Standard Specification Section 9040.3.22. Section 31 25 00-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.13 DUST CONTROL A. Dust control measure shall be provided in conformance with the criteria specified in SUDAS _" Standard specifications Section 9040.3.20. — END OF SECTION — Section 31 25 00-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 31 32 19 GEOTEXTILES PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Geotextiles for areas below structures, at perforated drain pipe trenches, pressure relief valves, below base course, and below riprap. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Geotextile for areas below structures for use at perforated drain pipe trenches and pressure relief valves and as specified elsewhere, shall be Mirafi 140N, or equal. B. Multi-axial geogrid placed below all base course shall be Tensar TX130S, or equal. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Geotextile and multi-axial geogrid shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Geotextile and multi-axial geogrid shall be lapped a minimum of 24 inches. C. CONTRACTOR shall protect the construction fabric from exposure to the sun until installation. Construction fabric shall be covered with stone or soil immediately upon placement. END OF SECTION �.. Section 31 32 19-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 31 37 00 RIPRAP PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY -- A. Work Included: Furnishing and placing riprap. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standard Specifications: Unless otherwise indicated, Standard Specifications shall refer to the State of Iowa Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction, current edition, including all issued supplemental specifications. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Stone for riprap shall be durable quarry stone of approved quality. It shall be sound, hard, dense, resistant to the action of air and water, and free from seams cracks, or other structural defects. B. Stone for riprap shall be in accordance with Standard Specifications, Section 4130.02.A, Class C Revetment. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. The bed for the riprap shall be properly trimmed and shaped before geott!xtile and stone is placed. Bed shall be minimum 6 inches thick. B. Geotextile shall be placed below riprap. See Section 31 32 19—Geotextile 3.02 INSTALLATION — A. Riprap shall be provided in areas as designated on the drawings and it accordance with Drawing 01-975-149A. B. Stone placed above the water line shall be placed by hand. It shall be laid with close, broken joints and shall be firmly bedded into the slope and against the adjoining stones. The stones shall be laid perpendicular to the slope with ends in contact. Section 31 37 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. The riprap shall be thoroughly compacted as construction progresses, and the finished surface shall present an even, tight surface. D. The large stone shall be placed in the lower courses. Interstices between stones shall be chinked with spalls firmly rammed into place. E. Unless otherwise shown or specified, riprap shall be at least 18 inches in thickness, measured perpendicular to the slope. END OF SECTION Section 31 37 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 31 62 16.11 HELICAL PILE FOUNDATIONS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The work consists of designing, furnishing and installing helical piles and load transfer devices used to support compressive and tension loads according to the project Drawings and these specifications. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. - 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): AISC 360: Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1 . ASTM A36: Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A123: Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 3. ASTM A153: Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware . -- 4. ASTM A307: Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength. 5. ASTM A325: Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 6. ASTM A500: Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 7. ASTM A513: Electric-Resistance Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing. 8. ASTM A572: High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbian-Vanadium Structural Steel. 9. ASTM B633: Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel. 10. ASTM D1143: Deep Foundations Under Static Axial Compressive Load. C. International Code Council Evaluation Services (ICC-ES): Acceptance Criteria 358 (AC358): Acceptance Criteria for Helical Pile Systems and Devices. -- D. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE): SAE J429: Mechanical and Material Requirements for Externally Threaded Fasteners. - 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. The following terms apply to helical piles used to support compressive loads: 1. Allowable Stress Design: A structural and geotechnical design methodology that states that the summation of the actual estimated loads (nominal loads) must be less than or equal to the allowable design load (required strength). Allowable loads are obtained by dividing a nominal resistance (strength) by an appropriate factor of safety. 2. Bearing Stratum: The soil layer (or layers) that provide the helical pile end-bearing capacity through load transfer from the helical plates. - Section 31 62 16.11-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3. Crowd: Axial compressive force applied to the helical pile shaft as needed during installation so that the pile advances at a rate approximately equal to the helix pitch for each revolution. 4. Design Strength: A term used in structural design which is defined as the product of the nominal strength and the applicable resistance factor, also referred to as factored resistance. 5. Extension Section: Helical pile shaft sections connected to the lead section or other extension sections to advance the helix plates to the required bearing depth. Plain extensions (without helix plates) or helical extensions (with one or more helix plates) may be used depending upon soil conditions or project requirements. 6. Factor of Safety: The ratio of the ultimate pile capacity or nominal resistance (strength) to the nominal or service load used in the design of any helical pile component or interface (Allowable Stress Design). 7. Factored Load: The product of a nominal load and an applicable load factor (Load and Resistance Factor Design). 8. Factored Resistance: The product of a nominal resistance and an applicable resistance factor (Load and Resistance and Factor Design). 9. Geotechnical Capacity: The maximum load or the load at a specified limit state, that can be resisted through the piles interaction with the bearing soils (see also Ultimate Pile Capacity). 10. Helical Pile: Consists of a central steel shaft with one or more helix-shaped bearing plates and a load transfer device (bracket) that allows attachment to structures. Helical piles are installed into the ground by application of torque and axial compressive force ("crowd"). 11. Helix (Helical) Plate: Generally round steel plate formed into a helical spiral and welded to the central steel shaft. When rotated in the ground, the helix shape provides thrust along the pile's longitudinal axis thus aiding in pile installation. The plate transfers axial load to the soil through bearing. 12. Helix Pitch: The distance measured along the axis of the shaft between the leading and trailing edges of the helix plate. 13. Lead Section: The first helical pile shaft component installed into the soil. It consists of one or more helical plates welded to a central steel shaft. 14. Limit State: A condition beyond which a helical pile component or interface becomes unfit for service and is judged to no longer be useful for its intended function (serviceability limit state) or to be unsafe (ultimate limit state (strength)). 15. Load and Resistance Factor Design: A structural and geotechnical design methodology that states that the Factored Resistance(Design Strength) must be greater than or equal to the summation of the applied factored loads. 16. Load Factor: A factor that accounts for the probability of deviation of the actual load from the predicted nominal load due to variability of material properties, workmanship, type of failure and uncertainty in the prediction of the load (Load and Resistance Factor Design). 17. Load Test: A process to test the ultimate pile capacity and relation of applied load to pile head settlement by application of a known load on the helical pile head and monitoring movement over a specific time period. 18. Loads: Forces that result from the weight of all building materials, occupants and their possessions, environmental effects, differential movement, and restrained dimensional changes. Permanent loads are those loads in which variations over time are rare or of small magnitude. All other loads are variable loads (see also Nominal Loads). 19. Mechanical Strength: The maximum load or the load at a specified limit state that can be resisted by the structural elements of a helical pile. Section 31 62 16.11-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 20. Net Deflection: The total settlement at the pile head minus the theoretical elastic deformation of the pile shaft during a load test. 21. Nominal Loads: The magnitude of the loads specified, which include dead, live, soil, wind, snow, rain, flood and earthquakes (also referred to as service loads or working loads). 22. Nominal Resistance: The pile capacity at a specified ultimate limit state (Load and Resistance Factor Design). See Ultimate Pile Capacity. 23. Nominal Strength: A term used in structural design which is defined as the structure or member capacity at a specified strength limit state. See Ultimate Pile Capacity. 24. Resistance Factor: A factor that accounts for the probability of deviation of the actual resistance (strength) from the predicted nominal resistance (strength) due to variability of material properties, workmanship, type of failure and uncertainties in the analysis (Load and Resistance Factor Design). 25. Service Loads: See "Nominal Loads" above. 26. Ultimate Pile Capacity: The helical pile capacity based on the least capacity determined from applicable ultimate limit states for mechanical and geotechnical capacity. 1.04 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Helical piles shall be designed to support the specified compressive and tension load(s) as shown on the project Drawings. The overall length, helix configuration and minimum torsional resistance of a helical pile shall be such that the required capacity is developed by the helix plate(s) in an appropriate bearing stratum. B. All structural steel pile components shall be designed within the limits provided by the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Specification for Structural Steel Buildings (AISC-360). Either Allowable Stress Design (ASD) or Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) are acceptable methods of analysis. Product testing in accordance with ICC-ES Acceptance Criteria 358 may also be considered as an acceptable means of establishing system capacities. C. Except where noted otherwise on the project Drawings, all piles shall be installed to provide an ultimate torque-correlated capacity based on an ASD or LRFD analysis. For ASD, a minimum factor of safety of 2 applied to the service or nominal loading shall be required. When an LRFD analysis is required, CITY shall provide applicable pile design information including but not limited to; factored loads, resistance factors and/or the required ultimate pile capacity. Factors of safety (ASD) or resistance factors (LRFD) may require modification to meet specific deflection criteria stated on the Drawings. D. The required ultimate torque-correlated capacity shall be verified at each pile location by monitoring and recording the final installation torque and applying default torque correlations per ICC-ES AC358. Site specific torque correlation factors may be determined by field compression load testing as specified in this section. E. Except where noted otherwise on the project Drawings, each pile shall be designed to meet a corrosion service life of 50 years in accordance with ICC-ES AC358. F. The pile design shall take into account group efficiency from pile spacing, pile buckling potential, soil stratification, and strain compatibility issues. Section 31 62 16.11-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS OF INSTALLING CONTRACTOR AND DESIGNER A. Evidence of Installing Contractor's competence in the installation of helical piles shall be provided to CITY's satisfaction and may include any or all of the following: 1. Pile manufacturer's certificate of competency for the installation of helical piles, 2. A list of at least three projects completed within the previous three years wherein the Installing Contractor installed helical piles similar to those shown in the project Drawings. Such list to include names and phone numbers of those project representatives who can verify the Installing Contractor's participation in those projects, _.. and/or 3. A letter from the pile manufacturer or manufacturer's representative expressing ability and intent to provide on-site supervision of the pile installation. B. Evidence of Pile Designer's competence shall be provided to CITY's satisfaction and may include any or all of the following: 1. Registration as a Professional Engineer or recognition by the local jurisdictional authority, 2. A list of at least three projects completed within the previous three years wherein the Pile Designer designed helical piles similar to those shown in the project Drawings. The list shall include names and phone numbers of those project representatives who can verify the Pile Designer's participation in those projects, and/or 3. Recommendation from the pile manufacturer or manufacturer's representative. 1.06 PRE-CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS A. The Installing Contractor and/or Pile Designer shall submit the following helical pile design documentation: 1. Certification from the Pile Designer that the proposed piles meet the requirements of this specification. 2. Qualifications of the Installing Contractor and Pile Designer. 3. Product designations for helical lead and extension sections and all ancillary products to be supplied at each helical pile location. 4. Individual pile nominal loads, factors of safety, LRFD load and resistance factors and required ultimate torque correlated capacities, where applicable. 5. Individual pile loading requirements (if any). 6. Manufacturer's published allowable system capacities for the proposed pile assemblies, including load transfer devices. 7. Calculated mechanical and theoretical geotechnical capacities of the proposed piles. 8. Minimum pile termination torque requirements. 9. Maximum estimated installation torque and allowable installation torque rating of the proposed piles. 10. Minimum and/or maximum embedment lengths or other site specific embedment depth requirements as may be appropriate for the site soil profiles. 11. Inclination angle and location tolerance requirements. 12. Load test procedures and failure criteria, if applicable. 13. Copies of certified calibration reports for torque measuring equipment and load test measuring equipment to be used on the project. The calibrations shall have been performed within one year of the proposed helical pile installation starting date or as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. 14. Provide proof of insurance coverage as stated in the general specifications and/or contract. Section 31 62 16.11-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 HELICAL PILE MANUFACTURERS A. Foundation Supportworks®, Inc., 12330 Cary Circle, Omaha, NE 68128; - Phone: (800) 281-8545; Fax: (402) 393-4002, or equal. B. Due to the special requirements for design and manufacturing of helical piles, the piles shall be obtained from Foundation Supportworks®, Inc., or other qualified manufacturer with an approved equivalent product.A request to substitute any other manufactured helical product must be submitted to CITY for review not less than seven calendar days prior to the bid date. The request must include: 1. Documentation of at least five years of production experience manufacturing helical piles, 2. Documentation that the manufacturer's helical piles have been used successfully in at — least five engineered construction projects within the last three years. 3. Product acceptance by the local building code official(s) having jurisdiction over the project, and/or 4. Current ICC-ES product evaluation report or complete description of product testing and manufacturing quality assurance programs used to assess and maintain product quality and determine product mechanical strength and geotechnical capacity. 2.02 PRODUCTS A. Hollow Round Shaft Helical Pile Models HP350 and HP450 manufactured in accordance with the requirements of this specification. 1. Hollow round shaft helical piles shall be used to resist compression loads. 2. Pile shaft sections shall be in full, direct contact within couplings so as to remove coupling bolts and coupling welds from the "in-service" axial load path. 3. Pile shafts and couplings shall have a fit-up tolerance of 1/16-inch or less. 4. Helix plates shall meet the following geometry and spacing criteria to minimize soil disturbance: a. True helix-shaped plates that are normal to the shaft such that the leading and trailing edges are within 1/4-inch of parallel. -' b. Helix pitch is 3-inches ± 1/4-inch. c. All helix plates have the same pitch. d. Helix plates have generally circular edge geometry. — e. Helix spacing along the shaft shall be between 2.4 and 3.6 times The helix diameter. f. Helix plates are arranged along the shaft such that they all theoretically track the same path as the proceeding plate. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Model HP350 Helical Pile System: 1. Central Steel Shaft: The central steel shaft of the lead and extension sections shall be 3.5-inch outer diameter by 0.313-inch nominal wall thickness, hollow structural section that is fabricated from ASTM A572 sheet, rolled to tube form. Wall thickness tolerances shall conform to ASTM A513. The shaft material shall have a minimum yield strength of 65 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 75 ksi. The shaft shall be plain steel. 2. Shaft Coupling Material: The shaft coupling material shall consist of 4.25-inch outer diameter by 0.344-inch nominal wall thickness, hollow structural section in conformance Section 31 62 16.11-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 with ASTM A513 Type 5, Grade 1026 with a minimum yield strength of 70 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 80 ksi. The shaft coupling shall be plain steel. 3. Helix Plate Material: The helix plates shall be factory welded to the lead or extension shaft sections. Helix plates with outer diameters of 6, 8, 10, 12 or 14-inches shall be either 0.375 or 0.5 inches thick and 16-inch diameter helix plates shall be 0.5 inches thick. The helix plates shall be manufactured with ASTM A572 Grade 50 steel with a minimum yield strength of 50 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 65 ksi. The helix plate shall be plain steel. 4. Shaft Coupling Hardware: The lead and extension shaft sections shall be coupled with four bolts and nuts per coupled shaft section. The coupling hardware shall consist of 1-inch standard hex bolts conforming to SAE J429 Grade 8 and standard hex jam nuts. The bolts and nuts shall be zinc coated in accordance with ASTM B633. 5. Brackets: New construction brackets HP350NCB or HP350NCB8 shall be used for tension and compression applications and HP350NCBE or HP350NCBE8 shall be used for compression only applications with the HP350 shaft. Brackets shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. Bracket hardware shall be zinc coated in accordance with ASTM B633. B. Model HP450 Helical Pile System: 1. Central Steel Shaft: The central steel shaft of the lead and extension sections shall be 4.5-inch outer diameter by 0.337-inch nominal wall thickness, hollow structural section in conformance with ASTM A500 Grade B or C with a minimum yield strength of 50 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 60 ksi. The shaft shall be plain steel. 2. Shaft Coupling Material: The shaft coupling material shall consist of 3.75-inch outer diameter by 0.5-inch nominal wall thickness, hollow structural section in conformance with ASTM A513 Type 5, Grade 1026 with a minimum yield strength of 70 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 80 ksi. The shaft coupling shall be plain steel. 3. Helix Plate Material: The helix plates shall be factory welded to the lead or extension shaft sections. Helix plates with outer diameters of 8, 10, 12 or 14 inches shall be either 0.375 or 0.5 inches thick and 16-inch diameter helix plates shall be 0.5 inches thick.The helix plates shall be manufactured with ASTM A572 Grade 50 steel with a minimum yield strength of 50 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 65 ksi. The helix plate shall be plain steel. 4. Shaft Coupling Hardware: The lead and extension shaft sections shall be coupled with four bolts and nuts per coupled shaft section. The coupling hardware shall consist of 1.125-inch standard hex bolts conforming to SAE J429 Grade 5 and standard hex jam nuts. The bolts and nuts shall be zinc coated in accordance with ASTM B633. 5. Brackets: New construction bracket HP450NCB8 shall be used for tension and compression applications and HP450NCBE8 shall be used for compression only applications with the HP450 shaft. Brackets shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. Bracket hardware shall be zinc coated in accordance with ASTM B633. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS A. Helical piles shall be installed within 3-inches of the indicated plan location. B. Helical pile shaft alignment shall be within 2-degrees of the inclination angle shown on the Drawings. Section 31 62 16.11-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Top elevation of the helical piles shall be within 2-inches of the design ve-tical elevation. 3.02 PILE INSTALLATION A. Installing Contractor shall furnish and install all helical piles per the project Drawings and pile design documentation. In the event of conflict between the project Drawings and the pile design documentation, the Installing Contractor shall not begin construction on any affected items until such conflict has been resolved. B. The Installing Contractor's personnel shall comply with safety procedures n accordance with OSHA standards and any established project safety plan. C. CITY shall request marking of underground utilities by an underground utility location service as required by law, and the Installing Contractor shall avoid contact with all marked underground facilities. D. The portion of the construction site occupied by the Installing Contractor, including equipment and material stockpiles shall be kept reasonably clean and orderly. E. Installation of helical piles may be observed by representatives of CITY and CONSULTANT for quality assurance purposes. The Installing Contactor shall give CITY and CONSULTANT at least 24 hours' notice prior to the pile installation operations. F. The helical pile installation technique shall be such that it is consistent with the geotechnical, logistical, environmental, and load carrying conditions of the project. The lead section shall be positioned at the appropriate site survey stake location as determined from the plan drawings. G. The helical pile sections shall be advanced into the soil in a continuous manner at a rate of rotation less than 25 revolutions per minute (rpm). Sufficient crowd shall be applied to advance the helical pile sections at a rate approximately equal to the pitch of the helix plate per revolution. The rate of rotation and magnitude of down pressure shall be adjusted for different soil conditions and depths. Extension sections shall be provided to obtain the required minimum overall length and minimum torsional resistance as shown on the project Drawings. 3.03 TERMINATION CRITERIA A. The minimum final torsional resistance and/or any required pile length and embedment depth criteria, as specified in the Pre-Construction Submittals, shall be satisfied prior to terminating the pile installation. In the event any helical pile fails to meet these production quality control termination criteria, the following remedies may be suitable if authorized by CITY: 1. If the installation fails to meet the minimum torsional resistance criterion at the minimum embedment length: a. Continue the installation to greater depths until the torsional resistance criterion is met, provided that, if a maximum length constraint is applicable, continued installation does not exceed said maximum length constraint, or b. Demonstrate acceptable pile performance through pile load testing, or c. Replace the pile with one having a different helix plate configuration. The replacement pile shall not exceed any applicable maximum embedment length Section 31 62 16.11-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 criteria and either: (A) be embedded to a length that places the last helix plate at least equal to its own diameter beyond the depth of the first helix plate of the replaced pile and meet the minimum torsional resistance criterion; or (B) pass pile load testing criteria. 2. If the torsional resistance during installation reaches the helical pile's allowable torque rating prior to satisfaction of the minimum embedment length criterion: a. Terminate the installation at the depth obtained, or b. Replace the pile with one having a shaft with a higher torsional strength rating. The replacement pile shall be installed to satisfy the minimum embedment length criterion. It shall also be embedded to a length that places the last helix plate at least equal to its own diameter beyond the depth of the first helix plate of the replaced pile without exceeding any applicable maximum embedment length requirements and it shall meet the minimum final torsional resistance criterion, or c. Replace the pile with one having a different helix plate configuration. The replacement pile shall be installed to satisfy the minimum embedment length criterion. It shall also be embedded to a length that places the last helix plate at least equal to its own diameter beyond the depth of the first helix plate of the replaced pile without exceeding any applicable maximum embedment length requirements, and it shall meet the minimum final torsional resistance criterion. 3. If the installation reaches a specified maximum embedment length without achieving the minimum torsional resistance criterion: a. Demonstrate acceptable pile performance through pile load testing, or b. De-rate the load capacity of the helical pile based on default or site specific torque correlation factors and install additional piles as necessary. c. Replace the pile with one having a different helix plate configuration. The replacement pile must be installed to satisfy the minimum and/or maximum embedment length criterion and it must meet the minimum final torsional resistance criterion. 4. If a helical pile fails to meet the acceptance criteria in a pile load test: a. Install the pile to a greater depth and installation torque and re-test; provided that, if a maximum embedment length constraint is applicable, continued installation will not exceed said maximum length constraint, or b. Replace the pile with one having more and/or larger helix plates. The replacement pile must be embedded to a length that places the last helix plate at equal to its own diameter beyond the depth of the first helix plate of the replaced pile without exceeding any applicable maximum embedment length requirements. The replacement pile must be re-tested, or, c. De-rate the load capacity of the helical pile based on the results of the load test and install additional piles.Additional piles must be installed at positions that are at least three times the diameter of the largest helix plate away from any other pile locations. 5. If a helical pile fails a production quality control criterion as described in this Section or for any reason other than described in this Section, any proposed remedy must be approved by CITY prior to initiating its implementation at the project site. Section 31 62 16.11-8 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.04 INSTALLATION RECORD SUBMITTALS A. The Installing Contractor shall provide CITY copies of the individual helical pile installation records within 24 hours after each installation is completed. Formal copies shall be submitted within 30 days following the completion of the helical pile installation. These installation records shall include, but are not limited to, the following information: 1. Date and time of installation. 2. Location of helical pile and pile identification number. 3. Installed helical pile model and configuration. 4. Termination depth, pile head depth, and length of installed pile. 5. Actual inclination of the pile. 6. Final torsional resistance. 7. Calculated geotechnical capacity based on final torsional resistance. 8. Comments pertaining to interruptions, obstructions, or other relevant information. 3.05 FIELD COMPRESSION LOAD TESTING A. If field compression load testing is required, the Installing Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, and pre-production helical piles necessary to accomplish the testing as shown in the approved pile design documentation. Installing Contractor shall apply the specified loads for the specified durations and record the specific data for the specified number of piles. No deviations from the test plan(s) will be allowed without explicit approval in writing from CITY. Pile testing shall be in general accordance with the ASTM D1143 quick test method and the following criteria: 1. Failure criteria shall be in accordance with AC358 and is when plunging occurs or when — the net deflection exceeds 10% of the average helix plate diameter, whichever occurs first. 2. An alignment load equal to 5% of the anticipated failure load or maximum anticipated test load may be applied prior to the start of the test to take out slack in the load test frame. 3. Loading increments shall be performed at 5% of the anticipated failure load or maximum anticipated test load with a minimum hold time of 4 minutes at each increment. 4. Upon completion of the maximum test load hold increment, the pile shall be unloaded in 5 to 10 even increments with minimum hold times of 4 minutes at each increment. B. Installing Contractor shall provide CITY copies of raw field test within 24 hours after the completion of each load test. Formal test reports shall be submitted within 30 days following test completion. Formal test reports shall include the following information: 1. Name of project and Installing Contractor's representative(s) present during load testing. 2. Name of manufacturer's representative(s) present during load testing, if any. 3. Name of third party test agency and personnel present during load testing, if any. 4. Date, time, duration, and type of load test. 5. Unique test identifier and map showing the test pile location. 6. Pile model and installation information including shaft type, helix configuration, lead and extension section quantities and lengths, final pile tip depth, installation date, total test pile length, and final termination torque. 7. Calibration records for applicable pile installation and test equipment 8. Tabulated test results including cumulative pile head movement, loElding increments, and hold times. 9. Plots showing load versus deflection for each loading/unloading inter✓al. Section 31 62 16.11-9 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.06 FIELD TENSION LOAD TESTING A. The Installing Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and pre-production helical anchors necessary to accomplish the field tension load testing as shown in the approved anchor design documentation. Installing Contractor shall apply the specified loads for the specified durations and record the specified data, for the specified number of anchors. No deviations from the test plan(s) will be allowed without explicit approval in writing from CITY. Anchor testing shall be in general accordance with the ASTM D3689 quick test method and the following criteria: 1. Failure criteria shall be in accordance with AC358 and is when plunging occurs or when the net deflection exceeds 10% of the average helix plate diameter, whichever occurs first. 2. An alignment load equal to 5% of the anticipated failure load or maximum anticipated test load may be applied prior to the start of the test to take out slack in the load test frame. 3. Loading increments shall be performed at 5% of the anticipated failure load or maximum anticipated test load with a minimum hold time of 4 minutes at each increment. 4. Upon completion of the maximum test load hold increment,the anchor shall be unloaded in 5 to 10 even increments with minimum hold times of 4 minutes at each increment. B. Installing Contractor shall provide CITY copies of raw field test data within 24 hours after the completion of each load test. Formal test reports shall be submitted within 30 days following test completion. Formal test reports shall include the following information: 1. Name of project and Installing Contractor's representative(s) present during load testing. 2. Name of manufacturer's representative(s) present during load testing, if any. 3. Name of third party test agency and personnel present during load testing, if any. 4. Date, time, duration and type of the load test. 5. Unique test identifier and map showing the test anchor location. 6. Anchor model and installation information including shaft type, helix configuration, lead and extension section quantities and lengths, final anchor tip depth, installation date, total test anchor length and final termination torque. 7. Calibration records for applicable anchor installation and test equipment. 8. Tabulated test results including cumulative anchor head movement, loading increments and hold times. 9. Plots showing load versus anchor head movement for each loading/unloading interval. 3.07 CLEANUP A. Within one week of completion of the work, the Installing Contractor shall remove any and all material, equipment, tools, debris or other items belonging to the Installing Contractor or used under the Installing Contractor's direction. END OF SECTION Section 31 62 16.11-10 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 32 11 23 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE PART 1—GENERAL 1 .01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Aggregate base course for roads and parking areas. 2. Gravel roads. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. C. Placement and repair or replacement of aggregate base course shall be considered incidental and included in the price bid. D. CONTRACTOR is cautioned that existing private and public roads and shoulders may not hold up to typical construction traffic or activities. CONTRACTOR shall repair all roads, shoulders, and gravel areas damaged in accordance with this section. All paved areas shall also be repaired in accordance with Section 32 11 26—Hot Mix Asphalt Paving. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standard Specifications: Unless otherwise indicated, Standard Specifications shall refer to the State of Iowa Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction current edition, including all issued supplemental specifications. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Street or road shall include streets, roads, driveways, and parking lots. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit sieve analysis for proposed materials in accordance with Section 01 33 00—Submittals. 1.05 DRAINAGE DURING CONSTRUCTION A. CONTRACTOR shall comply with the provisions of Section 2103.03.H of the Standard Specifications. Section 32 11 23-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 AGGREGATES A. Aggregate for base course shall meet the requirements of Section 4122 of the Standard Specifications. B. Base course shall be uniformly graded and shall conform to the requirements of Section 2210 of the Standard Specifications. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. The subgrade shall be graded and rolled to provide uniform density and shall comply with the profile and cross sections contained in the drawings.All street subgrade in cut areas and all areas to receive fill shall be proof-rolled in the presence of CITY or CONSULTANT with a heavily loaded triaxle dump truck or similar equipment prior to the placement of any fill materials or base course. The subgrade shall be prepared in accordance with Section 2109 of the Standard Specifications. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION A. Base course grade shall be set to allow placement of thickness of asphaltic pavement shown or specified. B. Depth of base course shall be provided according to the standard cross sections or details provided on the drawings. C. Depth of base course shall be the existing depth or 12 inches, whichever is greater. D. Each layer of base course shall be wetted and rolled to provide maximum compaction in accordance with Section 2111 of the Standard Specifications. E. The finished base course shall be fine graded in preparation for paving. F. After final grading, CONTRACTOR shall maintain the base course until asphaltic paving work has been completed. G. All gravel surfaces damaged during construction shall be replaced. The depth of aggregate shall match existing or 12 inches, whichever is greater. END OF SECTION Section 32 11 23-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 32 11 26 HOT MIX ASPHALT PAVING PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) paving, tack coat, and casting adjustments. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. C. CONTRACTOR is cautioned that existing private and public roads and shoulders may not hold up to typical construction traffic or activities. CONTRACTOR shall replace all roads, shoulders, and paved areas damaged during the project in accordance with this section. Gravel shoulders, gravel roads, and parking areas shall be repaired in accordance with Section 32 11 23—Aggregate Base Course. D. Payment: Payment for HMA paving shall be considered incidental to the project and included in the Lump Sum Bid. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standard Specifications: Unless otherwise indicated, Standard Specifications shall refer to the State of Iowa Department of Transportation Standard Specifications, current edition, including all issued supplemental specifications. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Street or road shall include streets, roads, driveways, and parking lots. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to the commencement of paving, mix designs and aggregate sieve analysis shall be submitted to CONSULTANT for approval in accordance with Section 01 33 00—Submittals. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 HMA PAVEMENT A. Asphaltic pavement shall meet the requirements of Section 2302.02.D of the Standard Specifications. Mix shall be 1/2-inch HT.Asphaltic binder shall be PG58-28. HMA lower layer shall consist of 1-2 1/4-inch thick layer and 1-2 3/4-inch thick layer and the HMA upper layer shall be 2 inches in thickness. Section 32 11 26-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Aggregate shall conform to the requirements of Section 2303.02.E of the Standard Specifications. Aggregate for both lower layer and upper layer shall be 12.5 mm (1/2-inch nominal). Aggregates for upper layers less than 1 3/4 inches thick shall be 9.5 mm (3/8-inch nominal). C. Where existing pavement is replaced, minimum pavement thickness shall be 7 inches or existing thickness, whichever is greater. Lower layer shall be 2 1/4 inches minimum. Upper layer shall be 1 3/4 inches minimum. D. Materials for tack coat shall conform to the requirements of Section 2303.5.1 and shall be SS-1, SS-1 h, CSS-1, CSS-1 h, CQS-1, or CQS-1 h. E. Pavement markings shall conform to Section 2527 for white markings, except without the reflective additive. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 ALLOWABLE REMOVAL OF PAVEMENT A. CONTRACTOR shall remove asphalt pavement and road surface as a part of the general excavation. The width of pavement removed shall be the minimum possible and acceptable for convenient and safe installation of structures, utilities, and appurtenances. B. All asphalt pavement shall be cut on neat, straight lines and shall not be damaged beyond the limits of the excavation. Should the cut edge be damaged, a new cut shall be made in neat, straight lines parallel to the original cut encompassing all damaged areas. Pavement removal shall be extended to a seam or joint if seam or joint is within 3 feet of damaged pavement. 3.02 CASTING ADJUSTMENTS A. All new and existing manhole castings and valve boxes within the paving limits of the street, which require adjustment, shall be adjusted to match the finished asphaltic surface. Adjustments shall not be made greater than 48 hours prior to the anticipated time of paving. Adjustments shall be performed as called for in Section 33 30 10-Buried Piping and Appurtenances. CONTRACTOR shall furnish Class 1 barricades with flashers on all adjusted castings until paving has been completed. Tops of castings and valve boxes shall be oiled or protected by other methods to prevent sealing of lids and filling of lift holes during paving. Upon completion of paving operations, CONTRACTOR shall check all castings and valve boxes to see that the lids are clean and operational. Manhole casting adjustment shall be included in the cost of other items of work, and no further compensation will be made. Valve box adjustment shall be considered an incidental item of work. 3.03 TACK COAT A. All work shall be in accordance with the Standard Specifications. -. B. If asphaltic upper layer is applied to an existing street or is not applied the same day as lower layer, the existing street or lower layer shall be tack coated prior to surface paving. Prior to placement of tack coat, the streets shall be thoroughly cleaned and broomed.Tack coat shall Section 32 11 26-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 be applied at a rate of 0.10 gallons per square yard immediately prior to placement of asphaltic upper layer. C. In situations where traffic must be maintained, tack coat shall not be placed on the traveled half of the street until traffic can be switched to the new pavement. 3.04 JOINTS A. Joints between old and new pavements or between successive day's work shall be constructed and treated as to provide a thorough and continuous bond between the old and new mixtures. Transverse construction joints shall be constructed by cutting the material back for its full depth so as to expose the full depth of the course. Where a header is used, the cutting may be omitted provided the joint conforms to the specified thickness. These joints shall be treated with tack coat material applied with a hose And spray nozzle attachment to fully coat the joint surface. B. The longitudinal joint shall be made by overlapping the screed on the previously laid material for a width of not more than 2 inches and depositing a sufficient amount of asphaltic mixture so that the finished joint will be smooth and tight. Longitudinal joints in the upper layer shall at no time be placed immediately over similar joints in the lower layer beneath. A minimum distance of 12 inches shall be permitted between the location of the joints in the lower layer and the location of similar joints in the upper layer above. C. All costs for furnishing and applying tack coat to butt joints as specified above shall be considered incidental. 3.05 FINISHING ROADWAY A. The finished base course shall be fine-graded in preparation for HMA paving. Base course ramps at all existing pavement shall be removed to provide a full depth butt joint. Base course around manhole castings and valve boxes shall be hand-trimmed and compacted with a vibratory plate compactor. B. This item shall include all of the following preparatory and finishing items and any other incidental items of work required for construction. Asphaltic ramps around manholes on existing lower layer to receive upper layer shall be removed. Asphaltic ramps shall be installed on all manholes and at all butt joints in areas to receive lower layer only. C. Finishing roadway shall be considered incidental to HMA paving. D. Paint all markings as shown on drawings with lines not less than 4 inches wide. 3.06 TESTING HOT MIX ASPHALT A. CONSULTANT may require samples of HMA pavement for testing. CONTRACTOR shall cut samples from the finished pavement where marked by CONSULTANT and patch the sample area. Samples for sieve analysis and asphalt content will be taken by CONSULTANT prior to placement. Section 32 11 26-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.07 HOT MIX ASPHALT PAVING A. HMA paving work shall include the construction of plant-mixed hot mix asphalt pavement in the areas shown on the drawings. All work shall be performed in accordance with Section 460 of the Standard Specifications. B. Prior to commencement of paving operations, CONTRACTOR shall examine the finished road bed. CONTRACTOR shall notify CONSULTANT of any areas of suspected instability. C. The pavement structure for new roads shall be determined from the standard cross sections provided on the drawings. END OF SECTION Section 32 11 26-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 32 92 19 SEEDING AND SODDING PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Preparation of subsoil. 2. Placing topsoil. 3. Seeding, sodding, mulching and fertilizing. 4. Maintenance. B. Except for paved, riprapped, or built-up areas, all areas of the site which are disturbed and areas noted on the drawings shall be seeded or sodded. Surfaces on 3-to-1 slope or less may either be seeded or sodded, but surfaces on greater than 3-to-1 slope shall be sodded. C. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. FS O-F-241—Fertilizers, Mixed, Commercial. B. Standard Specifications: Unless otherwise indicated, Standard Specifications shall refer to the State of Iowa Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications, current edition, including all issued supplemental specifications. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide seed mixture in containers showing percentage of seed mix, year of production, net weight, date of packaging, and location of packaging. B. Sod: Minimum age of 18 months, with root development that will supp:)rt its own weight without tearing when suspended vertically by holding the upper two co-ners. Submit sod certification for grass species and location of sod source. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Deliver grass seed mixture in sealed containers. Seed in damaged packaging is not acceptable. B. Deliver sod on pallets or in rolls. Protect exposed roots from dehydration. Do not deliver more sod than can be laid within 24 hours. C. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis, and name of manufacturer. — Section 32 92 19-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 SEED MIXTURE A. Seed Mix per Table 2601.03-4 Standard Specifications. Use blue tag certified seed. Do NOT use bent or Poa Annua. Each seed lot will be subject to sampling and testing by the State seed laboratory. B. Weed content shall not exceed 0.5% in mixture. 2.02 SOD A. Follow Section 2601.03.G of the Standard Specifications. B. Netting or fabric for sod reinforcement shall be in accordance with Section 4169.10.D of the Standard Specifications. C. Anchorage shall be in accordance with Section 4169.09 of the Standard Specifications. 2.03 SOIL MATERIALS A. Topsoil: Fertile, agricultural soil, typical for locality, capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth, taken from drained site; free of subsoil, clay, or impurities, plants, weeds, roots and rocks; pH value of minimum 5.4 and maximum 7.0. B. Topsoil from the site may be used if it meets the above requirements. Additional topsoil shall be provided as required by drawings and specifications. C. Engineered Soil: Bioretention Basins require overexcavation, decompaction, and reconstruction with 24 inches of engineered soil except where noted otherwise. Engineered soil shall be provided in conformance with the criteria specified. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Mulching material shall be oat or wheat straw, free from weeds, foreign matter detrimental to plant life, and dry. Hay or chopped cornstalks are not acceptable. B. Fertilizer shall be FS O-F-241, Type I, Grade A; recommended for grass, with 50% of the elements derived from organic sources; of proportion necessary to eliminate any deficiencies of topsoil to the following proportions: Nitrogen 10%, phosphoric acid 10%, soluble potash 10%. Submit composition deviations to suit site conditions for — CONSULTANT's review. C. Water shall be clean, fresh, and free of substances or matter which could inhibit vigorous growth of grass. Section 32 92 19-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared soil base is ready to receive the work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION OF SUBSOIL A. Prepare subsoil to eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Maintain lines, levels, profiles, and contours. Make changes in grade gradual. Blend slopes into level areas. B. Remove foreign materials, weeds, and undesirable plants and their roots. Remove contaminated subsoil in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations. C. Scarify subsoil to a depth of 3 inches where topsoil is to be placed. Repeat deep (> 12 inches) subsoiling or cultivation in areas where equipment used for hauling and spreading topsoil has compacted subsoil. 3.03 PLACING TOPSOIL A. Spread topsoil to a minimum depth of 6 inches over area to be seeded. Rake until smooth. B. Place topsoil during dry weather and on dry unfrozen subgrade. C. Remove vegetable matter and foreign nonorganic material from topsoil w-iile spreading. D. Grade topsoil to eliminate rough, low or soft areas, and to ensure positive drainage. E. Manually spread topsoil around trees, plants, and buildings to prevent damage. F. Leave stockpile area and site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping. G. Engineered topsoil placement of 24 inches by CONTRACTOR is required ,within bioretention basin areas except as noted otherwise. 3.04 FERTILIZING A. Apply fertilizer at a rate of 17 pounds per 1,000 square feet. B. Apply after smooth raking of topsoil and prior to installation of seed or sod, no more than 18 hours before seeding or 48 hours before sodding. C. Do not apply fertilizer at same time or with same machine as will be used to apply seed. D. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of topsoil. E. Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer. 3.05 SEEDING A. Apply seed at a total rate of 3 1/2 pounds per 1,000 square feet. Apply evenly in two intersecting directions. Rake in lightly or roll the seeded area after seeding. -- Section 32 92 19-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Do not seed areas in excess of that which can be mulched on same day. C. Planting season shall be between April 15 and June 15, or between August 15 and October 15. D. Do not sow immediately following rain, when ground is too dry or during windy periods. E. Immediately following seeding, apply mulch: 1. Minimum Spread Rate: 1 1/2 tons per acre. 2. Maximum Depth: 1 1/2 inches to 2 inches. F. Apply water with a fine spray immediately after each area has been mulched and on a daily basis to keep straw in place. G. Seeding shall be maintained by CONTRACTOR until grass is well established. Grass is well established when it covers the entire seeded areas to a height of 2 inches. H. Place erosion control mats per Section 31 25 00—Slope Protection and Erosion Control. 3.06 LAYING SOD A. Moisten prepared surface immediately prior to laying sod. B. Lay sod immediately after delivery to site to prevent deterioration. C. Lay sod tight with no open joints visible and no overlapping; stagger end joints 12 inches minimum. Do not stretch or overlap sod pieces. D. Lay smooth. Align with adjoining grass areas. E. Place bottom elevation of sod 1 inch below top of adjoining edging, paving, or curbs. F. On slopes 4-to-1 and steeper, sod will be secured with wooden pegs at a maximum of 24 inches on center. G. On slopes 2-to-1 and steeper, lay sod perpendicular to slope and secure every row with wooden pegs at maximum 2 feet on center. Drive pegs flush with soil portion of sod. H. All sod placed in ditches, flumes, or other appurtenances where a concentrated flow of water may be expected shall be staked regardless of the slope. I. Water sodded areas immediately after installation. Saturate sod to 4-inch depth of soil. 3.07 MAINTENANCE A. Seeding shall proceed concurrently with the main construction. Seeding shall be maintained by CONTRACTOR until grass is well established. Grass is well established when it covers the entire seeded areas to a height of 2 inches. Section 32 92 19-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.08 MAINTENANCE A. Mow grass at regular intervals to maintain at a maximum height of 2 1/2 nches. Do not cut more than one-third of grass blade at any one mowing. B. Immediately remove clippings after mowing. C. Water to prevent grass and soil from drying out. D. Roll surface to remove minor depressions or irregularities. E. Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remedy damage resulting from improper use of herbicides. F. Immediately reseed areas which fail to show adequate catch. Bare spots shall not exceed 5 square feet in area and not exceed 3% of the total seeded areas. Immediately replace sod in areas which show bare spots or deterioration. G. Protect seeded areas with warning signs during maintenance period. H. Immediately reseed areas which do not show a satisfactory stand of established grass, and resod areas that do not show satisfactory establishment. I. Correct damage resulting from erosion, gullies, rills, or other causes by *filling with topsoil, tamping, refertilizing, and reseeding if damage occurs prior to acceptance of work. J. Maintain seeded lawns for not less than 60 days after substantial completion. K. If seeded in fall and not given full 60 days of maintenance, or if not considered acceptable at that time, continue maintenance the following spring until acceptable lawn is established. L. Maintain sodded lawns for not less than 30 days after substantial comple:ion. M. Maintain lawns by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, anc other operations such as rolling, regrading, and replanting as required to establish a smooth acceptable lawn free of eroded or bare areas. - END OF SECTION Section 32 92 19-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 32 94 00 STONE MULCH AND EDGING PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Stone mulch. 2. Plastic and aluminum edging. 3. Maintenance. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 WARRANTY A. Unaccepted material shall be removed and replaced by CONTRACTOR at no cost to OWNER during the next suitable growing season. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MULCH MATERIALS A. Stone Mulch: Stone mulch shall be 1 1/2-inch decorative landscape stone. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Edging: Black Diamond by Valley View Industries; commercial edging by COL-MET, or equal. Metal edging shall be commercial grade 1/8 inch by 4 inches. Plastic edging shall have a minimum 4-inch side wall and 1-inch-diameter head and shall have a V-lip configuration for added stiffness and anchor-holding power. B. Membrane: 20-mil-thick, water-permeable polyolefin fabric. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES A. Place edging around stone mulch where shown on the drawings. Install edging using stakes at approximately 4 feet on center. B. Place membrane (weed barrier) in all areas to receive stone or hardwood mulch. 3.02 MULCH A. Place stone mulch to 3-inch depth over membrane in all areas indicated on the drawings. Section 32 94 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.03 MAINTENANCE A. Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION Section 32 94 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 33 07 19 BURIED PIPING INSULATION PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes insulation for all underground exterior piping except piping except for natural gas, perforated drain pipe, and storm sewer. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. All material, installation, and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references: 1. ASTM C168—Standard Terminology Relating to Thermal Insulation. 2. ASTM C272—Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Core Materials for Sandwich Constructions. 3. ASTM C518—Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 4. ASTM E96—Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 5. ASTM C552-17—Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Submit a schedule of all insulating materials to be used on the project, including adhesives, fastening methods, and fitting materials, along with material safety data sheets and intended use of each material. Include manufacturer's technical data sheets indicating density, thermal characteristics, jacket type, and manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.04 QUALITYASSURANCE A. All insulation or components of this specification section shall meet or exceed the requirements and quality of the items herein specified, or as denoted on the drawings. B. Label all insulating products delivered to the construction site with the manufacturer's name and description of materials. C. Insulation systems shall be applied by experienced contractors. Within the past five years, CONTRACTOR shall be able to document the successful completion of a minimum of three projects of at least 50% of the size and similar scope of the work specified in this section. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 60 00—Materials and Equipment. Section 33 07 19-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Deliver materials to the site in such a manner as to protect the materials from shipping and handling damage. C. Materials that could be damaged by the elements should be packaged in such a manner that they could withstand short-term exposure to the elements duringtransportation. D. Store materials in a clean, dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage. E. Use all means necessaryto protect insulation before, during, and after installation. F. All scratched, dented, and otherwise damaged insulation shall be repaired or replaced as requested by OWNER without additional cost to OWNER. 1.06 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All insulation and associated materials shall be free of asbestos. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE BOARD INSULATION A. Acceptable manufacturers are Dow Stryofoam Highload 100, Owens Corning Foamular 250, or equal. B. Insulation shall be extruded polystyrene board conforming toASTM C518 C. Minimum nominal density shall be 1.6 lbs/ft3. D. R-value shall meet or exceed 5.0 (hr-ft2-°F)/(btu-in) at 75°F mean. E. Insulation shall be rated for service from -290°F to 165°F. 2.02 CLOSED CELL CELLULAR GLASS INSULATION. A. Acceptable manufacturers are Owens Corning FOAMGLAS, or equal. B. Insulation shall be cellular glass thermal insulation conforming toASTM C552. C. Minimum nominal density shall be 7.18 Ib/ft3. D. Thermal conductivity shall not exceed 0.29 btu-in/°F-hr-ft2 at 75°F. E. Insulation shall be rated for service from -450°F to 900°F Section 33 07 19-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.03 JACKETING A. Underground Direct-Buried Jacketing: 1. Acceptable manufacturers are Polyguard Products Insulrap No-Torch 125, Pittsburgh Corning Pittwrap SS, or equal. 2. Minimum 70-mil-thick vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin reinforced with a woven-glass fiber or polyester scrim and laminated aluminum foil. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. All products shall be compatible with surfaces and materials on which they are applied, and be suitable for use at operating temperatures of the systems to which they are applied. B. Adhesives, sealants, and protective finishes shall be as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications specified. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All insulation damaged during construction shall be replaced in accordance with these specifications. B. All insulation shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations. Destructive methods such as sheet metal screws are not acceptable.All pipe insulation shall be installed with joints butted firmly together. C. All valves and fittings shall be insulated with mitered sections of insulation equal in density and thickness to adjoining insulation. D. Install insulation with smooth and even surfaces. Poorly fitted joints or use of filler in voids will not be accepted. Provide neatly beveled and coated terminations at all nameplates, uninsulated fittings, or at other locations where insulation terminates. E. All un-insulated penetrations through the insulation system shall be insulated along their length to a minimum distance of four times the insulation thickness. To prevent moisture migration behind the insulation, these penetrations shall be sealed with a sealant as recommended by the manufacturer and flashed to shed water. 3.02 FORMED POLYISOCYANURATE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Fittings, valves, unions, flanges, couplings and specialties shall be insulated with factory molded insulation of the same thickness as adjoining insulation. Secure insulation sections with two wraps of nylon filament tape 9 inches to 12 inches on center. On single insulation layer systems and on the outer layer of double insulation layer systems, apply a thin coat of flexible closed cell joint sealant rated for system operating temperatures to all longitudinal and butt insulation joints covering entire face of joint. Allow sealant to fully cure before applying protective covering. Where two layers of insulation are used, do not use sealant on the inner layer or adhere the inner layer to the outer layer. Apply vapor stop bead of joint sealant between pipe and insulation on both sides of valves, expansion/contraction joints, Section 33 07 19-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 flanges, thermometers/gauges, attached vent and drain lines. Insulate attached non- circulated lines, control lines, vents, etc. for a minimum distance of 6 inches from pipe. Cover insulation with a protective jacket as specified below. Do not penetrate protective covering or insulation with mechanical fasteners. B. Install per manufacturer's recommendations. C. Installation shall include considerations for expansion and contraction of piping. — D. Field taper all changes in insulation thickness to provide a smooth transition for jacketing and provide coatings and sealants as recommended by the manufacturer at transition pieces. E. Insulation thickness shall be 1.5 inches. 3.03 PROTECTIVE JACKET INSTALLATION A. Install per manufacturer's recommendations. B. All adhesives and sealants shall be applied within temperature ranges established by the manufacturer. 3.04 BELOW GRADE BOARD INSULATION A. Where depth of top of piping lies above the frost line, provide buried extuded polystyrene - board with 1.5-inch thickness. B. Horizontal width of required insulation is indicated on schedule below. Insulation shall be at least 18 inches below grade and 6 inches above top of piping, centered above the centerline of the pipe. If insulation is to be installed more than 6 inches above top of piping, the number of inches exceeding 6 inches shall be added to the width of insulation determined from the table below. C. Minimum width of insulation board shall be at least 3 times pipe diameter. Minimum Width of Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation (ft) Predicted Depth of Top of Piping (ft) Frost Depth (ft) 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 7 6 5 4 3 2 D. Extruded polystyrene board insulation shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer and according to details shown on the drawings. END OF SECTION Section 33 07 19-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 33 30 10 BURIED PIPING AND APPURTENANCES PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. All underground piping and valves of every description. 2. Excavation, dewatering, and backfilling for all work under this section unless otherwise - noted. 3. Concrete foundations and anchor bolts for all equipment furnished under this section. 4. Underground piping connections to all equipment, whether furnished under this section or not. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standard Specifications: Unless otherwise indicated, Standard Specifications within this section shall refer to the Iowa Statewide Urban Designs and Specifications (SUDAS). B. Plumbing Code: Unless otherwise indicated, plumbing code within this section shall refer to the Iowa State Plumbing Law, Regulations and Code. C. Ten State Standards. 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Comply with the requirements of: 1. 2015 International Fuel Gas Code. 2. NFPA 54—National Fuel Gas Code (Current Edition). 3. Polyethylene gas distribution piping shall be installed in accordance with CFR 49, Part 192, Subpart G (mains), Subpart H (service lines), applicable codes and regulations, and ASTM D2774. B. Before any polyethylene fusion welding is performed, CONTRACTOR shall submit certification that the welders to be used on this project have successfully demonstrated proper welding procedures in accordance with the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 49, Part 192, Section 192.285. C. CONSULTANT and CITY reserve the right to test the work of any welder employed on the project, at CONTRACTOR's expense. If the work of the welder is found to be unsatisfactory, the welder shall be prevented from doing further welding on the project. Section 33 30 10-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Section 01 33 00—Submittals for shop drawing submittal procedures. 2. General arrangement drawings of 3 inches or larger exterior (belowground) ductile iron, stainless steel and welded steel piping shall be submitted to CONSULTANT for approval. Drawings shall include proposed materials, length, location, and elevation of pipe, fittings, pipe restraint, valves, and appurtenances. B. Refer to Section 01 41 00 for American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements for shop drawing submittals. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION A. All materials used in the manufacture, assembly, and painting of pip ng and valves in contact with water shall be compatible with potable water supplies and in contact with chemical feed systems shall be compatible with the chemicals being used. All glues, solvents, solders, etc., shall likewise be compatible. For instance, no ead-base solders shall be used. All materials in contact with water to be used for potable water supplies shall be National Sanitation Foundation (NSF)-approved. B. Size and Type: 1. All materials shall conform to the size and type shown on the Drawings or called for in the specifications. 2. In joining two dissimilar types of pipe, standard fittings shall be used when available. In the event standard fittings are not available, the method of joining shall be standard selected by CONTRACTOR and submitted for review by CONSULTANT. C. Piping appurtenances shall be made of the materials specified. All appurtenances not — designated as to type shall be selected by CONTRACTOR and submitted for review by CONSULTANT. 2.02 MANHOLES AND UNDERGROUND UTILITY STRUCTURES A. General: All provisions of Drawing 01-975-43A, enclosed in these specifications, except those contrary to provisions delineated herein or on the drawings shall apply to manholes. B. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings for special manholes, all manholes shall be reinforced concrete precast manholes. Reinforced concrete manhole base sections, riser sections, cones, and flat slabs shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C478. Solid precast manhole bottoms shall be provided except where shown on the drawings. Manholes shall be provided with minimum diameters as shown on Drawing 01-975-43A. Diameters shall be increased from the minimum for the following: 1. To provide between adjacent pipe a minimum distance equal to one-half the outside diameter of the largest pipe measured circumferentially along the ,nside face of the manhole. 2. To accommodate flexible manhole connections used. 3. To accommodate multiple valves or valve assemblies. -- Section 33 30 10-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Manhole top sections shall be precast reinforced eccentric cones unless precast reinforced flat slabs are specifically required or shown on the Drawings or are necessary because of shallow depth. Flat slabs shall have opening offset unless otherwise required or shown. Flat slabs shall be designed for HS20 loadings. D. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, all underground utility structures shall be precast, reinforced concrete. Reinforced concrete base sections, riser sections, and flat slabs shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C858. Flat slabs shall be designed for HS20 loadings. Solid precast bottoms shall be provided unless otherwise shown on the drawings. E. Manhole sections shall be provided in such combinations as to conveniently make up the required depth of the manholes. A maximum of two handling holes per manhole section will be permitted. All joints shall be tongue and groove and shall be sealed with rubber 0-ring gaskets of circular cross section or mastic compounds. Gaskets shall conform to -� ASTM C443. Mastic compounds shall be Ram-nek, Kent-Seal, Mas-stik, or equal. F. Except as otherwise specified, connection of pipes to manholes shall be with Kor-N-Seal, A LOK, lnterpace, PS-X, or equal joint. The joint shall provide a flexible, watertight connection between pipe and manhole. Manhole connections for storm sewer mains and leads may be made with poured-in-place concrete during completion of manhole interior in lieu of above. _. G. Steps: 1. Manhole steps shall be provided by manhole manufacturer as shown on the drawings, except that steps shall not be installed in any wet well. Manhole steps shall be M.A. Industries, Inc. PS1-PF with 1/2-inch-diameter steel reinforcing rod, conforming to ASTM A615, Grade 60, with molded copolymer polypropylene covering conforming to ASTM D4101, Type PP200B33450Z02, or equal. 2. Steps shall be inserted in manhole riser, cone, and flat slab sections prior to the initial set of the concrete in accordance with ASTM C478 and shall have maximum embedment and pullout resistance in accordance with ASTM C478. 3. The top step shall be located 10 inches or less from the top of the manhole cone section. Steps shall be a maximum 16 inches apart. H. Manhole Chimney Adjusting Rings: 1. Manhole adjusting rings shall be injection molded-recycled HDPE as manufactured by LADTECH, Inc., or expanded polypropylene as manufactured by Cretex Specialty Products. 2. CONTRACTOR shall supply ring materials, adhesive, labor, and equipment to install the rings in strict accordance to manufacturer's recommendations. CONTRACTOR shall permanently install rings with adhesive so that all manhole casting rims are set level with plan grade. Ring inside diameter shall be 24-inch nominal, or larger to match frame. 3. CONTRACTOR shall have all ring sizes available when rebuilding tops of manholes, including tapered sections to allow for seamless adjusting of frame elevations on flat and sloped surfaces. 4. Concrete adjusting rings shall not be used for manhole adjustments. Substitute HDPE adjusting rings for concrete rings shown in Drawing 01-975-41A. Section 33 30 10-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 I. Frames and Covers: 1. Frames and covers shall be provided for the openings indicated on the drawings. 2. For standard manholes, frames shall be Neenah R-1550, or equa . with Type B lid, with two concealed pickholes equipped with self-sealing gaskets. Frames for valve manholes shall be Neenah R-6065 with Type B lid with two concealed pickholes equipped with self-sealing gaskets, or equal. Catch basin grates shall be Neenah R-1550 with machined frame and Type D open grate, or equal. I hterior mud basin castings shall be Neenah R-6118, or equal, with grey iron Class 35 frame and grating for heavy-duty use. 3. Covers shall be reinforced for HS20 loading. Provide stainless steel or fiberglass unistruts as necessary attached to covers to mount accessories, guides, etc. J. Manhole Chimney Seals: 1. External manhole chimney seals shall be provided for all new manholes. Chimney seal shall be Cretex, or equal. 2. Existing manholes exposed during the construction period shall have the adjustment rings replaced and a new chimney seal installed. Existing castings shall be reused. K. Valve boxes shall be provided for all buried valves. Valve boxes shall be Tyler/Union 6850 Series, 4 inches through 12 inches, or equal. Extension heights shall be provided as required. Lids shall be marked for appropriate use. CONTRACTOR shall verify that all valve boxes are large enough to accommodate all operating nuts and wrenches. Provide one "Tee" valve key operator for each valve manhole and one for each tank with tank or channel drain. L. Floor boxes shall conform to Section 40 23 10—Piping and Appurtenances. M. Storm sewer manholes shall be constructed as shown on Drawing 01-975-41A. Except as otherwise specified, manhole covers shall be Neenah R-1550, or equal, with Type B lid with two concealed pickholes and self-sealing gaskets. 2.03 BURIED PIPING A. Ductile Iron Piping and Ductile Iron Fittings: 1. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all underground piping 3 inches in diameter or larger shall be ductile iron conforming to AWWA C151/A21.51 with mechanical joints or push-on joints. Pipe wall thickness shall be furnished as required by AWWA C150 for buried piping with the depth of cover as shown on the drawings for laying condition 4, minimum Special Thickness Class or Pressure Class as listed below, unless otherwise shown or specified. Pipe Size Special Thickness Pressure (Inches) (Class) Class 3 53 _ --- 4 53 --- 6 53 --- 8 53 --- 10 53 _ --- 12 53 --- 2. The words "Ductile Iron" and the weight and class of pipe shall be plainly marked on each piece of pipe. Section 33 30 10-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3. Except as otherwise specified, underground pipe shall have mechanical joints or push-on joints conforming to AWWA C110 and C111 with vulcanized styrene butadiene rubber gaskets conforming to AWWA C111. Gaskets that include metal locking segments vulcanized into the gasket to grip the pipe and provide joint restraint are not acceptable. Bolts on exterior joints shall be high-strength low-alloy steel (Corten, or equal), conforming to AWWA C111. Certificate to that effect shall be provided. 4. All mechanical and push-on joints on water main and force main shall be bonded with cable bond conductors or electrobond conductivity strips. 5. Restrained joints shall be provided in accordance with Part 3—Execution. Mechanical joints shall be restrained with MEGALUG® Series 1100 or 1100 SD, by EBAA Iron Sales, Inc., UNIFLANGE Series 1400 by Ford Meter Box Co., Inc., or equal, restraint. Push-on joints for ductile iron piping shall be restrained with MEGALUG® Series 1700 or 1100 HD, by EBAA Iron Sales, Inc., UNIFLANGE Series 1450 by Ford Meter Box Co., Inc., Flex-Ring or Lok-Ring by American Cast Iron Pipe Company, TR Flex by U.S. Pipe Company, TR Flex by McWane, or equal. 6. Joint restraint is not required for gravity sewers, drains, and those pipes designated in Paragraph 1. of 3.02.G. Infiltration/Exfiltration Tests. 7. Underground pipe shall have mechanical joint ductile iron fittings conforming to AWWA C110 and C111 or AWWA C153 compact fittings with a minimum rated working pressure of 150 psi. Gaskets for fittings shall be as specified for underground piping. 8. All ductile iron fittings shall be American Cast Iron Pipe, Tyler, U.S. Pipe, or equal. 9. Ductile iron wall pipes shall be provided as shown on the drawings. For piping that requires restraint, mechanical joint connections at exterior end of wall pipe shall be restrained as specified for mechanical joints. 10. Unless otherwise specified, all ductile iron piping and fittings shall be cement-mortar lined and asphaltic-coated inside. Cement-mortar lining shall be in accordance with AWWA C104. Unless otherwise specified, underground piping and fittings shall be asphaltic-coated outside. Asphaltic coating shall conform to applicable standards herein for the pipe and fittings. 11. All ductile iron piping and fittings designated PSD (Primary Sludge), PSM (Primary Scum), CNT (Centrate), DCT, SCM (Scum), DSL, BSL, and TWAS and all piping conveying a combination of these sludges such as PSD/TWAS and PSD/PSM shall be glass-lined and shall receive exterior coating as specified above. The glass lining shall be fused to the inside metal base prepared by blasting by placing the pipe or fitting into a furnace at the appropriate maturing temperature above 1,400°F. The entire coating shall be from 0.008 inches to 0.012 inches thick. It shall have a hardness from 5 to 6 on the Mohs Scale and a density from 2.5 to 3.0 grams per cubic centimeter. The glass lining shall be capable of withstanding a thermal shock of 350°F without crazing, blistering, or spalling. It shall be resistant to corrosion by solutions between pH 3 and pH 10 at 125°F. There shall be no visible loss of surface gloss on the glass lining after immersion of a normal production run sample in an 8% sulfuric acid solution at 148°F for a period of 10 minutes. In addition, when tested according to ASTM C283, it shall show a weight loss of not more than 3 milligrams per square inch. 12. Piping and fittings for installation in manholes and wet wells shall be flanged and provided as specified in Section 40 23 10—Piping and Appurtenances. 13. Drainage Piping: All process drain piping and all underground piping designated as drain (D) shall be ductile iron. All underground drainage piping more than 2 feet from building walls shall be ductile iron as specified. Connections to drainage piping from buildings shall be made within 2 feet from the building wall and shall be made with a Fernco, or equal, flexible coupling. Section 33 30 10-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 14. All buried ductile iron piping and appurtenances shall be polyeth Ilene encased in accordance with AWWA C105. Polyethylene encasement shall be C ass C (black) and shall be minimum 8 mil thickness. B. Reinforced Concrete Sewer Pipe: 1. Reinforced concrete pipe for storm sewer (ST) shall meet the requirements of ASTM C76 for circular pipe and ASTM C507 for elliptical pipe. Strength and class of the pipe shall conform to the drawings and as specified herein. All reinforced concrete pipe used in the work shall be of adequate strength to support the trench loads applied. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all reinforced concrete pipe shall be Class IV minimum. 2. Standard and special fittings shall be of approved manufacturer and shall conform to requirements of the trade and these specifications. All fittings shall be of a strength at least equal to that of the sewer main and shall be jointed with the same type of joint as used in the sewer main. _ 3. Not more than one lift hole per length of pipe shall be used in storm sewer. 4. Reinforced concrete pipe and fittings shall be joined with joints and gaskets that meet the requirements of ASTM C443. Gaskets for storm sewer shall be Tylox, or equal. Joints for elliptical pipe shall be sealed with an application of a trowelable bitumastic joint sealant on the inside of the joint. All pipe shall be specifically built to fit the gasket used. Provide precast concrete endwalls on all storm sewers. Provide cut off walls and field stone riprap as shown on Drawing 01-975-149A. Provide apron endwall pipe gates as shown on Drawing 01-975-30A. C. Perforated Drain Pipe: Foundation drain piping shall be perforated corrugated polyethylene tubing with integral filter fabric. Size shall be as shown on Drawings, minimum 4-inch diameter. Piping shall meet requirements of ASTM F667. Provide all required bends, adapters, couplings, risers, cleanout covers, etc. Piping shall be as furnished by Wisconsin Tubing, Inc. of Omro, Wisconsin, or equal. See detail on Drawings for laying conditions. Fabric shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Minimum lap shall be 18 inches. All laps shall be tacked or pinned to prevent separation during installation. D. Galvanized Iron Piping: Unless otherwise shown or specified, all piping smaller than 3 inches shall be extra strong galvanized iron pipe, with galvanized malleable iron fittings. Pipe shall conform to ASTM A53. E. PVC Piping: 1. Chemical Feed Piping: a. Except as otherwise specified, all buried chemical feed designated PRC shall be constructed of PVC. b. Provide tracer wire as specified. 2. Exterior Buried Sanitary Plant Drain Piping and storm sewer (where designated as PVC on drawing only): a. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe shall meet the requirements of AS—M D3034 for pipe sizes 4 inches through 15 inches and ASTM F679 for pipe sizes 18 inches through 36 inches. b. PVC material for ASTM D3034 pipe shall have cell classification 12454-B or 12454-C as defined in ASTM D1784 with minimum modulus of elasticity of 400,000 psi. Pipe stiffness shall be minimum 46 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D2412. Pipe shall have a maximum standard dimension ratio (SDR) of 35. -� Section 33 30 10-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 c. PVC material for ASTM F679 pipe shall have cell classification 12454 or 12364 as defined in ASTM D1784 with a minimum modulus of elasticity of 500,000 psi. Pipe stiffness shall be a minimum 115 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D2412. d. Pipe and fittings shall be the product of one manufacturer, and the manufacturer _ shall have experience records substantiating acceptable performance of the pipe and fittings to be furnished. The minimum wall thickness of fittings shall be the same as the pipe to which it connects. e. Acceptance of piping and fittings shall be subject to tests conducted by an approved testing agency in accordance with ASTM D3034 and/or ASTM F679. f. Fittings such as saddles, elbows, tees, wyes, and others shall be of material and construction corresponding to and have a joint design compatible with the adjacent pipe. Approved adapters shall be provided for transitions to other types of pipe. g. Joints shall be of the elastomeric type for pipes 4 inches or larger and elastomeric or solvent cement for pipes less than 4 inches.h. Elastomeric joints shall be a bell and spigot joint conforming to ASTM D3212 sealed by a rubber gasket conforming to ASTM F477 so that the assembly will remain watertight under all conditions of service, including the movements resulting from the expansion, contraction, settlement, and deformation of the pipe. 3. PVC piping for SAM is specified in Division 40. Provide tracer wire as specified. F. HDPE Water Piping: 1. Buried HDPE piping may be used instead of buried copper piping for W1, W2, W3 piping 2-inch diameter or less. 2. HDPE piping shall be copper tube size (CTS) and meet NSF Standard 61. 3. Resin Compounds: Polyethylene materials used shall be of high density polyethylene (HDPE), meeting 1600 Design Stress @ 23°C or 1000 Design Stress @ 60°C, applicable requirements for PE4710 pipe and tubing as defined by ASTM D-3350, Cell Classification 445576E. 4. Piping shall be permanently indented every two feet along the pipe barrel, identifying the pipe with manufacturer's name or logo, pressure rating, nominal size, NSF logo, and QC control codes. 5. HDPE pipe fittings shall be compatible with and from the same manufacturer as HDPE piping, shall be equal in material and construction to that of HDPE piping, and shall be fusion butt-welded to piping. 6. Fusion welding of HDPE piping shall be in accordance with applicable standards, codes, and specifications. Welders shall be trained and certified for this practice. CONTRACTOR shall provide certification similar to that specified under Section 33 30 10 1.03 for welders if requested and all welds are subject to testing as specified. 7. Shut off valves shall be placed on each branch of underground piping as specified or as shown on Drawings. 8. Brass quick joint couplings (Ford Meter Box Company, or equal) made specifically for HDPE piping may be used on a limited basis and subject to approval by CONSULTANT. Couplings shall conform to AWWA Standard C800. Couplings shall meet NSF 61. No couplings shall be installed under floor slabs. 9. Provide tracer wire as specified. Section 33 30 10-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 — G. Buried Natural Gas Piping: 1. Manufacturers: Performance Pipe, a division of Chevron Phillips Chemical Company LP, JM Eagle, or equal. 2. Buried natural gas pipe tubing, fittings, and joints shall be PE 2708 (PE 2406) polyethylene, SDR-11 or less, ASTM D2513 and D3350 pipe and fittings. Provide butt-weld fittings conforming to ASTM D3261 or socket-type fittings conforming to ASTM D2683. 3. Polyethylene pipe tubing, fitting, and joint materials shall be compatible and by same manufacturer. Fabricated fittings shall not be used. Match fittings to service rating of pipe. 4. Provide an anodeless riser connection between buried plastic gas service piping and metallic riser in accordance with the local codes. Provide a metallic riser consisting of HDPE fused coating on steel pipe for connection to aboveground building distribution piping. Underground horizontal metallic portion of riser shall be at least 24 inches in length before connecting to the plastic service pipe. An approved transition fitting or adaptor meeting design pressure rating and plastic pipe manufacturers recommendations shall be used where the plastic joins the metallic riser. Provide Elster, George Fischer Central Plastics, or equal. 5. Gas Transition Fittings: Provide manufactured steel transition fittings approved for joining steel and polyethylene pipe, conforming to AGA XR0603 requirements for transition fittings. Transition fittings shall be manufactured by Continental, Elster, George Fischer Central Plastics, or equal. 6. Underground installation of piping shall conform with ASTM D2774. 7. Provide tracer wire as specified. H. Tracer Wire: 1. Install 10 gauge solid tracer wire with buried pipe where specified. Wire shall be continuous and terminate at valve boxes, manholes, or at test stations as specified below. Wire shall be taped to pipe at 5-foot intervals for all piping except piping carrying combustible material. For pipe carrying combustible material, the tracer wire shall be placed in the trench directly above the pipe, maintaining 6 inches separation between the tracer wire and the pipe. Any splices in copper wire shall be soldered and fitted with a Raco, or equal, insulated watertight boot. 2. Tracer wire test stations shall be SnakePit magnetized tracer boxes by Copperhead Industries, or equal. Tracer box shall be corrosion-resistant brass wire lugs and wax pad to cover wire connection. Cover shall be color-coded according to APWA standards for fluid conveyed. Provide SnakePit Lite Duty Box in unpaved areas and Roadway Box in paved areas. Provide Rhino Triview Marker Posts, or equal, at all test stations. Provide custom decals to identify fluid in piping. The tracer wire shall be accessible at a minimum of every 500 feet along the pipeline and at horizontal bends in piping. The tracer wire shall run into and up the sides of all manholes and be secured near the casting. Test stations shall be placed as required between manholes to comply with the minimum 500-foot tracer wire accessibility requirement. 3. CONTRACTOR shall perform continuity testing of all tracer wire in the presence of CITY. 2.04 VALVES A. Valves shall conform to Section 40 23 10—Piping and Appurtenances. B. Valves for natural gas service shall conform to Section 23 05 23—General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping. -- Section 33 30 10-8 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.05 HYDRANTS A. Fire hydrant shall be Waterous W-67 Pacer with 5-inch barrel, compression shutoff, two 2 1/2-inch nozzles and one 4 1/2-inch nozzle with three chains and Waterous No. 2 nut. r. Hydrant shall be built for 7-foot bury and be painted red. About one-half cubic yard of coarse gravel shall be placed from the bottom of the trench up to the hydrant barrel. Brace with solid concrete block not concrete. 1. Provide restrained joint system from auxiliary valve in road box back to tee. 2. Connect hydrant to auxiliary system from auxiliary valve in road box back to tee. 3. Connect hydrant to auxiliary valve with 2-foot length of pipe. Auxiliary valve shall be gate valve with cast iron road box as specified in Division 23. B. Yard Hydrants: 1. Yard hydrants shall be Mueller A-411, or equal, with one 2 1/2-inch hose nozzle and threaded lead to accept copper pipe. Yard hydrant shall have a maximum working pressure of 150 psig. Provide one operating wrench for each hydrant. Provide all yard hydrants with 1 1/2-inch hose adaptor from 2 1/2-inch hose nozzle and four adaptors to 3/4-inch hose from 1 1/2-inch hose nozzle. Hydrant cover depths of 6 feet shall be provided. 2. Yard hydrants shall be furnished with all surfaces (except galvanized or stainless steel) prepared in accordance with near white grade SSPC Specification No. 10 removing all dirt, rust scale, and foreign materials. Surface preparation shall be done at such time during the assembly process as to preclude damage to the pressure relief valves and yard hydrants once assembled. Cleaned surfaces shall then be shop-primed. Shop priming shall be with one coat of Tnemec 66 HS Hi-Build Epoxoline primer, or equal, applied to a minimum of 5.0 mils dry thickness. Primer used shall be compatible with proposed finish coats; CONTRACTOR shall verify. It is the intent of this specification that all valves, hydrants, supports, and appurtenances shall be furnished shop primed, clean, and ready to accept finish painting by CONTRACTOR with a minimal amount of surface preparation. Preparation and painting shall conform to all requirements and provisions specified in Division 09. 2.06 TRENCH DRAINS A. Trench drains shall be the Poly Drain System by ABT, Inc., ACO Drain KS200, KlassikDrain by ACO Polymer Products, or equal. B. Trench drains shall be KS200 stainless steel edge rail channel system, KlassicDrain, with one meter sloping channel sections. Provide closing cap at high point of trench drain. Provide Load Class E grate, Type 661Q Ductile iron slotted grate with "QuickLok" boltless locking system. Provide CITY with two grate removal tools. C. Trench system body shall be manufactured from polyester polymer concrete with minimum compressive strength of 14,000 psi, flexural strength of 4,000 psi, frostproof, saltproof, and dilute acid and alkali resistant. D. Precast units shall be manufactured with an invert slope of 0.5% and a wall thickness of at least 0.50 inches. Units shall have horizontal cast in anchoring keys on the outside wall for mechanical bond to the surrounding bedding material and pavement surface. The stainless steel edge rail shall be integrally cast for homogeneity between the polymer concrete body and the edge rail. Each rail shall be minimum 3/32 inches thick. Section 33 30 10-9 4463.004/City Contract No.994 E. Trench drain shall be encased in concrete as shown on the drawings. F. The trench drain shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation devices. G. CONTRACTOR shall provide Type KSZ-90ZS in-line basin with outlet Q and 6-inch schedule 40 PVC piping to downstream manhole. CONTRACTOR shall verify pipe invert elevation for depth. Provide trash bucket in the catch basin. Provide Load Class E grate, Type 861 Q ductile iron slotted grate with "QuickLok" boltless locking system. 2.07 CONCRETE A. All concrete poured under this Contract, unless shown or specifies; otherwise, shall conform to the requirements of Division 03. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Underground Piping: 1. Except where noted or specified, all ductile iron underground piping shall be laid in accordance with AWWA C600 with the conditions that (a) blocking shall not be used to support pipe and (b) all bends and fittings shall be restrained as specified below, and pipe joints shall be restrained in all directions from all bends and fittings to the length as specified below. 2. For restrained pipe joints, all underground ductile iron pipe joints (except for the branch of tees and dead ends) shall be restrained to the length listed below in all directions from all bends and fittings. The branch of tees shall be restrained to two times the length listed below. Dead ends shall be restrained to 2.5 times the length listed below. All joints on yard and fire hydrant leads shall be restrained. Where wall penetrations occur at less than the length indicated below, the wall fittings shall also be restrained. Additional restraint shall be provided inside of structures as required. MINIMUM LENGTH (IN FEET) RESTRAINED PIPE FROM BENDS OR FROM BENDS OR FITTINGS (POLYWRAPPED AND MINIMUM 6 FEET BURY DEJTH) Test Pressure, psi 10 25 50 100 150 Pipe Size, Inches 3 to 12 5 18 18 36 36 14 to 18 5 18 18 36 54 20 to 24 5 18 36 54 72 30 10 18 36 72 90 36 10 18 36 72 42 10 36 54 90 48 10 36 54 90 3. PVC sewer and plant drain piping shall be installed in accordance with ASTM D2321. Except where noted or specified, PVC or other thermoplastic pressure piping shall be installed in accordance with ASTM D2774. Section 33 30 10-10 4463.004/City Contract No.994 4. Except where noted or specified, reinforced concrete pipe shall be installed in accordance with ASTM C12. 5. Gas piping shall be installed in accordance with state, local, and utility codes and the National Fuel Gas Code, NFPA No. 54. All natural gas piping shall be tested in accordance with all state, local, and utility codes pertaining to natural gas service or service requirements. CONTRACTOR shall arrange for natural gas service and shall coordinate service size and location and shall furnish and install all shutoff valves and pressure reduction as required. 6. Plumbing system shall be installed and tested in accordance with local and state plumbing code requirements and applicable portions of the 2015 International Building Code. Where requirements conflict, the stricter standard shall apply. 7. CONTRACTOR shall excavate and lay all pipe to the line and grade shown on the Drawings with bell ends uphill wherever possible. If not possible, CONTRACTOR shall excavate and lay pipe to the line and grade shown on the Drawings with bell ends in the direction of laying. Grade stakes will be required for all lines. Water piping and chemical solution piping shall have a minimum of 5 feet of cover. Unless shown otherwise, drainage piping shall clear floor slabs or footings by a minimum of 6 inches. 8. Where piping is laid in native soil, the width of trench below the top of the pipe shall not exceed the nominal diameter of the pipe plus 2 feet for all pipelines. Where the maximum trench width is exceeded, the pipe shall be placed in a concrete cradle or a stronger pipe used. If the maximum trench width is exceeded for any reason other than as otherwise specified, the concrete cradle or the stronger pipe shall be placed at CONTRACTOR's expense, unless CONTRACTOR can demonstrate that the pipe to be used is compatible with the resulting load applied. 9. Except as otherwise specified, all underground pipe shall be bedded in crushed stone or crushed gravel aggregate. Polyethylene-encased piping shall be bedded in compacted sand, unless polyethylene-encased pipe and fittings are wrapped in a nonwoven geotextile fabric. Geotextile fabric shall be a minimum of 4.0 ounce/square yard. Copper piping shall be bedded in compacted sand. PVC or other thermoplastic pressure piping may be bedded in compacted sand. Perforated piping shall be bedded with washed stone material as shown on the drawings. Ductile iron piping, except as otherwise specified, shall be placed using Class "C" Bedding Details as shown on Drawing 01-975-43A. All other piping shall be placed using Class "B" Bedding Details as shown on Drawing 01-975-43A. CONTRACTOR shall perform all necessary excavation and shall provide all required materials to provide this bedding. Bedding material shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C33. The material shall be hard, tough, and durable and shall meet the following gradation requirements: R_ PERCENTAGE BY WEIGHT PASSING Crushed Stone Crushed Stone Crushed Gravel Aggregate Chips Aggregate Bedding Sand 1 inch 100 --- 100 --- 3/4 inch 90 to 100 --- 90 to 100 --- 1/2 inch --- 100 --- --- 3/8 inch 20 to 55 90 to 100 20 to 55 100 No. 4 0 to 10 --- 0 to 10 _ 95 to 100 No. 8 0 to 5 0 to 15 0 to 5 80 to 100 No. 30 --- 0 to 5 --- 25 to 60 No. 100 --- --- 5 to 20 Passing No. 200 --- --- 2 to 10 Section 33 30 10-11 4463.004/City Contract No.994 10. CONTRACTOR shall furnish CONSULTANT with a sieve analy5 is of the bedding material for approval prior to construction. 11. No materials native to the trench shall be used as bedding materia unless they meet the above specifications. 12. Immediately before placing the pipe, bedding shall be shaped by hand to fit the entire bottom quadrant of the pipe between bell holes. Bell holes shall be large enough to permit proper making of the joint but not larger than necessary to make the joint. All adjustments to line and grade must be done by scraping away or filling in bedding under the body of the pipe. Bedding must be tamped into place. If necessary to obtain uniform contact of the pipe with the bedding, a template shall be used. 13. Any pipe or fittings cracked in cutting or handling or otherwise not free from defects shall not be used. Pipe must be kept clean of mortar, cement, clay, sand, or other material. When PVC piping is installed during hot weather, it shall be laid in the trench with slack or permitted to cool to ground temperature before it is cut to length for making final connections. PVC expansion joints shall be provided where needed. 14. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed with plugs to prevent the entry of foreign material. Acceptable plugs include Foreman Nite Caps by APS, mechanical joint cap or plug, bladder plug, or test plug. All foreign material shall be removed from the pipe prior to acceptance. 15. Trenches shall be kept water-free and dry during bedding, laying, and jointing. CONTRACTOR shall provide, operate, and maintain all pumps or other equipment necessary to drain and keep all excavation pits and trenches and the entire subgrade area free from water under any and all circumstances that may arise 16. Material that is to be placed from the bedding material around and to 1 foot above the top of all pipes shall be termed cover material. Except as otherwise specified, (a) cover material shall consist of durable granular particles ranging in size from fine to coarse in a substantially uniform combination, (b) unwashed bank-run sand and crushed bank-run gravel will be considered generally acceptable for cover material, (c) no stones larger than 3/4 inch in their greatest dimension shall be allowed in the cover material, and (d) native materials may be used if they conform to the above specifications. Cover material for copper piping shall be sand. Cove- material for PVC pressure or other thermoplastic piping may be sand. Cover material for perforated piping shall be washed stone material as shown on the Drawings. 17. Cover material for polyethylene-encased piping shall be sand, unwashed bank-run sand, or river gravel. Crushed stone or crushed gravel or other bedding or cover material that will damage polyethylene encasement will not be acceptable and shall not be used unless polyethylene-encased pipe and fittings are wrapped with a nonwoven geotextile fabric. Geotextile fabric shall be minimum of 4.0 ounce/square yards. 18. Cover material shall be deposited in the trench for its full width on each side of the pipe, fittings, and appurtenances simultaneously. Cover material shall be placed over the top of the pipe to the height as shown on Drawing 01-975-43A for Class "B" (minimum 12 inches) or Class "C" (minimum 6 inches) Bedding. The remaining 6 inches to make up the required 1 foot of select cover material for Class "C" Bedding shall be granular material specified previously with no stones larger than 3/4 inch. 19. All cover material shall be placed in maximum 6-inch layers and compacted. Compaction shall be equivalent to that described under "Compacted Fill and Backfill" as specified in Section 31 23 00—Excavation, Fill, Backfill and Grading. 20. Except as otherwise specified, all backfill above 1 foot above the pipe shall be "Compacted Fill and Backfill" as specified in Section 31 23 00—Excavation, Fill, Backfill and Grading. -- Section 33 30 10-12 4463.004/City Contract No.994 21. The locations and elevations of existing piping and manholes are approximate. Where necessary, existing piping shall be exposed by CONTRACTOR to confirm location and elevation before installing new piping. Any changes in pipe location or elevation shall be approved by CITY. 22. Polyethylene encasement of ductile iron pipe and appurtenances shall be in accordance with AWWA C105. Use Method A for pipe and Method C for valves. All tapping locations shall be taped, and copper pipe shall be polyethylene-encased within 3 feet from connection to ductile iron pipe. Repair any rips or punctures before backfilling pipe. 23. General Excavation: a. CONTRACTOR shall do all excavation, undercutting, dewatering, and backfilling necessary for work under this contract unless otherwise noted. All trees, shrubs, and improved areas outside the excavation shall be protected from damage. b. Work shall conform to other sections of Division 31 except where modified by this section. c. Pipe shall be placed only on dry foundations. No extra payment will be made to CONTRACTOR for dewatering. d. Excavation shall include all necessary clearing of excavated areas, tree removal, all grubbing, all wet, dry, fill, and rock excavation, the removal of pavement, filling, and all incidental work such as tunneling, sheet piling, shoring, underpinning, pumping, bailing, transportation, and all fill and backfilling. All above work shall be included in the Lump Sum Bid. e. CONTRACTOR shall excavate whatever materials are encountered as required to place at the elevations shown, all pipe, manholes, and other work as required to complete the project as shown. The bottom of the excavation shall be leveled off, all loose and disturbed soil shall be removed, and it shall be hand-tamped prior to pipe, manhole, etc., installation. Where requested by CONSULTANT, original material below the excavation necessary for construction according to grades shown or specified shall be removed and replaced in accordance with Section 31 23 00—Excavation, Fill, Backfill and Grading. Payment will also be in accordance with Section 31 23 00—Excavation, Fill, Backfill and Grading. f. The excavation at the crossing of all underground utility services in place shall be as narrow as practicable. All underground services shall be protected from damage and maintained in service at their original location and grade during the process of the work. Any damage to underground services shall be replaced or repaired at no cost to CITY or to the owner of the service. The present underground services shown on the Drawings are located in accordance with available data. Encountering these services at a different location or encountering services not shown shall not release CONTRACTOR from the above-stated conditions. g. Excavated native material that is unsuitable or not required for filling shall be removed from the site. Materials to be used for fill and suitable for this purpose shall be deposited where required except that no fill shall be placed where trenches for sewers, water lines, or other services will be located until after the trench work is completed. h. CONTRACTOR shall provide adequate shoring, sheet piling, and bracing to prevent earth from caving or washing into the excavation and shall do all shoring and underpinning necessary to properly support adjacent or adjoining structures. All shoring, sheet piling, and underpinning must be maintained until permanent support is provided. i. Any water, drainage, gas, sewer, or electric lines encountered in the excavation that are not to be disturbed shall be properly underpinned and supported. Any Section 33 30 10-13 4463.004/City Contract No.994 service connections encountered that are to be removed shall be cut off at limits of the excavation and capped in accordance with the requirements of or permits governing such removals. Any permits required for this work will be obtained by CITY upon request of CONTRACTOR. 24. Valve Boxes: The valve box shall be centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the valve with the box cover flush with the finished ground elevation. Solid 4-inch concrete blocks shall be placed under the base of valve boxes so that the bottom of the base is about 2 inches away from contact with the valve bonnet. The valve box shall not transmit shock or stress to the valve. 25. Yard Hydrants: Yard hydrants shall be set on a slab of concrete at least 1 cubic foot in size and against a 3 cubic foot minimum concrete brace laying against undisturbed earth. Backfill at base of hydrant shall be 1 cubic yard of coarse gravel. It shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to set the hydrant at the proper grade. Extensions or fittings shall be provided as required. 26. Trench drains, channel, and grates shall be installed according to manufacturer's requirements. Place minimum 4 inches of concrete beneath and on each side of channels. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. CONTRACTOR shall include the cost of all testing, cleaning, and disinfection in the price bid. B. All work shall be inspected, tested, and approved in accordance with federal, state, and local rules and regulations. All work shall also be tested as specified in this section. Unless _ indicated in writing before testing begins, all tests shall be witnessed by CONSULTANT and others as necessary. Test results shall be recorded and reports or appropriate certificates shall be submitted to CONSULTANT in triplicate. C. All new piping shall be tested. All underground piping shall be backfilled or properly secured to avoid damage during testing. Should underground piping fail test, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for removal and replacement of backfill. All piping, interior or exposed, shall be subject to test before being covered with insulation or paint. All piping and appurtenances shall be watertight or airtight and free from visible leaks. Manholes and appurtenances shall be free of any visible leaks. Any leakage shall be �- sealed by methods acceptable to CITY, from the exterior of the manhole or structure. Precast reinforced concrete manhole risers and tops shall be tested it accordance with ASTM C497. D. All piping shall be flushed or blown out after installation prior to testing. CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary piping connections, water, air, test pumping equipment, water meter, bulkheads, valves, pressure gauge and other equipment, materials, and facilities necessary to complete the specified tests. CONTRACTOR shall provide all temporary sectionalizing devices and vents for testing. E. Pressure Tests: 1. Pressure tests shall be performed as required by AWWA C600, unless otherwise noted herein. `- 2. When test medium for piping is water, all air shall be removed from piping by flushing, opening vents, loosening flanges, utilizing equipment vents and/or installation of corporations at high points in system. Presence or absence of air will be determined during pressurization of the piping system. Section 33 30 10-14 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3. The test pressure in all lines shall be held for one hour during which time the leakage allowance shall not exceed that specified. In case repairs are required, the pressure test shall be repeated until the pipeline installation conforms to the specified requirements. Pumps, air compressors, instrumentation, and similar equipment shall not be subjected to the pressure tests. All piping conveying a combination of fluids, such as PSD/TWAS, shall be tested at the higher test pressure. 4. Gauges used for testing shall have increments as follows: a. Tests requiring a pressure of 10 psi or less shall use a testing gauge having increments of 0.10 psi or less. b. Tests requiring a pressure of greater than 10 psi by less than or equal to 100 psi shall use a testing gauge having increments of 1 psi or less. c. Tests requiring a pressure of greater than 100 psi shall use a testing gauge having increments of 2 psi or less. Minimum Leakage Fluid Abbreviation Test Pressure Test Allowance or Name in psi Medium Designation A 15, 25 Air "B"(2) CNT (Gravity Flow), DCT, SCM, 10 Water "A"(1) OF, PSM CNT (Pump Discharge), SPD, WAS 50 Water "A" BSL, DSL, TWAS 100 Water "A" PEC, PSD, PRC, W 1, W2, W3 150 Water "A" (1) Leakage allowance designation "A" shall mean not more than 0.002 gallons per hour per inch diameter per 100 feet of buried pipe for all piping except buried mechanical joint pipe. Buried mechanical joint pipe shall meet the leakage specifications of AWWA C600. (2) Leakage allowance Designation "B" shall mean a loss of pressure of not more than 5% during the test period. F. Prior to making final connection between new and existing piping, new piping shall be tested as specified above. G. Infiltration/Exfiltration Tests: 1. Leakage Testing: a. All sanitary sewer gravity mains, drains, and those pipes designated as D shall be tested for leakage after installation of laterals and placement of backfill. Leakage testing of thermoplastic and iron sanitary sewer gravity mains shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM F1417. CONTRACTOR shall keep a record of all tests performed. These records shall show the individual lengths of main tested and test results. b. Sewers 18 inches and larger may be tested for leakage by infiltration or exfiltration in lieu of vacuum testing. Concrete pipe shall be tested per ASTM C969 except as modified herein. If groundwater is 2 feet or more above the sewer, measurements will be taken to determine the rate of infiltration into the sewer. If groundwater is below 2 feet above the sewer, the stretch of sewer shall be plugged at its downstream end and water shall be placed inside the sewer to provide a minimum of 4 feet of head above the upstream end. Section 33 30 10-15 4463.004/City Contract No.994 c. Measurements will then be taken to determine the rate of leakage out of the sewer. CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor and materials necessay for making the tests. The allowable leakage shall be as indicated below for final acceptance. d. At the conclusion of construction and before final acceptance of the Work, the downstream end of all sanitary sewer will be measured for infiltration. Allowable infiltration shall not exceed 100 gallons/inch of pipe diameter/mile/day for that portion of the Work under groundwater. If infiltration is exceeded, the leak or leaks shall be located and repaired. e. CONTRACTOR shall prepare all pipeline for testing and shall furnish all equipment, materials, tools, and labor necessary for performance of the tests. Equipment for the low pressure air test of gravity mains shall be equal in all operational aspects to that as furnished by Cherne Industries, Inc., or equal. f. Test apparatus and gauges shall be located such that CONSULTANT or CITY do not have to enter a confined space to verify readings. g. Air and leakage testing of storm sewers will not be required. 2. Deflection Testing: a. All PVC pipe used for sanitary sewer shall be tested for vertical deflection. Maximum deflection after completion of backfilling shall be 5% of the inside pipe diameter. Testing shall not be started until trench backfill has been in place for 30 days. CONTRACTOR shall keep a record of all tests performed. These records shall show the individual lengths of main tested and test results. Deflection shall be measured by pull a mandrel with a vertical diameter equal to 95% of the pipe inside diameter through the line, after thoroughly flushing the lines to be tested. The testing device shall be controlled using cables at both the upstream and downstream manholes. The testing device must pass freely through the sewer without the use of unreasonable force on the control cables. Any line that will not pass the test cylinder will not be accepted until the faulty sections have been removed and replaced and the line retested. b. Deflection testing of thermoplastic storm sewer shall be provided in accordance with the above requirements. 3.03 CLEANING AND DISINFECTION A. All equipment and materials shall be clean before installation. CONTRACTOR shall disinfect and flush the potable water system before it is put online. Water main shall be disinfected according to AWWA C651. 3.04 REPAIR AND RESTORATION A. Tree Removal: Tree removal and grubbing necessary for installing sewe . water, and other work shown shall be included in the Lump Sum Bid. B. Pavement Repair: Unless otherwise specified, CONTRACTOR shall replace all bituminous and concrete pavement removed or damaged during perfornn ance of the work. Concrete pavement replacement shall conform to Division 03. Bituminous pavement replacement shall conform to Division 32. C. Cleanup: 1. Upon completion of the work, all improvements disturbed by CONTRACTOR's operations shall be repaired or replaced. Broken concrete, rubble fill, and other excess material shall be removed from the site and wasted. Section 33 30 10-16 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2. All areas used for the storage of materials or the temporary deposit of excavated earth shall be leveled off and cleaned up. All surplus material, tools, and equipment shall be removed, and the premises shall be left free of everything of the kind. 3. All pipes and manholes shall be flushed until clean, and all debris and mud shall be removed. 3.05 DEMOLITION A. All exterior piping removals, including manholes and appurtenances and abandonment, shall be by CONTRACTOR. The locations and elevations of existing piping are approximate. Where necessary, existing piping shall be exposed before installing new piping. Any changes in pipe location or elevation shall be reviewed by CONSULTANT. B. CONTRACTOR shall remove or abandon all existing piping and appurtenances as noted. Unless otherwise shown or specified, piping and appurtenances to be removed shall become the property of CONTRACTOR and shall be removed from the site for salvage or disposal. Unless otherwise shown or specified, piping shown or specified to be abandoned shall have each end plugged with nonshrink grout. Nonshrink grout shall be as specified in Division 03. Wherever excavations cross piping to be abandoned, piping shall be removed to the limits of the excavation and the ends shall be filled as specified above. C. Valve boxes and exposed valves and operators on piping to be abandoned shall be removed. All concrete surfaces to remain shall be patched as required to provide a smooth surface. Repiping and connections to new piping shall be as specified for new piping. D. It is the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to remove piping and appurtenances and patch all holes resulting therefrom unless specified or shown otherwise. The intent of these specifications is to require that the removal of materials, patching of all existing holes, and repiping be done in a workmanlike manner. All costs shall be included in the Lump Sum Bid. END OF SECTION Section 33 30 10-17 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 40 05 59.20 SLUICE GATES PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: This section includes furnishing, installing, and placing into successful operation sluice gates as described below and as indicated on the drawings. Sluice gates shall be complete with gate, guides, wall thimble, framing, operator, and other components required to make a complete sluice gate system. The sluice gates and appurtenances shall be furnished by the same supplier. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. The gate frame and slide shall be designed for the maximum head with a minimum factor of safety of 5 with regard to the ultimate tensile, compressive, and sheer strength. 2. Sluice gates shall be provided as non-rising stem type with 2 inch operating nut. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Sluice gates shall be suitable for use in centrate from the dewatering of anaerobically digested sludge. 2. Leakage shall not exceed 0.01 gpm per foot of perimeter for seating and unseating heads of 25 feet. Factory leakage test results shall be submitted for each gate. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Gate manufacturer shall submit shop test reports to confirm leakage as specified herein in accordance with AWWA C561 Section 5.2.2. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a :period of one year -� from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substantial Completion of the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Sluice gates shall be Series 900 as manufactured by Whipps, Inc. of Athol, Massachusetts, Model RW 1000-S as manufactured by RW Gate Company of Troy, New York, Series 20 as manufactured by Fontaine-Aquanox of Quebec, Canada, or equal. Section 40 05 59.20-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.02 GATE CONSTRUCTION A. The sluice gates shown on the drawings and listed in the specifications shall conform to the latest edition of the AWWA Standard for Sluice Gates, AWWA C561 as modified herein, and to the following detailed specifications. B. The sluice gates shall consist of a frame and guides with a moveable side or disc. Resilient seals or self-adjusting UHMWPE seals between the movable disc and the frame shall be used to maintain leakage at or below the rate required by these specifications. All structural components of the frame and slide shall be fabricated of stainless steel having a minimum thickness of 1/4-inch and shall have adequate strength to prevent distortion during normal handling, during installation, and while in service. C. The frame shall be drilled for wall mounting with anchor bolts and nonshrink grout or EPDM gaskets unless noted otherwise on the drawings. If a wall pipe is shown or noted at a gate location, the frame shall be suitable for installation on a wall pipe as indicated on the drawings. The mounting flange of the frame shall be machined and all attaching holes shall be drilled. The guides shall extend a sufficient distance above the opening to support the full disc in the open position. Self-adjusting UHMWPE seals shall be provided along both sides and across the top of the gate. The structural portion of the frame that incorporates the seat/seals shall be formed into a one-piece shape for rigidity. Gussets shall be provided as necessary to support the guide members in an unseating head condition. The gussets shall extend to support the outer portion of the guide assembly and shall be positioned so that the load is transferred to the anchor bolts or the wall thimble studs. D. A flush-bottom closure seal shall be attached to the frame along the invert of the opening. The seal shall be mounted to a stainless steel channel or angle using a stainless steel retainer plate and attaching screws. In turn, the angle shall be mounted to the frame with stainless steel attaching bolts. The top surface of the seal shall be flush with the opening of the gate. The shape of the seal shall allow full contact with the machined surface on the disc. E. The disc shall be a flat plate with horizontal and vertical reinforcing ribs. The disc shall be designed so that deflection of any part of the disc with full head on the gate will be less than 1/720 of the gate span of 1/16-inch, whichever is less. F. Wall thimbles or wall pipes shall be furnished for sluice gates as shown on the drawings. Wall thimbles and wall pipes shall be mechanical joint (for connecting of piping) by square or rounded flanged joint (for mounting of sluice gate). Flanges shall be standard ductile iron pipe flanges. The depth shall be as shown on the drawings. Thimbles shall be one-piece construction, of adequate section to withstand all operational and reasonable installation stresses. Wall thimbles shall be internally braced during concrete placement. A center ring or water stop shall be cast around the periphery of the thimble. The front flange shall have tapped holes for the sluice gate attaching studs and metal-stamped vertical centerlines with the word "top" for correct alignment. Large rectangular wall thimbles shall be provided with holes in the invert to allow air escape during concrete placement beneath the thimble. A permanent gasket of uniform thickness or suitable mastic shall be provided between the sluice gate and wall thimble. G. Stems shall be type 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A276 and shall have a minimum diameter of 1 1/2 inches. Stem threads shall be machine rolled or machine cut, full depth Acme type with a minimum 16 micro-inch finish on the threaded portion, or stem threads shall be cut Acme type. Stems shall be designed to transmit in compression a Section 40 05 59.20-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 minimum of two times the rated output of the hoist at 40 pounds effort on the operating nut. The L/r ratio of the unsupported stem shall not exceed 200. Stem guides where required to limit the unsupported stem length shall be UHMWPE bushed. All gates having widths greater than two times their height shall be provided with two lifting devices connected by a tandem shaft for simultaneous operation. Stems for non-rising stem gates shall engage the nut on the slide. H. Stem Covers: Rising stem gates shall be provided with clear polycarbonate stem covers to provide indication of gate position, to permit inspection of the stem threads, and to protect the stem from contamination. The stem cover shall be constructed of clear rigid polycarbonate, butyrate, or Lexan. Vent holes shall be provided to prevent condensation. I. Provide a horizontal member at 21 inches above the operating floor where handrailing is interrupted by a sluice gate. J. All sluice gates shall be shipped and delivered to the project site fully assembled unless CONTRACTOR requests other arrangements. K. Provide mill finish on stainless steel. Welds shall be sand blasted to remove weld burn and scale in the factory. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Wall thimble, frame, guide, and disc of sluice gate shall be Type 31 EL stainless steel, 1/4-inch minimum thickness. All welds shall be passivated at the factor;. Wall pipes shall be ductile iron. B. Guide bar shall be Type 316L stainless steel with UHMWPE bearing surfaces. C. Frame seat shall be ASTM D4020 UHMWPE for self-adjusting seals. D. Disc seal and bottom closure seal shall be EPDM conforming to ASTM 1056 or double density EPDM seals conforming to ASTM D2000-01 BA910 and BA415. E. Fasteners and adjusting bolts shall be Type 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM F593 and F594. 2.04 MANUAL OPERATORS A. Operation of the gate shall be by antifriction handwheel bench stand or by crank operation through right-angle bevel gears as shown on the drawings. Maximum effort shall not exceed 40 pounds on handwheel or crank to raise gate under full operating head. The lift mechanism shall be capable of withstanding, without damage, a handwheel or crank effort of 200 pounds. Floor stand shall be minimum of 36 inches above operating floor. If the bench stand is provided to allow operation of the gate and is over 42 inches above the operating floor, the member shall meet OSHA strength requirements for guardrail. B. A suitable side-mount operator system shall be provided where the bench stand is located over 48 inches above the operating floor. System shall include right-angle bevel gear boxes, stainless steel shafting and flexible couplings or a chain and sprocket transmission system with stainless steel cover as required for operation 36 inches above the operating floor. Section 40 05 59.20-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. The hoist nut shall be manganese bronze conforming to ASTM B584 C86500. The hoist nut shall be supported on roller bearings. The hoist shall be outfitted with a stainless steel pinion shaft and the pinion shaft shall be supported by roller or ball bearings. A 2-inch square nut shall be provided on the pinion shaft to allow operation by a portable electric operator. A lubricated fitting shall be provided for lubrication of the hoist bearings without disassembly of the hoist. Suitable seals shall be provided to prevent entry of foreign matter. The direction of handwheel or crank rotation to open the gate shall be clearly and permanently marked on the hoist. Where the actuators will be interconnected, it shall be by a flexible coupling and stainless steel shaft or extruded aluminum tubing with stainless steel hardware. 2.05 FINISHES A. It is the intent of this specification that all equipment, supports, and appurtenances shall be furnished factory shop-primed, clean, and ready to accept finish painting by CONTRACTOR with a minimal amount of surface preparation. Preparation and painting shall conform to all requirements and provisions specified in Division 09. Unless otherwise specified, mechanical equipment and accessories shall be furnished with all surfaces (except galvanized, stainless steel, rubber, copper, PVC) prepared in accordance with near white grade SSPC Specification No. 10 removing all dirt, rust scale, and foreign materials. Surface preparation shall be done at such time during the assembly process to preclude damage to the equipment once assembled. Cleaned surfaces shall then be factory shop-primed. Factory shop-priming shall be with one coat of Tnemec N69-1255 Hi-Build Epoxoline primer, or equal, applied to a minimum of 5.0 mils dry thickness. Primer used shall be compatible with proposed finish coats; CONTRACTOR shall verify. Motors and speed reducers shall be factory shop-primed and finish-painted using the manufacturer's standard paint system for the specified application. 2.06 ANCHOR BOLTS A. Provide all anchor bolts required for equipment furnished. Anchor bolts shall be 316 stainless steel of ample strength for the intended service. Provide anchor bolts in accordance with Division 05. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Refer to requirements specified in Division 01 for equipment installation, quality control, testing, supervision, startup, and operator training. B. A minimum of one trip and two days on site shall be provided for startup and training services. END OF SECTION Section 40 05 59.20-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 40 23 10 PIPING AND APPURTENANCES PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. All piping, valves, and appurtenances of every description except for pipe as specified in Divisions 22, 33, 43, and 46, natural gas piping and appurtenances as specified in Section 23 11 23—Facility Fuel Gas Piping and Section 23 05 23—General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping, and hot water heating system as specified in Section 23 21 13—Hydronic Piping. 2. Concrete foundations and anchor bolts for all equipment furnished under this section. 3. Piping connections to all equipment, whether furnished under this section or not. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Applicable provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals cover requirements for shop drawings and Operation and Maintenance Manuals. B. General arrangement drawings, including support system of 3 inches or larger interior and 3 inches or larger exterior (aboveground) ductile iron, PVC, and stainless steel piping, shall be submitted to CONSULTANT for approval. Shop drawings for all interior and aboveground exterior piping shall be two-line drawings drawn to scale. Drawings shall include proposed materials, length, location, and elevation of pipe, fittings, supports, and valves and appurtenances. Plug valve orientation, including operator and plug orientation, shall be shown on Drawings. C. Grooved joint couplings and fittings shall be referred to on arrangement drawings and product submittals, and be identified by the manufacturer's listed model or series designation. D. Refer to Section 01 41 00 for American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements for shop drawing submittals. E. Refer to Division 22 for DWV and potable water piping and valves unless otherwise specified. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION A. Materials of Construction: All materials used in the manufacture, assembly, and painting of piping and valves in contact with water shall be compatible with potable water supplies and in contact with chemical feed systems shall be compatible with the chemicals being used. All glues, solvents, solders, etc., shall likewise be compatible. For instance, no lead-base Section 40 23 10-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 solders shall be used. Products used in potable water systems shall be UL classified in accordance with ANSI/NSF-61 for potable water service and shall meet the low-lead requirements of NSF-372. B. Size and Type: 1. All materials shall conform to the size and type shown on the Drawings or called for in the specifications. 2. In joining two dissimilar types of pipe, standard fittings shall be used when available. In the event standard fittings are not available, the method of joining shall be selected by CONTRACTOR and submitted for review by CONSULTANT. C. Piping appurtenances shall be made of the materials specified. All appurtenances not designated as to type shall be subject to approval of CONSULTANT. All grooved joint couplings and fittings shall be of the same manufacturer. 2.02 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Ductile Iron Piping and Ductile Iron Fittings: 1. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all piping 4 inches in diameter or larger shall be ductile iron conforming to ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51, with flanged or grooved joints as shown on the Drawings. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all piping shall be minimum special thickness Class 53 with a minimum rated working pressure of 250 psi for flanged pipe. Pipe wall thickness shall be furnished as required by AWWA C115 for flanged piping; AWWA C606 for grooved piping; special thickness Class 53 minimum unless otherwise shown or specified. Manufacturers of flanged pipe and fittings shall be certified to NSF 61 by an ANSI-accredited third-party certification organization. 2. The words "Ductile Iron" and the weight and class of pipe shall be plainly marked on each piece of pipe. 3. All flanged sections of pipe shall be made up in strict accordance with AWWA C115 specifications. No field make-up flanges will be allowed unless strictly conforming to AWWA C115 with facing done after turning pipe through flange.4. Flanged joints shall conform to AWWA C110, C111, and C115, and shall be compatible with ANSI B16.1 Class 125. Flanges shall be ductile iron. Flanged gaskets shall be minimum 1/8-inch, full-face, rubber-ring, Toruseal, Flange-Tyte, Maloney, or equal, gaskets. Thicker gaskets shall be provided as recommended by the manufacturer to meet joint tolerance.All aeration piping shall have FKM gaskets designed for a minimum of 300°F service. Flange bolts shall be standard zinc-plated steel with hex head and hex nuts for the rated working pressure and installation conditions specified or shown. 5. Flanged bolts and nuts installed in wet wells, digesters, and other submerged locations shall be 316 stainless steel. 6. Flanged fittings shall be of ductile iron with ductile iron flanges. Flanged fittings shall conform to AWWA C110 and ANSI B16.1, as applicable, with a minimum rated working pressure of 150 psi. 7. All ductile iron fittings shall be American Cast Iron Pipe, Tyler, U.S. Pipe, or equal. No compact fittings are allowed. 8. See Section 33 30 10 for ductile iron wall pipe requirements. 9. Unless otherwise specified, all ductile iron piping and fittings shall be cement mortar lined and asphaltic-coated inside. Cement mortar lining shall be in accordance with AWWA C104.Asphaltic coating shall conform to applicable standards herein for the pipe and fittings. Exterior exposed, submerged, and interior piping shall be furnished with outside surfaces prepared by abrasive blasting in accordance with NAPF 500C-03. Cleaned surfaces shall then be shop-primed. Shop-priming shall be with one coat of Tnemec 66 HS Hi-Build Epoxoline or Tnemec 140-1255 Beige Pota-Poxprimer, or Section 40 23 10-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 equal, applied to a minimum of 5.0 mils dry thickness. Primer used E lall be compatible with proposed finish coats; CONTRACTOR shall verify. It is :he intent of this specification that all piping, supports, and appurtenances shall be furnished shop-primed, clean, and ready to accept finish painting by CONTRACTOR with a minimal amount of surface preparation. Preparation and painting shall conform to all requirements and provisions specified in Division 09. 10. Unless otherwise specified, piping and fittings in manholes and wet wells shall be as furnished above for exterior exposed and interior piping. 11. Grooved Piping System: a. A grooved piping system may be used in place of flanges on applicable piping systems and where approved by CONSULTANT (valves shall remain flanged unless approved). Housing shall be manufactured from ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536. The bolts and nuts shall be of track design and, unless otherwise required, shall be made of electroplated steel to conform to or exceed the requirements of ASTM A449 and A183. Gaskets shall be FlushSeal and conform to the requirements of ASTM D2000. Gaskets for aeration piping shall be FKM and rated for a minimum of 300°F. Grooves cast or subsequently cut into ductile pipe, fittings, or other components shall conform to AWWA C606. All pipe used in a grooved piping system shall be gauged and shall pass a roundness test. A rigid joint system shall be used unless otherwise approved by CONSULTANT. b. Fittings shall be ductile, ASTM A536, conforming to the requirements of AWWA C110/ANSI A21.10 for center to end d mensions, and AWWA C110/ANSI A21.10 o r AWWA C153 for wall thickness, and AWWA C606 rigid radius grooving dimensions for end preparation. 12. All ductile iron piping and fittings designated A (Air) shall be unlined and shall receive exterior coating as specified above. 13. All ductile iron piping and fittings designated PSD (Primary Sludge), PSM (Primary Scum), SCM (Scum), BSL (Blended Sludge), DSL (Digested Sludge), CNT (Centrate), and TWAS (Thickened Waste Activated Sludge), and all piping conveying a combination of these sludges such as PSD/TWAS, or PSD/PSM shall be glass-lined and shall receive exterior coating as specified above. The glass lining shall be fused to the inside metal base prepared by blasting by placing the pipe or fitting into a furnace at the appropriate maturing temperature above 1,400°F. The entire coating shall be from 0.008 inch to 0.012 inch thick. It shall have a hardness from 5 to 6 on the Mohs Scale and a density from 2.5 to 3.0 grams per cubic centimeter. The glass lining shall be capable of withstanding a thermal shock of 350°F without crazing, blistering, or spalling. It shall be resistant to corrosion by solutions between pH3 and 10 at 125°F. There shall be no visible loss of surface gloss on the glass lining after immersion of a normal production run sample in an 8% sulfuric acid solution at 148°F for a period of ten minutes. In addition, when tested according to ASTM C283, it shall show a weight loss of not more than 3 milligrams per square inch. Taps in glass-lined piping and fittings shall be made prior to glass-lining. Piping manufacturer shall submit glass lining repair instructions with shop drawings. 14. Drainage Piping:All process drain piping D shall be ductile iron unless otherwise shown or specified. B. Copper Piping: 1. Copper piping shall conform to the requirements of ASTM B88. 2. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all interior or aboveground non-potable water supply piping and sump pump discharge piping smaller than 3 inches shall be Type K hard copper. Fittings shall conform to ANSI B16.22 wrought copper and be soldered or sweated on. No lead-based solder may be used. Piping shall run exposed in buildings, except in finished areas. Section 40 23 10-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3. Shutoff valves shall be placed on each branch for all underground, aboveground, or interior piping. ry 4. Unless otherwise shown or specified, pump vent and drain lines, seal water supply, and other small-diameter interior piping from the W 1, W2, or W3 source, shall be rigid, Type K hard copper. An ample number of unions shall be provided for disassembling. Pump vents shall be valved. C. Stainless Steel Air Piping: 1. Air piping where shown on the Drawings as being "SS" shall be 304L stainless steel with a 2D finish conforming to AISI 304L and ASTM A240, minimum gauges as follows: a. Up to and including 12-inch diameter: 12 gauge. b. 14-inch up to and including 18-inch diameter: 11 gauge. c. 20-inch diameter: 10 gauge. 2. Piping 3 inches in diameter or larger shall conform to ASTM A778 (welded fittings shall conform to ASTM A774) or shall conform to ASTM A312 (welded fittings shall conform to ASTM A403). 3. Bolts, washers, and follower flanges shall be made of 304 stainless steel. The nuts shall be low silicon bronze per QQ-C-591, Alloy 651. All anchor bolts shall be 304 stainless _4 steel. Follower flanges on interior piping may be galvanized ductile iron. 4. Connections between sections of pipe shall be by special flanged joints. These joints shall be designed so that individual pipe sections can be rotated independently of adjacent sections for alignment purposes. Flanged joints shall be of the face ring follower flange type with through bolts. Gaskets shall be FKM, full face. Expansion joints shall be provided where necessary. Where connections are made to ductile iron or PVC piping, flanges shall be compatible with the mating pipe. As an alternative to flanged connections between sections of stainless steel interior piping, a grooved pipe connection with stainless steel or galvanized steel couplings and fasteners as previously specified will be allowed where approved by CONSULTANT. All connections to valves or equipment shall be flanged. 5. All 304L material shall conform to the chemical requirements of ASTM A240 and AISI 304L. The maximum carbon content shall be limited to 0.030%. 6. Flanges shall be shop-welded to the pipe. All welding shall be by the gas tungsten arc welding (GTAW), or gas metal arc welding (GMAW) method. Filler wire shall be added to all welds to provide for a cross section of weld metal equal to, or greater than, the parent metal. Butt welds shall have full penetration to the interior surface, and gas shielding shall be provided to the interior and exterior of the joint. 7. Interior weld beads shall be smooth and evenly distributed with an interior projection not F. exceeding 1/16 inches beyond the pipe I.D. The outside weld area shall be wire brushed. Brushes shall be of stainless steel and used only on stainless steel. All discoloration and deposits left by welding shall be removed by pickling. If welding is performed on site, piping shall be immersed in acid solution and acid-washed for manufacturer-determined temperature and period of time. In lieu of full immersion for on-site welds, field welds may be treated as described in the following paragraph 10. 8. After manufacture of pipe and fittings, all stainless steel shall be passivated by immersion in a pickling solution of from 5% to 25% of nitric acid (65% strength) and 1% to 3% hydrofluoric acid (60% strength), both by volume, in water at a bath temperature of 120°F to 140°F for a minimum of 10 to 15 minutes, as determined by test. Scrubbing shall be completed as required. Immediate final thorough rinsing shall be completed in clean hot water followed by drying. Parts shall be free of iron particles or other foreign material. Section 40 23 10-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 9. The exterior finished weld and heat affected zone on stainless fabrications shall be cleaned using a pickle paste solution. All interior welds where accessible shall be cleaned with Scotch Brite EXL, or equal, deburring wheel. All weld spatter on the entire fabrication shall be removed 10. All field welding of stainless steel pipe shall be minimized and subject to the review of CONSULTANT. Field welding shall be shielded metal arc welding (SMAW) or GTAW for piping 8 inches and smaller. All field welding shall be accomplished by certified welders and using qualified procedures in accordance with ASME Section IX. Acceptance criteria to ASME B31.9. All field welds shall be wire-brushed after completion, and grinding shall be provided as required.All field welds shall be passivated with Oakite 33, or equal solution. Upon request, QW 484 forms shall be submitted to CONSULTANT. D. Stainless Steel Sampler Piping: Sampler piping shall be 316 stainless steel, Schedule 40, with threaded fittings. E. Steel Pipe: Air compressor piping smaller than 3 inches shall be Schedule 80 black steel pipe, with Class 300 malleable iron fittings.An ample number of unions shall be provided for disassembling pipe. Pipe shall conform to ASTM A53. F. Galvanized Iron Piping: Unless otherwise shown or specified, all piping 3 inches and smaller shall be extra strong galvanized iron pipe, with Class 300 galvanized malleable iron fittings. An ample number of unions shall be provided for disassembling pipe. Pipe shall conform to the "Specifications for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Ordinary Uses," ASTM A53. G. PVC Piping: Chemical Feed, Chemical Solution, PRC Vent, Buried Sampler, and Air Release Valve Vent Piping: 1. Except as otherwise specified, all chemical feed piping, chemical solution, PRC vent, and air release valve vent piping, including PEC, PRC, and buried piping designated SAM, shall be constructed of PVC. 2. PVC material shall conform to ASTM D1784, Class 12454-B. PVC piping and fittings shall be PVC 1120, Schedule 80, high impact pipe conforming to ASTM D1785 with bells conforming to ASTM D2672. Solvent weld fittings shall conform to ASTM D2467, and for threaded, ASTM D2464. 3. All piping shall be approved for use by the National Sanitation Foundation. All pipe delivered to the job site shall be properly marked for type, grade, and design stress rating. Expansion joints shall be provided where needed. In general all joints shall be solvent weld, except where flanges are required or as shown on the Drawings or where transition to another pipe material is required. Underground gra\ity pipe shall be installed in compliance with ASTM D2321 except as otherwise specified herein. Underground pressure piping shall be installed in compliance with ASTM D2774. 4. All exterior exposed or PVC piping in open tanks shall be formulated with sufficient ultraviolet light screeners to provide for long-term outdoor exposure with no deleterious effects. 5. Solvents shall be compatible with chemicals carried in piping Submit solvent information with shop drawings. H. Double Wall PVC Piping: 1. Piping system for PRC chemical piping outside of chemical containment areas, including underground, and interior to the building, shall be double wall as manufactured by GUARDIAN, New Baltimore, Michigan, or equal. Piping system shall include all piping, fittings, valves, and supports. Piping system shall consist of a Schedule 80 PVC interior pipe and Schedule 40 PVC exterior pipe suitable for carrying 45%ferric chloride. Section 40 23 10-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 Pipe system shall be provided with suitable drains, vents, and termination fittings and be designed to provide complete drainage of both primary and secondary containment to a low area where visual leak detection is located.A minimum of 1 visual leak detection systems consisting of a tee, a clear PVC sump, and a drain valve shall be provided per 50 linear feet of piping and fittings. Primary containment shall be supported within the annular space using interstitial support devices. All prefabricated pressure fittings shall be pretested by the manufacturer.All installation, cleaning, and testing procedures shall be according to the manufacturer's specific recommendation. Piping system shall be designed to allow for temperature and pressure consideration. 2. Leak detection system for WWTP chemical feed piping shall be as manufactured by GUARDIAN, New Baltimore, Michigan, or equal. System shall include one sensor for each pipe line (two sensors total), 5-zone panel in a NEMA 4 enclosure, and audible and visual signals. Panel shall be located in the new Chemical Storage Building. Signal for chemical piping shall be indicated in the SCADA System and shall automatically shut down the chemical pumps. See Divisions 26 and 46 for additional control and pump information. I. Polyethylene Tubing: Chemical tubing shall be polyethylene tubing, unless otherwise shown or specified. All tubing bends, tees, adapters, and unions shall be black, clear, or white polypropylene, or 304 stainless steel compatible with the tubing and solution, or equal. Tubing inserts shall be used at all fittings. Tubing and fittings shall be rated for operating pressures of 120 psi, minimum. Tubing runs in excess of 10 feet shall be run in adequately supported minimum 2-inch ID Schedule 40 PVC conduits. Conduit runs shall be broken at all fittings and bends to allow easy access to interior tubing. Conduit shall be supported as specified for PVC piping. J. Flexible PVC Piping: 1. Flexible hose connections between chemical tanks, totes, and rigid chemical feed piping shall be Series K3280 Reinforced PVC Flexible Connection Hose, as manufactured by Kuriyama of America, Inc., or equal. 2. PVC hose shall have a maximum working pressure of 125 psi at 150°F. 3. Hose shall be clear and compatible with chemicals being used. 4. All hoses shall be provided with suitable fittings and connectors to connect hose to tanks and rigid piping. Fittings and connectors shall be compatible with chemicals being used. K. Hydraulic Fluid Lines: Hydraulic fluid lines for belt press, gravity belt thickener, and centrifuge equipment shall be 316 stainless steel tubing. Fittings shall be Tylok 316 stainless steel tube coupling with four positive seals rated for 10,000 psi. Stainless steel flexible connectors may be used where appropriate. Hydraulic fluid lines shall be sized to meet belt press, gravity belt thickener, and centrifuge equipment requirements. 2.03 VALVES A. Gate Valves: 1. Shutoff valves in potable (W 1) and non-potable (W2 and W3) water lines 4-inch diameter and larger shall be ductile iron, rotating disc, parallel seat, bronze trimmed, 0-ring packing box with nonrising stem, manufactured to AWWA C500 specifications, Class 150, Kennedy, or equal. 2. Shutoff valves in non-potable water lines, grit flush water lines, pump vent and drain lines 1-inch diameter through 3-inch diameter shall be gate valves, Class 150, bronze or iron body bronze-mounted, solid wedge disc, threaded, rising stem, Nibco T-131, Milwaukee Valve 1150, or equal. Provide unions for ease of valve removal. Section 40 23 10-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3. Underground valves shall have extended stem, cast iron telescopic valve box, and key. Exposed valves not in reach of the floor(7 feet to centerline, or greater) shall have chain wheel operator. All other valves shall have handwheels. Right angle operators shall be provided, if required, because of valve position. 4. Asphaltic varnish and coal tar coating are not allowed on interior valves. Exterior buried valves shall be fusion-bonded epoxy-coated or epoxy-coated (prime and finish coats) — as specified in Division 09. Interior and exterior exposed valves shall be furnished with all surfaces (except galvanized or stainless steel) prepared in accordance with near white grade SSPC Specification No. 10 removing all dirt, rust scale, and foreign materials. Surface preparation shall be done at such time during the assembly process as to preclude damage to the valve once assembled. Cleaned surfaces shall then be shop-primed. Shop-priming shall be with one coat of Tnemec 66 HS Hi-Build Epoxoline primer, or equal, applied to a minimum of 5.0 mils dry thickness. Primer used shall be compatible with proposed finish coats; CONTRACTOR shall verify. A fusion-bonded epoxy system is an acceptable alternative to the specified primer. It is the intent of this specification that all valves, supports, and appurtenances shall be furnished shop primed, clean, and ready to accept finish painting by CONTRACTOR with a minimal amount of surface preparation. Preparation and painting shall conform to all requirements and provisions specified in Division 09. B. Plug Valves: 1. Shutoff valves in ductile iron lines containing wastewater and all sludge (including BSL, PRS, RAS, WAS, and TWAS) lines, scum lines, drainage lines, and digester lines shall be DeZURIK Series PEF 100% port Eccentric, or equal. Shutoff valves in sample lines and 2 1/2 inches or smaller air piping shall be DeZURIK PEC Eccentric, or equal. 2. Eccentric-type valves shall be nonlubricated rectangular-ported with resilient faced plugs and end connections as shown on the Drawings. The plug profile shall be of a cylindrical eccentric shape so that the vertical face of the plug is straight and the horizontal face is eccentrically curved in relation to the plug shafts. Segmented ball valves with spherical plugs shall not be acceptable. Port areas shall be 100% (PEF) of full pipe area. Valve bodies shall be of ASTM A126, Class B cast iron. Valve bonnets shall be of the same material as the body. Resilient plug facings shall be chloroprene or Buna-N, suitable for use with wastewater. Plugs for glass-lined valve& shall be unfaced, 316 all-cast stainless steel. The valve shall be oriented with the shaft horizontal, seat upstream, and plug above flow stream when open. 3. Shutoff valves for SPCC containment structures shall be DeZURIK Series PEC, or equal. Shutoff valves shall be equipped with a locking mechanism for the handwheel or lever operator. Provide neck extension as required and spring return lever operator Kinetrol Model 077-020-1, or equal. Valve shall have Buna N plug coating and Teflon packing. 4. Valves shall be furnished with corrosion-resistant seats, replaceable oil-impregnated permanently lubricated 316 stainless steel sleeve-type bearings and grit shaft seals on both upper and lower bearing journals that comply with the latest edition of AWWA C507 and C504. All valves shall include grease fittings on upper and lower journals. Bodies _ of 3-inch and larger valves shall be furnished with a minimum 1/8-inch-thick machined smooth-welded overlay seat of not less than 90% nickel. Seat area shall be raised surface completely covered with weld so that the plug face contacts only nickel. Sprayed or screwed-in seats are not acceptable. Valve shaft seals for valves 4 inches and larger shall be of the type using a stuffing box and pull-down packing gland Shaft seals shall be designed for replacement with the line pressurized at design pressure with the plug in both the open and closed position. For submerged service, or it valve manholes, valve vaults, or underground utility structures, valves shall have stain ess steel bolts. Section 40 23 10-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 5. The design of the valve and stuffing box assembly shall be such that the packing can be adjusted or completely replaced without disturbing any part of the valve or operator assembly except the packing gland follower. Stuffing boxes shall have a depth sufficient to accept at least four rings of Buna-N vee-type packing. Valve seating adjustment shall be accomplished without removing the valve from the pipe line and with pressure in the line. For lever-operated valves, the plug position retention friction device shall consist of an adjustable phenolic cone that clamps on the plug shaft or a moly sheath. Metal-to-metal friction devices shall not be acceptable. 6. Valve working pressure ratings shall be 175 psi for valves through 12 inches and 150 psi for valves 14 inches through 24 inches. Valves shall provide drip-tight shutoff up to the full pressure rating. 7. All plug valves for buried service, all plug valves 8 inches in diameter or larger, all plug valves with direct pressure greater than 75 psi or reverse differential pressure greater than 25 psi, and all plug valves for any gas or digester gas service 4 inches in diameter or larger shall have worm gear actuators. All gearing shall be enclosed in a semi steel housing and be suitable for running in a lubricant with seals provided on all shafts to prevent entry of dirt and water into the actuator. The actuator shaft and the quadrant shall be supported on permanently lubricated bronze bearings. Actuators shall indicate valve position. Buried or submerged valves and valves in manholes shall be supplied with actuators suitable for direct burial or submergence, shall be mounted on a gasketed and totally enclosed actuator mounting bracket, and shall have a totally enclosed and gasketed cover.All other valves shall be furnished with lever actuators. Supply one lever for every four valves of like size furnished. All valves 3 inches and smaller shall have individual levers. Valves not in reach of the floor (7 feet to centerline or greater) shall have chain wheel worm gear actuators. Right angle actuators shall be furnished, if required, because of valve position. Supply sufficient galvanized or electroplated chain with chain wheel so loop through chain wheel is within 3 feet of floor. All underground valves shall be equipped with cast iron telescopic adjustable valve boxes and covers. Buried or submerged service valves shall be supplied with 316 stainless steel bolts and hardware for both valve and actuator. 8. Extension stems and other accessories shall be provided as shown on the Drawings and as required to allow easy access for operation of valves within reach from walkways or other access points. Extend operators to at least 24 inches above walkways. Extension stems for quarter-turn plug valves shall be fabricated from 2-inch pipe, and extensions stems for gear-operated valves shall be fabricated from steel or stainless steel rod. Extension stems, stem guides, and related hardware and accessories for submerged valves, valves in manholes, and valves in interior of tanks shall be stainless steel. Stems shall be provided with 2-inch operating nut or other mechanism as shown on the Drawings. Stem guides shall be provided as recommended by the manufacturer. Maximum unsupported length of stem shall be limited to an lir ratio of 200. 9. Asphaltic varnish and coal tar coating are not allowed on interior valves. Exterior buried valves shall be fusion-bonded epoxy-coated or epoxy-coated as specified in Division 09. Interior and exterior exposed valves shall be furnished with all surfaces (except galvanized or stainless steel) prepared in accordance with near white grade SSPC Specification No. 10 removing all dirt, rust scale, and foreign materials. Surface preparation shall be done at such time during the assembly process as to preclude damage to the valves once assembled. Cleaned surfaces shall then be shop-primed. Shop-priming shall be with one coat of Tnemec 66 HS Hi-Build Epoxoline primer, one coat of Tnemec No. 141 Pota Pox 80 epoxy primer, or equal, applied to a minimum of 5.0 mils dry thickness. Primer used shall be compatible with proposed finish coats; CONTRACTOR shall verify. A fusion-bonded epoxy system is an acceptable alternative to the specified primer. It is the intent of this specification that all valves, supports, and appurtenances shall be furnished shop-primed, clean, and ready to accept finish Section 40 23 10-8 4463.004/City Contract No.994 painting by CONTRACTOR with a minimal amount of surface preparation. Except as noted below, valve interior shall be shop-primed and finish painted with epoxy painting system or fusion-bonded epoxy system as specified above. Preparation and painting shall conform to all requirements and provisions specified in Division 09. 10. Glass Lined Valves and Valve Components: a. Valves for DSL, BSL, and CNT(centrate) applications shall be glass lined. The glass lining applied valves and valve components shall be vitreous material which is hard, smooth, continuous and formulated to prevent the adherence c` grease in sludge and scum lines, and to resist the adherence of crystalline metal salt deposits (Struvite) to sludge and centrate lines in sewage and wastewater treatment plants. It shall be applied to properly prepared valves and valve components using accepted industry standards, and shall be tested per applicable ASTM, NACE and SSPC standards. b. Casting Requirements: (1) All castings received should be supplied bare, without having been previously coated or lined or otherwise exposed internally to any prior organic lining product. (2) The castings should be visibly inspected for excessive surface irregularities such as pinholes or large holes, cavities, sand inclusions or voids that will not allow for proper coverage of the porcelain enamel lining. (3) Any indentations or subsurface defects in the casting should be minor and should not exceed a depth of 1/8-inch. Gradual, sloping sidE s with no undercut edges are permissible. Casting should also be inspected for sharp upward protrusions, parting lines or other roughness creating any sharp edges. Grinding of these areas is permissible. (4) All valves receiving glass lining shall be ductile iron. c. Lining Material: (1) The lining material shall consist of vitreous and inorganic material applied to the internal surfaces that have been prepared by blasting. The glass lining applicator is responsible for inspecting and ensuring the cast surface is prepared properly prior to applying the lining. (2) Application of the porcelain material should take place within 8 hours of completion of blasting. (3) The lining shall be applied in a minimum of two coats, separately applied and separately fired. The items shall be exposed to a maturing temperature of approximately 1,400°F, at which point the vitreous and inorganic materials melt and fuse to the base metal forming an integral molecular bond with the base metal surface. Subsequent coatings will be processed in a similar ` manner, forcing an integral molecular bond with the base coat. (4) The entire finished coating shall be a minimum of 10 mils nominal as tested with an acceptable dry film thickness gauge. (5) The finished lining shall be able to withstand a strain of 0.)01 inch/inch (the yield point of the base metal) without damage to the glass. (6) The lining shall be of a light, bright color to allow visual detection of defects more easily prior to electronic holiday testing. (7) The lining shall have a hardness of 5 to 6 on the MOHS scale, and a density of 2.5 to 3.0 grams per cubic centimeter as measured by ASTM D5965 method A. (8) The glass lining shall be capable of withstanding an instantaneous thermal shock of 350°F differential without crazing, blistering or spa ling. Section 40 23 10-9 4463.004/City Contract No.994 (9) It shall be resistant to corrosion between a pH of 3 and 10 at 125°F. (10) There shall be no visible loss of surface gloss to the lining after immersing a production sample in an 8% sulfuric acid solution at 148°F. for a period of 10 minutes. (11) When tested according to ASTM C-283-97 (2002), it shall show a weight loss of not more than 2 milligrams per square inch. d. Testing and Certification: (1) Because of the importance of some areas to be free of the glass lining for assembly purposes, assure that the application areas of the glass lining coincide with the drawings supplied by the valve manufacturer. (2) Per the recommended industry standards under ASTM D-5162, NACE RP 0188-99, and SSPC Coating Manual, Volume 1, Section XIV, the glass lining shall be tested by a "low voltage", wet sponge, non-destructive holiday detection unit with permissible pinholes present in the glass lined areas being limited to those shown in Table 1. TABLE 1 MAXIMUM QUANTITY OF PIN HOLES ALLOWED Valve Diameter Maximum Pin Holes Per Valve 4-inch to 8-inch Diameter 3 to 5 10-inch to 18-inch Diameter 5 to 8 (3) When using the wet sponge testing apparatus, the sponge should be moved over the surface at a moderate rate approximately 1 fps using a 2-pass motion over each area. Care should be used to prevent excess water to gather in areas to cause false indications. (4) Product testing per valve component will consist of glass lining mil thickness records, Holiday spark testing and Mohs hardness testing. Written records may be requested by CONSULTANT. (5) Due to out gassing that occurs during heating of ductile iron product, total avoidance of microscopic pinholes is nearly impossible. The primary and proven reason for the use of glass lining in wastewater and sewage treatment systems is the non-stick characteristic. Therefore, these isolated, microscopic pinholes are acceptable and have been proven to not adversely affect performance of the lining. However, care must be taken to minimize these microscopic voids to assure that proper cleaning, processing and quality control procedures have been utilized. (6) The criteria in Table 1 represent non-visible pinholes detectable by spark test only.Any pinholes that are visible to the naked eye and expose the base metal are cause for rejection. (7) Glass lining is not allowed on the nickel welded seat if the lining is performed after machining. (8) Due to the manufacturing process of machining, handling, installing bearings, assembly and testing, the following areas are allowed touch up areas with approved glass lining touch up kit as recommended by the glass liner: (a) Body: The nickel weld area adjacent to the machined body seat. ii. The area adjacent to the machined lower shaft journal, housing the lower bearing. iii. The area adjacent to the machined open position plug stops. Section 40 23 10-10 4463.004/City Contract No.994 (b) Bonnet: The area adjacent to the upper bearing journa ii. The area adjacent to the machined bonnet bo ;s. (9) When required, touch up in these areas will be limited to the affected area. One additional repair will be allowed up to 1/8-inch in size per part. All areas that show the base coat will have the top coat re-applied and then re-fired. Allowable areas to be touched with the approved glass lining touch up kit will cover the area and no more than a 1/4-inch border around the area to be touched up. e. Touch-Up Procedure:An approved touch up kit shall be used in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendation. C. Check Valves: 1. Check valves in valve manholes in ductile iron lines carrying liquid shall be GA Industries Figure 220-DS, Apco Model 250 LW by DeZURIK, (lever and weight) or equal, 150 psi, ductile iron or iron body, bronze or stainless trimmed, swing check. Two levers and springs, and/or additional weights shall be used if necessary to stop slamming. 2. Except where noted, check valves in ductile iron lines carrying liquid shall be GA Industries 250-DS, Apco Model 250 by DeZURIK, or equal, air cushion check valves. The swing check valves shall be constructed with a heavy cast iron or ductile iron body, a bronze or stainless steel seat ring, an extra heavy noncorrosive shaft for attachment of lever and necessary weights to close valve, and a complete noncorrosive air cushion chamber. The valve shall be tight-seating and shocklesE in operation. The seal ring shall be renewable and shall be securely held in place by a tlreaded joint. The air cushion chamber shall be attached to the side of the valve body externally and so constructed with a piston operating in a chamber that will effectively permit the valve to be operated without any slamming action. Shock absorption shall be by air. The valve disc shall be of cast iron or ductile iron and shall be suspended from a noncorrosive shaft that shall pass through a stuffing box to be connected to the chamber on the outside of the valve. 3. Ball Check Valves: Check valves at discharge of digester feed pumps (P10-26-1, -2, and -3), centrate pumps (P15-2-1, and P-15-2-2), primary sludge pumps (P-3-15-1 and P-3-15-2), GBT feed pumps (P-10-4-1 through P-10-4-4), dewatering feed pumps (P-12-1-1, P-12-1-2, and P-12-1-3), centrate pumps (P-15-2-1 and P-15-2-2), and where shown on the Drawings shall be ball check valves, Figure 240-D (4 to 12 inches), American AVK, Type 53 (4 to 24 inches), sinking type, or equal. Ball shall be hollow steel or solid aluminum with vulcanized nitrile rubber covering. Provide heavier ball if less than 10 feet of discharge head. 4. Air Check Valves: Check valves in ductile iron or stainless steel lines carrying air shall be short-body Technocheck, Style 5102, US Valve Model 09-2-0, or equal, flanged end, 125 psi cast iron body, aluminum internals, check valves. Sealing member shall be silicone suitable for air under test pressure specified and temperature of 500°F. 5. Miscellaneous: a. Check valves in other than ductile iron, cast iron, PVC, polyethylene, or compressed air lines shall be Class 150, Milwaukee Valve 510, Nibco T-433, :)r equal, screwed end, bronze, bronze disc, swing check for water and air. b. Check valves in PVC lines shall be ball check type of PVC construction. c. Check valves in polyethylene lines shall be of polypropylene construction. d. Check valves in compressed air lines 3 inches or smaller shall be horizontal lift check valves, Class 150, Crane No. 27TF, or equal. Valves shall have threaded ends, PTFE disc, union cap, and bronze body and cap. Section 40 23 10-11 4463.004/City Contract No.994 6. Asphaltic varnish and coal tar coating are not allowed on check valves. Exterior of cast iron or steel valve body shall be furnished with all surfaces (except galvanized or stainless steel) prepared in accordance with near white grade SSPC Specification No. 10 removing all dirt, rust scale, and foreign materials. Surface preparation shall be done at such time during the assembly process as to preclude damage to the valve once assembled. Cleaned surfaces shall then be shop-primed. Shop-priming shall be with one coat of Tnemec 66 HS Hi-Build Epoxoline primer, one coat of Tnemec No. 141 Pota Pox 80 epoxy primer, or equal, applied to a minimum of 5.0 mils dry thickness. Primer used shall be compatible with proposed finish coats; CONTRACTOR shall verify. A fusion-bonded epoxy system is an acceptable alternative to the specified primer. It is the intent of this specification that all valves, supports, and appurtenances shall be furnished shop-primed, clean, and ready to accept finish painting by CONTRACTOR with a minimal amount of surface preparation. Preparation and painting shall conform to all requirements and provisions specified in Division 09. D. Butterfly Valves: 1. Except as otherwise specified, shutoff valves in air lines 3 inches or larger shall be DeZURIK BHP, or equal, 150 psi, ASTM A516, carbon steel, PTFE/titanium-resilient seat suitable for air at a temperature of 450°F, wafer butterfly valves. Valves 6 inches and smaller shall have ten-position levers. Valves larger than 8 inches shall be provided with rotary manual handwheel operator. Valves not in reach of the floor (7 feet to centerline or greater) shall have chain wheel operators. Right angle operators shall be provided, if required, because of valve position. 2. Extension stems and other accessories shall be provided as shown on the Drawings and as required to allow easy access for operation of valves within reach from walkways or other access points. Extend operators to at least 24 inches above walkways. Extension stems for ten-position lever butterfly valves shall be fabricated from 2-inch pipe, and extensions stems for gear-operated valves shall be fabricated from steel or stainless steel rod. Extension stems, stem guides, and related hardware and accessories for submerged valves shall be stainless steel. Stems shall be provided with 2-inch operating nut or other mechanism as shown on the Drawings. Stem guides shall be provided as recommended by the manufacturer. Maximum unsupported length of stem shall be limited to an 1/r ratio of 200. 3. Asphaltic varnish and coal tar coating are not allowed on interior valves. Exterior buried valves shall be epoxy-coated. Interior and exterior exposed valves shall be furnished with all surfaces (except galvanized or stainless steel) prepared in accordance with near white grade SSPC Specification No. 10 removing all dirt, rust scale, and foreign materials. Surface preparation shall be done at such time during the assembly process as to preclude damage to the valves once assembled. Cleaned surfaces shall then be shop-primed. Shop-priming shall be with one coat of Tnemec 66 HS Hi-Build Epoxoline primer, Tnemec No. 141 Pota Pox 80 epoxy primer, or equal, applied to a minimum of 5.0 mils dry thickness. Primer used shall be compatible with proposed finish coats; CONTRACTOR shall verify.A fusion-bonded epoxy system is an acceptable alternative to the specified primer. It is the intent of this specification that all valves, supports, and appurtenances shall be furnished shop-primed, clean, and ready to accept finish painting by CONTRACTOR with a minimal amount of surface preparation. Preparation and painting shall conform to all requirements and provisions specified in Division 09. E. Solenoid Valves: 1. Except where otherwise shown or specified, solenoid valves for water services shall be normally closed, 2-way pilot-operated, slow closing solenoid valves, ASCO Red Hat II 8221 Series, or equal. Valves on seal water systems shall fail open. Valve shall be brass body with Buna-N disc. Enclosure shall be rated for NEMA4X.Valve shall Section 40 23 10-12 4463.004/City Contract No.994 be operated on 120 Vac, 60 Hz power supply. Valve shall be rated for a maximum operating pressure differential of 150 psi. Unit shall be CSA certified and UL listed. 2. Solenoid valves for air service shall be normally closed, 2-way pilot-operated, general services solenoid valves, ASCO Red Hat II 8210 Series, or equal. Valve shall be brass body. Enclosure shall be rated for NEMA4X. Valve shall be operated on 120 Vac, 60 Hz power supply. Valve shall be rated for a maximum operating pressure differential of 150 psi on air service. Unit shall be CSA certified and UL listed. F. Motorized Valve Operators: 1. The following valves shall be provided with motorized valve operators as listed and be Limitorque Series L120, AUMA Series SA, or equal. Valve Open/ Equipment Valve Valve Size Close Control Number Service Type (Inch) Time, Sec* Rating Service MOV-10-4-1 WAS Plug 10 60 NEMA 4X Open/Close MOV-10-4-2 WAS Plug 10 60 NEMA 4X Open/Close MOV-10-4-3 WAS Plug 10 60 NEMA 4X Open/Close MOV-10-8-1 WAS Plug 6 60 NEMA 4X Open/Close MOV-10-8-2 WAS Plug 6 60 NEMA 4X Open/Close *Valve and motorized operator open/closed time shall be confirmed by manufacturer. 2. The motorized valve operators shall be 460-volt, three-phase, and 60 Hz. Motorized valve operators shall be sized for a minimum of 1.5 times the val.!e manufacturer's torque requirements. The minimum pressure for determining torque requirements for valve operator shall be based on pipe service test pressure or 25 psi, whichever is greater. 3. Automatic control shall be through a remote panel as listed in Section 26 09 00—Controls and Instrumentation. 4. Each actuator shall be supplied with an integral push-button station containing three buttons (open/stop/close), three indicator lights, one green (closed), one amber (fault), and one red (open), and three-position selector switch, lockable in each of the three positions (Local/Off/Remote). In the "Local" position, the actuators shall be operated from the local push-button station. In the "Remote" position, the actuators shall be controlled from open/close dry contacts from the remote panel.An auxiliary contact shall be provided for "In Remote" indication. 5. The electric valve actuators shall include the motor, motor heater, actuator unit gearing, reversing motor starter package with control power supply transformer, phase discriminator, interface board with optically isolated input signals and monitor relay for -- collective fault signal, position limit switches, torque switches, declutch lever, and handwheel as a self-contained unit. The actuator shall meet the latest revision of the applicable AWWA specification. 6. The motors shall be specifically designed for valve actuator service and shall be of high starting torque, totally enclosed, nonventilated construction. Motor insulation shall be a minimum NEMA Class F, with a maximum continuous temperature rating of 155°C (rise plus ambient) for one complete open-to-close (or reverse) cycle. 7. The motors shall be of sufficient size to open or close the valve at the maximum stated torque. The motor shall be capable of operating at ±10 of nominal voltage. The motor duty rating shall be sufficient for one complete cycle (open-close-open or reverse) without exceeding its temperature rating. Motor bearings shall be of tie antifriction type and permanently lubricated. Section 40 23 10-13 4463.004/City Contract No.994 8. The motors shall be an independent subassembly so that the power gearing shall not be an integral part of the motor assembly to allow for motor or gear changes dictated by system operation changes. 9. The motors shall be equipped with internal thermal contacts to protect against motor overload. 10. The actuator shall be a multiple reduction unit with power gearing consisting of spur or helical gears and worm gearing. There shall be a self-locking worm gear set in the drive train to maintain valve position. The spur or helical gearing and worm shall be of hardened alloy steel, and the worm gear shall be alloy bronze. All power gearing shall be accurately cut; nonmetallic, aluminum, or cast gearing shall not be allowed. Antifriction bearings with caged balls or rollers shall be used throughout. 11. All rotating power train components shall be immersed in grease with provisions for inspection and relubrication without disassembly. Lubricants shall be suitable for ambient conditions of minus 20°F to 150°F. 12. The actuators shall have a built-in device that allows the motor to reach full speed before engaging the valve load when required by unseating applications. 13. A handwheel shall be provided for manual operation of each motor-operated valve with arrow to indicate"open" rotation. The handwheel shall not rotate during motor operation. A fused motor shall not prevent manual operation. When in manual operating mode, the actuator will remain in this mode until the motor is energized, at which time the actuator will automatically return to electric operation. Movement from motor operation to handwheel operation shall be accomplished by a positive, padlockable declutching lever, which mechanically disengages the motor and related gearing. It shall be impossible for simultaneous manual and motor operation to occur. Friction-type declutch mechanisms are not acceptable. 14. Position limit switches and associated gearing shall be an integral part of the valve actuator. Limit switch gearing shall be of the intermittent type, made of bronze or stainless steel, grease-lubricated, and totally enclosed to prevent dirt and foreign matter from entering the gear train. Limit switch contacts shall be heavy-duty and silver-plated with wiping action. The actuator shall have 16 contacts, 4 contact/4 rotor type, all of the same basic design. As an alternative, a limit switch assembly may be directly coupled to the valve stem, eliminating the need for intermittent gearing, and providing 6 single pole, double throw (SPDT) contacts. Contacts shall be convertible from N/O to N/C or reverse. 15. Switches shall be adjustable, allowing for trip points from fully open to fully closed positions of valve travel. They shall not be subject to breakage on slippage due to over-travel. Limit switch design shall permit visible verification of switch position without disassembly. 16. Each valve actuator shall be equipped with a switch that will interrupt the control circuit in both the opening and closing directions when valve torque overload occurs. Contacts shall be silver-plated. The torque switch shall have graduated dials for both open and close directions of travel and each shall be independently adjustable. The torque switch shall include a positive means to limit adjustability so as not to exceed the actuator output torque capability. The activating spring pack shall be of the Belleville spring design. Switch design shall permit visible verification of switch position without disassembly. 17. Enclosures shall be NEMA 4 for general areas. For high moisture areas or areas below -- grade, provide watertight compartment between terminal compartment and the balance of the actuator that shall be submersible to IP68 standard of 20 feet for 72 hours. Section 40 23 10-14 4463.004/City Contract No.994 G. Miscellaneous Valves, Strainers, Hose Bibs, and Valve Boxes: 1. Shutoff valves in non-potable water lines smaller than 1 inch inches syiall be NibcoT-585 (threaded), Nibco S-585 (solder joint), or equal, full port ball valves. Provide extended stems for valve operators installed with insulated pipe. 2. Shutoff valves in PVC piping shall be hand-operated 150 psi union-type PVC ball valves, Chemtrol TU Series Tru-bloc, Walworth Series 8927, or equal. Valves and all components including 0-rings shall be compatible with chemicals in piping. PVC valves and union shall not be painted. 3. Y strainers in potable, non-potable, and service water piping shall have cast iron cast bronze bodies, stainless steel 20 mesh screens, Watts, or equal. Y strainers in chemical lines shall be transparent PVC, Asahi, or equal, True Union strainer. Provide 20 mesh PVC mesh screens. Strainers used for hypochlorite service shall have Teflon 0-rings. 4. Shutoff valves for compressed air (CA) piping shall be Milwaukee Valve, or equal, forged-brass ball valve with Teflon seats and stem seals. Valves shall be threaded ends. Valves shall be rated at 400 WOG/150 SWP. Valves shall have blowout-proof stem. Ball shall be chrome-plated. 5. All valves for use on chemical waste lines shall be chemically compa+ible with the liquid to be carried. Valves in polyethylene piping shall be 1/2-inch polypropylene ball valves suitable for 100 psi operating pressure. Valves in PVDF piping sha be PVDF valves suitable for 200 psi operating pressure. 6. Pressure Relief Valves in Tanks: a. Pressure relief valves in tanks shall be Red Valve Tideflex Technologies Series 35, or equal, flanged-end check valves. b. Check valves are to be all rubber and the flow-operated check type with a flanged end connection. The port area shall contour down to a duckbill that shall allow passage of flow in one direction while preventing reverse flow. The flange and flexible duckbill sleeve shall be one-piece Buna-N rubber construction with nylon reinforcement. c. The flange drilling shall conform to ANSI B16.1 Class 125 standards. The valve shall be furnished with stainless steel backup rings and bolts for installation. d. Manufacturer must have available flow test data from an acc-edited hydraulics laboratory to confirm pressure drop data. Company name, plant lc cation, valve size, and serial number shall be bonded to the check valve. Valves shal, be manufactured in the USA. _ e. When line pressure inside valve exceeds the backpressure outside the valve by 2 inches, the line pressure shall force the bills of the valve open allowing flow to pass. When backpressure exceeds the line pressure by the same amount, the bills of the valve shall be forced closed. f. Valve shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's written installation and operation manual and app-oved submittals. g. Manufacturer's authorized representative shall be available for customer service during installation and start-up and to train personnel in the operat on, maintenance, and troubleshooting of the valve. 7. As shown on the Drawings, supply curb stop shutoff valves for W2 yard piping. Curb stops in W2 yard piping shall be Ford B44-777M ball valves with Minneapolis-type curb boxes complete with lid and 6-foot stationary rod, or equal. Provide two 4-foot shutoff keys to operate valves. Lids shall have the word "WATER" cast into the top of the covers or shall be blank. Curb stops shall be placed on minimum 3 cubic feet of concrete placed on undisturbed earth. Section 40 23 10-15 4463.004/City Contract No.994 8. Hose Bibs: a. Hose bibs providing non-potable water shall be provided with a removable key handle. b. Exterior hose valves shall be Woodford Model 65, Watts, or equal, freezeless wall hydrants with integral ASSE 1019 backflow preventer outlet, permanent valve seat, and brushed chrome exterior face with 3/4-inch outlet garden hose threads and 3/4-inch inlet. Provide loose key operator with each exterior hose bib. Provide round or square box recessed enclosure with locking door for the hose bib. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate wall thickness with recessed enclosure depth. c. Interior hose valves shall be Woodford Model 24, Watts, or equal. Provide 3/4-inch garden hose thread, 3/4-inch inlet, and ASSE 1011 approved backflow preventer outlet. Interior hose valves shall be equipped with approved vacuum breaker, Watts 8A, Nidel Model 34H, or equal. Provide metal handle and chrome plate finish. Provide loose key with each faucet. 9. Valves in W2 piping used for fluid control as shown on the Drawings shall be Nibco, or equal, globe valves rated for 200 psi WOG. Valves shall be bronze with TFE disc. 10. Ball valves for centrate and sludge sampling shall be Series 76F-100-A, 316 stainless steel, threaded ends, full port, as manufactured by Apollo Valves, or equal. 11. Valve Boxes: a. Valve boxes shall be provided for all buried valves. b. Valve boxes shall be made of cast iron conforming to ASTM A48, Class 20. Valve boxes shall consist of a base section, tubular mid and top sections, both with cast threads by which one can be telescoped on the other, extension sections if required, and a circular drop cover. The castings shall be free from blowholes, porosity, hard spots, shrinkage defects or cracks, or other injurious defects and shall have a normal smooth casting finish.The castings shall be thoroughly coated with a 1 mil minimum thickness bituminous coating. Valve boxes shall be 5 1/4 inches in diameter. Valve boxes shall have a maximum length of 7 feet when extended without extension sections. Extensions shall be provided for deeper mains. c. The valve box shall be centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the valve with the box cover flush with the finished ground elevation. Solid 4-inch concrete blocks shall be placed under the base of valve boxes so that the bottom of the base is about 2 inches away from contact with the valve bonnet. The valve box shall not transmit shock or stress to the valve.d. Valve box alignment devices: All valves shall be supplied with a gate valve adaptor as manufactured by Adaptor, Inc., or equal. All adaptors shall have a metal frame and be supplied with a 3/4-inch rubber gasket. All adaptors shall be sized to fit the brand of valve being supplied. 12. Wastewater Air Release Valves: a. Combination air release valves shall be APCO model ASU manufactured by DeZURIK Model D-025S by A.R.I., or equal. Combination Air Valves in sizes 1-inch to 8-inch shall be single body design and shall provide both air release and air/vacuum valve functions. b. Air release shall be designed to automatically provide varied and predictable air flow over a wide range of conditions. The air release orifice must be capable of releasing the maximum air volume anticipated. c. Valves shall close tightly at any pressure between 2 and 300 psi without leaking or spilling. The air/vacuum inlet and outlet areas shall meet the flow area requirements set forth in AWWA M51 and be manufactured as set forth in AWWA C512. d. Valve shall have an upper body compression chamber to limit fluid level and solids interference. It shall also have a funnel shaped lower body to reduce solids buildup and allow for self-cleaning and maximum outflow. Section 40 23 10-16 4463.004/City Contract No.994 e. A hydraulics-based float design shall be used to reduce the ballistic effect and instability of high speed fluid flow. The guided float shaft shall provide smooth automatic air release and air/vacuum operation that will not foul and reduce performance on dirty service applications. To avoid loss of performance, the Air Release and Air/Vacuum seating action shall be direct driven by the shaft-mounted float. No linkages shall be used. Flow deflector/splash reduction ring shall be used to restrict solids entry and minimize flow effect and splash that can cause float instability. f. A 90-degree threaded side outlet shall be included with the valve with an extension pipe. Valves shall be capable of converting to optional vertical threaded outlet or mushroom cap without removing the valve from service and valve disassembly. g. Materials of construction: (1) Body, float shaft and hardware shall be 316 stainless steel. (2) Float shall be 316 stainless steel or polypropylene. (3) Elastomer seals shall be Acrylonitrile-butadiene (NBR or EPDM). h. End connections shall be NPT or ANSI 125/150 flanged. Valves 4-inch and larger shall have two lifting lugs for ease of valve installation. i. Two Year Warranty shall be provided for all valves. 13. Retractable Injection Quill: Provide retractable injection quill as manufactured by SAF-T-FLO, Anaheim, California, or equal. Quill shall have stainless steel valve, PVC solution tube, 4-inch insertion length, standard tip configuration, and integrated check valve.All materials of construction shall be compatible with chemicals conveyed by quill. Provide flexible tubing between quill and chemical piping. 2.04 PIPING APPURTENANCES AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Piping appurtenances shall be made of the materials specified. All appurtenances not designated as to type shall be subject to approval of CONSULTANT. B. Rubber Expansion Joints: _ 1. Rubber expansion joints shall be furnished and installed where show on the Drawings and where required to eliminate vibration from equipment to piping Expansion joints shall be the single filled-arch type as manufactured by the Mercer Rubber Company, Series 450 or 500; General Rubber Corporation; or equal. Unless otherwise specified, expansion joints shall be provided complete with control rods and rubber washers as required. Control rods shall be provided to prevent over-stress on coupling at a minimum of twice the system test pressure. The number and size of the control rods shall be sufficient for twice the test pressure, two rods minimum. Expansion joints shall have integral duck and rubber flange with split backup rings and have a minimum rated working pressure of 150 psi and 20 inches Hg vacuum. Joints shall be provided with higher rated working pressures, if required to meet specified test pressures. Joints shall have a nominal laying length of 6 inches for joints sized up to 8 inches in diameter, 8 inches for joints sized up to 20 inches in diameter, and 10 inches fo'joints sized up to 36 inches in diameter. Tube and cover shall be of butyl rubber. 2. Expansion joints on aeration piping shall be designed for 250°F temperature and shall be Mercer 500B, or equal. The expansion joint shall be made of chlorobutyl or EPDM and shall have a 55 psi working pressure with flanged ends. Unless otherwise specified, expansion joints shall be provided complete with control rods and rubber washers as required. Control rods shall be provided to prevent over-stress on coupling at a minimum of twice the system test pressure. The number and size of the control rods shall be sufficient for twice the test pressure, two rods minimum. Section 40 23 10-17 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3. Rubber expansion joints shall be furnished and installed where shown on the Drawings and where required to eliminate vibration from chemical storage tanks to piping. Expansion joints shall be the single filled-arch type as manufactured by the Mercer Rubber Company, Series 501; Red Valve T-2015; or equal. Expansion joints shall be provided complete with rubber washers as required. Expansion joints shall have integral duck and rubber flange and have a minimum rated working pressure of 150 psi and 20 inches Hg vacuum. Joints shall be provided with higher rated working pressures, if required to meet specified test pressures. Tube and cover shall be of EPDM. Backup rings shall be stainless steel. C. Aeration Piping Couplings: Except as otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, couplings on exterior exposed aeration piping shall be Dresser Style 38, Smith Blair 411, or equal. The couplings shall have Viton gaskets and shall allow a minimum of 1/4-inch expansion. If two or more couplings are used to provide expansion compensation, provide a harness welded to each side of the couplings, and distribute the expansion evenly over the couplings. D. Unrestrained Flanged Coupling Adapters: Flanged coupling adapters for drain or gravity flow piping shall be furnished and installed as shown on the Drawings. Flanged coupling adapters shall be of cast iron construction, complete with Buna-N coupling gasket and 0-ring flange gasket. Flanged coupling adapter for drain or gravity flow piping shall be Smith-Blair International 912, or equal. E. Restrained Flanged Coupling Adapters: Restrained flanged coupling adapters shall be furnished and installed as shown on the Drawings. Restrained flanged coupling adapters shall be of ductile iron construction, complete with EPDM sealing gasket, and gripping wedges and torque limiting actuating screws. Restrained flanged coupling adapters shall be Series 2100 MEGAFLANGE by EBAA Iron, or equal. Restrained flanged coupling adaptors in manholes or wet wells shall be provided with 304 stainless steel fasteners, bolts, and nuts. F. Quick Hose Disconnect: Quick hose disconnects for chemical and PEC service shall be 2-inch polypropylene, F-adapter type with dust cap. Quick hose disconnects in WAS Transfer Pumping Station shall be 2 1/2-inch 304 stainless steel, F-adapter type with dust cap. G. Pipe Coupling: Pipe couplings identified on the Drawings shall be Dresser Type 38, Smith Blair 411, or equal, steel coupling. CONTRACTOR shall provide tie ears and tension ties where necessary to restrain pipe. �. H. Tension Ties:All tension ties, rod ties, and control rods shall be provided to resist a minimum 150 psi pressure in the pipe line. CONTRACTOR shall provide tie ears to secure tension rods to flanges where necessary. Rods shall be provided with nuts and washers on both " sides of tie ears.All nuts shall be carbon alloy steel conforming to ASTM A563, and washers shall be hardened steel conforming to ASTM F436. Rods shall be ASTM A36 steel at a minimum. Tie rods shall be equally spaced around pipe. The following table lists the minimum number and diameter in inches for the tie rods for various sizes of pipe. 150 psi Pressure 250 psi Pressure Minimum Minimum Pipe Size Minimum Size Minimum Size (inches) Number (inches) Number (inches) 4-10 4 5/8 4 5/8 12 4 5/8 4 3/4 Section 40 23 10-18 4463.004/City Contract No.994 150 psi Pressure 250 psi Pressure Minimum Minimum Pipe Size Minimum Size Minimum Size (inches) Number (inches) Number (inches) 14 4 3/4 4 7/8 16 4 3/4 4 1 18 4 7/8 4 1 1/8 20 4 1 4 1 1/4 24 4 1 1/8 4 1 1/2 30 4 1 3/8 7 1 3/8 36 8 1 1/4 8 1 1/2 42 12 1 1/8 12 1 1/2 48 11 1 3/8 22 1 1/4 54 11 1 1/2 22 1 3/8 I. Floor Boxes: Provide floor boxes in concrete floors or slabs and as shown on the Drawings. Floor boxes shall be Neenah R-7506-B, or equal. CONTRACTOR shall ✓erify that all floor boxes are large enough to accommodate all operating nuts and wrenches Provide one "Tee" valve key operator for each valve manhole and one for each tank with tanK or channel drain. J. Mechanical Seals: Mechanical seals shall be 316 stainless steel Link Seal, lnnerlynx by A.P.S, or equal. Link seals shall be provided with 316 stainless steel bolts, nuts, and fasteners. Provide multiple layers of lnnerlynx assemblies, APS model S316 and SWS sleeve, when annular space is wider than one assembly. Sleeve diameter shall be provided and mechanical seals installed as recommended by the manufacturer. K. Pressure Gauges: Provide a pressure gauge on each new pump discha-ge piping (total of three) in VMH-3 and MMH-1-1 pit. Pressure gauges shall be 4 1/2-inch dial, H.O. Trerice Model 450 LFSS with stainless steel tube and socket, or equal. Case shall be liquid filled with glycerin to minimize vibration and pulsations. Gauges shall have scale in psi with a maximum range equal to twice the normal operating pressure indicated in the submersible pump equipment specifications. Provide stainless steel isolation valve and union at connection to pipe to allow the gauges to be removed while the line is under pressure. Gauges shall be mounted to permit pressure readings from above without entering the manhole. L. Service Saddle: Service saddles shall have a ductile iron body per ASTM A536 and have two carbon steel bales. Bales, washers and nuts shall be electro-galvanized with dichromate -- seal. Gasket shall be of Nitrile rubber and NSF61 listed. Saddle shall be Smith-Blair, Style 313, or equal. M. Tapping Sleeve: Tapping sleeve body and neck shall be made of heavy 18-8 Type 316 stainless steel. Flange, studs, nuts and washers shall be 304 stainless steel. Gasket shall be 1/4-inch thick, gridded and have a molded outlet ring to provide effective sealing. It shall be SSF 61-G Nitrile. All welded stainless steel surfaces shall be fully passivated. Sleeve shall be Smith-Blair Style 663, or equal. Section 40 23 10-19 4463.004/City Contract No.994 N. Sampling Taps: All taps that are required in new piping shall be provided with a boss and tap. Sample tap piping shall be 316 stainless steel. Provide an isolation valve immediately downstream of tap. Valve shall be of same body material as sample piping. Tap and valve shall be 5 feet or less above finished floor. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.02 GENERAL A. Refer to requirements specified in Division 01 for equipment installation, quality control, testing, supervision, start-up, and operator training. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Interior or Exposed Piping: 1. Provide pipe supports for all piping. Pipe support spacing and type shall, at a minimum, conform to manufacturer's recommendations unless more restrictive requirements are specified or shown on the Drawings. All interior or exposed pipelines shall be securely supported by adjustable saddles, brackets, or adjustable hangers supported directly by concrete, masonry work, or tile. Strap hangers, tin clips, or U-hooks will not be acceptable. Piping shall be supported, even though not shown on the Drawings, using base fittings and concrete pads to 6 inches above the floor, Anvil 264, B-line, or equal, adjustable pipe saddle stand with floor flange to 6 feet above the floor, and supporting clamps or inserts more than 6 feet above the floor. In general, the maximum spacing of supports shall not exceed 10 feet on centers. Except as specified for plumbing system, all PVC piping shall be supported using galvanized supports for flexible piping except as indicated. Piping in chemical feed rooms shall be supported with a plastic support system, Aickinstrut, or equal. Type 304 stainless steel supports and fasteners shall be used in submerged locations,tanks,wet wells, sludge dewatering or thickening facilities, or as indicated. Piping shall be adequately supported and braced to resist thrust at bends, rubber expansion joints, and joints. Insulation saddles shall be used at supports of insulated piping. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and place hangers, supports, wall pipes, and sleeves in the forms before concrete is poured wherever needed or shown on the Drawings. 2. All piping shall be adequately supported and braced to resist thrust at bends and joints. Use base elbows, poured concrete, or rod ties. The weight of the piping shall be supported independently of connected equipment. 3. All supports and parts shall conform to the latest requirements of ASME B31 and shall have a structural safety factor of 5. Accurate weight balance calculation shall be made by CONTRACTOR to determine the required supporting force at each hanger location and the pipe weight load at each equipment connection. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the installation and application of the supports. Pipe hangers shall be capable of supporting the pipe weight load in all conditions of operation. The hangers shall allow free expansion and contraction of the piping to prevent excessive stress in the piping. Where vertical movement up to 1/8 inch is anticipated, a precompressed variable spring support shall be used. Rigid hangers shall be provided with a means of vertical adjustment after erection. Where horizontal piping movements are greater than 1/2 inch, or where the hanger rod angularity from vertical is greater than 4 degrees from hot to cold position of the pipe, the hanger pipe and structural attachments shall be offset in a manner that the rod is vertical in the hot position. Hangers and supports shall be spaced in accordance with ASME B31 and as indicated in this specification. Pipe supports shall be placed before and after a valve, expansion joint, or equipment so stress will not be transferred to them. Section 40 23 10-20 4463,004/City Contract No.994 4. CONTRACTOR shall provide calculations of pipe supports if requested by CONSULTANT. 5. All carbon steel parts shall be furnished with all surfaces (except galvanized or stainless steel) prepared in accordance with near white grade SSPC Specification No. 10 removing all dirt, rust scale, and foreign materials. Surface preparation of all carbon steel parts shall be performed at such time during the assembly process as to preclude damage to the equipment once installed and assembled. Cleaned surfaces shall then be shop-primed. Shop-priming shall be with one coat of Tnemec N69-1255 Hi-Build Epoxoline primer, Tnemec 140-1255 Beige Pota-Pox, or equal, applied to a minimum of 5.0 mils dry thickness. Primer used shall be compatible with proposed finish coats; CONTRACTOR shall verify. It is the intent of this specification that all equipment, supports, and appurtenances shall be furnished shop primed, clean, and ready to accept finish painting by CONTRACTOR with a minimal amount of surface preparation. Preparation and painting shall conform to all requirements and provisions specified in Division 09. 6. The following maximum spacings shall be provided for supports: MAXIMUM HORIZONTAL PIPE HANGER AND SUPPORT SPACING Copper Tubing PVC/CPVC Nominal Pipe Water Vapor or Ductile Iron Pipe or Service Air Service (See Note 1) (See Note 2) Tube Size ft ft ft ft 1/4 5 5 3/8 5 6 Continuous 1/2 5 6 Continuous 3/4 5 7 Continuous 1 6 8 4 1 1/4 7 9 4 1 1/2 8 10 4 2 8 10 4 2 1/2 9 10 4 3 10 10 4 4 10 10 10 4 5 10 10 10 4 6 10 10 10 9 8 10 10 10 9 10 10 10 10 10 12 10 10 10 10 Note 1: Provide at least one hanger per pipe length located as close to the flange or joint on barrel as possible. Note 2: Spacing is based on Schedule 80 at 100°F. For Schedule 40 or higher temperatures, provide shorter span. Consult local plumbing code and manufacturer's recommendations as required. Minimum spacing requirements shall govern. Section 40 23 10-21 4463.004/City Contract No.994 7. The length of hanger span and support spacing in the above table refers to straight lengths of pipe. When there are changes of direction in pipe, two supports shall be placed less than three-fourths the full span in the table. When practical, a hanger shall be located immediately adjacent to a change in direction of piping. Where there are concentrated loads between supports such as valves, spacing shall be based on load calculations rather than this table. 8. Provide saddles or shields under or around piping between hanger and supports for all insulated piping to prevent crushing of insulation. Provide stainless steel pipe shields under aeration stainless steel piping to prevent indentation of piping from the support or clamp. 9. Aeration piping greater than 6 feet off the floor shall be supported off the building by means of hangers and clamps or rollers. Clamps shall be Anvil Figure 295 for insulated �. pipe or Figure 216 for uninsulated pipe, B-line, or equal. Supports shall be spaced in accordance with ANSI B31.1. Aeration supports shall be designed for 250°F aeration piping temperature. 10. Spacing for stainless steel air piping supports shall be a maximum of 16 feet for 6-inch diameter and above piping. Pipe slides,Anvil Figure 257, Type 3, B-line, or equal, in stainless steel shall be used on pipe support brackets where movement due to pipe expansion is anticipated. Expansion joints shall be used to prevent excessive pipe stress. Clamps or supports in contact with the stainless steel piping or as indicated shall be stainless steel. 11. Anchored supports shall include a stainless steel U-bolt and nuts bolted to the wall bracket. 12. Aeration piping in tanks or channels shall be supported by stainless steel brackets. The brackets shall be Anvil Figure 199 No. 3, B-line, or equal, and shall have a load rating of 3,000 pounds minimum. Provide stainless steel anchor bolts. 13. Exposed piping shall run straight, in neat parallel lines, and shall be located far enough from walls, ceilings, and floors to permit access for covering of pipe and painting work. Care shall be taken in laying out piping so that there is no interference with the proper location of piping for other purposes or other equipment and shall be run with regard to the requirements of each service. 14. Piping shall not interfere with headroom or clear floor space. Unless otherwise shown, piping shall run exposed in buildings, except in finished areas. Unless otherwise shown, small water piping in finished areas shall be concealed in interior walls, above suspended ceilings, or under floors where possible. Water piping shall not be installed in exterior walls, unless otherwise shown or noted on the Drawings. Joints shall not be used under floor slabs. Unless otherwise shown, piping under floor slabs shall clear floor slabs or footings by a minimum of 6 inches. Pipes under floors shall have a minimum of 6 inches of sand cover. Plates shall be provided on all uncovered pipes passing through floors, walls, and ceilings constructed of materials other than poured concrete. Plates shall be on exposed sides and shall be chrome-plated, spring and snap type. 15. Except for flanged piping, an ample number of standard weight ground joint unions and a shutoff valve shall be provided in all pipelines and at all equipment. CONTRACTOR shall provide 3/8-inch tapped and plugged connections in suction and discharge of all pumps for testing. 16. The appropriate number, size, and lengths of spool pieces and flange fillers needed for -� plumbing and leveling any existing piping shall be included in the price bid. 17. All glass-lined, PVC, and stainless steel aeration piping shall be protected from dust and debris deposits on the inside of the pipe during storage and installation. Protection shall be by plastic film or coated paper banded over the pipe ends to be removed just prior to installation. Any foreign matter shall be removed from the pipe interior at the time of installation. Section 40 23 10-22 4463.004/City Contract No.994 18. On clear liquids and on lines carrying solids where neither side of the pipeline drains, the valve shall be positioned so that the seat end of the valve is downstream of the shutoff pressure. The highest pressure should always be on the back side of the plug, except for a valve installed in a vertical pipe. On sludge or slurry lines where one side of the line normally drains, it is preferential to install the seat end of the valve upstream so that the valve cavity drains empty. Where possible in horizontal pipelines, the valve shall be installed with the axis of the plug horizontal and the plug in the top of the valve when in the open position. In vertical pipelines carrying sludge or slurries, the seat end shall be at the top of the valve. Valve installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. 19. The locations and elevations of existing piping are approximate. Any changes in the pipe location or elevation shall be reviewed by CONSULTANT. 20. CONTRACTOR shall submit shop drawings showing new pipe routing and existing pipe removal. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for final pipe routing and shall route new piping as required to minimize conflicts. Piping shown on the Drawings is approximate only. Not all existing piping, conduit, equipment, etc., are shown on the Drawings. CONTRACTOR shall field-verify locations. CONTRACTOR shall reroute existing piping, conduit, etc., as indicated or as required to install new piping or equipment. CONTRACTOR shall remove and relocate existing pipe supports as required to install new piping. CONTRACTOR shall provide all piping, fittings, flange fillers, and other appurtenances as required to provide functional system at no additional cost to CITY. 21. All connections of pipes and fittings that contain hazardous or corrosive chemicals, except those adjacent to storage or feeder areas, shall have guards that will direct any leakage away from space occupied by workers. 22. Exposed pipes in all areas containing hazardous or corrosive chemicals that are located above shoulder level shall be provided with continuous drip collection trays and coupling guards that will eliminate the spraying or dripping of these chemicals onto workers. B. Wall and Other Pipe Penetrations: 1. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and place hangers, supports, wall pipes sleeves, and floor boxes in the forms before concrete is poured wherever needed or shown on the Drawings. 2. Where pipes pass through concrete members without wall fittings shown, CONTRACTOR shall provide sleeves in the forms for the piping, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. The sleeve diameter shall not exceed the pipe o.d. plus 2 inches (or the pipe flange o.d. plus 1 inch, as applicable), unless otherwise shown on Drawings. If the concrete members are to be watertight, the annular space around the pipe shall be sealed with a mechanical seal. Sleeves shall be steel unless noted otherwise and shall include minimum 1-inch waterstop. Steel sleeves shall be prepared, primed, and painted in accordance with Division 09 prior to placement in between concrete forms. Steel sleeves shall receive touch-up paint prior to placing forms. In lieu of steel sleeves, provide HDPE Infinity Wall Sleeves or Gal-vo-plast Wall Sleeves by A.P.S, or equal. Each sleeve shall include integral water stop. CONTRACTOR shall install sleeves in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and no sleeve distortion or deflection will be allowed. For copper pipe, provide an elastomeric sleeve on pipe where it passes through walls or slabs. 3. Where plain wall pipes are shown or indicated on the Drawings, CONTRACTOR may substitute a flanged end wall pipe, if desired, for the purposes of pressure testing specified herein. 4. Where pipe passes through nonwatertight walls, the annular space shall be grouted full. Where pipes pass through nonwatertight floors, the sleeve shall extend 1 inch above the finished floor elevation. The annular space shall remain open, except the annular Section 40 23 10-23 4463.004/City Contract No.994 space between a rated space (example—Class 1, Division 1, Group D hazardous location) and a nonrated space shall be sealed with a mechanical seal. 5. Where pipes pass through a roof, they shall be run through an approved roof penetration with flashing and counter flashing. 6. Where new pipes go through existing watertight concrete members, CONTRACTOR shall core a hole through the member, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. The annular space between the concrete and pipe shall be sealed with a mechanical seal. Where new pipes go through existing nonwatertight concrete or masonry members, holes shall be cored and annular space between the concrete and the pipe shall be grouted full (walls or floors at rated spaces) or remain open (floors at nonrated spaces). Prior to any coring, CONTRACTOR shall locate reinforcing steel in the member and shall consult with CONSULTANT to determine optimal location for the core. Plug abandoned pipes and wall pipes, after pipe and fittings removal flush to the concrete surface, with nonshrink grout, to achieve a watertight seal. 7. Where pipes pass through fire-rated walls, floors, ceilings, or other assemblies, the required firestopping materials shall be provided. Refer to Section 07 84 00— Firestopping for requirements. 8. Nonshrink grout shall be as specified in Division 03. 9. No chases or recesses shall be made in poured concrete for pipe installation, and no pipe shall run in poured concrete unless called for in the Drawings or specifications or permitted by CONSULTANT. The cutting or core drilling of concrete for pipe shall be avoided wherever possible, and in no case where such cutting or core drilling is necessary shall reinforcing rods be cut or disturbed without requesting the opinion of CONSULTANT. All openings for pipe work shall be neatly patched in a workmanlike manner. 10. Rough openings in wet well walls shall be provided to install force main discharge piping. Opening shall be minimum necessary to provide for nominal adjustments of pipe installation to eliminate the need for special flanges or sleeves in the wet well to allow for laying length adjustments. After piping is installed and properly supported, opening shall be filled with nonshrink grout formed to the wall surfaces. C. Cleaning and Disinfection: All equipment and materials shall be clean before installation. CONTRACTOR shall disinfect and flush the potable water system before it is put online. Water main shall be disinfected according to AWWA C651. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. CONTRACTOR shall include the cost of all testing, cleaning, and disinfection in the price Bid. B. All work shall be inspected, tested, and approved by the appropriate authorities and in accordance with federal, state, and local rules and regulations. All work shall also be tested as specified in this section. Unless indicated by CONSULTANT in writing before testing begins, all tests shall be witnessed by CONSULTANT and others as necessary. Test results shall be recorded, and reports or appropriate certificates shall be submitted to CONSULTANT in triplicate. C. All new piping shall be tested. All piping, interior or exposed, shall be subject to test before being covered with insulation or paint. All piping and appurtenances shall be watertight or airtight and free from visible leaks. Section 40 23 10-24 4463.004/City Contract No.994 D. All piping shall be flushed or blown out after installation and prior to testir g. CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary piping connections, water, air, test pumping equipment, water meter, bulkheads, valves, pressure gauge and other equipment, mate-ials, and facilities __ necessary to complete the specified tests. CONTRACTOR shall prar ide all temporary sectionalizing devices and vents for testing. E. Gauges used for testing shall have increments as follows: 1. Tests requiring a pressure of 10 psi or less shall use a testing gauge laving increments of 0.10 psi or less. 2. Tests requiring a pressure of greater than 10 psi but less than or equal to 100 psi shall use a testing gauge having increments of 1 psi or less. 3. Tests requiring a pressure of greater than 100 psi shall use a testing gauge having increments of 2 psi or less. F. Pressure Tests: The test pressure in all lines shall be held for one hour during which time the leakage allowance shall not exceed that specified. In case repairs are required, the pressure test shall be repeated until the pipeline installation conforms to the specified requirements. Pumps, air compressors, instrumentation, and similar equipment shall not be subjected to the pressure tests. All piping conveying a combination of fluids, such as PSD/TWAS, shall be tested at the higher test pressure. Fluid Minimum Leakage Abbreviation Test Pressure Test Allowance or Name in psi Medium Designation A 15, 25 Air "B"(2) CA 150 Air "A"(1) CNT, OF, PSM, SCM 10 Water "A" WAS 50 Water "A" BSL, DSL, TWAS 100 Water "A" PRC, PSD, W 1, W2, W3 150 Water "A" 1 Leakage allowance Designation "A" shall mean zero leakage 2 Leakage allowance Designation "B" shall mean a loss of p-essure of not more than 5% during the test period. G. See Section 22 13 16—Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping for testing of building drainage systems. H. Prior to making final connection between new and existing piping, new pip ng shall be tested — as specified above. I. Polyethylene encasement of cast iron drainage piping and appurteminces shall be in accordance with AWWA C105. Use Method A for pipe and Method C for'alves. Repair any rips or punctures prior to backfilling pipe. Section 40 23 10-25 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.05 DEMOLITION A. All interior piping removals, including appurtenances and abandonment, shall be by CONTRACTOR. The locations and elevations of existing piping are approximate. Any change in pipe location or elevation shall be reviewed by CONSULTANT. B. CONTRACTOR shall remove or abandon all existing piping and appurtenances as noted. Unless otherwise shown or specified, piping and appurtenances to be removed shall become the property of CONTRACTOR and shall be removed from the site for salvage or disposal. C. Valve boxes and exposed valves and operators on piping to be abandoned shall be removed. All concrete surfaces to remain shall be patched as required to provide a smooth surface. Repiping and connections to new piping shall be as specified for new piping. D. It is the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to remove piping and appurtenances, and patch all holes resulting therefrom unless specified or shown otherwise. The intent of these specifications is to require that the removal of materials, patching of all existing holes, and repiping be done in a workmanlike manner.All costs shall be included in the Lump Sum Bid. END OF SECTION Section 40 23 10-26 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 40 42 13 MECHANICAL INSULATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes insulation for all piping except plumbing and HVAC pip,ng as outlined in Section 21 07 19-Piping Insulation for Plumbing and Section 23 07 19-P ping Insulation for HVAC, and buried piping insulation as outlined in Section 33 07 19-Buriec Piping Insulation. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. All material, installation, and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references: 1. ASTM C168-Standard Terminology Relating to Thermal Insulation. 2. ASTM C272-Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of C )re Materials for - Sandwich Constructions. 3. ASTM C518-Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 4. ASTM C533-Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. 5. ASTM C547-Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. 6. ASTM C591-Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation. 7. ASTM C612-Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. 8. ASTM C1427-Standard Specification for Extruded Preformed Flexible Cellular Polyolefin Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form. 9. ASTM D1000-Standard Test Methods for Pressure-Sensitive Adhes ve-Coated Tapes Used for Electrical and Electronic Applications. 10. ASTM E84-Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 11. ASTM E96-Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 12. FED L-P-535E: Plastic Sheet (Sheeting): Plastic Strip: Poly(Vinyl Chloride) And Poly(Vinyl Chloride-Vinyl Acetate), Rigid. 13. NFPA 262-Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00-Submittals. B. Submit a schedule of all insulating materials to be used on the project, including adhesives, fastening methods, and fitting materials, along with material safety data sheets and intended use of each material. Include manufacturer's technical data sheets indicating density, thermal characteristics, jacket type, and manufacturer's installation instructions. -- Section 40 42 13-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Unless otherwise indicated, all pipe covering, jackets, insulation, vapor barriers, adhesives, and mastics shall have flame spread rating of 25 or less and smoke spread rating of 150 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. B. All pipe covering, jackets, insulation, vapor barriers, adhesive, and mastics within active return or supply air plenums shall have flame spread rating of 25 or less and smoke-developed rating of 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. C. CONTRACTOR shall not paint PVC jacketing. Where painted insulation transitions to PVC jacketing, CONTRACTOR shall coordinate colors with OWNER. Colors shall be in accordance with Section 40 05 53—Identification for Process Interconnections Piping and Equipment. D. All insulation and associated materials shall be free of asbestos. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 RIGID FORMED FIBERGLASS INSULATION A. Acceptable manufacturers are Owens Corning Fiberglas, Johns Manville Micro-Lok, or equal. B. Insulation shall be mineral fiber type conforming to ASTM C547, Type IV. C. Minimum nominal density shall be of 3.0 lbs/ft3. D. K-factor shall not exceed 0.23 (btu-in)/(hr-ft2-°F) at 75°F mean. E. Insulation shall be rated for service to 850°F. 2.02 ADHESIVES, MASTIC, SEALANTS, AND REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Products shall be compatible with surfaces and materials on which they are applied, and shall be suitable for use at operating temperatures of systems to which they are applied. B. Fiberglass Insulation Adhesive: Acceptable Manufacturers: Foster 85-60, Childers CP-127, and Duro Dyne SSG. 2.03 JACKETING A. PVC Jackets (PVJ): 1. PVC film, gloss finish one side, semi-gloss other side. 2. PVC film shall conform to FED L-P-535D, Composition A, Type II, Grade GU. 3. Jacket thickness shall be minimum 0.03 inches. Section 40 42 13-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.04 INSULATION INSERTS AND PIPE SHIELDS A. Acceptable manufacturers are B-Line, Pipe Shields, or Value Engineerec. Products. B. Construct inserts with calcium silicate or polyisocyanurate with minimum 140 psi compressive strength. Piping 12 inches and larger shall be supplemented with high density 600 psi structural calcium silicate insert. Provide 16 gauge galvanized steel shield, 12 inches long. Insert and shield shall include minimum 180 degree coverage on bottom supported piping and full 360 degree coverage on clamped piping. On roller mounted piping and piping designed to slide on support, provide additional load distribution steel plate. C. Where CONTRACTOR proposes shop/site fabricated inserts and shields, submit schedule _ of materials, thicknesses, gauges and lengths for each pipe size to demonstrate equivalency to pre-engineered/premanufactured product described above. On low temperature systems, high density rigid polyisocyanurate may be substituted for calcium silicate provided insert and shield length and shield gauge are increased to compensate for lower insulation compressive strength. D. Wood blocks will not be accepted. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. All products shall be compatible with surfaces and materials on which the, are applied, and be suitable for use at operating temperatures of the systems to which the are applied. B. Adhesives, sealants, and protective finishes shall be as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications specified. C. Insulation bands shall be 3/4 inch wide, constructed of aluminum or stainless steel. Minimum thickness shall be 0.015 inch for aluminum and 0.010 inch for stainless steel. D. Load distributing metal shields shall be constructed of aluminum or stainless steel. Minimum thickness shall be 0.015 inch for aluminum and 0.010 inch for stainless steel. E. Staples shall be clinch style. F. Tack fasteners shall be stainless steel ring grooved shank tacks. -� G. Joint sealants shall be non-shrinking and permanently flexible. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All insulation damaged during construction shall be replaced in accordance with these specifications. B. All insulation shall be applied in accordance with the manu-acturer's written recommendations. Destructive methods such as sheet metal screws are not acceptable. All pipe insulation shall be installed with joints butted firmly together. Section 40 42 13-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. All valves and fittings shall be insulated with mitered sections of insulation equal in density and thickness to adjoining insulation. D. Install insulation with smooth and even surfaces. Poorly fitted joints or use of filler in voids will not be accepted. Provide neatly beveled and coated terminations at all nameplates, uninsulated fittings, or at other locations where insulation terminates. E. All pipe insulation shall be continuous through walls, ceiling or floor openings and through sleeves except where firestop or firesafing materials are required. F. All uninsulated penetrations through the insulation system shall be insulated along their length to a minimum distance of four times the insulation thickness. To prevent moisture migration behind the insulation, these penetrations shall be sealed with a sealant as recommended by the manufacturer and flashed to shed water. 3.02 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. For each pipe hanger, provide a hanger block on the bottom half of the pipe in place of the insulation. B. Pipe hangers and supports shall be sized large enough to be installed over the outer surface of the insulation. C. Load distributing metal shields shall be installed around the lower one-third circumference of the insulation and jacket. D. Blocks and shields shall be provided at all supports regardless of orientation, except inserts may be omitted on 3/4 inch and smaller copper piping provided 12-inch long 22 gauge pipe shields are used. 3.03 RIGID FORMED FIBERGLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Provide finished edges at all valves and ends of insulation. B. Provide additional insulation trim pieces over flanged joints to completely insulate and seal to the thickness specified. C. All pipe insulation shall be installed with joints butted firmly together. All valves and fittings shall be insulated with mitered sections of insulation equal in density and thickness to adjoining insulation or with "Zeston"-type, premolded PVC fittings installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. All insulation ends shall be tapered and sealed regardless of service. D. For each pipe hanger, provide a half-round, 12-inch-long hanger block at the bottom half of -- the pipe in place of the fiberglass insulation. The blocks shall be molded foam glass insulation. 3.04 PROTECTIVE JACKET INSTALLATION A. PVC Fitting Covers and Jackets (PVJ): Lap seams and joints a minimum of 2 inches and continuously seal PVC with welding solvent recommended by jacket manufacturer. Lap slip joint ends 4 inches without fasteners where required to absorb expansion and contraction. Section 40 42 13-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 For sections where vapor retarding jacket is not required and jacket requires routine removal, tack fasteners may be used. Secure PVC fitting covers with tack fasteners. For systems requiring a vapor retarding jacket, apply a 1 1/2-inch band of mastic over ends, throat, seams and penetrations. B. Vapor Barriers: On systems operating at 50°F and above, pipe insulation jackets may be — stapled using outward clinch staples spaced 3 inches apart at least 1/4 inch in from the lap edge. Mastics used shall be "breather" type allowing passage of water vapor. 3.05 ABOVE GRADE PIPING INSULATION A. Provide insulation on new piping as indicated in the schedule below. "Process Piping" shall be defined as piping conveying: Interior Air Piping. INSULATION THICK1JESS BY PIPE SIZE 1"to 1-1/2" 4" to 8" a n d SERVICE INSULATION JACKET < 1" < 1 1/2" to <4" < 8" Larger Interior Process Piping with Rigid Formed PVJ 1.5" 1.5" 2" 2" Heated/Conditioned Contents Fiberglass END OF SECTION -- Section 40 42 13-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 40 70 00 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION EQUIPMENT PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Controls and instrumentation equipment provided with equipment in Division 46. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL labels: All electrical equipment and material shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories, except where UL does not include the equipment in their listing procedures. Electrical equipment shall include, but not be limited to, control panels, power supplies, controllers, relays, wire, selector switches, pilot lights, overcurrent devices, and connectors. Control panels shall bear a serialized UL label indicating that it is UL approved as an assembled unit. Panels which have individual components which are UL labeled, but do not have UL approval as an assembled unit are not acceptable. B. NEMA/ANSI Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Manufacturer's Association, American National Standards Institute and other standards pertaining to material, construction and testing, where applicable. C. Code Compliance: Comply with the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) and any and all local codes as applicable to construction of electrical wiring devices, material, and equipment herein specified. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's data, specifications, and installation recommendations for each item specified herein. B. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. C. Provide product data on all equipment and devices specified herein, as well as wiring schematics for all systems. D. Provide load calculations showing battery runtimes and UPS sizing including all equipment specified herein. 1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Include spare parts data listing, source, and current prices of replacement parts and supplies, and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. Section 40 70 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store in a clean dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas — or heavy plastic cover to protect equipment from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. B. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only „vith lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to equipment components, enclosure, and finish. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES A. New enclosures shall be front access only, minimum No. 12 gauge steel, hinged doors, rotating, lockable handle, three-point latch on each equipment compartment door (not screws or bolts), with top and bottom bolts actuated by one rotating handle on large doors. Quick-opening hasps may be substituted for rotating, lockable handle latch where approved by CONSULTANT. Panels shall include door stop kit, data pockets for panel wiring diagrams, and minimum 18-inch, bolt-on, LED light and door switch. Panels shall include nonfused main disconnect with interlock to prevent opening the panel with switch in "On" position. A defeater shall be provided to bypass this interlock, with handle lockable in "Off" position. Painting shall include phosphate treatment, zinc chromate iron oxide primer, baked rust-inhibiting enamel, and CITY-selected exterior color. All doors and panels shall be gasketed, and panels installed outdoors or nonconditioned spaces shall be insulated. Enclosures shall be as manufactured by Hoffman or Saginaw. Enclosure rating shall be as follows, unless noted otherwise on the drawings, or in the associated spe:'jfication section. 1. Indoor and/or dry locations: NEMA 12. 2. Corrosive and/or damp locations, including chemical rooms, and >utdoor locations: NEMA 4X stainless steel. B. Where necessary for the installed conditions, including direct sunlight or high-temperature environments, control panels shall be provided with louvers and filtered forced-air cooling as required to maintain internal ambient air temperatures 10°F below the rated operating temperature of all internal control panel equipment. Where the installed cooling system does not adequately maintain ambient air temperatures inside the control panel. additional cooling equipment shall be provided by the supplier at no cost to CITY. C. The equipment mounted within the enclosures shall be mounted on the enclosure back panel, neatly organized, and shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. For panels requiring a NEMA 4X enclosure, indicating and control devices shall be mounted on a swing-out inner door. 1. All wiring within control panels shall be insulation-type MTW, minimum size 16 AWG. Wiring within the enclosure shall be routed through plastic wiring troughs with removable covers. Maximum fill for wiring troughs shall be 60%. Terminal blocks located adjacent to wiring troughs shall have a minimum of 1 1/2 inches between terminal block and trough. All wiring in control panels not in wiring troughs shall be bound with continuous-type spiral windings. 2. All I/O devices shall be wired to DIN rail-mounted terminal blocks. 3. Field wiring in dry locations shall be insulation-type THHN, minimum size 14 AWG. Field wiring in damp or wet locations shall be insulation type XHHW•2, minimum size -- 14 AWG. All field wiring shall terminate at rail-mounted terminal blocks. Field wiring terminals shall be clearly identified as to which I/O terminals they are wired. Section 40 70 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 4. Jumpers between adjacent terminal blocks shall be copper jumper bars supplied by the terminal block manufacturer. 5. All panels with DIN rail-mounted equipment shall include a minimum of 25% spare DIN rail space. 6. In addition to spare I/O specified herein, provide a minimum of 25% spare hot and neutral terminals, wired to terminal strips. Spare terminals shall be provided for all-voltage sources within the panel (e.g., 120 V, 24 V). D. Tubing and instruments containing water shall be in separate compartments, located and constructed so that leakage or spray at 100 psi pressure cannot touch electrical conductors or devices. Leakage shall be conducted to the floor in duct or pipe. E. All wiring for new panels shall be done in the factory, Class II, Type C with master terminal strips for exterior connections. Terminal blocks shall be mounted either at the bottom or on the side of the enclosure, depending where the I/O conduits penetrate the enclosure. Splices are not allowed within enclosures or wireways. All enclosures must pass through doors to point of installation, and if enclosures are shipped in sections, all wiring and connections between sections shall be done by CONTRACTOR. All wiring shall be labeled at each end with corresponding numbers. This numbering shall be shown on the shop and record drawings. F. All door-mounted devices shall be furnished flush-mounted, and an exterior engraved phenolic nameplate worded by the manufacturer and reviewed by CITY (upon receipt of shop drawings) shall be provided for each compartment, device, light, etc. All components within the enclosures shall be identified with interior-mounted engraved labels. Labels shall be installed on the enclosure back panel and not on the device or wireway. Devices shall be grouped for each device or unit being controlled. G. Equipment enclosures that include motor controllers shall have a main disconnect for the enclosure. H. Manufacturer of Accessories: 1. The plastic wiring duct shall be Electrovert "Electro-Duct," Panduit, or equal. 2. Terminal blocks shall meet the requirements of Section 26 05 19—Wire. 3. Circuit breakers shall be Square D Type QO with mounting bases, or equal. Circuit breakers can be rail-mounted type, Square D, Class 9080, Type GCB-150, or equal. 4. Power supplies shall be Sola, DIN rail mount, SPD or SDN Series, or equal. 5. Signal conditioners shall be Action Instruments, DIN rail mount, or equal. 2.02 COMMON REQUIREMENTS ALL EQUIPMENT A. All indicating and recording devices shall be electric or electronic. B. Power supplies shall be protected against short circuits and contain their own overcurrent and overvoltage protection. Twelve and 24 Vdc power supplies shall be provided and installed in the enclosures for powering all analog input signals where required. C. All motor control power shall be 120-volt with suitable circuit protection fuses or breakers. Fuse holders shall be provided with integral LEDs to indicate when the fuse is blown. D. Devices powered at 120 volts from control panels shall be fused. This shall include, but not be limited to, solenoid valves, motor-operated valves, motorized ball valves, flow meters, scales, and transducers. Section 40 70 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 E. Provide lightning protection, isolation transformers, and fused disconnei.ts at each end of each power circuit, supervisory circuit, and local supervisory circuit with transformers and relays, if necessary, to obtain supervisory power. Lightning protection s iall be completely solid-state and self-healing and not require the use of fuses. Lightning prc:ection shall be as manufactured by Citel, Model DS240, or equal. Surge protection shall be provided for all phases and neutral. F. Each panel shall have a GFI, duplex, 20-ampere, 120-volt receptacle. G. Control panels that include programmable or electronic controllers (e.g., PLCs) shall be provided with a 120-volt AC true on-line UPS backup that will provide continuous operation for at least 30 minutes following a power failure. 1. UPS power shall be provided, at a minimum, to the following equipment: a. PLCs and I/O cards, controllers, and OlPs. b. Network switches, signal converters, and other communication de vices. c. Power fail and communication indicating lights and alarm device: d. Power supplies for loop-powered instruments. e. Intrinsic safety barriers. 2. The UPS shall be plug connected inside the control panel with a dedicated receptacle and overcurrent protection device. All UPS-powered devices shall be continuously powered through the UPS under normal operating conditions. Provide relays to automatically bypass the UPS when the UPS output rises 110% above or falls 80% below the nominal supply voltage (e.g., line-side plug disconnected, upstream overcurrent device opened, etc.). 3. Each UPS shall be provided with a relay card that provides a dry contact output to the programmable or electronic controller to activate an alarm in the e'.ent that the UPS batteries need replacement. 4. UPS shall be APC with relay I/O module, Liebert GXT4 with relay cc rd, or Eaton 9SX. Provide a stand or shelf within each control panel for the UPS so that the UPS does not sit on the bottom of the enclosure. H. Where PLCs or Operator Interface Panels (OIPs) are installed in control panels, two copies of all programs with associated passwords shall be turned over to CITY et final completion. Copies shall be electronic compact disk. I. If enclosure and panel space is needed for future installation of devices, lights, etc., the enclosure and panel shall be constructed for such installation. Supports shall be provided for future equipment, and panel openings shall be made and covered with neat cover plates matching the panel. J. Indoor control panels that include PLCs shall have an exterior panel-mounted receptacle and programming port mounted to the front of the panel, as applicable to the installation. Receptacle and programming port shall be provided to allow for PLC programming via laptop without opening the panel door. Programming port shall match that of the network being installed (e.g., Ethernet, data highway, etc.). K. CONTRACTOR shall furnish one complete extra set of fuses and simila- parts which may need replacement in normal service and an identification list of all corn ponent parts and where they may be obtained for operating the system for 3 years from start-up. L. Where a certain accuracy of sensing and transmitting levels or flout s and controlling - operations are called for, means must be provided to read or determine that the levels or flows are within the limits or accuracy specified of the sensing, transmitting, and controlling devices. Where no accuracy is specified, but a knowledge of levels is necessary to set Section 40 70 00-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 operating points, an indicating device of accuracy consistent with the operation of the system is required. M. All internal wiring shall be color-coded and numbered, and each wire shall be terminated on terminal blocks. Schematic and wiring layout drawings complying with Section 26 09 10—Controls and Instrumentation Drawings which show all connections to -' external devices, a complete bill of materials, interior and exterior panel layouts, and a detailed description of operation, shall be submitted for each control panel. N. Each analog signal entering or leaving a control panel and leaving a building shall be provided with a surge protection device as manufactured by Citel, Model DLA-24D3, or equal. Each transmitter shall be provided with a surge protection device as manufactured by Citel, Model TSP15M on the output and Citel, Model No. DS240 on the power supply, or equal. O. An anti-condensation heater shall be provided in all control panels located outdoors. The anti-condensation heater shall be as manufactured by Hoffman, Model D-AH, X000 Series, sized as required. P. The "Hand" mode for all "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switches shall be hard-wired directly to the associated motor starter completely bypassing any PLC or controller. 2.03 CONTROL PANEL DEVICES A. All control panel devices shall comply with Section 26 09 00—Controls and Instrumentation. B. Manual, magnetic motor starters, Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs), and motor control devices shall comply with Section 26 24 19—Motor Control. C. Overcurrent protection and disconnecting means for equipment shall be provided as specified in the specification section for the associated equipment. Molded case thermal magnetic circuit breakers shall include integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Motor controllers shall include molded case circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Nonfusible switch assemblies shall consist of quick-make, quick-break load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. D. Push buttons: NEMA ICS 2; heavy-duty, oiltight (30 mm) as shown on the drawings. Pushbuttons in exposed, outdoor locations shall be rated NEMA 4X. E. Indicating Lights: NEMA ICS 2; heavy-duty, oiltight (30 mm), LED, push-to-test type as shown on the drawings. Indicating lights in exposed, outdoor locations shall be rated NEMA 4X. F. Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2; heavy-duty, oiltight, (30 mm) as shown on the drawings. Selector switches in exposed, outdoor locations shall be rated NEMA 4X. G. Timing Relays: UL Listed with On and Timing Out LEDs. H. Contactors: All contactors for starters specified herein shall be NEMA rated. IEC contactors are not allowed. Contactors shall be Allen-Bradley, Bulletin 509, or equal. I. Elapsed Time Meters: Redington/Engler 722 series, 3 inches round, flush door mounted, capable of reading up to 99,999.9 hours, nonreset type. Section 40 70 00-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 J. Control Power Transformers: 240/120-volt secondary. Each motor st 3rter shall have a dedicated control power transformer. K. Industrial control and power relays shall be installed in control panels where required by System Supplier. Relays used to interface with PLC I/O, motor control circuits, hard-wired control logic, and for loads less than 8 amps shall be terminal style, interposing/isolation relays. Relays for inductive loads, alarm lights, alarm horns, field wiring, or loads up to 15 amps shall be industrial, general purpose square base relays. Relays for monitoring the output voltage of uninterruptable power supplies shall be UPS voltage monitoring relays. Contactors for motor power control shall be industrial, electrically-held power contactors. L. Relays shall meet the following requirements: 1. Interposing/isolation relays: a. Configuration: SPDT or DPDT as required by System Supplier. b. Mounting: DIN rail with screw terminal base socket. c. Voltage: 120 Vac, or as required by System Supplier. d. Contact rating: 8 A(DPDT), 16 A(SPDT). e. Operating life: 10 million cycles. - f. Status: On-Off flag-type or LED indicator. g. UL listed. h. Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley, 700-HK, or equal. 2. General purpose relays: a. Configuration: DPDT or 3PDT as required by System Supplier. b. Mounting: DIN rail with screw terminal base socket. c. Voltage: 120 Vac. d. Contact rating: 15 A, minimum; 3/4 hp. e. Operating life: 10 million cycles. f. Status: On-Off flag-type or LED indicator. g. UL listed. h. Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley, 700-HB, or equal. 3. UPS voltage monitoring relays: a. Configuration: SPOT. b. Mounting: DIN rail. c. Voltage: 120 Vac. d. Contact rating: 15 A. e. Operating life: 10 million cycles. f. Over-voltage range: 80 to 150 Vac, adjustable. g. Under-voltage range: 30 to 95% of pickup, adjustable. h. Drop-out time delay: 0.1 to 10 seconds, adjustable. i. UL listed. _ j. Manufacturer: Macromatic, VWKE120A, or equal. 4. Power contactors: a. Configuration: Electrically-held, 3 poles. b. Mounting: DIN rail. c. Voltage: 120 Vac. d. Minimum contact rating: 20 A continuous, 1 hp. e. Operating life: 1.3 million cycles. -- f. UL listed. g. NEMA rated. h. Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley, Bulletin 300, or equal. Section 40 70 00-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 M. Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs) and managed network switches shall comply with Section 26 09 00—Controls and Instrumentation. PLCs shall be by the same manufacturer and match the communication protocol (e.g., Ethernet/IP) provided under Section 26 09 00— Controls and Instrumentation. Network switches shall be by the same manufacturer and be compatible with communication features (e.g., self-healing ring) provided under Section 26 09 00—Controls and Instrumentation. Coordinate requirements with the Section 26 09 00 System Supplier. 2.04 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS A. Wire and cable markers shall be permanently-attached, heat-shrink type labels. 1. Sleeve: Permanent, PVC, white, with legible machine-printed black markings. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Raychem Model D-SCE or ZH-SCE, Brady Model 3PS, or equal. 3. Grounding Conductor: Provide green wire marker; minimum 2 inches wide. B. Wire or cable numbering preprinted on the conductor or cable insulation, flag-type labels, and individual wraparound numbers (such as Brady preprinted markers) are not acceptable. All wire markers shall be the same throughout the project. PART 3—EXECUTION -' 3.01 GENERAL A. Refer to requirements specified in Division 01 for equipment installation, quality control, testing, supervision, start-up, and operator training. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. All control panels and equipment enclosures shall be cleaned of debris and wires neatly arranged with surplus length cutoff. Spare wires shall be labeled as "spare" and where the wires terminate. B. Where louvers are provided in enclosures or control panels, louvers shall be vacuumed free of all dust and dirt. Where air filters are provided in enclosures or control panels, all filters shall be replaced with new at the time of final completion. C. Equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned of all stains, paint spots, dirt, and dust.All temporary labels not used for instruction or operation shall be removed. D. All electrical equipment shall be provided with factory-applied prime finish, unless otherwise specified. If the factory finish on any equipment furnished by CONTRACTOR is damaged in shipment during construction, the equipment shall be refinished by CONTRACTOR. One can of touch-up paint shall be provided for each different color factory finish that is to be the final finished surface of the product. 3.03 WIRE IDENTIFICATION A. Conductors shall be grouped as to circuits and arranged in a neat manner. Phase identification shall be consistent throughout the system. All wiring labels shall be able to be read without removing wire management (i.e., wiring trough covers, spiral windings, etc.) or twisting the wire/cable. Section 40 70 00-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Power Conductor Insulation Color Code: 1. 6 AWG and Larger: Provide general-purpose, flame-retardant, permanent tape at each termination. 2. 8 AWG and Smaller: Provide conductors with color-coded insulation 3. Colors: System Conductor Color All Systems Equipment Grounding Green 120/240 Volts Grounded Neutral White* Single-Phase, Three Wire One Hot Leg Black Other Hot Leg Red 120/208 Volts Grounded Neutral White* Three-Phase, Four Wire Phase A Black Phase B Red Phase C Blue 277/480 Volts Grounded Neutral White* Three-Phase, Four Wire Phase A Brown Phase B Orange Phase C Yellow Note: Phase A, B, C implies direction of positive phase rotation. *When installed as part of a 120-volt or 277-volt branch circuit, provice a color-coded stripe on the white neutral conductor insulation matching the branch circuit insulation. C. Control Panel Control Conductor Insulation Color Code: 1. All conductors shall have color-coded insulation. 2. Colors: System Conductor Color Supply Voltage Ungrounded Circuit Conductors Black Neutral White Discrete 120-volt AC Control Circuit Conductor Red Input/Output Neutral White Discrete 12/24-volt DC Control Circuit Conductor Blue Input/Output Common White with Blue Stripe Conductors energized Control Circuit Conductor Orange when the main disconnect AC Neutral White is in the "off' position (e.g. DC Common White with Blue Stripe foreign supply voltages) Ground Green Intrinsically Safe Control Circuit Conductor Light Blue DC Common White with Two Light Blue Stripes D. Circuit Identification: 1. Identify power, instrumentation, and control conductors at each termilation. 2. Conductors fed from remote panelboard circuits shall identify circuit rr atching the circuit directory designations, including the neutral conductor. 3. Control conductor identification shall match the associated terminal bock label. E. Data/Voice Cable and Communication Equipment Identification: All comp nunication cables shall be labeled on both ends. Section 40 70 00-8 4463.004/City Contract No.994 F. Terminal Block Identification: 1. Terminal blocks shall be labeled on both sides of each terminal block. Terminal block numbering shall match the numbers shown on the project-specific wiring diagrams. 2. Fused terminal blocks labels shall be located on top of the terminal blocks and include the fuse voltage and amperage rating. G. Labeling Font Requirements: 1. The font for all conductor, cable, and device labels shall be Arial with black characters on white background, and minimum font size 12. 2. The text for all conductor, cable, and device labels shall be machine printed. Handwritten labels are not acceptable. 3.04 SYSTEM START-UP AND SUPPORT SERVICES A. On-Site Functional Acceptance Testing: 1. After all equipment has been installed and is placed in full-time operation or after all equipment associated with the group of equipment scheduled for on-site functional acceptance testing has been installed and placed in full-time operation, CONTRACTOR and manufacturer shall demonstrate that all equipment and controls operate in compliance with the Contract Documents. For each piece of equipment being tested, all systems associated with the operation of the equipment (e.g., controls, supply/discharge piping, etc.) shall be installed and be in full operating condition so that all equipment functions are able to be completely tested without delay using real-time process I/O. 2. All control wiring, hardwired interlocks, OIP screens, control programming, etc., shall be checked out and functionally tested by manufacturer prior to CONSULTANT's on-site functional acceptance testing. All functional errors shall be corrected prior to CONSULTANT's on-site functional acceptance testing. 3. CONTRACTOR shall submit updated versions of all OIP screens developed by this System Supplier and OIP screens provided by Division 46 to CONSULTANT for review at least 1 month prior to the functional acceptance testing of equipment controlled through the associated OIP screens. 4. After being notified by CONTRACTOR that the equipment has been installed and is in full operating condition and ready for CONSULTANT's functional acceptance testing, CONSULTANT will make one 3-day trip to check operation. CONTRACTOR and System Supplier shall be on-site during testing to adjust equipment, correct erroneous wiring, and make modifications to control system and OIP programming, as necessary. If the equipment and controls do not operate according to the Contract Documents, or if CONTRACTOR and System Supplier are not present during the scheduled testing, there will be deducted from payments due to CONTRACTOR the amount of $1,500 a day for CONSULTANT's time plus travel and expenses, and for all additional field and office time spent by CONSULTANT checking equipment. CITY will deduct the amount of these charges from payments made to CONTRACTOR. 5. System Supplier shall provide functional acceptance testing support through one or more on-site field service engineers and the project control system programmer. Time for the on-site field service engineers and programmer scheduled for functional acceptance testing shall be dedicated to the functional acceptance testing process and shall not be interrupted for other construction-related activities. Section 40 70 00-9 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Final acceptance and payment for panels that include programmable controllers will not be made until the system has operated satisfactorily for a minimum of 30 consecutive days. Manufacturer shall include in Bid field follow-up to ensure proper adjustments and operation — during the first year following project final completion. Prior to beginning the 30-day test, the following criteria shall be met: 1. Satisfactory operation of I/O control loops. 2. Satisfactory operation of software. 3. Satisfactory operation of control program. 4. Satisfactory operation of peripheral equipment. 5. The necessary debugging programs have been performed. 6. Data output is reliable. 7. Control loops are operational. 8. Checking and calibrating of systems have been completed. C. System Supplier shall provide the following support services: 1. Field Service Engineer: Field Service Engineer shall be responsible for programming of system PLCs in the factory and at the site. Field Service Engineer shall be present for start-up of all systems and available throughout the entire construction process until final completion. Service technicians sent for system start-up will not be acceptable. Support shall include on-site time. Services shall include, but not be limited to: a. Commissioning, installation, start-up, and testing of equipment. b. Revising or rewriting manuals to incorporate an installed and accepted system. c. On-site training. d. Software modifications. 2. In-Factory support shall include consultation following the acceptance testing and shipment. Services shall include, but not be limited to: a. Researching and answering questions related to the system operation, documentation, and system use and functions. b. Program modifications. c. Revising or rewriting manuals. 3. Post start-up support shall include follow-up services during the 1-year period following final acceptance. Service shall include follow-up recalibration and replacement of defective equipment, as well as additional training, software modifications, and control configurations as requested by CITY. Enhancement hours and associated trips to the site shall be as specified in the individual specification sections. 3.05 GENERAL OPERATOR INTERFACE GRAPHICS STANDARDS A. The OIP graphics configuration shall follow a situational-awareness theme that avoids the excessive use of color for process screen backgrounds, menus, borders, headers, buttons, equipment symbols, and text displays. Equipment symbols shall adhere to a specific color code for indication of equipment status and alarms. Avoid non-animating colors on equipment graphics. Main process graphic and popups screens shall use a light gray background color. Simulated facility graphics, environments, and three-dimensional layouts shall not be included on the backgrounds. Piping shall be represented :-)y thin, solid-gray lines and shall not include contour shading. Process structures an tanks shall be represented using simple shapes (e.g., squares, rectangles, circles, (-lc.) and process equipment should be represented by simple, equipment-specific shapes (i.e., no gradients or shading). 1. Equipment: a. Light gray shall be used to indicate that the equipment is not operating or running and has been disabled from automatic operation. Section 40 70 00-10 4463.004/City Contract No.994 b. Yellow shall be used to indicate that the equipment is not running or operating, but is in an automatic control state and ready to operate once the operating conditions are met. c. Orange shall be used to indicate that the equipment is called to run, but is not yet running. d. Green shall be used to indicate that the equipment is running or operating in the forward direction. e. Blue shall be used to indicate that the equipment is running or operating in the reverse direction. f. Red shall be used to indicate failure conditions for equipment and signals. 2. Valves: a. Light gray shall be used to indicate that the valve is closed. b. Green shall be used to indicate that the valve is open. c. Red shall be used to indicate a valve actuator fault or a valve out of position alarm. B. In addition to the color code for equipment statuses, text indicating when equipment is "Running" or "Not Running" and when equipment is "In Auto" or "Not In Auto" shall be displayed next to the equipment using blue text for indication that the text is dynamic. Blue shall be reserved only for dynamic text, excluding the analog process variables described below. C. Analog process variable displays shall use black text inside of a thin, dark gray border with light gray background. The text shall animate to white and the background shall animate to red during an alarm condition for the associated process variable (e.g., high level, low level, transmitter fail, etc.), and shall remain in that state until the alarm condition is cleared. �- D. Setpoints entry boxes be sized similar to the analog process value displays, but shall instead use a thicker border. The background color for setpoint entry boxes shall be light green for process control and system setpoints and shall be light red for alarm setpoints. E. Text size and font requirements: 1. Font shall be Segoe UI Bold or Arial Bold. 2. Text for general labels on process screens and menus shall be size 12. 3. Text for value displays shall be size 14. 4. Text for process graphic titles and menu titles may be sized as needed by the software developer, minimum size 16. END OF SECTION Section 40 70 00-11 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 41 12 13 SHAFTLESS SCREW CONVEYORS PART 1—GENERAL 1 .01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: This section includes furnishing, installing, and placing into successful operation biosolids conveyors (M-14-15-1 through M-14-15-9) in the Dewatering Building (Structure 330). The conveyors, platforms, and associated access walkways, stairs, and appurtenances shall be furnished by the same supplier. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 sr:all govern work in this section. C. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate biosolids conveyors with Section 41 71 36—Centrifuge Dewatering Equipment, including biosolids conveyor inlet chutes, w th the centrifuge discharge chutes for conveyors M-14-15-1 and M-14-15-2. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design and Performance Requirements: 1. The material to be handled is dewatered anaerobically digested biosolids discharged from either the chutes of a centrifuge or a discharge hopper of a belt filter press. 2. Biosolids from the discharge chute of Centrifuge No. 1 will be fed into the "U" trough of the shaftless conveyor (M-14-15-1). The dewatered biosolids will then be discharged into Biosolids Conveyor No. 5 (M-14-15-5). 3. Biosolids from the discharge chute of Centrifuge No. 2 will be fed into the "U" trough of the shaftless conveyor (M-14-15-2). The dewatered biosolids will then be discharged into Biosolids Conveyor No. 5 (M-14-15-5). 4. Biosolids from the discharge chute of the belt filter press will be fed into the "U" trough of the shaftless conveyor (M-14-15-3). The dewatered biosolids will tF en be discharged into Biosolids Conveyor No. 4 (M-14-15-4), which will then be discharge into Biosolids Conveyor No. 5 (M-14-15-5). 5. From Biosolids Conveyor No. 5 (M-14-15-5), biosolids will be transferred to inclining Biosolids Conveyor No. 6 (M-14-15-6). From Biosolids Conveyor No. 6, the solids will be transferred to Biosolids Conveyor No. 7 (M-14-15-7) and from Biosolids Conveyor No. 7 (M-14-15-7) to truck loading conveyors M-14-15-8 or M-14-15-9 or discharged to the biosolids storage area. 6. For Bid Alternative No. 1, M-14-15-7 would discharge to truck loading conveyors M-14-15-8 or M-14-15-9 only. 7. The conveyors shall each be designed for the following capacities. Conveyors M-14-15-1 and M-14-15-2 shall each be designed for 3,600 lbs/hr dry solids at 25% to 28% solids in dewatered biosolids. Conveyors M-14-15-3 and M-14-15-4 shall each be designed for 1,500 lbs/hr dry solids at 13% to 15% total solids in dewatered biosolids. Conveyors M-14-15-5 through M-14-15-7 shall each be designed for 8,700 lb/hr dry solids at 13% to 28% total solids in dewatered biosolids. Conveyors M-14-15-8 and M-14-15-9 shall each be designed for 14,400 lb/hr dry solids at 13% to 28% to solids in dewatered biosolids. 8. The equipment shall be capable of continuous operation, 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. Section 41 12 13-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 9. The conveyors shall be capable of emptying the troughs in less than 10 minutes. 10. The conveyor system shall be suitable for continuous or intermittent operation, automatically over the whole range of biosolids loading. 11. Conveyor system shall provide a sealed dewatered biosolids transfer system from each centrifuge or belt filter press to the truck loading slide gates. 12. Spiral shall be designed fora minimum of 25,000 operating hours. 13. Mechanical seal of drive shaft shall be designed for 5,000 operating hours without shaft wear or leakage. 14. The conveyors shall be capable of start-up under 100% load, both inclined and horizontal. 15. Total spiral elongation shall be a maximum of 0.04 inches per foot, verified by calculation. 16. The conveyors shall be able to lift the sludge to the elevation required without jamming, leaking, or overloading. 17. The shaftless screw conveyor system shall be designed to meet the following minimum performance and design requirements. M-14-15-1 and Conveyor M-14-15-2 M-14-15-3 M-14-15-4 M-14-15-5 M-14-15-6 M-14-15-7 M-14-15-8 M-14-15-9 Cubic ft per Hour 250 180 180 180-680 180-680 180-680 180-875 180-875 Material Dewatered Dewatered Dewatered Dewatered Dewatered Dewatered Dewatered Dewatered Sludge Sludge Sludge Sludge Sludge Sludge Sludge Sludge Material Density, 66.0 64.0 64.0 66.0 66.0 66.0 66.0 66.0 lb/cf Percent Solids 25%-28% 13%-15% 13%-15% 20%-28% 20%-28% 20%-28% 20%-28% 20%-28% Length As shown As shown As shown As shown As shown As shown* As shown As shown Angle Incline 5° Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Incline 25° Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Max Screw 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Speed, RPM Max Trough Fill 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% Min Flight OD, 12 10 10 16 16 16 18 18 inches Min Spiral Weight, 22.5 22.5 22.5 30.1 30.1 30.1 37.1 37.1 lb/ft Minimum Trough 13-inch 10-inch 10-inch 17-inch 17-inch 17-inch 19-inch 19-inch Width Drive Location Discharge Inlet Inlet Inlet Discharge Inlet Inlet Inlet Reversing Screw Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes * Note: Length of M-14-15-7 is dependent on selection of Bid Alternative No.1. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for motors associated with equipment specified in this section shall include data �. sheets from the motor manufacturer. Data sheets from the equipment manufacturer or supplier are not acceptable. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substantial Completion of the project. Section 41 12 13-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The shaftless screw conveyors shall be Custom Conveyor Corporation of Rogers, Minnesota; JDV Equipment of Dover, New Jersey; Spirac Conveying Techlology of Newnan, Georgia; or equal. This listed equipment is part of the Base Bid as indicated on the Bid pages and will be considered as establishing the type, function, appearance, and quality required, as defined in the General Conditions. B. The drawings and specifications were prepared based on JDV Equipmert. CONTRACTOR shall include in the Bid and shall be responsible for the cost of any changes, including engineering changes, to accommodate the other Base Bid equipment including but not limited to structural, mechanical, and electrical work. C. CONTRACTOR may provide Alternative Bids for equipment from other manufacturers by writing their name into the blank(s) provided on the Bid form. CONTRACTOR shall comply with all provisions regarding substitute items and shall include in the Bid end be responsible for the cost of any changes to accommodate substitute equipment including, but not limited to, structural, mechanical, and electrical work. CONTRACTOR shall also pay costs of engineering services for review of substitutes and for revisions of drawings and/or specifications by CONSULTANT to accommodate substitutes. 2.02 SHAFTLESS SCREW CONVEYOR A. Horizontal and Inclined Troughs: 1. Troughs shall be similar to the dimensional standards of CEMA 300 and enclosure classification IIE. Each conveyor trough shall be U-shaped, fabricated from a minimum 1/8-inch stainless steel plate. 2. Stiffeners shall be placed across the top of the trough and fastened to both sides of the trough to maintain trough shape and act as a face seal for the covers; apply a continuous gasket, 1/2-inch width, to the entire top face of the trough top flange and stiffeners, and provide a water and odor tight system. 3. Each trough shall be equipped with filling and/or discharge opening& as shown on the drawings. Each filling and discharge opening shall be flanged for ,nterconnection to other devices. All interconnecting devices such as chutes and loppers shall be fabricated from the same material as the troughs. 4. The"U"trough of the screw conveyor shall be equipped with a 304 stainless steel bolted lid, minimum 10 gauge thickness. Provide hinged access points at locations shown on the drawings. Lids for the access points shall be secured with lockable and adjustable over center lockable clamps. Include expanded metal safety screen at each access point. 5. A 4-inch flanged drain outlet shall be provided with each conveyor to facilitate cleaning. B. Wear Liner: The wear liner for each conveyor shall be fabricated of ultra-high molecular weight polyethylene sintered with an anti-wear filler to reduce wear and synthetic lubricant to reduce friction. The wear liner shall be furnished in maximum 4-foot sections, 3/8-inch minimum thickness, to provide ease of replacement. Wear liners for conveyors with a diameter of 18 inches or more shall have a minimum thickness of 1/2 inch The liner shall be held in place with clips; no fasteners will be allowed. Section 41 12 13-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Spiral Flighting: 1. Spiral flighting for the shaftless screw conveyors shall be designed to convey material without a center shaft. The minimum overall spiral weight and surface pressure shall be as specified herein. The conveyor shall include an inner flight to increase axial strength and capacity of the conveyor. The minimum spiral weight shall be as specified herein. 2. Spiral flights shall be cold-formed high strength micro alloy steel with a minimum hardness of 220 Brinell. The spiral flights shall be designed with the stability to prevent distortion and jumping in the trough. The torsional rating of the auger flighting shall be reached at 30% of the Fy value in the extreme fiber of the flight material. Supplier shall demonstrate that at 250% of the motor nameplate horsepower, the drive unit cannot produce more torque than the torsional rating of the flighting, and that the "spring effect" of the spiral shall not exceed + 0.8 mm per meter of length at maximum load conditions. 3. The spiral flighting shall be formed in sections from one continuous flat bar and shall be concentric to within 2 mm +/-. Sectional flighting formed from plate shall not be permitted. 4. Spiral flighting shall have full penetration welds at all splice connections. The flights shall be aligned to provide true alignment when assembled in the field and shall be made in accordance with the supplier's requirements. The spiral flights shall be coupled to the end shaft by a flanged, bolted connection. 5. The connection of the spiral to the drive system shall be through a flanged connection plate that is welded to the spiral forming a smooth and continuous transformation from the flange plate to the spiral. The drive shaft shall have a mating flange and shall be bolted to the spiral connection plate. D. Chutes: 1. Chutes, minimum 1/8-inch-thick and fabricated from the same materials as the "U" trough shall be compatible with the discharge chutes of the centrifuge. The chutes shall be adequately sized to accommodate all materials and to prevent the spillage of materials to the exterior of the conveying system. 2. CONTRACTOR shall design the chutes to be compatible and interface with the related equipment. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordinating the designs of equipment suppliers such that all equipment is correctly matched. 3. Provide flanged flexible watertight transition between each centrifuge and hopper above each conveyor. Flexible transition fitting shall be neoprene impregnated canvas, EPDM rubber hose, neoprene Linatrile by Linatex Corporation, or equal. 4. Provide adjustable deflector shields to allow even distribution of solids into trailers receiving cake in the truck bays. The deflector shields shall be mounted onto the discharge chutes beneath the conveyors located in the truck bays and exterior load out area (M-14-15-7, M-14-15-8, and M-14-15-9). The exterior load out area chute is included in Bid Alternative No. 1. E. Materials: Unless otherwise specified or permitted, the materials used in the fabrications of the equipment under this section shall conform to the following: 1. Chute: AISI 304, ASTM A167, 18-8. 2. Troughs, End Plates, Covers: AISI 304, ASTM A167, 18-8. 3. Supports: AISI 304, ASTM A167, 18-8. 4. Hoppers: AISI 304,ASTM A167, 18-8. 5. Spiral Flighting: Cold formed, High Strength Micro Alloy Carbon Steel with a minimum hardness of 220 Brinell. 6. Wear Liner: Ultrahigh molecular weight polyethylene sintered with antiwear and synthetic. Section 41 12 13-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 7. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers for Conveyor Supports: AISI 304,ASTM 1..167, 18-8. 8. For Conveyor Trough, Lids, and Drive: AISI 304, ASTM A167, 18-8. F. Drive Unit: 1. Each spiral conveyor shall be driven by a constant-speed integral tear reducer/motor drive unit mounted to an adapter flange mounted to the end plate of the conveyor. The adapter flange shall allow the leakage of any material from the conveyor trough to atmosphere rather than into the gear reducer/motor drive unit. Direct coupling of the gear reducer/motor drive unit to the end flange of the conveyor will not be acceptable. 2. The drive unit shall be rigidly supported so there is no visible "wobble" movement under any operating condition. In the event of a prolonged power failure or emergency system shutdown the drive system shall be designed, at a minimum, to start the conveyor from _ a dead stop with the trough filled throughout its entire cross sectional area and length with partially dried and hardened dewatered material. 3. The drive shaft of the helical screw shall be fabricated from ASTM A 322 UNS G41400 steel and shall extend from the gear drive through the adapter to the semicircular drive disk of the helical screw. 4. The drive shaft connection to the gear drive unit shaft shall be provided with a keyway. 5. A gland packing ring consisting of two Teflon coated packing rings shall seal the drive shaft at its penetration through the end plate. A grease labyrinth seal shall be fitted to the drive shaft inside the conveyor to support the packed gland arrangement. 6. All gears shall be AGMA Class II, single or double reduction, helical gear units with high capacity roller bearings. Bearings shall be designed for the thrust loads from the fully loaded startup condition and shall have an AFBMA B10 life of 30,000 hours.The reducer shall be a standard air cooled unit requiring no auxiliary cooling. The gear reducer shall be sized with a torque service factor of 1.5 times the absorbed power or 1.1 times the motor nameplate, at the driven shaft speed, whichever is greater. G. Conveyor Support and Walkway Construction: 1. Each conveyor shall be furnished complete with supports suitable for mounting as shown on the drawings and as required by the supplier's design. The supports shall be _ shop fabricated from stainless steel shapes and plates, and shall be assembled and fitted to the conveyor prior to its delivery to the jobsite. Supports and conveyor segments shall be match marked and shipped to the jobsite for assembly by CONTRACTOR. At a minimum, each conveyor shall be provided with supports at the inlet and discharge end, with intermediate supports as required. Supports shall be fabricated of AISI 304 stainless steel or equal. All hanging supports shall be provided 1-foot longer than required for field fit by CONTRACTOR. 2. The conveyors in Truck Bays shall have access walkways and stair s provided by the conveyor manufacturer as shown on the drawings. 3. Walkway framing shall be an integral part of the conveyor and conveyor support framing and shall be designed for any dead loads and live loads occurring from conveyors and a walkway live load of 100 psf. Framing shall be structural steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication or aluminum structural sections in accordance with Division 05 specifications with live load deflections not exceeding 1/360 of the span. 4. Walkway surfaces shall be 2 feet 0 inches minimum width and include aluminum bar grating as specified in Division 05. Stair treads shall be a minimum width of 3 feet 0 inches with maximum rise of 7 inches and minimum tread of 11 inches. Provide a 2-rail aluminum handrail with toe boards on each side of walkway or platform unless conveyor provides a suitable barrier as defined by OSHA and 2006 International Building Code with local amendments. Handrail shall be as specified in Division 05 and as shown on -- Section 41 12 13-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 drawings. When aluminum comes in contact with dissimilar material it shall be coated with multiple coats of bituminous paint. 5. Walkway and/or conveyor frame shall be supported from precast roof planks or walls, not to interfere with upward acting doors or any other structural or mechanical building components. Connections to precast roof shall be made on stems. Walkway and conveyor supplier shall coordinate with precast roof supplier, the magnitude and location of all supports.Walkway and conveyor shop drawings shall be submitted before precast shop drawings are submitted. If connections are made to a masonry wall, the concrete block shall be grouted full at fastener locations. Walkways and conveyors shall be braced to prevent swaying of units. Catwalks shall be designed and stamped by a PE registered in the State of Iowa. 6. All fasteners and accessories shall be minimum 304 stainless steel. 7. Access walkways shall be sized to allow access for maintenance of conveyor components as required. Walkway components shall be in accordance with Division 05. 8. Aluminum stairs, railing, and grating shall match the stairs, railing, and grating provided for other areas and shall be as specified in Division 05. H. Slide Gates: 1. Conveyor M-14-15-7 shall include three electric rotary-actuated discharge slide gates (slide gate M-14-15-7C, which is located in the exterior loadout area, is included in Bid Alternative No. 1) and conveyors M-14-15-8 and M-14-15-9 shall each include five electric rotary-actuated discharge slide gates supplied by the conveyor manufacturer with spacing as shown on the Drawings. Gate frame and blade shall be fabricated from 304 stainless steel, minimum 3/16-inch thick. Gate blade shall be supported by UHMWP slides with UHMWP seals on all four sides of the gate blade. A minimum four-foot-long flexible chute shall be provided for each slide gate to direct dewatered biosolids into CITY's trailer below. Slide gate actuator shall be 480-volt, 60 Hz, three-phase, 0.5 A. Actuator shall include manual handwheel override and internal limit switches. Slide gate actuator shall be Rotork IQ10, or equal. 2. Slide gate shall be designed so that in the full open position, at least one rotation of the spiral is exposed to the opening in the direction of transport. The slide gates shall have an opening at least the full width of the conveyor. Minimum opening size shall be approximately 10 by 16 inches. 3. Each electric actuator shall operate manually through the use of three pushbuttons marked Open, Stop, and Close, or a selector switch with the same markings. The actuator shall also be equipped with a Local-Remote selector switch that will allow for remote control. Remote control will be an Open/Close signal. Provide auxiliary contacts on the Local/Remote selector switch for remote indication of selector switch position. Provide limit switches for remote indication of gate position, (i.e., opened or closed). The actuator motor and all electrical enclosures shall be NEMA 4X and shall meet all requirements of Division 26. 4. Provide a remote-mounted NEMA 4X control station with Open/Close/Auto selector switch where shown on the Drawings for each slide gate to provide remote control of the gate. With the selector switch in Open, the gate shall open. With the selector switch in Close, the gate shall be closed. With the selector switch in Auto, the gate shall be controlled from the SCADA System via a maintained dry contacts to open and close the gate. Section 41 12 13-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 I. Heat Trace and Insulation (Bid Alternative No. 1): 1. Trough for conveyor M-14-15-7 on the exterior of the Dewatering Building shall be equipped with Chromolox, Type SRL self-regulating heat cable rat€d for 10 watts per foot at 120 Vac. The cable shall be constructed of twin 16 AWG copper bus wire, semiconductive polymer core; flame retardant polyolefin jacket; tinned-copper braid, and a high temperature fluoropolymer on TPR outer jacket. A minimum of two heating cables shall be run toward the bottom of the trough and additional strips shall be provided to maintain minimum 40°F. 2. The portion of the trough on exterior of the Dewatering Building for conveyor M-14-15-7 shall be wrapped with 2-inch-thick insulation with vinyl jacket. The jacket shall fully encompass the perimeter of the trough and not be form fitted. The vinyl jacket shall be equipped with Velcro tabs for easy removal for maintenance to the equipment. 3. Heat tracing and insulation shall be installed on-site. Thermostat shall be provided. 2.03 MOTORS A. Motors shall conform to all applicable requirements of NEMA, ANSI IEEE, and NEC standards and shall be UL listed for the service specified. B. Motors provided for the equipment scheduled below shall meet the follov9ing requirements. Motors shall not be loaded beyond nominal rating, not including service factor, at any design condition. 1. Physical Construction: a. Copper leads and windings with ball or roller bearings in end b ackets of steel or cast iron or aluminum brackets with steel bearing sleeves. Motc' leads shall have the same insulation class as the windings. b. Rotor bars shall be aluminum. c. Motor shaft shall be high-strength steel protected by a bronze shaft sleeve secured to the shaft to prevent rotation. The maximum allowable no-load shaft runout shall be 0.002 inch. d. Motors shall be equipped with grease fittings and automatic grease reliefs. Bearings shall be prelubricated and field-regreasable. Openings for addithn of grease shall have grease fittings provided. 2. Mounting: As recommended by manufacturer. 3. Enclosure: TEFC. 4. Efficiency: Premium efficient as noted in schedule below. 5. Service Factor: 1.15. 6. Power requirements: 60 Hz, three-phase, 460-volt, factory-wired for 460-volt connection, ±10% voltage variation. 7. Load type: Constant torque. 8. NEMA Design: B. 9. Insulation: Class F. 10. Nominal operating speed: See motor schedule. 11. Nameplate: Stainless steel engraved attached to motor frame or enclosure with stainless steel rivets. 12. Conduit/Junction Box: Cast iron, diagonally split, fully rotatable, gasketed between cover and box, and between box and frame. Motor lead opening in the frame shall also be gasketed. A clamp-type terminal shall be provided inside each motor conduit box for grounding. 13. Accessories: a. Oversized motor junction box. b. Lifting eyes. -- Section 41 12 13-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 c. Thermostats applied to motor windings, capable of shutdown and manual reset by external controls (by Division 26). C. Motor Schedule: If motor horsepower is increased to meet the requirements of this specification, CONTRACTOR is responsible for increasing all wiring, starters, drives, and other electrical components as required by Code, at no additional cost to CITY. Conveyor Horsepower Nominal Speed Efficiency VFD M-14-15-1 2 1800 rpm 86.5% No M-14-15-2 2 1800 rpm 86.5% No M-14-15-3 3 1800 rpm 89.5% No M-14-15-4 3 1800 rpm 89.5% No M-14-15-5 7.5 1800 rpm 91.0% No M-14-15-6 12.5 1800 rpm 91.0% No M-14-15-7 12.5 1800 rpm 91.0% No M-14-15-8 15 1800 rpm 91.8% No M-14-15-9 15 1800 rpm 91.8% No 2.04 CONTROLS A. Equipment manufacturer shall review electrical wiring and control diagrams prepared by the Division 26 contractor. Manufacturer shall provide written approval to CONTRACTOR with copy to CONSULTANT and CITY. B. Electrical controls and instrumentation for this equipment are specified under Section 26 24 19—Motor Control and Section 26 09 00—Controls and Instrumentation of these specifications. C. Each conveyor drive unit shall be equipped with a 120-volt AC motion failure alarm unit(zero speed switch). The location and mounting details shall be as recommended by the conveyor manufacturer. Motion sensors shall be the noncontacting-type using a probe, relay contact rated for 5 A or 250 Vac, and time-delay relay. The unit shall be housed in a NEMA 4X enclosure. A 10-second time delay shall be provided for startup of the conveyor. The motion failure alarm units shall be as manufactured by Siemens Model SITRANS WM100, or equal. D. Each conveyor shall be furnished with an orange, nylon-coated emergency-trip cord and NEMA 4X safety switch (E-Stop). The cord shall run the full length of each conveyor. The trip switch shall immediately stop the conveyor when the switch is actuated. The switch shall be as manufactured by Conveyor Components Corporation, model RS2D, or equal. E. Electronic Motor Overload/Trip: Each conveyor shall be protected from overcurrent by a current switch furnished with the unit. The current sensing relay shall be Tsubaki shock relay, model TSBS**, or equal, and shall be mounted in a Motor Control Center by Division 26. Current sensing relay settings shall be set by manufacturer. Section 41 12 13-8 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.05 SPARE PARTS A. CONTRACTOR shall provide, along with the shop drawings, a list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts for the specified equipment. The list shall include a description of each spare part, current pricing, and expected delivery time for each part. No spare parts shall be provided by CONTRACTOR/manufacturer as part of this Contract. 2.06 FINISHES A. It is the intent of this specification that all equipment, supports, and appurtenances shall be furnished factory shop-primed and finish-painted. Preparation and painting shall conform to all requirements and provisions specified in Division 09. All surfaces of the mechanical equipment and accessories (except galvanized, stainless steel, rubber, copper, PVC) shall be prepared in accordance with near white grade SSPC Specification No. 10 removing all dirt, rust scale, and foreign materials. Surface preparation shall be done at such time during the assembly process to preclude damage to the equipment once assembled. Cleaned surfaces shall then be factory shop-primed. Factory shop-priming shall be with one coat of Tnemec 66 HS 1255 Hi-Build Epoxoline or Tnemec 140-1255 Beige Pota-Pox primer, or equal, applied to a minimum of 5.0 mils dry thickness. Factory shop finish system shall consist of two coats of Tnemec 66 HS Hi-Build Epoxoline II, or one coat of Tnemec N140-11WH White Pota-Pox Plus, and one coat of N140 Pota-Pox Pox Plus, or equal, applied to a minimum of 5.0 mils dry thickness each. Motors and speed reducers shall be factory shop-primed and finish-painted using the manufacturer's standard paint system for the specified application. Touch-up paint shall be provided by manufacturer. 2.07 ANCHOR BOLTS A. Provide all anchor bolts required for equipment furnished.Anchor bolts shall be 316 stainless steel of ample strength for the intended service. Provide anchor bolts in accordance with Division 05. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Refer to requirements specified in Division 01 for equipment installation, quality control, testing, supervision, startup, and operator training. Comply with additional requirements as specified below. B. A minimum of two trips and six days on site shall be provided for sty-drtup and training services. END OF SECTION -- Section 41 12 13-9 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 41 22 23 HOISTS AND CRANES PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Hoists. 2. Trolleys. — 3. Bridge cranes (top running and under running). 4. Conductor systems. 5. Flat cable festoon systems. 6. Electrical system controls. 7. Portable and stationary davit cranes. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. CMAA—Crane Manufacturers Association of America. B. MHI—Material Handling Institute, Inc. C. ANSI—American National Standard Institute. D. HMI—Hoist Manufacturers Institute. E. MMA—Monorail Manufacturers Association. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Crane System: Top-running and under-running crane systems shall include items specified in this section as appropriate, and all other specified accessories necessary to provide a complete functioning system. B. Monorail System: Monorail system shall include monorail beam(s) furnished under Division 05 and items specified in this section (excluding bridge cranes and portable cranes) as appropriate, and all other specified accessories necessary to provide a complete functioning system. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Crane systems shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with CMAA Specification No. 74, Specifications for Top Running and Under Running Single Girder Electric Overhead Traveling Cranes Utilizing Under Running Trolley Hoist. Section 41 22 23-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Under running crane and monorail systems shall be designed anc manufactured in accordance with ANSI MH 27.1, Monorail Manufacturers Association Specifications for Underhung Cranes and Monorail Systems. Where design standards of tra CMAA and MMA — conflict, the CMAA standards shall govern. C. Hoists shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with the star dards of the Hoist Manufacturers Institute. 1 05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Crane and Monorail Systems: CONTRACTOR shall conduct start-up aid testing of crane and monorail systems to demonstrate that load capacity and total system operation meet the requirements and intent of the Contract Documents. B. Portable Hoists: CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate that portable hoist of)eration meets the requirements and intent of the Contract Documents. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Submit type, brand, and thickness of primer paint to be furnished on bridge cranes, runway beams, and monorails. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 BRIDGE CRANE A. Bridge crane shall consist of a double girder top running bridge supported on four-wheel end trucks at each end. End trucks shall run on two runway beams located where shown on the drawings. End trucks shall be dual motor-driven with 460-volt, three-phase motors. B. Bridge crane manufacturer shall design and provide runway beams and supporting column and frame system. C. Acceptable manufacturers include the following, or equal: 1. UESCO Cranes, Inc., Worth, Illinois. 2. ACCO Chain and Lifting Products, York, Pennsylvania. 3. Lift Crane and Conveyor. 4. Kone Cranes. D. Crane schedule is as follows: Load End Truck Motor Building Capacity Motor Size Speeds 330—Dewatering Building 5-Ton 2/3 50 FPM E. Crane service classification shall be Class A—Standby Service, or better. Section 41 22 23-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.02 MONORAIL SYSTEM A. Monorail shall consist of a single girder bottom running hoist and trolley. B. Monorail system manufacturer shall design and provide runway beam and supporting column, including horizontally braced columns as shown on the drawings. C. Acceptable manufacturers include the following, or equal: 1. Munck Cranes USA, Inc. 2. Engineered Lifting Systems and Equipment, Inc. 3. TC/American Crane Company. D. Provide hoist and trolley as specified. E. Service classification shall be Class A Standby Service or better. 2.03 HOISTS A. Hoists shall be Robbins & Myer (R & M), Yale, Coffing, or equal, electric chain hoists. Motors shall be 460-volt, three-phase, 60 Hz. Provide chain container with hoists. B. Hoist schedule is as follows: Load Motor Lift Building Model* Capacity Size Speeds Height 180—Thickener Building JLC2016 2,000 lbs 1 HP 16 FPM 10 FT *Coffing model number listed. 2.04 TROLLEYS A. Trolleys shall be Robbins & Myer (R & M), Yale, Coffing, Columbus McKinnon, or equal. Trolley motors, where required, shall be 460 volts, three-phase, 60 Hz. B. Trolley schedule is as follows: Load Building Model* Capacity Motor Size Speeds 180—Thickener Building CM UT2 2,000 lbs 1/4 HP 35 FPM 9 FPM *Coffing model number listed. 2.05 CONDUCTOR SYSTEM A. Enclosed conduction electrical system shall be Insul-8-bar by Conductix-Wampflor, or equal. System shall include conductor bars, clamps, brackets, and accessories. Complete system shall be stainless steel. B. Conductor system is required in the following locations: Building System Location Function 330—Dewatering Building Bridge crane Runway beams Power to bridge girder end trucks Section 41 22 23-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2 06 FLAT CABLE FESTOON SYSTEM A. Heavy-duty C-track flat-cable festoon system shall be provided at the foil Jwing locations: Mounting Building System Location Function — 180—Thickener Building Monorail Monorail Power to hoist and trolley 330—Dewatering Building Bridge crane Bridge girder Power to hoist and trolley B. Tracks, support brackets, and accessories shall be stainless steel. 2.07 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM CONTROLS A. Bridge, hoist, and trolley motors and all wiring and controls shall be rated NEMA 12 indoors. B. Hoists and trolleys and cranes for 180—Thickener Building and 330—Dt matering Building shall be controlled by pushbutton pendant. C. Provide reduced voltage transformers for 115 volt power at the pushbuttcn pendant. D. Pendant shall reach to within 3 feet 6 inches of the operating floor. Prc vide control of all motions plus emergency stop button that will disconnect power to all motor circuits. "Start" button shall serve as reset. E. Crane, hoist, and trolley motions shall be controlled by means of magnetic contactors mounted on shockproof mountings. F. All electrical panels and enclosures shall be NEMA 12 indoors. G. Provide magnetic main contactor for power circuit disconnect with control from start-stop buttons in pushbutton station. H. Provide a non-fused disconnect located on hoist and trolley which shall disconnect power to all motors and control devices on the unit. I. Cranes, hoists, and trolleys shall accept a single point power connection. 2.08 PORTABLE DAVIT CRANES A. Portable davit crane shall be Thern, Inc. Model 5PF5-X-E2X, or equal. Crane shall have a grey epoxy paint finish, with grey epoxy worm gear hand winch. Winch shall be Model 4WM2EGRA-K by Thern, or equal. Provide Model TK4 socket base cover for each base. Provide one 1/4-inch 304 stainless steel wire rope cable with swivel hook and swaged ball fitting for each crane provided. Section 41 22 23-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Portable crane schedule is as follows: No. of Hoist No. of No. of Cable Wire Building Capacity Cranes Bases Length Base Keepers 176—WAS Storage 850 lbs 1 1 36 ft 5BP5X 1 Pumping Station 190—Digester Feed --- --- 2 36 ft 5BP5X 3 Building 350—Centrate --- --- 2 36 ft 5BP5X 2 Equalization Tank C. Provide 304 stainless steel wire rope keeper with 304 stainless steel fasteners to hold free end of cable when cable is detached from crane, Model RK19-255 by Thern, or equal. CONTRACTOR to install below floor door at each location where a davit crane will be used to remove a mixer or pump. D. Davit crane winch at each structure shall include a minimum 1.3 hp, 115-volt, single-phase, 60 Hz motor with up-down pushbuttons on control pendant. Controls shall be NEMA 4X. Motor shall include 8-foot power cord and grounded plug. 2.09 STATIONARY DAVIT CRANES A. Stationary davit cranes for the Digester Feed Building shall be Model 571E2 EGRA as manufactured by Thern, Inc. or equal. Provide epoxy coated crane and winch. Electric winch shall be Model 4WP2-K by Thern, Inc., or equal. Provide one 304 stainless steel wire rope assembly with swivel hook and swaged ball fitting with each crane. B. Crane schedule is as follows: Structure Crane Capacity No. of Cranes Cable Length 190—Digester Feed Building 1,500 lbs 1 45 ft C. Davit crane winch at the Digester Feed Building shall include a minimum 1.3 hp, 115-volt, _. single-phase, 60 Hz motor with up-down pushbuttons on control pendant. Controls shall be NEMA 4X. Motor shall include 8-foot power cord and grounded plug. 2.10 FINISHES A. Bridge crane runway beam and monorail beams shall be painted in accordance with Section 09 91 00—Painting requirements for steel, machinery, and equipment not submerged. Primer shall consist of one shop coat of Tnemec 69-1255 Hi-Build Epoxoline primer, 5.0 mils DFT. Load capacity shall be stenciled on the bridge and monorail beam after finish painting. B. Hoists and trolleys shall be factory-finished painted with the manufacturer's epoxy paint finish system. Section 41 22 23-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 3-EXECUTION 3,01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Install equipment as indicated and according to supplier's and manufacturer's instructions. B. CONTRACTOR shall inspect the units after delivery to the site for any damage to the units during shipping. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND DEMONSTRATION A. Provide manufacturer's services for the following: 1. Start-up. 2. Field Testing: Equipment manufacturer shall provide a written report covering checkout, testing, inspections and start-up, and shall identify any deficiencies noted. Report shall be submitted to ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for correcting all deficiencies noted in report. 3. Operator training and final adjustment. B. Supervision and Start-Up: Installation of all equipment furnished under this Contract shall be supervised as required by a qualified representative of equipment manufacturer. All equipment shall be placed in operation, and the plant operator shall be trained to the satisfaction of OWNER by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer. OWNER may videotape training presentation given by manufacturer's representatives. 3.03 FINISHING A. CONTRACTOR shall provide finish paint as required by Section 09 91 OC-Painting. 3.04 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. CONTRACTOR shall provide final adjusting, cleaning, and protection it accordance with Division 01. CONTRACTOR shall make all final adjusting on equipmelt as required by manufacturer. CONTRACTOR shall leave equipment in a clean condition 3.05 LUBRICATION A. CONTRACTOR shall furnish a one-year supply of grease and oils for all items of equipment requiring lubrication. Lubricants for all items of equipment shall be the same brand, when available, as recommended by the manufacturer to meet both warm and cold weather requirements. END OF SECTION Section 41 22 23-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 43 11 33 TRI-LOBE POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT BLOWERS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: This section includes furnishing, installing, and placing into successful operation two positive displacement blower packages (M-10-1-1 and M-10-1-2) for WAS storage aeration and mixing. Blowers shall be belt driven and of the rotary three-lobe type. Each blower package unit shall be provided with integrated pulsation cancellation and sound attenuating enclosures. The blowers, enclosures, and appurtenances shall be furnished by the same supplier. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. C. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with Section 46 51 21—Coarse Bubble Diffusers. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1 . The WAS Storage Blowers shall be installed in the Blower Room in the WAS Storage Building (Structure 170) as shown on the drawings and will be used for mixing and aeration of the WAS Storage Tanks (Structure 175). All blowers shall be capable of running continuously and be capable of intermittent on-off operation 2. Blower speed shall be adjustable, controlled by variable frequency drive (provided by Division 26). 3. The blowers shall be capable of being started at full speed against a discharge pressure of up to 9.0 psig without use of an unloading valve. 4. Each blower package shall arrive at the job site as a complete assembly ready for installation including the integral steel skid base, V-belt drive and motor, inlet and discharge silencers, pressure relief valve, inlet and outlet flexible connectors, and sound enclosure. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Blowers shall be capable of delivering 2,754 scfm when operating against a pressure of 9.0 psig (measured at the blower outlet). Each blower shall be capable of meeting these requirements at ±840 feet elevation and 100°F inlet temperature. Blower manufacturer shall supply performance curves verifying blower speed and output. 2. Maximum blower speed for the blowers at the design capacity specified herein shall be 3,000 rpm. Higher speed shall only be allowed upon approval by CITY. 3. Noise pressure levels measured 3 feet from the exterior of the sound enclosure shall be less than 80 dBA when the blower is operating at design speed and pressure. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. The following definitions or abbreviations apply to the work and products of this section: Standard Conditions: Inlet air temperature of 68°F, an inlet pressure of 14.7 psig, and a relative humidity of 0%. Section 43 11 33-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for motors associated with equipment specified in this section shall include data sheets from the motor manufacturer. Data sheets from the equipmeny: manufacturer or supplier are not acceptable. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacturer shall warrant - the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substantial Completion of the project. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.31 MANUFACTURERS A. The WAS Storage Blower packages shall be Compak HB950C/82P by Kaeser Compressors, Inc. of Fredericksburg, Virginia; Model GM 90S Generation 5 by Aerzen USA Corporation of Coatesville, Pennsylvania; or equal. This listed equipment is part of the Base Bid as indicated on the Bid pages and will be considered as establishing the type, function, appearance, and quality required, as defined in the General Conditions. B. The drawings and specifications were prepared based on Kaeser Compressor. CONTRACTOR shall include in the Bid and shall be responsible for the cost of any changes, including engineering changes, to accommodate the other Base Bid equipment including but not limited to structural, mechanical, and electrical work. C. CONTRACTOR may provide Alternative Bids for equipment from other manufacturers by writing their name into the blank(s) provided on the Bid form. CONTRACTOR shall comply with all provisions regarding substitute items and shall include in the Bid and be responsible for the cost of any changes to accommodate substitute equipment including, but not limited to, structural, mechanical, and electrical work. CONTRACTOR shall also pay costs of engineering services for review of substitutes and for revisions of drawings and/or specifications by CONSULTANT to accommodate substitutes. 2.02 BLOWER CONSTRUCTION A. Casing: The casing shall be made of high strength, close grained, cast iron, and shall be adequately ribbed to resist deflection and facilitate cooling. The casing shall be precision machined to allow for minimum clearances. The casing design shall incorporate channels at the discharge port to minimize pulsation. B. Rotor Assemblies: The rotor assemblies shall be precision machined from high strength, close grained, spheroidal graphite ductile iron allowing smooth, efficient operation at all rated speeds and pressures. Rotors shall be closed-end using a threaded plug. The integral shafts shall be designed to carry higher loads than calculated for the maximum design load and shall incorporate replaceable seal ring wear sleeves. The rotor assemblies shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Removal of material from the face of the rotor for balancing purposes is not allowed. The rotors shall be a tri-lobe design in order to minimize pulsation and noise. Section 43 11 33-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. End Plates: 1. The gear-end plate shall be cast iron. Bearing fits shall be precision machined to provide accurate positioning of the rotors in the casing. 2. The end plate covers shall be heavy-duty cast iron with a precision-machined sealing face. Aluminum oil sump covers are not allowed. B. Timing Gears: 1. The rotor timing gears shall be precision machined from case hardened and ground alloy steel. Each timing gear shall be straight or helical cut and beveled to provide long life as well as quiet operation. 2. Gears shall be finish ground on a precision grinder to provide concentricity. The timing gear set shall be taper-mounted on the rotors for improved rebuilt ability and accurate timing. Keyed, hub-mounted, or taper-pinned timing gear mounting designs are not acceptable. C. Bearings: All four shaft support locations shall incorporate large, heavy-duty cylindrical or spherical roller bearings designed to handle extreme radial loads without sacrificing product integrity and reliability. The minimum acceptable L10 design life at the blower's maximum rated speed and maximum rated differential pressure shall be no less than 40,000 hours. D. Lubrication: Both the gear-end and the drive-end of the blowers shall be oil splash lubricated for minimal maintenance and long service life. Grease-lubricated bearings are not acceptable. The lubrication design shall provide adequate lubrication of the timing gears and bearings. E. Seals: 1. There shall be four piston ring-type labyrinth seals at each end of each rotor to minimize leakage and maintenance costs. 2. The cavity between the air-side and oil-side seals shall be vented through threaded ports to allow external purging or containment of any lubricating oil or process gas that may have migrated past the seals. Enough ports shall be incorporated into the design so that the cavity is vented from the bottom no matter what blower drive-to-driven shaft orientation is utilized. 3. A vent cavity shall be provided on all four sets of piston ring-type labyrinth seals. The two vent holes located on the bottom side of the blower shall be left open. The vent holes at other locations shall be closed off with threaded metal plugs. 4. The input drive shaft seal shall be a high temperature radial lip-type seal with Viton elastomers or sliding ring-type mechanical seal. The seal design shall incorporate a replaceable wear sleeve on the input drive shaft. 2.03 MOTORS A. Motors shall conform to all applicable requirements of NEMA, ANSI, IEEE, and NEC standards and shall be UL listed for the service specified. B. Motors provided for the equipment scheduled below shall meet the following requirements. Section 43 11 33-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Motors shall not be loaded beyond nominal rating, not including service fE:,tor, at any design condition. 1. Physical Construction: a. Copper leads and windings with ball or roller bearings in end brackets of steel or cast iron or aluminum brackets with steel bearing sleeves. Motor leads shall have the same insulation class as the windings. b. Rotor bars shall be aluminum. c. Motor shaft shall be high-strength steel protected by a bronze shaft sleeve secured to the shaft to prevent rotation. The maximum allowable no-load shaft runout shall be 0.002 inch. d. Motors shall be equipped with grease fittings and automatic grease reliefs. Bearings shall be prelubricated and field-regreasable. Openings for addition of grease shall have grease fittings provided. 2. Mounting: As recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Enclosure: TEFC. 4. Efficiency: Premium efficient as noted in schedule below. 5. Service Factor: 1.0 on VFD power, 1.14 on sine wave power. 6. Power requirements: 60 Hz, three-phase, 230/460-volt, factory-wired for 460-volt connection, ±10% voltage variation. 7. Load type: Constant torque. 8. NEMA Design: A. 9. Insulation: Class F and rated for a Class B temperature rise. 10. Nominal operating speed: See motor schedule. 11. Nameplate: Stainless steel engraved attached to motor frame or enclosure with stainless steel rivets. 12. Conduit/Junction Box: Aluminum, diagonally split, fully rotatable, gasketed between cover and box, and between box and frame. Motor lead opening in the frame shall also be gasketed. A clamp-type terminal shall be provided inside each motor conduit box for grounding. 13. Accessories: a. Oversized motor junction box. b. Lifting eyes. c. Thermistors applied to motor windings, capable of shutdown and manual reset by external controls (by Division 26). 14. VFD requirements: Motor operating on VFDs shall be inverter-duty rated, meet the requirements of NEMA MG1, Part 31, and be capable of a minimum speed turndown of 4:1. Motors shall also include shaft grounding rings as manufactured by AEGIS, or equal. D. Motor Schedule: If motor horsepower is increased to meet the requirements of this specification, CONTRACTOR is responsible for increasing all wiring, starters, drives, and other electrical components as required by Code, at no additional cost to CITY. Blower Horsepower Nominal Speed Efficiency VFD M-10-1-1 175 1,800 95.4% Yes M-10-1-2 175 1,800 95.4% Yes Section 43 11 33-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.04 CONTROLS A. Equipment manufacturer shall review electrical wiring and control diagrams prepared by the Division 26. Manufacturer shall provide written approval to CONTRACTOR with copy to CONSULTANT and CITY. B. Electrical controls and instrumentation for this equipment are specified under Section 26 24 19—Motor Control and Section 26 09 00—Controls and Instrumentation of these specifications. 2.05 VARIABLE SPEED BLOWER CONTROLS A. Variable speed drives are specified in Division 26 of these specifications. Care shall be taken in sizing the drive so that adequate starting torque is available for the blowers. This information shall include, but not be limited to, motor full load amps and locked rotor amps and shall be provided to the variable speed supplier specified in Division 26. B. Equipment manufacturer shall furnish information regarding the minimum motor speed allowed in order to protect the motor and driven equipment to the variable speed drive supplier specified in Division 26. Minimum speed requirements shall be based on actual installed conditions and shall be furnished at or prior to equipment start-up. Calculations showing how minimum speed requirements were determined shall be furnished to CONSULTANT for review. 2.06 BLOWER PACKAGES, APPURTENANCES, AND SOUND ENCLOSURES A. The packaged blowers are to be standard engineered designs of a CE-certified manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of packaged blowers to provide single source accountability and shall include the following listed standard features: 1. The packages shall be driven through V-belts and sheaves. The drive assembly shall be of the high capacity type, oil and heat resistant, with a minimum service factor of 1.5. 2. Automatic tensioning of the V-belts by use of a pivoting, swing frame motor base with or without adjustable spring assistance and visual indication of V-belt tension shall be provided so that the V-belts remain properly tensioned with minimal maintenance and to extend V-belt, sheave, and bearing life. If needed, adjustment of the tensioning device shall be accomplished without removal of the guard or loosening of the motor mounting bolts.3. The drive guard shall be the manufacturer's standard sheet metal with provision for ventilation. The installed guard shall be fully enclosed, easily removable, and designed to meet current OSHA recommendations and CE standards. 4. The base shall be elevated, rigid, fabricated steel design with a solid subbase. The absorptive type discharge silencer shall be integral to the frame to minimize space requirements. The blower shall be mounted horizontally for a compact frame. 5. To prevent transmission of vibration and noise, as well as secure the package to the foundation, the base shall include vibration isolating mounts. Blower manufacturer shall be responsible for attenuating noise and vibration in the blower package so that no special installation base shall be required nor shall any vibration from the blower package be transmitted to the base or the piping. 6. Oil drains from the blower drive-end and gear-end lubricating oil sumps shall be piped to the front of the base for ease of maintenance. The drain valves shall be a ball valve with a fully retained and gasketed threaded cap. 7. The inlet silencer shall be of the absorptive type, directly connected to the inlet port of the blower, and shall be mounted horizontally. Section 43 11 33-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 8. The discharge silencer shall be designed specifically for the frequency of the blower for maximum attenuation and shall use a combination of reflection and diffusion. The silencer shall be directly connected to the outlet port of the blower. The discharge silencer shall be mounted horizontally and shall be integral to the base frame. 9. The relief valve shall be spring-loaded and factory-installed in a location to protect the blower from excessive differential pressures. The relief valve exhaust shall be piped out of the enclosure. 10. An elastomeric compensator/flex connector shall be provided for connection of the packed blower to the system inlet and discharge piping to reduce transmission of structure borne noise as well as prevent unacceptable loading of the silencer connection and blower casing. On packages with outlets larger than 4 inches. the compensator shall be arch-type, flanged with both ANSI and DIN bolting patterns. 11. A sound enclosure shall be provided. The sound enclosure shall be sheet steel construction with powder coat finish. It shall have acoustic foam insulation and shall provide sound attenuation. The enclosure shall have a hinged or removable panel on top and a removable panel on the front of the package to allow maintenance access. Panels shall incorporate locking closures. At least one installed, integral ventilation fan, sized to provide adequate cooling of the package, shall be provided (wiring of fan by Division 26). The fan shall be suitable for operation on 120 V, single phase power, or be powered directly by the blower shaft. 12. A blower discharge pressure gauge shall be provided, prepiped and panel-mounted, on the sound enclosure. 13. A blower discharge temperature gauge, with adjustable switching point and contact, shall be provided prepiped and panel-mounted on the sound enclosure (wiring of switch by Division 26) to permit monitoring of outlet air temperature without opening the enclosure. 14. The blower package shall be designed to allow all preventive maintenance to be performed from the front or rear of the package. All utility connections and process connections shall be at the rear of the package. 15. The blower package shall be capable of being installed adjacent -o another blower package(s) of similar design and shall be capable of mounting next 'o the wall without maintenance interference. 16. A thermistor motor protection relay shall be provided for signaling indication of a high motor winding temperature condition. The relay shall accept 12( VAC input power and be provided with a minimum of one SPDT alarm contact rated for 120 VAC, 2A. The relay shall be suitable for use with PTC thermistors and shall be configured to protect the blower motor from a high motor winding temperature condition. 17. Provide air check discharge valve installed inside blower enclosure. Motor protection relay shall be furnished to the Section 26 09 00 System Supplier for installation in the VFD cabinet. B. Inlet Filters: Manufacturer shall provide each blower with one inlet filter and housing. The filter media shall at minimum conform to ASHRAE 52.2 with a minimum efficiency reporting value of 7. The inlet filter shall be a polyester media inlet filter and shall be sized by the blower manufacturer. Filter element shall be washable by maintenance personnel as a preventive maintenance procedure. A filter differential pressure gauge (maintenance indicator) shall be provided in a location recommended by the blower manufacturer. Section 43 11 33-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Factory Testing: 1. All critical dimensions of the blower components actually provided by the manufacturer shall be verified and documented prior to assembly. 2. The rotating parts of each blower actually provided by the manufacturer shall be statically and dynamically balanced before final assembly. The blower alone shall operate without excessive vibration. 3. Each blower actually provided by the manufacturer shall be performance and slip tested to verify flow, Bhp, and slip at design conditions. Test results shall be provided. The slip RPM shall be documented. Each bare blower provided by the manufacturer shall be operated at its maximum rated speed and differential pressure for 30 minutes. A document certifying that the supplied blowers conform to the design specifications shall be provided. 4. On completion of final assembly of the packaged blower and prior to shipment, each packaged blower shall be mechanically run for a minimum of 15 minutes. 2.07 SPARE PARTS A. The following spare parts shall be provided for each blower package. 1. Two filters for the filter located integral to the inlet silencer. 2. Two filters for the filter located outside. 3. One belt set. 4. Oil for the first year of operation. 5. One tube of motor grease. 2.08 FINISHES A. It is the intent of these specifications that equipment, support and accessories be furnished factory shop-primed and finish-painted. Equipment and appurtenances shall be prepared in accordance with commercial grade SSPC specifications No. 6. Priming and finish painting shall be as recommended by manufacturer and shall be suitable for applicable atmosphere and high temperature operation. Touchup paint shall be provided by manufacturer. 2.09 ANCHOR BOLTS A. Provide all anchor bolts required for equipment furnished.Anchor bolts shall be 316 stainless steel of ample strength for the intended service. Provide anchor bolts in accordance with Division 05. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Refer to requirements specified in Division 01 for equipment installation, quality control, testing, supervision, startup, and operator training. Comply with additional requirements as specified below. B. A minimum of two trips and two days on site shall be provided for startup and training services. Section 43 11 33-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.02 VARIABLE SPEED CONTROL COORDINATION A. The equipment manufacturer shall coordinate with the variable speed drive supplier at the time of equipment startup to address minimum speed requirements to protect both motor and equipment and to meet specified design and performance requirements. Minimum speed settings (in hertz) shall be provided to CITY. Equipment operation over the entire control range shall be completed to demonstrate successful operation and to meet specified design and performance requirements. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND DEMONSTRATION A. After installation of all equipment has been completed and as soon as conditions permit, the manufacturer shall conduct a witnessed acceptance test under actual operating conditions to determine the operation is satisfactory and free from excessive vibration as defined by the blower manufacturer. Equipment operation over the entire control range at minimum, normal, and high digester levels shall be completed. B. Should excessive vibration be transmitted to building structure, blower manufacturer shall either provide alternate vibration isolating mounts to correct the vibration or provide alternate blower base inertia blocks with blower base mounted to inertia block and channel frame/forming system around inertia block to mount to spring isolators. END OF SECTION Section 43 11 33-8 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 43 23 57 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: This section includes furnishing, installing, and placing into successful — operation progressing cavity pumps and appurtenances. The pumps and appurtenances shall be furnished by the same supplier. They are to include: 1. Two primary sludge transfer pumps (P-3-15-1 and P-3-15-2). Pumps and appurtenances are included in bid Alternative No. 3. 2. Three gravity belt thickener feed pumps (P-10-4-1, P-10-4-2, and P-10-4-3). 3. Three thickened waste activated sludge pumps (P-10-14-1, P-10-14-2, and P-10-14-3). 4. Three digester feed pumps (P-10-26-1, P-10-26-2, and P-10-26-3). 5. Three dewatering feed pumps (P-12-1-1, P-12-1-2, and P-12-1-3). B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. C. Products installed but not supplied under this section: CONTRACTOR shall remove and reinstall existing waste activated sludge pump P-10-4-1. This pump shall be installed as P-10-4-4. P-10-4-4 shall pump waste activated sludge from the WAS Storage Tank Nos. 1 and 2 or the WAS Transfer Tank to Gravity Belt Thickener (GBT) No. 3. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. P-3-15-1 and P-3-15-2 shall be used for pumping primary sludge from the Primary Sludge Transfer Tank Nos. 1 and 2 to the Blended Sludge Tank Nos. 1 through 3. 2. P-10-4-1, P-10-4-2, and P-10-4-3 shall pump waste activated sludge from either the WAS Storage Tank Nos. 1 and 2 or the WAS Transfer Tank to GBT Nos. 1 through 3. Head condition shown in the table below is maximum flow. Pumps shall normally operate at 450 gpm at 24 psi with a pump speed of 291 rpm. Net positive suction head available is 21 feet. 3. P-10-14-1, P-10-14-2, and P-10-14-3 shall pump thickened waste activated sludge from the discharge of GBT Nos. 1 through 3 to Blended Sludge Storage Tank Nos. 1 through 3. P-10-14-1 shall be dedicated to GBT No. 1, P-10-14-2 shall be dedicated to GBT No. 2, and P-10-14-3 shall be dedicated to GBT No. 3. 4. P-10-26-1, P-10-26-2, and P-10-26-3 shall pump macerated blended sludge from Blended Sludge Tank Nos. 1 through 3 to Digester Nos. 3 and 6. 5. P-12-1-1, P-12-1-2, and P-12-1-3 shall pump anaerobically digested sludge to either Centrifuge Nos. 1 or 2 or to the Belt Filter Press. Section 43 23 57-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Performance Requirements: The progressing cavity pumps shall n eet the following operating conditions: Head Conditions at Given Flows Max. Pump Total Solids Flow TDH Speed Pump Fluid Conveyed Concentration (GPM) (ps ) (rpm) P-3-15-1* Primary Sludge 0.5% to 6% 150 50 281 P-3-15-2* P-10-4-1 Waste Activated 0.5% to 2% 600 30 393 P-10-4-2 Sludge P-10-4-3 P-10-14-1 Thickened 0.5% to 7% 200 35 268 P-10-14-2 Waste Activated P-10-14-3 Sludge P-10-26-1 Macerated 0.5% to 7% 250 60 183 P-10-26-2 Blended Sludge P-10-26-3 P-12-1-1 Digested Sludge 1% to 3% 400 35 280 P-12-1-2 P-12-1-3 * Bid Alternative No. 3 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for motors associated with equipment specified in this section shall include data sheets from the motor manufacturer. Data sheets from the equipmen•: manufacturer or supplier are not acceptable. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substantial Completion of the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Progressing cavity pumps shall be manufactured by Seepex, Inc. of En::)n, Ohio or equal, meeting the following requirements: Seepex Model Suction Discharge Pump Number Connection Connection Joint Protection P-3-15-1* BN 52-6LS 5-inch 5-inch Yes P-3-15-2* P-10-4-1 BN 130-6LS 8-inch 6-inch No P-10-4-2 P-10-4-3 P-10-14-1 BT 70-6LS 25.5-inch by 6-inch No P-10-14-2 14.5-inch Section 43 23 57-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 Seepex Model Suction Discharge Pump Number Connection Connection Joint Protection P-10-14-3 P-10-26-1 BN 130-6LS 8-inch 6-inch No P-10-26-2 P-10-26-3 P-12-1-1 BN 130-6LS 8-inch 6-inch No P-12-1-2 P-12-1-3 * Bid Alternative No. 3 B. This listed equipment is part of the Base Bid as indicated on the Bid pages and will be considered as establishing the type, function, appearance, and quality required, as defined in the General Conditions. C. The drawings and specifications were prepared based on Seepex, Inc. CONTRACTOR shall include in the Bid and shall be responsible for the cost of any changes, including engineering changes, to accommodate the other Base Bid equipment including but not limited to structural, mechanical, and electrical work. D. CONTRACTOR may provide Alternative Bids for equipment from other manufacturers by writing their name into the blank(s) provided on the Bid form. CONTRACTOR shall comply with all provisions regarding substitute items and shall include in the Bid and be responsible for the cost of any changes to accommodate substitute equipment including, but not limited to, structural, mechanical, and electrical work. CONTRACTOR shall also pay costs of engineering services for review of substitutes and for revisions of drawings and/or specifications by CONSULTANT to accommodate substitutes. 2.02 GENERAL A. Pumps shall be heavy duty, progressing cavity. Pumps shall be capable of passing long stringy materials. The pumps shall be provided complete with guards, bases, and other appurtenances. The pumps and appurtenances shall be furnished by the same supplier. B. Materials: 1. Rotors shall be tool steel—Duktil coated. 2. Stators shall be Buna N. 3. Pump bodies shall be cast iron. C. Equipment: 1. Rotor and Stator: Each pump shall be a one-stage design employing a convoluted helical rotor operating in a similarly convoluted stator. The convolutions shall be configured to form a cavity between the rotor and stator, which shall progress from the pump's inlet to discharge port with the operation of the rotor. The fit between the rotor and stator at the point of contact shall compress the stator material sufficiently to form a seal and to prevent leakage from the discharge back to the inlet end of the pumping chamber. The stator shall be molded in two halves and assembled with a Segment Retainer for positioning of the stator halves, and Adjusting Segments to seal the stator halves and adjust the stator clamping. Flanged sealing sections shall be molded integral to the stator segments preventing the metal stator reinforcement from contacting the pumped liquid. Gaskets or"O" rings may not be used to form this seal. Stators for sludge pumps shall have Buna elastomer. The rotor shall be designed to fit directly into the coupling rod via a pin type connection for easy replacement or maintenance. The sludge Section 43 23 57-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 pump rotors shall be constructed of tool steel. Additionally, the sludge pump rotors shall have a chromium nitride coating (Duktil) with minimum thickness of 0.01-inch. a. Stators shall be replaceable without dismantling the pump suction or discharge flanges or any associated piping. Pumps that require additional space for axial/horizontal removal of the stator shall not be allowed. Stator designs shall additionally incorporate a retensioning feature to compensate for wear in lieu of increasing pump speed. b. Rotors shall be replaceable without dismantling the pump suction or discharge flanges or associated piping. Pumps that require additional space for axial/horizontal removal of the rotor shall not be allowed. The rotor design shall include provisions so that rotor replacement does not require the disassembly of either universal joint. c. The suction casing shall employ two opposed cleanout openings to facilitate removal of debris without dismantling the pump or pipework. 2. Rotor and Drive Train: a. Each pump rotor shall be driven through a positively sealed and lubricated pin joint. The pin joint shall have replaceable bushings, constructed of air-hardened tool steel of 57-60 HRc, in the rotor head and coupling rod. The pin shall be constructed of high speed steel, air hardened to 60-65 HRc. The joint shall be grease lubricated with a high temperature (450°F), PTFE filled synthetic grease, covered with Buna N sleeve and positively sealed with hose clamps constructed of 304 stainless steel. b. Joint Protection: Provide joint protection for pumps per table in 2.01.A. A stainless steel shell shall cover the rotor side universal joint assembly to protect the elastomer sleeve from being damaged by grit, metals, or glass. 3. Casing: a. BN Type: A 150-pound ANSI B16.5 flanged connection shall be provided at both the inlet and discharge ports. Cast iron suction and discharge casings shall each be provided with a 1/2-inch tap to permit installation of pressure instruments. b. BT Type: A 150 pound ANSI B16.5 flanged connection shall be provided at the discharge port. The discharge casings shall each be provided with a 1/2-inch tap to permit installation of pressure instruments. The suction casing shall be fabricated from corrosion resistant steel plate and designed with a rectangular opening with dimensions per table in 2.01.A. The suction casing shall incorporate an "extension tube" between the hopper opening and the rotor and stator.A single helix auger shall run the entire length of the suction casing and the extension tube and shall transmit rotational movement from the drive shaft to the rotor. The auger End extension tube shall work in concert to apply additional shearing forces against thixotropic liquids to reduce the apparent viscosity of the material, minimize air entrainment and improve the volumetric efficiency of the pumping elements. 4. Bearings: Each pump shall be provided with oil lubricated thrust and radial bearings, located in the gearmotor, designed for all loads imposed by the specified service. Minimum bearing L-10 shall be 50,000 hours. 5. Shaft Sealing: Shaft shall be sealed using a single internal mechanical seal. The shaft shall be solid through the sealing area, but of a two-part design which allows the rotating unit to be removed from the pump without disassembly of the gearmotor bearings. Seal materials shall be solid silicon carbide faces with 316 stainless steel metal parts and fluoroelastomers (FKM). 6. The pumps shall be of the compact, close-coupled design. The gear reducer shall be sized for a minimum service factor of 1.5 and designed with a thrust load capability of 150 percent of the actual thrust load. 7. The pumps, along with associated drive appurtenances, shall be me Jnted on common fabricated steel baseplates. Section 43 23 57-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.03 MOTORS A. Motors shall conform to all applicable requirements of NEMA, ANSI, IEEE, and NEC standards and shall be UL listed for the service specified. Gear motors and reducers shall be designed in accordance with AGMA 6019-E (Class II). B. Motors provided for the equipment scheduled below shall meet the following requirements. Motors shall not be loaded beyond nominal rating, not including service factor, at any design condition. 1. Physical Construction: a. Copper leads and windings with ball or roller bearings in end brackets of steel or cast iron or aluminum brackets with steel bearing sleeves. Motor leads shall have the same insulation class as the windings. b. Rotor bars shall be aluminum. c. Motor shaft shall be high-strength steel protected by a bronze shaft sleeve secured to the shaft to prevent rotation. The maximum allowable no-load shaft runout shall be 0.002 inch. d. Motors shall be equipped with grease fittings and automatic grease reliefs. Bearings shall be prelubricated and field-regreasable. Openings for addition of grease shall -~ have grease fittings provided. 2. Mounting: Horizontal. 3. Enclosure: TEFC. 4. Efficiency: Premium efficient as noted in schedule below. 5. Service Factor: 1.15. 6. Power requirements: 60 Hz, three-phase, 460-volt, factory-wired for 460-volt . connection, ±10% voltage variation. 7. Load type: Constant torque. 8. NEMA Design: B. 9. Insulation: Class F and rated for a Class B temperature rise. 10. Nominal operating speed: See motor schedule. 11. Nameplate: Stainless steel engraved attached to motor frame or enclosure with stainless steel rivets. 12. Conduit/Junction Box: Cast iron, diagonally split, fully rotatable, gasketed between cover and box, and between box and frame. Motor lead opening in the frame shall also be gasketed. A clamp-type terminal shall be provided inside each motor conduit box for grounding. 13. Accessories: a. Oversized motor junction box. b. Lifting eyes. c. Thermostats applied to motor windings, capable of shutdown and manual reset by external controls (by Division 26). 14. VFD requirements: Motor operating on VFDs shall be inverter-duty rated, meet the requirements of NEMA MG1, Part 31, and be capable of a minimum speed turndown of 10:1. Motors shall also include shaft grounding rings as manufactured by AEGIS, or equal. Section 43 23 57-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Motor Schedule: If motor horsepower is increased to meet the requirements of this specification, CONTRACTOR is responsible for increasing all wiring, starters, drives, and other electrical components as required by Code, at no additional cost to CITY. Pump Horsepower Nominal Speed Efficiency VFD P-3-15-1* 10 hp 1800 rpm 91.7% Yes P-3-15-2* P-10-4-1 40 hp 1800 rpm 94.1% Yes P-10-4-2 P-10-4-3 P-10-14-1 25 hp 1800 rpm 93.6% Yes P-10-14-2 P-10-14-3 P-10-26-1 25 hp 1800 rpm 93.6% Yes P-10-26-2 P-10-26-3 P-12-1-1 30 hp 1800 rpm 93.6% Yes P-12-1-2 P-12-1-3 * Bid Alternative No. 3 2.04 RUN DRY PROTECTION A. Run Dry Protection: Provide run dry protection for all pumps including existing pump P-10-4-4. The stator shall be fitted with a sensor sleeve and thermistor sensor. A 120-volt controller shall also be provided and shall be installed by Section 26 09 00 System Supplier in the motor control center. The controller shall monitor the stator temperature and activate a shutdown and alarm sequence if the stator temperature reaches the adjustable limit on the controller. Manufacturer shall set limits on controller at startup. The controller shall include a manual local and remote reset function. 2.05 VARIABLE SPEED PUMP CONTROLS A. Variable speed drives are specified in Division 26 of these specifications for the pumps. Care shall be taken in sizing the drive so that adequate starting torque is available for the pumps. This information shall include, but not be limited to, motor full load amps and locked rotor amps and shall be provided to the variable speed supplier specified in Division 26. B. Pump controls are specified in Division 26, Section 26 09 00—Controls and Instrumentation of these specifications. Pump manufacturer shall review these controls and coordinate with Division 26. C. Equipment manufacturer shall furnish information regarding the minimum motor speed allowed in order to protect the motor and driven equipment to the variable speed drive supplier specified in Division 26. Minimum speed requirements shall be based on actual installed conditions and shall be furnished at or prior to equipment start-up. Calculations showing how minimum speed requirements were determined shall be furnished to CONSULTANT for review. D. Equipment manufacturer shall provide the fixed reduction between the mctor and pump. The reduction ratio shall be set so the motor is operating at its nominal i ated full speed in accordance with the motor schedule. Section 43 23 57-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.06 SPARE PARTS A. For each pump model, provide the following: 1. Stator assemblies. 2. Rotor. 3. Set of universal joint assemblies. 4. Mechanical seal. B. Provide one set of special tools to service the pumps. C. For pumps with run dry protection, provide set of stator assemblies with TSE sensor sleeves. 2.07 HIGH PRESSURE SENSOR A. Furnish and install with each new pump and for existing pump P-10-4-1 a high pressure sensor/pressure gauge assembly for installation in the discharge pipe to protect the pump from overpressure. The instrumentation assembly shall utilize an isolator to separate the process fluid from the pressure sensing instrumentation. The pressure shall be monitored by a nonindicating pressure switch in NEMA 4X enclosure. Pressure switch shall be as manufactured by Square D, Type GAW, or equal. High pressure setting shall be set by the pump manufacturer at start-up. B. Pressure sensor shall be PSR (full flange type) as manufactured by Onyx Valve, Cinnaminson, NJ, or equal. The nonwetted body components shall be carbon steel. Elastomer shall be Buna-N. End plates shall be acetal. Fill fluid shall be silicon. Provide one coat Tnemec N69-1255 epoxoline primer, or equal, applied to a minimum of 5.0 mils dry thickness. Provide pressure sensor with integral block valve and module seal to isolate the pressure sensor from the gauge and switch without losing sensing fluid pressure. Module seal material shall be 316 SS. C. The connection to the discharge pipe for the pressure instrumentation assembly shall be 1/2-inch female thread. 2.08 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Except for P-10-14-1, P-10-14-2, and P-10-14-3, provide pressure gauges on the suction for each new pump and for existing pump P-10-4-1. Provide pressure gauge on the discharge for each new pump and for existing pump P-10-4-1. Gauges shall be 4 1/2-inch dial, H.O. Trerice Model 450 LFSS with 316 stainless steel tube and socket, or equal. Case shall be liquid-filled with glycerin to minimize vibration and pulsations. B. Suction gauge range shall be compound, 30-inch mercury vacuum to 15 psi. The maximum discharge pressure gauge range shall be equal to twice the normal operating pressure. C. For each suction gauge, provide a pressure sensor. Pressure sensor shall be PSR (full flange type) as manufactured by Onyx Valve, Cinnaminson, NJ, or equal. The nonwetted body components shall be carbon steel. Elastomer shall be Buna-N. End plates shall be acetal. Fill fluid shall be silicon. Provide one coat Tnemec N69-1255 epoxoline primer, or equal, applied to a minimum of 5.0 mils dry thickness. Provide pressure sensor with integral block valve and module seal to isolate the pressure sensor from the gauge and without losing sensing fluid pressure. Module seal material shall be 316 SS. Section 43 23 57-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2,09 FINISHES A. It is the intent of this specification that all equipment, supports, and appurtenances shall be furnished factory shop-primed, clean, and ready to accept finish painting by CONTRACTOR with a minimal amount of surface preparation. Preparation and painting shall conform to all requirements and provisions specified in Division 09. Unless otherwise specified, mechanical equipment and accessories shall be furnished with all surfaces (except galvanized, stainless steel, rubber, copper, PVC) prepared in accordan♦;e with near white grade SSPC Specification No. 10 removing all dirt, rust scale, and foreign materials. Surface preparation shall be done at such time during the assembly process to preclude damage to the equipment once assembled. Cleaned surfaces shall then be factory shop-primed. Factory shop-priming shall be with one coat of Tnemec 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline or Tnemec 140-1255 Beige Pota-Pox primer, or equal, applied to a minimum of 5.0 mils dry -- thickness. Primer used shall be compatible with proposed finish coats; CONTRACTOR shall verify. Motors and speed reducers shall be factory shop-primed and finish-painted using the manufacturer's standard paint system for the specified application. Touch-up paint shall be provided by manufacturer. 2.10 ANCHOR BOLTS A. Provide all anchor bolts required for equipment furnished.Anchor bolts shall be 316 stainless steel of ample strength for the intended service. Provide anchor bolts iri accordance with Division 05. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL -- A. Refer to requirements specified in Division 01 for equipment installatic n, quality control, testing, supervision, startup, and operator training. Comply with additional requirements as specified below. B. A minimum of nine trips and ten days on site shall be provided for startup and training services. Number of trips assumes that a waste activated sludge pump and thickened waste activated sludge pump shall be started up on the same trip. One trip shall be included in Bid Alternative No. 3. 3.02 VARIABLE SPEED CONTROL COORDINATION A. The equipment manufacturer shall coordinate with the variable speed drive supplier at the time of equipment startup to address minimum speed requirements to protect both motor and equipment and to meet specified design and performance requirements. Minimum speed settings (in hertz) shall be provided to CITY. Equipment operation over the entire control range shall be completed to demonstrate successful operation and to meet specified — design and performance requirements. END OF SECTION Section 43 23 57-8 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 43 25 10 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: This section includes furnishing, installing, and placing into successful operation submersible pumps and appurtenances. The pumps and appurtenances shall be furnished by the same supplier. They are to include: 1. Two waste activated sludge transfer pumps (P-10-8-1 and P-10-8-2). 2. Two centrate pumps (P-15-2-1 and P-15-2-2). B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern Work in this section. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Application: 1. P-10-8-1 and P-10-8-2 shall be used for pumping waste activated sludge from the WAS Storage Tanks to the WAS Transfer Tank. The waste activated sludge is expected to have a solids concentration of 0.5% to 2%. 2. P-15-2-1 and P-15-2-2 shall be used for pumping centrate from dewatered anaerobically digested sludge. Solids concentration in the centrate may vary from 0.1% to 2% solids. B. Design Requirements: 1. The submersible pumps shall meet the following operating conditions: OPERATING CONDITIONS Head Conditions at Given Flows Normal Minimum Maximum TDH TDH TDH Pump Location GPM (ft) GPM (ft) GPM (ft) P-10-8-1 WAS Transfer 500 40 600 36 300 48 P-10-8-2 Pumping Station (Structure 176) P-15-2-1 Centrate 150 19 250 16 50 23 P-15-2-2 Equalization (Structure 350) 2. The submersible pump motors shall meet the following operating conditions: Minimum Pump Starter Pump HP Voltage Phase RPM Eff.* Type P-10-8-1 10 460 3 1750 82.1% FVNR P-10-8-2 P-15-2-1 3.0 460 3 1750 78.1% VFD P-15-2-2 *Minimum efficiency at normal operating conditions. Section 43 25 10-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Performance Requirements: CONTRACTOR shall supply pumps to meet the following requirements using constant speed operation: 1. Operate at the normal condition within +10'Yo of given capacity at gi\en head, or within +5% of given head at given capacity. 2. While operating under suction head at the normal operating conditions, the pump design shall be such that the pump will operate satisfactorily without cavitation, excessive noise, or vibration when installed as shown on the drawings and operating at the head specified. 3. Motor horsepower shown is the minimum requirement. The motor shall be large enough not to be overloaded at any point on the design curve for the pump chosen to meet the operating conditions. 4. The maximum and minimum head conditions are given as a guide to the shape of the head discharge curve. The pumps shall have a head discharge curve of the same shape or steeper within the guidelines previously specified. 5. Be designed to operate in submerged condition in the space allotted 6. Be vertical, nonclog centrifugal wastewater pumps with integral motors designed and assembled by same manufacturer. 7. Be capable of handling solids and long stringy materials found it raw unscreened wastewater. 8. With its appurtenances and cable, be capable of operation with continuous submergence without loss of watertight integrity to a depth of 65 feet. 9. Be capable of running continuously at full nameplate rated load while the pump is submerged, partially submerged or unsubmerged. The use of shower systems, secondary pumps, or cooling systems to cool the motor shall not be acceptable. 10. Be UL, CSA, or FM approved for Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D hazardous locations. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials of construction for the pumps and related equipment shall e suitable for the environment in which they are to be located. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for motors associated with equipment specified in this section shall include data sheets from the motor manufacturer. Data sheets from the equipment manufacturer or supplier are not acceptable. B. Submittal shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Name of pump manufacturer and type or model designation of pump 2. Maximum field operating speed of unit. All performance data and to_>ts shall be at this speed. 3. NPSH required. 4. Impeller diameter as percent of maximum. 5. Name of motor manufacturer and type or model designation of motor with full information on frame size, insulation, temperature rating and efficiency. 6. Motor rated horsepower without service factor. 7. Motor service factor. 8. Full load and locked rotor current. 9. Variable speed performance curve for the pump being offere i with operating efficiency. 10. Descriptive data showing pump construction. Section 43 25 10-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 11. Verification of adequate pump bearing frame such that bearing spacing exceeds impeller overhang. C. Manufacturer shall submit certified performance test curves for review prior to shipment. Test curves shall meet the requirements as specified in Part 3 of this section. D. Submit pump test report following test of equipment as specified in Part 3 of this section. 1.05 WARRANTY A. The pump manufacturer shall warrant the units being supplied to CITY against defects in workmanship and materials for a period of 5 years or 10,000 hours under normal use, operation and service. The warranty shall be in printed form and apply to all similar units. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Submersible pumps shall be manufactured by Xylem Water Solutions USA-Flygt, or equal, meeting the following requirements: Impeller Discharge Pump Brand Series Model Impeller Diameter Diameter P-10-8-1 Flygt NP 3127 MT 438 202 mm 4-inch P-10-8-2 P-15-2-1 Flygt NP 3085 MT 463 135 mm 3-inch P-15-2-2 B. This listed equipment is part of the Base Bid as indicated on the Bid pages and will be considered as establishing the type, function, appearance, and quality required, as defined in the General Conditions. C. The Drawings and Specifications were prepared based on Xylem Water Solutions USA-Flygt. CONTRACTOR shall include in the Bid, and shall be responsible for, the cost of any changes to accommodate other equipment, including, but not limited to, structural, mechanical, and electrical Work. CONTRACTOR shall also pay any additional costs necessary for revisions of drawings and/or specifications by CONSULTANT. D. CONTRACTOR may provide Alternative Bids for equipment from other manufacturers by writing their name into the blank(s) provided on the Bid form. CONTRACTOR shall comply with all provisions regarding substitute items and shall include in the Bid and be responsible for the cost of any changes to accommodate substitute equipment including, but not limited to, structural, mechanical, and electrical work. CONTRACTOR shall also pay costs of engineering services for review of substitutes and for revisions of drawings and/or specifications by CONSULTANT to accommodate substitutes. Section 43 25 10-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.02 PUMP RETRIEVAL SYSTEM A. The design of the pumps shall be such that the pump unit will be automatically and firmly connected to the discharge piping when lowered into place on its mating discharge connection, permanently installed in the wet well. The pump shall be easily removable for inspection or service, requiring no bolts, nuts or other fasteners to be disconnected, or need for personnel to enter the wet well. B. A sliding guide bracket shall be an integral part of the pump unit. The \olute casing shall have a machined discharge flange to automatically and firmly connect with the cast iron discharge connection, which when bolted to the floor of the wet well and :iischarge line, will receive the wet well discharge connecting flange without the nee I of adjustment, fasteners, clamps or similar devices. C. Alignment of the pump to the discharge connection shall be the result of a simple linear downward motion of the pump unit guided by no less than two stainless steel guide bars. Guide bars shall be of a diameter and wall thickness as recommended by the pump manufacturer. Provide stainless steel top guide bar brackets and intermediate guide bar brackets as required. Guide bars shall extend from access door to the discharge connection. No other motion of the pump unit, such as tilting or rotating, shall be required. Sealing of the pump to the discharge flange connection shall be by a machined metal-to-metal contact. Sealing of the discharge interface by means of a diaphragm, 0-ring, or other devices will not be considered acceptable, nor equal. No portion of the pump unit shall bear directly on the floor of the wet well. The entire weight of the pump shall be borne by the pump discharge elbow. There shall be no more than one 90° bend allowed between the volute discharge flange and station piping. Discharge connection to discharge pipe shall be an ANSI B16.1 Class 125 flange. D. Furnish one complete Flygt Grip-Eye Lift system, or equal. The system shall consist of a 304 stainless steel cable and length of stainless steel chain for each pump, and one forged steel Grip-Eye compatible with the hoist system. Provide stainless shackle for each pump. All components shall be of adequate size, length, and strength for the pump being lifted. 2.J3 PUMP CONSTRUCTION A. All major parts such as the stator casing, lubricant casing, sliding bracket, discharge connection, volute and impeller shall be of gray iron with smooth surfaces. All exposed bolts, screws and nuts shall be stainless steel construction. All metal surfaces coming in contact with the pumped liquid other than steel or brass shall be protected by a manufacturer-selected paint system. B. All mating surfaces of major parts shall be machined and fitted with 0-rings where watertight sealing is required. Machining and fitting shall be such that sealing is accomplished by automatic compression in two planes and 0-ring contact made on four surfaces without the requirement of specific torque limits to affect this. Rectangular - cross-sectioned gaskets requiring specific torque limits to achieve compression shall not be considered adequate or equal. Tolerances of all parts shall be such that allows replacement of any part without additional machining required to provide sealing as described above. No secondary sealing compounds, greases, or other devices shall be used. Section 43 25 10-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.04 PUMP VOLUTE A. Pump volute shall be of cast iron and shall have integral spiral-shaped, sharp-edged groove(s) at the suction of the volute. The spiral groove(s) shall provide the sharp edge(s) across which each impeller vane leading edge shall cross during rotation so to remain unobstructed. The internal volute bottom shall provide effective sealing between the multivane, semiopen impeller and the volute. 2.05 PUMP MOTOR A. The pump motor shall be housed in an air-filled watertight chamber and shall have moisture-resistant Class H insulation. The pump motor shall be NEMA Design B designed for continuous duty. Motor shall be capable of sustaining 15 starts per hour. Motors shall be premium efficient. B. The combined service factor (combined effect of voltage, frequency, and specific gravity) shall be a minimum of 1.15. The motor shall have a voltage tolerance of ±10%. The motor shall be designed for operation up to 40°C (104°F) ambient with a temperature rise not to exceed 80°C. Motors operating on VFDs shall meet the requirements of NEMA MG-1 part 31 and be suitable for VFD operation. C. A performance chart shall be provided upon request showing curves for torque, current, -- power factor, input/output kW and efficiency. This chart shall also include data on starting and no-load characteristics. D. If motor horsepower is increased to meet the requirements of this specification, CONTRACTOR is responsible for increasing all wiring, starters, drives, and other electrical components as required by Code, at no additional cost to CITY. 2.06 PUMP PROTECTION A. The motor stator shall incorporate three thermal switches in series to monitor the temperature of each phase winding. At a temperature preset to protect the motor, the thermal switches shall stop the motor and be capable of activating an alarm. B. A leakage sensor shall be provided to detect fluid in the stator. When activated, the sensor shall be capable of activating an alarm or indicator. The thermal switches and sensor shall be connected to a monitoring unit which shall be designed to be mounted in the MCC. C. A Mini-CAS unit rated for 120 Vac power supply shall be provided to the Section 26 09 00 System Supplier for installation in the MCC bucket. 2.07 PUMP SHAFT A. Pump and motor shaft shall be one unit. Couplings are not acceptable. The shaft shall be made of stainless steel. The shaft shall rotate on two permanently lubricated bearings with a B-10 bearing life of 40,000 hours when pump is operating at or near best efficiency point. Bearings shall compensate for axial thrust and radial forces. 2.08 PUMP MECHANICAL SEALS A. Each pump shall be provided with a tandem mechanical shaft seal system consisting of two independent seal assemblies. The seals shall operate in a lubricant reservoir that hydrodynamically lubricates the lapped seal faces. The lower primary seal unit between Section 43 25 10-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 the pump and lubricant chamber shall contain one stationary and one positively driven rotating tungsten-carbide ring. The upper secondary seal unit between the lubricant chamber and the motor housing shall contain one stationary and one positively driven _ rotating tungsten carbide seal ring. Each interface shall be held in contact by its own spring system and not require being supplemented by external liquid pressures. Both seals shall be mounted on the shaft. The lower seal shall not be mounted on the impeller hub. The seals shall require neither maintenance nor adjustment, nor depend on direction of rotation for sealing. Shaft seals without positively driven rotating members or conventional double mechanical seals with a common single or double spring acting between the upper and lower units, requiring a pressure differential to offset external pressure and effect sealing shall not be considered acceptable, nor equal to, the dual independent seal system specified. B. The pump shall be provided with a lubricant chamber for the shaft sealing system. The lubricant chamber shall be designed to prevent overfilling and to provide lubricant expansion capacity. The drain and inspection plug, with positive antileak seal shall be easily accessible from the outside. No seal damage shall result from operating the pump in an unsubmerged condition. The seal system shall not rely on the pumped media for lubrication. 2.09 PUMP IMPELLER A. The impeller shall be of high chrome, dynamically-balanced, sem open, multivane, backswept, screw-shaped, nonclog design. The impeller leading edges shall be mechanically self-cleaned automatically upon each rotation as they pa >s across a spiral groove located on the volute suction. The screw-shaped leading edges o the impeller shall be hardened to Rc 45 and shall be capable of handling solids, fibrouE materials, heavy sludge and other matter normally found in wastewater. The screw shape of the impeller inlet shall provide an inducing effect for the handling of up to 2% sluc ge and rag-laden wastewater. The impeller to volute clearance shall be readily adjustable :)y the means of a single trim screw. The impeller shall be locked to the shaft, held by an impeller bolt, and treated with a corrosion inhibitor. 2.10 PUMP MOTOR CABLE A. The pump motor cable shall be suitable for submersible pump applications. This shall be indicated by a code or legend permanently printed on the cable. Cable size shall conform to NEC and ICEA Standards and shall be of adequate size to allow motor voltage conversion without replacing the cable. Provide a stainless steel Kellum grip strain relief on motor cable to support cable at manhole cover. Provide minimum 50 feet of cable for each pump, more as necessary. Cable shall be of sufficient length to provide continuous run from in-place pump to point of cable connection. All ends of pump cables shall be fitted with a rubber shrink-fit boot to protect cable prior to installation. 2.11 CABLE ENTRY SEAL A. A cable entry seal shall be provided where the pump cable enters the pump. The cable entry seal design shall preclude specific torque requirements to providE. a watertight and submersible seal. The cable entry shall consist of cylindrical elastomeric grommet, flanked by washers, all having a close tolerance fit against the cable outside diameter and the entry inside diameter and compressed by the body containing a strain-relief function, separate from the function of sealing the cable. The assembly shall provide ease of changing the cable when necessary using the same entry seal. The cable entry junction chamber and motor shall be separated by stator lead sealing gland or a terminal board Section 43 25 10-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 which shall isolate the interior from foreign material gaining access through the pump top. Epoxies, silicones, or other secondary sealing systems shall not be required or used. 2.12 COOLING SYSTEM A. Pumps shall be provided with cooling system of thermal radiators integral to the stator housing, cast in one unit. Pump shall be capable of operating in a dry condition without damage to motor or pump. 2.13 MIX-FLUSH VALVE A. Provide mix-flush valve for P-10-8-1. B. Pump listed above shall be equipped with an automatically operating valve that will provide a mixing action within the sump at the start-up of the pumping cycle. C. This valve shall be mounted directly on the pump volute and shall direct a portion of the pumpage into the sump to flush and re-suspend solids and grease by the turbulent action of its discharge. The turbulent action caused by the flow shall also provide some sump aeration benefits. The valve shall be mounted on the pump volute so that it can be removed from the sump along with the pump during normal and routine maintenance checks and shall be positioned on the volute to provide for non-clogging operation. The valve shall be equipped with an adjustable, wear-resistant discharge nozzle which shall be used to direct flow from the valve to optimize mixing action within the sump. D. The valve shall not require any external power source or control to operate, neither electric nor pneumatic. The use of an external power source is not acceptable. The valve shall be suitable for use in Class I, Division 1 hazardous locations. E. The valve shall open at the beginning of each pumping cycle and shall automatically close during pump operation after a pre-selected time of operation. The valve shall operate automatically by differential pressure across the valve and shall be actuated through a self-contained hydraulic system which uses an environmentally safe fluid. A method of adjusting the valve operating time shall be provided. 2.14 VARIABLE SPEED PUMP CONTROLS A. Variable speed drives are specified in Division 26 of these specifications. Care shall be taken in sizing the drive so that adequate starting torque is available for the pump. This information shall be provided to the variable speed supplier specified in Division 26. B. Pump controls are specified in Division 26, Section 26 09 00—Controls and Instrumentation of these specifications. Pump manufacturer shall review these controls and coordinate with Division 26. 2.15 FINISHES A. It is the intent of these specifications that the submersible pumps be furnished shop-primed and factory-finished painted. Priming and finish painting shall be as recommended by manufacturer and shall be suitable for the uses described in these specifications. Touch-up paint shall be provided by manufacturer. Section 43 25 10-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.16 ANCHOR BOLTS A. CONTRACTOR shall provide anchor bolts necessary for equipment `urnished. Anchor bolts shall be 316 stainless steel and be of ample strength for the intended service. Provide anchor bolts in accordance with Division 05. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Refer to requirements specified in Division 01 for field installatior , testing, quality assurance, and start-up. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's directions as supplemented herein. C. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the proper location of wet well floor door in the wet well top slab, placement of the davit crane, and all associated pump accessories to facilitate installation and removal of pumps. Locations shall be suitable to meet current design conditions without interference. D. A minimum of two trips and two days on site per trip shall be provided by a representative of the pump manufacturer for startup and training. 3.02 PUMP TESTING A. Factory Test: Each pump shall be fully performance tested w th water in the manufacturer's facility in accordance with the Standards of the Hyc'aulic Institute to determine compliance with the rated conditions. The pump tests shall be witnessed by CITY at CITY's option. Notify CITY at least three weeks in advance regarding the proposed test dates and location. Certified test curves, test data, and computations shall be submitted for approval prior to shipment and shall include the following. Pump performance curves for each of the speeds needed to meet the specified operating conditions defined under Section 1.02(B). Each pump performance curve shall include at least four operating points and shall show: 1. Head versus Discharge. 2. Pump Efficiency. 3. Break Horsepower. 4. NPSHr for maximum flow conditions. 5. Hydrostatic pressure test for casing at 100 psi. B. Installed Test: Prior to startup at CITY's facility, manufacturer's represer tative shall certify -- that equipment has been properly aligned and installed, first using water and also using intended fluid. During equipment startup, manufacturer's representative shall confirm each pump is operating properly as specified. Report shall be submitted verifying test. Pump shall be modified if specified conditions are not met. C. Start-Up Tests: The pump manufacturer shall perform the following inspections and tests on each pump at start-up: 1. Impeller, motor rating, and electrical connections shall first be checked for compliance to the specifications. 2. A motor and cable insulation test for moisture content or insulation 6Yfects. 3. Verify correct rotation. 4. Verify proper voltage. Section 43 25 10-8 4463.004/City Contract No.994 5. Verify proper current draw on each phase. 6. Verify thermal sensor trip will shut down motor in Hand and Auto mode. 7. A written certified test report giving the above information shall be supplied after start-up. END OF SECTION Section 43 25 10-9 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 43 41 45 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC CHEMICAL TANKS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: This section includes providing and placing into successful operation five single-wall filament-wound fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP) chemical storage tanks as shown on the drawings. Tanks T-10-40-1 and T-10-40-2 shall be located in the Chemical Storage Building (Structure 300) and shall be used for storing ferric chloride, ferrous chloride, or alum. Tanks T-14-8-1 through T-14-8-3 shall be located in the Dewatering Building (Structure 330) and shall be used for storing liquid emulsion polymer. Provide all labor, equipment, and material for complete and proper installation, testing, a )d start-up for the storage tank. B. Tanks T-10-40-1 and T-10-40-2 are included in Bid Alternative No. 2. C. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: Tanks T-10-40-1 and T-10-40-2 shall be used to store either 37% to 42%ferric chloride (FeCl3) (ferric), ±30% ferrous chloride (FeCl2) (ferrous) or 50% aluminum sulfate (Al2(SO4)3) (alum) solution. Tanks T-14-8-1 through T-14-8-3 sha be used to store liquid emulsion polymer with an activity range of 40 to 50%. B. Performance Requirements: 1 . Tanks shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D-3299-88. 2. Tanks shall be inert to the chemical being stored. 3. Tanks T-10-40-1 and T-10-40-2 shall be capable of storing ferric, ferr:)us, or alum. Tank shall have minimum capacity of 4,996 gallons to the overflow. 4. Tanks T-14-8-1 through T-14-8-3 shall be capable of storing liquid f:Tmulsion polymer. Tanks shall have a minimum capacity of 2,500 gallons to overflow. 1.03 WARRANTY A. The tank manufacturer shall warranty the tanks and all appurtenances against defects in workmanship and against chemical incompatibility for a period of 5 years. -he warranty shall — be in printed form. - PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The chemical tanks shall be similar in construction and physical appearance and shall be manufactured by Belding Tank Technologies, Inc. of Belding Michigan, Plas-Tanks of Fairfield Ohio, or equal. Section 43 41 45-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. The drawings and specifications were prepared based on Belding Tank Technologies. CONTRACTOR shall include in the Bid and shall be responsible for the cost of any changes to accommodate other equipment including, but not limited to, structural and mechanical work. CONTRACTOR shall also pay any additional costs necessary for revisions of drawings and/or specifications by CONSULTANT. 2.02 GENERAL A. It is the intent of this specification that the tank provided be capable of storing the listed chemicals at the specified concentrations at room temperature; manufacturer shall certify. Tanks shall have like appearance in shape, color, and accessories provided with the tank. 2.03 TANK CONSTRUCTION A. All materials used for construction of the tanks and accessories shall be compatible with the chemical being stored. Tank shall be a grade 1 vinylester resin. B. Tanks T-10-40-1 and T-10-40-2 shall have an inside diameter of 9 feet. Tanks T-14-8-1 through T-14-8-3 shall have an inside diameter of 6 feet. C. A boxout shall be provided on the concrete tank base to allow clearance/support for the side discharge flange on each tank as shown on the drawings. CONTRACTOR shall confirm size and location of the boxout with the equipment manufacturer. Side discharge flange shall allow complete drainage of tank. D. Tie down lugs shall be constructed of FRP with 316 stainless steel clamps, anchor bolts, and nuts. An adequate number of tie down lugs and anchor bolts shall be provided to prevent floatation of tanks in the event that the respective containment area is filled with chemical solution contained in tank to a depth of 3 feet. Provide anchor bolts in accordance with Division 05. E. Lift lugs shall be constructed of FRP. F. Tanks T-10-40-1 and T-10-40-2 shall be provided with reinforced inlet and outlet nozzles, vents, and other penetrations as shown below and on the drawings. Angle from Size Reference Line Component Purpose (inches) Location (degrees) Flanged Nozzle Vent 8 Top Center N/A Flanged Nozzle Level Transducer 6 Top 0 Flanged Nozzle Fill 2 Top 180 Flanged Nozzle Discharge 3 Side 135 Flanged Nozzle Overflow 4 Side 90 Manway with Bolt Service Entry On Cover 24 Top 315 Section 43 41 45-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 G. Tanks T-14-8-1 through T-14-8-3 shall be provided with reinforced inlet end outlet nozzles, vents, and other penetrations as shown below and on the drawings. Angle from Size Reference Line Component Purpose (inches) Location (degrees) Flanged Nozzle Vent 6 Top Center N/A Flanged Nozzle Level Transducer 6 Top 45 Flanged Nozzle Fill 4 Top 180 Flanged Nozzle Discharge 2 Side 180 Flanged Nozzle Overflow 270 (T-14-8-1), 90 and 270 (T-14-8-2), 4 Side 90 (T-14-8-3) Flanged Nozzle Future 6 Top 270 with Blind Flange Sight Glass Chemical Depth As Required Side 225 Manway with Bolt Service Entry On Cover 24 Top 90 H. All flanged nozzles shall be full plate gusseted. I. Gaskets for manways shall be EPDM. All hardware for the manway shall be FRP. J. Each tank shall be provided with a sight glass assembly and calibrated gradation strip incremented in gallons for measuring the volume of the chemical in the tank. Calibration strip shall be marked at a minimum of 100-gallon increments. K. A sight glass assembly shall include isolation PVC union ball valves and pipe support brackets for easy replacement of 1-inch sight glass. Sight glass to be 1-inch schedule 40 clear PVC. Location shall be as shown on drawings. L. The laminate comprising the structural tank (bottom head, sidewall, and top head) shall consist of four separate laminates. These are the inner surface and the interior layer which make up the corrosion barrier, the structural layer, and the outer surface. M. The inner surface exposed to the chemical environment shall be a resin-r ch layer 0.010- to 0.020-inch-thick reinforced with a surfacing veil. The glass content shall :)e 10% by weight maximum in this layer. N. The interior layer shall consist of a resin-rich laminate reinforced with choved strands. The glass content shall be 27%, 5% by weight. The combined thickness of the inner surface and the interior layer shall not be less than 0.100 inches. O. Subsequent reinforcement shall be continuous strand roving. Glass content of the filament wound structural layer shall be 60% to 70% by weight. The thickness of the filament wound portion of the tank shell will vary with tank height (tapered wall construction). If additional axial strength is required, the use of chopped strands or unidirectional glass strands interspersed between wind layers is acceptable. Section 43 41 45-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 P. Exterior shall be finished with a 10 mil thick translucent protective resin coating for spill protection with ultraviolet inhibitors. Q. Provide external 4-inch overflow pipe on each tank as shown on drawings. 2.04 FINISHES A. All exposed metal surfaces, including stainless steel components shall be field primed and coated per Division 09 for carbon steel. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. See Division 01 for requirements related to equipment installation, field quality control, testing, supervision, and startup. 3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Provide two layers of 30-pound roofing felt as a buffer between base pad and tank bottom. B. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate tank installation with existing clearances to avoid conflicts. C. Chemical-resistant coating shall be in place and allowed to properly cure prior to installation -- of tanks. 3.03 WATER TEST A. CONTRACTOR shall water-test all fiberglass reinforced plastic chemical tanks. B. Prior to filling bulk storage tanks, batch, and day tanks with appropriate chemicals, each tank shall be filled with water for a period of at least seven days in order to observe that each tank is watertight. If any tank leaks, it shall be replaced or repaired by a factory trained representative to the satisfaction of CITY, and retested until no leakage occurs. END OF SECTION Section 43 41 45-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 46 24 13 MACERATORS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section includes furnishing/relocating, installing and placing into successful operation three in-line macerators (M-10-27-1, M-10-27-2, and M-10-27-3) for macerating a combination of thickened waste activated sludge, primary scum, and primary sludge. The macerators and appurtenances shall be furnished by the same supplier. Each macerator shall be complete with all control equipment, accessories, and appurtenances specified, indicated on the drawings, or otherwise required for a complete, properly operating installation. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shill govern work in this section. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The macerator shall macerate a mixture of primary scum, primary sludge, and thickened waste activated sludge before it is fed into anaerobic digesters. The blended sludge will be at a concentration of 0.5% to 5.0%. Macerators shall be located in the Pump Rooms of the Digester Feed Building (Structure 190). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for motors associated with equipment specified in this section shall include data sheets from the motor manufacturer. Data sheets from the equipmen. manufacturer or supplier are not acceptable. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of 1 year from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substantial Completion of the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Equipment shall be Multichopper Model P300 as manufactured by Boerger, LLC, of Chanhassen, Minnesota, or equal. This listed equipment is part of the Base Bid as indicated on the Bid pages and will be considered as establishing the type, function, appearance, and quality required, as defined in the General Conditions. -- Section 46 24 13-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. The drawings and specifications were prepared based on Boerger. CONTRACTOR shall include in the Bid and shall be responsible for the cost of any changes, including engineering changes, to accommodate the other Base Bid equipment including, but not limited to, structural, mechanical, and electrical work. C. CONTRACTOR may provide Alternative Bids for equipment from other manufacturers by writing their name into the blank(s) provided on the Bid form. CONTRACTOR shall comply with all provisions regarding substitute items and shall include in the Bid and be responsible for the cost of any changes to accommodate substitute equipment including, but not limited to, structural, mechanical, and electrical work. CONTRACTOR shall also pay costs of engineering services for review of substitutes and for revisions of drawings and/or specifications by CONSULTANT to accommodate substitutes. 2.02 GENERAL A. Products Description: 1. All equipment shall be designed and built for 24-hour continuous service at any and all points within the specified range of operation, without overheating and without excessive vibration or strain. 2. Performance Requirements: a. Flow through unit: 250 gpm. b. Fluid temperature: 60 to 95°F. c. Suction condition: In-line. d. Maximum size of particle passing macerator: 3/8-inch. e. Nominal size of suction and discharge pipe: 8-inch. f. Maximum head loss through unit at max flow: 1.0 psi. g. Maximum working pressure: 50 psig. h. Minimum hydrostatic test pressure: 100 psig. 3. Single, rotating shaft, in-line macerators shall be used to reduce particle size of blended sludge. The macerator design shall be as flexible as possible, enabling various through flow conditions. The macerator shall not have a predetermined fluid flow direction and shall be able to allow internal bypass for emergencies. 4. The equipment will be installed in the in-line configuration in a horizontal pipeline as indicated on the Drawings. Inlet and outlet connections to the equipment shall be flanged. The motor shall be mounted in a horizontal position suitable to meet the space constraints of the existing area. B. Materials: Requirements for materials shall be as follows: 1. Body: ASTM 570 Carbon Steel. 2. Shafts: AISI 4140 heat treated steel. 3. Knife Blades: AISI D2 hardened steel with minimum 50 Rockwell "C." 4. Seals: Mechanical seals shall be maintenance free. Mechanical seals shall be quenched with Duronit seal faces. C. Components: 1. Macerator body: a. The macerator body shall have a flanged cleanout handhole. Inlet and outlet of the macerator shall not be less than the nominal size of suction and discharge pipe. b. The macerator body shall be provided with ANSI 150-pound flanged inlet and outlet connections manufactured from ASTM A570 carbon steel. The flanges shall be designed to allow change of fluid flow direction through the macerator or to Section 46 24 13-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 allow fluid not to be macerated in case of emergencies (fluid shall bypass the cutter blade). c. The macerator shall be designed for a hydrostatic pressure cf 100 psi without leaking. 2. Separation chamber option: Lighter solids shall be macerated and passed to the discharge side. Heavier objects shall fall into a separation chamber where they can be easily accessed and removed. 3. Bearings: The macerator shall be provided with grease-lubricated sleeve, ball, or ball- and roller-type bearings. The bearings and seals shall be housed in replaceable wear sleeves. 4. Cutting device: a. The cutting device shall consist of a knife head, enabling three cuts per rotation at even-spaced intervals of 120 degrees for improved macerating results. b. The knife head shall be equipped with three knife blades. The blades shall be useable from four sides before they have to be replaced. Material of construction shall be AISI D2 with a hardness of minimum 50 Rockwell C. 5. Quick release cover: a. The quick release cover shall be mounted to the casing with four eye nuts for easy access and shall be opened without removal of drive or pipe syst_?m. b. Macerators with the cutting assembly mounted to the cover, feeding hydraulic support for opening, shall not be acceptable. 6. Mechanical seal: a. The inline Multichopper shall be fitted with a maintenance-free mechanical seal quenched by an oil-filled intermediate chamber (quench for lubrication and cooling). The intermediate chamber shall also indicate when a seal failure occurs and fluid penetrates through the seal. b. The geared motor shall be sealed to the intermediate chamber with a radial ring type seal. D. Fabrication: 1. Equipment furnished under this section shall be fabricated, assembled in full conformity with drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by CONSULTANT. 2. Balance: All rotating parts shall be accurately machined and shall be in as nearly perfect rotational balance as practicable. There shall be no significant change in vibration and noise level over the entire listed range of operating conditions of operating conditions of the macerating system. Excessive vibration shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the equipment. The mass of the unit and its distribution shall be such that resonance at normal operating speeds is avoided. 2.03 MOTORS A. Motors shall conform to all applicable requirements of NEMA, ANSI, IEEE, and NEC _ standards and shall be UL listed for the service specified. Section 46 24 13-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Motors provided for the equipment scheduled below shall meet the following requirements. Motors shall not be loaded beyond nominal rating, not including service factor, at any design condition. 1. Physical construction: a. Copper leads and windings with ball or roller bearings in end brackets of steel or cast iron or aluminum brackets with steel bearing sleeves. Motor leads shall have the same insulation class as the windings. b. Rotor bars shall be aluminum. c. Motor shaft shall be high-strength steel protected by a bronze shaft sleeve secured to the shaft to prevent rotation. The maximum allowable no-load shaft runout shall be 0.002 inch. d. Motors shall be equipped with grease fittings and automatic grease reliefs. Bearings shall be prelubricated and field-regreasable. Openings for addition of grease shall have grease fittings provided. 2. Mounting: Horizontal. --- 3. Enclosure: TEFC. 4. Efficiency: Premium efficiency as noted in schedule below. 5. Service Factor: 1.15. 6. Power requirements: 60 Hz, three-phase, 230/460 volts, factory wired for 460-volt connection, ±10% voltage variation. 7. Load type: Constant torque. 8. NEMA Design: B. 9. Insulation: Class F. 10. Nominal operating speed: See motor schedule. 11. Nameplate: Stainless steel engraved attached to motor frame or enclosure with stainless steel rivets. 12. Conduit/Junction Box: Cast iron, diagonally-split, fully-rotatable, gasketed between cover and box, and between box and frame. Motor lead opening in the frame shall also be gasketed. A clamp-type terminal shall be provided inside each motor conduit box. 13. Accessories: a. Oversized motor junction box. b. Lifting eyes. C. Motor Schedule: If motor horsepower is increased to meet the requirements of this specifications, CONTRACTOR is responsible for increasing all wiring, starters, drives, and other electrical components as required by Code, at no additional cost to CITY. Macerator Horsepower Nominal Speed Efficiency M-10-27-1 5 1,800 89.5% M-10-27-2 5 1,800 89.5% M-10-27-3 5 1,800 89.5% 2.04 CONTROLS A. All equipment and controls specified to be furnished with the equipment shall comply with the requirements of Section 40 70 00. B. Each sludge macerator shall be provided with a 480-volt local motor starter panel for controlling and operating the macerator. The panel shall include a combination full voltage reversing motor starter, NEMA-rated three-phase contactor with solid-state thermal overloads, 120-volt AC coil, and main circuit breaker disconnect. The starter shall be Section 46 24 13-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 NEMA Size 1. Terminals and internal wiring shall be provided in the starter enclosure to accommodate all incoming and outgoing wiring. C. Provide a current sensing switch for jam condition detection based on amperage increase. Settings for current sensing switch shall be set by manufacturer. D. The door-mounted controls for each macerator shall consist of an "Hand.Off-Auto" selector switch with locking device; "Forward-Off-Reverse" selector switch; ar emergency stop push button; a "Reset" push button; and green (run), amber (stop), and red (alarm) indicating lights on the cover. The macerator shall be equipped for ccntrol by the plant SCADA system when the selector switch is in the "Auto" position. E. The macerator shall be controlled from the motor starter panel controller .is follows: 1. H-O-A selector switch: a. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Hand" position, the motor -hall be controlled from the F-O-R selector switch. b. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Off' position, the motor shall be inoperable. c. With the H-O-A selector switch in the "Auto" position, the motor shall be controlled by a "Macerator Required" signal from the Plant SCADA System as follows: (1) When the "Macerator Required" signal is received from the plant SCADA system, the macerator shall start and run in the forward direction. When a jam is detected (via current sensing switch), the macerator shall shut down. Once the macerator is shut down, the macerator shall start and run in the reverse direction for a time delay. When the time delay expires, the macerator shall shut down. Once the macerator is shut down, the macerator shall start and run in the forward direction. If a jam is detected, the above control shall be repeated. If a total of five jam events happen within the manufacturer-recommended time period, the macerator shall shut down and a "Macerator Fail/Jam" signal shall be activated at the macerator control panel and the plant SCADA system. 2. F-O-R selector switch: a. With the F-O-R selector switch in the "Forward" position, the motor shall operate in the forward direction bypassing all controls, unless noted otherwise. b. With the F-O-R selector switch in the "Off' position, the motor shall be inoperable. c. With the F-O-R selector switch in the "Reverse" position, the motor shall operate in the reverse direction. Reverse position shall be spring-return to the off position. F. Isolated dry contacts shall be available from the macerator's controls to remotely indicate the following conditions: Contacts shall be rated for at least 10 amperes, '20 volts AC. 1. Macerator Running Forward. 2. Macerator Running Reverse. 3. Macerator Failure (starter overload and jam). 4. "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switch in "Auto." 5. Macerator Emergency Stop Activated. 2.05 SPARE PARTS A. The following spare parts for the macerator shall be furnished in substantial wooden boxes with identifying labels and stored at the plant site where requested by CITY. 1. Three sets of mechanical seals. 2. Three sets of 0-rings/gaskets. 3. One set of knives/cutters per unit. Section 46 24 13-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 4. One set of special tools. 5. Three shear plates. 2.06 FINISHES A. It is the intent of this specification that all equipment, supports, and appurtenances shall be furnished factory shop-primed, clean, and ready to accept finish painting by CONTRACTOR with a minimal amount of surface preparation. Preparation and painting shall conform to all requirements and provisions specified in Division 09. Unless otherwise specified, mechanical equipment and accessories shall be furnished with all surfaces (except galvanized, stainless steel, rubber, copper, PVC) prepared in accordance with near white grade SSPC Specification No. 10 removing all dirt, rust scale, and foreign materials. Surface preparation shall be done at such time during the assembly process to preclude damage to the equipment once assembled. Cleaned surfaces shall then be factory shop-primed. Factory shop-priming shall be with one coat of Tnemec N69-1255 Hi-Build Epoxoline primer, or equal, applied to a minimum of 5.0 mils dry thickness. Primer used shall be compatible with proposed finish coats; CONTRACTOR shall verify. Motors and speed reducers shall be factory shop-primed and finished-painted using the manufacturer's standard paint system for the specified application. 2.07 ANCHOR BOLTS A. Provide all anchor bolts required for equipment furnished. Anchor bolts shall be 316 stainless steel of ample strength for the intended service. Provide anchor bolts in accordance with Division 05. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Refer to requirements specified in Division 01 for equipment installation, quality control, testing, supervision, start-up, and operator training. B. A minimum of two trips and four days on site shall be provided for startup and training services. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. The macerator shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings. The macerator shall be totally supported by the structure and shall not impart any load on the connecting piping. END OF SECTION Section 46 24 13-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 46 33 33 POLYMER FEED EQUIPMENT PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: This section includes furnishing, installing, and placing into successful operation six complete polymer feed systems. Three complete polymer feed systems (M-10-20-01, M-10-20-2, and M-10-20-3) shall be used in conjunction with three gravity belt thickeners (M-10-12-1, M-10-12-2, and M-10-12-3). Three complete polymer feed systems (M-14-8-1, M-14-8-2, and M-14-8-3) shall be used in conjunction with two dewatering centrifuges (M-14-2-1 and M-14-2-2) and one belt filter press (M-14-2-3). Polymer systems M-10-20-1 through M-10-20-3 shall be installed in the Thickener Building (Structure 180). Polymer systems M-14-8-1 through M-14-8-3 shall be installed in the Dewatering Building (Structure 330). The polymer feed systems and appurtenances shall be furnished by the same supplier. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements (M-10-20-1, M-10-20-2, and M-10-20-3): 1. M-10-20-1, M-10-20-2, and M-10-20-3 shall be capable of pumping emulsion polymer from a 275-gallon totes. 2. Emulsion polymer feed rate range: 0.15 to 3 gallons per hour per gra✓ity belt thickener. 3. Made-up emulsion polymer feed concentration 0.2% to 0.3%. 4. Emulsion polymer activity range: 40% to 50%. 5. Dilution water provided up to 20 gpm at 70 psi per unit. Provide booster pump if higher pressure dilution water is required. B. Design Requirements (M-14-8-1, M-14-8-2, and M-14-8-3): 1. M-14-8-1, M-14-8-2, and M-14-8-3 shall be capable of pumping emulsion polymer from one of three 2,500-gallon storage tanks. 2. Emulsion polymer feed rate: 0.75 to 15 gallons per hour per dewater ng centrifuge and 0.25 to 15 gallons per hour per belt filter press. 3. Made-up emulsion polymer feed concentration 0.25 to 0.5 %. 4. Emulsion polymer activity range: 40% to 50%. 5. Dilution water provided up to 80 gpm at 140 psi per unit. Provide booster pump is higher pressure dilution water is required. C. Performance Requirements: 1. M-10-20-1, M-10-20-2, and M-10-20-3 shall be capable of supplying 3 gallons per hour emulsion polymer. The entire flow shall pass through the preparation unit. Following preparation of mixing, the polymer leaving the mixer shall be ready for feed to gravity belt thickeners M-10-12-1, M-10-12-2, or M-10-12-3. — 2. M-14-8-1, M-14-8-2, and M-14-8-3 shall be capable of supplying 15 gallons per hour emulsion polymer. The entire flow shall pass through the preparation unit. Following preparation of mixing, the polymer leaving the mixer shall be ready for feed to either centrifuge M-14-2-1 or M-14-2-2 or belt filter press M-14-2-3. Section 46 33 33-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for motors associated with equipment specified in this section shall include data sheets from the motor manufacturer. Data sheets from the equipment manufacturer or supplier are not acceptable. 1 .04 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substantial Completion of the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The polymer feed systems shall be manufactured by VeloDyne-Velocity Dynamics of Louisville, Colorado, UGSI Chemical Feed, Inc.—Fluid Dynamics of North Wales, Pennsylvania, or equal. This listed equipment is part of the Base Bid as indicated on the Bid pages and will be considered as establishing the type, function, appearance, and quality required, as defined in the General Conditions. B. The drawings were prepared based on VeloDyne-Velocity Dynamics. CONTRACTOR shall include in the Bid and shall be responsible for the cost of any changes, including engineering changes, to accommodate the other Base Bid equipment including, but not limited to, -- structural, mechanical, and electrical work. C. CONTRACTOR may provide Alternative Bids for equipment from other manufacturers by writing their name into the blank(s) provided on the Bid form. CONTRACTOR shall comply with all provisions regarding substitute items and shall include in the Bid and be responsible for the cost of any changes to accommodate substitute equipment including, but not limited to, structural, mechanical, and electrical work. CONTRACTOR shall also pay costs of engineering services for review of substitutes and for revisions of drawings and/or specifications by CONSULTANT to accommodate substitutes. 2.02 NEAT POLYMER CHECK VALVE A. Provide a neat polymer check valve specifically designed to isolate neat polymer from dilution water. The valve shall be designed with an open, unobstructed path to the valve seat. Minimum area to valve seat shall be 0.1875-inch. The valve body shall be constructed of Teflon and the ball shall be stainless steel. The valve shall be readily accessible for cleaning and shall be easily disassembled. Conventional check valves and/or check valves that are installed inside the mixing chamber or that require mixing chamber disassembly for servicing will not be accepted. Section 46 33 33-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.03 POLYMER BLENDING A. Each mixer shall be driven by a 90-volt DC, 1/2 hp (M-10-20-X) or 1 hp (M-14-8-X), washdown-duty motor to drive a blending mixer impeller. Motor speed shall be controlled by and factory-prewired to an SCR controller in the associated polymer feed system control panel. 2.04 DILUTION WATER ASSEMBLY A. A 1 1/2-inch Sch 80 PVC 150 lb flange dilution water inlet connection stall be provided to allow a maximum total flow of 50 gpm. B. The dilution water flow rate shall be monitored by a rotameter type flow meter having a range of 5 to 50 gpm for M-14-8-1 through M-14-8-3 and a range of 2 to 20 gpm for M-10-20-1 through M-20-20-3. A union shall be provided on the rotameter to allow easy removal for cleaning. A globe valve shall be provided to adjust the flow of the dilution water line. C. Unit shall have a NEMA 4X solenoid valve for on/off control of total dilution water flow. Valve body shall be constructed of brass. Solenoid valve shall be 115 Vac, 60 Hz, single-phase and be factory-prewired to the associated polymer feed system control panel. Valve shall be powered to open when the polymer pump runs and be de-energized to close when the polymer pump shuts down. Solenoid valve assemblies shall be Dura Valve, DynaQuip, or Belimo. D. Provide a 2 1/2-inch stainless steel liquid filled pressure gauge to monitor dilution water inlet pressure. E. Provide a low water differential alarm pressure switch c s specified in Section 26 09 00—Controls and Instrumentation. Pressure switch shall be adjustable from 9 to 60 psid and be factory-prewired to the associated polymer feed systerr control panel. 2.05 NEAT POLYMER METERING PUMPS A. Each unit shall have one progressive cavity-type neat polymer metering pump integrally mounted on the system skid. Each pump shall be constructed of a 316 stainless steel rotor and Viton stator. Each pump shall have a continuous output range as indicated in the table below. Each pump shall be mounted to the frame with a 304 stainless steel bracket that positions the pump suction no more than 18 inches off the base to me ntain ideal pump suction conditions. B. Pumps shall be capable of providing a flow, listed in the table below, of high viscosity polymers (1,000 to 100,000 cps) to the disperser of the polymer preparation unit at the pressure required by the polymer feed system. Each pump shall have a 20:1 operating range. Polymer Feed System Flow Rate Range(gph) M-10-20-1 through M-10-20-3 0.15-3 M-14-8-1 through M-14-8-3 0.75-15 Section 46 33 33-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Each pump shall be driven by a 90-volt DC, 1/2 hp, washdown-duty motor. The pump speed shall be controlled by and factory-prewired to an SCR controller in the associated polymer feed system control panel. D. Provide a calibration column with two full port PVC ball valves having Viton 0-rings. The column shall be calibrated for a one minute draw-down and read in gph and milliliters. E. Provide a high pressure switch as specified in Section 26 09 00—Controls and Instrumentation on the discharge of the pump. F. Provide a loss of polymer flow sensor. 2.06 SOLUTION DISCHARGE ASSEMBLY A. A 1 1/2-inch Sch 80 PVC 150 lb flange dilution water inlet connection shall be provided. B. Pressure Gauges: Provide a pressure gauge to monitor system pressure. Pressure gauges shall be Ashcroft, or equal, and shall have scale in psi with a maximum range equal to twice the normal operating pressure. Gauges shall have 4-inch minimum diameter stainless steel case, shall be connected to a mineral-oil filled diaphragm housing to separate the gauge from liquid in discharge line, and shall have accuracy of ±1%. Provide isolation valve and union at connection to pipe to allow the gauges to be removed while the line is under pressure. Gauges shall be mounted to permit pressure readings from operating floor. 2.07 FRAME/SKID A. The system's frame shall be of rugged stainless steel construction. No mild steel shall be used. The skid shall be constructed of 3/16-inch minimum 304 stainless steel. The frame shall be constructed of 3/16-inch angle or structural stainless steel tubing. The panel supporting the control panel shall be a minimum of 12 ga. Vertical frame members shall be gusseted.All pipe supports shall be stainless steel. Piping and valves shall be mounted with rigid pipe clamps. The skid shall have holes for mounting to concrete pad. B. All components of each dilution/feed assembly, including pump, drive, control devices and instruments, and local control panel shall be preplumbed and prewired. 2.08 CONTROLS A. All equipment and controls specified to be furnished with the equipment shall comply with the requirements of Section 40 70 00. B. Provide a NEMA 4X, FRP control panel factory mounted to the polymer system skid and pre-wired to all skid motors and controls. The control panel shall have all logic controllers, SCR motor controllers, digital displays, potentiometers, switches, lights, relays, and other control devices as required for a functioning system. C. Polymer system control panel shall have the following devices on the front of the control panel enclosure: 1. System On-Off/Reset-Remote selector switch. 2. Manual mixer speed control potentiometer. 3. Manual polymer metering pump speed potentiometer (ten turn). 4. Polymer metering pump flow display (signal based on pump speed). Section 46 33 33-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 5. Green power on indicating light. 6. Red "low water differential pressure" alarm indicating light. 7. Red "low polymer flow" alarm indicating light. 8. Red "high polymer discharge pressure" indicating light. D. Polymer system control panel shall receive the following inputs from the SCADA System: 1. Polymer system start/stop command (discrete dry contact). 2. Polymer system pacing speed signal (analog 4-20mA). E. Polymer system control panel shall provide the following outputs to the &CADA System: 1. Polymer system running (discrete dry contact). 2. Polymer system "in remote" (discrete dry contact). 3. Polymer system common alarm (discrete dry contact) active when ar y system alarm is active. 4. Polymer system high discharge pressure alarm (discrete dry contact;. 5. Polymer metering pump speed feedback (analog, 4-20mA). F. Control panel shall accept 120-volt AC, single-phase, 20-amp hardwired branch circuit power. Provide a main control panel circuit breaker and a dedicated circuit breaker for each motor. G. All conduit and wiring from the polymer system control panel to the associated polymer system devices shall be factory-prewired or provided by Section 46 33 33-Polymer Feed Equipment Supplier. H. Electrical devices, terminal blocks, selector switches, indicating lights, etc. for this equipment are specified under Section 40 70 00—Controls and Instrumentation Equipment of these specifications. 2.09 ACCESSORIES A. Calibration Cylinder: A metering pump calibration assembly shall be provided. The calibration assembly shall have both ml calibrations and direct reading flow in gallons per hour based on one-minute drawdown. The calibration column shall be integrally mounted to the system and installed such that it is openly accessible for reading. The calibration column shall be rigidly mounted to the system frame. Supporting the calibration column by polymer piping is not acceptable. B. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Provide two pressure-reducing valves for installation in the dilution water line. Pressure-reducing valve shall be constructed of bronze with adjustable output pressure of 25 to 75 psig to reduce incoming line pressure variations. -- Pressure-reducing valve shall be as manufactured by Watts. 2.'10 PIPING AND VALVES A. All piping and valves shall conform to Section 40 23 10—Piping and AppL rtenances. Piping and fittings shall be Schedule 80 PVC. B. Provide strainer and all unions, piping, and appurtenances to connect to emulsion polymer bulk tank and emulsion polymer totes. Section 46 33 33-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.11 SPARE PARTS A. CONTRACTOR shall provide, along with the shop drawings, a list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts for the specified equipment. The list shall include a description of each spare part, current pricing, and expected delivery time for each part. No spare parts shall be provided by CONTRACTOR/manufacturer as part of this Contract. 2.12 FINISHES A. It is the intent of these specifications that equipment, support and accessories be furnished factory shop-primed and finish-painted. Equipment and appurtenances shall be prepared in accordance with commercial grade SSPC specifications No. 6. Priming and finish painting shall be as recommended by manufacturer and shall be suitable for corrosive atmosphere. Touchup paint shall be provided by manufacturer. 2.13 ANCHOR BOLTS A. Provide all anchor bolts required for equipment furnished.Anchor bolts shall be 316 stainless steel of ample strength for the intended service. Provide anchor bolts in accordance with Division 05. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Refer to requirements specified in Division 01 for equipment installation, quality control, testing, supervision, startup, and operator training. Comply with additional requirements as specified below. B. A minimum of two trips and two days on site shall be provided for startup and training services. END OF SECTION Section 46 33 33-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 46 33 42 CHEMICAL PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL EQUIPMENT (BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 2) PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. This section includes providing and placing into successful operation two chemical feed systems including all accessories. Provide all equipment and material for complete and proper installation. The pumps and appurtenances shall be furnished by the same supplier. 2. The phosphorus removal chemical (PRC) schematic included in the drawings is only intended to show the minimum level of equipment, piping, etc., required to provide complete feed systems. The chemical feed system supplier shall verify that this schematic has been reviewed and indicate any additional equipment that may be required. Any equipment that is not shown on the schematic, but is required, shall be included in the Bid and submitted with the shop drawings. Shop drawings, including piping drawings drawn to scale and a bill of materials, shall be submitted for review. Supplier shall provide a complete, to-scale layout drawing of the chemical feed systems. Supplier shall verify that drawing is complete with respect to required system -ti components and dimensions of equipment supplied. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 sh:all govern work in this section. 1.D2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Two chemical feed pumps (P-10-41-1 and P-10-41-2) shall be used for pumping of either 37%to 42%ferric chloride (FeCl3) (ferric), ±30%ferrous chloride (FeCl2) (ferrous), — or 50% aluminum sulfate (Al2(SO4)3) (alum) to the phosphorus removal locations as indicated on the drawings. These pumps will be installed in the Chemical Room of the Chemical Building. 2. Chemical feed system equipment shall be rugged with all components designed for long and continuous operation under corrosive working conditions. All wearing parts and items requiring adjustment shall be readily accessible. 3. To provide redundancy, only one pump shall be required to be it operation at the maximum required chemical demand rate. 4. Chemical metering pumps shall be provided with the necessary pipir g, unions, valves, and appurtenances so that either pump in the pair shall be able to ope-ate in its intended service by simply turning the pump on without operating any valves manually. Pumps and appurtenances shall be prewired for ease of installation. �- Section 46 33 42-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Description: 1. Pumps shall be positive displacement peristaltic type complete with self-contained variable speed drive, and flexible extruded tube as specified. 2. Peristaltic pumping action shall be created by the compression of the flexible tube between the pump head rollers and track, including forward fluid displacement within the tube by the rotation of the pump rotor, and subsequent vacuum-creating restitution of the tube. 3. Pumps shall be capable of being run down without damaging effects to pump or hose, and shall have a maximum suction lift capability of up to 30-foot water column. Maximum pressure rating shall be 110 psi. 4. Pumps shall use no internal check valves or diaphragms and shall require no dynamic seals in contact with the chemical pumped. Process chemical shall be contained within pump tubing and shall not directly contact any rotary or metallic components. 5. Flow shall be in the direction of the rotor rotation, which can be reversed without flow variation and shall be proportional to rotor speed. C. Performance Requirements: Pumps shall meet or exceed the following performance criteria: Capacity Motor Maximum Chemical Service Tubing Range Maximum Pressure Pump No. (% by weight) Tubing ID Material (gph) rpm psi P-10-41-1 and 37%-42% Ferric 0.187 inch Flex-a- 0.0019 - 125 110 P-10-41-2 Chloride (FeCl2) Prene® 19.0 ±30% Ferrous Chloride (FeCl2) 50% Aluminum Sulfate (AI2(SO4)3) 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for motors associated with equipment specified in this section shall include data sheets from the motor manufacturer. Data sheets from the equipment manufacturer or supplier are not acceptable. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of five years from the date of Substantial Completion of the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Chemical metering pumps and appurtenances shall be as manufactured by Blue-White Industries, Ltd. of Huntington Beach, CA, or equal. This listed equipment is part of the Base Bid as indicated on the Bid pages and will be considered as establishing the type, function, appearance, and quality required as defined in the General Conditions. _ B. The Drawings and Specifications were prepared based on Blue-White Industries, Ltd. of Huntington Beach, CA. CONTRACTOR shall include in the Bid and shall be responsible for the cost of any changes, including engineering changes, to accommodate the other Base Bid equipment including but not limited to structural, mechanical, or electrical work. Section 46 33 42-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. CONTRACTOR may provide Alternative Bids for equipment from other manufacturers by writing their name into the blank(s) provided on the Bid form. CONTRACTOR shall comply with all provisions regarding substitute items and shall include in the Bid and be responsible for the cost of any changes to accommodate substitute equipment including but not limited to structural, mechanical, and electrical work. CONTRACTOR shall also pay costs of engineering services for review of substitutes and for revisions of drawings and/or specifications by CONSULTANT to accommodate substitutes. 2.J2 PUMP CONSTRUCTION A. Pumps shall be of the positive displacement, peristaltic type tubing pumps. B. Pumping heads shall consist of a single unbroken track with clear removable cover ratchet type tube retainer mechanism, and squeeze roller rotor assembly. All components exposed to chemicals shall be selected by manufacturer based on chemical being pumped. C. Pump shall be provided with a leak detector in the pump head that will shut down the pump when liquid is present in the pump head and send a dry contact alarm to the SCADA system. D. The rotor assembly shall be installed on an A-shaped chrome plated motor shaft. E. Each metering pump shall be provided with a metal nameplate, permanently affixed to the pump housing. Each nameplate shall indicate manufacturer, model number, and pressure at maximum capacity. F. Pump tubing shall be in contact with the inside diameter of the track (housing) through an angle of 180°. One roller, at all times, shall be fully engaged with the tubing providing complete compression to prevent backflow or siphoning. Tubing occlusion shall be adjustable but come factory set for the specified tubing sizes. Tubing shall be held in place on the suction and discharge by a spring loaded or ratchet type clamp mechanism. The tubing shall be replaceable with no disassembly of the pump head and 'without the use of tools. G. Pumping tubing shall be Flex-a-Prene®with a 0.187-inch ID, a thermoplastic elastomer with a 64 Shore A durometer and 2.4 mm wall thickness. If required for chemical compatibility, pump manufacturer shall provide an alternative tubing material. Pumps shall accept tubing IDs of 1.6 mm, 3.2 mm, 4.8 mm, 6.4 mm, 8.0 mm, and 9.6 mm. H. Pumps shall be 120 VAC, single-phase, 60 Hz. 2.03 PUMP MOTOR A. Motors shall conform to all applicable requirements of NEMA, ANSI, IEEE, and NEC standards and shall be UL listed for the service specified. B. Pump drive motors shall be reversable, brushless, DC gear motor rated fc r continuous duty. Motor shall include overload protection. Section 46 33 42-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. All of the subsequent accessories shall be fabricated of materials resistant to ferric, ferrous, or alum solution. B. Provide the following accessories: 1. Provide minimum one calibration chamber. Chamber shall have a minimum volume of 1 liter, bottom inlet fitting, and a top vent connection with "quick off' cap. Calibration chamber shall be as manufactured by Blue White Industries, ProMinent, LMI, or equal, and shall be mounted on skid next to pumps. 2. Provide pressure relief valves, check valves, pressure gauge, ball valves, and pulsation dampeners in discharge line of the pumps as shown on the drawings. 3. Heavy-duty wall mounting bracket assemblies or mounting shelves. Shelves or brackets shall be polypropylene, FRP, or equally resistant materials as manufactured by Blue White Industries, LMI, ProMinent, or equal. All exposed hardware and metal fasteners shall be stainless steel. 4. One set of rubber gloves, dust mask, acid-resistant apron, and protective goggles. 5. All tubing, piping, connectors, couplings, fittings, valves, strainers, compression connections, and unions necessary for a complete installation. 2.05 CONTROL A. The following signals shall be provided for interface with the plant SCADA System: 1. Remote start/stop input (dry contact). 2. Speed Command input (4-20mA). 3. Speed feedback (4-20mA). 4. Running (dry contact). 5. Alarm (dry contact). 6. In remote (dry contact). B. Metering Pumps Control: 1. Manual pump output adjustment shall be made via touchpad controls on each pump. 2. Control of the chemical metering pumps shall be selectable between internal and external control by means of a three-position Local-Off-Remote soft key. When in "Remote" mode, each pump shall accept a 4 to 20 mA speed command signal from 190PLC-1. 3. The minimum capacity of the pumps shall be 0.0 gph in the "Remote" mode and shall correspond to an input of 0 rotations per minute. C. Pump controls are specified in Section 26 09 00—Controls and Instrumentation. Pump manufacturer shall review these controls and coordinate with Division 26. 2.06 SPARE PARTS A. CONTRACTOR shall provide, along with the shop drawings, a list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts for the specified equipment. The list shall include a description of each spare part, current pricing, and expected delivery time for each part. No spare parts -- shall be provided by CONTRACTOR/manufacturer as part of this Contract. Section 46 33 42-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.07 FINISHES A. Surface prepare, prime, and finish paint pumps by the manufacturer according to the manufacturer's Standards for Service Environment. B. All exposed metal surfaces, including stainless steel components, on the skid, brackets, fasteners, bolts, and equipment, with the exception of the pump, shall be field primed and coated per Division 09 for carbon steel. 2.08 ANCHOR BOLTS A. Provide all anchor bolts required for equipment furnished. Anchor bolts shall be Fibrebolt, or equal, manufactured by Morrison Molded Fiberglass Company, and shall be of ample strength for the intended service. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Refer to requirements in Division 01 for equipment installation quality control, testing, supervision, start-up, and operator training. 3.32 INSTALLATION A. CONTRACTOR to inspect the units after delivery to the site for any da-nage done to the units during shipping. B. Install all necessary tubing, hose, piping, coupling, fittings, and valves for a complete installation. Point of application for the phosphorus removal chemical shill be as shown on the drawings. C. Install equipment according to supplier's and manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 STARTUP A. System startup shall be completed using portable water prior to startup w th chemical. END OF SECTION �- Section 46 33 42-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 46 41 23 SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: This section includes furnishing, installing, and placing into successful operation submersible mixers and appurtenances. The mixers and appurtenances shall be furnished by the same supplier. They are to include: 1. Three blended sludge tank mixers (M-10-24-1, M-10-24-2, and M-10-24-3). 2. Two centrate tank mixers (M-15-1-1 and M-15-1-2). B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Application: 1. M-10-24-1, M-10-24-2, and M-10-24-3 shall be capable of keeping in suspension a combination of waste activated sludge, primary sludge, and primary scum with concentrations ranging from 0.5% to 5% solids. 2. M-15-1-1 and M-15-1-2 shall be capable of mixing centrate from dewatered anaerobically digested sludge. Solids concentration in the centrate may vary from 0.1 to 2% solids. B. Design Requirements: ISO 21630 ISO 21630 Mixer Minimum Nominal Thrust Propeller Uptake Power M-10-24-1 2220 N 10.0 kW M-10-24-2 M-10-24-3 2220 N 10.0 kW M-15-1-1 1970 N 7.3 kW M-15-1-2 C. Performance Requirements: 1. The mixers shall be capable of mixing and resuspending solids within the fluids of their respective tanks. 2. While operating at normal operating conditions, the mixer design shall be such that the mixer will operate satisfactorily without excessive noise or vibration when installed as shown on the drawings and operating as specified. 3. Motor horsepowers shown are the minimum requirements. 4. Mixers shall be designed to operate in submerged condition in the space allotted. 5. With its appurtenances and cable, mixers shall be capable of operation with continuous submergence without loss of watertight integrity to a depth of 130 feet. 6. Mixers shall be capable of running continuously at full nameplate rated load while the mixer is submerged, partially submerged, or unsubmerged. 7. Materials of construction for mixers and appurtenances shall be suitable for the environment in which they are located. Section 46 41 23-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 8. Mount mixers at lowest possible location in tanks to allow tanks to remain mixed during tank draining until the water surface elevation reaches the minimum mixer submergence. 9. Be UL, CSA, or FM approved for Class I, Division 1, Groups C 3nd D hazardous locations. D. Thrust and power input parameters listed in this section shall be measured in accordance with ISO 21630. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for motors associated with equipment specified in this section shall include data sheets from the motor manufacturer. Data sheets from the equipmerr manufacturer or supplier are not acceptable. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substantial Completion of the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.J1 MANUFACTURERS A. Submersible mixers shall be manufactured by Xylem Water Solutions USA—Flygt, Charlotte, North Carolina, or equal. This listed equipment is part of the Base Bid as indicated on the Bid pages and will be considered as establishing the type, function, appearance, and quality required, as defined in the General Conditions. Vortex Mixer Manufacturer Model Diameter Shield Jet Ring M-10-24-1 Xylem—Flygt SR-4660 22.83 inches No No M-10-24-2 M-10-24-3 Xylem—Flygt SR-4660 22.83 inches No No M-15-1-1 Xylem—Flygt SR-4660 22.83 inches Yes Yes M-15-1-2 B. The drawings and specifications were prepared based on Xylem Water Solutions USA—Flygt. CONTRACTOR shall include in the Bid and shall be respons ble for the cost of any changes, including engineering changes, to accommodate the other Base Bid equipment including but not limited to structural, mechanical, and electrical work. C. CONTRACTOR may provide Alternative Bids for equipment from other manufacturers by writing their name into the blank(s) provided on the Bid form. CONTRACTOR shall comply with all provisions regarding substitute items and shall include in the Bid and be responsible for the cost of any changes to accommodate substitute equipment including, but not limited to, structural, mechanical, and electrical work. CONTRACTOR shall also pay costs of — engineering services for review of substitutes and for revisions of drawings and/or specifications by CONSULTANT to accommodate substitutes. Section 46 41 23-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.02 MIXER RETRIEVAL SYSTEM A. The design of the mixers shall be such that the mixer shall be easily removable for inspection or service, requiring no bolts, nuts or other fasteners to be disconnected, or need for personnel to enter the tank. B. A sliding guide bracket shall be an integral part of the mixer unit. C. Guide bars shall be of a diameter and wall thickness as recommended by the mixer manufacturer. Provide stainless steel upper/lower guide bar brackets and intermediate guide bar brackets as required. Guide bars shall extend from top of tank wall to a location as determined by the mixer manufacturer. Overall installed length shall be field adjustable. D. The mixer shall have the capability of redirecting the center line of its jet ±10 or±20 degrees in a vertical plane and 120 degrees in a horizontal plane and can be repositioned for operation at any elevation along the complete mast assembly. The mast shall be constructed with a positioning locking plate which will work in conjunction with a bolt through the upper guide holder to positively lock the mast in place at various operating angles. All the above shall be capable of being accomplished without draining the tank. E. Mixer shall be fitted with a stainless steel cable with a short length of stainless steel chain with chain attached to the mixer with a stainless steel shackle of adequate strength to permit raising and lowering of the mixer for inspection or removal. All components shall be of adequate size, length, and strength for the mixer being lifted. Cable chain shall be compatible with Flygt Grip-Eye. Provide one Flygt Grip Eye. �- 2.03 MIXER CONSTRUCTION A. All components of the mixer, including motor, shall be capable of continuous underwater operation. In addition, all components of the mixer shall be capable of continuous operation in air, completely unsubmerged, for two hours. B. Major mixer components shall be of 316L stainless steel construction and all exposed fasteners shall be of 304 Stainless Steel. C. Propeller: 1. The propeller shall be of 316L or 316 Ti stainless steel construction. 2. The propeller shall be dynamically balanced and of the non-clogging backward curved design. D. The motor housing exterior shall be made of 316 Stainless Steel. E. Seals: 1. The mixer shall be provided with two sets of lapped end face type mechanical seals (propeller shaft) and two lip seals (gear box) running in the oil reservoir for cooling and lubrication. 2. Unless otherwise specified, mechanical seal between the propeller and propeller shaft oil chamber shall contain one stationary and one positively driven rotary Tungsten Carbide face ring. 3. The seals shall require neither maintenance nor adjustment, but shall be easy to check and replace. Shaft seals without positively driven rotating members will not be considered acceptable or equal. Section 46 41 23-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 F. Oil Housing: 1. The oil housing shall contain two compartments consisting of an inner and outer section with four ports to connect and facilitate oil flow. 2. The oil housing cover plate shall be of corrosion resistant composite. G. All metal surfaces coming into contact with sludge, other than stainless steel, shall be protected by a factory applied spray coating of acrylic dispersion zinc phosphate primer with an epoxy finish coat. H. All mating surfaces where watertight sealing is required shall be machined and fitted with a double set of Nitrile rubber or Viton 0-rings. Fitting shall be such that sealing is accomplished by metal-to-metal contact between machined surfaces resulting in controlled compression of the 0-rings. No secondary sealing compounds, rectangular gaskets, elliptical 0-rings, grease, or other devices shall be used. I. If noted in this section, mixer assembly shall incorporate a jet ring a full 3E0 degrees around the propeller. J. Vortex Shield: Provide vortex shield as described in 2.01.A. 2.04 MOTORS A. The mixer motor shall be explosion proof, housed in an air-filled watertight chamber, and shall have moisture resistant Class H insulation. The mixer motor shall be NEMA Design B designed for continuous duty. Motor shall be capable of sustaining 15 starts per hour. B. The combined service factor (combined effect of voltage, frequency and specific gravity) shall be a minimum of 1.15. The motor shall have a voltage tolerance of plus or minus 10%. The motor shall be designed for operation up to 40°C (104°F) ambient and with a temperature rise not to exceed 80°C. C. A performance chart shall be provided upon request showing curves for torque, current, power factor, input/output KW and efficiency. This chart shall also include data on starting and no-load characteristics. D. Motor Schedule: If motor horsepower is increased to meet the requirements of this specification, CONTRACTOR is responsible for increasing all wiring, starters, drives, and other electrical components as required by Code, at no additional cost to CITY. Mixer Horsepower Nominal Speed Efficiency _ VFD M-10-24-1 15hp 575 rpm 78.7% No M-10-24-2 M-10-24-3 M-15-1-1 15 hp 575 rpm 78.7% No M-15-1-2 2.05 MIXER PROTECTION A. The motor stator shall incorporate three thermal switches in serie-; to monitor the temperature of each phase winding.At a temperature preset to protect the motor the thermal switches shall stop the motor and be capable of activating an alarm. Section 46 41 23-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. A leakage sensor shall be provided to detect fluid in the stator. When activated, the sensor shall be capable of activating an alarm. The thermal switches and sensor shall be connected to a monitoring unit which shall be designed to be mounted in the MCC. C. A Mini-CAS unit rated for 120 Vac power supply shall be provided to the Section 26 09 00 System Supplier for installation in the MCC bucket. 2.06 CONTROLS A. Electrical controls and instrumentation for this equipment are specified under Section 26 24 19—Motor Control and Section 26 09 00—Controls and Instrumentation of these specifications. 2.07 MIXER MOTOR CABLE A. The mixer motor cable shall be suitable for submersible mixer applications. This shall be indicated by a code or legend permanently printed on the cable. Cable size shall conform to NEC and ICEA Standards and shall be of adequate size to allow motor voltage conversion without replacing the cable. Provide stainless steel Kellum grip strain relief on motor cable to support cable. Provide minimum 50 feet of cable for each mixer, more as necessary. Cable shall be of sufficient length to provide continuous run from in-place mixer to point of cable connection. 2.08 CABLE ENTRY SEAL A. A cable entry seal shall be provided where the mixer cable enters the mixer. The cable entry seal design shall preclude specific torque requirements to provide a watertight and submersible seal. The cable entry shall consist of cylindrical elastomeric grommet, flanked by washers, all having a close tolerance fit against the cable outside diameter and the entry inside diameter and compressed by the body containing a strain-relief function, separate from the function of sealing the cable. The assembly shall provide ease of changing the cable when necessary using the same entry seal. The cable entry junction chamber and motor shall be separated by stator lead sealing gland or a terminal board which shall isolate the interior from foreign material gaining access through the mixer top. Epoxies, silicones, or other secondary sealing systems shall not be required or used. 2.09 SPARE PARTS A. CONTRACTOR shall provide, along with the shop drawings, a list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts for the specified equipment. The list shall include a description of each spare part, current pricing, and expected delivery time for each part. No spare parts shall be provided by CONTRACTOR/manufacturer as part of this Contract. 2.10 FINISHES A. It is the intent of these specifications that equipment, support and accessories be furnished factory shop-primed and finish-painted. Equipment and appurtenances shall be prepared in accordance with commercial grade SSPC specifications No. 6. Priming and finish painting shall be as recommended by manufacturer and shall be suitable for a corrosive atmosphere and outdoor operation. Touchup paint shall be provided by manufacturer. Section 46 41 23-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.11 ANCHOR BOLTS A. CONTRACTOR shall provide all anchor bolts required for equipment furnished.Anchor bolts shall be 316 stainless steel of ample strength for the intended service. Provide anchor bolts in accordance with Division 05. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Refer to requirements specified in Division 01 for equipment installation, quality control, testing, supervision, startup, and operator training. Comply with additional requirements as specified below. B. A minimum of four trips and five days on site shall be provided for startup and training services. C. Install in accordance with manufacturer's directions as supplemented herein. 3.02 MIXER TESTING A. The mixer manufacturer shall perform the following inspections and tests on the mixer before shipment from factory: 1. Propeller, motor rating, and electrical connections shall first be checked for compliance to these specifications. 2. A motor and cable insulation test for moisture content or insulation defects shall be made. 3. Prior to submergence, the mixer shall be run dry to establish correct rotation and mechanical integrity. 4. A certified thrust test shall be completed. 5. A written report stating the foregoing steps above have been completed shall be supplied with each mixer at the time of shipment. 6. Mixer thrust test shall be conducted using ISO 21630 thrust test guidelines. Each mixer shall be tested to verify the specified thrust will be produced and shall not exceed the specified kW draw while producing the specified thrust. Test shall be certified by a Professional Engineer. END OF SECTION Section 46 41 23-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 46 51 21 COARSE BUBBLE DIFFUSERS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: This section includes furnishing, installing, and placing into successful operation a coarse bubble diffused aeration system in the waste activated sludge (WAS) Storage Tank Nos. 1 and 2 (Structure 175). The equipment shall consist of coarse bubble elastomeric diffusers, drop pipes, air header/manifold piping, piping supports, and other appurtenances. All equipment and appurtenances shall be furnished by the same supplier. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. C. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with Section 43 11 33—Tri-Lobe Positive Displacement Blowers. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Application: The aeration equipment shall be used to aerate WAS at 0.3% to 3% solids concentration while maintaining solids in suspension. This equipment shall be installed in WAS Storage Tanks Nos. 1 and 2, as shown on the drawings. B. Performance Requirements: The aeration equipment manufacturer shall furnish diffuser elements to meet the following requirements: Item Number of Tanks 2 Type Semi-circular Length of Each Tank (ft) 52' 6" Radius of Each Tank (ft) 51' 8" Side Water Depth (ft) 18' Volume per Tank (cu ft) 77,924 Volumetric Air Rate (scfm) 4,560 Std. 02 Transfer R (lbs/day) 16,724 Diffuser Submergence (ft) 17.2 Operating Pressure at Top of Dropley (psi) 8.13 Diffuser Placement Center-line 1.03 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substantial Completion of the project. Section 46 51 21-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The WAS storage aeration equipment shall be as manufactured by Sanitaire, a division of Xylem, Inc. of Brown Deer, Wisconsin, or equal. This listed equipment is part of the Base Bid as indicated on the Bid pages and will be considered as establishing the type, function, appearance, and quality required as defined in the General Conditions. B. CONTRACTOR may provide Alternative Bids for equipment from other manufacturers by writing their name into the blank(s) provided on the Bid form. CONTRACTOR shall comply with all provisions regarding substitute items and shall include in the Bid and be responsible for the cost of any changes to accommodate substitute ecuipment including but not limited to structural, mechanical, and electrical work. CONTRACTOR shall also pay costs of engineering services for review of substitutes and for revisions of drawings and/or specifications by CONSULTANT if the substitute is selected. 2.02 MATERIALS, FABRICATION AND FINISHING A. Stainless Steel Pipe Materials: 1. All welded parts and assemblies shall be 304L stainless steel with a 2D finish conforming to ASTM A240. 2. All non-welded parts and flanges shall be 304 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A240 or ASTM A276. 3. Droplegs, manifolds and headers shall conform to ASTM A554 and fabrication procedures in accordance to ASTM A774 and A778. 4. Air distribution headers shall have a nominal wall thickness of 0.109 inches for headers 4-inches through 18-inches in diameter. 5. Diffuser connectors shall be 316L Stainless Steel. 6. Flanges shall be stainless steel. 7. All diffusers shall be 304L stainless steel conforming to ASTM AA0, ASTM A276, ASTM A554, ASTM A774, ASTM A778 as appropriate with a cast 304L Schedule 80 threaded inlet nozzle. B. Piping Supports: 1. Provide each section of air header with a minimum of two supports ,,-vith the maximum spacing between supports not to exceed 17 feet 6 inches. 2. Limit header or manifold cantilever to no more than 4 feet. -- 3. Provide header supports with a vertically adjustable header hold down locking mechanism mounted on a stainless steel supporting structure. OR on anchor bolts cast into 4,000 psi reinforced concrete pedestals. Support hold down locking mechanisms shall have a minimum width of 2 inches and a minimum thickness of .109-inch on headers 12-inch diameter or smaller. 4. Provide supports that allow for a minimum of 2-inch of vertical ,:adjustment and a minimum of 1/2 inch of lateral adjustment for alignment of the header in the field. 5. Provide a wall or floor mounted support near the drop pipe to header connection for vertical support and restraint of movement due to thermal expansion and to prevent blowing apart. Section 46 51 21-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Stainless Steel Welding: All welding of pipe and structural support members shall be conducted at the factory using TIG, MIG, inert gas or plasma-arc welding methods. Field welding will not be permitted without approval of CONSULTANT. All welded components shall be passivated. Weld cross sections shall have a thickness equal to or greater than the welded material. All butt welds shall be fully penetrated with gas shielding to the interior and exterior of the joint. All face rings and flanges shall be continuously welded on both sides unless lap joint flanges are specified. D. Gaskets shall be reinforced neoprene of 45 to 50 durometer (Shore A). 2.03 FIXED AERATION HEADERS, MANIFOLD, AND DROPLEGS A. Provide a dropleg from the air main connection to the aeration system as shown on the drawings. Provide a stainless steel Van Stone style flange design with a 150 pound drill pattern flange ring for the top connection and a stainless steel band clamp coupling with gasket for the lower dropleg to header connection for ease of installation and alignment. B. Provide 4-inch diameter and smaller headers with removable end caps. C. Join sections of manifold or air distribution headers with flanged joints consisting of face rings, rotating ring flanges, bolts and gaskets or expansion joints consisting of a welded flanged expansion barrel, "O" ring gasket, "0" ring locking flange and hardware to accommodate + 2-inch of movement. D. Furnish expansion/contraction system for all headers designed for temperature range of 125°F consisting of simple and fixed supports and expansion joints. 1. Lengths of header can extend up to 80 feet from restraining point without an expansion joint. 2. Limit maximum distance between restraining points on a continuous length of header to 120 feet maximum. 3. Provide an expansion joint on continuous lengths of header between two restraining points. 4. Provide simple supports to restrain header from buoyant uplift forces. 5. Provide fixed supports to limit movement to prevent expansion joint blow apart and transmit expansion forces from the header to the fixed support stand. a. Provide a mechanical link to connect the header and fixed support stand. b. Reinforce the header at the attachment point of the mechanical link. E. Duplex Diffuser Connectors: 1. Factory weld to the air header positioned so that air exiting the diffusers clears the header. 2. Furnish PVC plugs for all unused diffuser connectors. 3. Header and diffuser connectors shall comply with the following: a. Reinforce the connector header weld joint by providing and continuously welding gussets between the vertical side wall of the header and the connector ends to limit long term flexure failure. Minimum gusset thickness is 0.125 inch. b. Weld connector to the header with a full penetration butt weld to minimize potential for crevice corrosion between header and connector. Use of fillet welds at the connection between the diffuser connector and header is NOT permitted. c. Resist a vertical dead load applied to the threaded end of the connector that results in a bending moment of 1000 inch-lbs without exceeding 24,000 psi design stress in any part of the header wall or connector. Section 46 51 21-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 d. Minimum header wall thickness for unreinforced connectors shal be 0.25 inches. 2.04 SPARE PARTS A. The aeration manufacturer shall supply five spare diffusers and five header gaskets preassembled and ready for installation. 2.05 ANCHOR BOLTS A. Provide all anchor bolts required for equipment furnished. Anchor bolts shall be of ample strength for the intended service. Provide anchor bolts in accordance with Division 05. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Refer to requirements specified in Division 01 for equipment installation quality control, testing, supervision, start-up, and operator training. Comply with additional requirements as specified below. B. A minimum of one trip and two days on site shall be provided for start-up field testing, and training services. 3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND COORDINATION A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Set headers plumb and level and provide uniform spacing of diffusers and supports. 3.03 FIELD TESTS A. CONTRACTOR shall conduct field tests in each aeration grid once the d ifuser system has been installed. The equipment manufacturer shall be present. At least tel i days prior to the performance of field tests, CONTRACTOR shall notify CONSULTANT- in writing when these tests are to be performed. CONTRACTOR and CONSULTANT shdll agree upon the actual time that the tests are to be performed. CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, equipment, and materials required to perform the tests. CONTRACTOR shall provide necessary piping from existing non-potable plant water system to flood each structure. All defects shall be corrected by CONTRACTOR and all required retesting shall be performed by CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to CITY. 1. Level Test: WAS Storage Tank No. 1 and WAS Storage Tank No. 2 shall be flooded with non-potable water to the tops of the diffusers. The level of the diffusers shall then be checked to ensure that they are at the same elevation within 0.318 inch. 2. Uniformity and Leakage Tests: WAS Storage Tank No. 1 and WAS Storage Tank No. 2 shall be flooded with non-potable water to a depth approximately 1 foot above the tops of the diffusers. Process air shall be supplied evenly to all headers in each tank. The surface of the water above the diffusers shall then be visually observe to see that there are no leaks and air flow is uniformly distributed. END OF SECTION -- Section 46 51 21-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 46 76 33 DEWATERING CENTRIFUGE EQUIPMENT PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: This section includes furnishing, installing, and placing into successful operation two high solids dewatering centrifuges (M-14-2-1 and M-14-2-2) and appurtenances including, but not limited to, controls, lubrication system, drive system, access walkways, and stairs in the Dewatering Building (Structure 330). The centrifuges and appurtenances shall be furnished by the same supplier. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. C. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate centrifuge dewatering equipment with Section 41 12 13—Shaftless Screw Conveyors, including centrifuge discharge chutes and biosolids conveyor inlet chutes, specifically M-14-15-1, M-14-15-2, M-14-15-5, M-14-15-6, M-14-15-7, M-14-15-8, and M-14-15-9. D. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate centrifuge dewatering equipment with Section 46 33 33—Polymer Feed Equipment, specifically P-14-8-1, P-14-8-2, and P-14-8-3. E. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate centrifuge dewatering equipment with Section 43 23 58—Progressing Cavity Pumps, specifically dewatering feed pumps P-12-1-1, �- P-12-1-2, and P-12-1-3. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: The centrifuge units shall be designed to dewater anaerobically digested sludge that will be a mixture of primary sludge and TWAS. On a dry weight basis, the mixture would be approximately 45% to 55% primary and 55% to 45% TWAS with variation of about ±10% anticipated. The waste activated sludge and primary sludge are mixed in blended sludge tanks prior to anaerobic digestion. Anaerobic digestion by the thermophilic-mesophilic process is anticipated, although mesophilic only digestion may also be used. B. The volatile solids concentration of the digested sludge is expected to be approximately 50% to 70% but it may fall outside this range. Section 46 76 33-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Performance Requirements: Each centrifuge shall achieve the followinc performances for the operating conditions listed: DESIGN PARAMETERS Influent Sludge Feed Concentration %, Range1 1.4 2.0 2.6 Influent Sludge Feed Rate, gpm2 350 275 275 Dry Solids Loading, lb/hr3 2,480 3,600 3,600 Minimum Dewatered Sludge Solids Content, % 25 25 25 Minimum Solids Recovery, % 95 95 95 Maximum Polymer Dosage Rate, lb. active 25 30 25 Polymer/Dry Ton Dewatered Cake Notes: 1. Potential solids concentration range. 2. The solids loading rate may control performance when the influent solids concentration is greater than 2.0%. 3. The hydraulic loading rate may control the performance when tune influent solids concentration is less than 2%. D. The polymer dose rate is based on using emulsion polymers. Use of other types of emulsion polymer or manufacturers of polymer may be approved by CITY provided that the polymer is commercially available in sufficient quantity to meet CITY's needs and providing that the applied cost per ton (available to CITY) of such alternative polymer product is no more than $40 per ton at highest dosage allowed and prorated down at lower allowable dosages. Selection and emulsion polymer used for testing shall be the responsibility of the centrifuge manufacturer and shall be in conformance with the above requirements. Only emulsion polymer will be allowed for centrifuge testing. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The following initial submittal information and data shall be submitted from alternative centrifuge equipment manufacturers, if alternatives to centrifuge Base Bid equipment are proposed. This information is for a review of alternative centrifuge equipment. 1. Manufacturer's specifications. 2. Catalog data or illustrations showing principal parts and materials. 3. Detailed equipment dimensioned drawings. 4. Detailed wiring diagrams specific to the project. 5. Installation, assembly, disassembly and repair instructions including dimensional drawings showing all clearances required for maintenance. 6. Motor nameplate data. 7. Weights of all equipment, drive, and control components including dynamic loadings. 8. Support location plan. 9. Materials of construction for all components. 10. Any exception to these specifications including explanation for nonconformance. 11. List of all installations for high solids centrifuges of the size proposed, including contact name, address, and phone number and all test data for each installation. 12. Information in addition to that enumerated in the preceding items 1 through 10 may be required to evaluate alternative manufacturers. This information shall be submitted at the request of CONSULTANT, and the evaluation shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. Section 46 76 33-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 13. A signed copy of the final centrifuge manufacturer's quotation that was submitted to CONTRACTOR at the time of the Bid. Quotation shall include final scope and final cost proposal. 14. Description of motor and belt type, type of bearing, and method of lubrication. B. The initial submittal information shall be resubmitted with any required corrections, certifications, and additional details during formal shop drawing review. In addition to that information, the following information shall be submitted as part of shop drawing submittal. 1. System starting and full load operating current values under the operating condition ranges listed. 2. Schematic power and control wiring diagrams including recommended wire sizes. 3. Protective coating system. 4. Structural calculations and design, piping layout, and electrical modifications as required to accommodate equipment other than named specified equipment used for layout as indicated. 5. Material test data. 6. Plans and section views of liquid and solid chutes as they would connect to centrifuges with all piping connection points, size and location, and piping between chutes as shown. 7. Control panel elevations. 8. Centrifuge shop test data and report. 9. Control descriptions and P&IDs. 10. Operator interface panel graphics. C. Review the General Conditions and Division 01 for additional submittal requirements. D. Submittals for motors associated with equipment specified in this section shall include data sheets from the motor manufacturer. Data sheets from the equipment manufacturer or supplier are not acceptable. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All of the equipment specified under this section shall be provided by a single manufacturer who is fully experienced, reputable, and qualified in the manufacture of the equipment furnished. The equipment shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the best practices and methods of the industry and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the contract drawings and specifications. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substantial Completion of the project. Section 46 76 33-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Equipment shall be Model CS26-4 as manufactured be Centrisys, Inc. of Kenosha, Wisconsin, or equal. This listed equipment is part of the Base Bid as indicated on the Bid pages and will be considered as establishing the type, function, appearance, and quality required, as defined in the General Conditions. -- B. CONTRACTOR may provide Alternative Bids for equipment from other manufacturers by writing their name into the blank(s) provided on the Bid form. CONTRACTOR shall comply with all provisions regarding substitute items and shall include in the Bid E+nd be responsible for the cost of any changes to accommodate substitute equipment includ ng, but not limited to, structural, mechanical, and electrical work. CONTRACTOR shall also pay costs of engineering services for review of substitutes and for revisions of drawings and/or specifications by CONSULTANT to accommodate substitutes. 2.02 CENTRIFUGE MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. General: 1. The centrifuges shall be of the solid bowl, horizontal continuous feed, scroll type, specifically designed to dewater sludge. - 2. The centrifuges shall be designed and constructed to operate continuously. 3. The centrifuges shall be capable of performing in accordance with the requirements set forth in these specifications. In order to meeet the required performance, the centrifuges shall be capable of operating at a speed of 2,850 rpm and a G force of 3,000 at the bowl wall. Speed control shall be provided by a solid-state variable frequency drive (frequency inverter). B. Centrifuge Bowl: 1. The centrifuge bowl shall be minimum 110 inches long with a minimum inside diameter of 25.5 inches in the cylindrical section. The bowl shall be manufactured from centrifugal castings of duplex, stainless steel with a minimum tensile strength of 100,000 psi. All centrifugally cast material shall be inspected by manufacturer for cracks, shrinkage, porosity, or other defects by use of a liquid penetrant test. Nominal bowl thickness in the cylindrical and conical sections shall be a minimum of 0.90 inch. The front and rear bowl hubs shall be centrifugally cast. The pool depth in the bowl shall be adjustable through the use of 304 stainless steel plate dams at the large diameter end of the bowl where liquid is discharged. Solids shall be discharged from the small diameter end of the bowl. The bowl wall shall be protected by a series of longitudinal bowl strips, evenly spaced and extending over the full interior length of the bowl wall; the bowl strips shall act to �- trap a protective layer of feed solids against the interior bowl wall. 2. Replaceable ribbed bowl liner (if supplied) shall be Type 316 stainless steel with a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch. Solid discharge wear liners shall be ur ;thane. The solids discharge port shall be inserts hard faced with tungsten carbide. 3. Centrifuge bowl shall be, at a minimum, designed to operate at 2,85( rpm. 4. Sludge feed shall be introduced into the centrifuge feed zone by means of a 2 1/2-inch-diameter 316L stainless steel feed pipe. The feed small be uniformly distributed into the centrifuge and the feed zone. Section 46 76 33-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Bearings: Each centrifuge shall be designed so that the entire rotating assembly is supported by pillow block ball-type main bearings. The main bearings shall be oil-lubricated by forced air lubrication system. Main bearings shall have an AFBMA L10 rating without adjustment factors of 100,000 hours at 24 hours a day operating condition. D. Scroll Conveyor: _. 1. The centrifuge shall include a horizontal cylindrical-conical scroll conveyor supported by grease-lubricated cylindrical roller bearings and grease-lubricated angular contact antithrust ball bearings and equipped with helical flights independently mounted concentrically within the centrifuge bowl. The conveyor hub shall be 316L stainless steel or better. The hub shall be centrifugal casted or forged from duplex stainless steel, with a minimum tensile strength of 100,000 psi 2. All conveyor hubs shall be inspected for cracks, shrinkage, porosity, or other defects, by means of liquid dye penetrant test. Manufactured hubs are not acceptable. 3. Conveyor bearings shall be protected by seals and shall be externally lubricated by means of a forced grease lubrication system. 4. The feed compartment within the conveyor shall be constructed of duplex stainless steel. It shall be protected from abrasion by an autogenetic liner or by flame sprayed and fused Nickel-Chrome-Boron alloy containing tungsten carbide particles. The feed nozzles or ports shall be protected by tungsten carbide. 5. The edge and face of the conveyor flights shall be protected against abrasion with Eutalloy hard surfacing material from the feed zone to the liquid discharge end. The hard surfacing shall be guaranteed against failure for 15,000 hours of operation. 6. Alternately, the edge and face of the conveyor flights shall be protected against abrasion with tungsten carbide tiles from the feed zone to the solid discharge. The hard tungsten carbide tiles shall be guaranteed against failure for 15,000 hours of operation. E. Bases: 1. The centrifuge shall be supported on a fabricated carbon steel base with 304 stainless steel wetted parts. The base shall be mounted on vibration isolators. 2. Machined surfaces shall be provided at all points where support loads are transferred to the base. The bottom portion of the base shall be provided with machined outlets for the attachment of the solids and centrate flexible connectors and chutes and other appurtenant connections. 3. Lifting hooks or solid lifting bars shall be provided for lifting the base. F. Case: 1. The centrifuge case shall consist of a lower casing and a one-piece upper casing. The purpose of the case shall be to contain and direct the solids and liquid discharge from the centrifuge, to act as a protective guard, and to provide a complete enclosure for noise reduction. 2. The lower casing shall be constructed with all process contact material of 304 or 316 stainless steel. The upper casing shall be manufactured of 304 or 316 stainless steel. 3. A soundproof panel system shall be provided as specified to limit the noise generated by the centrifuge to 85 dBA or less 1 meter from the panels. 4. The centrifuge case shall be vented as recommended by the manufacturer. CONTRACTOR shall provide a 6-inch vent connection to the casing and extending outward and up to the outside. Lifting hooks shall be provided for lifting the casing. 5. To limit splashing and air leakage, the casing shall be provided with seals where the bowl hubs intersect the casing and a gasket on the machine flanges where the upper and lower casings join. Section 46 76 33-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 G. Vibration Isolation: 1. The centrifuge unit shall be mounted on vibration isolators. The number, capacity, and vibration constant of the isolators shall be as recommended by the isolator manufacturer for the load and impact resulting from operation of the centrifuge provided. Each vibration isolator shall be provided with built-in resilient shocks to control oscillation and withstand lateral forces in all directions. The isolator shall be designed for internal leveling and adjustment. After installation, the vibration isolators shall be inspected and adjusted by a qualified representative of the centrifuge manufacturer 2. Each centrifuge shall be equipped with a vibration sensor mounted on the centrifuge base frame that shall automatically act to initiate shutdown upon sensing excessive vibration. H. Drive System: 1. The bowl drive system (M-14-2-1 a and M-14-2-2a) shall consist of an electric motor and a belt drive system with belt guards. The belt drive system shall consist of multiple belts as required to provide full load capacity and also to withstand full starting torque of the system. 2. The adjustment of the scroll conveyor differential speed shall be accomplished by a hydraulic drive system (M-14-2-lb and M-14-2-2b). I. Fasteners and Anchor Bolts: 1. All fasteners in process contact area shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 2. Provide all anchor bolts required for equipment furnished.Anchor bolt shall be of ample strength for the intended service. Provide anchor bolts in accordance Nith Division 5.All anchor bolts shall be Type 304 stainless steel. J. Lubrication System: 1. The main bearings on the centrifuge shall be lubricated by an air-operated forced-feed oil system. The system shall consist of a reservoir air/oil system and controls. 2. The mounting of the air-operated oil system shall be totally detached from the centrifuge _ base. 3. Lubrication of scroll conveyor bearings shall be through suitably located grease fittings. K. Spring Bar: The centrifuge unit shall be provided with a spring bar to a ow washdown or chemical application of the bowl/scroll without opening the centrifuge case. Number and location of spray nozzles shall be as recommended by manufacturer. L. Accessories: 1. Flexible Connections: a. All piping and discharge hoppers chute connections to the centrifuge assembly, main drive motor, and lubrication system, including but not limited to the feed sludge, wash water, polymer, drain, centrate, discharge, dewatered sludge discharge and power and control connections, shall be equipped with flexible connections. b. The flexible connections shall isolate the equipment from fixed rigid piping, chutes, or other connections. c. No exterior loads are to be transferred to any of the equipment. 2. Centrate Hopper: a. The centrate discharge chute shall be rectangular with a top flange matching the flange of the flexible liquid discharge connection. The chute sha'I include a 4-inch connection as a vent flange. CONTRACTOR shall provide a 4-inc n vent connection to the flange and extend to the outside. The discharge chute shall include a Section 46 76 33-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1 1/2-inch NPT connection for a centrate sampling line. CONTRACTOR shall provide 1 1/2-inch SAM pipe and appurtenances as shown on drawings. b. The chute shall maintain the shape of the centrifuge casing discharge connection and shall be 12 inches long. The chute shall be independently supported so as to impose no weight on the centrifuge casing flange. The chute is to be manufactured from 304 stainless steel. 3. Solids Chute: The dewatered sludge discharge chute shall be rectangular with a top flange that matches the flange of the solids flexible discharge connection. The chute is to maintain the shape of the centrifuge casing discharge connection and is to have sides as straight as possible to prevent solids from bridging or hanging up. The chute is to be independently supported so as to impose no weight on the centrifuge casing flange.The chute shall be manufactured of 304 stainless steel. Configuration of the chute shall be coordinated with the conveyor manufacturer for a gasketed liquid tight seal. 4. Special Tools (provide the following): a. Bowl truck designed to support bowl assembly and facilitate disassembly or moving of the equipment. b. Bowl lifter to allow bowl assembly or scroll conveyor to be lifted by a single overhead hoist. c. Conveyor remover designed to permit the scroll conveyor to be inserted and removed easily from the bowl. d. All special tools and equipment unique to the operation, maintenance, repair, and disassembly of the centrifuges. 2.03 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM A. A compressed air system shall be supplied with each centrifuge to provide compressed air for the air/oil lubrication system. Compressed air system shall be model QT-7.5 as manufactured by Quincy Compressor USA of Bay Minette, AL, or equal. Compressor shall be supplied with stainless steel reed valves with valve bumpers, ductile iron double throw crankshaft, and two-piece aluminum connecting rods. Crank-case, cylinders, and flywheel shall be cast iron. B. Each compressed air system shall be capable of providing 22.6 ACFM of air at 175 psig. Motor shall be 7.5 hp, three-phase, 480V. Each system shall be supplied with an 80-gallon receiver tank. 2.04 MOTORS A. Motors shall conform to all applicable requirements of NEMA, ANSI, IEEE, and NEC standards and shall be UL listed for the service specified. B. Motors provided for the equipment scheduled below shall meet the following requirements. Motors shall not be loaded beyond nominal rating, not including service factor, at any design condition. 1. Physical Construction: a. Copper leads and windings with ball or roller bearings in end brackets of steel or cast iron or aluminum brackets with steel bearing sleeves. Motor leads shall have the same insulation class as the windings. b. Rotor bars shall be aluminum. c. Motor shaft shall be high-strength steel protected by a bronze shaft sleeve secured to the shaft to prevent rotation. The maximum allowable no-load shaft runout shall be 0.002 inch. Section 46 76 33-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 d. Motors shall be equipped with grease fittings and automatic great e reliefs. Bearings shall be prelubricated and field-regreasable. Openings for additi )n of grease shall have grease fittings provided. 2. Mounting: As recommended by manufacturer. 3. Enclosure: TEFC. 4. Efficiency: Premium efficient as noted in schedule below. 5. Service Factor: 1.15. 6. Power requirements: 60 Hz, three-phase, 230/460-volt, factory-wired for 460-volt connection, ±10% voltage variation. 7. Load type: Constant torque. 8. NEMA Design: B. 9. Insulation: Class F. Motors with VFDs shall be Class F and rated for a Class B temperature rise. 10. Nominal operating speed: See motor schedule. 11. Nameplate: Stainless steel engraved attached to motor frame Jr enclosure with stainless steel rivets. 12. Conduit/Junction Box: Cast iron, diagonally split, fully rotatable, gasketed between cover and box, and between box and frame. Motor lead opening in the frame shall also be gasketed. A clamp-type terminal shall be provided inside each motor conduit box for grounding. 13. Accessories: a. Oversized motor junction box. b. Lifting eyes. c. Provide thermostats applied to motor windings, capable of shutdown and manual reset at control panel. 14. VFD requirements: Motor operating on VFDs shall be inverter-duty rated, meet the requirements of NEMA MG1, Part 31, and be capable of a minimum speed turndown of 4:1. Motors shall also include shaft grounding rings as manufactured by AEGIS, or equal. C. Motor Schedule: If motor horsepower is increased to meet the requirements of this specification, CONTRACTOR is responsible for increasing all wiring, starters, drives, and other electrical components as required by Code, at no additional cost to CITY. Centrifuge Horsepower Nominal Speed Efficiency VFD M-14-2-la 150 3,600 rpm 95.4% Yes M-14-2-lb 25 1,800 rpm 92.4% Yes M-14-2-2a 150 3,600 rpm 95.4% Yes M-14-2-2b 25 1,800 rpm 92.4% Yes 2.05 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS A. All equipment and controls specified to be furnished with the equipment shall comply with the requirements of Division 26 and Section 40 70 00. B. Equipment manufacturer shall review electrical wiring and control diagrams prepared by the Section 26 09 00 System Supplier. Manufacturer shall provide written approval to CONTRACTOR with copy to CONSULTANT and CITY. Section 46 76 33-8 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Electrical controls and instrumentation for this equipment are specified under Section 26 24 19—Motor Control and Section 26 09 00—Controls and Instrumentation of these specifications. D. A variable frequency drive (VFD) main drive starter system, a hydraulic back-drive controller, and a programmable logic controller (PLC) with operator interface shall be provided by the centrifuge manufacturer for each centrifuge. This manufacturer shall be responsible for all coordination with the Division 26, Section 26 09 00 System Supplier so that all signals required in this section as well as Sections 26 09 00 and 26 09 90 are provided and are compatible with the SCADA system being provided in Section 26 09 00. 1. Centrifuge Panels No. 1 and No. 2: a. Each centrifuge shall be supplied with a dedicated motor control panel. The enclosures shall be NEMA 4X (stainless steel), freestanding, with all welds, seams, and edges on exposed surfaces ground smooth. Panel shall be a minimum of 20 inches deep and a maximum of 72 inches wide. Suitable lifting points for handling, shipment, and installation shall be provided. Provide front doors, for access to equipment mounted within, with front-mounted instruments and control devices.All panel doors shall be gasketed. Provide two LED service lights with door switches and a GFI duplex 115 volt outlet inside each panel. b. The panels shall include, but not be limited to, the following components: (1) Main circuit breaker disconnect with door-mounted padlockable handle to accept incoming 480-volt, three-phase power supply. (2) Control power transformer. (3) Controls for four solenoids. (a) Conveyor flush. (b) Bowl flush. (c) Hydraulic cooling water. (d) Air supply. (4) Hydraulic back drive and main drive circuit breakers, fuses with indicating fuse blocks, and VFDs. VFDs shall be heavy duty and rated for constant-torque loads. (5) PLC, as specified in Section 26 09 00. (6) Managed network switch, as specified in Section 26 09 00. (7) Uninterruptible power supply (UPS), as specified in Section 40 70 00. (8) Air conditioning unit. c. Front door-mounted controls shall include, but not be limited to, the following: (1) Maintained, illuminated E-Stop push button. (2) Reset pushbutton. (3) Alarm horn. (4) Operator Interface Terminal (OIT), Allen-Bradley, Panelview Plus 7 1000, or equal. (5) White power on light. 2. Monitoring and controls shall be provided for the following equipment: a. Main drive motor. b. Hydraulic back drive motor. c. Hydraulic cooling solenoid. d. Bowl flush solenoid. e. Discharge flush solenoid. f. Air supply solenoid. g. Hydraulic pump control valve. h. Biosolids conveyors (M-14-15-1 for Centrifuge No. 1 and M-14-15-2 for Centrifuge No. 2). Section 46 76 33-9 4463.004/City Contract No.994 i. Main conveyor(M-14-15-5) and inclined conveyor (M-14-15-6). j. Truck loadout conveyors (M-14-15-7, M-14-15-8, and M-14-15-9). k. Lube system. I. Alarms shall include: (1) Lube system low level. (2) Solid/liquid end bearing high and high high temperature. (3) High and high high vibration. (4) Control panel high temperature. (5) High and high high hydraulic pressure. -- (6) Emergency stop activated. (7) Main drive motor high temperature. (8) Hydraulic motor high temperature. (9) Main drive VFD fault. (10) Hydraulic back drive oil low level. (11) Hydraulic back drive oil high temperature. (12) Polymer system common failure. (13) Selected sludge feed pump failure. (14) Conveyor failure for each conveyor. (15) Network switch fail. (16) UPS replace battery. (17) Communication fail (to/from SCADA) via watchdog heartbeat. 3. Each centrifuge control panel shall include but not be limited to the following input/output — signals. These signals shall be sent/received to/from 330PLC-1 via Ethernet/IP over the plant fiber-optic SCADA network (unless otherwise noted). a. Hardwired analog I/O: (1) Main drive and back drive motor speeds. (2) Vibration. (3) Solids-end bearing temperature. (4) Liquid-end bearing temperature. (5) Hydraulic pressure. (6) Bowl speed. (7) Differential speed feedback. b. Selected Dewatering Feed Pump (P-12-1-1, P-12-1-2, or P-12-1-3) via Ethernet/IP: (1) Pump running status input. (2) Common pump failure status input. (3) Pump start/stop command output. (4) Analog pump speed feedback input. (5) Analog sludge pump flow input (FIT-12-1-1: Centrifuge No. 1 or FIT-12-1-2: Centrifuge No. 2). c. Selected polymer feed system (P-14-8-1, P-14-8-2, or P-14-8-3) via Ethernet/IP. (1) Pump running status input. (2) Pump failure status input. (3) Pump start/stop command output. d. Biosolids conveyors (M-14-15-1 for Centrifuge No. 1 and M-14-15-2 for Centrifuge No. 2) via Ethernet/IP. (1) Conveyor forward running status input. (2) Conveyor reverse running status input. (3) Common conveyor failure status input. e. Main Conveyor (M-14-15-5) and inclined conveyor (M-14-15-6) via Ethernet/IP: (1) Conveyor forward running status input. (2) Conveyor reverse running status input. (3) Common conveyor failure status input. Section 46 76 33-10 4463.004/City Contract No.994 f. Truck Loadout Conveyors (M-14-15-7, M-14-15-8, and M-14-15-9) via Ethernet/IP: (1) Conveyor forward running status input. (2) Conveyor reverse running status input. (3) Common conveyor failure status input. g. Hydraulic pump running. h. Hydraulic system: (1) Flow control valve position command output. (2) Low oil level switch input. (3) High oil temperature switch input. i. Conveyor Flush Valve: Open/close command output. j. Bowl Flush Water Valve: Open/close command output. k. Hydraulic Cooling Water Valve: Open/close command output. I. Air Supply Valve: Open/close command. m. Grease lubrication system: (1) Power on output (2) Low grease level switch input. (3) Solid end streak sensor status input. (4) Liquid end streak sensor status input. n. System via Ethernet/IP: (1) Centrifuge system in remote status output. (2) Centrifuge system run command input. (3) Centrifuge system initiate shut down command input. (4) Centrifuge system common alarm output. (5) Communication status heartbeat output. (6) Communication status heartbeat input. (7) Emergency stop input. (8) Centrifuge run request output. 4. Instruments and controls shall be mounted in functional groups and be positioned between 32 inches and 62 inches from the bottom of the panel. Layout of instruments and controls shall be submitted with shop drawings. 5. All components in the control panels shall be as follows and be completely factory-wired. All external control connection points shall terminate on terminal strips. There shall be a minimum of 10% spare terminal blocks supplied. The panel shall be completely factory-tested and be functionally tested on-site as specified in -. Section 40 70 00. a. The main circuit breaker shall be a type LAL, Square D, or equal. b. The starter and contactors shall be NEMA rated Allen-Bradley, Bulletin 509, or equal, as specified in Division 26. The VFD for the main drive motor shall be Allen-Bradley Powerflex 755, or equal, Heavy Duty as specified in Division 26. c. The PLC shall be an Allen-Bradley CompactLogix with Ethernet/IP communications, or equal, as specified in Section 26 09 00. All discrete and analog I/O, setpoints, status indicators, timers, and alarms associated with the centrifuge equipment shall be stored in a dedicated block of memory within the PLC so that this information can be read by/written to the plant SCADA system (the SCADA system shall provide monitoring only of the centrifuge systems). Equipment supplier shall coordinate addressing with the Section 26 09 00 SCADA System programmer during construction. d. Pushbuttons and pilot lights shall be NEMA 4X, Allen-Bradley, 800H, or equal. e. Pilot lights shall be the push-to-test LED type. f. Ground lugs shall be supplied on the subpanel. g. Hydraulic backdrive controller shall be a Viscotherm MAI 211, or equal. Section 46 76 33-11 4463.004/City Contract No.994 h. Each wire shall be labeled with self-laminating markers. The wire numbers shall correspond to the electrical schematics. 6. All signals that are to be sent/received to/from the plant SCADA system shall be sent via Ethernet/IP, unless called out as hard-wired. Centrifuge supplier shall be responsible for this coordination. Refer to the 330PLC-1 I/O listing in Section 26 09 90—SCADA System I/O Listing for the signals required to interface with the plant SCADA system. E. General Operation Description: 1. The dewatering feed pump (P-12-1-1, P-12-1-2, or P-12-1-3) start command shall be sent from each centrifuge control panel to the plant SCADA System. 2. Control of the dewatering feed pumps (P-12-1-1, P-12-1-2, and P-12-1-3) pump speed shall be from the plant SCADA system. 3. The dewatering feed pump and polymer feed pump selections shall be made at the plant SCADA system. 4. The polymer feed pump (P-14-8-1, P-14-8-2, or P-14-8-3) start command shall be sent from each centrifuge control panel to the plant SCADA system. 5. Control of polymer feed pump (P-14-8-1, P-14-8-2, and P-14-8-3) rate (pump speed) shall be from the associated centrifuge panel PLC. 6. Common fail signals for biosolids conveyors (M-14-15-1 and M-14-15-2), main conveyor (M-14-15-5), inclined conveyor (M-14-15-6), and truck loadout conveyors (M-14-15-7, M-14-15-8, and M-14-15-9) shall be sent to the centrifuge control panels from the plant SCADA system. A conveyor's required commands shall be sent from each centrifuge control panel to the plant SCADA system. 7. Operational interlocks shall be provided as follows for normal start-Lp, operation, and shutdown modes: a. Main drive shall not start unless oil lubrication system and bowl c onveyor drive are in operation. b. Sludge feed, polymer feed, and sludge conveyors must be interlccked with start-up of centrifuge (via run command signals) so that the sludge feed and polymer feed will not be called to start until all conveyors are running. c. Main drive shall not start unless lubrication system is running, and all associated conveyors are running. d. Sludge and polymer feed shall not be started until the main drive s at speed. 8. Sludge feed and/or polymer feed shall be interrupted upon any one of the following conditions: a. High hydraulic pressure. b. Centrifuge vibration high alarm. c. Conveyor system alarm (i.e. common fail from any conveyor). d. Polymer pump failure. e. Sludge feed pump failure. 9. Sludge feed and polymer feed shall be manually restarted at the associated centrifuge control panel OIP after a fault has been corrected. 10. Hydraulic back drive system shall be interlocked with the cooling water solenoid valve. 11. Upon automatic startup for a selected centrifuge, the following shall occur: a. Send a run request signal to the plant SCADA system. b. Receive a centrifuge run command from the plant SCADA system, which will be provided after the conveyors selected at the plant SCADA system are all operating. c. Back drive shall start. d. Hydraulic lubrication system shall start. e. Main drive shall start after period of time at 30% speed. f. After a period of time, flushing water valve on feed line shall open for a period of time and then close. Section 46 76 33-12 4463.004/City Contract No.994 g. Main drive shall accelerate to operating speed. h. Selected polymer feed system P-14-8-1, P-14-8-2, or P-14-8-3) shall be started (via pump start command signal to the plant SCADA system). i. Selected dewatering feed pump (P-12-1-1, P-12-1-2, or P-12-1-3) shall be started (via pump start command signal to the plant SCADA system). 12. Interlocks shall be provided for automatic emergency shutdown of the centrifuge in the event of activation of any one of the following: a. Hydraulic back drive oil low level. b. Hydraulic back drive oil high temperature. c. Solid end and liquid end low oil flow. d. Solid end and liquid end bearing high temperature alarms. e. Main drive VFD fault. f. Hydraulic back drive starter overload. g. Hydraulic back drive pressure high high. h. Main drive motor high temperature. -� i. Hydraulic back drive motor high temperature. j. High high vibration. k. Selected sludge feed pump failure. I. Selected polymer feed pump failure. m. Associated biosolids conveyor failure. n. Main or inclined conveyor failure. o. Truck loadout conveyor failure. p. Loss of the centrifuge run command from the plant SCADA system. 13. Upon automatic shutdown, the following shall occur: a. Selected dewatering feed pump (P-12-1-1, P-12-1-2, or P-12-1-3) shall be stopped (via pump stop command signal to the plant SCADA system). b. Selected polymer feed system (P-14-8-1, P-14-8-2, or P-14-8-3) shall be stopped (via pump stop command signal to the plant SCADA system). c. Conveyors (M-15-1-1 to M-15-1-2) shall be stopped (via the conveyors required signal). Conveyor shall stop after an operator adjustable time delay. d. Main drive VFD shall go to 50% speed. e. Open flushing water solenoid valve. Timer starts. f. Hydraulic delay timer starts. g. Backdrive switches to a higher differential speed curve. �. h. Flush water solenoid closes. i. Hydraulic shuts down. j. Lube system shuts down. k. Motorized plug valve closes to isolate centrifuge from feed pump discharge. 14. Vibration Transmitter: Each centrifuge shall be equipped with a factory-installed, loop-powered vibration transmitter. The transmitter shall be rated NEMA 4X. F. Backdrive: 1. A hydraulic backdrive system shall be supplied with each centrifuge to provide speed variation between the scroll conveyor and the bowl. 2. Hydraulic Backdrive System: The differential speed between the centrifuge bowl and scroll conveyor shall be produced by a water-cooled hydraulic system that shall independently drive the scroll conveyor.The hydraulic scroll conveyor drive system shall be designed so that no mechanical gear reducer is required in the scroll conveyor drive train. The hydraulic drive system shall be capable of operating in either a manual or automatic mode. In the manual mode, it shall provide for operation at a specific, adjustable scroll differential speed with internal torque allowed to vary up to the maximum allowable scroll shaft torque. Section 46 76 33-13 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3. In the automatic mode, it shall continuously monitor changes in internal torque created by variations in influent feed solids and automatically maintain a preset torque input to the scroll by allowing the differential speed to vary. The hydraulic drive shall operate in a manner such that, as the reactive torque of scroll shaft increases because of an increase in solids inventory in the bowl, the scroll differential speed shall gradually increase and, conversely, as the inventory of solids in the bowl and resultant reactive torque decreases, the scroll differential speed shall decrease. The net effect of this system, when operated in the automatic mode, shall be to maximize the time that cake solids are under the influence of accelerated gravitational force so that the driest possible dewatered cake product is produced without plugging the centrifuge. 4. The system shall use a hydraulic pumping group and hydraulic motor. Torque-based adjustment shall be a function of input to the driven unit. The maximum torque input and rate of change of scroll differential speed shall be adjustable. 5. The system shall be designed such that automatic centrifuge shutdown is initiated in the event that excessive torque is detected. Two sets of contacts shall be provided. 6. Torque monitoring shall consist of an alert limit and alarm limit. In the event that torque exceeds the normal operating range and the alert limit is reached, the sludge feed pump and polymer feed pump shall be automatically stopped via the SCADA system to allow the centrifuge to clear itself and shall automatically restart when the torque drops to the normal operating range. In the event that the torque approaches the limit of the drive, the second set of contacts shall automatically initiate shutdown of both the feed pump and centrifuge. In this instance, manual reset of the hydraulic drive shall be required before the centrifuge can be restarted. 2.)6 CONTROL COORDINATION A. Dewatering feed pumps (P-12-1-1, P-12-1-2, and P-12-1-3), polymer feed pumps (M-10-20-01, M-10-20-02, and M-10-20-03), and conveyors (M-14-15-1, M-14-15-2, M-14-15-5, M-14-15-6, M-14-15-7, M-14-15-8, and M-14-15-9) controls are specified in Division 26, Section 26 09 00—Controls and Instrumentation of these specifications. Division 46, Section 46 76 33—Dewatering Centrifuge Equipment manufacturer shall review these controls and coordinate with Division 26. 2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Balance: All rotating parts shall be accurately machined and shall be in as nearly perfect rotation balance as practicable. The mass of the unit and its distribution shall be such that resonance at normal operating speeds is avoided. Excessive vibration shall be sufficient — cause for rejection of the equipment. B. Shop Testing: Each centrifuge and control panel shall be tested at the manufacturer's plant(s) for mechanical and electrical performance prior to shipment. CITY and/or CONSULTANT may witness one or more of the shop tests. Submit a schedule of all shop tests to CONSULTANT at least 15 days prior to performing tests. Test schedule shall be revised as necessary so that CONSULTANT has 15 days prior notification prior to any test. All centrifuges shall be tested with at least one of the control panels to be furnished. All control panels shall be tested with at least one of the centrifuges to be furnished. Control panels shall be tested with contact closures to simulate operating conditions. Test data shall be submitted to CONSULTANT and all deficiencies corrected prior to shipment of units. Section 46 76 33-14 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Mechanical and Electrical Checkout Test: 1. After installation and after all accessories are in operable condition, a field mechanical and electrical checkout test shall be performed by the manufacturer in the presence of CONSULTANT. Each unit shall be tested for normal start, normal stop, and emergency stop cycles. Each unit shall then undergo a 4-hour running test. All thermometers, pressure gauges, and flow indicators shall be observed and recorded. Safety devices shall be checked for satisfactory operation. The no-load amperage of the motor shall be checked and recorded. The start time and acceleration time to running speed shall be checked and adjusted if necessary. Belt tension shall be adjusted at the start of the test and checked and readjusted, if necessary, at the end of the test. All malfunctions appearing during the tests shall be corrected and additional tests performed to assure that the defective or maladjusted equipment is performing satisfactorily. No performance test shall be performed until all field mechanical and electrical checkout tests have been successfully completed. 2. Manufacturer shall submit a written certification to CONSULTANT that field mechanical and electrical checkout tests have been successfully completed and equipment is ready for performance testing. Certification must be submitted to CONSULTANT prior to starting any performance testing. 2.08 ACCESS WALKWAYS AND STAIRS A. Aluminum access walkways consisting of aluminum framing members, columns, grating and railing shall extend along one side of the centrifuges as shown. The walkways shall be designed to support, in addition to the dead load, a live load of 100 pounds per square foot with a deflection not exceeding 1/360 of the span. Provide stair access as shown. B. Access walkways shall be sized to allow access for maintenance on centrifuge components as required. C. Aluminum stairs, railing and grating shall match the stairs, railing and grating provided for other areas and shall be as specified in Division 05. 2.09 SOLENOID VALVES A. CONTRACTOR shall provide bowl flush water solenoid valve, panel cooling water solenoid valve, conveyor flush solenoid valve, hydraulic cooling water solenoid valve, air supply solenoid valve, and polymer dilution solenoid valve as specified in Section 40 23 10 for each unit. Coordinate size of valves with centrifuge manufacturer. 2.10 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Provide pressure gauge on the digested sludge feed piping for each centrifuge as shown on the drawings. Gauges shall be 4 1/2-inch dial, H.O. Trerice Model 450 LFSS with 316 stainless steel tube and socket, or equal. Case shall be liquid-filled with glycerin to minimize vibration and pulsations. B. The maximum discharge pressure gauge range shall be equal to twice the normal operating pressure. C. For each gauge, provide a pressure sensor. Pressure sensor shall be PSR (full flange type) as manufactured by Onyx Valve, Cinnaminson, NJ, or equal. The nonwetted body components shall be carbon steel. Elastomer shall be Buna-N. End plates shall be acetal. Section 46 76 33-15 4463.004/City Contract No.994 4rt Fill fluid shall be silicon. Provide one coat Tnemec N69-1255 epoxoline primer, or equal, applied to a minimum of 5.0 mils dry thickness. Provide pressure sensor with integral block valve and module seal to isolate the pressure sensor from the gauge and without losing sensing fluid pressure. Module seal material shall be 316 SS. 2.11 SPARE PARTS A. Furnish the following spare parts in substantial wooden boxes with identifying labels and deliver to the site: 1. Two complete matched sets of V-belts. 2. One set of replaceable feed port liners. 3. Two complete sets of Buna-N 0-rings. 4. One complete set of bearings and seals. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.J1 GENERAL A. Refer to requirements specified in Division 01 for equipment installaticn, quality control, testing, supervision, startup, and operator training. Comply with additional requirements as specified below. B. Installation and Supervision: All equipment and materials furnished are to be installed by CONTRACTOR. Manufacturer's field services shall be provided as follows and as specified in Division 1 to ensure proper installation of the equipment. CONTRACTOR shall inspect the units after delivery to the site for any damage done to the units during shipping. Manufacturer shall provide copies of installation instructions to CONTRACTOR. Manufacturer's field representative shall be present at the site as required to inform CONTRACTOR on proper installation, assembly, and lifting procedures for the units. Installation of all equipment furnished under this contract shall be supervised as required by a qualifier: representative of the equipment manufacturer. C. Field Quality Control and Demonstration: 1. Provide manufacturer's services for the following: a. Start-up. All equipment shall be placed in operation by a qualifiec representative of the equipment manufacturer. b. Field Testing. Equipment manufacturer shall provide a written i report covering checkout, testing, inspections, and start-up and shall identify any deficiencies noted. Report shall be submitted to CONSULTANT. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for correcting all deficiencies noted in report. Field report shal include baseline vibration report on units. c. Operator Training and Final Adjustment. This service to be scheduled as required by CITY. The plant operating and maintenance personnel shall be trained to the satisfaction of CITY by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer. CITY may videotape training presentation given by manufacturer s representatives. 2. Minimum Service Requirements: a. The following minimum on-site service requirements apply to manufacturer's field services during installation and supervision, start-up, field testing operator training and final adjustment, and performance testing. Equipment manufacturer shall include a minimum of four trips to site with total time at site to be a minimum of — 10 working days. A working day shall be a minimum of 8 hours or -site. Section 46 76 33-16 4463.004/City Contract No.994 b. Additional service shall be provided as required without additional cost to CITY to acceptably commission and test the equipment. D. Additional Minimum Follow-Up Service: Provide additional follow-up service at site after start-up and acceptance during the first two years of operation. Service shall include a minimum of one trip to site with total time at site to be a minimum of two working days.Timing of trips shall be coordinated between CITY and centrifuge manufacturer. Training during one service trip shall include the actual withdrawal, inspection of the feed tube, and reassembly of one of the centrifuges supplied. A working day shall be a minimum of 8 to 10 hours of on-site service and training. Start and stop times shall be selected by CITY. 3.02 PERFORMANCE TESTING A. Performance tests shall be run on both centrifuges at the site after installation is completed and after successful completion of all field mechanical and electrical performance tests. The performance tests shall be conducted by the equipment manufacturer's field representative. CITY's operating personnel will assist in the performance tests. CONTRACTOR shall schedule performance tests with CITY to minimize the impact on plant operations. CONTRACTOR shall give CONSULTANT notification prior to any performance tests. Tests will be witnessed by CITY and/or CONSULTANT. B. Both centrifuges can be tested at the same time. The performance test will involve up to 6 hours of continuous operation at the specified design sludge feed rate for two days within one week for each machine. The actual duration may be limited by the quantity of sludge available at the time of the test. The performance test results shall be used to prove compliance with the specified performance requirements including: 1. Minimum dewatered sludge cake percent solids. 2. Maximum polymer dosage rate. 3. Minimum solids recovery. C. Calculations to determine the solids recovery efficiency of the centrifuge shall be determined according to the following formula: Recovery = C (F-E) x 100 F (C-E) where C = % Cake Solids (Total Solids) (expressed as decimal) F = % Feed Solids (Suspended Solids) (expressed as decimal) E = % Centrate Solids (Suspended Solids) (expressed as decimal) D. As part of commissioning the equipment, but prior to performance test, centrifuge manufacturer shall optimize the centrifuge operation. Commissioning shall include conducting tests to select dry polymer for performance testing and making all adjustments to the equipment required to meet the performance testing requirements. CONTRACTOR shall also test, start up, and provide training on all interconnected systems required to operate dewatering system prior to performance testing. Section 46 76 33-17 4463.004/City Contract No.994 E. Calculations to determine the polymer usage rate in lb polymer/ton cry solids shall be determined according to the following formula: Polymer Dosage = 2,000 (P) p (F) f P = Polymer Rates, gpm p = Polymer Concentration, % F = Sludge Feed Rates, gpm f = Sludge Feed Solids Concentration, % F. Centrifuge manufacturer shall prepare a detailed test procedure for review by CONSULTANT prior to scheduling the performance tests. Procedures shall include forms for data collection, a description of all sample collection methods, and required analyses. Essentially, steady state operation shall be maintained throughout each test. G. Centrifuges shall achieve compliance with specified performance requires ents. Final results of all tests will be determined by averaging the results of individual tests performed during the test period.Acceptable performance will not be required during period:, when the influent sludge characteristics are outside the specified conditions. H. Laboratory tests shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory acceptable to CITY and be paid for by CONTRACTOR. Costs for laboratory tests and any other costs associated with the laboratory tests shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR. Costs for all chemicals, including polymer and all other costs associated with the commissioning and performance testing of the centrifuges, shall be the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer. Samples shall be taken as follows at approximately 1-hour intervals during the test: 1. Influent Solids: The suspended solids concentration of the feed sludge. 2. Influent Volatile Suspended Solids: The volatile suspended solids cc ncentration of the feed sludge. 3. Dewatered Cake Solids: The percent total solids concentration of the dewatered sludge discharged from the centrifuges. 4. Centrate Solids: The suspended solids concentration of the centrat, discharged from the centrifuges. 5. CITY may collect and analyze duplicate samples for verification purp::)ses. I. A complete solids balance shall be developed from flow metering of influent sludge, polymer feed, dewatered sludge, and centrate together with the solids concentration tests. Solids balance calculations shall be used to verify the accuracy of the measured quantities. Polymer feed rates, in pounds of polymer per dry ton of solids in feed sludge, shall be measured and recorded during the performance test. Polymer consumption shall be determined by measuring the polymer pump feed rate and the polymer concentration level. The consumption rate shall be measured and recorded at least four times during each performance test. J. Should the equipment fail to achieve the specified performance requirements, CONTRACTOR shall modify the equipment as necessary and repeat the test. Costs of modifying equipment, providing additional equipment, and all retesting shall be borne by CONTRACTOR. Modifications shall be completed within 60 days of performance testing. Should the equipment fail to meet the specified performance requirements after retesting, Section 46 76 33-18 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1" DIA. STD. SHOP DRILL FOUR 7/16" PIPE._.- AT 8" 1 HOLES AS SHOWN O.C., WELDEDME a,..._._._.........411 TO FRA ---. ---->------ I—I" Y ��� 3/4' DIA. ROD 6 �� AT 1 " .2 WELDED — `` — — — _ AT EACH PIPE 1 7 1" DNA. STD. N STEEL PPE FRAME P1 : 7 .. J TWO ADDITIONAL 4'X4"X3 16" ANGLE CONNECPROVIDEDORS SHALL WHEN EUB BE o TABS TO 7 D OR EQUAL DIA. IS n FRAME (4 REQ'D), 36' OR GREATER o PROVIDE 7 16" HOLE IN EACH TAB 1 E F- 7 _. O ro 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL BOLT THE PIPE GATE TO THE CONCRETE ENDWALL WITH FOUR 3/8"X6" MACHINE BOLTS, WITH NUTS ON INSIDE WALL 2. THE PPE GATE SHALL RECEIVE THE FOLLOWING PREPARATION AM) PAINTING o A. BARE SURFACES- AFTER THOROUGH SCRAPING, WIRE BRUSHING AND `` CLEANING, APPLY THE THREE COAT SYSTEM USTED c C. PAINT EACH COAT AS AN OVERALL COAT ° D. ALLOW 24 TO 48 HOURS DRYING TIME BETWEEN COATS o FIRST COAT: RUST-OLEUM X-60 RED BARE METAL PRIMER OR EQUAL SECOND COAT: RUST-OLEUM 960 ZINC CHROMATE PRIMER OR EQUAL THIRD COAT: RUST-OLEUM 1282 HIGH GLOSS AND METALLIC FINISH o OR EQUAL o 0� 3. PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE APRON ENDWALL SHALL BE MANUFACTURED TO h- MEET REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS II, "B" WALL REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE. ASTM a C-76 AND MSHTO M170 SPECIFICATION +•., z 1- I U) i Q i N PIPE GATE4647A1 u) 1 STRAND STANDARD DETAIL ASSOCIATES' 01-975-30A LE OCTOBER 2011 Z b W IIIR F p AEI il i ,:,:,:,. ° p I �014g; = N —W = — Z p � QC t,o IP ;:gxr' p F ogq i i a . ./ z 111 mil 00 pip z% m -. 1 z� rl �z8 I� ii- 1 tige. E Iso i 81 pil 1 il .1gp 1 1% -41,1 iclig N =� 4 Fa Tgni —i g4 : % -z a � ii0 1 W 1 NaN � � Z W�8vW 8 m w �3pp= �NWZ8 �dNza m z ta4 !Mid 1 � 0� F5 � 2MA � � n§0.11 � � ��_� � � �- � 40, plLf W >> Z %Id � < C .�tL �� � W ZZoo p � .-�'AN N W< ri I`lim A:1 ad rN lal = ,,.."V•� 61 s02 8 - q It_:-':: ini NIC Z4S U2 .,�n i g _�-: I U � 7 51 U U �U 2 I 65 0 4 P M gi 1.,„till IR i N- 2gtI INIMS1 - NI\ A ng i N ,„ :- 10 N III 5 !la PeZel : Y . . n 2g I Mit ' ''''' a ) iiik N .., ,. „. .,.....':::- , ___,, ,:-_-: p Anc N liI ` I I�.. ie Uh II I i-- i 7 , Y 1F y6k t MIAWa S irQ pyg WFC O Z p I � 1$ taM Nm xQx�1W pZ Q [1= il 1 ,, ',rifill. , ;' ' •; ' r,,- .- , H, ;'iq J O _ -,- W ni .I=-- i i cita< Ifll o a o i 7aoo i, ::::. .. . .. : o7 ill - Q I 1.4 �< t---'/ U) NM VI .o-."fr LON01103S A0 WIERIfW NM •1ar1 i MIA .8 7 Q STORM SEWER MANHOLES AND INLETS6eil 7 Q 0 STRAND ASSOCIATES' STANDARD DETAIL 01-975-41 A pi 6 OCTOBER 2011 C7 LEI Z. 0 W El N..f pomO %W 06g . W 81,9 UWo Of- ZO 3 wN J'� —mL� li WN mtr ^ �mU Ow W =�LIJ O co� m O N W W V S a II cna OC7wp Z� NWO •N..N► MO Toad z5 \ ycn O W (n�ZO O� p=� a U w�o 0 O��O OO QZ m(..D; ZOV,0 W p. IC10 mF moU ZaQ Q L' i E O ■m 1Qm Q WwL- FW 1 o U VL LAc, O O f7 0 N M wi-- La� �_ }} _ O� F- m o 0� N0O �Cewomin 0 W M N 1 N I I O �Ofn � �C Z =Z W dW ��a (nJ oc Z O z� z mm 3 ooz cn F , Mt a NzmU wo NI NI covNI N N 3 F -<N Z�� W o Z�.2 3 a wa ;�0 1oZ Zo ,oW I<,W=` gbQ �' w g 30 gg W QO�N W E. Z O 026 O mUceVI N z Wc�wzs cn�c3 �� �_ °?ro UU0 who 3Ez xwmm Umz d`' m a1 3 O 9 L o �Z�OO Zc V ... 0 �_ � ..� U LaIU 3 Fa oa z o x no ina ow Z�m go pU � �.'z8 v,00 N Z zZoo W cO iO io r�O ! � a w- o o o NO wo_MU 10 O U _ z m 1- w o N i-- aOZd wlyW �� pz mNmo omw a� 3 � I o�� I�o ocn Uc� maa O z _ mom ciN WgE �o� ��i �_ ow�u_ z ��w , alN N1WQ M� �SJ5�0 Inm� 10mu. INW OOQZ6 Ofa� .—L �Qa_EQOd- -ow V � W O ^ wawa. � 6 g ag g.. 41a24 < laid!wEE my 6J � � d? W z ¢ W 0 d Z aV7 ' C�aTE-= .- a E ~ OoW< v�oo 8 II `°°°°° °,oi'=-' v'°1vffilIll�i ��U a &o �'3Q a 1 `O°°�11 - .47, 1. 11 TI�II-II,_, 1 c� P v. 4. ``I-II- _ _ ' I 1IoC . Q .Q G....1. a h_h N ��, I • o NZ , � �� � . I_ ll o pe ocilI ;8; (7 'n'Em .,,,k\I r..271:==11 .,iiiiii!ii,, 1 eill c> col� n- _ 'NIW 'd'1 r 1 �0) '��j l� C) _`\\`�AII■ 111.7111� .0—�I I�~ I . li o I I _ .i 8 ��i.,, Q _II- .. II, 642 i `O, 'III M£.. o1=a . �C)�— 7 �:'Moe oul�I w�Qc ►oQ , •�,� I - • • ..c•A tO 2 A .. �Z N 79c ,11= J 01. Rez Rii ox Fir, ` %Il I. i — c7 Zi,aO w x §_ie 5 �•��oOO,�oOC = .lii- - 77,r 8p, W zv III o z iu;. _Z m o op m ��� aW 8 cd C 7, �- -Tien-,u_ill a Z a_a^ § . W _ 8 %`� "nl a J w (y� I. T7 U 1= Zi � U� Z N58 ^ a, III Q f ■ ■ p& ..J ]C» I �, _ _ ® Zg i Ci9Ru., e� 6,aa O O —` _..- F- O • 3 rs� ,' (MIN) I ** ..44 Ilk,,,.. aL2e >> w . 8 W C Ei': •9(MIN) 9/ao •� ii,..... 9 ,� o pp >t i ji _ ,., v ■ _. ',, , ,: III o O FFF xa C5 ,-4:31, 1 r Silt: _ L 3$ §__ PcIn I aci \•�rIli c °,il _ c� 1IIL!i I '•I',...m tim ' III a W 4 C5 O :I =III lyJ . t: CA \\k gig. •III O NIII i .Z \, (SNOLL03S 30 213�BNIIIN 'NIMI 3Sf1) •NIMI a; Z/00 S3IYA .,8 c) oi SANITARY SEWER a a' APPURTENANCES -a- STRAND ASSOCIATES' STANDARD DETAIL 01-975-43A .6 Li OCTOBER 2011 1O GRADE CHANGE BETWEEN GUTTER SLOPE AND CURB RAMP SLOPE SHALL NOT EXCEED 11%. MAXIMUM GUTTER PAN SLOPE IS 4%. PROVIDE LONGITUDINAL DRAINAGE AROUND CURB AND AWAY FROM CURB RAMP. NO VERTICAL UPS OR DISCONTINUITIES GREATER THAN 1/4-INCH ARE ALLOWED. SLOPE OF CURB HEAD OPENING SHALL NOT EXCEED 7%. SIDEWALK AS SPECIFIED -- VARIES (4" MINIMUM) _ (6-FT MINIMUM) / 1.5% CROSS SLOPE J 7l < COMPACTf'D CRUSHED 1/2" EXPANSION AGGREGAI E FILL MATERIAL CROSS SECTION A-A - 5'-0" A-0111 - n PROVIDE TRUNCATED DOMES FOR ALLLL HANDICAPjr w Z ACCESSABLE RAMPS p18" 5'--0" * 18" I co v . * STANDARD WIDTH UNLESS PROFILE eL to OTHERWISE SHOWN ON PLANS (i c,N , C. : 18" 5'-0" * 18" o - N �i NOTE: LOCATE CURB RAMP AT THE CENTER OF INTERSECTION RADIUS, ,,' A UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE IN THE L PLAN PLANS OR NOTED IN FIELD i CURB RAMPS ., E MIN. MAX. 1" ( ) A 1.6" 2.4" C- 0000000000000000000000 B 0.65" 1.5" , 0000000000000000000000 C * * p' 0000000000000000000000 0000000000000000000000 D 0.9" 1.4" iv 0000000000000000000000 0000000000000000000000 ELEVATION VIEW 0000000000000000000000 N * THE C DIMENSION IS 50% 0000000000000000000000 — TO 65% OF THE D DIMENSION 0000000000000000000000 0000000000000000000000 ' 000000000000000D000000 i TE B I A� RAMP BOTTOM WIDTH NI I CPLAN VIEW DETECTABLE WARNING FIELD (TYP) c, Q m r c, C� 0 TRUNCATED DOMES NOTE: MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION a FOR TRUNCATED DOMES SHALL BE a: DETECTABLE WARNING PATTERN SPECIFIED IN SPECIAL PROVISIONS U PLAN VIEW DETAIL DETAIL FOR ALL HANDICAP RAMPS OR AS REQUIRED 9Y THE OWNER a cN Q CURB RAMP AND �. c TRUNCATED DOMES STRAND ASSOCIATES' STANDARD DETAIL 01-9 75-85A a i_' MARCH 2017 1 1 7=-7N0 o 9 �O4' 5' MIL _ OoOo 1 -----,,`tOo AS SPECIFIED i I . 0o000 o bi 00 o Oo ---- -,-• i�7�����i�i��li��i4"� 0^...O O Q 0 0 0 — O o V .p o Q tI I I I I .�'. ����a�� �.,�ti!�'��.,� 0' ,c)10 �0 O O O O O O O O a O VI- _ I I I- .-, ci� vvv. ��lr�'i �lr� �ir%�_I� o � 0 �✓'I I=1 I I=1 I I 1 I -IIIIII=1 1 1= 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 c 0 0 c 0- oo�OJ D Ono�Ooc)�000-11 BEDDING STONE I I I I I I I I I I I I I(I I I I I I i i 1 I I n I I I I I I I ' 1 I I II-II I-I 11- 1 I I i 1 I 1III- - F UER FABRIC CONCRETE CUT-OFF WALL, 8' WIDTH PLUS 4'(D) x 8'(T) MIN. SECTION E 0 N) 0 1 g 1 r IAN. RIPRAP - 0 BLANKET oN N ' �o a ooc a oo c7o v �o C 0 000 00 7 o 00 060'00)0% 000 000oo 000 o0Goo0 000 00 ov n�,�n o 000 00 _- �000 o°�o o°oo o°� (OEOn0i 1 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 �1 0 ) 000 000 Ooo 00 ac )000 000 000 000 c 1 � I9c) o0 000 000 00 I O1 W,1(1)7-\013.0°/-\00()F\013.00 0 0 o� 00 00 0o 00 \,00 v�� I OOo OOo Oo0 00 �00 Uc� OOOOOOOO 7 (,. _5.- o° . ° o o o O0° APRON Erg WALL .`0 ')I�0 000 0 o aoo ()oo 0 AS SPID IED 0 1 I 8' X3/4' S.S. o BOLTS 0 2'-0' O.C. IQ U) 0 7 z Q g ELAM I, J 7 Q / 0 Q Q oz7A1 Li) STORM SEWER OUTFALL 1 o STRAND >< ASSOCIATES' STANDARD DETAIL 01-975-149A r7 OCTOBER 2011 - I 1'-4 1/2" 4• 4 o � w z1— N oili < o cc 0 1 r iii) 1"1"co Q 1 3 4• 1 1/2' 3/4r 1 — -— — z — i n 0 • = 4. Cl) W z p _1 < �Z N W k Q, 0 ii ? mg 1 0 1 li 1 1 0 co zQ 0 z Q 0 W gli /Ili Nil iaggi 0 0 , Q2 3/16' I _ 1 1/2" 7 0 i 23/18" _ 2' Y 7 Q _ s• _ VARIES_ VARIES 47 1- Q i o a Q 6:7A1 PROJECT SIGN LAYOUT 7 STRAND j ASSOCIATES' STANDARD DETAIL O1-975-158A E OCTOBER 2011 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA Department of Engineering SECTION A - Definitions of Terms SECTION B - Scope of work SECTION C - Control of Materials and Work SECTION D - Procedure and Progress SECTION E - Measurements and Payments SECTION F - Legal Relations and Responsibility SECTION A - DEFINITIONS OF TERMS 1. CITY. The City of Waterloo, Iowa, which is the Party of the '=irst Part of the accompanying contract, acting through its authorized representative. 2. COUNCIL. The duly elected Council of the City of Waterloo, Iowa. 3. ENGINEER. The City Engineer of Waterloo, Iowa, or his authorized representative. 4. INSPECTOR. The authorized representative of the Engineer, assigned to the detailed inspection of the work or materials therefor and to such other duties as may be dOegated to him in these specifications. 5. CONTRACTOR. The Party of the Second Part in the accompanyir g contract for the improvement covered by these specifications, or his authorized representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR. Any person, firm, or corporation who has, with t'ie approval of the Council, contracted with the Contractor to execute and perform in his stead all c r any part of the contract. 7. BIDDER. Any individual, firm, or corporation submitting a proposal for all or a part of the work provided for in these specifications. 8. PROPOSAL GUARANTEE. The security designed in the Notice of Bidders or Proposal to be furnished by the bidder as a guarantee of good faith to enter into a contract and furnish an acceptable bond for the work contemplated if it be awarded him. 9. SURETY. The corporate body bound with and for the Contractor f or the acceptable performance of the contract. 10. PROPOSAL. The written Proposal, submitted by the bidder in the prescribed manner and on the standard form, for the improvements covered by these specifications. 11. SPECIFICATIONS. The documents that set forth the manner in which the proposed work is to be accomplished which have been prepared by the Engineer and approved by the City Council, official copies of which are now on file with the City Clerk. 12. SPECIAL PROVISIONS. Clauses or memoranda not contained herein, applying to the contract of which these specifications are a part, which change or supplement these specifications. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Section GS-1 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 13. CONTRACT. The agreement entered into between the City and the Contractor, setting forth the terms under which the work covered by the plans and specifications is to be performed. The contract includes all conditions, definitions, and instructions set forth in the official publications relating to the work, the official contract and specifications, the Proposal, official plans, and all supplemental agreements entered into by the parties to the contract. 14. NOTICE TO BIDDERS. The notice called attention of bidders to the time and place for receiving bids, containing a brief description of the work, and briefly setting forth the requirements and conditions for submission of Proposals. 15. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. The clauses setting forth in detEjil the information relative to the proposed work and requirements for the submission of Proposals. 16. PLANS. The plans for the improvement covered by the specification;, and approved by the Council, official copies of which are on file with the City Clerk. 17. CONTRACT BOND. The bond executed by the Contractor and his surety in favor of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, guaranteeing the complete execution of the contract in accordance with the plans and specifications, the payment of all debts pertaining to the work, and maintenance of the work as provided by law or by the specifications. 18. CONTRACT PERIOD. The period from the specified date for beginni lg the work to the specified date of completion, both dates inclusive. The contract period may be extended by the Council, as provided in these specifications, in which event the contract period includi.3s the new date of completion. 19. OFFICIAL PUBLICATIONS. The official publications are the formal resolutions and notices relative to the proposed improvement that are required by law to be published in a prescribed manner and that have actually been published in accordance with the statutes relating thereto. A:tention is directed to the fact that these official publications are by statute vested with all of the force and effect of contract obligations. 20. A.S.T.M. Abbreviation for American Society for Testing Materials. 21. WORK. The term "Work" of the Contractor and Subcontractor includes labor or materials or both, equipment, transportation, or other facilities necessary to complete the contract. 22. TIME. All time limits stated in the contract documents are of the essence in the contract. SECTION B - SCOPE OF WORK 1. CORRELATION AND INTENT OF DOCUMENTS. The Contract documents are complementary, and what is called for by any one shall be as binding as if called for by all. The intention of the documents is to include all labor, materials, equipment, and transportation necessary for tre proper execution of the work. Materials or work described in words which, so applied, have a well- known technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standard. 2. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. Unless otherwise provided in the contract documents, the engineer shall furnish to the Contractor, free of charge, all copies of drawings and specifications reasonably necessary for the execution of the work. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Section GS-2 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 The Contractor shall keep one (1) copy of all drawings and specifications on tie work available to the Engineer and to his representatives. 3. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING. It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature, character and location of the work, the ccnformance to the ground, the character, quality, and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of the equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, the general and local conditions, and all other matters which can, in any way, affect the work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the City, either before or after the execution of the Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. 4. REPORTING ERRORS AND DISCREPANCIES. If the Contractor, in the course of the work, finds any discrepancies between the plans and the physical conditions of the locality, or any errors of omission in plans or in the layout as given by said stakes and instructions, shall be his duty to inform the Engineer immediately, in writing, and the Engineer shall promptly correct the same. 5. ALTERATION OR CORRECTION OF PLANS. The plans are made up from surveys that are presumably correct and represent the foreseen construction requirements. Any modification of the plans which may be required by the exigencies of the construction or any corrections made necessary because of errors in the original surveys, will be made by the Engineer. Should corrections or modifications of the plans or specifications require a different quality or class of work than that upon w-iich the unit prices in the Proposal are based, or if the modifications or corrections are required in parts of the work partially completed and such modifications result in an increased cost to the Contractor, the amount to be paid for work resulting from such changes shall be agrE:ed upon in writing at the time the changes are ordered and before the work is begun by the Contractor. No allowance will be made for anticipated profits on work not performed. 6. CHANGES IN THE WORK. The City, without invalidating the contract, may order extra work or make changes by altering, adding to, or deducting from the work, the contract sum being adjusted by agreement or arbitration before such changed work is undertaken. All such work shall be executed under the conditions of the original contract, except that any claim for extension of time caused thereby shall be adjusted at the time of ordering such change. 7. INCREASED OR DECREASED QUANTITIES. The right is reserved without impairing the contract, to order the performance of such work of a class not contemplated in the Proposal or to increase or decrease the quantities as may be considered necessary to complete fully and satisfactorily the work included in the contract. However, when the work is completed without change in the plans, and the measured quantity of any item of work varies by more than twenty percent (20%) from the estimated quantity specified in the contract, an adjustment in price may be made for such item of work by agreement between the Engineer and the Contractor, subject to the approval of the City Council. Either party to the contract may request such an adjustment. 8. LANDS AND RIGHT OF WAY. The City shall provide the lands upon which the work under this contract is to be done, except that the Contractor shall provide land required for the erection of temporary construction facilities and storage of his material, together with the right of access to same. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Section GS-3 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 9. CITY WATER. The Contractor shall be allowed to use City Water but before any water is used, he shall make application to the Waterloo Water Works for a temporary water connection from a fire hydrant or by some other connection method. Water usage will be charged at the rate for temporary water service. The rules, regulations, and water rates are available at the Waterloo Water Works offices at 325 Sycamore Street or their telephone number is 319-232-6280. 10. RIGHTS OF VARIOUS INTERESTS. Whenever work being done by the City's forces or by other Contractors is contiguous to work covered by this contract, the respective rights of the various imerests involved shall be established by the Engineer to secure the completion of the various portions �- of the work in general harmony. 11. CLOSING STREETS TO TRAFFIC. The Engineer shall be the judge of how many streets or parts of streets it is necessary for the Contractor to close at any time and may refuse to permit the closing of additional streets until such of the work is finished and opened to traffic as he may di-ect. 12. OBSTRUCTION OF STREETS. The work is to be carried on in such manner as to obstruct the streets, highways, and alleys as little as possible. The Contractor shall carry on the di.ferent parts of the work so as to complete the whole, as nearly as practicable, at the same time. In doing the work, the Contractor shall follow the directions of the Engineer as to the place or places where work shall be started or be carried on and the direction in which it shall be done. 13. SHANTIES AND BUILDINGS. Shanties or other buildings shall not be erected in or upon any street, highway, or alley without permission of the Engineer. If such permission be granted, it may be upon any reasonable terms prescribed by the person or body granting such permission. 14. SANITARY CONVENIENCES. The Contractor shall furnish the necessary sanitary conveniences, properly secluded, for the laborers on the work, and these shall be maintained in a manner that will be inoffensive to the public. 15. CLEANING UP. The Contractor shall, as directed by the Engineer, remove from the City's property and from all public and private property, at his own expense, all terrr porary structures, rubbish, and waste materials resulting from his operations before work can be cons dered completed. The Contractor shall also renew or replace any and all fences, sidewalks, or other property damaged or disturbed by his work. 16. OMISSION OF PARTS OF GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS. Parts of the General Specifications deemed not to apply to some particular work may be omitted by special reference in other parts of the contract documents. SECTION C - CONTROL OF MATERIALS AND WORK 1. SUPERVISION AND INSPECTION. The Engineer shall have supervision of the construction provided for in this Contract and shall decide any and all questions which may arise as to the quality and acceptability of materials furnished, work performed, manner of pe iormance, rate of progress on the work, and all questions regarding the acceptable fulfillment of the terms of the Contract. Materials and construction work shall, at all times, be subject to the inspection of the Engineer or his representatives. The Contractor shall be held strictly to the true intent of these specifications as regards the quality of materials, workmanship, and the diligent prosecution of the work. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Section GS-4 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 The Engineer and his representatives shall, at all times, have access to the work wherever it is in preparation of progress, and the Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such access and for inspection. If the specifications, the Engineer's instructions, law ordinances, or any public authority require any work and/or materials to be especially tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the Engineer timely notice of readiness for inspection. If the inspection is to be made by authority other than the Engineer, the Contractor shall notify the engineer of the date fixed for inspection. Inspections by the Engineer will be promptly made and, where practicable, at the source of supply. If any work should be covered up without the approval or consent of the Engineer, it must, if required by the Engineer, be uncovered for examination at the Contractor's expense. Re-examination of questioned work may be ordered by the Engineer, and, f so ordered, the work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If such work be found in accordance witl• the Contract, the City shall pay the cost of re-examination and replacement. If such work be found lot in accordance with the Contract, the Contractor shall pay such cost unless he shall show that the lefect in the work was caused by another Contractor, and, in that event, the City shall pay the cost. 2. AUTHORITIES AND DUTIES OF INSPECTORS. Inspectors may be stationed on the work to report to the Engineer as to the progress of the work and the manner in which it is being performed; also, to report whenever it appears that materials furnished and work performed by the Contractor fail to fulfill the requirements of the specifications and Contract, and to direct the attention of the Contractor to such failure or infringement; but such inspection shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligations to furnish acceptable materials or to provide completed construction that is satisfactory in every particular. In case of any dispute arising between the Inspector and the Contractor as to materials furnished or the manner of performing the work, the Inspector shall have the authority to reject materials or suspend the work until the question at issue can be referred to and decided by the Engineer. Inspectors are not authorized to revoke, alter, enlarge, relax, or release any requirements of these specifications. The Inspector shall, in no case, act as foreman or perform other duties for the Contractor, or interfere with the management of the work by the latter. 3. STATUS OF THE ENGINEER. The Engineer shall have general supervision and direction of the work. He has authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the Contract. He shall also have authority to reject any work and/or materials which do not conform to the specifications, to direct the application of forces to any portion of the work as, in his judgment, is required, and to order the force increased or diminished, and to decide questions which arise in the execution of the work. 4. ENGINEER'S DECISIONS. The Engineer shall, within a reasonable time, make decisions on all claims of the Contractor and on all other matters relating to the execution and progress of the work or the interpretation of the contract documents. All such decisions of the Engineer shall be final except as to the element of time and financial consideration involved, which, if no agreement in regard thereto is reached, st all be subject to arbitration. 5. STAKES AND INSTRUCTIONS. The Contractor shall provide reasonable and necessary opportunities and facilities for setting stakes and making measurements. The Contractor shall not furnish stakes or men to set them. He shall not proceed until he has received from the Engineer such stakes and instructions as may be necessary to the progress of the work. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Section GS-5 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 The Contractor shall carefully preserve bench marks, reference points, and sakes, and in case of willful or careless destruction, he shall be charged with the resulting extra expense and shall be responsible for any mistakes that may be caused, by their loss or disturbance. 6. SUPERINTENDENCE. The Contractor shall keep on his work during its progress a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to the Engineer. The Superintendent shall not be changed except with the consent of the Engineer, unless the Superintendent proves to be unsatisfactory to the Contractor and ceases to be in his employ. The Superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence, and all directions given to him shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important decisions shall be confirmed in writing to the Contractor. Other directions shall be so confirmed on written request in each case. The Contractor shall give efficient supervision to the work using his best skill and attention. He shall carefully study and compare all drawings, specifications, and other instructions, -and shall report at once to the Engineer any error, inconsistency, or omission which he may discover. 7. REMOVAL OF UNAUTHORIZED WORK. Work done without lines and grade being gi✓e, work done beyond lines shown on the plans or as given, except as herein provided, or any extra or additional work done without authority, will be considered as unauthorized and at the expense of the Contractor and will not be paid for under the provisions of the Contract. Work so done may be ordered removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 8. REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE MATERIALS OR WORK. The Contractor shall promptly remove from the premises all materials condemned by the engineer as failing to conform to the Contract; whether incorporated in the work or not, and the Contractor shall promptly replace and re- - execute his own work in accordance with the contract and without expense to the City, and shall bear the expense of making good all work of other Contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement. If the Contractor does not remove such condemned work and materials within a reasonable tirne, fixed by written notice, the City may remove them and may store the material at the expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the expense of such removal within a reasonable time thereafter, the City may, upon ten (10) days' written notice, sell such materials at auction or at private sale and shall account for the net proceeds thereof, after deducting all the costs and expense that should have been borne by the Contractor; or, if the net proceeds of such sale are insufficient to pay the expenses of removal, the City may deduct the balance from any amounts due the Contractor. 9. MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, APPLIANCES, AND FACILITIES. Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, labor, water, tools, equipment, light, power, transportation, and other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work. Materials shall be of the quality specified for each particular part of the work. Whenever, in construction of the work or in the manufacture of any article of appliance necessary for the construction or operation of the work, it is necessary to use any material that is not fully specified in these specifications, it shall be of good quality and shall meet with the approval of the Engineer. Any appliance that is necessary for the construction or operation of the work and is commonly recognized as a part of the work, shall be furnished by the Contractor as part of the work, whether or not it is specifically called for in the plans and specifications, and such appliance shall be of good quality and standard make and shall meet with the approval of the Engineer. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Section GS-6 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 10. MATERIAL SAMPLES. Before the contract is awarded, the bidder may be required to furnish a statement of the origin, composition, and manufacture of any and all materials proposed for use in the performance of the Contract, together with samples of the material. These samples will be considered as representative and typical of the material to be obtained from any particular source. 11. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN AND EQUIPMENT. The Contractor shall employ competent and efficient workmen for every kind of work. Any person employed on the work who shall refuse or neglect to obey the directions of the engineer or Inspector, or who shall be deemed incompetent or disorderly, or who shall commit trespass upon public or private property in the vicinity of the work, shall be dismissed when the Engineer so orders, and shall not be re•employed unless express permission be given by the Engineer. The Contractor shall, at all times, enfc rce discipline and good order among his employees. The methods, equipment, and appliances used on the work, and the labor employed, shall be such as will produce a satisfactory quality of work and shall be adequate to complete the contract within the specified time limit. 12. HIRING CITY EMPLOYEES. The Contractor shall not employ and hir any of the City's employees without the permission of the Engineer. 13. LABOR. Local labor shall be given preferences so far as practicable. 14. THE CITY'S RIGHT TO DO WORK. If the Contractor should neglect to prosecute the work properly or fail to perform any provision of this Co itract, the City of V�aterloo, after three (3) days' written notice to the Contractor may, without preju lice to any other remedy he may have, make good such deficiencies and may deduct the cost thereof from the payment then or thereafter due the Contractor, provided, however, that the Engineer shall cprove both such action and the amount charged to the Contractor. SECTION D - PROCEDURE AND PROGRESS 1. ORDER OF COMPLETION - USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS. The Contractor shall complete any portion or portions of the work in such order or time as the Engineer may require. The C ty shall have the right to take possession of and use completed or partially completed portion of the work at any time, but such taking possession and use shall not be deemed an acceptance of work so taken or used, or any part thereof. If such prior use increases the cost of or delays the work, the Contractor shall be entitled to such extra compensation or extension of time, or both, as the Engineer may determine. 2. WEATHER. During stormy or inclement weather, all work shall be suspended, except such as can be done in an acceptable manner. Permission to work during freezing, stormy, or inclement weather shall in no way be construed as a release of the Contractor's responsibility regarding the quality of the finished work at such time. 3. SUNDAYS AND LEGAL HOLIDAYS. Except for such work as m-iy be required to properly maintain or protect completed or partially completed construction or to rr aintain lights and barricades, no work will be permitted on Sundays or legal holidays without specific permission of the Engineer. 4. DELAYS AND EXTENSION OF TIME. If the Contractor be delayed in the completion of the work by an act of neglect of the City, or its employees; or by any other Contractor employed by the C ty; or by changes ordered in the work; or by strikes, lockouts, fire, unusual delays in transportation, GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Section GS-7 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 unavoidable casualties, or any cause beyond the Contractor's control; or by delay authorized by the Engineer pending arbitration; or by any cause which the Engineer shall decide justifies the delay, then the time of completion shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Engineer may decide will compensate for such delay. No such extension shall be made for delay occurring more than thirty (30) lays before claim therefor is made in writing to the Engineer. In the case of a continuing cause of delay only one claim is necessary. This article does not exclude the recovery of damages for delay by either part, under provisions in the contract documents. 5. TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OF WORK. The Engineer shall have authority to suspend the work, wholly or in part, for such period or periods of time as he may deem necessary, due to unsuitable weather or such other conditions as are considered unfavorable for the suitable prosecution of the work, or for such time as is necessary due to the failure to the Contractor to carry out orders given or to perform any or all provisions of the Contract. 6. NOTICES - HOW SERVED. Any notice to be given by the City to thE. Contractor under this contract shall be deemed to be served if the same be delivered to the man in ct arge of any office used by the Contractor or his foreman or agent at or near the work, or deposited n the post office, postpaid, addressed to the Contractor at his last known place of business. 7. PROGRESS OF WORK. The progress of the work shall be such that, at the expiration of one-fourth (1/4) of the contract period, one-eighth (1/8) of the work shall be completed; at the expiration of one-half (1/2) of the contract period, three-eighths (3/8) of the work shall be completed; at the expiration of three-fourths (3/4) of the contract period, the work shall be three-fourths (3/4) completed, and the whole work shall be completed at the expiration of the contract period. If, at any time the above schedule is not being maintained, the Council may give written notice to the Contractor and his sureties that the specifications are not being complied with. Such notice shall state what action on the part of the Contractor is required to bring the work within the requirements of the specifications. If the Contractor fails, within ten (10) days, to proceed as directed in the said notice, then the Council shall have authority to annul this contract without process or action at law and take over the prosecution and completion of the work, as provided under the article covering City's right to terminate contract. 8. CITY'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT. If the Contractor shodd be adjudged a bankrupt; or if he should make a general assignment for the benefit of this credito ; or if a Receiver should be appointed on account of his insolvency; or if he should persistently or re;:>eatedly refuse or should fail, except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enougl skilled workmen or proper materials; or if he should fail to make prompt payment to Subcontractors or for materials or labor; or if he should persistently disregard laws, ordinances, or the instructions of the Engineer; or if he should otherwise be guilty of a substantial violation of any provision of the contract, then the City, upon the certificate of the Engineer that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may, without prejudice to any other rights or remedy, and after giving the Contractor seven (7) days' written notice, terminate the employment of the Contractor and take possession of the premises and of all materials, tools and appliances thereon and finish the work by whatever method he may deem expedient. In such cases, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the contract price shall exceed the expenses of finishing the work, including compensation for additional managerial and administration services, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such expense shall exceed such unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Section GS-8 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 difference to the City. The expense incurred by the City as herein provided and the damage incurred through the Contractor's default shall be certified by the Engineer. 9. REMOVAL OF EQUIPMENT. In the case of annulment of this contract before completion, from any cause whatsoever, the Contractor, if notified to do so by the City; shall promptly remove any part or all of his equipment and supplies from the property of the City, failing which, the City shall have the right to remove such equipment and supplies at the expense of the Contractor. SECTION E - MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT 1. STANDARD OF MEASUREMENT. All work completed under the contract shall be measured by the Engineer according to the United States standard measures. 2. SCOPE OF PAYMENTS. The Engineer's measurements of quantities shall be the basis for final payment for the work performed under this Contract. After the work is completed, the Engineer will make measurements and computations of the number of units of each of the various items of work completed, and the Contractor will be paid for the actual amount of work performed at the rates specified in his Proposal. Before final settlement is made, the Council may require the Contractor to submit a list of all persons furnishing labor or materials, with evidence that such persons have been paid in full. Payment shall be made in the manner set forth in official publications and Council Proceedings relative thereto. 3. PAYMENT FOR EXTRA WORK. Such extra work as may have beun ordered by the Engineer and performed by the Contractor shall be compensated for as provided hE rein. If work is to be done or materials are to be furnished by the Contractor which cannot properly be classified under unit prices included in the Proposal, the Contractor shall be paid therefor the actual reasonable cost of the labor and materials entering permanently in such work, plus fifteen percent (15%) of the cost thereof. In computing the labor cost on such extra work, the following items shall be included: (a) Actual payroll expenditures for labor at the current rate therefor, and cc st of materials. (b) Pay of foreman and timekeepers for actual time required on the extra v,ork. (c) Liability insurance, prorated, for the extra work. Labor cost items on extra work shall be furnished in duplicate by the Contractor to the Inspector daily. The Inspector shall check the items, and if he finds them to be correct, he shall so certify on the statement of cost, returning one copy to the Contractor and filing one copy with the Engineer. The Engineer shall determine the cost of materials entering into extra work .rom the materials and receipted freight bills for the same. For any special machine, power tools, or equipment, including fuel and lubricants, but not including small hand tools, which may be deemed necessary or desirable to use, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable rental thereon, to be agreed upon in writing by the Engineer before such work is begun, and to which sum no percentage is to be added. The item of cost shall not include repairs or replacement of equipment or overhead expenses of any character. The fifteen percent (15%) allowed is considered to cover the use of hand tools and all overhead expenses except liability insurance. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Section GS-9 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 In no case will a claim for extra compensation be allowed unless the work upl>n which the claim is based has been ordered in writing, except as provided hereinafter. 4. CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COST. If the Contractor claims that any instruc:ions, by drawings or otherwise, involved extra cost under this contract, he shall give the Engineer wri-ten notice thereof within ten (10) days after completion of the work. No such claim shall be valid unless so made. 5. CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COMPENSATION. If the Contractor deems that extra compensation is due him for work and/or materials that he considered is not clearly covered in the items for which he submitted unit prices in his bid and that were not ordered in writing by the Engineer as an extra s heretofore provided, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in writing, of his intention to make claim for extra compensation for work and/or material before starting construction. If such written notification is not given or the Engineer is not afforded proper facilities by the Contractor for keeping strict account of actual cost as defined herein, then the Contractor hereby agrees to waive the claim for extra compensation. Such notice to the engineer and the fact that the Engineer has kept account of cost as aforesaid, shall not in any way be construed as proving the validity of the claim, which must be passed upon by the Council. In the event that the Council finds the claim to be just, it shall be allowed and paid for as extra work as provided herein. 6. COMPLETION REPORT AND OBJECTIONS THERETO. Within ten 10) days after the full completion of the work to be done under this contract, the Engineer shall make a written statement of all the work done by the Contractor hereunder, stating the quantity of each item as found by him and including a statement of all credits for extra work and all credits or debits for changes, alterations, omissions, and defects, and shall forthwith deliver a copy of such statement to the Contractor. The Contractor shall compare such statement with his own records and shall then, in writing, either approve such statement or point out any claimed errors or omissions. If any of such claims are found correct, the Engineer shall, within ten (10) days, prepare a new statement, a copy of which shall in like manner be delivered unto the Contractor. The Engineer will not file a formal completion report with the City until the Contractor has approved the same. If the figures of the Engineer and the Contractor cannot be reconciled, or then is a difference of opinion regarding some item or items, then such difference of opinion shall be subrr fitted to arbitration as hereinafter provided, and the decision of the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and the Engineer _ shall, within a period of five (5) days, file his completion report. Before action by the City Council upon such completion report, the Contractor shall also file a — written statement of any claims he may have against the City, other than those shown by such completion report, growing out of this contract or the work done hereunder. The City shall retain ten percent (10%) of the amount due the Contractor on the completion report for a period of thirty (30) days. If no claims are filed against the Contractor within thirty (30) days, the final ten percent (10%) shall then be paid to the Contractor. 7. WAIVER. By the execution of this contract ,the Contractor agrees that any objections he may have to the statement of the amount of work done hereunder included by the Engineer in this completion report, and any claims of the Contractor against the City growing out of this contract and the work done hereunder which are not stated in writing in the manner and within the time provided in Article 6, Section E hereof, shall be waived, and no such claim shall thereafter be asserted against the City. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Section GS-10 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 SECTION F - LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES 1. LAWS RELATING TO WORK. The Contractor is presumed to be familiar with all laws, ordinances, and regulations which may, in any manner, affect those engaged or employed upon the work or the materials or equipment used in or upon the work, and shall conduct the work so as not to conflict with such laws, ordinances, and regulations. 2. PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY. The Contractor fo any part of the improvement shall be held responsible for the care of materials and of partial y completed and completed work until final acceptance of the same by the Council. He will be require I to make good at his own expense any damage which the work may sustain from any cause prior o the filing of the engineer's certificate of completion. He shall take all risk from floods and casualties of every description and make no charge for delay due to such cause. He may, however, be allowed a reasonable extension of time on account of such delays. He shall correct or make good at his own expense all damages to adjacent property due to the acts or negligence of his employees of the prosecution of his work, and save the City harmless therefor. The Contractor shall be held liable and responsible for all damages done to water, sewer, drain, or other underground pipes and structures, and to sidewalks and private property. 3. RESPONSIBILITY FOR ACCIDENTS. The Contractor shall assumE full responsibility for all damages sustained by persons or property due to the carrying on of his work until final acceptance thereof, or until released by the Engineer in writing. 4. LIABILITY INSURANCE. The Contractor shall carry liability insurance which shall save the City harmless and protect the public and any person from injury sustained by the reason of the prosecution of the work or the handling or storing of materials therefor, and said Contractor shall also carry liability insurance which shall meet the requirements of the Iowa Worker's Compensation Law. Before work shall be started on this contract, the Contractor shall furnish the City Clerk with proper affidavit or Affidavits executed by representatives of duly qualified insurance companies, evidencing that said insurance company or companies have issued liability insurance policies, effective during the life of the contract, or for a period of a least ten (10) days following the filing of written notice of cancellation, protecting the public and any person from injuries or damages sustained by reason of carrying on the work involved in the Contract. The affidavit shall specifically evidence the following forms of insurance protection: (a) Public liability insurance covering all operations performed by persons directly employed by the Contractor. (b) Public liability insurance covering all operations performed by any Subcontractor to whom a portion of the work may have been assigned. (c) Public liability insurance covering all work upon the project performed by any independent Contractor working under the direction of either the principal Contractor or a Subcontractor. (d) Motor vehicle bodily injury liability insurance and property damage liability insurance on all motor vehicles employed on the work, whether owned by the Contractor or by other persons, firms, or corporations. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Section GS-11 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 (e) The minimum protection shall be as follows: Comprehensive General Liability Insurance General Aggregate Limit $ 2,000,000.00 — Products—Completed Operations Aggregate Limit $ 2,000,000.00 Each Occurrence Limit $ 2 ,000,000.00 Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance $ 1,000,000.00 The Contractor shall have the City of Waterloo, Iowa, named as an "Additions Named Insured". A certificate, or a policy if requested, shall be filed with the Owner. All certificates and/or policies of insurance furnished by the Contractor to be filed with the City Clerk shall include the name and address of the agency issuing the same. It shall also be required that the City Clerk be notified by registered mail of the cancellation or expiration of the above insurance. 5. BARRICADES AND SIGNS. The Contractor shall, at his own expense and without further or other order, provide, erect, and maintain, at all times during the progress and suspension of the work and until completion and final acceptance thereof, suitable and requisite barricades, signs, or other adequate protection, as required by the latest edition of the "Iowa Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways" and shall provide, keep, and maintain such barricades, signs, etc., as may be required or as may be ordered by the City Engineer, to insure the safety of the public as well as those engaged on the work. All barricading plans shall be approved by the City Engineer. 6. ROYALTIES AND PATENTS. The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. He shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall save the City harmless from loss on account thereof, except that the City shall be responsible for all s,ach loss when a particular process or the product of a particular manufacturer is specified. 7. PERMITS AND REGULATIONS. Permits and licenses of a tempor-iry nature for the prosecution of the work shall be secured and paid for by the Contractor. Permits, license, and easements for permanent changes in existing facilities shall be secured and paid for y the City. 8. CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES. Any claim for damages arising under this Contract shall be made in writing to the party liable within a reasonable time of the first observance of ouch damage and no later than the time of final payment, except as expressly stipulated otherwise in the case of faulty work or materials and shall be adjusted by agreement or arbitration. The Contractor shall be held for the payment of all just claims against him arising out of the prosecution of this contract, and his bond will not be released until such claims are paid for dismissed. 9. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT. The Contractor shall not sell or assign the contract or sublet any portion of the work provided for therein without the written consent of the City Council. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Section GS-12 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 10. SUBCONTRACTORS. The Contractor shall, as soon as practicable after the signature of the contract, notify the Engineer in writing of the names of the Subcontractors proposed for the work and shall not employ any that the Engineer may, within a reasonable time, object to as incompetent or unfit. The Contractor agrees that he is as fully responsible to the City for the acts and omission of his Subcontractors and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them as he is for the acts and ornissions of persons directly employed by him. Nothing contained in the contract documents shall create any contractual relation between any Subcontractor and the City. 11. ARBITRATION. All questions subject to arbitration under this Contract shall be sL,bmitted to arbitration at the choice of either party to the dispute. The Contractor shall not cause a delay of the work during any arbitration procE:edings, except by agreement with the Engineer. The demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the Engineer, in the (-ase of an appeal from his decision, within ten (10) days of its receipt, and in any other case, within r reasonable time after cause thereof, and in no case later than the time of final payment, except as ot-ierwise expressly stipulated in the contract. If the Engineer fails to make a decision within a reasonab time, an appeal to arbitration may be taken as if his decision had been rendered against the part appe-cling. No one shall be nominated or act as an arbitrator who is in any way financiall f interested in the contract or in the business affairs of either the City or the Contractor. The general procedure shall conform to the laws of the State of Iowa. Unless otherwise provided by such laws, the parties may agree upon one arbitrator; otherwise, there shall be three--one named in writing by each party to this contract to the other party, and the third chosen by these two arbitrators, or, if they fail to select a third within ten (10) days, then he shall be chosen by the Comptroller of the State of Iowa. Should either party refuse or neglect to supply the arbitrators with any papers or information demanded in writing, the arbitrators are empowered by both parties to proceed ex parte. If there be one arbitrator, his decision shall be binding; if three, the decision of any two shall be binding. Such decision shall be a condition precedent to any right of legal action, and, wherever permitted by law, it may be filed in Court to carry it into effect. The arbitrators, if they deem that the case demands it, are authorized to award to the party whose contention is sustained such sums as they shall deem proper for the time, expense, and trouble incident to the appeal, and, if the appeal was taken without reasonable cause, damages for delay, the arbitrators shall fix their own compensation unless otherwise provided by agreement and shall assess the costs and charges of the arbitration upon either or both parties. The award of the arbitrators must be in writing, and it shall not be open to objE ctions on account of the form of proceeding or the award, unless otherwise provided by the laws of Iowa In the event of such laws providing on any matter covered by this article otherwise than as hereinbefore specified, the method of procedure throughout and the legal effect of the award shall be wholly in accordance with the laws of the State of Iowa, it being intended hereby to lay down a principle of action to be followed, leaving its local application to be adopted to the legal requirements of the place in which the work is to be done. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Section GS-13 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 12. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS. The Contractor shei+l, at the time of execution and delivery of this contract and before the taking effect of same, furnish and deliver to the City written bonds of indemnity to the amount required by law in form and substance, and with surety thereon satisfactory and acceptable to the City, to insure the faithful performance and payment by the Contractor of all the covenants and agreements on the part of the Contractor contained in this contract. These bonds shall remain in force and effect for the full amount of the Contract. 13. PERSONAL LIABILITY OF PUBLIC OFFICIALS. In carrying out any of the provisions of the Contract or in exercising any power or authority granted him thereby, there shall be no liability upon the Engineer or his authorized assistants, either personally or as an official of the City, it being understood that in such matters he acts as the agent and representative of the City. 14. JURISDICTION. Any action in Court against the Contractor or sureties on his bond because of damages to property or individuals by said Contractor or his workmen, or because of the violation of any provisions of the specifications, or on account of the failure of said Contractor to comply fully with these provisions, shall be brought in the District Court of the State of Iowa in and for Black Hawk County. 15. TERMINATION OF RESPONSIBILITY. The Contract shall be considered as completed and the Contractor released from further obligations except as to the requirements of his bond, after the work has been completed and finally accepted and final estimates have been allowed and the completion report of the engineer has been filed and approved by the Council. 16. CITY'S LEGAL RIGHTS. The City shall not be precluded by any measurements, estimate, or certificate made, either before or after the completion and acceptance of the work and payment therefor, from showing the true amount and character of the work performed and materials furnished by the Contractor, or from showing that any such measurement, estimate, or certificate is untrue or incorrectly made, or the work or materials do not, in fact, conform to the Contract. The City shall not be precluded, notwithstanding any such measurements, estimate, or certificate and payment in accordance therewith, from recovering from the Contractor and his surety such damages as it may sustain by reason of his failure to comply with the terms of the Contract. Neither the acceptance by the City or any of its representatives, nor any payment for or acceptance of the whole or any part of the work, nor any extension of time, nor any possession taken by the City, shall operate as a waiver on any portion of the contract or of any power herein reserved, or any right to damages herein provided. A waiver of any breach of the contract shall not be held to be a waiver of any other or subsequent breach. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Section GS-14 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION 1, SUBCONTRACTS The contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts relative to the work to require compliance by each subcontractor with the applicable provisions of the contract for the improvements embraced in this contract. 2. REVIEW BY THE CITY OF WATERLOO The City of Waterloo, its authorized representatives and agents, shall at all times have access to and be permitted to observe and review all work, materials, equipment, payrolls, personnel records, employment conditions, material invoices, and other relevant data and records pertaining to this contract, provided, however, that all instructions and approval with respect to the work will be given to the contractor only by the City of Waterloo through its authorized representative or agents. 3. INSPECTION a. The contractor shall furnish promptly all materials reasonably necessary for any tests, which may be required. All tests by the City of Waterloo will be performed in such manner as not to delay the work unnecessarily and will be made in accordance with the provisions of the Technical Specifications. b. Inspection of materials and appurtenances to be incorporated in the improvements embraced in this contract may be made at the place of production, manufacture or shipment, whenever the quantity justifies it, and such inspection and acceptance, unless otherwise stated in the Technical Specifications, shall be final, except as regards (1) latent defects, (2) departures from specific requirements of the contract, (3) damage or loss in transit, or (4) fraud or such gross mistakes as amount to fraud. Subject to the requirements contained in the preceding sentence, the inspection of materials as a whole or in part will be made at the project site. 4. WARRANTY OF TITLE No material, supplies, or equipment to be installed or furnished under this contract shall be purchased subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale, lease-purchase or other agreement by which an interest therein or in any part thereof is retained by the seller or supplier. The contractor shall warrant good title to all materials, supplies, and equipment installed or incorporated in the work and upon completion of all work, shall deliver the same together with all improvements and appurtenances constructed or placed thereon by him to the City of Waterloo free from any claims, liens, or charges. Neither the contractor nor any person, firm, or ,.� corporation furnishing any material or labor for any work covered by this contract shall have any right to a lien upon any improvement or appurtenance thereon. Nothing contained in this paragraph, however, shall defeat or impair the right of persons furnishing materials or labor to recover under any bond given by the contractor for their protection or any rights under any law permitting such persons to look to funds due the contractor in the hands of the City of Waterloo. The provisions of this paragraph shall be inserted in all subcontracts and material contracts and notice of its provisions shall be given to all persons furnishing materials for the work when no formal contract is entered into for such materials. SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL Section SGS-1 SFECIFICATIONS 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 5. CONSULTANT The Consultant on this project is Strand Associates, Inc.® who prepared Drawings and Technical Specifications for this project. The Consultant is not the City Engineer, Engineer, or Inspector as defined in these specifications. The Consultant will provide the following construction-related services for this project: a. Requests for Information: Consultant shall respond to written requests for information submitted by Contractor requesting clarification, interpretation, or additional information pertaining to Contract Documents. b. Shop Drawings Review: Consultant shall review shop drawings submitted by Contractor in a timely manner. Shop drawing review and approval will be only to determine if items covered in the submittals will conform to the information given in the Contract Documents. c. Change Orders: Consultant shall review change proposals and claims for extra compensation submitted by Contractor and recommend or deny the change proposals in part, or in whole. Accepted change proposals shall form the basis of a change order to be executed between the City and the Contractor. d. Applications for Payment: Consultant shall review applications for payment and indicate recommendation for payment or reasons refusing to recommend payment. e. RPR: Consultant shall provide a Resident Project Representative (RPR) to represent the Consultant at the site and assist Consultant in observing the progress and quality of the Work. The RPR will act as directed by and under the supervision of the Consultant and will confer with the Consultant regarding RPR's action. 1) General: RPR's dealings in matters pertaining to the Work in general shall be with Consultant and CONTRACTOR. RPR's dealings with Subcontractors shall only be through or with the full knowledge and approval of CONTRACTOR. RPR shall generally communicate with City only with the knowledge of and under the direction of Consultant. 2) Schedules: Review the progress schedule, schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submittals, and Schedule of Values prepared by CONTRACTOR and consult with Consultant concerning acceptability. 3) Conferences and Meetings: Attend meetings with CONTRACTOR, such as preconstruction conferences, and progress meetings. 4) Liaison: a) Serve as Consultant's liaison with CONTRACTOR. Working principally through Contractor's authorized representative or designee, assist in providing information regarding the provisions and intent of the Contract Documents. b) Assist CONSULTANT in serving as City's liaison with CONTRACTOR when CONTRACTOR's operations affect City's on-Site operations. SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL Section SGS-2 SPECIFICATIONS 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 c) Assist in obtaining from City additional details or information, when required for proper execution of the Work. 5) Interpretation of Contract Documents: Report to Consultant when clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents are needed and transmit to CONTRACTOR clarifications and interpretations as issued by Consultant. 6) Modifications: Consider and evaluate CONTRACTOR's suggestions for modifications in Drawings or Specifications and report s uch suggestions, together with RPR's recommendations, if any, to Consultant. Transmit to CONTRACTOR in writing decisions as issued by Consultant. 7) Review of Work and Rejection of Defective Work: a) Conduct on-Site observations of CONTRACTOR's work in progress to assist Consultant in determining if the Work is in general proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. b) Report to Consultant whenever RPR believes that any part of CONTRACTOR's work in progress is defective, will not produce a completed Project that conforms generally to the Contract Documents, or will imperil the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged, or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, test or approval required to be made; and advise Consultant of that part of work in progress that RPR believes should be corrected or rejected or should be uncovered for observation, or requires special testing, inspection or approval. 8) Tests and System Start-ups: a) Observe that tests, equipment, and systems start-ups and operating and maintenance training are conducted in the presence of appropriate OWNER's personnel, and that CONTRACTOR maintains adequate records thereof. b) Observe, record, and report to Consultant appropriate details relative to the test procedures and systems start-ups. 9) Records: a) Prepare a daily report or keep a diary or log book, and send periodic reports to Consultant. 10) Reports: __. a) Furnish to Consultant periodic reports as required of progress of the Work and of CONTRACTOR's compliance with the Progress Schedule and schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submittals. SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL Section SGS-3 SPECIFICATIONS 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 b) Draft and recommend to Consultant proposed Char ge Orders, Work Change Directives, and Field Orders. Obtain back up material from CONTRACTOR. c) Immediately notify Consultant of the occurrence of any Site accidents, emergencies, acts of God endangering the Work, force majeure or delay events, damage to property by fire or other causes, or the discovery of any Constituent of Concern or Hazardous Environmental Condition. 11) Payment Requests: Review applications for payment with CONTRACTOR for compliance with the established procedure for their submission and forward with recommendations to Consultant, noting particularly the relationship of the payment requested to the Schedule of Values, Work completed, and materials and equipment delivered at the Site but not incorporated in the Work. 12) Certificates, Operation and Maintenance Manuals: During the course of the Work, review materials and equipment certificates, operation and maintenance manuals and other data required by the Contract Documents to be assembled and furnished by CONTRACTOR are applicable to the items actually installed and in accordance with the Contract Documents, and have these documents delivered to Consultant for review and forwarding to Owner prior to payment for that part of the Work. 13) Completion: a) Participate in Consultant's visits to the Site to determine Substantial Completion, assist in the determination of Substantial Completion and the preparation of a punch list of items to be completed or corrected. b) Participate in Consultant's final visit to the Site to determine completion of the Work, in the company of City and CONTRACTOR, and prepare a final punch list of items to be completed and deficiencies to be remedied. c) Observe whether all items on the final list have been completed or corrected and make recommendations to Consultant concerning acceptance and issuance of the notice of acceptability of the work. f. The RPR shall not: 1) Authorize any deviation from the Contract Documents or substitution of materials -- or equipment (including "or-equal" items). 2) Exceed limitations of Consultant's authority as set forth in the Contract Documents. 3) Undertake any of the responsibilities of CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, or Suppliers. 4) Advise on, issue directions relative to, or assume control over any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of CONTRACTOR's work. SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL Section SGS-4 SPECIFICATIONS 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 5) Advise on, issue directions regarding, or assume control over security or safety practices, precautions, and programs in connection with the activities or operations of City or CONTRACTOR. 6) Participate in specialized field or laboratory tests or inspections conducted off-site by others except as specifically authorized by Consultant. 7) Accept Shop Drawing or Sample submittals from anyone other than CONTRACTOR. 8) Authorize OWNER to occupy the Project in whole or in part. g. Limitations of the Consultant 1) Consultant will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs. Consultant will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the contract documents or to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. 2) Consultant will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or any subcontractor, any supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work. 3) Consultant's review of the final Application for Payment aid accompanying documentation will only be to determine generally that their cor:ent complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents, and in the case of certificates of inspection, tests, and approvals, that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. 6. INSURANCE a. Contractor shall include the City and Consultant as additional insureds, using endorsement form CG 20 26 07 04, CG 20 10 07 04, or equivalent form for all additional insureds. General Liability policies shall also be endorsed with Form CG 20 37 07 04 to include the "products completed operations coverage." Endorsements or General Liability policy shall not exclude supervisory or inspection services. b. Contractor shall also provide an additional insured endorsement for the automobile policy, Form CA 2048, or equivalent form. c. Contractor shall also indemnify and hold harmless the Consultant in the same manner as the City of Waterloo is held harmless under this Contract. SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL Section SGS-5 SPECIFICATIONS 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 FORM OF CONTRACT CONTRACT FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF F.Y. 2020 WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT BIOSOLIDS MODIFICATIONS CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA CITY CONTRACT NO. 994 Tiis contract made and entered into this day of , 20 , by and between the City of Waterloo, Iowa, a Municipal Corporation, (hereinafter referred to as City), and of , (hereinafter referred to as Contractor), WITNESSETH: PAR. 1 Contractor agrees to build and construct the F.Y. 2020 Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications, City Contract No. 994, and furnish all necessary tools, equipment, materials, and labor necessary to do all the work called fcr in the plans and specifications in a workmanshiplike manner and for the prices set fcrth in Contractor's proposal, which was accepted by the City, and which is understood and ,Agreed to be a part of this contract. PAR. 2 It is understood and agreed that the resolution adopted by the City Council ordering the construction of the improvement, the Notice to Contractors as published, the Instruction to Bidders, the Form of Proposal, the Construction and Maintenance Bonds, the Council Proceedings relating to this matter, and the Plans and Specifications shall all be considered as forming a part of the contract the same as though they were each set out in said contract. PAR. 3 The Contractor agrees to furnish at its own cost and expense, all necessary materials and labor for said work and to construct said improvements in a thorough, substantial, and workmanlike manner, and in strict accordance with the requirements of this contract, and of the plans and specifications made a part hereof by reference, and to the satisfaction and approval of the City and its engineer. PAR. 4 The Contractor agrees to perform said work and install said improvements on the terms set out in bid or proposal to the City which has been accepted by the City and which is by reference made a part of this contract. PAR. 5 The Contractor agrees to commence said work within ten (10) working days after receipt of "Notice to Proceed," be substantially complete within 670 calendar days after the date when the Contract Time commences to run, and be complete and ready for final payment within 730 calendar days after the date when the Contract Time commences, unless an extension of time is granted in writing by the Council of the City. FORM OF CONTRACT Section C-1 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 PAR. 6 Should the Contractor fail to complete said improvements in strict accordance with the terms and conditions of this contract, or the plans and specifications therefor promptly by the date herein specified, the City may pay such additional sums as it may be required to pay by reason of the failure of said contractor and deduct any and all such sums from any amount then due the Contractor. PAR. 7 The Contractor agrees to comply with and obey all ordinances of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, relating to the obstruction of streets and alleys, keeping open passage ways for water, traffic, and protecting any excavations in any street or alley, and maintaining proper and sufficient barricades with lights and signals during all hours of darkness, to see that the backfilling is properly done, and agrees to keep the City whole and defend any and all suits that may be brought against the City by reason of any injuries that may be sustained by any person or property allegedly caused by the Contractor, or his agents, while work is done pursuant to this agreement. PAR. 8 The Contractor agrees that in the event a law suit is brought against the City for damages allegedly sustained by reason of any act, omission or negligence of the Contractor or its agents, or on account of any injuries allegedly sustained by reason of an obstruction, hole, depression or barrier placed or dug by the defendant or its agents, in the doing of the work herein contracted for, that it will defend said suit and save the City harmless therein, and in case judgment is rendered against the City, the Contractor agrees to pay the same promptly. The Contractor agrees to carry public liability insurance in a solvent company in a sufficient amount to protect the City and those who use the streets of the City. PAR. 9 The City shall have the right to appoint one or more construction reviewers who shall review the progress of the work in detail; also, to make any test or any material to be used in such work. No material shall be used in any work until the same has first been approved by the construction reviewer. Such construction reviewer shall have full authority to pass judgment upon all materials and upon the manner of doing the work, and their judgment on rejecting any materials, substance, or manner of work shall be final unless it is revoked or modified by the City Engineer. PAR. 10 Any material, which has been rejected by the construction reviewer, shall be at once removed from the line of work and shall not be again taken thereon or placed with the material proposed to be used without the written consent of the City Engineer. PAR. 11 The Contractor shall maintain no cause of action against the City on account of delays and prosecution of work, but if said work is delayed by the City, the Contractor shall have such extra time for completion of the job as was lost by reason of the delay caused by the City. PAR. 12 The Contractor agrees to pay punctually all just claims of labor, material, men, or subcontractors who shall perform labor or furnish materials entering into this improvement. It is agreed that the City need not pay the Contractor until all such claims are paid by the Contractor. It is agreed that the City shall not be liable for said labor material, or men under this contract. PAR. 13 The Contractor agrees to furnish the City, simultaneously with this contract, a bond on a form to be provided by the City in the amount provided by law as stated in the Notice to Bidders, which shall be for the benefit of the City, and any and all persons injured by the breach of any of the terms of this contract. Said bond shall be filed with the City Clerk and shall be subject to the approval of the City Council, and is by reference made a part of this contract. FORM OF CONTRACT Section C-2 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 PAR. 14 The Contractor agrees that should it abandon work under this contract or cease the prosecution thereof for a period of thirty (30) consecutive days without reasonable cause, and should it fail to proceed with said work within ten (10) days after a notice to continue or carry it on has been mailed to it at the address given herein by the City, or after such notice has been served on it, then the City may proceed to complete said work, using any material, tools, or machinery found along said line of work, doing the work either by contract or as it may elect, and the Contractor and the sureties on its bond shall be liable to the City for the costs and expenses so paid out. Said costs shall be retained by the City from any compensation due, or to become due the Contractor, and may be recovered by the City in an action upon Contractor's bond. PAR. 15 In consideration of the full compliance on the part of the Contractor with all the provisions, stipulations, and conditions hereof, or contained in the various instruments made a part of this contract by reference, and upon completion and acceptance of said work, the City agrees to pay to the Contractor, in the manner set out in the Notice to Contractors, the amount of money due the Contractor for work performed and accepted, at the unit prices set out in the Contractor's proposal, which has been accepted by the City. PAR. 16 The total amount of the contract, based on the Engineer's estimates of quantities and the Contractor's unit bid prices, and for which 100% surety bond is required is PAR. 17 After the completion of said work, the Contractor agrees to remove all debris and clean up said streets, and to save the City harmless from any damage allegedly resulting from a — failure to clean up and remove the debris or put the street back in a proper condition for travel. PAR. 18 This contract is not divisible, but in the event of a conflict between thi contract and the various instruments incorporated by reference, this contract shall govern. PAR. 19 Before the Contractor shall be entitled to receive final payment for work done under this contract, it shall execute and file a bond in the penal sum of not less than 100% of the total amount of the contract, same to be known as "Maintenance Bond," and which bond must be approved by the City Council, and which bond is in addition to the bond given by the Contractor to guarantee the completion of the work. PAR. 20 The Contractor shall maintain all work done hereunder in good order for the period of two (2) years from and after the date it is accepted by the Council of the City of Waterloo, Iowa. Said maintenance shall be made without expense to the City or the abutting property. In the event of the failure or default of the Contractor to remedy any or all defects appearing in said work within a period of two (2) years from the date of its acceptance by said Council, and after having been given ten (10) days notice so to do by registered letter deposited in the United States Post Office in said town, addressed to said contractor at the address herein given, then the City may proceed to remedy such defects. The costs and expenses thereof to be recovered from the Contractor and the sureties on its maintenance bond by an action brought in any court of competent jurisdiction. FORM OF CONTRACT Section C-3 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 PAR. 21 The Contractor shall give notice to said City by registered letter direct_;d to the Mayor or City Clerk/Auditor thereof not more than four (4) and not less than three (3) months prior to the expiration of the term during which the Contractor is required to maintain said improvements, in good repair by the terms of its Contract. The liability of the Contractor and of the sureties on its bond for maintenance of the said improvements shall continue until three (3) months after such notice has been given to the City, and in any event, until two (2) years after the acceptance of the work. CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA Mayor City Clerk Contractor BY: Title: Approved by the City Council of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, this day of , 20 . ATTEST: , City Clerk Waterloo, Iowa END OF SECTION FORM OF CONTRACT Section C-4 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 PERFORMANCE BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, of (the "Principal"), and of (the "Surety"), are held and firmly bound unto the City cf Waterloo, Iowa (the "Obligee"), in the penal sum of Dollars ($ ), lawful money of the United States, for the payment of said sum in connection with a contract (the "Contract") dated on or about for the purpose of F.Y. 2020 Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications, City Contract NO. 994. The Contract is incorporated herein by reference as though fully set forth herein. Whenever the Principal shall be and is declared by the Obligee to be in default under the Contract, with the Obligee having performed its obligations in the Contract, then the Surety, acknowledging that time is of the essence, may promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly undertake to: 1. Complete the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions; or 2. Obtain one or more bids for completing the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions, and upon determination by the Surety of the lowest responsible bidder, or negotiated proposal, or, if the Obligee elects, upon determination by the Obligee and the Surety jointly of the lowest responsible bidder, or negotiated proposal, arrange for a contract between such party and the Obligee. The Surety will make available as work progresses sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion less the balance of the Contract price. The cost of completion includes responsibilities of the Principal for correction of defective work and completion of the Contract, the Obligee's legal and design professional costs resulting directly from the Principal's default, and liquidated damages or actual damages if no liquidated damages are specified in the Contract. The term "balance of the Contract price" - means the total amount payable by the Obligee to the Principal under the Contract and any amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by the Obligee to the Principal; or 3. Determine the amount for which it is liable to the Obligee and pay the Obligee that amount as soon as practicable. In the event this bond is enforced, Principal and Surety agree to indemnify Obligee and hold Obligee harmless from and against any and all costs of enforcement, including but not limited to reasonable at:orneys'fees and expenses. Every Surety on this bond shall be deemed and held, any contract to the contrary notwithstanding, to consent to each and all of the following matters, without notice: 1. To any extension of time to the Contract in which to perform the Contract 2. To any change in the plans, specifications, or Contract when such chance does not involve an increase of more than twenty percent (20%) of the total Contract price and shall then be released only as to such excess increase. 3. That no provision of this bond or of any other contract shall be valid which limits to less than one (1) year from the time of the acceptance of the work the right to sue on this bond for defect in workmanship or material not discovered or known to the Obligee at the time such work was accepted. _-. PERFORMANCE BOND Section PFB-1 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 If the Principal performs the Contract, then this bond shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full fcrce and effect. In no event shall the Surety's total obligation exceed the penal amount of this bond. Terms used herein shall include, as appropriate, the singular or plural number, or the masculine, feminine or neuter gender. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned Principal and Surety have executed this Performance Bond as of PRINCIPAL SURETY Name Name B'/: By: Title: Title: [attach Power of Attorney] NOTE: Date of BOND must not be prior to date of Contract. If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute BOND. END OF SECTION PERFORMANCE BOND Section PFB-2 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 PAYMENT BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that (Name of Contractor) (Address of Contractor) a , hereinafter called Principal, (Corporation, Partnership or Individual) and, (Name of Surety) (Address of Surety) hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto (Name of Owner) (Address of Owner) hereinafter called OWNER, in the penal sum of Dollars, ($ ) in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that whereas, the Principal entered Into a certain contract with the OWNER, dated the day of 20 , a :,opy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the construction of: F.Y. 2020 Wastewater Treatment Plant BiDsolids Modifications City of Waterloo, IA City Contract No. 994 PAYMENT BOND Section PB-1 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall promptly make payment to all persons, firms, SUBCONTRACTORS, and corporations furnishing materials for or performing labor it the prosecution of the WORK provided for in such contract, and any authorized extension or modifica:ion thereof, including all amounts due for materials, lubricants, oil, gasoline, coal and coke, repairs on machinery, equipment and tools, consumed or used in connection with the construction of such WORK, and all insurance premiums on said WORK, and for all labor, performed in such WORK whether by SUBCONTRACTOR or otherwise, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety for value received hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the WORK to be performed thereunder or the SPECIFICATIONS accompanying the same shall in any wise affect its obligation on this BOND, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the WORK or to the SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied. IN WITNESS HEREOF, this instrument is executed in counterparts, each one of (number which shall be deemed an original, this the day of 20 ATTEST: Principal (Principal) Secretary (SEAL) By (s) (Address) Witness as to Principal (Address) Surety PAYMENT BOND Section PB-2 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 ATTEST: By Attorney-in-Fact Witness as to Surety (Address) (Address) N DTE: Date of BOND must not be prior to date of Contract. If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute BOND. END OF SECTION PAYMENT BOND Section PB-3 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 _ Jrrac n GeoRepof. a.. Geotechnical EngineeringReport Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications Waterloo, Iowa May 20, 2019 Terracon Project No. 13195025 Prepared for: — City of Waterloo Waste Management Services Waterloo, Iowa Prepared by: Terracon Consultants, Inc. Cedar Falls, Iowa ironmental Facilities Geotechnical Materials May 20, 2019 r co - _ City of Waterloo Waste Management Services G oRe ort 3505 Easton Avenue Waterloo, Iowa 50703 Attn: Mr. Steve Hoambrecker, P.E. P: (319)291 4553 E: steven.hoambrecker@waterloo-ia.com Re: Geotechnical Engineering Report Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications 3505 Easton Avenue Waterloo, Iowa Terracon Project No. 13195025 Dear Mr. Hoambrecker Terracon Consultants, Inc. (Terracon) has performed the Geotechnical Engineering services for the above referenced project. Our services were performed in general accordance with Terracon Proposal No. P13195025 dated March 18, 2019. This report presents the findings of the subsurface exploration and provides geotedhnical recommendations concerning earthwork and the design and construction of foundations, floor slabs, and pavements for the proposed project. We appreciate the opportunity to be of service to you on this project. if you have any questions concerning this report or if we may be of further service, please contact us. Sincerely, Terracon Consultants, Inc. 7 J Gregory M. Decker, E.I. /Jason P. Heinz, P.E (_ _ Staff Engineer Department Manager Geotechnical Services Iowa No. 18345 — CC: Mr. Sam Hocevar of Strand (via email) Terracon Consultants, Inc. 3105 Capital Way, Ste. 5 Cedar Fats, Iowa 50613 P (319)277 4016 F (319) 277 4320 terrecon.com Environmental Facilities ii Geotechnical Materials REPORT TOPICS INTRODUCTION 1 SITECONDITIONS.--..... ...... ............. ....... .................. ...... ........................._ 1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION 2 GEOTECHNICAL CHARACTERIZATION 3 GEOTECHNICAL OVERVIEW 4 EARTHWORK 5 SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS 11 SPECIALTY FOUNDATIONS 15 SEISMIC CONSIDERATIONS 15 FLOOR SLABS _ 16 -, LATERAL EARTH PRESSURES 17 PAVEMENTS_ 19 FROST CONSIDERATIONS 25 7 GENERAL COMMENTS ==5 Note:This report was originally delivered in a web-based format. range Bold text in the report indicates a referenced section heading. The PDF version also includes hyperlinks which direct the reader to that section and clicking on the GeoReport logo will bring you back to this page. For more interactive features, please view your project online at client.terracon.com. ATTACHMENTS EXPLORATION AND TESTING PROCEDURES SITE LOCATION AND EXPLORATION PLANS EXPLORATION RESULTS FORTING INFORMATION Note: Refer to each individual Attachment for a listing of contents. 1 1 1 Responsive Resourceful E Reliable 1 Geotechnical Engineering Repo Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications 3505 Easton Avenue Waterloo, Iowa Terracon Project No. 13195025 May 20, 2019 INTRODUCTION This report presents the results of our subsurface exploration and geotechnical engineering services performed for the proposed improvements to the Wastewater Treatment Plant located at 3505 Easton Avenue in Waterloo, Iowa. The purpose of these services is to provide information and geotechnical engineering recommendations relative to: • Subsurface soil and rock conditions - Foundation design and construction Groundwater conditions - Floor slab design and construction • Site preparation and earthwork • Lateral earth pressures • Excavation considerations • Pavement design and construction Seismic site classification per IBC • Frost considerations The geotechnical engineering Scope of Services for this project included the advancement of twelve (12) soil borings to depths ranging from approximately 10.5 to 40.5 feet below existing site grades. Maps showing the site and boring locations are attached in Site L cat on --d x  The results of the laboratory testing performed on portions of recovered samples are included on the boring logs in the attached Ex,. uIts. SITE CONDITIONS The following description of site conditions is derived from our site visit in association with the field exploration and our review of publicly available geologic and topographic maps. Item Description The project is located at 3505 Easton Street in Waterloo, Iowa. Site Location See  a Structures are present adjacent to and/or in the vicinities of the new structures Existing Improvements planned and underground utilities are present at the plant. Current Ground Cover Existing fill, asphaltic pavements, gravel, and grass Responsive r Resourceful Ieli ! Geotechnical Engineering Report 'llrrn Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications Waterloo, Iowa May 20, 2019 • Terracon Project No. 13195025 G oRe o t Item Description The ground surface at the WWTP is relatively flat. However, in the area of the j Dewatering Building expansion and the Centrate Equalizatior Tank, the site Existing Topography generally slopes from west to east. Based on our survey of the _around surface at the boring locations in this area, there is an elevation diffe'ence of about 2.5 feet between the borings. PROJECT DESCRIPTION The WAS Building addition was removed from the scope of work. Item Description A building addition to the Dewatering building, new Centrate Equalization Project Description tank, and a new Ferric building are planned for the site. The existing pavements near the Dewatering building are planned to be r placed. Dewatering Building Addition: 20 feet by 72 feet, slab-on-grade structure consisting of masonry walls and a precast plank roof Centrate Equalization Tank: Proposed Construction 75 feet by 45 feet, extending 22 feet below grade supported by a mat foundation - Ferric Building: 28 feet by 44 feet. A mat foundation is planned for the building and chemical storage about 4 to 5 feet below-grE de. Dewatering Building Addition: 839.5 feet Finished Floor Elevation Centrate Equalization Tank: 841.0 Ferric Building: 840.0 feet Building walls: 3 kips per linear foot (klf) Dewatering Building walls: 7 klf(assumed) Maximum Loads and Contact Pressures • Dewatering Building Columns: 100 kips (assumed) • Tank mat: 1.5 to 3 kips per square foot (ksf) Building floor slabs: 200 pounds per square foot(psf) Assumed Cut: 0 feet Maximum Site Grading  Fill: 3 feet The Centrate Equalization Tank was planned to extend 22 feet below Below-Grade Areas grade. The chemical storage area in Ferric Building is planned to extend j 4 to 5 belo grade. Asphaltic cement concrete and Portland cement concrete pavement Pavements sections are being considered for any new pavements around the new structures and to replace pavements damaged from construction. Traffic loads are estimated to be 5 to 6 semi-tractor and trailers, 5 days a week. MEM Responsive Res:sir Jos' Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report Ilerracon Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications Waterloo, Iowa May 20, 2019 -- Terracon Project No. 13195025 Ge Report GEOTECH NIC L CHARACTERIZATION Subsurface Profile Based on the results of the borings (Borings 3 through 12), subsurface conditions at the site can be generalized as follows: Approximate Depth to Consistency/ Stratum Bottom of Stratum Material Description Relative (feet) Density 0.3 Asphaltic cement concrete (Borings 11 and 12) 0.2 to 1 Crushed Stone, Sand and Gravel (Borings 5, 7, 11, and 12) Existing Fill N/A 0.9 Topsoil I (Boring 9) i Sandy Lean Clay, Clayey Sand, �. 6.5 to 14.5 and Sand 1 8.5 to 14 Medium Stiff to 1 (Borings 3, 4, 7, 8, 9, and 12) Sandy Lean Clay and Lean Clay Stiff (Bottom of Boring 12) 2 24 to 29 Sand, with varying amounts of clay Loose to Medium Dense 32 to 40 Silt, Silty Sand, Clayey Sand, Stiff/Loose to 3 (Bottom of Borings 3, 4, 7, 9, and Sand, with varying amounts g Medium Dense 10, and 11) C of gravel Sedimentary 40.5 Limestone, highly weathered NA Rock (Bottom of Borings 5, 6, and 8) I. Rubble was observed within the existing fill in Borings 3 and 9. 2 Fat clay was encountered form about 11 to 13.5 feet below the existing grade in Boring 11A. Conditions encountered at each boring location are indicated on the individual boring logs in the attached Exploration - Stratification boundaries on the boring logs represent the approximate depths of changes in material types; in situ, the transition between materials may be gradual or abrupt horizontally and vertically. Responsive- Resourceful ■ Reliabie Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications = Waterloo, Iowa May 20, 2019 Terracon Project No. 13195025 Geo a ort Groundwater Conditions The boreholes were observed while drilling and after completion for the presence and level of groundwater. Groundwater level observations can be found on the boring logs in the Exploration Results section and are summarized in the following table. Approximate Depth Elevation of Depth to Groundwater Boring to Groundwater Groundwater Groundwater Elevation Number while Drilling/ While Drilling/ After Drilling After Drilling Sampling (feet) Sampling (feet) (feet) (feet) 3 13 827 11 829 4 13 826.5 11.5 828 5 14 825.5 I None Observed --- 6 9.5 828.5 9.5 828.5 7 14 826.5 11.5 829 8 14 I 825 11 828 9 15.5 826 j None Observed --- 10 14.5 825.5 11.5 828.5 11/11 A 14 827 I 14 827 12 None Observed --- None Observed --- The preceding groundwater depths provide an approximate indication of the groundwater conditions at the time the borings were performed. Groundwater level observations made within granular soils are usually a reliable indication of the current groundwater conditions. Long-term observations in piezometers or observation wells, sealed from the influence of surface water, would be required to provide a better evaluation of groundwater conditions at the site. Groundwater level fluctuations occur due to seasonal variations in the amount of rainfall, runoff, the level of the Cedar River, and other factors not evident at the time the borings were performed. Perched (trapped) water can also develop within variable, existing fill and more `permeable' soils/materials overlying, and/or within lower `permeability' soil. Therefore, groundwater levels during construction or at other times during the life of the facility may be higher or lower than the levels indicated on the boring logs. The possibility of groundwater level fluctuations should be considered when developing the design and construction plans for the project. GEOTECHNICAL OVERVIEW Uncontrolled, existing fill was encountered in the borings to depths of about 6.5 to 14.5 feet below s4 existing grades. Rubble was encountered in Borings 3 and 9 to depths of about 3 to 4 feet below existing grades. By our definition for this project, uncontrolled existing fill is fill that loes not meet Responsive , -- i eliable Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications Waterloo, Iowa May 20, 2019 Terracon Project No. 13195025 GeoReport our material requirements, was placed without moisture and density control, and/or fill that does not meet the moisture and/or density requirements of this report. The existing fill is not considered suitable for reliable and uniform support of foundations, floor slabs, and pavements and should be removed and replaced with properly compacted fill. Consideration can be given to supporting the structures on helical piers that extend into suitable, native soil. This report presents the alternative of removing uncontrolled existing fill, rubble, any partly organic soils, and any other unsuitable soils, to eliminate the owner's risk of excessive structure and pavement settlement. This report also presents alternatives which would provide the owner with construction cost savings, but would present the owner with inherent risks of poor floor slab pavement performance and lower service life. Buried rubble is present on the site, and the risks of relying on support of improvements over the materials include excessive settlement and cracking of pavements. To eliminate the risk of excessive settlement and unpredictable performance, the uncontrolled, existing fill and unsuitable soils would need to be removed and replaced with properly compacted fill. This alternative would involve significant construction cost due to the depths to which unsuitable soils/materials are anticipated to be present at the site, and the proximity of existing, shallow building foundations, and the presence of underground utilities. Support of pavements and floor slabs on or above existing fill is discussed in this report. However, even with the recommended construction testing services, there is an inherent risk for the owner that compressible fill and unsuitable material within or buried by the fill will contribute to excessive settlement of grade-supported elements. This risk of unforeseen conditions cannot be eliminated without completely removing the existing fill. Risks of building and floor slab settlement could be eliminated by supporting foundations and floor slabs structurally. The use of these systems would reduce the depths of(over)excavation required. Consideration should also be given to structurally supporting (i.e. `hanging') utilities from structurally- supported elements. Groundwater and granular soils were encountered below the existing fill. Based on the project information and subsurface conditions encountered, a temporary groundwater control system will be required to facilitate excavation for the Centrate equalization tank and its construction. The equalization tank should be designed for shallow groundwater levels, or a permanent groundwater control system should be provided because the tank will be constructed below groundwater levels. EARTHWORK Removal of Existing Improvements and Fill Existing improvements, such as foundations, floor slabs, pavements, and underground utilities should be removed prior to fill placement. Existing utilities within the areas of the proposed structures should be rerouted and/or removed. The removal of existing improvements will disturb Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications 4 Waterloo, Iowa May 20, 2019 • Terracon Project No. 13195025 Ge a ortf subgrades, and excavations will be necessary in many areas. Below-grade improvements and existing backfill should be removed and replaced with properly compacted fill. If existing utilities are to remain in place, the structure should be supported on helical piers or another deep to intermediate foundation system. It is important to note, however, that existing improvements left in place could later impede construction operations. After observation and evaluation by Terracon, resulting excavations should be backfilled in accordance with the recommendations of this report. In preparing the site for new construction, deleterious materials such as debris, rubble, vegetation, partly organic soil, and disturbed, soft, frozen, or otherwise unsuitable materials should be removed from structure and pavement areas. Any organic material should be disposed of off-site or stockpiled for re-use in landscaped areas. Care should be taken so the underlaying material is not disturbed during construction. Removal of uncontrolled, existing fill is recommended below structures. Alternative;for pavement and floor slab subgrade preparation follow, and each involves varying levels of risk performance, and cost. Please note that comments regarding risk assume that the recommendations of this report are implemented throughout design and construction. Complete Fill Removal and Replacement below Foundations, Floor Slabs, and Pavements From a geotechnical engineering point of view, it is preferable to removed uncontrolled, existing fill below foundation, floor slab, and pavement areas or support buildings and floor slabs structurally on helical piers or another deep/intermediate foundation system. If the owner does not accept risks associated with support of floor slabs and pavements over the existing fill, then the existing fill should be removed from floor slab and pavement areas. Foundations, floor slabs, and pavements would be supported on suitable, properly compacted fill over suitable, native soil. Recommendations for fill placement and compaction and widths of overexcavation below foundations and pavements are discussed in subsequent sections of this report. Removal of uncontrolled, existing fill and replacement with properly compacted, fill would eliminate the owner's risk of excessive foundation, floor slab, and pavement settlement. The excavation depths anticipated for removal of existing fill are summarized in the following table. Responsive - sours-f • Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report Ilerracon Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications Waterloo, Iowa - May 20, 2019 Terracon Project No. 13195025 Geopo rt Excavation Depths for Removal of Existing Fill Boring No. Surface Elevation Depth to Bottom of Elevation of Bottom of Existing Fill (feet) Existing Fill (feet) 3 840 8.5 831.5 4 839.5 9 830.5 5 839.5 8 831.5 6 837.5 I 9.5 828 7 I 840.5 8 832..5 8 839 9 830 9 841.5 6.5 835 10 840 14.5 825.5 11 841 13.5 827.5 12 840.5 9 831.5 • Partial Removal of Existing Fill below Pavements The second alternative for support of floor slabs and pavements includes the partial removal of existing fill and providing a new layer of suitable, properly compacted fill • immediately below floor slabs and pavements. Undercuts should be performed so that a minimum of 2 feet of suitable, properly compacted fill is provided below pavement design subgrade elevations, and 3 to 4 feet below floor slab subgrade elevations. • Risks associated with construction of pavements on or above uncontrolled, existing fill, as discussed in the - nic---Overviewsection, must be accepted by the owner. Subgrade Evaluation and Preparation Following the removal of existing improvements, completion of cuts or excavations/undercuts, • and prior to the placement of new fill, subgrades should be evaluated by Terracon personnel. Unsuitable and low density existing fill, partly organic soils/materials, any medium to high plasticity soils, or otherwise unsuitable materials, should be removed prior to fill placement. Subgrade evaluations prior to fill placement and foundation, floor slab, and pavement placements should include the following, where applicable: Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications Waterloo, Iowa May 20, 2019 n Terracon Project No. 13195025 GeoReport Observations and visual classifications of subgrade and subbase materials Probing and sampling for laboratory testing including: • moisture content organic content • plastic and liquid (i.e., Atterberg) limits • laboratory compaction characteristics of soils (i.e., `proctors') In-place moisture and density testing Strength and/or cone penetration testing Observing proofrolls Where practical in building and pavement areas, fine-grained and crushed stc'ie subgrades should also be proofrolled with a loaded, tandem-axle dump truck, and sand and silt subgrades proofrolled with a heavy, smooth drum roller. These processes will help to delineate soft, very loose, low density, or disturbed areas prior to the placement of fill. If unsuitable areas are observed, subgrade improvement will be necessary. Fill Material Types Fill below foundations, floor slabs, and pavements should meet the following material property requirements. USCS Material Type Classification Acceptable Areas for Placement Imported, Below foundations CL, CL/SC - Low Plasticity, Below the granular base for floor slabs (LL 5 45 and PI <_23) Fine-grained Soil Below the granular base for pavements Imported, Below foundations SP, SW, GP, GW • Below floor slabs Coarse-grained/Granular Below pavements On-Site - Below foundations Low Plasticity/ SP-SC, SC, SM Below the granular base for flcor slabs Coarse-grained Materials Below the granular base for pa cements Table continued on page 9 Responsive Resourceful • Rclia .e Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications Waterloo, Iowa May 20, 2019 = Terracon Project No. 13195025 GeoRe or Table continued from page 8 Fill should consist of approved materials that are free of organic matter and debris. Frozen material should not be used, and fill should not be placed on a frozen subgrade. Material with organic contents greater than 5 percent should not be used for fill below foundations, floor slabs, and pavements. By our definition, low plasticity material would have a liquid limit (LL)of 45 or less, and a plasticity index (PI) of 23 or less. Each proposed fill material type should be sampled and evaluated by the geotechnical engineer prior to its delivery and/or use. Specific gradations and material types will be needed for specific applications. Relatively clean, granular material is recommended immediately below building floor slabs and pavements. Material with more than 6 percent fines should not be placed within 4 feet of final grades below exterior slabs-on-ground where the reduction of movements from freezing and thawing is desired. Refer to the 5.a s,  =_ and , rot- a s = sections for additional comments and recommendations regarding granular material gradations. Based on the results of the borings and laboratory testing, it appears that a portion of the on-site soils/materials could be reused. Due to the presence of rubble in the existing fill, sorting of suitable and unsuitable materials should be expected. A significant amount of moisture conditioning (i.e. drying) should be expected to achieve compaction requirements if on-site soils/materials are used for fill. It should be noted that clayey and silty soils(CL, ML, SC, and SM)can be difficult to compact during cool or cold weather, in relatively small areas, and over lower strength/density and marginally stable subgrades. Fill Compaction Requirements Fill below foundations, floor slabs, and pavements should be placed and compacted in accordance with the following requirements: Item Descripton - 9 inches in loose thickness when heavy, self-propelled Maximum Fill Lift Thickness compaction equipment is used 4 inches in loose thickness when hand-guided equipment (i.e.,jumping jack or plate compactor)is used - 98 percent Below foundations and floor slabs 5 2 feet below pavements subject to truck traffic Minimum - <_ 1 foot below automobile parking area pavements Compaction Requirements -'  > 15 feet below final grade • 95 percent E  > 2 feet below pavements subject to truck traffic > 1 foot below automobile parking area pavements Water Content Range Low plasticity fine-grained: -2 to +3 percent from Optimum a Coarse-grained/Granular: -3 to +3 percent Table continued from page 10 R =�ahg Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications a Waterloo, Iowa - May 20, 2019 - Terracon Project No. 13195025 GeoReport Table continued from page 9 .. Minimum compaction requirements and water content ranges from optimum to be determined in comparison to results obtained from ASTM Standard Test Method D 698 (`Standard' proctor). We recommend that each lift of fill be tested for water content and compaction prior to the placement of additional fill or concrete. Should the results of the in-place density tests indicate the specified water content or compaction limits have not been met, the area represented by the test should be reworked and retested, as required, until the specified water content and compaction requirements are achieved. If granular material is a coarse sand or gravel, is of a uniform size, or has a low fines content, compaction comparison to relative density may be more appropriate. In this case, the granular materials should be compacted to at least 70 to 80 percent of the material's maximum density value per ASTM D4253 and D4254. Actual compaction requirements for coarse, uniform, or low fines content granular material should be based on laboratory test results. The gradation of a granular material affects its stability and the water content required for proper compaction. Water content should be maintained at levels satisfactory for compaction to be achieved without the granular fill bulking during placement or pumping when proofrolled. Grading and Drainage Subgrades and final surface grades must provide effective drainage away from the structures during and after construction. Water permitted to pond next to the structures can result in soil movements greater than those discussed in this report. These greater movements can result in unacceptable differential floor slab and/or foundation movements, cracked slabs and walls, and roof leaks. Estimated movements described in this report are based on effective drainage for the lives of the structures and cannot be relied upon if effective drainage is not maintained. Exposed ground should be sloped and maintained at a minimum 5 percent (or less to comply with ADA requirements) away from the structures for at least 10 feet beyond the perimeter of the structures. After structure construction and landscaping, we recommend verifying final grades to document that effective drainage has been achieved. Grades around the structures should also be periodically inspected and adjusted as necessary, as part of the structure's maintenance program. Where paving or flatwork abuts a structure, we recommend a maintenance program to effectively seal and maintain joints to reduce the amount of surface water infiltration. Earthwork, Excavation, and Groundwater Considerations Care should be taken to maintain the subgrade water content prior to construction, of floor slabs and pavements. Construction traffic over subgrades should be avoided to the extent practical. The site should also be graded to prevent ponding of water on prepared subgrades or in excavations. Any water that collects on construction areas should be promptly removed. If the subgrade should become frozen, desiccated, saturated, or disturbed, the affected material should be removed or these materials should be scarified, moisture conditioned, and recompacted prior to fill, floor slab, and pavement placement. Resoons sole-ee}g# Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications = Waterloo, Iowa May 20, 2019 - Terracon Project No. 13195025 GeoReport Groundwater was observed in the boreholes at depths of about 9.5 to 15.5 feet below existing grades. Excavations for the equalization tank are expected to extend into waterbearing granular soils. The amount of groundwater encountered during construction will partially depend on the prevailing weather conditions and the depths and sizes of excavations required. Groundwater should be maintained at least 3 feet below the lowest excavation level anticipated. It is important to note that excavations near and below the groundwater level in silt and granular soil will cause a `quick' condition and loosen the bearing soil/material. If proper groundwater control procedures are not performed during construction, the density and support capability of previously suitable soil and fill could be affected and subsequently contribute to higher than anticipated settlement of the improvement and can also cause settlement of adjacent soil and improvements. A temporary dewatering system consisting of a series of wells will likely be required to reach the required (over)excavation depths for the equalization tank,and other structures if complete removal of existing fill is planned. As a minimum, excavations should be performed in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR, Part 1926, Subpart P, "Excavations" and its appendices, and in accordance with any applicable local, state, and federal safety regulations. The contractor should be aware that slope height, slope inclination, and excavation depth should in no instance exceed those specified by these safety -� regulations. Flatter slopes than those dictated by these regulations may be required depending upon the soil and groundwater conditions encountered and other external factors. Construction site safety is the sole responsibility of the contractor who controls the means, methods, and sequencing of construction operations. Under no circumstances shall the information provided herein be interpreted to mean that Terracon is assuming any responsibility for construction site safety or the contractor's activities; such responsibility shall neither be implied nor inferred. Terracon should be retained during the construction phase of the project to observe earthwork and to perform necessary tests and observations during subgrade preparation, proofrolling, placement and compaction of fill, backfilling of excavations, and just prior to construction of building foundations, floor slabs, and pavements. SHALLOWFOUNDATIONS Based on the project information and the results of our subsurface exploration, laboratory testing, and geotechnical evaluations, it is our opinion that the structures can be supported on spread footing foundations. Spread footing foundations should bear on suitable, native soil and/or properly compacted fill extended to suitable, native soil evaluated by Terracon personnel. The use of shallow, spread footing foundations would require rather significant (over)excavations that would extend below existing foundations, and shoring and/or underpinning would need to be provided for existing structures as well as other improvements. A relatively uniform subgrade should be provided below the mat foundations. Res eso=u ce ul Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications Waterloo, Iowa May 20, 2019 • Terracon Project No. 13195025 Geoeort Shallow Foundation Design Recommendations Item - Description Net Allowable Bearing Pressure 1 2,000 pounds per square foot (psf) Centrate Equalization Tanks: 14 pci Subgrade Response Modulus • Ferric Building: 10 pci Dewatering Building Addition (Borings 3 and 4) • New, properly compacted fill, over • Suitable, native soil • Centrate Equalization Tank (Borings 5, 6 7, and 8) 12 inches of crushed stone, over Anticipated Support Systems i Suitable, native soil • Ferric Building (Borings 9 and 10) • 12 inches of crushed stone, over suitable, native soil, and/or • 12 inches of crushed stone over new Properly compacted fill and suitable native soil Minimum Foundation Widths Isolated/Columns: 30 inches • Strip/Walls: 16 inches Minimum Embedment Depths i Footings in unheated areas: 60 inches i Perimeter footings for heated areas: 42 inches below Finished Grade • Interior footings in heated areas: 18 inches Estimated Total Settlement 1 inch or less Estimated Differential Settlement About '/2 to 2/3 of the estimated total settlemer t . The net allowable bearing pressure is the pressure in excess of the minimum surrounding overburden pressure at the footing base elevation. The value provided is for the maximum contact pressures and loads noted in the Project Description section. Assumes existing fill, low strelgth soil, and unsuitable and disturbed material is removed from below foundations. At least a 12-inch thick layer of compacted crushed stone is recommended immediately below mat/slab foundations if lean concreate or CLSM is not placed below mat foundations. 3. Interior footings should be provided with a minimum embedment depth of 42 inches if subjected to freezing temperatures during construction. Finished grade is defined as the lowest adjacent grade within five feet for perimeter footings, and the finished floor level surrounding interior footings. 4. Settlement as a result of the structural loads noted in the - _ f3escrintion section Differential settlement of the order of 1/2 of the total settlement typically occurs across rigid mats and differential settlement on the order of 2/3 of the total can occur across more flexible or semi-rigid mats. Responsive• Resourceful • Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report Ilierracon Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications • Waterloo, Iowa = - May 20, 2019 • Terracon Project No. 13195025 GeoReport Structural mats that support concentrated point or limited-area loads distribute those loads over a subgrade area defined by the mat stiffness and the subgrade modulus. The magnitude and distribution of mat bearing pressure is typically modeled by the structural engineer using a structural mat design program. Without this detailed information, an average, or single mat pressure was assumed over the entire mat area. We recommend that initial structural mat computer analyses for the Centrate Equalization Tank be performed using a subgrade response modulus value of 14 pci (i.e., 2,000 psf/ 0.083 feet) and a subgrade response modulus value of 10 pci (i.e., 1,100 psf / 0.063 feet) be used for the Ferric Building Mat. If this assumption meets acceptable load threshold-settlement criteria, no further evaluation is required. If the conservative assumption exceeds the threshold, detailed settlement analyses of actual mat pressure distribution may be warranted. Interaction between New and Existing Improvements Some overlapping stress distribution could occur between new and existing improvements due to their proximity. Stress increases from new improvements could cause movement of an existing improvement. Increasing clear distances between the edges of the new foundations and existing improvements/foundations would reduce the risk of additional settlement of existing improvements. To reduce this risk, clear distances at least equal to the new footing widths, should be maintained between the addition's footings and footings supporting the existing building, and new foundations should be designed to bear at about the same elevation(s) as existing improvements/foundations. Consideration should be given to whether the planned clear distances between new and existing improvements will be sufficient to construct a stable, temporary slope below the bearing level of an existing foundation. Care should be taken during excavation adjacent to existing foundations, to avoid disturbing existing foundation bearing soils/materials. Differential settlement between the additions and the existing buildings is expected to approach the magnitude of the total settlement of the addition. The designer should consider these differential movements. Underground piping and utility knockouts in foundation walls for the facility should be designed such that deflections in alignment do not result in breakage or distress. Uplift Resistance Uplift resistance of spread footings can be developed from the effective weight of the footing and the overlying backfill. As illustrated on the subsequent figure, the effective weight of the soil prism defined by diagonal planes extending up from the top of the perimeter of the foundation to the ground surface at an angle of 20 degrees from the vertical can be included in uplift resistance. The maximum allowable uplift capacity should be taken as the sum of the effective weight of backfill and the foundation, divided by an appropriate factor of safety. A maximum total unit weight of 120 or 100 pcf could be used for compacted clay or clean granular backfill at this site, respectively. This unit weight should be reduced to 60 or 40 pcf, respectively, for portions of the backfill below the design groundwater elevation. Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications -- Waterloo, Iowa May 20, 2019 Terracon Project No. 13195025 GeoReport its e soils Uplift Fiesista4Ke I RA- -n! if i Foundation Construction Considerations The base of foundation excavations should be free of water, soft to medium stiff soil, and very loose to loose/disturbed soil/material prior to placing concrete. Concrete should be placed soon after excavating to reduce the potential for bearing soil disturbance. Care should be taken to prevent wetting or drying of the bearing materials during construction. If the material at the bearing level becomes excessively dry, disturbed, saturated, or frozen, the affected material should be removed prior to placing concrete. Where unsuitable bearing material is encountered in a foundation excavation, the excavation should be extended deeper to suitable soil and the foundation could bear directly on the soil at the lower level or on lean concrete backfill placed in the excavation. Alternatively, the foundation could bear on compacted fill extending down to suitable soil. Overexcavation for fill placement below foundations should extend laterally beyond all edges of the foundations at east 8 inches per foot of overexcavation depth below the "Design Footing Level." The overexcavation should then be backfilled up to the "Design Footing Level" as recommended in the Earthwork section. The overexcavation and backfill procedures are illustrated in the following figures. -Cocps R 3 urce _ • Reliable — Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications•Waterloo, Iowa May 20, 2019 • Terracon Project No. 13195025 GeoReport I t L DESIGN - - DESIGN _ FOOTING LEVEL _ FOOTING LEVEL STRUCTURAL LEAN O CONCRETE - , 1 RECOMMENDED RECOMMENDED'• - EXCAVATION LEVEL EXCAVATION LEVEL - - - I LEAN CONCRETE BACKFILL OVER-EXCAVATION I BACKFILL ZONE NOTE:EXCAVATIONS ARE SHOWN VERTICAL HOWEVER,THE NOTE:EXCAVATIONS ARE SHOWN VERTICAL;HOWEVER,THE SIDEWALLS SHOULD BE SLOPED AS NECESSARY FOR SAFETY SIDEWALLS SHOULD BE SLOPED AS NECESSARY FOR SAFETY SPECIALTY FOUNDATIONS An intermediate foundation system of helical piers developing capacity in native, loose to medium dense sand represents a feasible building foundation and floor slab support system, in our — opinion. The use of helical piers has the advantages that less corrective earthwork could be performed, the amount of excavation into water-bearing sand would be reduced, and foundation and floor slab loads could be transferred below the existing fill and partly organic soils. Helical piers could have double or triple helix configurations. We anticipate that helical piers would be extended into loose to medium dense sand with fines. We estimate that individual helical pier design capacities of at least 15 kips may be achieved for this project. Helical piers are usually provided on a design-build basis by contractors licensed to install proprietary helical pier/anchor products. The actual sizes of helixes and the configurations would be selected by the installing contractor. Helical piers are proprietary, with design and installation performed by a specialty contractor. We recommend that available geotechnical information be provided to the contractors/designers. Due to the proprietary nature of helical pier foundations, we recommend that a performance — specification be used for the project. We would be pleased to provide contact information upon request. SEISMIC CONSIDERATIONS The seismic design requirements for buildings and other structures are based on Seismic Design Category. Site Classification is required to determine the Seismic Design Category for a structure. The Site Classification is based on the upper 100 feet of the site profile defined by a weighted average value of either shear wave velocity, standard penetration resistance, or undrained shear zinc f Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications Waterloo, Iowa May 20, 2019 Terracon Project No. 13195025 GeoRe or strength in accordance with Section 20.4 of ASCE 7 and the International Building Code (IBC). Based on the soil/bedrock properties encountered at the site and as described on the exploration logs and results, it is our professional opinion that the Seismic Site Classification is D. Subsurface explorations at this site were extended to a maximum depth of 40.5 feet. The site properties below the boring depth to 100 feet were estimated based on our experience and knowledge of geologic conditions of the general area. Additional deeper borings or geophysical testing may be performed to confirm the conditions below the current boring depth. FLOOR SLABS Settlement of floor slabs supported over low density, existing fill cannot be accurately predicted and could be larger than normal and result in some cracking. Unsuitable subg-ade materials observed during construction should be excavated and replaced with properly compacted fill. Removal of uncontrolled, existing fill below floor slabs and its replacement with properly compacted fill, is recommended for this project. If the owner accepts the risk of poor floor slab performance, considerations can be given to a partial removal of existing fill and providing a layer of 3 to 4 feet of properly compacted fill below floor slabs. Floor Slab Design Parameters Item Description Remove existing improvements, strip, and pe form cuts Floor Slab Subgrade Preparation 1 Remove existing fill and evaluate subgrade conditions • Place and compacted fill to the design subgrade level(s) Minimum Aggregate Base 6 inches - Estimated Modulus of Subgrade Reaction k 6-inch aggregate base: 125 pounds per square inch per inch -. Floor slabs should be isolated from walls, columns, and utilities to allow for thei' independent movement. Joints should be constructed at regular intervals as recommended by the American Concrete Institute (ACI) to help control the location of cracking. Keyed and doweled joints should also be considered. The owner should be aware that differential movement between floor slabs and foundations can occur. The floor slab design should include at least 6 inches of granular material immediately below slabs- on-ground. A material meeting or similar to IDOT Gradation Nos. 12a and 14, with 6 percent or less fines(material passing the#200 sieve), is recommended below these floor slabs. The use of a vapor retarder/barrier should be considered beneath concrete slabs-on-ground covered with moisture sensitive or impervious coverings, or when the slab will support equipment and/or materials sensitive to moisture. When conditions warrant the use of a vapor retarder/barrier, the slab designer should refer to ACI 302 and/or ACI 360 for procedures and cautions regarding the use and placement of a vapor retarder/barrier. _�  i3pia alveresourceful Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report Ilerracon Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications Waterloo, Iowa May 20, 2019 • Terracon Project No. 13195025 G oR putt Floor Slab Construction Considerations Irmo On most project sites, the site grading is generally accomplished early in the construction phase. However, as construction proceeds, the subgrade may be disturbed due to utility excavations, construction traffic, desiccation, rainfall, etc. As a result, the floor slab subgrade may not be suitable for placement of the granular base and concrete, and corrective action will be required. Terracon should review the condition of the floor slab subgrades immediately prior to placement of the granular base and construction of the slabs. Particular attention should be paid to high traffic areas that were rutted and disturbed earlier and to areas containing backfilled trenches. Areas where unsuitable conditions are located should be repaired by removing and replacing the affected material with properly compacted fill. LATERAL EARTH PRESSURES Design Parameters Structures with unbalanced backfill levels on opposite sides should be designed for earth pressures at least equal to values indicated in the following table. Earth pressures will be influenced by structural design of the walls, conditions of wall restraint, methods of construction and/or compaction and the strength of the materials being restrained. Two wall restraint conditions are shown in the diagram below. Active earth pressure is commonly used for design of free- standing cantilever retaining walls and assumes wall movement. The "at-rest" condition assumes no wall movement and is commonly used for loading dock/building walls, or other walls restrained at the top. Development of passive resistance requires movement of the embedded element and therefore, no more than 1/2 of the ultimate value should be used. The recommended design lateral earth pressures do not include a factor of safety and do not provide for possible hydrostatic pressure on the walls, unless stated. For active pressure movement, S = Surcharge --4 4 (0.002 H to 0.004 H) S For at-rest pressure - No Movement Assumed Horizontal Finished Grade H Horizontal Finished Grade �--p2---/14—pi-1I Retaining Wall -Responsive • Res ur=efu- = Reliable 1 Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications Waterloo, Iowa May 20, 2019 a Terracon Project No. 13195025 GeoReport Lateral Earth Pressure Design parameters Earth Equivalent Fluid Coefficient for Backfill Surcharge Earth Pressure, p2 Pressure Type Density (Psi Pressure, (psi) Condition Drained Undrained pi (psf) Drained Undrained Granular—0.33 40 80 (0.33)S (40)H (80)H Active Sandy Lean Clay/ Clayey (Ka) Sand —0.36 45 85 (0.36)S (45)H I (85)H Fine-Grained—0.42 50 90 (0.42)S (50)H (90)H Granular—0.50 60 90 (0.50)S (60)H (90)H At-Rest Sandy Lean Clay/ Clayey j (Ko) Sand —0.53 65 95 (0.53)S (65)H (95)H Fine-Grained—0.59 70 100 (0.59)S (70)H I (100)H Granular-3.0 360 235 --- --- --- Passive Sandy Lean Clay/ Clayey ___ 330 (Kp) Sand—2.77 I --- 220 --- Fine-Grained —2.37 285 200 For active earth pressure, wall must rotate about base, with top lateral movE ments 0.002H to 0.004H, where H is wall height For passive earth pressure to develop, wall must move horizontally to mobi ize resistance Uniform surcharge, where S is surcharge pressure • In-situ soil backfill weight a maximum of 120 pcf Horizontal backfill compacted to 98 percent of the maximum dry der sity value as determined in accordance with ASTM Standard Test Method D 698 No loading from nearby footings, grade-supported slabs, or other surcharg, s Loading from heavy compaction equipment not included No hydrostatic pressures acting on wall for drained values No dynamic loading No safety factor included Ignore passive pressure resistance in frost zone Backfill placed against structures should consist of granular soils or low plasticity cohesive soils. For the granular values to be valid, the granular backfill must extend out and up from the base of — the wall at an angle of at least 45 and 60 degrees from vertical for the active/at-rest and passive cases, respectively. To calculate the resistance to sliding, a value of 0.33 should be used as the ultimate coefficient of friction between the footing and the underlying suitable soil. If 2 feet or more of crushed stone is placed immediately below a foundation, an ultimate coefficient of friction of 0.45 can be used. Re• sive s R sou. of i - Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report Ilerracon Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications L Waterloo, Iowa May 20, 2019 • Terracon Project No. 13195025 GeoReport Subsurface Drainage for Below-Grade Walls A perforated rigid plastic drain line installed behind the base of walls that extends below adjacent grade is recommended to prevent hydrostatic loading on any dock walls or other relatively shallow foundation walls. The invert of a drain line around a below-grade building area or exterior retaining wall should be placed near foundation bearing level. The drain line should be sloped to provide positive gravity drainage to daylight or to a sump pit and pump. Clean-outs should be provided for drains. The drain line should be surrounded by clean, free-draining granular material having 3 percent or less passing the No. 200 sieve, such as ASTM No. 57 aggregate or IDOT porous backfill (Section 4131). At least a 2-foot wide section of free-draining granular fill located above the drain line and adjacent to the walls is recommended. The free-draining aggregate should be encapsulated in a filter fabric such as Contech C60NW or equivalent. Exterior granular fill should extend to within 2 feet of final grade and then capped with compacted, fine-grained/cohesive fill to reduce the amount of surface water infiltration into the drain system. As an alternative to free-draining granular fill, a pre-fabricated drainage structure may be used. A pre-fabricated drainage structure is a plastic drainage core or mesh which is covered with filter fabric to prevent soil intrusion and is fastened to the wall prior to placing backfill. PAVEMENTS Pavement Subgrade Preparation Uncontrolled, existing fill was encountered in the borings to depths of about 3 to 6.5 feet below existing grades. Complete removal of uncontrolled, existing fill replacement with properly compacted fill would eliminate the risk of poor pavement performance. However, for this project, complete removal and replacement of the uncontrolled, existing fill would involve significant costs due to the depths to which uncontrolled, existing fill was encountered. Consideration can be given to providing a layer of properly compacted, low-plasticity fill at least 24 inches in thickness over the uncontrolled, existing fill. Consideration can also be given to the use of crushed stone over a punched and drawn geogrid over uncontrolled, existing fill. Discussion regarding subgrade preparation and the owner's risk of pavement settlement is provided in the -tec - Overview and - - - sections. On most project sites, grading is accomplished relatively early in the construction phase, and fill is placed and compacted in a uniform manner. However, as construction proceeds, excavations are made, rainfall and surface water saturates some areas, heavy traffic from concrete trucks and other construction equipment/vehicles disturb the subgrade, and many surface irregularities are filled in with loose materials to temporarily improve trafficability. As a result, pavement subgrades - • ul 7,22elia222 19 Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications Waterloo, Iowa May 20, 2019 itz Terracon Project No. 13195025 GeoReport prepared early in the project should be carefully evaluated as the time for pavemelt construction approaches. We recommend the water content and density of the upper 9 inches of the subgrade be evaluated and pavement subgrades be proofrolled within two days of actual paving operations. Areas not in compliance with the required ranges of water content or density should be moisture conditioned and re-compacted. Particular attention should be paid to high traffic areas that were rutted and disturbed earlier and to areas where backfilled trenches are located. Areas that appear severely desiccated following site stripping may require undercutting or moisture conditioning and re- compacting. Areas where unsuitable conditions are located should be repaired by removing and replacing the material with properly compacted fill. After proofrolling and repairing deep subgrade deficiencies, the entire subgra cle should be scarified and developed, as recommended in the Earthwor section, to provice a relatively uniform subgrade for pavement construction. If a significant precipitation event occurs after the evaluation or if the surface becomes disturbed, the subgrade should be reviewed by qualified personnel immediately prior to paving. The subgrade should be in its finished form at the time of the final review. Pavement Thickness Design Considerations Pavement designs are provided for the traffic conditions noted in the section. A critical aspect of pavement performance is site preparation. The typical pavement thickness designs in this section must be applied to the site that has been prepared as recommended in the oiE a rt hrk section. The minimum pavement sections presented were estimated based on the assumption that earthwork operations are performed in accordance with this report. The minimum recommended pavement thicknesses do not account for heavy construction traffic. Partially-constructed sections subjected to heavy construction traffic can result in premature pavement deterioration and failure. Our experience indicates that this pavement construction practice can result in pavement that will not perform as intended. Considering this information, several a ternatives are available to mitigate the impact of heavy construction traffic on the pavement construction. These include using thicker sections to account for the construction traffic, using some method of soil modification or stabilization to improve the subgrade support characteristics, or by routing heavy construction traffic around paved areas. We are available to discuss these alternatives upon request. If the pavements will be subject to traffic by construction equipment/vehicles, he pavement thicknesses should be revised to consider the effects of the additional traffic loading. It is our experience that 12 inches of crushed stone with geogrid to 24 inches of crushed stone without geogrid is required for subgrades to remain stable under construction traffic k adings. The Res o ' goyReliable 20 Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications - Waterloo, Iowa May 20, 2019 • Terracon Project No, 13195025 GeoReport crushed stone thickness required depends on factors such as site drainage, subgrade type and strength, and the amount and type of construction loadings anticipated. Terracon personnel have observed "dishing" in some parking lots surfaced with ACC. Dishing is usually observed in the most frequently used parking stalls (such as near the front of the building and where trucks or trailers are parked for an extended time)and occurs under the wheel footprint in these areas. The use of higher-grade asphaltic cement or surfacing these areas with PCC should be considered. The dishing is exacerbated by factors such as irrigated islands or planter areas, sheet surface drainage to the front of the building, and placing the ACC directly on a compacted clay subgrade. Pavement thickness can be determined using AASHTO, Asphalt Institute, American Concrete Institute, National Ready Mixed Concrete Association and/or other methods or guidelines for parking and industrial facilities, if specific wheel loads, axle configurations, frequencies, and desired pavement life are provided. Terracon can provide thickness recommendations for pavements subjected to loads other than personal vehicle and semi-tractor and trailer traffic if this information is provided. Pavement performance is affected by its surroundings. In addition to providing preventive maintenance, the civil engineer should consider the following recommendations in the design and layout of pavements. • If practical, final grade adjacent to parking lots and drives should slope down from pavement edges at a minimum 2 percent; • The subgrade and the pavement surface should have a minimum 2 percent slope to promote drainage; • Install pavement drainage surrounding areas anticipated for frequent wetting; • Install joint sealant and seal cracks immediately; • Seal all landscaped areas in, or adjacent to, pavements, to reduce water migration to subgrade; • Place compacted, low `permeability' backfill against the exterior side of curb and gutter. Estimates of Minimum Pavement Thicknesses We anticipate the traffic loads for this site will produced by semi-tractors and trailers and automobiles. In developing the recommended minimum pavement section thicknesses, we considered that light-duty pavements will receive 10,000 total 18-kip equivalent single axle loads and the heavy-duty pavements will receive 60,000 total 18-kip equivalent single axle loads for asphalt and 100,000 total 18-kip equivalent single axle loads for Portland cement concrete. Minimum recommended pavement thicknesses for this project are presented in the following table. Responsive Resourceful • Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report Ilerracon Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications -- Waterloo, Iowa May 20, 2019 Terracon Project No. 13195025 GeoReport Minimum Portland Cement Concrete Pavement Thicknesses (inches) Pavement Areas Light-Duty Heavy-Duty Plain PCC 5 7 Aggregate Base - 4 4 Compacted Subgrade 20 20 or Aggregate Base over Geogrid 12 12 Pavement materials, design, and construction should conform to the Iowa Department of Transportation (IDOT) Standard Specifications. PCC pavement concrete should have a 28-day compressive strength of at least 4,000 psi and a modulus of rupture of at least 575 psi. PCC pavements require properly designed and constructed longitudinal joints (parallel to traffic) and transverse joints (perpendicular to traffic) to provide satisfactory performance. 3. Pavements should be provided with a permeable base and subdrains in accordance with the Pavement Subsurface Drainage subsection. 4. Subgrade should be placed and compacted in accordance with the requirements in the Earthork section. Minimum Asphaltic Pavement Thicknesses(inches) Pavement Areas Light-Duty Heavy-Duty HMA 4 7 Aggregate Base 1- 6 6 Compacted Subgrade 18 18 or Aggregate Base over Geogrid 12 1 Pavement materials, design, and construction should conform to the Iowa Ciepartment of Transportation (IDOT) Standard Specifications. 2. A minimum surface course thickness of 2 inches is recommended with HMA/ACC pavements. }. Pavements should be provided with a permeable base and subdrains in accordance with the Pavement Subsurface Drainage subsection. Subgrade should be placed and compacted in accordance with the requirements in the Eart w. section. Pavement sections reinforced with proprietary geogrid should include 1 layer of mult -axial geogrid placed below the aggregate base on the prepared subgrade. Products that can be used include, but are not limited to, Tensar TX130S, TX140, BX1100, AllianceGeo BX Type 1, 1 enCate Mirafi BXG110, or approved equivalent. Consult with specific geogrid manufacturers fc:.r final design thicknesses, or suitable products. -izsponsive Resourceful Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report lrerracon Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications a Waterloo, Iowa May 20, 2019 ---- Terracon Project No. 13195025 GeoReport The preceding recommended minimum design thicknesses are typical values and thicker pavement sections could be used to reduce maintenance and extend the expected service life of the pavements. Periodic maintenance will also extend the service life of pavements and should include patching and repair of deteriorated areas, crack sealing, and surface sealing. If higher truck traffic volumes and/or heavier trucks are expected, thicker pavement sections may be required. Geogrid reinforced pavement design procedures rely on product specific field and laboratory research, and the manufacturer's published product literature. The design procedure used to develop the pavement thickness recommendations outlined above is based on our understanding of some of the design principles used, but was not an exhaustive comparison of the various proprietary systems. Geogrid reinforced pavement designs should be required by independent manufacturers based on their methodologies, and the geogrid material properties to be used for the design should not be specified or accepted based solely on distinct engineering properties of the materials. Terracon can assist in review of submitted designs, if requested. Pavement Subsurface Drainage A permeable granular base should consist of free-draining, granular material meeting IDOT Specifications. Subdrains should be extended a minimum of 4 feet below pavement subgrade and be backfilled with free-draining, granular material. A perforated drain line should be placed near the base of the trench excavation and surrounded with at least 6 inches of the drainage material graded to minimize the intrusion of fines or an alternative free-draining granular material encapsulated with suitable filter fabric. The drains should be hydraulically connected with the permeable base and sloped to provide positive gravity drainage to a reliable discharge point. Although not recommended, if subdrains are not provided, the granular base material should consist of a dense-graded crushed stone meeting or similar to IDOT Section No. 4120.04 (Gradation No. 11) or Section No. 4123 (Gradation No. 14). Subsurface drainage systems (i.e., permeable base and subdrains) below pavement areas generally prolong the life of a pavement and help to prevent saturation of the subgrade soils that can result in a reduction of subgrade strength. The use of a drained, granular base will also help to reduce the amount of frost action. Subsurface drainage should also be provided adjacent to irrigated landscaping. The (sub)base should be hydraulically connected to the granular material surrounding the drainage pipes. Periodic maintenance of subdrains is required for long-term �. proper performance. Design recommendations for pavement subdrains are provided in the following table. =ea l_ Geotechnical Engineering Report Ilerracon Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications Waterloo, Iowa May 20, 2019 • Terracon Project No. 13195025 GeoReport Subdrain Design Recommendations Item Descriptions and Values Minimum Thickness of `Permeable' (Sub)Base 4 inches below Pavements j - Section No. 4115, Gradation No. 4 • Section No. 4120, Gradation No. 10 IDOT (Sub)Base Material Section No. 4121, Gradation No. 12a Directly below Pavements • Section No. 4123, Gradation No. 14 Section No. 4132, Gradation No. 30 Minimum Drainage Pipe Diameter 4 inches Invert Depth below Subgrade 4 feet Minimum Subdrain Trench Width { 16 inches IDOT Section No. 4131, Gradation No. 29, • Porous Backfill or other free-draining granular Subdrain Trench Backfill material encapsulated with geotextile filter fabric (Contech C60NW or equivalent) Granular material with 3 percent or less fines, graded to meet filter criteria for clay and silt Pavements should be sloped to provide rapid drainage of surface water. Water should not be allowed to pond on or adjacent to pavements, since this could saturate the subgrade and contribute to premature pavement deterioration. Periodic maintenance of pavements and grades adjacent to pavements should be expected. All cracks should be sealed, and areas exhibiting distress should be repaired promptly to help prevent further deterioration. Pavement Construction Considerations Fine-grained soil/material generally provides fair to poor pavement support. Construction scheduling often involves grading and paving by separate contractors and can lvolve a time lapse between the end of grading operations and the commencement of paving. Disturbance, desiccation, or wetting of pavement subgrades between grading and paving can result in deterioration of the previously completed subgrade. A non-uniform subgrade can result in poor pavement performance and local failures relatively soon after pavements are constructed. Pavement subgrades should be proofrolled prior to paving operations to help delineate soft or disturbed areas. A Terracon representative should observe the proofrolling. Unstable areas identified by proofrolling will likely not be stable under pavement construction traffic and should be undercut to expose stable material and backfilled with properly compacted fill. Pavement subgrades should be prepared in accordance with the Earth-=or and Pavements sections. Pavement Maintenance The pavement sections provided in this report represent minimum recommended thicknesses and, as such, periodic maintenance should be anticipated. Therefore, preventativE maintenance Reppo sine• Resourceful Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications - Waterloo, Iowa - May 20, 2019 Terracon Project No. 13195025 GeoReport should be planned and provided for through an on-going pavement management program. Preventative maintenance activities are intended to slow the rate of pavement deterioration and to preserve the pavement investment. Preventative maintenance consists of localized maintenance (e.g. crack and joint sealing and patching) and global maintenance (e.g. surface sealing). Preventative maintenance is usually a priority when implementing a planned pavement maintenance program. Prior to implementing any maintenance, engineering observation is recommended to determine the type and extent of preventative maintenance. Even with periodic maintenance, some movements and related cracking may still occur and repairs required. FROST CONSIDERATIONS The soils on this site are moderately to highly frost susceptible, and small amounts of water can affect the performance of slabs and pavements. Exterior slabs should be anticipated to heave during winter months. If frost action needs to be reduced in critical areas, we recommend the use of coarse-gained/granular fill with 6 percent or less fines or structural slabs (e.g., structural stoops in front of building doors). Placement of granular material with low frost susceptibility in large areas may not be feasible. However, the following recommendations are provided to help reduce the amount of frost heave. Providing surface drainage away from the building and slabs and toward the site storm drainage system Installing drain tiles around the perimeter of the building, stoops, below exterior slabs and pavements, and connect them to the stormwater drainage system Grading subgrades beneath a more permeable sand or aggregate base, toward the site drainage system Placing less-frost susceptible granular fill beneath slabs and pavements that are critical to the project Placing a 3 horizontal to 1 vertical (3H: 1V) transition zone between less-frost susceptible granular material and other soils As an alternative to extending granular fill to the full frost depth, consideration can be made to placing extruded polystyrene or cellular concrete under a buffer of at least 2 feet of granular fill maintained in a drained condition. GENERAL E_ A COMMENTS Our analysis and opinions are based upon our understanding of the project, the geotechnical conditions in the area, and the data obtained from our site exploration. Natural variations will occur between exploration point locations or due to the modifying effects of construction or weather. The nature and extent of such variations may not become evident until during or after construction. Terracon should be retained as the Geotechnical Engineer, where noted in this report, to provide -- ponbive • -Resourceful o eli 2 Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications Waterloo, Iowa May 20, 2019 - Terracon Project No. 13195025 GReort observation and testing services during pertinent construction phases. If variations appear, we can provide further evaluation and supplemental recommendations. If variations a,-e noted in the absence of our observation and testing services on-site, we should be immedia-ely notified so that we can provide evaluation and supplemental recommendations. Our Scope of Services does not include either specifically or by implication any er✓ironmental or biological (e.g., mold, fungi, bacteria) assessment of the site or identification of prevention of pollutants, hazardous materials or conditions. If the owner is concerned about tf`e potential for such contamination or pollution, other studies should be undertaken. Our services and any correspondence or collaboration through this system are intended for the sole benefit and exclusive use of our client for specific application to the project _iiscussed and are accomplished in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering practices with no third-party beneficiaries intended. Any third-party access to services or correspondence is solely for information purposes to support the services provided by Terracon to our client. Reliance upon the services and any work product is limited to our client, and is ni:)t intended for third parties. Any use or reliance of the provided information by third parties is donE solely at their own risk. No warranties, either express or implied, are intended or made. Site characteristics as provided are for design purposes and not to estimate excavation cost. Any use of our report in that regard is done at the sole risk of the excavating cost estimator as there may be variations on the site that are not apparent in the data that could significantly impact excavation cost. Any parties charged with estimating excavation costs should seek their own site characterization for specific purposes to obtain the specific level of detail necessary for costing. Site safety, and cost estimating including, excavation support, and dewatering requirements/design are the responsibility of others. If changes in the nature, design, or location of the project are planned, our conclusions and recommendations shall not be considered valid unless we review the changes and either verify or modify our conclusions in writing. s Resourceful Reliable 2 Geotechnical Engineering Report lkarra Wastewater Treatment Plant Bi solids Modifications Waterloo, Iowa May 20, 2019 Terracon Project No. 13195025 GeoReport I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me of uncle- my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly '.tensed .t Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. 2 3�f 4 ascn Patric*Heinz, P;71- ate ' _. My license renewal date is December 31,2020. Geotechnical Engineering Report Ilerracon Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications Waterloo, Iowa May 20, 2019 • Terracon Project No. 13195025 GeoReport EXPLORATION mN TESTING PROCEDURES Field Exploration Number of Borings Boring Depth (feet) Planned Location 2 25.5 WAS Building Addition 2 25.5 Dewatering Building Addition 4 40.5 Centrate Equalization Tank 2 25.5 Ferric Building 2 10.5 to 15.5 Pavement Areas Boring Layout and Elevations: Terracon determined the boring locations in the field using the site plan provided by the client. Distances from existing site features were measured using a tape or measuring wheel, while right angles were estimated. We also used handheld GPS equipment in the field to determine the latitude and longitude of the borings. Our GPS equipment has a minimum horizontal accuracy of about 20 feet. Surface elevations at the boring location were determined by the drill crew utilizing differential leveling techniques and a surveyor's level and rod. Surface elevations for Borings 1 and 2 were referenced to the finished floor of the WAS building. An elevation of 841.85 feet was provided for this reference. Surface elevations for Borings 3 through 8, 11 and 12 were referenced to the finished floor of the Dewatering building. An elevation of 842.35 feet was provided for this reference. Surface elevations for Borings 9 and 10 were referenced to the finished floor of the TAS building. An elevation of 841.30 feet was provided for this reference. The surface elevations on the boring logs were rounded to the nearest 1/2-foot. The locations and elevations of the boring logs should be considered accurate only to the degree implied by these methods. Subsurface Exploration Procedures: We advanced the borings with a track-mounted, rotary drill rig using continuous flight, hollow-stem augers and mud-rotary techniques. Soil sampling was performed using split-barrel sampling procedures. In the split-barrel sampling procedure, the number of blows required to advance a standard 2-inch O.D. split-barrel sampler the last 12 inches of the typical total 18- inch penetration by means of a hammer with a free fall of 30 inches, is the standard penetration resistance value (N). A CME automatic SPT hammer was used to advance the split- barrel sampler in the borings performed for this project. The N-value is used to estimate the relative density of coarse-grained/granular soils. Our exploration team prepares field boring logs as part of the drilling operations. These field logs include visual classifications of the materials encountered during drilling and the exploration team's interpretation of the subsurface conditions between samples. The sampling interval depths, penetration resistances, recoveries, and other sampling information are recorded on the field boring R—sp �= - cegi -� Rai — EXPW-_ -o. -=4 D TESTING PROCEDURES e.of Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications - Waterloo, Iowa May 20, 2019 Terracon Project No. 13195025 GeORePOrt logs. The samples are placed in appropriate containers and transported to our labontory for further testing and classification Laboratory Testing The project engineer reviewed the field data and assigned laboratory tests to aid in the evaluation of the engineering properties of the various soil and rock strata. Laboratory testing for this project included determination of water content of soil and particle size analysis. The laboratory testing program also included examination of samples by an engineer. Based on the material's texture and plasticity, we described and classified the soil samples in general accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System. Rock classification was conducted using locally accepted practices for enginee ing purposes; petrographic analysis may reveal other rock types. Rock core samples typica ly provide an improved specimen for this classification. Boring log rock classification was detern- ned using the General Notes - Sedimentary Rock Classification. -- onsw - Resourceful - Reliable EXP.! _ TIo._AND TF=T_f_ c C `=R'C -of i_ f- — - __ _ E_ - -_ _ _ - -i _ _ -_ = WI. __ __ _ _-=_- - - ___- - _ - - _ _ -_ -a L 0_ 7:7___-_,0 ---= - -` =_ — - __° - _ _ _ _ 0 ____ , _:,_ L-7 1---_-_--:-__---1_-_-_ -,--- - 21 ram,  = - - = --- -_ _--o : - _ iL CO 1 C - = =-__ __-- -- z O =- - _ - -_ -- - - J -- _ o N - = — - - - - �+ - __ - - ___ __ _ _ - - = _ "ue _ - = C] _ = _ -- r"' ::__,17..__ u:ta_i — _ _ = O` o el _ Q --,- ---_„ - --- -7, --,- ,-_-_—_,_,_—_ L , . .„._ c _ 7 -,_'- ''- . __ _ •_ ,_ _____ __s_ __ = :____u , = ___., _ ,,,_;:,,,__„,_ _,, =,„.,„ , __ __ ,c7,1 ____ =,_ ___,_,=__: _l _=-,-iir - _,c- , = o. L `- Q _=- --__ - — _—_ re L< 1 ,,_„__. „___ __ ________ , _,_ , ___„_______ _:,,,:„, ___,_ ,, E Lu is , _- = '-1 _- - - i- .---=r=77-7,i---_ — --: _ ', -_ '' ---- '- _': i = __ _ _ _u __ __ , __.__ _ _ _ , _ ___,:_______ ___ = __ __ I _ _„_ :_ _ __ __ ._ _ ,, . . _ ___ _r = _____ _ , _, _ _,_____ e_ = _, _,_ __ _ ____„__ _, ,__, _. „,__ ____ _ _ _ , _ ___ _ ____ :,__ . _= ,__ ,:,:, _„, ,„,__ __ _,,a7'- ,,- __-,1 --,----E'- -- - CD w o fn I _ --- 3 . __- = =7-- —-,=_ ="7_-,-- _ al 1 !: - - --  ztio _ _ U —_�_ = - _- - - U _- __ FImam u _ = _ = -_ mow --- cti - — 11„ am. - __ --- - � _ _ --- - --- - — = —_---- _ = -- - --- - _ -- - - U '`---=.—`- -- - - -_ __ -- �= __------- �=� _ — _— - ----_ __-- --_= -_ - --= - 7 ` --Wit_== —= = -- _ s� �' 7-1_ vi 01 -_ _-__ = - --_ --_- -- _- _ _- _ a= ct —_ — _- ==--fir= -_ — ___,_ - - L _._ -_ - - = _ - = - ---- a __ O re LL _ co _ = = _- _ ii L ---- =_-_ - -- - -------_-- _- - - _ __-__ 0. -_ __ 0_, ___ _ ., ,.., ,, _ __ = -- ==- - ' _ = - _i - Z' I#r. - rat aj i____,,_ _.,_ _ ,„:„__ ___t___ _ _ ____ -- _ii-_ _ , _ i_=_ oCei Si }U l an i _s- -- l=_r_-l--- = - --- l-- .l'll-- -llll-- =;-=M -- cni L MOM If Pr. L ___, _______ ________ _,_ „_-____„=„,,,-„,„,_„,,f,„_______,__:,, 4., „,_ i , .., _ _ ,_______, „_ ,_ ____ , ___,,_„_„,„___ __,-_= =- ---___ - _ ----- ---, - - -----,-r---- - --;=- . w. ___,__,,„„__,_ _ wi ,_ „ —r,_-— ,_---± t_-:- 5,-'-'7,- 1-It'-M ,,,,,-:,-'- L. -_ c& . -,. _,,._,„,„..,,-,„-_,---__,- -ti:__,_i_j.___,„,-,-_:_i ___ _=f-TT,t,r, --_ _:,___ _____i :_ -3- . 1-i = _= v., I mI L 1 . __ ,__,__„r____ _ cu___-____------- _____7_ _ _ ,___,_____: ___— s_7___,__ _,____ --.-±___-L':':--L' 1,--_, -11 ,-.-- __ ------ . - ---- - _ - ______--- _ _______ 1 --- ----711 — - --1:- --- ''-=--7--- --• - —fl'' - -- --='=-----'- - - '---17--7 1 L = _ j ___ __ _ . . -'--ll---- ------1 l -1 l == :-,-ll _:----- lilIll- l '- __,- _--___- _ ;,i,=-,,, -- -_--=- - - -- _tea_==- -_- _ _ - -- __ ',;;;_:=7:__,_ cf_::::::: __,;,_-_. v,_,_ li;—lif- :-Il:711 1:7'l—_,7 _,,_7:1-----'11-7-1-=-i'L:=':-:'-1_==';;=-11-:-L-71- 1-=:1---=--- --= WW: L 5. ,,,„ --::'--- 1 ozal CO j-_-7.;":5._ ----_,, „,_„, ___,„ _____ _ _ __-_ _ ---Z - to _- - =_ = = ==  c� Ce O - __ _ _ - = _ -- II 1 - _ __- =-_--- -- _ i a#H - _ _ - I A., o _ _ al gi <1 a—+ — -- _-_- _-_ - _ _ _- ----_ CO __-- _— _-_-_ — ---_ __—" - ---_- __ _ ___— — e__ - _-- in __- =--- = - -_ _ = - - i tn 1 Mom BORING LOG NO. 1 Page of I PROJECT: Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids CLIENT: City of Waterloo IA Modifications Waterloo, IA "� SITE: 3505 Easton Avenue I Waterloo, IA I 1 CD LOCATION See - _ w Z wa v > STRENGTH TEST o 3 O ° WH H HI- OH a w cn= wZ 2 - U Latitude:42.4705°Longitude:-92.307 i Q w <.2 H w a_ aa.. wW d _iw OaI H ww 2- Z ¢z �6 I Surface Elev.:841.0(Ft.) o Q m Q u_CC Q H 2 ct`" H p o CD O v) —I H Q cn Cr) DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) 0 1 I.*it FILL-SANDY LEAN CLAY,with zones of sand,trace ����% gravel,dark brown — 3•�•�• H2-4-5 17 •♦ 14 N=9 1 ti• IN i t%i 2-5-4N 5 WM N=9 13 ... +• U. '-• . 2-3-4 ,V• •• Wi 10 13 N=7 o- ••••• w-4•••• }- •♦ 3-4-5 •• 13 00- w!••• • ■ o • 0=.+•• ▪_• 12.0 829 2-2-3 C a:..: SAND(SP),trace clay and gravel,fine to coarse 11111 N=5 6 1- grained,brown,loose to medium dense z e e e, , i■ woe o o, 1 reed 2-2-2 11 w* e °e 1 7 ▪ ae. o e o , e e e w• o o H-e e e s e e Q3s e e e In�s o oOO o e e e � gr O e , a ° e � a°e e•e : l -�aeeeee " 18 4-3-5 ° ° 14 J_ o a e 20 N=8 0 o e e e e e e O e e e ° I. e e e e e e' Q r a e e t e e e ee e , e e ' �B.e e e e • e O e;, 4-4-6 • °e 2 W 18 16 1 E ode°.'e 25.5 815.5 N=10 °- Boring Terminated at 25.5 Feet L- ..,- w z1 , 0 El I oI o- o- � Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic - — a1 �!Advancement Method: See a --for a Notes: Hollow stem auger to 14 feet then mud rotary to boring description of field and laboratory procedures G' termination. used and additional data(If any). > I See --. ,for explanation of O!Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. z 1 Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips `�• upon completion. WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS J Boring Started:04-19-2019 Boring Completed:04-19-2019 . — z I 0 14.5'observed while samplingilerracon o Drill Rig:#546 Driller:WE m 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 i Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195025 H- Dry cave-in at 13.5'after drilling — _ BORING LOG NO. 2 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids CLIENT: City of Waterloo IA Modifications Waterloo, IA i iilb SITE: 3505 Easton Avenue Waterloo, IA O LOCATION See _._;; lore Pia,- J z w > STRENGTH TEST _ J v >0 � cncn w U Latitude:42.4705°Longitude:-92.3069° = w Q W w 1--1 Q a a c—n 2 Cr z Z H 0- F- > J > p cn cn(' F—w = w 1-w o- O Jw pa wz N z �z �C� C7 SurfaceElev.:841.5(Ft.) o <o �� J= og p o� DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) o MAIM FILL-SANDY LEAN CLAY,with zones of sand,trace gravel,dark brown - _ X3-3-8 — 3.0 838.5 _ 10 N=11 18 FILL-SAND,with zones of clay,trace gravel,dark brown - 2-2-3 5� X 11 8 N=5 Ul — X 15 2-2-2 10 N=4 0 '3.0 832.5 }K • CLAYEY SAND(SC.,trace gravel,gray brown,loose 2-3-3 wW. 1 —0 14 N=6 15 o. 11.0 830.5 _. = ... 2 it:.:':::... SAND(SP),trace gravel and clay,fine to medium Of 1. grained,brown,loose 2-2-3 10 5 _ N=5 ¢ I • 2-1-2 9 15— 6 N=3 a(: w-'•. In 3 = z. co :�:.19.0 822.5 - — SAND(SP),trace clay and gravel,fine to coarse Jae • ° 6-5-6 11 W r.°.°. grained,brown,medium dense 20— X 16 N=11 e . ' O p e e e ce e • e I Qee ee ee — e e e 2.e•e•e• e • e . w. . . . e e e e e Ow Ie°••ee _ ..0.6.0 °• J X9 8-9-12 16 ~:°:°e°.25.5 25 N=21 �t 816 ci 1 Boring Terminated at 25.5 Feet w- x — z 4111----__1- E pi I 01 x e LL i w: Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic cc 1 ¢_ a w= Advancement Method: See - = - -s for a Notes: — -- Hollow stem auger to 14 feet then mud rotary to boring description of field and laboratory procedures o termination. _� used and additional data(If any). Ze See- .; for explanation of o Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. zu.)1 Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips o= upon Gompletion. o= WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS _ 1 0 a 0 14.5'observed while sampling Boring Started:04-19-2019 Boring Completed:04-19-2019 ry o - erra-- on Dull Rig:#546 Duller:WE m, co e 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 11 i'EN Ory cave-in at 13.5'after drillin Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195025 BORING LOG NO. 3 Page 1 of 1 t PROJECT: Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids CLIENT: City of Waterloo IA Modifications Waterloo, IA i mar SITE: 3505 Easton Avenue Waterloo, IA 3 o LOCATION See = ;-- w z w v > STRENGTH TEST a O >o } co co w J ° `. w1— 1— } wH �v w 2 W~ z'_' I U Latitude:42.4728°Longitude:-92.3036 = J Q w w 1— ¢a r 7, w w == 2 �> J ] 0co �d 1t wz N Z ¢� >o a o_ Li, a O ww O= I— Cew a �z �— Surface Elev.:840.0(Ft.) o ><m Q w �'- Q o Et v Ov CO DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) O J 0 FILL-SANDY LEAN CLAY,with brick rubble,trace gravel,dark brown — 12 5-5-6 15 I 3.0 837, — X N=11 _-X FILL-CLAYEY SAND,fine to medium grained,dark brown — 5 X 11 N=7 16 a, 8 X 9 1-1-2 13 '�"e a, N=3 �_ °Yr 8.5 831.5 d / SANDY LEAN CLAY(CL),trace gravel,gray brown,stiff — }L- . 15 2-3-6 1 g N=9 w ,r 10.5 829.5 1 o_.. - \ 3000(HP) o •vi SAND(SP-SC),with clay,trace gravel,fine to medium /i grained,brown,medium dense to loose 1 a :v — X 2-5-6 w- , / 2-3-321 ¢w .-,.:.. ../f15.5 824.5 )_(:1N=6 Lili,r°° SAND(SP),trace clay and gravel,fine to coarse — n . grained,brown,loose to medium dense 0 o e e e e p� e e e � e e e �°e e e e e �� e e e C;7 e e e — �� O O P, • P P 1-2-2 e X 18 20 20-, w re.. .. N=4 a oa � °Vey, — Z e P P — e e O J r e e I e e e , ° ° ° — 1 ¢ e e e e e ei .— — X7— 9-9-1 0 17 16 162 N=19 a e°e°>°e'25.5 814.5 2`� —, Boring Terminated at 25.5 Feet w- J$ ¢_ z= 5 o▪f o- cc i o} ! 1-1 Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic ¢- a- to[Advancement Method: See _J5 for a Notes: L Hollow stem auger to 14 feet then mud rotary to boring description of field and laboratory procedures termination. used and additional data(If any). >' See -for explanation of O I Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. z< l cos o- ° WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS ' Boring Started:04-18-2019 Boring Completed:04-18-2019 z i0 13'observed while samplinglierracon 1 o- Drill Rig:#546 Driller:WE t co 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 I fter • Wet cave-in at 11'a drillin Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195025 r BORING LOG NO. Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids CLIENT: City of Waterloo IA Modifications Waterloo, IA _ I SITE: 3505 Easton Avenue Waterloo, IA i Co LOCATION See Z w STRENGTH TEST I U Latitude:42.4726°Longitude:-92,3036° _ Q w H ~ ,w w c—n i w z z H a a w� > ❑� �" } tn0 z Qw �_ g w Hw , O Ww 02 H �w a �Z �c� Surface Elev.:839.5(Ft.) o Q U e: m 0 �m Q w w < w 2H H UO �� DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) O o N e- FILL-SANDY LEAN CLAY,with zones of sand,trace gravel,dark brown — — X 10 3-3-4 i — N=7 11 4-4-4 5— X 9 N=8 j 23 — X 11 2-2-3 19 N=5 n. 830.5 } ' LEAN CLAY(CL),with sand,gray brown,medium stiff to 2-2-2 —~ 3_-_-, ..,_. stiff, 10— w X 18 N=4 21_ 1500(HP) i 1 LL -I 2-2-6 24 X18 N=8 13.0 826.5 — W 1,:‘::.:-.., SAND(SP-SC),with clay,trace gravel,fine to medium — w :•:• grained,gray brown,loose f•.:=.= 3-4-5 ..- 15— X 9 N=9 Illr' 21 a of 16.0 823.5 — ,_ (7) °e°e••' SAND(SP),trace clay and gravel,fine to coarse i.a eeeee°,e e s grained,brown,medium dense e o e o o e I •°° 16 8-5-5 —� 20-1X N=10 16 o)e . , > .eee zt. ...... — O e e J s e e � s e e H H . e e , �� e e e e e e , Q i e e e — 0) s e e o e' fr1.ee e e O • e e — e e e , o-°°°°e°°, 13 7-8-9 °,'25.5 814 25', X N=17 15 o Boring Terminated at 25.5 Feet w• - cc- _,t - — zI o1 it o- o- cc i LL r 0_ w- a Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic 1 a w= U;Advancement Method: See=  - for a Notes: — o= Hollow stem auger to 14 feet then mud rotary to boring description of field and laboratory procedures 7.Itermination. used and additional data(If any). I i_ See- -for explanation of o:Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. Z I s Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips u) O- upon,.ompletion. I I WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS - aconBoring Started:04-18-2019 Boring Completed:04-18-2019 E c� z, 0 13'observed while sampling p' W 10.5'observed after drilling Drill Ri #546 Driller:WE • I 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 iOM Cave-in at 11.5'after drillin• Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195025 BORING LOG NO. 5 Page 1 of 2 PROJECT: Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids CLIENT: City of Waterloo IA Modifications Waterloo, IA SITE: 3505 Easton Avenue Waterloo, IA w o LOCATION See - a-. w z uJ >. STRENGTH TEST o OJ ° wI- H >- wI- w >_ cF- z 2' V Latitude:42.4728°Longitude:-92.3034 = J¢ w w f- a r -o w w =_ > ofn nd H wz N z ¢I— }CD a w LU o' a O Ww OI I EYw a < z0 E — I Surface Elev.:839.5(Ft.) o <m Q w w J w o U = ,� O DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) 0 ♦♦ FILL-SAND,trace gravel,fine to coarse grained,brown 1.0 838.5 — _ ' FILL-CLAYEY SAND,trace gravel,fine to coarse grained,dark brown 3, 3.0 836.5 — .• FILL-CLAYEY SAND,trace gravel,fine to medium ����+• grained,dark brown — 40 \/ 15 2-1-2 14 � ���� 5 N=3 • ���8.0 831.5 i.L9 SAND(SP-SCI,with occasional clay layers,trace gravel, i o°. fine to coarse grained, brown,loose — Je>� 10� 13 N37 16 .... g • e( o • wo • ... F .V.,,, FL vt/ o k • ' - w •• r; —� ▪ °> 2-3-4 I -▪ eE--= — !▪ <°�l — X 10 3-2-3 20 4°e N=5 S'-.e.e_ / -• •° l/ ;.- , 4-4-5 .e°+- - X 9 22 w • -_ N=9 o o. _, E WIMP sip O e a�v- \/ - o t• (-.-- X 4-4-5 .°iss:- N=9 16 o e/ Ode..j 24.0 815.5 SANDY SILT(MLI,trace gravel,light brown,medium 16 3-2-3 24 — X stiff 25—' N=5 a26.0 813.5 W •••: SILTY SAND(SM),trace gravel,fine to coarse grained, 1 a1.. brown,loose — X 15 3-2-3 17 N=5 0 301 X 9 2-3-4 22 01 H g Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic g- t ¢- a- N 1 Advancement Method: See a e.-for a Notes: I- Hollow stem auger to 14 feet then mud rotary to boring description of field and laboratory procedures I 21 termination. used and additional data(If any). >1 See= =- for explanation of C o!Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. z I Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips cn1 upon completion. o- o i WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS 3 z 0 14'observed while drilling Boring Started:04-18-2019 Boring Completed:04-18-2019 I 01 lierracon Drill Rig:#546 Driller:WE on cn f 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 F I BM Dry cave-in at 11'after drilling Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195025 BORING LOG NO. 5 Page 2 of 2 PROJECT: Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids CLIENT: City of Waterloo IA Modifications Waterloo, IA SITE: 3505 Easton Avenue Waterloo, IA co LOCATION See ,-- Cl) p ^ w Z d c STRENGTH TEST o w ~ ct v U J `. WO H } WH 0 > H a i 0 Latitude:42.4728°Longitude:-92.3034° _ ¢ W cc 1--I H a a in H o W Z z 1- d H 2> _1 W �_ �� cn0 HW =2 II g W HW , OU W� coI F' ceW a Z wiz CL- I 0 Surface Elev.:839.5(Ft.) o m ¢ w J w F" 0 DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) p ~ ov "" SILTY SAND(SM),trace gravel,fine to coarse grained, X N=( brown,loose(continued) — — ' • 34.0 805.5 ^ LIMESTONE,highly weathered and broken,light brown X 3 1-1-3 30 _ 35— _ N=4 2 \`l• — Wi — X — }v ' 6-6-6 g 40 2 N=12 11 w z.0.5 799 _ 0 i Boring Terminated at 40.5 Feet 2a I a▪i 0I 1 W I - I L w ¢i WI cni ¢- Lo N i I 0 1 In cni M i - J W t 0 4 0 O_ .. -J F— cc 1 a 2i 0i W i ...� 0 i re 0- ai Wi wi � ¢i t 0 rem Oi 2 0I U-i — 0 e W I-i Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic ¢i di I Ad ;ment Method: - Notes: `-`= Hollow stem auger to 14 feet then mud rotary to boring See ri -r t _dfo er a o� description of field and laboratory procedures a D i termination. used and additional data(If any). 100%fluid loss at about 34 feet ¢i H i See- �,_-for explanation of o i Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. Z- Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips upon completion. i t WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS z I V' 14'observed while drilling Boring Started:04-18-2019 Boring Completed:04-18-2019 0 — IFèrracon Dull Rig:#546 Duller:WE .� m C 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 =I IINI Drycave-in at 11'after drillingCedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195025 � I BORING LOG NO. 6 Page 1 of 2 PROJECT: Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids CLIENT: City of Waterloo IA I Modifications Waterloo, IA SITE: 3505 Easton Avenue 1 1 Waterloo, IA i c7 LOCATION See w CO Wd c >_ STRENGTH TEST o 11 O O ne H U Latitude:42.4726°Longitude:-92.3034° _ W Q w 12 H-1 a a _ w z E- 1 d d W ce J O(n wa I-- W z N Z Q1- }0 d O WW OI F- 12Wa < 5zz W— - Surface Elev.:837.5(Ft.) o <m Q w '� < co v DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) 0 FILL-SANDY LEAN CLAY,trace gravel,dark brown 1 3.5 834 FILL-SANDY LEAN CLAY,trace gravel,dark brown — and gray 10 2-3-3 15 5— N=6 m i-75 Li,- a o d z - 9.5 8282-5-7 1 g °.-_--, SAND(SP-SC),with clay,trace gravel,fine to coarseN=12 10— '- ki2 N=12 15 w 4/ grained,brown,loose o-. _.J 1 . 2_. . — i. p .- - 1- ° -` — ic, °e:7 — )c;- , 3-3-2 19 I 15— N=5 °°4-- , . — X7 3-3-4 12 !-. . ' N=7 N e 1....to ° - � e f/ °°Yl 4-3-3 1 '..r; 6 18 1 it20— N=6 o ° ' zi..°'- o et,-,-. 2-4-4 � ° - Xio N=8 14 e q cQ O'. 0r°°'f24.0 813.5 _ o=. w . SILTY SAND(SM1,with gravel,fine to medium grained, 4-4-5 25— X3 N=9 23 I .-�: gray brown,loose of -r 26.0 811.5 — CLAYEY SAND(SC1,with gravel,fine to coarse grained, a gray,medium dense — X 0 3-5-7 z N=12 psi• � F , o 30— X4-7-7 ct- 4 14 Li.. .- al i I Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic ¢- 0 co Advancement Method: See - _ --- --for a Notes: _ Hollow stem auger to 14 feet then mud rotary to boring description of field and laboratory procedures J7 t termination. used and additional data(If any). Q ii See L.a-: -r- for explanation of 1 — o'Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. Z= Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips `� upon completion. pa Oa 1 WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS Boring Started:04-18-2019 Boring Completed:04-18-2019 _ z- '7 9.5'observed while sampling I pcc lierraron Drill Rig:#546 Driller:WE co' 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 _= _ Wet cave-in at 9.5'after drillin Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195025 _ BORING LOG NO. 6 Page 2 of 2 PROJECT: Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids CLIENT: City of Waterloo IA Modifications Waterloo, IA SITE: 3505 Easton Avenue Waterloo, IA 1 co LOCATION See F=E.= - --. w z wo- c > • STRENGTH TEST o w >0 } cncn w " Latitude:42.4726°Longitude:-92.3034° I J Q H > 1-H <a n_ HI o W Z Z 1-j > op 6 Surface Elev.:837.5(Ft.) o ll Q 2 vill LLIC CI- 0 0 w 00 I H w a- Z Z S C7 I0 o < u < w 2H" H o o� DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) c.) '— CLAYEY SAND(SC),with gravel,fine to coarse grained, Z N=14 gray,medium dense(continued) 32.0 805.5 _ LIMESTONE,highly weathered and broken,light brown r<- 1/\1434.1 803.5 _i Sampler Refusal at 34.1 Feet -U_A 50/1" t - I — a w g w a 0 a 0 w c H W. H a wt H1 0 ( N a 0 a)- M it 1 0= 4I 01 0- J H 0- 0 w of cc 0 d- w J_ Z 0 cc i 0- 0=3 cc n u__ ..... a w ¢- Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic cc 1 ¢ a.- w �I Advancement Method: See - :,- ,--,,,E for a Notes: 'i Hollow stem auger to 14 feet then mud rotary to boring o= description of field and laboratory procedures J- termination. used and additional data(If any). ¢- 1-i See , - for explanation of 0$Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. Z 3 Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips upon,ompletion. 1 WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS 1 t Boring Started:04-18-2019 Boring Completed:04-18-2019 C�_ 9.5'observed while sampling z 0 P 9 Ilerracon m- Drill Rig:#546 Duller:WE co 1 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 I IHM6 Wet cave-in at 9.5'after drillin Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195025 BORING LOG NO. 7 Page 1 of 2 PROJECT: Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids CLIENT: City of Waterloo IA Modifications Waterloo, IA "` , SITE: 3505 Easton Avenue Waterloo, IA 1 c9 LOCATION See F -- : w z > STRENGTH TEST o U I O >O > Inu) w H a w H I— } w l— O,� > Q U Latitude:42.4728°Longitude:-92.3035° = J Q w w ~ H a r _ H w ?_ i H �> J > �fn �d H wZ y Z <H }0 a w �w n- O ww OI H cewg >Z ow Surface Elev.:840.5(Ft.) o ¢m G w u] ¢ Cl) g Ov - '" (7 O v) —1 H 0 cn rn DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) , v FILL-SAND AND GRAVEL /\R4n 5 FILL-CLAYEY SAND,trace gravel,fine to medium — grained,dark brown — ___ _ I 9 3-1-2 16 '"' 5— N=3 1 a, O'iy 8.0 832.5 6=yis, SANDY LEAN CLAY(CL),trace gravel,gray brown, w iy,Z,e1 medium stiff — 2-1-2 g ` 10— X N=3 19 o ( o Maa:,,,/,.. I . ` o 12.5 828 °e'- SAND(SP-SC),with clay,trace gravel,fine to coarse — w e• grained,brown,loose to medium dense —= cc cc p.', 12 4-4-5 21 w ../, 15X— °e,s N=9 Li,• °e°' He 41'--," (/) e Y a 11 ii 4-4-4 22 �, ee N=8 N / LA e e ! 11 rn r•e 821.5 .•e°e°.' SAND(SP),,trace gravel and clay,fine to coarse 6 2-1-2 11 J_e e °, Xw e°e°eeC grained,brown,loose to medium dense 20-- N=3 e • • O e e e O OI. e O ' — >(io 3-5-5 14 H N=10 e e . Q e< e e e:a.s 6 `- 0 e e e ° '•°• 3-4-5 °° 25— X 9 N=9 11 �s . . -ee e e O s. e e e — i 1 —. ce re•°°°e' 3-3-5 19 J e e e — )(\ 1O z ° e . , N=8 e s e f O'°e°e°°'29.0 811.5 — 2 -.. . 2-2- LL 30— X 8 24 ) 1 Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic a- Cl)3 Advancement Method: See i - -for a Notes: `—`I Hollow stem auger to 24 feet.Mud rotary from 14 feet to to description of field and laboratory procedures 100%fluid loss at about 21 feet 7,= boring termination. used and additional data(If any). >j See t for explanation of O!Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. Z= Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips "�` upon completion. 1• o' WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS i iierraconBoring Started:04-19-2019 Boring Completed:04-19-2019 z 14'observed while sampling O f Dnll Rig:#546 Duller:WE m- 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 - Wet cave-in at 11.5'after drilling Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195025 1 o BORING LOG NO. 7 Page 2 of 2 PROJECT: Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids CLIENT: City of Waterloo IA Modifications Waterloo, IA SITE: 3505 Easton Avenue Waterloo, IA 1 O LOCATION See - w Z wa c } STRENGTH TEST o w. -J >O >- v)rn o W e_ H a I U Latitude:42.4728°Longitude:-92.3035° _ _1 H w cc W J O~a a w= o w H Z i- a d w> d > a� �d H wZ y Z QI- }_ SurfaceElev.:840.5(Ft.) o Q� �x m= co axg x �p ow �m Q W g w 2H H U DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) O ~ o rn "'"' '.:•III SILTY SAND(SM),fine to medium grained,brown, X N=4 j s 31.o\loose(continued) 809.5/ _ g.: - SAND(SP-SC),with gravel and clay,coarse grained, ° _1 brown and gray,loose — — . 4 — . .I% 8 1-1-2 I -. .. 35—' N=3 17 I°. f=a. . _. cr)it n o. -,�'. . — — C7 • w _ _ }6. __ 2-1-1 al 15 g1.: — w ° . -�to.5 800 40 X N=2 11 o - Boring Terminated at 40.5 Feet a 2 w - CC H w w= H _ cn- 3 L N S - Ji 1 W 1 � O_ 4- 0 0 I I H C- Q C- O- W cc i d' w3 XI r� Z_ oI 0. 1 e U- - 0 W 1-_ Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic a= w= co Advancement Method: See- -- - _2 for a Notes: — L Hollow stem auger to 24 feet.Mud rotary from 14 feet to to description of field and laboratory procedures o boring termination. 7- used and additional data(If any). H- See for explanation of o-Abando iment Method: symbols and abbreviations. Z Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips upon completion. WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS 4 z= 0 14'observed while sampling Boring Started:04-19-2019 Boring Completed:04-19-2019 xi iierracon m! Drill Rig:#546 Driller:WE 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 illitWet cave-in at 11.5'after drilling Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195025 , BORING LOG NO. 8 3 Page 1 of 2 I PROJECT: Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids CLIENT: City of Waterloo IA Modifications Waterloo, IA SITE: 3505 Easton Avenue Waterloo, IA o LOCATION See a-a:: -. w z d c STRENGTH TEST o O ° WO H >- LuI- O a w co_ o: 2- I U Latitude:42.4726 Longitude:-92.3035° _i¢ LJJ I g d W� > 0cco mod_ H WZ y Z QH >-6 HW O wW O H W W n Q 5O Surface Elev.:839.0(Ft.) o <Cl) Q w u- < ru o H v ¢H U O DEPTH ELEVATION Ft. U I ; ') FILL-SANDY LEAN CLAY,with zones of sand,dark ( i% brown — ♦♦ i •— ♦♦♦ — I ♦ _ --� i $Ii 5— N3811 a_ ♦ ♦ 0 122 ix +♦♦♦9.0 830 w3 • r SANDY LEAN CLAY(CL),trace gravel,gray brown, 18 3-2-3 23 —medium stiff 10 N=5 o • _� 1500(HP) , o C9-6::///) —I/M I lrfa, , 14.0 825 — . ..a/, SAND(SP-SC),with clay,trace gravel,fine to medium /� 11 3-3-6 21 w . t grained,gray, loose 15— N=9 ¢ .f W i e e e ro_°° °• SAND(SP),trace gravel and clay,fine to coarse . . X r.°°e 10 grained,brown,loose — 2-2-3 16 N=5 e e e Ne o•e• — eoe° e o e 0 o e M�.e a . — ' • ° ° 2-2-2 18 ° ee , I ° . . 20— 6 N=4 wee . • e o° 0 0 ° , e 6.e. Z e °•e o .reeve; — 2-2-3 o °. X6 N=5 10 — f°°e°°° 6 2-3-4 �' '°° °°' 25— N=7 16 t X °e°e°°' • • o — � ¢ e°e — X11 17 z ° °°• 3-3-5, N=8 i< CC gee`ee° I o• • ><\ 13 Li. I' .1 30— 22 0€ uj Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic 2_ a= • Advancement Method: See v _ - -ES-for a Notes: F `—`= Hollow stem auger to 14 feet then mud rotary to boring description of field and laboratory procedures o 1 termination. used and additional data(If any). Tic I > See---a- _ -.,., . for explanation of o I Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. Z= Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips I m• upon completion. WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS z 14'observed while sampling rer acon Boring Started:04-19-2019 Boring Completed:04-19-2019 ir p 7 11'observed after drilliing Drill Rig:#546 Driller:WE _ 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 _=(� Cave-in at 12'after drillin Cedar Fats,IA Project No.:13195025 �._ _- - BORIN G LOG NO. 8 Page 2 of 2 PROJECT: Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids CLIENT: City of Waterloo IA Modifications Waterloo, IA i SITE: 3505 Easton Avenue Waterloo, IA 1 = O LOCATION See - r. w cc Lu } STRENGTH TEST o c 1 U Latitude:42.4726°Longitude:-92.3035° o a_ J >O } } tutu p w `. �_ = g 2 JQ W ~a d c>AH wZ ZH > D Surface Elev.:839.0(Ft.) o Q waj m= in a § Z 0 w DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) c..0 SILTY SAND(SM),trace gravel,fine to medium grained, X N=/ ;1.o• \brown,loose(continued) /_ . e . _ • r•°•°•° SAND(SP),trace gravel and clay,fine to coarse ;•;•e•' grained,brown o e e - a e e e _ o e e o e e e e e • • ° 8 4-4-6 1.• • • 35— X N=10 14 — 1.•e•e•e':16.0 803 — �,- r/ LIMESTONE,highly weathered and broken 14 - ri 1, :18.5 800.5 w= Sampler Refusal at 38.5 Feet 0 50/0" g- J w 0 0- 0 Q wi w, Q= w1 a— I N O _. cm M — J i >J 0 4- 0- — 0I gF 01 0= wt "... 0 0- d w3 J Q .... z, 5 E 0- O cc c U-= •—• 0 1-l Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic Q I a- u Advancement Method: See- - for a Notes: `=I Hollow stem auger to 14 feet then mud rotary to boring termination. description of field and laboratory procedures 100%fluid loss at about 36.5 feet = used and additional data(If any). 1—I See S. for explanation of 0'Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. Z Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips cn upon oompletion. o — WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS BoringStarted:04-19-2019 BoringCompleted:04-19-2019 z I 0 14'observed while sampling Ilerracon p 11'observed after drilliing I m Drill Rig:#546 Driller:WE `n 1 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 - Cave-in at 12'after drilling Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195025 BORING LOG NO. 9 Page 1 of I PROJECT: Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids CLIENT: City of Waterloo IA Modifications Waterloo, IA E "" SITE: 3505 Easton Avenue Waterloo, IA t7 LOCATION See -- w Z ww >. STRENGTH TEST . OU Latitude:42.4703°Longitude:-92.3051° _ _1~Q w w H Lu I— O�a a H w _ a w w� a O> LuW 0= I- rrw a Z �z c0 Surface Elev.:841.5(Ft.) o <m Q w u. co cc o O = "" el 0p cn cc DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) 0 FILL-TOPSOIL /r 841, FILL-SAND,with gravel and rubble,fine to coarse — grained,brown — 112 X 12 10- 3-N=25 6 - 4.0 837.5 — _ FILL-SANDY LEAN CLAY,trace gravel,dark brown 13 3-4-6 17 and brown 5X N=10 1 6.5 835 -- i z: . SANDY LEAN CLAY(CL),trace gravel,brown,stiff — 10X 2-3-4 17 a 8.5 833 d L°:°e SAND(SP),trace gravel,fine to coarse grained,brown, — r e°:°a• loose 3-4-5 g °°•°•°, 1 16 N=9 O I" o o — t eo oe e e' : 0-4 4 e • —' X. • . 13 2-2-3 5 i• . e N=5 i_.. e e 3 w e . e°,14.0 827.5 ": wase SAND(SP),trace gravel and clay,fine to coarse 6 1-1-2 7 r • °°° grained,brown,loose 15— 0 N=3 1 LLI 4e ° e — f▪ie °., e s e • •e , e ° 0 .° ° ° —0 2 X13 3-2-3 16 W�.. o LJ N=5 r♦• e e e e o , Q Ur' ?4♦e e♦° , e e e - 11.0.0.0.1 I °.°.°e'24.0 817.5, — • °°° SAND(SP),trace gravel and clay,fine to coarse 18 7-12-7 18 • r°•°°'°:25.5 grained,brown,medium dense 816 25— N=19 �e o a- Boring Terminated at 25.5 Feet w- eel i zI Fe e 2 O= • Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic a- O Advancement Method: See '.14-_ M.,;,,-;';-Y. for a Notes: f Hollow stem auger to 14 feet then mud rotary to boring description of field and laboratory procedures o s termination. J used and additional data(If any). ¢- & > See--J>- - ,- u,,for explanation of O i Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. z` Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips co • upon completion. WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS iierracon Drill Boring Started:04-19-2019 Boring Completed:04-19-2019 [ z 15.5'observed while sampling cc:o Drill Rig:#546er:WE m§ cn i 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 il 3 cave-in at 14'after dulling Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195025 BORING LOG NO. 10 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids CLIENT: City of Waterloo IA Modifications Waterloo, IA — I SITE: 3505 Easton Avenue Waterloo, IA 00 LOCATION See a w u) ww - > STRENGTH TEST o `� V) W , o I i Latitude:42.4703°Longitude:-92.3051° _ Q w a a = a w z Z i D W� J > 0((/) �O H Coz, Z QW }2 I Surface Elev.:840.0(Ft.) 11 5 o QLLI m 2 coc a w Oz o w m can - W 2 I- U DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) O 0 +++♦ FILL-SANDY LEAN CLAY,with gravel and zones of ++++*♦ sand,dark brown ♦s • — 18 2-3-4 10 . li, FILL-SAND,trace gravel,with zones of clay,fine to t+♦♦♦♦s _♦�.* coarse grained, brown _ ♦♦♦ 4-6-6 +i♦i♦i 5_ 12 N=12 9 — •i+i♦ — ♦♦♦6.5 833.5 _ FILL-CLAYEY SAND,trace gravel,fine to coarse �• grained,dark brown X 18 N=13 8 2 ♦i♦♦si , — 0_♦♦♦+♦ , • 2-2-2 g-♦�♦♦♦• 10— 3 N=4 10 w- ♦ 2-1-2 c? ��� 18 N=3 11 ; -'...:-.:Xa s♦ss w s♦�♦ ♦+♦♦•♦♦,4.5 825.5 7 W f CLAYEY SAND(SC) trace gravel,fine to coarse X15 - - 25 grained,brown,veryloose 1 N=2 22 — ¢ i7.0 823 I°••°•°•' SAND(SPSC),trace gravel and clay,fine to coarse o e e . , grained,brown,medium dense -e•e•e, (h=e e e _ z't° ° 9 3-5-6 •°•°•°, 20— N=11 o ea . e e z — 4 o s e e e e e•e e, 0 e e e • e e e e e e°e°� —1 - e e e e•e e fn O Eee eee e : _ e W=e e e � . . • XI- 16 I — °•'25.5 814.5 25-� N=16 Oe s , i a.. Boring Terminated at 25.5 Feet cc a — z of 0, cc z LL- — OI W f-1 Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic Q- a= w3 cn i Advancement Method: - Notes: Hollow stem auger to 14 feet then mud rotary to boring See- = y _ a o= description of field and laboratory procedureures termination. used and additional data(If any). See- for explanation of o i Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. z Boring backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite chips i upon completion. t o 1 WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS BoringStarted:04-19-2019 BoringCompleted:z= 0 14.5'observed while sampling p I p I m 11.5'observed after drilling lierrt con 1 „e-. 0,- Drill Rig:#546 Driller:WE CI)i 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 I ~'JUL Dave-in at 13'after drillin• Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195025 BORING LOG NO. 11 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids CLIENT: City of Waterloo IA Modifications Waterloo, IA SITE: 3505 Easton Avenue Waterloo, IA (7 LOCATION See - _ w co a c > STRENGTH TEST OJ -, >0 �� Ow > �v ~ 0 Latitude:42.4724°Longitude:-92.3041° = w~Q w 1--I Q. d cn H _ z n H _ H (1> _I > ❑c❑n �a 2c7 Z Qw }_ 0_ d w11 d Jw 0cez N ~ Et- w Hw O wI wg �ZO Surface Elev.:841.0(Ft.) ❑ <o Q w u_ coJ g ❑w Cl) O DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) ---• ASPHALTIC CEMENT CONCRETE Rao.a Vxx.•1'o FILL-SAND,with gravel,fine to coarse grained,brown / 840 — ♦♦♦ ♦♦ FILL-SANDY LEAN CLAY,trace gravel,dark brown — 4-6-6 s♦♦♦♦♦,• X 10 N=12 16 ♦ t4♦♦ g ♦i♦i♦i � i _ 14 3-5-7 20 ... 3 ♦♦♦♦♦♦ 5 X N=12 —- ♦+♦ 2-2-2 ._. 16 ♦• i♦i♦i X12,' N=4 j♦�♦ d .♦♦ — g +♦����� ii 6 19 0=♦♦♦♦ 830 11.0 m' Boring Terminated at 11 Feet 0• 1 g- H w.  H H wl 1 H1 LJ3 w H= 0 ¢I u,I N ..� O In I r 1 J 1 J w 0I — I z' 0I 1 J I Cl)'_- 0= w o- I re a_ d w cc I J Q�zg € of 2I OI 0I L` LL I ❑i I-I Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic g ...— a_- � Advancement Method: See -_-� for a Notes: a Hollow stem auger description of field and laboratory procedures 7: used and additional data(If any). >f See - for explanation of 0:Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. z$ Boring backfilled with soil cuttings,bentonite chips,and co I I capped with asphalt upon completion. j o i WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS Boring Started:04-18-2019 Boring Completed:04-18-2019 Z None observed while drilling llerracon�z m= None observed after drilling Drill Rig:#546 Duller:WE cn. 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 =3 Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195025 HF BORING LOG NO. 11 A — Page l of 1 PROJECT: Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids CLIENT: City of Waterloo IA Modifications Waterloo, IA I — I SITE: 3505 Easton Avenue I Waterloo, IA 1 0 LOCATION See O ^ w z a c STRENGTH TEST o O ~ v a  — a Latitude:42.4724°Longitude:-92.3041° _ Q w w H? <, a H a w z" w� > 0w Oa H wZu, Z QI— >"01 Surface Elev.:841.0(Ft.) o Q w m I H E w . z — 0 m Q w U J w gH H 00 �� DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) O 0 CI) �+�•+•- L3 ASPHALTIC CEMENT CONCRETE /.840 5. � �- .0 \FILL-SAND,with gravel,fine to coarse grained, brown 840 — FILL-SANDY LEAN CLAY,trace gravel,dark brown _ •�•��� 5— I •••••• •••�•+ - g •••• �••• 1 0— w,•+•+• 0••• 11.0 830 _ — 2 • FILL-FAT CLAY,with sand,dark gray a ••+i+i — X 2-2-3 26ii c? ••••• 11 j •'' N=5 13.5 827.5 — ce 3 • SAND(SP),trace gravel and clay,fine to medium _- H (I grained,brown,medium dense 5-6-6 w a 12 17 Q r••: .:•15.5 825.5 N=12 w. Boring Terminated at 15.5 Feet- co _ (_ C- N CD i 7,= - J t J. W 0- z- 1 0 06 I — J H i 1 W 1 I Q 1 U) 0- W- - 0- W 0. a- w1 _ I J z- 1 Z 1 o Fe a I o 01 rx — 0 I w. I Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic a Lcinj Advancement Method: See- - = _for a Notes: o I Hollow stem auger description of field and laboratory procedures 7i I used and additional data(If any). i_ See for explanation of o I Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. Z I Boring backfilled with soil cuttings,bentonite chips,and — capped with asphalt upon completion. 0= WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS I Z: Boring Started:04-19-2019 Boring Completed:04-19-2019 1 -f Q 14'observed while drilling con 0 Drill Rig:#546 Driller:WE m I- 14'observed after drilling in 1 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 r Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195025 BORING LOG NO. 12 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids CLIENT: City of Waterloo IA I Modifications Waterloo, IA i "" SITE: 3505 Easton Avenue Waterloo, IA c9 LOCATION See --. " WO a__,z w c 1- o: t''> STRENGTH TEST c,I .� O n i J Lt >- w H O j a s Latitude:42.4729°Longitude:-92.304° _i< in w o-1 co H a }a I _ W z Z I- 0 d Ww a 0 JW O� ~ �Zy Z Z �� Surface Elev.:840.5(Ft.) o <m I o ELcIcJg O 0 O U DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) 0 -,. ASPHALTIC CEMENT CONCRETE /. Rao, ���Z�1'0 FILL-SAND AND GRAVEL,fine to coarse grained, 839.5 _ +i+i++ `brown I '� ++" - X 3-2-3 +*++ FILL-SANDY LEAN CLAY,trace gravel,dark brown 10 N=5 13 i♦_+e 4.0 836.5 _ '. FILL-CLAYEY SAND,fine to medium grained,dark 2-2-1 1 ... brown 5_ X ,17 N=3 15 i +' 6.0 834.5 — s • FILL-SANDY LEAN CLAY,trace gravel,dark brown - +▪ +++++ 1-3-4 17 N=7 25 0-;++*+++ — i c2 +�+�+ 831.5 w m SANDY LEAN CLAY(CL1,trace gravel,gray brown, a ` X18 2-2-2 26 w 10 5 medium stiff 830 10-- N=4 o Boring Terminated at 10.5 Feet ( 1500(HP) I mi i ai Ui I W H• i I u W I-_ Q> Cn- i N O O, Ch J W O in.. Z, 0 Oi F-i Q- M' a .�. O• i wi 0 i i Oi d- w- wi J i Q z 0i of t 2- of cci 0- I-i Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic H. <- ¢i � Advancement Method: See for a Notes: 1--- Hollow stem auger description of field and laboratory procedures °i J Iused and additional data(If any). Q >i See S 2 yr--: --_,,--a:_:-,for explanation of , o Abandonment Method: symbols and abbreviations. z° Boring backfilled with soil cuttings,bentonite chips,and cn capped with asphalt upon completion. O i o WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS _ 0- Boring Started:04-18-2019 Boring Completed:04-18-2019 z None observed while drilling IIirracon p j Drill Rig:#546 Driller:WE I m None observed after drilling Co i 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 _i Cedar Falls,IA Project No.:13195025 t- _ GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION ASTM D422/ASTM C136 U.S.SIEVE OPENING IN INCHES I U.S.SIEVE NUMBERS I HYDROMETER — 6 4 3 2 1.5 1 3/4 1/2, 3 4 6 810 1416 20 30 40 50 80 100 140 200 i 100 1 i 1 I I 1 1 III ! i 9;5 I IIMMI. I i 9 0 • • • • I • • = • •• • •• 8;5 -. - _ •i I 80 • . I 7;5 . - • I 1 70 • • 1 1 • • ; 1 6;5 ' • . ; ...... IT . ; .°2 I • cv 1>- 5!) • i — o 1-1-1 50 ui Z I., 1ii 17- ' — 4'5 — w L1J 1— 0 I. 1 Eel oil cl_ 1 z i 35 o i I (21 — ai a I 30 W i = = — 1_1 <1 20 \i wi a i ...6 wl w i 1;5 i al — 1 wi 10 , 1 . . ; = • . • .1 : •. ;;. '"1 : • — a"; 0) • , 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.001 '61 GRAIN SIZE IN MILLIMETERS D I i ,I - 11.1 I GRAVEL SAND 1 N I 0 I COBBLES — SILT OR CLAY z 1 coarse I fine coarsel—medium fine ' g _ o __ ----f-fs___ ---_- _ ra7iHrirS0--- --1== =- 1-,-E*4111; USCS Classification !WC(%): Li , PL , PI Cc- Cu .— 1 _ = = _ ------- 1 m E Ir;I;IIi •-_- - 5 26.5-28 SILTY SAND,trace gravel,fine to coarse grained, brown(SM) 17 ;.I.I 0 LL 1 .... E_ Boling ID Depth D100 D D30 D10 %Cobbles %Gravel %Sand %Silt %Fines %Clay! 60 <1 1 1: i• 5 26.5-28 9.5 0.242 0.114 0.0 . 8.3 76.1 15.6 i cr 1 1 - LI i Cr)I i I 1 1 im. 0 1 71 i <1 >i i ...... -. <1 Ci)I PROJECT: Wastewater Treatment Plant = 1 PROJECT NUMBER: 13195025 w; 1-1 Biosolids Modifications ! lierrarcin __, >_. ...... 0. ,._. , <, SITE: 3505 Easton Avenue a i 3105 Capital Way,Ste 5 I CLIENT: City of Waterloo IA o i Waterloo, IA i Cedar Fats,IA co c Waterloo, IA 51 I SUPPORTING INFORMATION Contents: General Notes Unified Soil Classification System General Notes — Sedimentary Rock Classification GENERAL NOTES Ilerracon DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications Waterloo,IA G oRe i rt May 20,2019 7 Terracon Project No.13195025 SAMPUNG WATER LEVEL FIELD TESTS Water InitiallyN Standard Penetration Test 0 Resistance)!Blows/Ft.) Encountered 17 Water Level After a (HP) Hand Penetrometer Shelby Specified Period of Time -1 II Tube X Split Spoon Water Level After (T) Torvane 1 a Specified Period of Time Water levels indicated on the soil boring logs are (DCP) Dynamic Cone Penetrometer - 'the levels measured in the borehole at the times indicated. Groundwater level variations will occur UC Unconfined Compressive over time. In low permeability soils, accurate Strength I determination of groundwater levels is not —I possible with short term water level (PID) Photo-Ionization Detector I observations. i (OVA) Organic Vapor Analyzer 1 DESCRIPTIVE SOIL CLASSIFICATION Soil classification is based on the Unified Soil Classification System. Coarse Grained Soils have more than 50% of their — dry weight retained on a#200 sieve; their principal descriptors are: boulders, cobbles, gravel or sand. F ne Grained Soils have less than 50% of their dry weight retained on a#200 sieve; they are principally described as clays if they are plastic, and silts if they are slightly plastic or non-plastic. Major constituents may be added as modifiers and minor constituents may be added according to the relative proportions based on grain size. In addition to gradation, coarse-grained soils are — defined on the basis of their in-place relative density and fine-grained soils on the basis of their consistency. LOCATION AND ELEVATION NOTES Unless otherwise noted, Latitude and Longitude are approximately determined using a hand-held GPS device. The accuracy of such devices is variable. Surface elevation data annotated with +/-indicates that no actual topographical I st,rvey was conducted to confirm the surface elevation. Instead, the surface elevation was approximately determined from it topographic maps of the area. STRENGTH TERMS RELATIVE DENSITY OF COARSE-GRAINED SOILS CONSISTENCY OF FINE-GRAINED SOILS BEDROCK (More than 50%retained on No.200 sieve.) (50%or more passing the No.200 sieve.) Density determined by Standard Penetration Consistency determined by laboratory shear strength testing, Resistance field visual-manual procedures or standard penetration resistance Descriptive Term Standard Penetration or Descriptive Unconfined Compressive standard Standard Descriptive (Density) N-Value Term Strength Penetration Penetration or N-Value I Term or N-Value= Blows/Ft. (Consistency)E Qu,(psf) Blows/Ft Blows/Ft. (Consistency) i Very Loose 0-3 Very Soft less than 500 0-1 ' <20 Weathered Loose 4-9 Soft 500 to 1,000 2-4 20-29 Firm I Medium Dense i 10-29 Medium Stiff j 1,000 to 2,000 4-8 30-49 Medium Hard Dense I 30-50 I Stiff 2,000 to 4,000 8-15 50-79 Hard Very Dense >50 Very Stiff 4,000 to 8,000 15-30 >79 Very Hard Hard >8,000 j >30 RELATIVE PROPORTIONS OF SAND AND GRAVEL RELATIVE PROPORTIONS OF FINES Descriptive Term(s)of Percent of __ Descriptive Term(s)of Percent of other constituents Dry Weight other constituents Dry Weight D Trace <15 Trace <5 With 15-29 With 5-12 1 I Modifier >30 Modifier >12 GRAIN SIZE TERMINOLOGY PLASTICITY DESCRIPTION Major Component of Sample Particle Size " Term Plasticity Index Boulders Cobbles Over 12 in.(300 mm) E Non-plastic 0 12 in.to 3 in.(300mm to 75mm) Low 1-10 Gravel i 3 in.to#4 sieve(75mm to 4.75 mm) Medium 11-30 1 Sand #4 to#200 sieve(4.75mm to 0.075mm High >30 Silt or Clay Passing#200 sieve(0.075mm) Ilerracon _ UNIFIED SOIL CL Skr £ INN SYSTEM -GeoReport 1 CI�=f — �frria for Assigning Group Sym o=artt r Using ry , pup Symbol mama Clean Gravels: Cu>_4 and 1 <_Cc<_3 GW 'Well-graded gravel E — Gravels: Less than 5%fines= Cu<4 and/or[Cc<1 or Cc>3.0]= GP Poorly graded gravel More than 50%of coarse fraction Gravels with Fines: Fines classify as ML or MH GM Silty gravel retained on No.4 sieve - Coarse-Grained Soils: More than 12%fines r Fines classify as CL or CH GC Clayey gravel More than 50%retainedI on No.200 sieve Clean Sands: Cu>_6 and 1 <_Cc<_3 E SW Well graded sand Sands: Less than 5%fines Cu<6 and/or[Cc<1 or Cc>3.0]= SP Poorly graded sand 50%or more of coarse fraction passes No.4 Fines classify as ML or MH SM ;Silty sand r;_ sieve Sands with Fines: More than 12%fines c Fines classify as CL or CH SC Clayey sand' pi. i i PI>7 and plots on or above"A" I CL Lean clay - Inorganic: Silts and Clays: PI<4 or plots below"A"line-' ML Silt Liquid limit less than 50 Liquid limit-oven dried Organic clay K,L,M,N Fine-Grained Soils: Organic: <0.75 OL KL_M,o ,,� 50%or more passes the Liquid limit-not dried Organic silt No.200 sieve PI plots on or above"A"line CH Fat clayK,I., Inorganic:Silts and Clays: PI plots below"A"line MH Elastic Silt= _ Liquid limit 50 or more Liquid limit-oven dried Organic clay- _ ... Organic: 4_. <0.75 OH Liquid limit-not dried Organic silt L, Highly organic soils: Primarily organic matter,dark in color,and organic odor PT Peat A Based on the material passing the 3-inch(75-mm)sieve. -If fines are organic,add"with organic fines"to group name. — e If field sample contained cobbles or boulders, or both,add"with cobbles If soil contains>_15%gravel,add"with gravel"to group name. or boulders,or both"to group name. -If Atterberg limits plot in shaded area,soil is a CL-ML,silty clay. c Gravels with 5 to 12%fines require dual symbols: GW-GM well-graded If soil contains 15 to 29%plus No.200,add"with sand"or"with gravel with silt,GW-GC well-graded gravel with clay,GP-GM poorly — gravel,"whichever is predominant. graded gravel with silt,GP-GC poorly graded gravel with clay. ° If soil contains>_30%plus No.200 predominantly sand, add Lc Sands with 5 to 12%fines require dual symbols: SW-SM well-graded "sandy"to group name. sand with silt,SW-SC well-graded sand with clay,SP-SM poorly graded ° sand with silt,SP-SC poorly graded sand with clay. Elf soil contains>_30%plus No.200, predominantly gravel,add 2 "gravelly"to group name. (D 30) NI PI>_4 and plots on or above"A"line. E Cu=D60/D,o Cc= e PI<4 or plots below"A"line. D10 X D60 -PI plots on or above"A"line. F If soil contains>_15%sand, add"with sand"to group name. °PI plots below"A"line. c If fines classify as CL-ML, use dual symbol GC-GM,or SC-SM. __ 60 ' For classification of fine-grained 1 J soils and fine-grained fraction Jf'� 5t7 —of coarse-grained soils ` �` `� i -`�ti YJ h� V r� Equation of"A"-line at,!,J Vp CL Horizontal at P1=4 to LL=25.5. J 40 `�--- then PI=0.73(LL-20) J 0 Equation of"LI"-line JLii J, ° Z Vertical at LL=16 to P1=7, fJ Co ! ` >- 30 - then P1=0.9(LL-8) J'f T J i_ ( I If I JfJ 0" J J c� JJ MH or OH 101 1 4 -- I—� ML or OL I I I 0 _ - . - ,II 0 10 16 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 93 100 1101 LIQUID LIMIT(LL) L 1lrLacon GeoReport GENERAL NOTES Sedimentary Rock Classification — DESCRIPTIVE ROCK CLASSIFICATION: Sedimentary rocks are composed of cemented clay, silt and sand sized particles. The most common minerals are clay, quartz and calcite. Rock composed primarily of calcite is called limestone; rock of sand size grains is called sandstone, and rock o.:clay and silt size grains is called mudstone or claystone,siltstone,or shale. Modifiers such as shaly, sandy,dolomitic, calcareous, carbonaceous, etc. are used to describe various constituents. Examples: sandy shale; calcareous sandstone. LIMESTONE Light to dark colored, crystalline to fine-grained texture, composed of CaCo3,reacts readily with HCI. — DOLOMITE Light to dark colored, crystalline to fine-grained texture, composed of CaMg(CO3)2, harder than limestone, reacts with HCI when powdered. - CHERT Light to dark colored, very fine-grained texture, composed of micro-crystalline quartz (SiO2), brittle, breaks into angular fragments, will scratch glass. - SHALE Very fine-grained texture, composed of consolidated silt or clay, bedded in thin layers. The unlaminated equivalent is frequently referred to as siltstone, claystone or mudstone. -- SANDSTONE Usually light colored, coarse to fine texture, composed of cemented sand size grains of quartz,feldspar, etc. Cement usually is silica but may be such minerals as calcite, iron-oxide, or some other carbonate. — CONGLOMERATE Rounded rock fragments of variable mineralogy varying in size from near sand to boulder size but usually pebble to cobble size(1/2 inch to 6 inches). Cemented together with various cementing agents. Breccia is similar but composed of angular, fractured rock particles cemented together. DEGREE OF WEATHERING: - SLIGI-T Slight decomposition of parent material on joints. May be color change. MODE RATE Some decomposition and color change throughout. HIGH Rock highly decomposed, may be extremely broken. Classification of rock materials has been estimated from disturbed samples. — Core samples and petrographic analysis may reveal other rock types For more location information please visit www.strand.com Office Locations Brenham, Texas I 979.836.7937 Circinnati, Ohio I 513.861.5600 Columbus, Indiana I 812,372.9911 Columbus. Ohio I 614.835.0460 Indianapolis. Indiana I 317.423.0935 Joliet, Illinois I 815.744.4200 Lexington. Kentucky I 859.225.8500 Louisville. Kentucky I 502.583.7020 Madison, Wisconsin* I 608.251.4843 Milwaukee, Wisconsin I 414.271.0771 Phoenix, Arizona I 602.437.3733 *Corporate Headquarters %No 61•0 ASSOCIATES'